Académique Documents
Professionnel Documents
Culture Documents
THE
R AD I 0
HANDBOOK
Fifteenth Edition
(Distributed to the Book and News Trades and Libraries by the Baker & Taylor Co., Hillside, N. J.)
THE RADIO HANDBOOK
FIFTEENTH EDITION
Copyright, 1959, by
Printed in U.S.A.
Table of Contents
3
Chapter Six. VACUUM TUBE AMPLIFIERS .................................................... 106
6-1 Vacuum Tube Parameters ........................................................ 106
6-2 Classes and Types of Vacuum-Tube Amplifiers ........................ 107
6-3 Biasing Methods .................................................................... 108
6-4 Distortion in Amplifiers .......................................................... 1 09
6-5 Resistance-Capacitance Coupled Audio-Frequency Amplifiers.... 109
6-6 Video-Frequency Amplifiers .................................................... 113
6-7 Other lnterstage Coupling Methods ........................................ 113
6-8 Phase Inverters ...................................................................... 11 5
6-9 D-C Amplifiers ........................................................................ 117
6-1 0 Single-ended Triode Amplifiers .............................................. 118
6-11 Single-ended Pentode Amplifiers ............................................ 120
6-12 Push-Pull Audio Amplifiers ...................................................... 1 21
6-13 Class B Audio Frequency Power Amplifiers ............................ 123
6-14 Cathode-Follower Power Amplifiers ........................................ 127
6-1 5 Feedback Amplifiers ................................................................ 129
6-16 Vacuum-Tube Voltmeters ........................................................ 1 30
4
Chapter Eleven. ELECTRONIC COMPUTERS.................................................. 1 94
11-1 Digital Computers ---------------------------- 195
11-2 Binary Notation --------------------------------------------- 195
11-3 Analog Computers -------------------------------------------- 197
11-4 The Operational Amplifier -------------------------------- 199
11-5 Solving Analog Problems --------------------------- 200
11-6 Non-linear Functions --------------------------------------- 202
11-7 Digital Circuitry ---------------------------- 204
5
Chapter Sixteen. FREQUENCY MODULATION AND REDIOTELETYPE
TRANSMISSION .................................................................. 312
16-1 Frequency Modulation ............................................................ 312
16-2 Direct FM Circuits .................................................................. 315
16-3 Phase Modulation .................................................................. 319
16-4 Reception of FM Signals ........................................................ 321
16-5 Radio Teletype ........................................................................ 326
6
21-6 Propagation of Radio Waves .................................................. 413
21-7 Ground-Wave Communication ................................................ 414
21-8 Ionospheric Propagation ........................................................ 416
21-9 Transmission Lines .................................................................. 420
21-10 Non-Resonant Transmission Lines ............................................ 421
21-11 Tuned or Resonant Lines ........................................................ 424
21-12 Line Discontinuities .................................................................. 425
7
Chapter Twenty-Six. MOBILE EQUIPMENT DESIGN AND INSTALLATION .... 51 5
26-1 Mobile Reception .................................................................... 51 5
26-2 Mobile Transmitters ................................................................ 521
26-3 Antennas for Mobile Work .................................................... 522
26-4 Construction and Installation of Mobile Equipment ................ 524
26-5 Vehicular Noise Suppression .................................................. 527
8
Chapter Thirty-Two. POWER SUPPLlES .................................................... 684
32-1 Power Supply Requirements .................................................. 684
32-2 Rectification Circuits ................, ............................................. 689
32-3 Standard Power Supply Circuits ............................................ 690
32-4 Selenium and Silicon Rectifiers .............................................. 695
32-5 I 00 Watt Mobile Power Supply ............................................ 697
32-6 Transistorized Power Supplies ................................................ 703
32-7 Two Transistorized Mobile Supplies ........................................ 706
32-8 Power Supply Components ...................................................... 707
32-9 Special Power Supplies .......................................................... 709
32-10 Power Supply Design ............................................................ 712
32-11 300 Volt, 50 Ma. Power Supply .............................................. 71 5
32-12 500 Volt, 200 Milliampere Power Supply .............................. 716
32-13 I 500 Volt, 425 Milliampere Power Supply ............................ 717
32-14 A Dual Voltage Transmitter Supply ........................................ 718
32-15 A Kilowatt Power Supply ........................................................ 71 8
9
FOREWORD TO THE FIFTEENTH EDITION
Over two decades ago the historic first edition of the RADIO HANDBOOK was
published as a unique, independent, communications manual written especially for the
adv meed radio amateur and electronic engineer. Since that early issue, great pains have
been taken to keep each succeeding edition of the RADIO HANDBOOK abreast of
the rapidly expanding field of electronics.
So quickly has the electron invaded our everyday affairs that it is now no longer
possible to segregate one particular branch of electronics and define it as radio com-
munications; rather, the transfer of intelligence by electrical means encompasses more
than the vacuum tube, the antenna, and the tuning capacitor.
Included in this new, advanced Fifteenth Edition of the RADIO HANDBOOK are
fresh chapters covering electronic computers, r.f. feedback amplifiers, and high fidelity
techniques, plus greatly expanded chapters dealing with semi-conductors and special
vacuum tube circuits. The other chapters of this Handbook have been thoroughly
revised and brought up to date, touching briefly on those aspects in the industrial
and military electronic fields that are of immediate interest to the electronic engineer
and the radio amateur. The construction chapters have been completely re-edited. All
new equipments described therein are of modern design, free of TVI problems and
various unwanted parasitic oscillations. An attempt has been made not to duplicate
items that have been featured in contemporary magazines. The transceiver makes its
major bow in this edition of the RADIO HANDBOOK, and it is felt that this
complete, inexpensive, compact "radio station" design will become more popular
during the coming years.
The writing and preparation of this Handbook would have been impossible without
the lavish help that was tended the editor by fellow amateurs and sympathetic elec-
tronic organizations. Their friendly assistance and helpful suggestions were freely
given in the true amateur spirit to help make the 15th edition of the RADIO HAND-
BOOK an outstanding success.
The editor and publisher wish to thank these individuals and companies whose
unselfish support made the compilation and publication of this book an interesting
and inspired task. -WILLIAM I. ORR, W6SAI, 3A2AF, Editor
E. P. Alvernaz, W6DMN, Wesley Schum, W9DYV, Raytheon Mfg. Co., Inc.
Jennings Radio Co. Central Electronics, Inc. Sarkes-Tarzian, Inc.
Kenneth Bay, W2GSJ, Aaron Self, W8FYR, Sprague Electric Co.
General Electric Co. Continental Electronics Triad Transformer Co.
& Sound Co.
Orrin H. Brown, W6HB, Bob Adams, W6A VA
Harold Vance, K2FF,
Eitel-McCullough, Inc. Frank Clement, W6KPC
Radio Corporation of
Wm. E. Bruring, W9ZSO, America AI Cline, W6LGU
E. F. Johnson, Inc. J. A. Haimes, Semi-conductor Temple Ehmsen, W7VS
Thomas Consalvi, W3EOZ, Division, Radio Corporation Ted Gillett, W6HX
Barker & Williamson, Inc. of America Bill Glaser, W60KG
Cal Hadlock, WlCTW, Special thanks are due Collins Bill Guimont,W6YMD
National Co., Inc. Radio Co. for permission to Ted Henry, W6UOU
Jo E. Jennings, W6EI, reprint portions of their Herbert Johnson, W7GRA
Jennings Radio Co. Sideband Report CTR-113 James Lee, W6VAT
AI Kahn, W8DUS, by Warren Bruene, WOTTK Earl Lucas, W2JT
Electrovoice, Inc. Bud Radio Co., Inc. Bill Mauzey, W6WWQ
California Chassis Co., Inc. Ken Pierce, W6SLQ
Ken Klippel, WOSQO, Don Stoner, W6TNS
Collins Radio Co. Cardwell Condenser Co., Inc.
Centralab, Inc. Bob Thompson, K6SSJ
Roger Mace, W8MWZ, Comeli-Dubilier Electric Karl Trovinger, \V6KMK
Heath Co. Co., Inc. Bill Vandermay, W7DET
E. R. Mullings, W8VPN, Cowan Publishing Corp. Dick West, W6IUG
Heath Co. International Business Edward Willis, W6TS
Edw. A. Neal, W2JZK, Machines Co., Inc. Joseph J asgur
General Electric Co. Marion Electrical (photography)
Edw. Schmeichel, W9YFV, Instrument Co., Inc. B. A. Ontiveros, W6FFF
Chicago-Standard Miller Coil Co., Inc. (drafting)
Transformer Co. Raypar, Inc. Del Rairigh, W6ZAT
CHAPTER ONE
Introduction to Radio
The field of radio is a division of the much to the teaching of the principles of equipment
larger field of electronics. Radio itself is such design and signal propagation. It is in response
a broad study that it is still further broken to requests from schools and agencies of the
down into a number of smaller fields of which Department of Defense, in addition to persist-
only shortwave or high-frequency radio is cov- ent requests from the amateur radio fraternity,
ered in this book. Specifically the field of com- that coverage of these principles has been ex-
munication on frequencies from 1.8 to 450 meg- panded.
acycles is taken as the subject matter for this
work. 1-1 Amateur Radio
The largest group of persons interested in
the subject of high-frequency communication is
the more than 150,000 radio amateurs located Amateur radio is a fascinating hobby with
in nearly all countries of the world. Strictly many phases. So strong is the fascination of-
speaking, a radio amateur is anyone interested fered by this hobby that many executives, en-
in radio non-commercially, but the term is ordi- gineers, and military and commercial operators
narily applied only to those hobbyists possess- enjoy amateur radio as an avocation even
ing transmitting equipment and a license from though they are also engaged in the radio field
the government. commercially. It captures and holds the inter-
It was for the radio amateur, and particu- est of many people in all walks of life, and in
larly for the serious and more advanced ama- all countries of the world where amateur acti-
vities are permitted by law.
teur, that most of the equipment described in
Amateurs have rendered much public ser-
this book was developed. However, in each
vice through furnishing communications to and
equipment group simple items also are shown
from the outside world in cases where disaster
for the student or beginner. The design prin-
has isolated an area by severing all wire com-
ciples behind the equipment for high-frequency
munications. Amateurs have a proud record of
radio communication are of course the same
heroism and service in such occasion. Many
whether the equipment is to be used for com-
expeditions to remote places have been kept
mercial, military, or amateur purposes, the
in touch with home by communication with ama-
principal differences 1yin g in construction
teur stations on the high frequencies. The ama-
practices, and in the tolerances and safety
teur's fine record of performance w i t h the
factors placed upon components.
"wireless" equipment of World War I has been
With the increasing complexity of high-fte-
surpassed by his outstanding service in World
quency communication, resulting primarily from
War II.
increased utilization of the available spec-
trum, it becomes necessary to delve more deep- By the time peace came in the Pacific in
ly into the basic principles underlying radio the summer of 1945, many thousand amateur
communication, both from the standpoint of operators were serving in the allied armed
equipment design and operation and from the forces. They had supplied the army, navy,
standpoint of signal propagation. Hence, it will marines, coast guard, merchant marine, civil
be found that this edition of the RADIO HAND- service, war plants, and civilian defense or-
BOOK has been devoted in greater proportion ganizations with trained personnel for radio,
11
12 Introduction to Radio THE R AD I 0
radar, wire, and visual communications and of several specified reasons are unable to ap-
for teaching. Even now, at the time of this pear for examination.
writing, amateurs are being called back into (d) Technician Class. This is a new class
the expanded defense forces, are returning to of license which is available to any citizen of
defense plants where their skills are critically the United States. The examination is the same
needed, and are being organized into communi as that for the General Class license, except
cation units as an adjunct to civil defense that the code test is at a speed of 5 words per
groups. minute. The holder of a Technician class li-
cense is accorded all authorized amateur privi-
1-2 Station and Operator Licenses leges in the amateur frequency bands above
220 megacycles. and in the 50-Mc. band.
(e) Novice Ctass. This is a new class of
Every radio transmitting station in the license which is available to any U. S. citizen
United States no matter how low its power who has not previously held an amateur li-
must have a license from the federal govern cense of any class issued by any agency of
ment before being operated; some classes of the U. S. government, military or civilian. The
stations must have a permit from the govern- examination consists of a code test at a speed
ment even before being constructed. And every of 5 words per minute, plus an examination on
operator of a transmitting station must have the rules and regulations essential to begin-
an operator's license before operating a trans ner's operation, inCluding sufficient elemen
mitter. There are no exceptions. Similar laws tary radio theory for the understanding of those
apply in practically every major country. rules. The Novice Class of license affords
severely restricted privileges, is valid for only
"Classes of Amateur There are at present six a period of one year (as contrasted to all other
Operator Licenses classes of amateur oper classes of amateur licenses which run for a
ator licenses which have term of five years), and is not renewable.
been authorized by the Federal Communica All Novice and Technician class examina-
tions Commission. These c 1 asses differ in tions are given by volunteer examiners, as reg-
many respects, so each will be discussed ular examinations for these two classes are
briefly. not given in FCC offices. Amateur radio clubs
(a) Amateur Extra Class. This class of li- in the larger cities have established examin
cense is available to any U. S. citizen who at ing committees to assist would-be amateurs
any time has held for a period of two years or of the area in obtaining their Novice and Tech-
more a valid amateur license, issued by the nician licenses.
FCC, excluding licenses of the Novice and
Technician Classes. The examination for the
license includes a code test at 20 words per 1-3 The Amateur Bands
minute, the usual tests covering basic amateur
practice and general amateur regulations, and Certain small segments of the radio frequen
an additional test on advanced amateur prac- cy spectrum between 1500 kc. and 10,000 Me.
tice. All amateur privileges are accorded the are reserved for operation of amateur radio
holders of this operator's license. stations. These segments are in general agree
(b) General Class. This class of amateur ment throughout the world, although certain
license is equivalent to the old Amateur Class parts of different amateur bands may be used
B license, and accords to the holders all ama for other purposes in various geographic re
teur privileges except those which may be set gions. In particular, the 40-meter amateur band
aside for holders of the Amateur Extra Class is used legally (and illegally) for short wave
license. This class of amateur operator's li- broadcasting by many countries in Europe,
cense is available to any U. S. citizen. The Africa and Asia. Parts of the SO-meter band
examination for the license includes a code are used for short distance marine work in Eu-
test at 13 words per minute, and the usual ex rope, and for broadcasting in South America.
aminations covering basic amateur practice The amateur bands available to American ra
and general amateur regulations. dio amateurs are!
(c) Conditional Class. This class of ama
teur license and the privileges accorded by it 160 Meters The 160-meter band is di-
are equivalent to the General Class license. (1800 Kc.-2000 Kc.) vided in to 25-kilocycle
However, the license can be issued only to segments on a regional
those whose residence is more than 125 miles basis, with day and night power limitations,
airline from the nearest location at which FCC and is available for amateur use provided no
examinations are held at intervals of not more interference is caused to the Loran (Long
than three months for the General Class ama Range Navigation) stations operating in this
teur operator license, or to those who for any band. This band is least affected by the 11-
HANDBOOK Amateur Bands 13
year solar sunspot cycle. The Maximum Us- mitters. In Europe and Asia the band is in a
able Frequency (MUF) even during the years chaotic state, and amateur operation in this re-
of decreased sunspot activity does not usually gion is severely hampered.
drop below 4 Me., therefore this band is not
subject to the violent fluctuations found on
20 Meters At the present time,
the higher frequency bands. DX contacts on
(14,000 Kc.-14,350 Kc.) the 20-meter band is
on this band are limited by the ionospheric
by far the most popular
absorption of radio signals, which is quite
high. During winter nighttime hours the ab- band for long distance contacts. High enough
sorption is often of a low enough value to per- in frequency to be almost obliterated at the
mit trans-oceanic contacts on this band. On bottom of the solar cycle, the band neverthe-
rare occasions, contacts up to 10,000 miles less provides good DX contacts during years
have been made. As a usual rule, however, of minimal sunspot activity. At the present
160-meter amateur operation is confined to time, the band is open to almost all parts of
ground-wave contacts or single-skip contacts the world at some time during the year. Dur-
of 1000 miles or less. Popular before World ing the summer months, the band is active un-
War II, the 160-meter band is now only sparse- til the late evening hours, but during the win-
ly occupied since many areas of the country ter months the band is only good for a few
are blanketed by the megawatt pulses of the hours during day light. Extreme DX contacts
Loran chains.
are usually erratic, but the 20-meter band is
80 Meters The SO-meter band is the the only band available for DX operation the
(3500 Kc.-4000 Kc.) most popular amateur year around during the bottom of the DX cycle.
band in the continental As the sunspot count increases and the MUF
United States for I o c a! "rag-chewing" and rises, the 20-meter band will become open for
traffic nets. During the years of minimum sun- longer hours during the winter. The maximum
spot activity the ionospheric absorption on skip distance increases, and DX contacts are
this band may be quite low, and long distance possible over paths other than the Great Circle
DX contacts are possible during the winter route. Signals can be heard the "long paths,"
night hours. Daytime operation, in general, is 180 degrees opposite to the Great Circle path.
limited to contacts of 500 miles or less. Dur- During daylight hours, absorption may become
ing the summer months, local static and high apparent on the 20-meter band, and all signals
ionospheric absorption limit long distance con- except very short skip may disappear. On the
tacts on this band. As the sunspot cycle ad- other hand, the band will be open for world-
vances and the MUF rises, increased iono- wide DX contacts all night long. The 20-meter
spheric absorption will tend to degrade the band is very susceptible to "fade-outs"
long distance possibilities of this band. At caused by solar disturbances, and all except
the peak of the sunspot cycle, the SO-meter
local signals may completely disappear for
band becomes useful only for short-haul com-
munication. periods of a few hours to a day or so.
since the older model TV receivers have a bands are sparsely occupied in the rural sec-
21 Me. i-f channel, which falls directly in the tions of the United States, but are quite heavi-
15-meter band. The interference problems ly congested in the urban areas of high popu-
brought about by such an unwise choice of lation.
intermediate frequency often restrict operation In recent years it has been found that v-h-f
on this band by amateur stations unfortunate signals are propagated by other means than by
enough to be situated near such an obsolete line-of-sight transmission. "Scatter signals,"
receiver. Aurora reflection, and air-mass boundary bend-
ing are responsible for v-h-f communication up
10- Meters During the peak of the to 1200 miles or so. Weather conditions will
(28,000 Kc .. 29,700 Kc.)sunspot cycle, the 10- often affect long distance communication on
meter band is without the 2-meter band, and all the v-h-f bands are
doubt the most popular particularly sensitive to this condition.
amateur band. The combination of long skip The other v-h-f bands have had insufficient
and low ionospheric absorption make reliable occupancy to provide a clear picture of their
DX contacts with low powered equipment pos- characteristics. In general, they behave much
sible. The great width of the band (1700 kc.) as does the 2-meter band, with the weather
provides room for a large number of amateurs. effects becoming more pronounced on the high-
The long skip (1500 miles or so) prevents near- er frequency bands.
by amateurs from hearing each other, thus
dropping the interference level. During the win 1-4 Starting Your Study
ter months, sporadic-E (short skip) signals
up to 1200 miles or so will be heard. The 10-
meter band is poorest in the summer months, When you start to prepare yourself for the
even during a sunspot maximum. Extremely amateur examination you will find that the cir-
long daylight skip is common on this band, and cuit diagrams, tube characteristic curves, and
and in years of high MUF the 10-meter band formulas appear confusing and difficult of un-
will support intercontinental DX contacts dur- derstanding. But after a few study sessions
ing daylight hours. one becomes sufficiently familiar with the
The second harmonic of stations operating notation of the diagrams and the basic con-
in the 10-meter band falls directly into tele- cepts of theory and operation so that the ac-
vision channel 2, and the higher harmonics of quisition of further knowledge becomes easier
10-meter transmitters fall into the higher TV and even fascinating.
channels. This harmonic problem seriously As it takes a considerable time to become
curtailed amateur 10-meter operation during proficient in sending and receiving code, it is
the late 40's. However, with the new circuit a good idea to intersperse technical study ses-
techniques and TVI precautionary measures sions with periods of code practice. Many
stressed in this Handbook, 10-meter operation short code practice sessions benefit one more
should cause little or no interference to near- than a small number of longer sessions. Alter-
by television receivers of modern design. nating between one study and the other keeps
the student from getting "stale" since each
Six Meters At the peak of the sunspot type of study serves as a sort of respite from
(SO Mc . S4 Me.) cycle, the MUF occasional- the other.
ly rises high enough to per- When you have practiced the code long
mit DX contacts up to 10,000 miles or so on enough you will be able to follow the gist of
6 meters. Activity on this band during such a the slower sending stations. Many stations
period is often quite high. Interest in this band send very slowly when working other stations
wanes during a period of lesser solar activity, at great distances. Stations repeat their calls
as contacts, as a rule, are restricted to short- many times when calling other stations before
skip work. The proximity of the 6-meter band contact is established, and one need not have
to television channel 2 often causes interfer- achieved much code proficiency to make out
ence problems to amateurs located in areas their calls and thus determine their location.
where channel 2 is active. As the sunspot cy-
cle increases, activity on the 6-meter band will The Code The applicant for any class of ama-
increase. teur operator license must be able
to send and r e c e i v e the Continental Code
The YH-F Bands The v-h-f bands are (sometimes called the International Morse
(Two Meters and "Up") the least affected by Code). The speed required for the sending and
the vagaries of the receiving test may be either 5, 13, or 20 words
sunspot cycle and the Heaviside layer. Their per minute, depending upon the class of li-
predominant use is for reliable communication cense, assuming an average of five characters
over distances of 150 miles or less. These to the word in each case. The sending and re-
HANDBOOK Learning the Code 15
A
-- N
-
--- ----
---
.......
-- --
8 0 2
c
---
p 3
D
E -
Q
R
-
4
5 -
......
F
-
-- --
s 6
--
G
H
T
u
-
7
8
---
----
-----
I
J
---
--
.....
v
w
--
--
9
I2J
K X
---
0 MEANS ZERO, AND IS WRITTEN IN THIS
--
WAY TO DISTINGUISH IT FROM THE LETTER '0".
y
--
L IT OFTEN IS TRANSMITTED INSTEAD AS ONE
PERIOD(,)
COMMA(,) ---
----
WAIT SIGN (AS)
DOUBLE DASH (BREAK) -
--
INTERROGATION (7l
--
--
ERROR (ERASE SIGN)
--
--- --
QUOTATION MARK (") FRACTION BAR(/)
---
COLON (: J
--
END OF MESSAGE (AR)
---- ---
SEMICOLON (;) END OF TRANSMISSION (SK)
PARENTHESIS ( > INTERNAT. DISTRESS SIG. (SOS)
Figure 1
The Contin&ntol (or International Morse) Cocle is usee/ for substontiollr. all non-automatic roclio
communication. DO NOT memorize from the printecl page; cocle is a onguoge of SOUND, one/
must not be leornecl visually; learn by listening as exploinecl In the text.
cetvtng tests run for five minutes, and one Since code reading requires that individual
minute of errorless transmission or reception letters be recognized instantly, any memoriz
must be accomplished within the five-minute ing scheme which depends upon orderly se
interval. quence, such as learning all "dab" letters
If the code test is failed, the applicant must
and all "dit" letters in separate groups, is to
wait at least one month before he may again
be discouraged. Before beginning with a code
appear for another test. Approximately 30% of
practice set it is necessary to memorize the
amateur applicants fail to pass the test. It
whole alphabet perfectly. A good plan is to
should be expected that nervousness and ex study only two or three letters a day and to
citement will at least to some degree tempo drill with those letters until they become part
racily lower the applicant's code ability. The of your consciousness. Mentally translate each
best prevention against this is to master the day's letters into their sound equivalent
code at a little greater than the required speed wherever they are seen, on signs, in papers,
under ordinary conditions. Then if you slow indoors and outdoors. Tackle two additional
down a little due to nervousness during a test letters in the code chart each day, at the same
the result will not prove fatal. time reviewing the characters already learned.
Avoid memorizing by routine. Be able to
Memorizing There is no shortcut to code pro sound out any letter immediately without so
the Code ficiency. To memorize the al much as hesitating to think about the letters
phabet entails but a few eve preceding or following the one in question.
nings of diligent application, but considerable Know C, for example, apart from the sequence
time is required to build up speed. The exact ABC. Skip about among all the characters
time required depends upon the individual's learned, and before very long sufficient letters
ability and the regularity of practice. will have been acquired to enable you to spell
While the speed of learning will naturally out simple words to yourself in "dit dabs."
vary greatly with different individuals, about This is interesting exercise, and for tl:mt rea
70 hours of practice (no practice period to be son it is good to memorize all the vowels first
over 30 minutes) will usually suffice to bring and the most conunon consonants next.
a speed of about 13 w.p.m.; 16 w.p.m. requires Actual code practice should start only when
about 120 hours; 20 w.p.m., 175 hours. the entire alphabet, the numerals, period, com
16 Introduction to Radio THE R AD I 0
a
3inra --
---
----
tion, do it in code. It makes more interesting
practice than confining yourself to random
practice material.
ch
e ..----
- When two co-learners have memorized the
code and are ready to start sending to each
other for practice, it is a good idea to enlist
---
the aid of an experienced operator for the first
f1 practice session or two so that they will get
--
0 an idea of how properly formed characters
sound.
ii During the first practice period the speed
should be such that substantially solid copy
Figure 2 can be made without strain. Never mind if this
These code characters are used in languages is only two or three words per minute. In the
other than English. They may occasionally next period the speed should be increased
be encountered so it is well to know them. slightly to a point where n e a r 1 y all of the
characters can be caught only through con-
scious effort. When the student becomes pro-
rna, and question mark have been memorized ficient at this new speed, another slight in-
so thoroughly that any one can be sounded crease may be made, progressing in this man-
without the slightest hesitation. Do not bother ner until a speed of about 16 words per minute
with other punctuation or miscellaneous sig- is attained if the object is to pass the amateur
nals until later. 13-word per minute code test. The margin of
3 w.p.m. is recommended to overcome a possi-
Sound- Each letter and figure must be ble excitement factor at examination time.
Not Sight memorized by its so u n d rather Then when you take the test you don't have to
than its appearance. Code is a worry about the "jitters" or an "off day."
system of sound communication, the same as Speed should not be inc r e a s e d to a new
is the spoken word. The letter A, for example, level until the student finally makes solid
is one short and one long sound in combina- copy with ease for at 1 east a five-minute
tion sounding like dit dab, and it must be re- period at the old level. How frequently in-
membered as such, and not as "dot dash." creases of speed can be made depends upon
individual ability and the amount of practice.
Each increase is apt to prove disconcerting,
Practice Time, patience, and regularity are but remember "you are never learning when
required to learn the code properly. you are comfortable."
Do not expect to accomplish it within a few A number of amateurs are sending code
days. practice on the air on schedule once or twice
Don't practice too long at one stretch; it each week; excellent practice can be obtained
does more harm than good. Thirty minutes at after you have bought or constructed your re-
a time should be the limit. ceiver by taking advantage of these sessions.
Lack of regularity in practice is the most If you live in a medium-size or large city,
common cause of lack of progress. Irregular the chances are that there is an amateur radio
practice is very little better than no practice club in your vicinity which offers free code
at all. Write down what you have heard; then practice lessons periodically.
forget it; do not look back. If your mind dwells
even for an instant on a signal about which
you have doubt, you will miss the next few Skill When you listen to someone speaking
characters while your attention is diverted. you do not consciously think how his
While various automatic code machines, words are spelled. This is also true when you
phonograph records, etc., will give you prac- read. In code you must train your ears to read
tice, by far the best practice is to obtain a code just as your eyes were trained in school
study companion who is also interested in to read printed matter. With enough practice
learning the code. '-"ben you have both memo- you acquire skill, and from skill, speed. In
rized the alphabet you can start sending to other words, it becomes a habit, something
each other. Practice with a key and oscillator which can be done without conscious effort.
or key and buzzer generally proves superior Conscious effort is fatal to speed; we can't
to all automatic equipment. Two such sets think rapidly enough; a speed of 25 words a
operated between two rooms are fine-or be- minute, which is a common one in commercial
tween your house and his will be just that operations, means 125 characters per minute
much better. Avoid talking to your partner or more than two per second, which leaves
while practicing. If you must ask him a ques- no time for conscious thinking.
HANDBOOK Learning the Code 17
--~-~
of Characters code practice set to your
.
partner, concentrate on the ~ ~ ~ ~
quality of your sending, not on your speed. B c
Your partner will appreciate it and he could
i
~~ ~
not copy you if you speeded up anyhow. ! i :: :
Figure 5
THE SIMPLEST CODE PRACTICE
SET CONSISTS OF A KEY AND A ,...-- ---,
BUZZER
Keep at it u n t i I you always get them right punctuate copy as he goes along. It is not rec-
without having to stop even an instant to think ommended that the beginner attempt to do this
about it. until he can send and receive accurately and
If you do not instantly recognize the sound with ease at a speed of at least 12 words a
of any character, you have not learned it; go minute.
back and practice your alphabet further. You It requires a considerable amount of train-
should never have to omit writing down every ing to dissociate the action of the subcon-
signal you hear except when .the transmission scious mind from the direction of the conscious
is too fast for you. mind. It may help some in obtaining this train-
Write down what you hear, not what you ing to write down two columns of short words.
think it should be. It is surprising how often Spell the first word in the first column out loud
the word which you guess will be wrong. while writing down the first word in the second
column. At first this will be a bit awkward,
Copying Behind All good operators copy sev- but you will rapidly gain facility with practice.
eral words behind, that is, Do the same with all the words, and then re-
while one word is being received, they are verse columns.
writing down or typing, say, the fourth or fifth Next try speaking aloud the words in the one
previous word. At first this is very difficult, column while writing those in the other column;
but after sufficient practice it will be found then reverse columns.
actually to be easier than copying close up. After the foregoing can be done easily, try
It also results in more accurate copy and en- sending with your key the words in one col-
ables the receiving operator to capitalize and umn while spelling those in the other. It won't
be easy at first, but it is well worth keeping
after if you intend to develop any real code
proficiency. Do not attempt to catch up. There
CK-722 1 =COLLECTOR is a natural tendency to close up the gap, and
2= BASE
3= EMITTER you must train yourself to overcome this.
Next have your code companion send you a
word either from a list or from straight text;
do not write it down yet. Now have him send
the next word; after receiving this second
2000 n.
PHONES word, write down the first word. After receiv-
10 K ing the third word, write the second word; and
0.5W
so on. Never mind how slowly you must go,
even if it is only two or three words per minute.
1, 51/. Stay behind.
It will probably take quite a number of prac-
Figure 6 tice sessions before you can do this with any
facility. After it is relatively easy, then try
SIMPLE TRANSISTOR CODE
staying two words behind; keep this up until
PRACTICE OSCILLATOR
it is easy. Then try three words, four words,
An inexpensive Raytheon CK-722 transistor and five words. The more you practice keep-
requires only a single 1Vz-volt flashlight ing received material in mind, the easier it
battery for power. The inductance of the ear-
phone windings forms part of the oscillatory will be to stay behind. It will be found easier
circuit. The pitch of the note moy be changed at first to copy material with which one is
by varying the value of the two capacitors fairly familiar, then gradually switch to less
connected across the earphones. familiar material.
20 Introduction to Radio
Automatic Code The two practice sets which the help of a partner by sending "dit-dah"
Machines are deso;ribed in this chapter messages to each other while riding to work,
are of most value when you eating lunch, etc. It is better, however, to use
have someone with whom to practice. Automa a buzzer or code practice oscillator in con
tic code machines are not recommended to any junction with a regular telegraph key.
one who can possibly obtain a companion with As a good key may be considered an invest
whom to practice, someone who is also inter- ment it is wise to make a well-made key your
ested in learning the code. If you are unable first purchase. Regardless of what type code
to enlist a code partner and have to practice practice set you use, you will need a key, and
by yourself, the best way to get receiving later on you will need one to key your trans-
practice is by the use of a tape machine (auto mitter. If you get a good key to begin with,
matic code sending machine) with several you won't have to buy another one later.
practice tapes. Or you can use a set of phono- The key should be rugged and have fairly
graph code practice records. The records are heavy contacts. Not only will the key stand
of use only if you have a phonograph whose up better, but such a key will contribute to
turntable speed is readily adjustable. The tape the "heavy" type of sending so desirable for
machine can be rented by the month for a rea radio work. Morse (telegraph) operators use
sonable fee. a "light" style of sencling and can send some
Once you can copy about 10 w.p.m. you can what faster when using this light touch. But,
also get receiving practice by listening to slow in radio work static and interference are often
sending stations on your receiver. Many ama- present, and a slightly heavier dot is desir-
teur stations send slowly particular! y when able. If you use a husky key, you will lind
working far distant stations. When receiving yourself automatically sending in this manner.
conditions are particularly poor many commer To generate a tone simulating a code signal
cial stations also send slowly, sometimes re as heard on a receiver, either a mechanical
peating every word. Until you can copy around buzzer or an audio oscillator may be used. Fig-
10 w.p.m. your receiver isn't much use, and ure 5 shows a simple code-practice set using
either another operator or a machine or records a buzzer which may be used directly simply
are necessary for getting receiving practice by mounting the buzzer on a sounding board,
after you have once memorized the code. or the buzzer may be used to feed from one to
four pairs of conventional high-impedance
Code Practice If you don't feel too foolish phones.
Sets doing it, you can secure a An example of the audio-oscillator type of
measure of code practice with code-practice set is illustrated in figures 6
and 7. An inexpensive Raytheon CK-722 trans
istor is used in place of the more expensive,
power consuming vacuum tube. A single "pen-
lite" 1?5-volt cell powers the unit. The coils
of the earphones form the ind uc ti ve portion
of the resonant circuit. 'Phones having an
impedance of 2000 ohms or higher should be
used. Surplus type R-14 earphones also work
well with this circuit.
Figure 7
The circuit of Figure 6 is used in this
miniature transistorized code Practice
oscillator. Components are mounted in a
small plastic case. The transistor is
attached to a three terminal phenolic
mounting strip. Sub-miniature jacks are
used for the key and phones connections.
A hearing aid earphone may also be used,
as shown. The phone is stored in the
plastic case when not in use.
CHAPTER TWO
All naturally occurring matter (excluding so different particles, but this further sub-
artifically produced radioactive substances) is division can be left to quantum mechanics and
made up of 92 fundamental constituents called atomic physics. As far as the study of elec
elements. These elements can exist either in tronics is concerned it is only necessary for
the free state such as iron, oxygen, carbon, the reader to think of the normal atom as being
copper, tungsten, and aluminum, or in chemi- composed of a nucleus having a net positive
cal unions commonly called compounds. The charge that is exactly neutralized by the one
smallest unit which still retains all the origi- or more orbital elecw>ns surrounding it.
nal characteristics of an element is the atom. The atoms of different elements differ in
Combinations of atoms, or subdivisions of respect to the charge on the positive nucleus
compounds, result in another fundamental and in the number of electrons revolving
unit, the molecule. The molecule is the small- around this charge. They range all the way
est unit of any compound. All reactive ele- from hydrogen, having a net charge of one
ments when in the gaseous state also exist on the nucleus and one orbital electron, to
in the molecular form, made up of two or more uranium with a net charge of 92 on the nucleus
atoms. The nonreactive gaseous elements and 92 orbital electrons. The number of orbital
helium, neon, argon, krypton, xenon, and electrons is called the atomic number of the
radon are the only gaseous elements that ever element.
exist in a stable monatomic state at ordinary
temperatures. Action of the From the above it must not be
Electrons thought that the electrons re-
2-1 The Atom volve in a haphazard manner
around the nucleus. Rather, the electrons in
An atom is an extremely small unit of an element having a large atomic number are
matter- there are literally billions of them grouped into rings having a definite number of
making up so small a piece of material as a electrons. The only atoms in which these rings
speck of dust. To understand the basic theory are completely filled are those of the inert
of electricity and hence of radio, we must go gases mentioned before; all other elements
further and divide the atom into its main have one or more uncompleted rings of elec-
components, a positively charged nucleus and trons. If the uncompleted ring is nearly empty,
a cloud of negatively charged particles that; the element is metallic in character, being
surround the nucleus. These particles, swirling most metallic when there is only one electron
around the nucleus in elliptical orbits at an in the outer ring. If the incomplete ring lacks
incredible rate of speed, are called orbital only one or two electrons, the element is
electrons. usually non-metallic. Elements with a ring
about half completed will exhibit both non-
It is upon the behavior of these electrons metallic and metallic characteristics; carbon,
when freed from the atom, that depends the silicon, germanium, and arsenic are examples.
study of electricity and radio, as well as Such elements are called semi-conductors.
allied sciences. Actually it is possible to sub- In metallic elements these outer ring elec
divide the nucleus of the atom into a dozen or trans are rather loosely held. Consequently,
21
22 Direct Current Circuits THE R AD I 0
there is a conunuous helter-skelter movement charge, but one more negative than the other,
of these electrons and a continual shifting the one with the lesser negative charge will
from one atom to another. The electrons which act as though it were positively charged with
move about in a substance are called free respect to the other body. It is the algebraic
electrons, and it is the ability of these elec- potential difference that determines the force
trons to drift from atom to atom which makes with which electrons are attracted or repulsed,
possible the electric current. the potential of the earth being taken as the
zero reference point.
Conductors and If the free electrons are nu-
lnsulotors merous and loosely held, the
element is a good conductor. The Electric The flow of electrons along a
On the other hand, if there are few free elec- Current conductor due to the application
trons, as is the case when the electrons in an of an electromotive force con-
outer ring are tightly held, the element is a stitutes an electric current. This drift is in
poor conductor. If there are virtually no free addition to the irregular movements of the
electrons, the element is a good insulator. electrons. However, it must not be thought
that each free electron travels from one end
of the circuit to the other. On the contrary,
2-2 Fundamental Electrical each free electron travels only a short distance
Units and Relationships before colliding with an atom; this collision
generally knocking off one or more electrons
from the atom, which in turn move a short
Electromotive Force: The free electrons in distance and collide with other atoms, knock-
Potential Difference a conductor move con ing off other electrons. Thus, in the general
stantly about and change drift of electrons along a wire carrying an
their position in a haphazard manner. To electric current, each electron travels only a
produce a drift of electrons or electric current short distance and the excess of electrons at
along a wire it is necessary that there be a one end and the deficiency at the other are
difference in "pressure" or potential between balanced by the source of the e.m.f. When this
the two ends of the wire. This potential dif- source is removed the state of normalcy re-
ference can be produced by connecting a turns; there is still the rapid interchange of
source of electrical potential to the ends of free electrons between atoms, but there is no
the wire. general trend or "net movement" in either
As will be explained later, there is an ex- one direction or the other.
cess of electrons at the negative terminal of
a battery and a deficiency of electrons at the Ampere and There are two units of measure-
positive terminal, due to chemical action. Coulomb ment associated with current,
When the battery is connected to the wire, the and they are often confused.
deficient atoms at the positive terminal attract The rate of flow of electriciry is stated in
free electrons from the wire in order for the amperes. The unit of quantity is the coulomb.
positive terminal to become neutral. The A coulomb is equal to 6.28 x 10 18 electrons,
attracting of electrons continues through the and when this quantity of electrons flows by
wire, and finally the excess electrons at a given point in every second, a current of
the negative terminal of the battery are at- one ampere is said to be flowing. An ampere
tracted by the positively charged atoms at the is equal to one coulomb per second; a coulomb
end of the wire. Other sources of electrical is, conversely, equal to one ampere-second.
potential (in addition to a battery) are: an Thus we see that coulomb indicates amount,
electrical generator (dynamo), a thermocouple, and ampere indicates rate of flow of electric
an electrostatic generator (static machine), a current.
photoelectric cell, and a crystal or piezo- Older textbooks speak of current flow as
electric generator. being from the positive terminal of the e.m.f.
Thus it is seen that a potential difference source through the conductor to the negative
is the result of a difference in the number of terminal. Nevertheless, it has long been an
electrons between the two (or more) points in established fact that the current flow in a
question. The force or pressure due to a metallic conductor is the electronic flow from
potential difference is termed the electro- the negative terminal of the source of voltage
motive force, usually abbreviated e.m.f. or through the conductor to the positive terminal.
E. M. F. It is expressed in units called volts. The only exceptions to the electronic direction
It should be noted that for there to be a of flow occur in gaseous and electrolytic con-
potential difference between two bodies or ductors where the flow of positive ions toward
points it is not necessary that one have a the cathode or negative electrode constitutes
positive charge and the other a negative a positive flow in the opposite direction to the
charge. If two bodies each have a negative electronic flow. (An ion is an atom, molecule,
HANDBOOK Resistance 23
-
figure 2
TYPICAL RESISTORS
Shown above are various types of resistors used In electronic circuits. The larger units are
power resistors. On the left is a variable power resistor. Three preclsiontype resistors are
shown in the center with two small composition resistors beneath them. At the right Is a
composition-type potentiometer, used for audio clrculfty.
The international standard for the ohm is amount of current may be drawn from it with-
the resistance offered by a uniform column of out disturbing its characteristics.
mercury at 0 C., 14.4521 grams in mass, of
constant cross-sectional area and 106.300 Ohm's Law The relationship between the
centimeters in length. The expression megohm electromotive force (voltage),
(1,000,000 ohms) is also sometimes used the flow of current (amperes), and the resist-
when speaking of very large values of resist- ance which impedes the flow of current (ohms),
ance. is very clearly expressed in a simple but
A volt is the e.m.f. that will produce a cur- highly valuable law known as Ohm's law.
rent of one ampere through a resistance of This law states that the current in amperes is
one ohm. The standard of electromotive force equal to the voltage in volts divided by the
is the Weston cell which at 20 C. has a resistance in ohms. Expressed as an equation:
potential of 1.0183 volts across its terminals.
This cell is used only for reference purposes E
I=-
in a bridge circuit, since only an infinitesimal R
Figure 4 FigureS
SIMPLE PARALLEL SERIES-PARALLEL
CIRCUIT CIRCUIT
The two resistors Rt and R 2 are sa/rJ to be in In this type ol circuit the resistors are ar-
parallel since the flow of current is offered ranged In series groups, one/ these ser/esed
two parallel paths. An electron leaving point groups are then placed In paro//e/.
A will pass either through Rt or R2, but not
through both, to reach the positive terminal
of the battery. II a Iorge number of electrons
are the greater number will pass
cons/clerecl,
in the source. The voltage measured with no
through whichever of the two resistors has current flowing is termed the no load voltage;
the /ower res/stance. that measured with current flowing is the load
voltage. It is apparent that a voltage source
having a low internal resistance is most de-
where I is the current in amperes, sirable.
R is the resistance in ohms,
E is the electromotive force in volts. Res I stancesThe current flowing in a series
in Series circuit is equal to the voltage
impressed divided by the total
Appl icotion of All electrical circuits fall in- resistance across which the voltage is im-
Ohm's Low to one of three classes: series pressed. Since the same current flows through
circuits, parallel circuits, and every part of the circuit, it is merely nec-
series-parallel circuits. A series circuit is essary to add all the individual resistances to
one in which the current flows in a single obtain the total resistance. Expressed as a
continuous path and is of the same value at formula:
every point in the circuit (figure 3). In a par-
allel circuit there are two or more current Rtotal = R, + R + R, + + RN
paths between two points in the circuit, as
shown in figure 4. Here the current divides at Of course, if the resistances happened to be
A, part g~ing through R 1 and part through R 2 , all the same value, the total resistance would
~d comb1nes at B to_return to the battery. be the resistance of one multiplied by the
F1gure 5 shows a series-parallel circuit. There number of resistors in the circuit.
are two paths between points A and B as in
the parallel circuit, and in addition there are Resi,stonces Consider two resistors, one of
two resistances in series in each branch of in Parallel 100 ohms and one of 10 ohms,
the parallel combination. Two other examples connected in parallel as in fig-
of series-parallel arrangements appear in fig- ure 4, with a voltage of 10 volts applied
ure 6. The way in which the current splits to across each resistor, so the current through
flow through the parallel branches is shown by each can be easily calculated.
the arrows. E
In every circuit, each of the parts has some I=-
resistance: the batteries or generator, the con- R
necting conductors, and the apparatus itself.
Thus, if each part has some resistance, no E = 10 volts 10
matter how litde, and a current is flowing R = 100 ohms
I, = -- = 0.1 ampere
100
through it, there will be a voltage drop across
it. In other words, there will be a potential E = 10 volts 10
difference between the two ends of the circuit I 2 = - = 1.0 ampere
R = 10 ohms 10
element in question. This drop in voltage is
equal to the product of the current and the Total current =I, + I 2 = 1.1 ampere
resistance, hence it is called the IR drop.
The source of voltage has an internal re- Until it divides at A, the entire current of
sistance, and when connected into a circuit 1.1 amperes is flowing through the conductor
so that current flows, there will be an IR drop from the battery to A, and again from B through
in the source just as in every other part of the the conductor to the battery. Since this is more
circuit. Thus, if the terminal voltage of the current than flows through the smaller resistor
source could be measured in a way that would it is evident that the resistance of the parallel
cause no current to flow, it would be found combination must be less than 10 ohms, the
to be more than the voltage measured when a resistance of the smaller resistor. We can find
current flows by the amount of the IR drop this value by applying Ohm's law.
26 Direct Current Circuits THE R AD I 0
E
R~
I
R1 Rz
E ~ 10 volts 10
R ~ _ , 9.09 ohms
I ~ 1.1 amperes 1.1 + +
The resistance of the parallel combination is
9.09 ohms.
Mathematically, we can derive a simple
formula for finding the effective resistance of
two resistors connected in parallel.
This formula is:
R, R,
_x_ R2 Figure 6
R, +R 2 OTHER COMMON SERIES-PARALLEL
CIRCUITS
where R is the unknown resistance,
R 1 is the resistance of the first resistor,
R2 is the resistance of the second re- more resistors connected in parallel is always
sistor. less than the value of the lowest resistance in
the combination. It is well to bear this simple
If the effective value required is known, rule in mind, as it will assist greatly in ap-
and it is desired to connect one unknown re- proximating the value of paralleled resistors.
sistor in parallel with one of known value,
the following transposition of the above for- Resistors In To find the total resistance of
mula will simplify the problem of obtaining Series Parallel several resistors connected in
the unknown value: series-parallel, it is usually
easiest to apply either the formula for series
resistors or the parallel resistor formula first,
R, xR in order to reduce the original arrangement to
R --- a simpler one. For instance, in figure 5 the
2- R,- R
series resistors should be added in each
where R is the effective value required, branch, then there will be but two resistors in
R 1 is the known resistor, parallel to be calculated. Similarly in figure 7,
R 2 is the value of the unknown resist- although here there will be three parallel re-
ance necessary to give R when sistors after adding the series resistors in
in parallel with R,. each branch. In figure 6B the paralleled re-
sistors should be reduced to the equivalent
The resultant value of placing a number of series value, and then the series resistance
unlike resistors in parallel is equal to the re- values can be added.
ciprocal of the sum of the reciprocals of the Resistances in series-parallel can be solved
various resistors. This can be expressed as: by combining the series and parallel formulas
into one similar to the following (refer to
1
R figure 7):
1 1 1 1
-+-+-+ 1
R, R2 R, Rn R ~ ------------
1 1 1
The effective value of placing any number - - - + -----1-------
R, + R 2 R, + R4 R5 + R6 + R7
of unlike resistors in parallel can be deter-
mined from the above formula. However, it
is commonly used only when there are three Voltage Dividers A voltage divider is ex-
or more resistors under consideration, since actly what its name im-
the simplified formula given before is more plies: a resistor or a series of resistors con-
convenient when only two resistors are being nected across a source of voltage from which
used. various lesser values of voltage may be ob-
From the above, it also follows that when tained by connection to various points along
two or more resistors of the same value are the resistor.
placed in parallel, the effective resistance of A voltage divider serves a most useful pur-
the paralleled resistors is equal to the value pose in a radio receiver, transmitter or ampli-
of one of the resistors divided by the number fier, because it offers a simple means of
of resistors in parallel. obtaining plate, screen, and bias voltages of
The effective value of resistance of two or different values from a common power supply
HANDBOOK Voltage Divider 27
+ A
R5
1
Rs R
R7
l
Figure 7
ANOTHER TYPE OF
SERIES-PARALLEL CIRCUIT
Figure 8
SIMPLE VOLTAGE DIVIDER
source. It may also be used to obtain very low CIRCUIT
voltages of the order of .01 to .001 volt with The arrows Indicate the manner In which the
a high degree of accuracy, even though a current flow rllvtJ.. between tlte voltage Jlv/Jer
means of measuring such voltages is lacking. /tse/1 anJ tlte uterna/ loaJ circuit.
The procedure for making these measurements
can best be given in the following example.
Assume that an accurately calibrated volt-
bleeder resistor and voltage divider, such as
meter reading from 0 to 150 volts is available,
is commonly used in radio equipment, is illus-
and that the source of voltage is exactly 100
trated in the following example:
volts. This 100 volts is then impressed through
a resistance of exactly 1,000 ohms. It will, A power supply delivers 300 volts and is
then, be found that the voltage along various conservatively rated to supply all needed cur-
points on the resistor, with respect to the rent for the receiver and still allow a bleeder
grounded end, is exactly proportional to the current of 10 milliamperes. The following volt-
resistance at that point. From Ohm's law, the ages are wanted: 75 volts at 2 milliamperes
current would be 0.1 ampere; this current re- for the detector tube, 100 volts at 5 milli-
mains unchanged since the original value of amperes for the screens of the tubes, and
resistance (1,000 ohms) and the voltage source 250 volts at 20 milliamperes for the plates of
(100 volts) are unchanged. Thus, at a 500- the tubes. The required voltage drop across R,
ohm point on the resistor (half its entire re- is 75 volts, across R2 25 volts, across R3 150
sistance), the voltage will likewise be halved volts, and across R4 it is 50 volts. These
or reduced to 50 volts. values are shown in the diagram of figure 9.
The equation (E ~I x R) gives the proof: The respective current values are also indi-
E ~ 500 x 0.1 ~50. At the point of 250 ohms cated. Apply Ohm's law:
on the resistor, the voltage will be one-fourth
the total value, or 25 volts (E ~ 250 x 0.1 ~ 25). E 75
R, ~- ~- ~ 7,500 ohms.
Continuing with this process, a point can be I .01
found where the resistance measures exactly
1 ohm and where the voltage equals 0.1 volt. E 25
R2 ~- ~--~ 2,083 ohms.
It is, therefore, obvious that if the original I .012
source of voltage and the resistance can be
measured, it is a simple matter to predeter- E 150
mine the voltage at any point along the resist- R3 ~ -~ -- ~ 8,823 ohms.
or, provided that the current remains constant, I .017
and provided that no current is taken from the E 50
tap-on point unless this current is taken into R4 ~-~- ~ 1,351 ohms.
consideration. I .037
10+2+5+20 MA.
50 VOL.TS DROP
t
R4 I
-
I 250V. 20MA.
I ~
A
,- -2 AMPS
,\
R2
R1
-2 AMPS _,._
bu
l
300 VOLTS
10+2+ 5 MA.
150 VOLTS DROP {
t
R3 I
I 1001/. SMA.
I CMP5 + ~
I -+--
10+ 2 MA.
25 VOLTS DROP
{t R~ I
I
1
75 v., 2 MA.
t 1111,
20 vnLTS
75 VOLTS DROP
-
BLEEDER CURRENT, 10 MA{
- R1
~
l 1 f_j
I
_j
Figure 10
ILLUSTRATING KIRCHHOFF'S
FIRST LAW
The current flowing toward point "A" Is equal
~----POWER SUPPLY ---t-~--LOAD ~ to the current flowing away lrom point "A ...
3. EQUATE
P ~ EI, P ~ I 2 R, and P = E 2 /R,
411+3 211+6 where P is the power in watts,
--2- --5-
E is the electromotive force in volts,
4. SIMPLIFY and
2011+15= 411+12 I is the current in amperes.
II =--ft AMPERE
5. RE-SUBSTITUTE
To apply the above equations to a typical
-_g_+3 2 I problem: The voltage drop across a cathode
I2= - T- =
1
: = 1 i- AMPERE resistor in a power amplifier stage is 50 volts;
the plate current flowing through the resistor
Figure 11 is 150 milliamperes. The number of watts the
ILLUSTRATING KIRCHHOFF'S resistor will be required to dissipate is found
SECOND LAW from the formula: P ~ EI, or 50 x .150 ~ 7.5
The voltage c/rop around any closed loop In a watts (.150 amperes is equal to 150 milli-
network Is equal to Z'ero. amperes). From the foregoing it is seen that
a 7.5-watt resistor will safely carry the re-
quired current, yet a 10- or 20-watt resistor
two batteries. First assume an arbitrary direc- would ordinarily be used to provide a safety
tion of current flow in each closed loop of the factor.
circuit, drawing an arrow to indicate the as- In another problem, the conditions being
sumed direction of current flow. Then equate ~imilar to tfiose above, but with the resistance
the sum of all IR drops plus battery drops (R ~ 3331/, ohms), and current being the known
around each loop to zero. You will need one factors, the solution is obtained as follows:
equation for each unknown to be determined. P = I"R = .0225 x 333.33 = 7.5. If only the volt-
Then solve the equations for the unknown cur- age and resistance are known, P = E 2 /R =
rents in the general manner indicated in figure 2500/333.33 = 7.5 watts. It is seen that all
11. If the answer comes out positive the di- three equations give the same results; the
rection of current flow you originally assumed selection of the particular equation depends
was correct. If the answer comes out negative, only upon the known factors.
the current flow is in the opposite direction to
the arrow which was drawn originally. This is Power, Energy It is important to remember
illustrated in the example of figure 11 where and Work that power (expressed in watts,
the direction of flow of I, is opposite to the horsepower, etc.), represents
direction assumed in the sketch. the rate of energy consumption or the rate of
doing work. But when we pay our electric bill
Power in In order to cause electrons
Resistive Circuits to flow through a conductor,
constituting a current flow,
D
it is necessary to apply an electromotive force
(voltage) across the circuit. Less power is Figure 12
L
expended in creating a small current flow MATCHING OF
through a given resistance than in creating RESISTANCES +
a large one; so it is necessary to have a unit
of power as a reference. To deliver the great. .t amount of power to the
The unit of electrical power is the watt, load, the load resistance RL should be equal to
which is the rate of energy consumption when the Internal res/stance of the &attel'y R1.
30 Direct Current Circuits THE R AD I 0
1
,..-~ LeECJROSTATIC 1 micro-microfarad~ 1/1,000,000 of a micro
.IV"~~~L~~~RONS
farad, or .000001 microfarad, or mi- w-
crofarads.
1200
I 0.004
1.0
260
METHYL- METHACRYLATE
LUCITE 2.6 0.007 160
itor. The amount of stored energy in a charged MICA 5.4 0.0003
capacitor is dependent upon the charging po- MYCALEX MYKROY 7.0 0.002 650
PHENOL- FORMALDEHYDE,
tential, as well as a factor which takes into LOW-LOSS YELLOW 5.0 0.015 270
This energy loss is expressed in terms of the capacitor may be increased by placing the
power factor of the capacitor, which repre- unit in a vacuum chamber to prevent ionization
sents the portion of the input volt-amperes of the dielectric.
lost in the dielectric material. Other materials The temperature coefficient of a variable
including air, polystyrene and quartz have a air dielectric capacitor varies widely and is
very low power factor. often non-cyclic. Such things as differential
The new ceramic dielectrics such as stea- expansion of various parts of the capacitor,
tite (talc) and titanium dioxide products are changes in internal stresses and different
especially suited for high frequency and high temperature coeffidents of various parts con-
temperature operation. Ceramics based upon tribute to these variances.
titanium dioxide have an unusually high di-
electric constant combined with a low power
factor. The temperature coefficient with re- The capacitance of a capacitor is
Dielectric
spect to capacity of units made with this Constantdetermined by the thickness and
material depends upon the mixture of oxides, nature of the dielectric material
and coefficients ranging from zero to over between plates. Certain materials offer a
-700 parts per million per degree Centigrade greater capacitance than others, depending
may be obtained in commercial production. upon their physical makeup and chemical con-
Mycalex is a composition of minute mica stitution. This property is expressed by a
particles and lead borate glass, mixed and constant K, called the dielectric constant.
fired at a relatively low temperature. It is hard (K = 1 for air.)
and brittle, but can be drilled or machined
when water is used as the cutting lubricant. Dielectric If the charge becomes too great
Mica dielectric capacitors have a very low Breakdown for a given thickness of a certain
power factor and extremely high voltage break- dielectric, the capacitor will break
down per unit of thickness. A mica and copper- down, i.e., the dielectric will puncture. It is
foil "sandwich" is formed under pressure to for this reason that capacitors are rated in the
obtain the desired capacity value. The effect manner of the amount of voltage they will
of temperature upon the pressures in the safely withstand as well as the capacitance
"sandwich" causes the capacity of the usual in microfarads. This rating is commonly ex-
mica capacitor to have large, non-cyclic vari- pressed as the d-e working voltage.
ations. If the copper electrodes are plated
directly upon the mica sheets, the temperature Calculation of The capacitance of two parallel
coefficient can be stablized at about 20 parts Capacitance plates is given with good accu-
per million per degree Centigrade. A process racy by the following formula:
of this type is used in the manufacture of
"silver mica" capacitors. 1. 2
Paper dielectric capacitors consist of strips CIRCULAR PLATE CAPACITORS I
1. 1
of aluminum foil insulated from each other by CAPACITANCE. FOR A GIVEN SPACING I
a thin layer of paper, the whole assembly being 1. 0
wrapped in a circular bundle. The cost of such 9
_\
a capacitor is low, the capacity is high in
proportion to the size and weight, and the
power factor is good. The life of such a ca- 7
1 r--~~~IA.
- t---
is required. The dielectric strength is high, <I) t---
though somewhat less at radio frequencies 'A.t-- .H
than at 60 cycles. In addition, corona dis- 0
10 f1 12 13 14
charge at high frequencies will cause ioniza-
CAPACITANCE IN MICRO-MICROFARADS
tion of the air dielectric causing an increase
in power loss. Dielectric strength may be in- Figure 16
creased by increasing the air pressure, as is Through the use of this chart It Is possible to
done in hermetically sealed radar units. In determine tbe required plate diameter (with the
some units, dry nitrogen gas may be used in the necessary spacing established by peak
voltage considerations} for a clrcular ..plate
place of air to provide a higher dielectric
neutralizing capacitor. The capacitance given
strength than that of air. Is for a dielectric of air and the spacing given
Likewise, the dielectric strength of an "air" is between ad/acent faces of the two plates.
HANDBOOK Capacitive Circuits 33
l
c
where r ~ radius in inches
The capacitance of a multi-plate capacitor
can be calculated by taking the capacitance of
CAPACITORS IN SERIES-PARALLEL
I one section and multiplying this by the number
of dielectric spaces. In such cases, however,
the formula gives no consideration to the
effects of edge capacitance; so the capaci-
tance as calculated will not be entirely ac-
Figure 17 curate. These additional capacitances will be
CAPACITORS IN SERIES, PARALLEL, but a small part of the effective total capaci-
AND SERIES-PARALLEL tance, particularly when the plates are reason-
ably large and thin, and the final result will,
therefore, be within practical limits of accuracy.
1 1
c~---+---+---
1 1 1 1
-+- -+- +- EQUAL / . :;:.!_ ~EQUAL
c, c2 c, c. c, c. CAPACITANCE~ r:
~-~
~/ RESISTANCE
::
Capacitors in A-C When a capacitor is con-
T-
and D-C Circuits nected into a direct-cur- Figure 18
rent circuit, it will block SHOWING THE USE OF VOLTAGE EQUAL-
the ~i.<;'; or stop the flow of current. Beyond IZING RESISTORS ACROSS CAPACITORS
the_ 1mttal movement of electrons during the
CONNECTED IN SERIES
penod when the capacitor is being charged
there will be no flow of current because th;
circuit is effectively broken by the dielectric
of the capacitor. advisable to check several on an accurate
Strictly speaking, a very small current may ohmmeter to find two that are as close as
actually flow because the dielectric of the possible in resistance. The exact resistance
capacitor may not be a perfect insulator. This is unimportant, just so it is the same for the
minute current flow is the leakage current two resistors used.
previously referred to and is dependent upon
the internal d-e resistance of the capacitor. Capacitors in When two capacitors are con-
This leakage current is usually quite notice Series on A. C. nected in series, alternating
able in most types of electrolytic capacitors. voltage pays no heed to the
When an alternating current is applied to relatively high internal resistance of each
a capacitor, the capacitor will charge and dis- ~apacitor, but divides across the capacitors
charge a certain number of times per second 1n inverse proportion to the capacitance. Be-
in accordance with the frequency of the alter- cause, in addition to the d.c. across a capac
nating voltage. The electron flow in the charge itor in a filter or audio amplifier circuit there
and discharge of a capacitor when an a-c ~s u_sually an a-c or a-f voltage component, it
potential is applied constitutes an alternating 1s Inadvisable to series-connect capacitors
current, in effect. It is for this reason that a of unequal capacitance even if dividers are
capacitor will pass an alternating current yet provided to keep the d.c. within the ratings of
offer practically infinite opposition to a direct the individual capacitors.
current. These two properties are repeatedly For instance, if a 500-volt 1-pfd. capacitor
in evidence in a radio circuit. is used in series with a 4-pfd. 500-volt capac-
itor across a 250-volt a-c supply, the 1-pfd.
Voltage Rating Any good paper dielectric capacitor will have 200 volts a.c. across it
of Capacitors filter capacitor has such a and the 4-pfd. capacitor only 50 volts. An
in Series high internal resistance (in- equalizing divider to do any good in this case
dicating a good dielectric) would have to be of very low resistance be-
that the exact resistance will vary consider- cause of the comparatively low impedance of
ably from capacitor to capacitor even though the capacitors to a.c. Such a divider would
they are made by the same manufacturer and draw excessive current and be impracticable.
are of the same rating. Thus, when 1000 volts The safest rule to follow is to use only
d.c. is connected across two 1-pfd. 500-volt capacitors of the same capacitance and volt-
capacitors in series, the chances are that the age rating and to install matched high resist
voltage will divide unevenly and one capacitor ance proportioning resistors across the various
will r!!ceive more than 500 volts and the other capacitors to equalize the d-e voltage drop
less than 500 volts. across each capacitor. This holds regardless
of how many capacitors are series-connected.
The unit of flux is the maxwell, and the sym- duce in air. It may be expressed by the ratio
bol is the Greek letter cp (phi). B/ H or B/H. In other words,
Flux density is the number of lines of force B B
per unit area. It is expressed in gauss if the p. = - or p. =-
unit of area is the square centimeter (1 gauss H H
= 1 line of force per square centimeter), or
in lines per square inch. The symbol for flux where p. is the premeability, B is the flux
density is B if it is expressed in gausses, or density in gausses, B is the flux density in
B if expressed in lines per square inch. lines per square inch, H is the m.m. f. in
gilberts per centimeter (oersteds), and H is
Magnetomotive The force which produces a the m.m.f. in ampere-turns per inch. These
Force flux in a magnetic circuit relations may also be stated as follows:
is called magnetomotive force. B B
It is abbreviated m.m.f. and is designated by H = - or H = ..:_, and B = Hp. or
the letter F. The unit of magnetomotive force p. p.
is the gilbert, which is equivalent to 1.26 x NI,
where N is the number of turns and I is the It can be seen from the foregoing that per-
current flowing in the circuit in amperes. meability is inversely proportional to the
The m.m.f. necessary to produce a given specific reluctance of a material.
flux density is stated in gilberts per centi-
meter (oersteds) (H), or in ampere-turns per
Saturation Permeability is similar to electric
inch (H).
conductivity. There is, however,
Reluctance Magnetic reluctance corresponds one important difference: the permeability of
to electrical resistance, and is magnetic materials is not independent of the
the property of a material that opposes the magnetic current (flux) flowing through it,
creation of a magnetic flux in the material. although electrical conductivity is substan-
It is expressed in rels, and the symbol is the tially independent of the electric current in a
letter R. A material has a reluctance of 1 rel wire. When the flux density of a magnetic
when an m.m.f. of 1 ampere-turn (NI) generates conductor has been increased to the saturation
a flux of 1 line of force in it. Combinations point, a further increase in the magnetizing
of reluctances are treated the same as re- force will not produce a corresponding in-
sistances in finding the total effective reluc- crease in flux density.
tance. The specific reluctance of any sub-
stance is its reluctance per unit volume. Calculations To simplify magnetic circuit
Except for iron and its alloys, most common calculations, a magnetization
materials have a specific reluctance very curve may be drawn for a given unit of ma-
nearly the same as that of a vacuum, which, terial. Such a curve is termed a B-H curve, and
for all practical purposes, may be considered may be determined by experiment. When the
the same as the specific reluctance of air. current in an iron core coil is first applied,
the relation between the winding current and
Ohm's Law for The relations between flux, the core flux is shown at A-B in figure 20. If
Magnetic Circuits magnetomotive force, and the current is then reduced to zero, reversed,
reluctance are exactly the brought back again to zero and reversed to the
same as the relations between current, volt-
age, and resistance in the electrical circuit.
These can be stated as follows:
F F
<P =- R=- F = cpR
R cp ----/-+.-/----MAGNETIZING FORCE
H~
original direction, the flux passes through a the current. Thus, it can be seen that self-
typical hysteresis loop as shown. induction tends to prevent any change in the
current in the circuit.
Residual Magnetism; The magnetism remaining The storage of energy in a magnetic field
Retentivity in a material after the is expressed in joules and is equal to (LI 2 )/2.
magnetizing force is re- (A joule is equal to 1 watt-second. L is de-
moved is called residual magnetism. Reten- fined immediately following.)
tivity is the property which causes a magnetic
material to have residual magnetism after The Unit of Inductance is usually denoted by
having been magnetized. Inductance; the letter L, and is expressed in
The Henry henrys. A coil has an inductance
Hysteresis; Hysteresis is the character- of 1 henry when a voltage of 1
Coercive Force istic of a magnetic system volt is induced by a current change of 1 am-
which causes a loss of power pere per second. The henry, while commonly
due to the fact that a negative magnetizing used in audio frequency circuits, is too large
force must be applied to reduce the residual for reference to inductance coils, such as
magnetism to zero. This negative force is those used in radio frequency circuits; milli-
termed coercive force. By "negative" mag- henry or microhenry is more commonly used,
netizing force is meant one which is of the in the following manner:
opposite polarity with respect to the original
magnetizing force. Hysteresis loss is apparent 1 henry = 1,000 millihenrys, or 10 3 milli-
in transformers and chokes by the heating of henrys.
the core.
1 millihenry= 1/1,000 of a henry, .001 henry,
Inductance If the switch shown in figure 19 or w- henry.
is opened and closed, a pulsating
direct current will be produced. When it is 1 microhenry = 1/1,000,000 of a henry, or
first closed, the current does not instanta- .000001 henry, or w-o henry.
neously rise to its maximum value, but builds
up to it. While it is building up, the magnetic 1 microhenry = 1/1,000 of a millihenry, .001
field is expanding around the conductor. Of or w- millihenrys.
course, this happens in a small fraction of a
second. If the switch is then opened, the cur- 1,000 microhenrys =1 millihenry.
rent stops and the magnetic field contracts
quickly. This expanding and contracting field
will induce a current in any other conductor Mutual Inductance When one coil is near an-
that is part of a continuous circuit which it other, a varying current in
cuts. Such a field can be obtained in the way one will produce a varying magnetic field
just mentioned by means of a vibrator inter- which cuts the turns of the other coil, inducing
ruptor, or by applying a.c. to the circuit in a current in it. This induced current is also
place of the battery. Varying the resistance of varying, and will therefore induce another cur-
the circuit will also produce the same effect. rent in the first coil. This reaction between
This inducing of a current in a conductor due two coupled circuits is called mutual induction,
to a varying current in another conductor not and can be calculated and expressed in henrys.
in acutal contact is called electromagnetic in- The symbol for mutual inductance is M. Two
duction. circuits thus joined are said to be inductively
coupled.
Self-inductance If an alternating current flows The magnitude of the mutual inductance de-
through a coil the varying pends upon the shape and size of the two cir-
magnetic field around each turn cuts itself and cuits, their positions and distances apart, and
the adjacent turn and induces a voltage in the the premeability of the medium. The extent to
coil of opposite polarity to the applied e. m.f.
The amount of induced voltage depends upon
the number of turns in the coil, the current
flowing in the coil, and the number of lines
of force threading the coil. The voltage so
induced is known as a counter-e.m.f. or back-
e. m. f., and the effect is termed self-induction.
When the applied voltage is building up, the Figure 21
counter-e.m.f. opposes the rise; when the ap- MUTUAL INDUCTANCE
plied voltage is decreasing, the counter-e.m.f. The quantity M represents the mutual inductance
is of the same polarity and tends to maintain between the two coifs L1 and L2.
38 Direct Current Circuits THE R AD I 0
- A mathematical analysis of
"- 01- 20 Time Constant
o~e
~z~ a ~- the charging of a capacitor in
~~ ~ ~I
ww- ME l 1 IN TE~MS OF TIME ~ONSTANT R~ this manner would show that the relationship
between the battery voltage E and the voltage
~(f)
Figure 24
TYPICAL INDUCTANCES
The large inductance Is a 1000-watt transmitting coil. To the right ancl left of this coil are small r-f
chokes. Several varieties of low power capability coils are shown below, along with various types of r-f
chokes intenclecl for high-frequency operation.
-
40 Direct Current Circuits
c" '""'"'" c:
means that the voltage across the capaci
tor will have increased to 63.2 per cent of
the battery voltage in an interval equal to the
time constant or RC product of the circuit.
Then, during the next period equal to the time
constant of the RC combination, the voltage
w[a:
across the capacitor will have risen to 63.2
~
~
100 per cent of the remaining difference in voltage,
a:
a:
::>
<J
063.2
80
/'
..- ---- or 86.5 per cent of the applied voltage E.
z 60
."'
0 40
L. RL Circuit In the case of a series combination
of a resistor and an inductor, as
~
z /
20 shown in figure 25, the current through the
"'<J
a: combination follows a very similar law to that
~ 0
given above for the voltage appearing across
TIMEt, IN TERMS OF TIME CONSTANT it the capacitor in an RC series circuit. The
equation for the current through the combina
Figure 25 tion is:
TIME CONSTANT OF AN R-L CIRCUIT E
Note that the time constant for the Increase in i = - (1 _ f-t R/L)
current through an R-L circuit Is identical to R
the rate of increase in voltage across the
capacitor In an R-C circuit. where i represents the current at any instant
through the series circuit, E represents the
applied voltage, and R represents the total
may be expressed in farads and ohms, or R resistance of the resistor and the d-e resist
and C may be expressed in microfarads and ance of the inductor in series. Thus the time
megohms. The product RC is called the time constant of the RL circuit is L/R, with R ex-
constant of the circuit, and is expressed in pressed in ohms and L expressed in henrys.
seconds. As an example, if R is one megohm
and C is one microfarad, the time constant Voltage Decay When the switch in figure 23 is
RC will be equal to the product of the two, moved to position 3 after the
or one second. capacitor has been charged, the capacitor volt-
When the elapsed time t is equal to the age will drop in the manner shown in figure
time constant of the RC network under con 23-C. In this case the voltage across the ca
sideration, the exponent of f becomes -1. pacitor will decrease to 36.8 per cent of the
Now f - 1 is equal to 1/ f, or 1/2.716, which initial voltage (will make 63.2 per cent of the
is 0. 368. The quantity (1 0. 368) then is equal total drop) in a period of time equal to the
to 0.632. Expressed as percentage, the above time constant of the RC circuit.
The previous chapter has been devoted to Frequency Spectrum At present the usable fre-
a discussion of circuits and circuit elements quency range for alternat-
upon which is impressed a current consisting ing electrical currents extends over the enor-
of a flow of electrons ia one direction. This mous frequency range from about 15 cycles per
type of unidirectional current flow is called second to perhaps 30,000,000,000 cycles per
direct current, abbreviated d. c. Equally as im- second. It is obviously cumbersome to use a
portant in radio and communications work, frequency designation in c.p.s. for enormously
and power practice, is a type of current flow high frequencies, so three common units which
whose direction of electron flow reverses are multiples of one cycle per second have
periodically. The reversal of flow may take been established.
place at a low rate, in the case of power sys-
tems, or it may take place millions of times
per second in the case of communications
frequencies. This type of current flow is
called alternating current, abbreviated a. c.
~l+r---------------------------------
::!1
C(
(31 0 ~---------------TIME~
3-1 Alternating Current DIRECT CURRENT
I
Frequency of an An alternating current is
Alternating Current one whose amplitude of
current flow periodically
rises from zero to a maximum in one direction,
decreases to zero, changes its direction,
rises to maximum in the opposite direction,
and decreases to zero again, This complete
process, starting from zero, passing through ALTERNATING CURRENT
two maximums in opposite directions, and re-
turning to zero again, is called a cycle. The Figure I
number of times per second that a current ALTERNATING CURRENT
passes through the complete cycle is called AND DIRECT CURRENT
the frequency of the current. One and one Graphical comparison between un/Jrectlonal
quarter cycles of an alternating current wave ( clirect} current and alternating current as plotted
are illustrated diagrammatically in figure I. against time.
41
42 Alternating Current Circuits THE R AD I 0
LINES Of FORCE
i+-----1 CYCLE------I
+
w
0
:::>
f..
...J
LINES OF FORCE a.
(UNIFORM DENSITY)
::li
<
1 CYCLE=+-
Figure 3
OUTPUT OF THE ALTERNATOR t C.YCLE=ir
1T
- radians = Y. cycle = 90
2
Figure 5
1T ILLUSTRATING RADIAN NOTATION
-radians = ';. cycle = 60
The radian is a unit of phase angle, equal to
3
57.324 degrees. It Is commonly used In mathe-
1T matical relationships involving phase angles
-radians = '1. cycle = 45 since such relationships are slmplifiecl when
4 radian notation Is used.
1
1 radian =-cycle= 57.3
2TT
where e = the instantaneous voltage
When the conductor in the simple alter- E = maximum crest value of voltage,
nator of figure 2 has made one complete revo- f = frequency in cycles per second, and
lution it has generated one cycle and has ro-
tated through 2rr radians. The expression 2rrf t =period of time which has elapsed
then represents the number of radians in one since t = 0 expressed as a fraction
cycle multiplied by the number of cycles per of one second.
second (the frequency) of the alternating
voltage or current. The expression then repre- The instantaneous current can be found from
sents the number of radians per second through the same expression by substituting j for e
which the conductor has rotated. Hence 2rrf and Imax for Emax.
represents the angular velocity of the rotating It is often easier to visualize the process of
conductor, or of the rotating vector which determining the instantaneous amplitude by
represents any alternating current or voltage, ignoring the frequency and considering only
expressed in radians per second. one cycle of the a-c wave. In this case, for a
In technical literature the expression 2rr f sine wave, the expression becomes:
is often replaced by w, the lower-case Greek
letter omega. Velocity multiplied by time e = Emax sine
gives the distance travelled. so 2rrft (or wt)
represents the angular distance through which
the rotating conductor or the rotating vector where e
represents the angle through which
has travelled since the reference time t = 0. the vector has rotated since time (and ampli-
In the case of a sine wave the reference time tude) were zero. As examples:
t = 0 represents that instant when the voltage
or the current, whichever is under discussion,
e
when = 30
also is equal to zero.
e
sin = 0.5
so e = 0.5 Emax
E E
1 I
1+-o-j
CURRENT~ VOLTAGE BY 90 CURRENT LEADING VOLTAGE BY 90
(CIRCUIT CONTAINING PURE INDUCTANCE ONLY) (CIRCUIT CONTAIN IN<; PURE CAPACITANCE ONLY)
Figure 7 Figure 8
LAGGING PHASE ANGLE LEADING PHASE ANGLE
Showing the manner In which the current lags Showing the manner In which the current leads
the voltage In an o-c circuit containing pure the voltage In an O c circuit containing pure
inductance only. The lag Is equal to one-quarter capacitance only. The lead Is equal to one-
cycle or 90 degrees. quarter cycle or 90 degrees.
Inductive As was stated in Chapter Two, ~ap~citors have a similar property although
Reactance when a changing current flows tn thts case the opposition is to any change in
through an inductor a back- or ~he voltage acros~ t;~te capacitor. This property
count~r-electromotive force is developed; ts called capacttwe reactance and is ex-
oppostng any change in the initial current. pressed as follows:
This property of an inductor causes it to offer 1
opposition or impedance to a change in cur- Xc=--
rent. The measure of impedance offered by an 217fC '
inductor to an alternating current of a given
frequency is known as its inductive reactance. where Xc = capacitive reactance in ohms,
This is expressed as XL. TT = 3.1416
f = frequency in cycles,
XL = 217fL,
C = capacitance in farads.
where XL =inductive reactance expressed in
ohms. Capacitive Re- Here again, as in the case
actance at of inductive reactance, the
rr = 3.1416 (2rr = 6.283), units of capacitance and
Radio Frequencies
f = frequency in cycles, frequency can be converted
L = inductance in henrys. into smaller units for practical problems en-
countered in radio work. The equation may
Inductive Reactance It is very often neces- be written:
at Radio Frequencies sary to compute induc- 1,000,000
tive reactance at radio Xc
frequencies. The same formula may be used, 217fC
but to make it less cumbersome the inductance where f = frequency in megacycles,
is expressed in millihenrys and the frequency
C = capacitance in micro-microfarads.
in kilocycles. For higher frequencies and
smaller values of inductance, frequency is In the audio range it is often convenient to
expressed in megacycles and inductance in ~xpress fr~quency (f) in cycles and capac-
microhenrys. The basic equation need not be ttance (C) tn microfarads, in which event the
changed, since the multiplying factors for same formula applies.
inductance and frequency appear in numerator
and denominator, and hence are cancelled out. Phase When an alternating current flows
However, it is not possible in the same equa- through a purely resistive circuit, it
tion to express Lin millihenrys and f in cycles will be found that the current will go through
without conversion factors. maximum and minimum in perfect step with
the voltage. In this case the current is said to
Capacitive It has been explained that indue- be in step or in phase with the voltage. For
Reactance tive reactance is the measure of this reason, Ohm's law will apply equally well
the ability of an inductor to offer for a. c. or d. c. where pure resistances are con-
impedance to the flow of an alternating current. cerned, provided that the same values of the
HANDBOOK Reactance 47
Y-AXIS
-- _r-(+A) X (-v::i J
ROTATES
""< VECTOR THROUGH 90
+jA
' \
~
go \
Figure 10
Figure II
Operation on the vector (+A) by the quantity (/)
causes vector to rotate through 90 degrees.
THE IMPEDANCE TRIANGLE
Showing the graphical construction of a triangle
for obtaining the net (scalar) impedance re
suiting from the connection of a resistance and
Polar Notation The second method of ~epre- a reactance in series. Shown also alongside Is
senting an impedance 1s to the alternative mathematical procedure lor
specify its absolute magnitude and the phase obtaining the values associated with the triangle.
angle of current with respect to voltage, in
the form Z L 0. Figure 11 shows graphically
the relationship between the two common ways and the phase angle (), when resistance and
of representing an impedance. reactance are known; hence, of converting
The construction of figure 11 is called an from the Z = R + jX to the IZl L () form. In this
impedance diagram. Through the use of such case we use two of the expressions just given:
a diagram we can add graphically a resistance
and a reactance to obtain a value for the re- IZI = y'R 2 + X2
sulting impedance in the scalar form. With
zero at the origin, resistances are plotted to
X X
tan () =-, (or()= tan--)
the right, positive values of reactance (induc- R R
tive) in the upward direction, and negative
values of reactance (capacitive) in the down- The inverse problem, that of converting
ward direction. from the IZI L () to the R + jX form is done
Note that the resistance and reactance are with the following relationships, both of which
drawn as the two sides of a right triangle, are obtainable by simple division from the
with the hypotenuse representing the resulting trigonometric expressions just given for de-
impedance. Hence it is p o s sib 1 e to deter- termining the angle ():
mine mathematically the value of a resultant R = IZI cos()
impedance through the familiar right-triangle
relationship- the square of the hypotenuse is jX = IZl j sin ()
equal to the sum of the squares of the other By simple addition these two expressions may
two sides: be combined to give the relationship between
z = R + x 2 the two most common methods of indicating
an impedance:
or IZI = y'R + X 2 2
R + jX = IZI (cos () + j sin (})
Note also that the angle () included between
R and Z can be determined from any of the In the case of impedance, resistance, or re-
following trigonometric relationships: actance, the unit of measurement is the ohm;
hence, the ohm may be thought of as a unit of
X opposition to current flow, without reference
sin()=- to the relative phase angle between the ap-
IZI plied voltage and the current which flows.
Further, since both capacitive and inductive
R reactance are functions of frequency, imped-
cos 0=-
IZI ance will vary with frequency. Figure 12
shows the manner in which IZ\ will vary with
X frequency in an RL series circuit and in an
tan()=
R RC series circuit.
One common problem is that of determining Series RLC Circuits In a series circuit contain-
the scalar magnitude of the impedance, IZI, ing R, L, and C, the im-
HANDBOOK Impedance 49
e = tan_,_....:._
(XL- Xc)
__ _
R
A series RLC circuit thus may present an
impedance which is capacitively reactive if
the net reactance is capacitive, inductively
reactive if the net reactance is inductive, or
resistive if the capacitive and inductive re- Figure 12
actances are equal. IMPEDANCE AGAINST FRE.QUENCY
FOR R-L AND R-C CIRCUITS
Addition of The addition of complex The Impedance of an R-C circuit approaches
Complex Quantities quantities (for example, infinity as the frequency approaches zero (d. c.},
while the impedance of a series R-L circuit
impedances in series) is approaches Infinity as the frequency approaches
quite simple if the quantities are in the rect- Infinity. The impedance of an R-C circuit ap-
angular form. If they are in the polar form proaches the lmpec/once of the series resistor
they only can be added graphically, unless as the Frequency approaches Infinity, while the
they are converted to the rectangular form by /mpec/once of a series R-L circuit approaches
the lmpeclonce of the resistor as the frequency
the relationships previously given. As an ex-
approaches zero.
ample of the addition of complex quantities
in the rectangular form, the equation for the
addition of impedances is:
(R, + jX,) + (Rl + jX2)= (R, + R 2) + j(X, + X2 ) Division is accomplished by dividing the
denominator into the numerator, and sub-
For example if we wish to add the imped- tracting the angle of the denominator from
ances (10 + j50) and (20- j30) we obtain: that of the numerator, as:
(10 + j50) + (20- j30)
= (10 + 20) + j(50 + (-30))
\Z,I Le,
~ (LO -l. e)
= 30 + j(S0-30)
\Z2\ L 02 IZll 1 2
11200~
Since the applied voltage will be the reference
for the currents and voltages within the cir
cuit, we may define it as having a zero phase
0
10r0LTS
j 1
T
+j 100
_j 300
angle: E = 100 L0. Then:
I=
100 LO 0 0
=0.354LO 0 -(-45)
282 L-45
Figure 13
SERIES R-L-C CIRCUIT =0.35 4 L45 amperes.
This same current must flow through all three
elements of the circuit, since they are in
current always will be in the same type of series and the current through one must al-
units as used to define the voltage. ready have passed through the other two.
In the more general case vector algebra Hence the voltage drop across the resistor
must be used to solve the equation. And, (whose phase angle of course is 0) is:
since either division or multiplication is in-
volved, the complex quantities should be ex- E=IR
pressed in the polar form. As an example, E =(0.354 L 45) (200 L 0)
take the case of the series circuit shown in
figure 13 with 100 volts applied. The imped- = 70.8 L 45 volts
ance of the series circuit can best be obtained The voltage drop across the inductive react
first in the rectangular form, as: ance is:
200 + j(l00-300) = 200-j200 E =I XL
Now, to obtain the current we must convert E = (0.354 L45) (100 L 90)
this impedance to the polar form.
= 35.4 L 135 volts
\Z\ = y 200 2 + ( -200) 2 Similarly, the voltage drop across the capac-
itive reactance is:
v 40,000 + 40,000
E =I Xc
y80,000 E = (0.354 L 45) (300 [-90)
= 282 n = 106.2 L-45
Note that the voltage drop across the capac-
e = tan _,X _, -200 _,
- = tan - - = tan -1 itive reactance is greater than the supply
voltage. This condition often occurs in a
R 200
series RLC circuit, and is explained by the
= -45, fact that the drop across the capacitive react
Therefore Z = 282 L-45 ance is cancelled to a lesser or greater ex-
tent by the drop across the inductive reactance.
Note that in a series circuit the resulting im- It is often desirable in a problem such as
pedance takes the sign of the largest react the above to check the validity of the answer
ance in the series combination. by adding vectorially the voltage drops across
Where a slide-rule is being used to make the components of the series circuit to make
the computations, the impedance may be found sure that they add up to the supply voltage-
without any addition or subtraction operations or to use the terminology of Kirchhoff's Second
by finding the angle e
first, and then using Law, to make sure that the voltage drops
across all elements of the circuit, including
the trigonometric equation below for obtain
the source taken as negative, is equal to zero.
ing the impedance. Thus:
In the general case of the addition of a
e = tan-' -X = tan-'--
-200
= tan- -1
number of voltage vectors in series it is best
to resolve the voltages into their in-phase
R 200
and out-of-phase components with respect to
= -45 the supply voltage. Then these components
may be added directly. Hence:
R o
=- - = 0. 707
Then \Z\
cos e cos -45 ER = 70.8 L 45
= 70.8 (cos 45 + j sin 45)
200 = 70.8
(0.707 + j0.707)
\Z\ = - - = 2820
0.707 =50+ j50
HANDBOOK Vector Algebra s1
~'::':,.
90"
Figure 14
Graphical construction ol the voltage drops
associated with the serlu R-LC circuit ol ments which go to make up the series circuit
figure 13. is the same. But the voltage drops across
each of the components are, in general, dif-
ferent from one another. Conversely, in a
parallel RLC or RX circuit the voltage is,
EL = 35.4 L 135
obviously, the same across each of the ele-
= 35.4 (cos 135 + j sin 135) ments. But the currents through each of the
= 35.4 ( -0.707 + j0.707) elements are usually different.
= -25 + j25 There are many ways of solving a problem
involving paralleled resistance and reactance;
several of these ways will be described. In
Ec = 106.2 L45 general, it may be said that the impedance of
= 106.2 ( cos-45 + j sin-45) a number of elements in parallel is solved
= 106.2 (6.707 -j0.707) using the same relations as are used for
= 75 -j75 solving resistors in parallel, except that com-
plex quantities are employed. The basic re-
lation is:
ER + EL + Ec =(50+ j50) + (-25 + j25)
1 1 1
+ (75-j75)
= (50 - 2 5 + 75) + j (50 + 2 5 - 75 )
--=-+-+-+.
Zrot Z, Z2 Z3 .'
= 100 + jO
or when only two impedances are involved:
= 100 L0, which is equal to the
supply voltage. z,z.
Zrot= - - -
Z, + Z 2
Checking by It is frequently desirable
Construction on the to check computations in- As an example, using the two-impedance
relation, take the simple case, illustrated in
Complex Plane volving complex quantities
by constructing vectors figure 15, of a resistance of 6 ohms in paral-
representing the quantities on the complex lel with a capacitive reactance of 4 ohms. To
plane. Figure 14 shows such a construction simplify the first step in the computation it is
for the quantities of the problem just com- best to put the impedances in the polar form
pleted. Note that the answer to the problem for the numerator, since multiplication is in
may be checked by constructing a parallel- volved, and in the rectangular form for the
ogram with the voltage drop across the re- addition in the denominator.
sistor as one side and the net voltage drop
across the capacitor plus the inductor (these
may be added algrebraically as they are 180
out of phase} as the adjacent side. The vector
sum of these two voltages, which is repre- 24 L-~ 0
sented by the diagonal of the parallelogram,
is equal to the supply voltage of 100 volts at 6- j4
zero phase angle. Then the denominator is changed to the polar
form for the division operation:
Resistance and Re- In a series circuit, such
actance in Parallel as just discussed, the cur-
-4
(} = tan-- = tan- - 0.667 = - 33.7
rent through all the ele- 6
52 Alternating Current Circuits THE R AD I 0
Ih
6
p&
Th
[z[ --~ 7.21 ohms
cos- 33.7 0.832 I E1 I
Then:
Ez=E1~ Ez.=E1~ E2 = E1 ____h:_L__
R1+Rz XC1 +XC2 L1+L2
24 L-90
7.21 L- 33. 7o ~ 3-33 L-56.3o
Ca
Ez=E1 ~
Equivalent Series Through the series of op- may elect to use either of two methods of
Circuit erations in the previous solution. These methods are called the admit-
paragraph we have convert- tance method and the assumed-voltage method.
ed a circuit composed of two impedances in However, the two methods are equivalent
parallel into an equivalent series circuit com- since both use the sum-of-reciprocals equation:
posed of impedances in series. An equivalent 1 1
series circuit is one which, as far as the ter- --~-+-+- .
minals are concerned, acts identically to the Z, 0 , Z, Z2 Z,
original parallel circuit; the current through In the admittance method we use the relation
the circuit and the power dissipation of the Y ~ 1/Z, where Y ~ G + jB; Y is called the
resistive elements are the same for a given admittance, defined above, G is the conduct-
voltage at the specified frequency. ance or R/Z 2 and B is the susceptance or
-X/Z ThenYtot ~ 1/Ztot ~ Y, + Y 2 + Y,
2
We can check the equivalent series circuit
of figure 15 with respect to the original cir- In the assumed-voltage method we multiply
cuit by assuming that one volt a. c. (at the both sides of the equation above by E, the
frequency where the capacitive reactance in assumed voltage, and add the currents, as:
the parallel circuit is 4 ohms) is applied to E E E E
the terminals of both. --~-+-+- . ~Iz +Iz +Iz
In the parallel circuit the current through Ztot z, z2 z, ' 2 '
the resistor will be 'f. ampere (0.166a.) while
the current through the capacitor will be j % Then the impedance of the parallel com-
ampere ( + j 0.25 a.). The total current will be bination may be determined from the relation:
the sum of these two currents, or 0.166 + Ztot ~ E/Iz tot
j 0.25 a. Adding these vectorially we obtain:
AC VoltageVoltage dividers for use with
[I[~ y0.166 + 0.25 2 ~ y0.09 ~ 0.3 a.
2
Dividers alternating current are quite simi-
The dissipation in the resistor will be 12 /6 "' lar to d-e voltage dividers. How-
0.166 watts. ever, since capacitors and inductors oppose
In the case of the equivalent series circuit the flow of a-c current as well as resistors,
the current will be: voltage dividers for alternating voltages may
E 1 take any of the configurations shown in fig-
ure 16.
III ~TZ\~ 3-33 ~o.3 a.
Since the impedances within each divider
are of the same type, the output voltage is in
And the dissipation in the resistor will be:
phase with the input voltage. By using com-
binations of different types of impedances, the
W ~ I 2 R ~ 0.3 2 X 1.85
~ 0.9 X 1.85
phase angle of the output may be shifted in
relation to the input phase angle at the same
= 0.166 watts
time the amplitude is reduced. Several di-
So we see that the equivalent series circuit viders of this type are shown in figure 17.
checks exactly with the original parallel cir- Note that the ratio of output voltage to input
cuit. voltage is equal to the ratio of the output
impedance to the total divider impedance.
Parallel RLC In solving a more complicated This relationship is true only if negligible
Circuits circuit made up of more than current is drawn by a load on the output ter-
two impedances in parallel we minals.
HANDBOOK Resonant Circuits 53
Figure 18
SERIES RESONANT CIRCUIT
w+
u
z
(
"':::;;
0..
"'z
u
RESONANCE
I!
1- -
-
:01-
a:
<)
~
<(
<J z
~
<)
c
z
~
1- 0
z"'
J., <"'
z a:
~
0 ~
"'"'
"'~
~
a:~
<
iii
w-
e::
"'a:
"'<
~
"'I
.
"'"'z
'<)
1-
Figure 19 z <
"'0
a:"'
IMPEDANCE OF A a: ..
:0 ~
SERIES-RESONANT CIRCUIT <) -
FREQUENCY
Showing the variation In reactance of the sepo
rate elements and In the net /mperlance of a Figure 20
series resonant circuit (such as figure 18) with
RESONANCE CURVE
changing frequency. The vertical line Is drawn
Showing the Increase In Impedance at reson-
at the point of resonance (XL- Xc = 0) In the
ance for a parallel-resonant circuit, and simi-
series circuit.
larly, the Increase In current at resonance lor
a series-resonant circuit. The sharpness of
resonance is determined by the Q ol the circuit,
as illustrated by a comparison between A,
Impedance of Series The impedance across B, and C.
Resonant Circuits the terminals of a series
resonant circuit (figure
18) is:
Current and Voltage Formulas for calculating
Z = ..j r 2 +(XL -X c)', in Series Resonant currents and voltages in
where Z = impedance in ohms, Circuits a series resonant circuit
= resistance in ohms, are similar to those of
Ohm's law.
Xc =capacitive reactance in ohms,
XL =inductive reactance in ohms. E
I=- E = IZ
z
From this equation, it can be seen that the
impedance is equal to the vector sum of the The complete equations:
circuit resistance and the difference between E
the two reactances. Since at the resonant fre I = -;::;;:::::;;:::=;~
quency XL equals Xc, the difference between
them (figure 19) is zero, so that at resonance
yr2 +(XL- Xc)2
the impedance is simply equal to the resist E =I ..j r2 + (XL - Xc) 2
ance of the circuit; therefore, because the
resistance of most normal radio-frequency Inspection of the above formulas will show
circuits is of a very low order, the impedance the following to apply to series resonant cir
is also low. cuits: When the impedance is low, the current
At frequencies higher and lower than the will be high; conversely, when the impedance
resonant frequency, the difference between is high, the current will be low.
the reactances will be a definite quantity and Since it is known that the impedance will
will add with the resistance to make the im be very low at the resonant frequency, it fol-
pedance higher and higher as the circuit is lows that the current will be a maximum at
tuned off the resonant frequency. this point. If a graph is plotted of the current
If Xc should be greater than XL, then the against the frequency either side of resonance,
term (XL - Xc) will give a negative number. the resultant curve becomes what is known as
However, when the difference is squared the a resonance curve. Such a curve is shown in
product is always positive. This means that figure 20, the frequency being plotted against
the smaller reactance is subtracted from the current in the series resonant circuit.
larger, regardless of whether it be capacitive Several factors will have an effect on the
or inductive, and the difference squared. shape of this resonance curve, of which re-
HANDBOOK Circuit Q 55
sistance and L-to-C ratio are the important stranas connected together only at the ends of
considerations. The curves B and C in figure the coils.
20 show the effect of adding increasing values
of resistance to the circuit. It will be seen Variation of Q Examination of the equation
that the peaks become less and less prominent with Frequency for determining Q might give
as the resistance is increased; thus, it can be rise to the thought that even
said that the selectivity of the circuit is though the resistance of an inductor increases
thereby decreased. Selectivity in this case with frequency, the inductive reactance does
can be defined as the ability of a circuit to likewise, so that the Q might be a constant.
discriminate against frequencies adjacent to Actually, however, it works out in practice
the resonant frequency. that the Q of an inductor will reach a relative-
ly broad maximum at some particular frequency.
Voltage Across Coil Because the a.c. or r-f Hence, coils normally are designed in such a
and Capacitor in voltage across a coil and manner that the peak in their curve of Q with
Series Circuit capacitor is proportional frequency will occur at the normal operating
to the reactance (for a frequency of the coil in the circuit for which
given current), the actual voltages across the it is designed.
coil and across the capacitor may be many The Q of a capacitor ordinarily is much
times greater than the terminal voltage of the higher than that of the best coil. Therefore,
circuit. At resonance, the voltage across the it usually is the merit of the coil that limits
coil (or the capacitor) is Q times the applied the overall Q of the circuit.
voltage. Since the Q (or merit factor) of a At audio frequencies the core losses in an
series circuit can be in the neighborhood of iron-core inductor greatly reduce the Q from
100 or more, the voltage across the capacitor, the value that would be obtained simply by
for example, may be high enough to cause dividing the reactance by the resistance. Ob-
flashover, even though the applied voltage is viously the core losses also represent circuit
of a value considerably below that at which resistance, just as though the loss occurred
the capacitor is rated. in the wire itself.
ffi HIGHQ
D
LOOSE COUPLING
ill D ill 0
MEDIUM COUPLING
MEDIUMQ
CRITICAL COUPLING
LOWQ
ffiO
OVERCOUPLI NG
LOWQ
@
f--
Figure 22
EFFECT OF COUPLING ON CIRCUIT IMPEDANCE AND Q
actual resistance were added in series with inertia, and continue to oscillate with de-
the parallel tank circuit. The resistance thus creasing amplitude for a time after being given
coupled into the tank circuit can be con- a "kick." With such a circuit, almost pure
sidered as being reflected from the output or sine-wave voltage will be developed across
load circuit to the driver circuit. the tank circuit even though power is supplied
The behavior of coupled circuits depends to the tank in short pulses or spurts, so long
largely upon the amount of coupling, as shown as the spurts are evenly spaced with respect
in figure 22. The coupled current in the sec- to time and have a frequency that is the same
ondary circuit is small, varying with frequency, as the resonant frequency of the tank.
being maximum at the resonant frequency of Another way to visualize the action of the
the circuit. As the coupling is increased tank is to recall that a resonant tank with
between the two circuits, the secondary res- moderate Q will discriminate strongly against
onance curve becomes broader and the reso- harmonics of the resonant frequency. The dis-
nant amplitude increases, until the reflected torted plate current pulse in a Class C ampli-
resistance is equal to the primary resistance. fier contains not only the fundamental fre-
This point is called the critical coupling quency (that of the grid excitation voltage)
point. With greater coupling, the secondary but also higher harmonics. As the tank offers
resonance curve becomes broaderand develops low impedance to the harmonics and high im-
double resonance humps, which become more pedance to the fundamental (being resonant to
pronounced and farther apart in frequency as the latter), only the fundamental - a sine-
the coupling between the two circuits is wave voltage- appears across the tank circuit
increased. in substantial magnitude.
Tonk Circuit When the plate circuit of a Loaded and Confusion sometimes exists as
Flywheel Effect Class B or Class C operated Unloaded Q to the relationship between the
tube is connected to a par- unloaded and the loaded Q of the
allel resonant circuit tuned to the same fre- tank circuit in the plate of an r-f power ampli-
quency as the exciting voltage for the ampli- fier. In the normal case the loaded Q of the
fier, the plate current serves to maintain this tank circuit is determined by such factors as
L/C circuit in a state of oscillation. the operating conditions of the amplifier, band~
The plate currentis supplied in short pulses width of the signal to be emitted, permissible
which do not begin to resemble a sine wave, level of harmonic radiation, and such factors.
even though the grid may be excited by a sine- The normal value of loaded Q for an r-f ampli-
wave voltage. These spurts of plate current fier used for communications service is from
are converted into a sine wave in the plate perhaps 6 to 20. The unloaded Q of the tank
tank circuit by virtue of the "Q" or "flywheel circuit determines the efficiency of the output
effect" of the tank. circuit and is determined by the losses in the
If a tank did not have some resistance tank coil, its leads and plugs and jacks if any,
losses, it would, when given a "kick" with a and by the losses in the tank capacitor which
single pulse, continue to oscillate indefinite! y. ordinarily are very low. The unloaded Q of a
With a moderate amount of resistance or "fric- good quality large diameter tank coil in the
tion" in the circuit the tank will still have high-frequency range may be as high as 500
58 Alternating Current Circuits THE R AD I 0
@
Figure 26
COMPOSITION OF A SAWTOOTH WAVE
- -
R xC= 50000 .l.ISECONOS
PERIOD OF e = 1000 ..USECONOS
-OU:~:TVWAVE FORM
LEI
Figure 28
R-C COUPLING CIRCUIT WITH
LONG TIME CONSTANT e0 OF GENERATOR
- - -IOOV.
~ - +IZ'V.
- +75V.
E=10ov.
(PEAK) OUTPUT OF
;~F~I::.:;IATOR (eR)
1000'\..
eo
Figure 30
RC DIFFERENTIATOR AND
INTEGRATOR ACTION ON
Figure 29 A SQUARE WAVE
R-C DIFFERENTIATOR AND
INTEGRATOR ACTION ON
A SINE WAVE
Sawtooth Wave Input If a back-toback saw-
shape of a pure sine wave, they will merely tooth voltage is applied
shift the phase of the wave (figure 29). The to an RC circuit having a time constant one-
differentiator output is a sine wave leading sixth the period of the input voltage, the re-
the input wave, and the integrator output is a sult is shown in figure 31. The capacitor
voltage will closely follow the input voltage,
sine wave which lags the input wave. The sum
if the time constant is short, and the integra
of the two outputs at any instant equals the
instantaneous input voltage. tor output closely resembles the input. The
amplitude is slightly reduced and there is a
Square Wave Input If a square wave voltage is slight phase lag. Since the voltage across the
impressed on the circuit of capacitor is increasing at a constant rate, the
charging and discharging current is constant.
figure 30, a square wave voltage output may
The output voltage of the differentiator, there
be obtained across the integrating capacitor
fore, is constant during each half of the saw
if the time constant of the circuit allows the
tooth input.
capacitor to become fully charged. In this
particular case, the capacitor never fully
charges, and as a result the output of the Miscellaneous Various voltage waveforms
integrator has a smaller amplitude than the Inputs other than those represented
input. The differentiator output has a maximum here may be applied to short
value greater than the input amplitude, since RC circuits for the purpose of producing
the voltage left on the capacitor from the across the resistor an output voltage with an
previous half wave will add to the input volt- amplitude proportional to the rate of change of
age. Such a circuit, when used as a differen- the input signal. The shorter the RC time con
tiator, is often called a peaker. Peaks of stant is made with respect to the period of the
twice the input amplitude may be produced. input wave, the more nearly the voltage across
HANDBOOK Transformers 61
e =1oo v.
(PEAK)
1000 c.P.s.
"'"
- - - - - - - +100
eouT
~Yr--- v~
- - -100
e'" / t--
- T
e<.ouT r- ,...-
-
-
II- 1-- T
r-r-
-+90
eo
A Figure 31
OUTPUT OF
~ ~T~:ATOR
INTEGRATOR ACTION ON
A SAWTOOTH WAVE
Figure 32
the capacitor conforms to the input voltage.
Dillerentlator outputs of short r.. c circuits lor
Thus, the differentiator output becomes of various Input voltage woveshopes. The output
particular importance in very short RC cir- voltage Is proportional to the rate ol change
cuits. Differentiator outputs for various types ol the Input voltage.
of input waves are shown in figure 32.
Square Wave Test The application of a square the original flux is produced is called the
for Audio Equipment wave input signal to audio primary; the inductance which receives the
equipment, and the ob- induced current is called the secondary. In a
servation of the reproduced output signal on radio receiver power transformer, for example,
an oscilloscope will provide a quick and ac- the coil through which the 110-volt a. c. passes
curate check of the overall operation of audio is the primary, and the coil from which a higher
equipment. Low-frequency and high-frequency or lower voltage than the a-c line potential is
response, as well as transient response can be obtained is the secondary.
examined easily. If the amplifier is deficient Transformers can have either air or mag-
in low-frequency response, the flat top of the netic cores, depending upon the frequencies at
square wave will be canted, as in figure 33. which they are to be operated. The reader
If the high-frequency response is inferior, the should thoroughly impress upon his mind the
rise time of the output wave will be retarded fact that current can be transferred from one
(figure 34). An amplifier with a limited high- circuit to another only if the primary current
and low- frequency response will turn the is changing or alternating. From this it can be
square wave into the approximation of a saw- seen that a power transformer cannot possibly
tooth wave (figure (35). function as such when the primary is supplied
with non-pulsating d.c.
3-4 Transformers A power transformer usually has a magnetic
When two coils are placed in such inductive core which consists of laminations of iron,
relation to each other that the lines of force built up into a square or rectangular form,
from one cut across the turns of the other with a center opening or window. The second-
inducing a current, the combination can be ary windings may be several in number, each
called a transformer. The name is derived from perhaps delivering a different voltage. The
the fact that energy is transformed from one secondary voltages will be proportional to the
winding to another. The inductance in which turns ratio and the primary voltage.
62 Alternating Current Circuits THE R AD I 0
Figure 33
Amplifier Jeflclent In low frequency response will distort square wave applied to the Input circuit, as
shown. A 60-cyc/e square wave may be used.
A: Drop In gain ot /ow frequencies
8: Leading phase shift ot /ow frequencies
C: Lagging phase shift ot /ow frequencies
D: Accentuated low frequency gain
Figure 34 Figure 35
Output waveshape of amp/Iller having deficiency Output waveshape of amplifier having limited
In .high-frequency respon ... Tested with 10-kc. low-frequency and high-frequency response.
square wave. Tested with l-lc:c. square wave.
HANDBOOK Electric Filters 63
INPUT OUTPUT
VOLTAGE VOLTAGE
Figure 36 Figure 37
IMPEDANCE-MATCHING TRANSFORMER THE AUTO TRANSFORMER
Tire reflected Impedance ZP varies directly In
Schematic diagram ol an auto-transformer
proportion to the secondary /ooJ Z L, anJ
showing tire met/rod ol connecting it to tire //ne
directly In proportion to tire square ol tire
and to tire load. Wlten only a small amount ol
primary-to-secottclary turns ratio.
step up or step down Is required, the auto-
transformer may be much smaller physically
than would be a transformer with a separate
transformer, part of the flux passing from the secondary winding. Continuously variable
auto-translormers (Variac and Powerstof} ore
primary circuit to the secondary circuit fol widely used commercially.
lows a magnetic circuit acted upon by the
primary only. The same is true of the second-
ary flux. These leakage fluxes cause leakage
reactance in the transformer, and tend to age. In effect, it is merely ~ contin~ous wind-
cause the transformer to have poor voltage ing with taps taken at vartous P<;>tnts al~ng
regulation. To reduce such leakage reactance, the winding, the input voltage betng app~ted
the primary and secondary windings should to the bottom and also to one tap on the wmd-
be in close proximity to each other. The more ing. If the output is taken from this same
expensive transformers have interleaved wind tap, the voltage ratio will be 1-to-1; i.e., the
ings to reduce inherent leakage reactance. input voltage will be the same as the output
voltage. On the other hand, if the outpu~ tap
Impedance In the ideal transformer, the is moved down toward the common termtnal,
Transformation impedance of the secondary there will be a step-down in the turns ratio
load is reflected back into the with a consequent step-down in voltage. The
primary winding in the following relationship: initial setting of the middle input tap is chosen
so that the number of turns will have suffi-
Zp ~ N2 Zs, or N ~ .jZp/Zs cient reactance to keep the no-load primary
current at a reasonably low value.
where Zp =reflected primary impedance
N ~ turns ratio of transformer
Zs ~ impedance of secondary load 3-5 Electric Filters
Thus any specific load connected to the
secondary terminals of the transformer will There are many applications where it is
be transformed to a different specific value desirable to pass a d-e component without
appearing across the primary terminals of the passing a superimposed a-c component, or to
transformer. By the proper choice of turns
ratio, any reasonable value of secondary load
impedance may be "reflected" into the pri- ELEMENTARY FILTER SECTIONS
mary winding of the transformer to produce the L-SECTIONS T-NETWORK
desired transformer primary impedance. The
~--F ~
phase angle of the primary "reflected" im-
pedance will be the same as the phase angle
of the load impedance. A capacitive second
ary load will be presented to the transformer
source as a capaciry, a resistive load will
---YL _L_
present a resistive "reflection" to the primary
source. Thus the primary source "sees" a
transformer load entirely dependent upon the
secondary load impedance and the turns ratio
of the transformer (figure 36).
IT
The Auto
Transformer
The type of transformer in figure
37, when wound with heavy wire
li
over an iron core, is a common Figure 38
device in primary power circuits for the pur- Complex 1//ters may be made up lrom these basic
pose of increasing or decreasing the line volt 11/ter sect/on.
64 Alternating Current Circuits THE R AD I 0
l..L C1
2
r~
I
r2
z z
0 0
~ ~
"z "z
"'
~
~
~
<
L1 = M LK c,=~K
C1 = 1 4_t-t2 X CK C2= ~~~ 2 X CK
C2= M CK L2=~
Figure 39
TYPICAL LOW-PASS AND HIGH-PASS FILTERS, ILLUSTRATING SHUNT AND SERIES
DERIVATIONS
pass all frequencies above or below a certain illustrated in figure 38. A finite number of L
frequency while rejecting or attenuating all sections may be combined into basic filter
others, or to pass only a certain band or bands sections, called T networks or pi networks,
of frequencies while attenuating all others. also shown in "figure 38. Both the T and pi
All of these things can be done by suitable netw?rks may be divided in two to form half-
combinations of inductance, capacitance and secttons.
resistance. However, as whole books have
been devoted to nothing but electric filters, it
can be appreciated that it is possible only to The most common filter sec-
Filter Sections
touch upon them superficially in a general tion is one in which the two
coverage book. impedances ZA and Zs are so related that
their arithmetical product is a constant: ZA x
Filter Operation A filter acts by virtue of its Zs = K2 at all frequencies. This type of filter
property of offering very high section is called a constant-K section.
impedance to the undesired frequencies, while A section having a sharper cutoff frequency
offering but little impedance to the desired than a constant-K section, but less attenua-
frequencies. This will also apply to d.c. with tion at frequencies far removed from cutoff is
a superimposed a-c component, as d.c. can the M-derived section, so called because the
be considered as an alternating current of zero shunt or series el~ment is resonated with a
frequency so far as filter discussion goes. reactance of the opposite sign. If the comple-
mentary reactance is added to the series arm,
Basic Filters Filters are divided into four the section is said to be shunt derived; if
classes, descriptive of the fre- added to the shunt arm, series derived. Each
quency bands which they are designed to impedance of the M-derived section is related
transmit: high pass, low pass, band pass and to a corresponding impedance in the constant-
band elimination. Each of these classes of K section by some factor which is a function
filters is made up of elementary filter sections of the constant m. M, in turn, is a function of
called L sections which consist of a series the ratio between the cutoff frequency and
element (ZA) and a parallel element (Zs) as the frequency of infinite attenuation, and will
HANDBOOK Filter Design 65
~
R =LOAD RESISTANCE
CK= - -1- -
IlL_ ILf
TTf'2R
-f'a:
~
,, ~
FREQUENCY FREQUENCY
R= LOAD RESISTANCE
f1 =CUT-OFF FREQUENCY
L!=3.7~
C1 = CK LK =
1~~ 2 X. LK
L2 =LK c.=~
0.6
=!i..
M
HIGH PASS
Lz= ..!.JL=
o.e ..!.JL
M
il~!<__
FREQUENCY ID~- FREQUENCY
Figure 40
Through the use of the curves and equations which accompany the diagrams In the illustration above it is
possible to determine the correct values of inductance and capacitance for the usual types of pi-section
filters.
have some value between zero and one. As the cies within the pass band. The insertion loss
value of m approaches zero, the sharpness of varies with the type of filter, the Q of the
cutoff increases, but the less will be the components and the type of termination em-
attenuation at several times cutoff frequency. ployed.
A value of 0.6 may be used for min most appli-
cations. The "notch" frequency is determined Electric Filter Electric wave filters have long
by the resonant frequency of the tuned filter Design been used in some amateur sta-
elemenr. The amount of attenuation obtained
tions in the audio channel to
at the "notch" when a derived section is used
reduce the transmission of unwanted high fre-
is determined by the effective Q of the reso-
quencies and hence to reduce the bandwidth
nant arm (figure 39).
occupied by a radiophone signal. The effec-
tiveness of a properly designed and properly
Filter Assembly Constant-K sections and de- used filter circuit in reducing QRM and side
rived sections may be cas- band splatter should not be underestimated.
caded to obtain the combined characteristics In recent years, high frequency filters have
of sharp cutoff and good remote frequency become commonplace in TVI reduction. High
attenuation. Such a filter is known as a com- pass type filters are placed before the input
posite filter. The amount of attenuation will stage of television receivers to reject the
depend upon the number of filter sections fundamental signal of low frequency trans-
used, and the shape of the transmission curve mitters. Low-pass filters are used in the out
depends upon the type of filter sections used. put circuits of low frequency transmitters to
All filters have some insertion loss. This prevent harmonics of the transmitter from
attenuation is usually uniform to all frequen- being radiated in the television channels.
66 Alternating Current Circuits
The chart of figure 40 gives design data is most constant over the pass band of the
and procedure on the pi-section type of filter. filter section.
M-derived sections with an M of 0.6 will be Simple filters may use either L, T, or 11 sec-
found to be most satisfactory as the input tions. Since the 11 section is ~he more com-
section (or half-section) of the usual filter monly "used type figure 40 gives design data
since the input impedance of such a section and characteristics for this type of filter.
In the previous chapters we have seen the electron tubes the cathode energy is applied
manner in which an electric current flows in the form of heat; electron emission from a
through a metallic conductor as a result of an heated cathode is called thermionic emission.
electron drift. This drift, which takes place In another common type of electron tube, the
when there is a difference in potential between photoelectric cell, energy in the form of light
the ends of the metallic conductor, is in addi- is applied to the cathode to cause photo-
tion to the normal random electron motion electric emission.
between the molecules of the conductor.
The electron may be considered as a minute
negatively charged particle, having a mass of 4-1 Thermionic Emission
9 X 10-28 gram, and a charge of 1. 59 X 10-19
coulomb. Electrons are always identical, Electron Emission of electrons from the
regardless of the source from which they are Emission cathode of a thermionic electron
obtained. tube takes place when the cathode
An electric current can be caused to flow of the tube is heated to a temperature suffi-
through other media than a metallic conductor. ciently high that the free electrons in the
One such medium is an ionized solution, such emitter have sufficient velocity to overcome
as the sulfuric acid electrolyte in a storage the restraining forces at the surface of the
battery. This type of current flow is called material. These surface forces vary greatly
electrolytic conduction. Further, it was shown with different materials. Hence different types
at about the turn of the century that an elec- of cathodes must be raised to different temper-
tric current can be carried by a stream of free atures to obtain adequate quantities of elec-
electrons in an evacuated chamber. The flow tron emission. The several types of emitters
of a current in such a manner is said to take found in common types of transmitting and
place by electronic conduction. The study of receiving tubes will be described in the fol-
electron tubes (also called vacuum tubes, or lowing paragraphs.
valves) is actually the study of the control and
use of electronic currents within an evacuated Cathode Types The emitters or cathodes as
or partially evacuated chamber. used in present-day thermi-
Since the current flow in an electron tube onic electron tubes may be classified into
takes place in an evacuated chamber, there two groups: the directly-heated or filament
must be located within the enclosure both a type and the indirectly-heated or heater-cathode
source of electrons and a collector for the type. Directly-heated emitters may be further
electrons which have been emitted. The elec- subdivided into three important groups, all
tron source is called the cathode, and the of which are commonly used in modern vacuum
electron collector is usually called the anode. tubes. These classifications are: the pure-
Some external source of energy must be ap- tungsten filament, the thoriated-tungsten
plied to the cathode in order to impart suffi- filament, and the oxide-coated filament.
cient velocity to the electrons within the
cathode material to enable them to overcome The Pure Tung Pure tungsten wire was used
the surface forces and thus escape into the sten Filament as the filament in nearly all
surrounding medium. In the usual types of the earlier transmitting and
67
68 Vacuum Tube Principles THE R AD I 0
Figure 1
ELECTRON TUBE TYPES
The new General Electric ceramic triode(6BY4)is shown alongside a con-
ventional miniature tube (6265) and an octal-based receiving tube (25L6). The ceramic
tube is designed for rugged service and features extremely low lead inductance.
receiving tubes. However, the thermionic effi- the filament is burned for a longer period at
ciency of tungsten wire as an emitter (the about 2100 Kelvin to form a layer of thor-
number of milliamperes emission per watt of ium on the surface of the tungsten; ( 4) the
filament heating power) is quite low, the fila- temperature is reduced to about 1600 Kelvin
ments become fragile after use, their life is and some pure hydrocarbon gas is admitted
rather short, and they are susceptible to burn- to form a layer of tungsten carbide on the
out at any time. Pure tungsten filaments must surface of the tungsten. This layer of tungsten
be run at bright white heat (about 2500 Kel- carbide reduces the rate of thorium evapora-
vin). For these reasons, tungsten filaments tion from the surface at the normal operating
have been replaced in all applications where temperature of the filament and thus increases
another type of filament could be used. They the operating life of the vacuum tube. Thor-
are, however, still universally employed in ium evaporation from the surface is a natural
large water-cooled tubes and in certain large, consequence of the operation of the thoriated-
high-power air-cooled triodes where another tungsten filament. The carburized layer on the
filament type would be unsuitable. Tungsten tungsten wire plays another role in acting as
filaments are the most satisfactory for high- a reducing agent to produce new thorium from
power, high-voltage tubes where the emitter the thoria to replace that lost by evapora-
is subjected to positive ion bombardment tion. This new thorium continually diffuses to
caused by the residual gas content of the the surface during the normal operation of
tubes. Tungsten is not adversely affected by the filament. The last process, (5), in the
such bombardment. activation of athoriated tungsten filament con-
sists of re-evacuating the envelope and then
The Thoriated- In the course of experi- burning or ageing the new filament for a con-
Tungsten Filament ments made upon tungsten siderable period of time at the normal operat-
emitters, it was found that ing temperature of approximately 1900 K.
filaments made from tungsten having a small One thing to remember about any type of
amount of thoria (thorium oxide) as an im- filament, particularly the thoriated type, is
purity had much greater emission than those that the emitter deteriorates practically as
made from the pure metal. Subsequent develop- fast when "standing by" (no plate current) as
ment has resulted in the highly efficient car- it does with any normal amount of emission
burized thoriated-tungsten filament as used in load. Also, a thoriated filament may be either
virtually all medium-power transmitting tubes temporarily or permanently damaged by a
today. heavy overload which may strip the surface
Thoriated-tungsten emitters consist of a layer of thorium from the filament.
tungsten wire containing from 1% to 2% thoria.
The activation process varies between dif- Reactivating Thoriated-tungsten fila-
ferent manufacturers of vacuum tubes, but Thoriated- Tungstenments (and only thoriated-
it is essentially as follows: (l) the tube is Filaments tungsten filaments) which
evacuated; (2) the filament is burned for a have lost emission as
short period at about 2800 Kelvin to clean a result of insufficient filament voltage, a
the surface and reduce some of the thoria severe temporary overload, a less severe ex-
within the filament to metallic thorium; (3) tended overload, or even normal operation
HANDBOOK Types of Emitters 69
Figure 2
V-H-F and U-H-F TUBE TYPES
The tube to the left In this photograph Is a 955 "acorn" triode. The 6F4 acorn triode Is very similar In
appearance to the 955 but has two leads brought out each for the grid and for the plate connection. The
second tube Is a 446A "lighthouse" triode. The 2C40, 2C43, and 2C44 ore more recent examples of the
same type tube and are essentially the some In external appearance. The third tube from the left Is a
2C39 ''oil can tube. This tube type is essentially the Inverse of the lighthouse variety since the cathode
and heater connections come out the small end and the plate Is the large finned radiator on the large encl.
The use of the finned plate radiator makes the oilcan tube capable of approximately 10 times as much
plate dissipation as the lighthouse type. The tube to the right is the 4Xl50A beam tetroc/e. This tube, a
comparatively recent release, Is capable ol somewhat greater power output than any of the other tube
types shown, one/ is ratec/ lor lu/1 output at 500 Me. one/ at rec/ucec/ output at frequencies greater than
1000 Me.
may quire frequently be reactivated to their sists of a mixture of barium and strontium
original characteristics by a process similar oxides coated upon a nickel alloy wire or
to that of the original activation. However, strip. This type of filament operates at a dull-
only filaments which have not approached too red to orange-red temperature (1050" to 1170
close to the end of their useful life may be K) at which temperature it will emit large
successfully reactivated. quanuues of electrons. The oxide-coated
The actual process of reactivation is rel- filament is somewhat more efficient than the
atively simple. The tube which has gone thoriated-tungsten type in small sizes and it
"flat" is placed in a socket to which only the is considerably less expensive to manufacture.
two filament wires have been connected. The For this reason all receiving tubes and quite
filament is then "flashed" for about 20 to 40 a number of the low-powered transmitting
seconds at about I Y, times normal rated volt- tubes use the oxide-coated filament. Another
age. The filament will become extremely bright advantage of the oxide-coated emitter is its
during this time and, if there is still some extremely long life- the average rube can be
thoria left in the tungsten and if the tube did expected to run from 3000 to 5000 hours, and
not originally fail as a result of an air leak, when loaded very lightly, tubes of this type
some of this thoria will be reduced to metallic have been known to give 50,000 hours of life
thorium. The filament is then burned at 15 to before their characteristics changed to any
25 per cent overvoltage for from 30 minutes to great extent.
3 to 4 hours to bring this new thorium to the
surface. Oxide filaments are unsatisfactory for use
The tube should then be tested to see if it at high continuous plate voltages because: (I)
shows signs of renewed life. If it does, but is their activity is seriously impaired by the
still weak, the burning process should be con- high temperature necessary to de-gas the high
tinued at about 10 to 15 per cent overvoltage voltage tubes and, (2) the positive ion born
for a few more hours. This should bring it bardment which takes place even in the best
back almost to normal. If the tube checks still evacuated high-voltage tube causes destruc
very low after the first attempt at reactivation, tion of the oxide layer on the surface of the
the complete process can be repeated as a filament.
last effort. Oxide-coated emitters have been found cap-
able of emitting an enormously large current
The Oxide- The most efficient of all pulse with a high applied voltage for a very
Coated Filament modern filaments is the short period of time without damage. This
oxide-coated type which con- characteristic has proved to be of great value
70 Vacuum Tube Principles THE R AD I 0
BOO
TYPE 6W4-GT
6CB6
EF= 6.3VOLTS
600
fl) . ,
w
a:
w
a.. /
::;
< 400
.J /
.J
_tiL~lL =-=---~J ~
HEATER
w /
f-- 200
<
.J
a. /."
Figure 4 ~
v 10 20 30 40 50
CUT-AWAY DRAWING OF A 6CB6 PENTODE
D.C. PLATE VOLTS
OXIDE COATED
f-
z
w TUNGSTEN FILAMENT
tt
tt
::>
u
w
f-
<(
" POINT OF MAXIMUM SPACE-
CHARGE -LIMITED EMISSION
_j
(l_
Figure 7
ACTION OF THE GRID IN A TRIODE
PLATE VOLTAGE
(A) shows the triode tube with cutoff bias on
the grid. Note that all the electrons emitted
Figure 6 by the cathode remain inside the grid mesh.
MAXIMUM SPACE-CHARGE-LIMITED (B) shows the some tube with an intermediate
value of bias on the gricl. Note the medium
EMISSION FOR DIFFERENT value of plate current and the fact that there
TYPES OF EMITTERS is a reserve of electrons remaining within the
grid mesh. (C) shows the operation with a
relatively small amount of bias which with
certain tube types will allow substantially all
of plate voltage will tend to neutralize a the electrons emiHed by the cathode to reach
greater portion of the cathode space charge the plate. Emission is said to be saturated in
and hence will cause a greater current to flow. this case. In a majority of tube types a high
Under these conditions, with plate current value of positive grid voltage is required be-
limited by the cathode space charge, the plate fore plate-current saturation takes place.
current is not linear with plate voltage. In
fact it may be stated in general that the plate-
current flow in electron tubes does not obey a_ lowering of the surface \\Urk function by the
Ohm's Law. Rather, plate current increases as held at the cathode resulting from the plate
the three-halves power of the plate voltage. potential.
The relationship between plate voltage, E,
and plate current, I, can be expressed as: Electron Energy The current flowing in the
I= K E'l' Dissipation plate-cathode space of a con-
ducting electron tube repre-
where K is a constant determined by the sents the energy required to accelerate elec-
geometry of the element structure within the trons from the zero potential of the cathode
electron tube. space charge to the potential of the anode.
Then, when these accelerated electrons strike
Plate Current As plate voltage is raised to the anode, the energy associated with their
Saturation the potential where the cath- velocity is immediately released to the anode
ode space charge is neutral- structure. In normal electron tubes this energy
ized, all the electrons that the cathode is cap- release appears as heating of the plate or
able of emitting are being attracted to the anode structure.
plate. The electron tube is said then to have
reached saturation plate current. Further in-
crease in plate voltage will cause only a 4-3 The Triode
relatively small increase in plate current. The
initial point of plate current saturation is If an element consisting of a mesh or spiral
sometimes called the point of Maximum Space- of wire is inserted concentric with the plate
Charge-Limited Emission (MSCLE). and between the plate and the cathode, such
The degree of flattening in the plate-voltage an element will be able to control by electro-
plate-current curve after the MSCLE point will static action the cathode-to-plate current of
vary with different types of cathodes. This ef- the tube. The new element is called a grid, and
fect is shown in figure 6. The flattening is a vacuum tube containing a cathode grid and
quite sharp with a pure tungsten emitter. With plate is commonly called a triode. ' '
thoriated tungsten the flattening is smoothed
somewhat, while with an oxide-coated cathode Action of If this new element through which
the flattening is quite gradual. The gradual the Grid the electrons must pass in their
saturation in emission with an oxide-coated course from cathode to plate is made
emitter is generally considered to result from negative with respect to the cathode, the nega-
HANDBOOK Triode Characteristics 73
I 6J5
0 Er= e.3
Ebb"'IOO
0
I
(lp)
30 0
...
::l;
I ~200~--~--~~-+~~--~--~"~~---~~
-'
..:z 0 0
w
I ~ ~~r----i--~~\+---t~-+---+----0\-4-~
~
::>
<)
20 0
I v !;(
-'
0.
w 0
!;( I v
-'
0. 0
I v
0 -zo -15 -10 -s
I GRID VOLTS
0 VJ
--::
-6 4-20 10 30 $0 eo eo oao 100
GRID VOLTAGE (Eg)
Figure 10
CONSTANT CURRENT (Ep VS. E 9 )
Figure 9 CHARACTERISTICS OF A
POSITIVE-GRID CHARACTERISTICS TYPICAL TRIODE TUBE
This type of graphical representation Is used
(lp VS. E9 ) OF A TYPICAL TRIODE for Class C amplifier calculations since the
Plate characteristics of this type are most operating characteristic of a Class C amplifier
commonly used In determining the pulse.. slgnal Is a straight line when drawn upon a constant
operating character#sflcs of a triode amplifier current graph.
stage. Note the large emission capability of
the oxide-coated heater cathode in tubes of the
general type of the 6J5.
passing through the plate circuit of the tube
for various values of plate-load resistance and
plate-supply voltage. Figure 11 illustrates a
Ep = constant, /). = small triode tube with a resistive plate load, and a
increment supply voltage of 300 volts. The voltage at
The transconductance is also numerically the plate of the tube (ep) may be expressed
equal to the amplification factor divided by as:
ep = Ep -~P x RL)
the plate resistance. Gm = JL/Rp
where Ep is the plate supply voltage, ip is the
Transconductance is most commonly ex- plate current, and RL is the load resistance in
pressed in microreciprocal-ohms or micro- ohms.
mhos. However, since transconductance ex- Assuming various values of ip flowing in
presses change in plate current as a function the circuit, controlled by the internal resist-
of a change in grid voltage, a tube is often ance of the tube, (a function of the grid bias)
said to have a transconductance of so many values of plate voltage may be plotted as
milliamperes-per-volt. If the transconductance shown for each value of plate current (ip). The
in milliamperes-per-volt is multiplied by 1000 line connecting these points is called the
it will then be expressed in micromhos. Thus load line for the particular value of plate-load
the transconductance of a 6A3 could be called resistance used. The slope of the load line is
either 5.25 ma./volt or 5250 micromhos. equal to the ratio of the lengths of the vertical
and horizontal projections of any segment of
Characteristic Curves The operating character- the load line. For this example it is:
of a Triode Tube istics of a triode tube
may be summarized in .01- .02 1
Slope= ---- = -.0001 = ---
three sets of curves: The lp vs. EP curve 100 - 200 10,000
(figure 8), the lp vs. Eg curve (figure 9) and
the EP vs. E curve (figure 10). The plate The slope of the load line is equal to
resistance (Rp~ of the tube may be observed -1/RL. At point A on the load line, the volt-
from the IP vs. Ep curve, the transconductance age across the tube is zero. This would be
(Gm) may be observed from the Ip vs. Eg curve, true for a perfect tube with zero internal volt-
and the amplification factor (JL) may be deter- age drop, or if the tube is short-circuited from
mined from the Ep vs. E g curve. cathode to plate. Point B on the load line
corresponds to the cutoff point of the tube,
The Lood Line A load line is a graphical where no plate current is flowing. The op-
representation of the voltage erating range of the tube lies between these
on the plate of a vacuum tube, and the current two extremes. For additional information re-
HANDBOOK Triode Load Line 75
!P(MA.) E_l'__
0 300
5 250
10 200
15 150
20 100
25 50
30
Figure 12
TRIODE TUBE CONNECTED FOR DETER
MINATION OF PLATE CIRCUIT LOAD
LINE, AND OPERATING PARAMETERS
OF THE CIRCUIT
31.5
Figure 13
APPLICATION OF lp VS. Ep
CHARACTERISTICS OF
VACUUM TUBE
r---
1
----, I
:;f:::CG-P I
I I
I
-;f::: CP-K
I
;t:::cc.-1\ I
I I
L __ _ - - __ j
T~
Figure 15
SCHEMATIC REPRESENTATION
OFINTERELECTRODE
CAPACITANCE
10 10
TYPE 24-A
ed"
esc=gov.
(/ l
<f)
w
6
eG-O
~ 6
r l l
TYPE 6SK7
esc=ioov.
esu =o v.
"'w
(1_
::;;
! =
"'w
(1_
::;; 4 /
eo"
I I
<(
_j
_j 2 :/; o= l
<(
J
~
lc 15
b'
2
~
0
0 100 200 300 400 500 0
0
v I
100 200 300 400 500
VOLTS (EP) VOLTS (EP)
Figure 16
Figure 17
TYPICAL lp VS. Ep TETRODE TYPICAL lp VS. Ep PENTODE
CHARACTERISTIC CURVES CHARACTERISTIC CURVES
frequencies (v-h-f), interelectrode capacities the electrons pass through it and on to the
become very objectionable and prevent the use plate. Due also to the screen, the plate cur-
of conventional tubes at these frequencies. rent is largely independent of plate voltage,
Special v-h-f tubes must be used which are thus making for high amplification. When the
characterized by very small electrodes and screen voltage is held at a constant value, it
close internal spacing of the elements of the is possible to make large changes in plate
tube. voltage without appreciably affecting the plate
current, (figure 16).
4-4 Tetrode or Screen Grid Tubes When the electrons from the cathode ap-
proach the plate with sufficient velocity, they
dislodge electrons upon striking the plate.
Many desirable characteristics can be ob- This effect of bombarding the plate with high
tained in a vacuum tube by the use of more velocity electrons, with the consequent dis-
than one grid. The most common multi-element lodgement of other electrons from the plate,
tube is the tetrode (four electrodes). Other gives rise to the condition of secondary emis-
tubes containing as many as eight electrodes sion which has been discussed in a previous
are available for special applications. paragraph. This effect can cause no particular
difficulty in a triode because the secondary
The Tetrode The quest for a simple and easily electrons so emitted are eventually attracted
usable method of eliminating the back to the plate. In the screen-grid tube, how-
effects of the grid-to-plate capacitance of the ever, the screen is close to the plate and is
triode led to the development of the screen- maintained at a positive potential. Thus, the
grid tube or tetrode. When another grid is screen will attract these electrons which have
added between the grid and plate of a vacuum been knocked from the plate, particularly when
tube the tube is called a tetrode, and because the plate voltage falls to a lower value than
the new grid is called a screen, as a result of the screen voltage, with the result that the
its screening or shielding action, the tube is plate current is lowered and the amplification
often called a screen-grid tube. The inter- is decreased.
posed screen grid acts as an electrostatic In the application of tetrodes, it is neces-
shield between the grid and plate, with the sary to operate the plate at a high voltage in
consequence that the grid-to-plate capacitance relation to the screen in order to overcome
is reduced. Although the screen grid is main- these effects of secondary emission.
tained at a positive voltage with respect to
the cathode of the tube, it is maintained at The Pentode The undesirable effects of sec-
ground potential with respect to r.f. by means ondary emission from the plate
of a by-pass capacitor of very low reactance can be greatly reduced if yet another element
at the frequency of operation. is added between the screen and plate. This
In addition to the shielding effect, the additional elemcent is called a suppressor, and
screen grid serves another very useful purpose. tubes in which it is used are called pentodes.
Since the screen is maintained at a positive;, The suppressor grid is sometimes connected
potential, it serves to increase or accelerate to the cathode within the tube; sometimes it is
the flow of electrons to the plate. There being brought out to a connecting pin on the tube
large openings in the screen mesh, most of base, but in any case it is established nega-
78 Vacuum Tube Principles THE R AD I 0
GRIO CoRIO
A THODE C ...THODE
Figure 18 Figure 19
REMOTE CUTOFF GRID STRUCTURE ACTION OF A REMOTE CUTOFF
GRID STRUCTURE
tive wtth respect to the mm1mum plate volt- of the manner in which the electrodes are
age. The secondary electrons that would travel spaced, the electrons which travel to the
to the screen if there were no suppressor are plate are slowed down when the plate voltage
diverted back to the plate. The plate current is low, almost to zero velocity in a certain
is, therefore, not reduced and the amplifica- region between screen and plate. For this
tion possibilities are increased (figure 17). reason the electrons form a stationary cloud,
Pentodes for audio applications are de- or space charge. The effect of this space
signed so that the suppressor increases the charge is to repel secondary electrons emitted
limits to which the plate voltage may swing; from the plate and thus cause them to return
therefore the consequent power output and to the plate. In this way, secondary emission
gain can be very great. Pentodes for radio- is suppressed.
fr~:quency service function in such a manner Another feature of the beam power tube is
that the suppressor allows high voltage gain, the low current drawn by the screen. The
at the same time permitting fairly high gain screen and the grid are spiral wires wound so
at low plate voltage. This holds true even if that each turn in the screen is shaded from
the plate voltage is the same or slightly lower the cathode by a grid turn. This alignment of
than the screen voltage. the screen and the grid causes the electrons
to travel in sheets between the turns of the
Remote Cutoff Remote cutoff tubes (variable screen so that very few of them strike the
Tubes mu) are screen grid tubes in screen itself. This formation of the electron
which the control grid struc- stream into sheets or beams increases the
ture has been physically modified so as to charge density in the screen-plate region and
cause the plate current of the tube to drop off assists in the creation of the space charge in
gradually, rather than to have a well defined this region.
cutoff point {figure 18). A non-uniform control Because of the effective suppressor action
grid structure is used, so that the amplifica- provided by the space charge, and because of
tion factor is different for different parts of the the low current drawn by the screen, the beam
control grid. power tube has the advantages of high power
Remote cutoff tubes are used in circuits output, high power-sensitivity, and high ef-
where it is desired to control the amplification ficiency. The 6L6 is such a beam power tube,
by varying the control grid bias. The charac- designed for use in the power amplifier stages
teristic curve of an ordinary screen grid tube of receivers and speech amplifiers or modulat-
has considerable curvature near the plate cur- ors. Larger tubes employing the beam-power
rent cutoff point, while the curve of a remote principle are being made by various manu-
cutoff tube is much more linear (figure 19). facturers for use in the radio-frequency stages
The remote cutoff tube minimizes cross- of transmitters. These tubes feature extremely
talk interference that would otherwise be high power-sensitivity (a very small amount
produced. Examples of remote cutoff tubes of driving power is required for a large out-
are: 6BD6, 6K7, 6SG7 and 6SK7. put), good plate efficiency, and low grid-to-
Beam Power A beam power tube makes use plate capacitance. Examples of these tubes
Tubes of another method for suppressing are 813, 4-250A, 4X150A, etc.
secondary emission. In this tube
there are four electrodes: a cathode, a grid, a Grid-Screen The grid- screen mu factor (p. 5 g)
screen, and a plate, so spaced and placed that Mu Factor is analogous to the amplification
secondary emission from the plate is sup- factor in a triode, except that
pressed without actual power loss. Because the screen of a pentode or tetrode is sub-
HANDBOOK Mixer and Converter Tubes 79
stituted for the plate of a triode. /Lsg denotes The Effect of The current equations show how
the ratio of a change in grid voltage to a Grid Current the total cathode current in
change in screen voltage, each of which will triodes, tetrodes, and pentodes
produce the same change in screen current. is a function of the potentials applied to the
Expressed as an equation: various electrodes. If only one electrode is
positive with respect to the cathode (such as
would be the case in a triode acting as a
Is g = constant, 11 = small class A amplifier) all the cathode current goes
increment to the plate. But when both screen and plate
are positive in a tetrode or pentode, the cath-
The grid-screen mu factor is important in ode current divides between the two elements.
determining the operating bias of a tetrode Hence the screen current is taken from the
or pentode tube. The relationship between con- total cathode current, while the balance goes
trol- grid potential and screen potential deter- to the plate. Further, if the control grid in a
mines the plate current of the tube as well as tetrode or pentode is operated at a positive
the screen current since the plate current is potential the total cathode current is divided
essentially independent of the plate voltage between all three elements which have a posi-
in tubes of this type. In other words, when tive potential. In a tube which is receiving a
the tube is operated at cutoff bias as deter- large excitation voltage, it may be said that
mined by the screen voltage and the grid- the control grid robs electrons from the output
screen mu factor (determined in the same way electrode during the period that the grid is
as with a triode, by dividing the operating positive, making it always necessary to limit
voltage by the mu factor) the plate current the peak-positive excursion of the control
will be substantially at cutoff, as will be the grid.
screen current. The grid-screen mu factor is
numerically equal to the amplification factor Coefficients of In general it may be stated
of the same tetrode or pentode tube when Tetrodes and that the amplification factor
it is triode connected. Pentodes of tetrode and pentode tubes
is a coefficient which is not
Current Flow The following equation is the of much use to the designer. In fact the ampli-
in Tetrodes expression for total cathode cur- fication factor is seldom given on the design
and Pentodes rent in a triode tube. The ex- data sheets of such tubes. Its value is usually
pression for the total cathode very high, due to the relatively high plate
current of a tetrode and a pentode tube is the resistance of such tubes, but bears little
same, except that the screen-grid voltage and relationship to the stage gain which actually
the grid- screen JL- factor are used in place of will be obtained with such tubes.
the plate voltage and /L of the triode. On the other hand, the grid-plate transcon-
ductance is the most important coefficient of
12
Cathode current = K (Eg + Esg J pentode and tetrode tubes. Gain per stage can
be computed directly when the Gm is known.
/Lsg The grid-plate transconductance of a tetrode
Cathode current, of course, is the sum of the or pentode tube can be calculated through use
screen and plate current, plus control grid cur- of the expression:
rent in the event that the control grid is posi- MP
tive with respect to the cathode. It will be G --
noted that total cathode current is independent m-<'1Eg
of plate voltage in a tetrode or pentode. Also, with Esg and Ep constant.
in the usual tetrode or pentode the plate cur-
The plate resistance of such tubes is of
rent is substantially independent of plate
less importance than in the case of triodes,
voltage over the usual operating range- which
though it is often of value in determining the
means simply thar the effective plate resist-
amount of damping a tube will exert upon the
ance of such tubes is relatively high. How-
impedance in its plate circuit. Plate resist-
ever, when the plate voltage falls below the
ance is calculated from:
normal operating range, the plate current
falls sharply, while the screen current rises to <'1Ep
such a value that the total cathode current Rp = - -
remains substantially constant. Hence, the MP
screen grid in a tetrode or pentode will almost with Eg and Esg constant.
invariably be damaged by excessive dissipa-
tion if the plate voltage is removed while the 4-5 Mixer and Converter Tubes
screen voltage is still being applied from a
low-impedance source. The superheterodyne receiver always in-
80 Vacuum Tube Principles THE R AD I 0
OSCILLATOR GRID
D
~.SCREEN GRID
rl J) PLATE
-1
CATHODE METAL SHELL Es
l
FILAME~: l': SUPPRESSOR AND SHELL
SIGNAL GRtD
Figure 21
SHOWING THE EFFECT OF CATHODE
Figure 20 LEAD INDUCTANCE
GRID STRUCTURE OF 6SA7 The degenerative action ol cathode lead in.
CONVERTER TUBE cluctance tends to reduce the effective grid~to
cathocle voltage with respect to the voltage
available across the Input tuned circuit. Cath-
ode lead ,.ncluctance also Introduces unclesir
eludes at least one stage for changing the able coupling between the Input and the out-
frequency of the incoming signal to the fixed put circuits.
frequency of the main intermediate amplifier
in the receiver. This frequency changing
process is accomplished by selecting the low, the local oscillator must furnish con-
beat-note difference frequency between a s~derabl~ power to the diode mixer. A good
locally generated oscillation and the incoming diode m1xer has an overall gain of about 0. 5.
signal frequency. If the oscillator signal is
supplied by a separate tube, the frequency
changing tube is called a mixer. Alternatively, The Triode Mixer A triode mixer has better
gain and a better noise figure
the oscillation may be generated by additional
elements within the frequency changer tube. than the diode mixer. At low frequencies, the
gain and noise figure of a triode mixer closely
In this case the frequency changer is common-
ly called a converter tube. approaches those figures obtained when the
tube is used as an amplifier. In the u-h-f and
v-h-f range, the efficiency of the triode mixer
Conversion The conversion conductance(Gc)
deteriorates rapidly. The optimum local oscil-
Conductance is a coefficient of interest in the
lator voltage for a triode mixer is about 0. 7 as
case of mixer or converter tubes,
large as the cutoff bias of the triode. Very
or of conventional triodes, tetrodes, or pen-
little local oscillator power is required by a
todes operating as frequency changers. The
triode mixer.
conversion conductance is the ratio of a
change in the signal-grid voltage at the input
Pentode Mixers and The most common multi-
frequency to a change in the output current at
Converter Tubes grid converter tube for
the converted frequency. Hence Gc in a mixer
broadcast or shortwave
is essentially the same as transconductance
use is the penta grid converter, typified by
in an amplifier, with the exception that the
the 6SA7, 6SB7-Y and 6BA7 tubes (figure 20).
input signal and the output current are on dif-
Operation of these converter tubes and pen to de
ferent frequencies. The value of Gc in con-
mixers will be covered in the Receiver Funda-
ventional mixer tubes is from 300 to 1000
mentals Chapter.
micromhos. The value of Gc in an amplifier
tube operated as a mixer is approximately 0.3
the Gm of the tube operated as an amplifier. 4-6 Electron Tubes at Very
The voltage gain of a mixer stage is equal to
High Frequencies
GcZL where ZL is the impedance of the plate
load into which the mixer tube operates.
The Diode Mixer The simplest mixer tube is As the frequency of operation of the usual
the diode. The noise figure, type of electron tube is increased above about
or figure of merit, for a mixer of this type is 20 Me., certain assumptions which are valid
not as good as that obtained with other more for operation at lower frequencies must be re-
complex mixers; however, the diode is useful examined. First, we find that lead inductances
as a mixer in u-h-f and v-h-f equipment where from the socket connections to the actual
low interelectrode capacities are vital to cir- elements within the envelope no longer are
cuit operation. Since the diode impedance is negligible. Second, we find that electron
HANDBOOK The Klystron 81
+
600-2~\1. +
f!I00-2!>00V.
f111.5 VAC
Figure 22
TWO-CAVITY KLYSTRON OSCILLATOR Figure 23
A conventional two-cavity klystron Is shown
with a feedback loop connected between the
REFLEX KLYSTRON OSCILLATOR
two cavities so that the tube may be used as A conventional reflex klystron oscillator of
on oscillator. the type commonly usecJ as a local oscillator
in superheterodyne receivers operating above
about 2000 Me. is shown above. Frequency
moclulation of the output frequency of the oscil-
motion, the velocity of the electrons in the lator, or a-f-c operation in a receiver, may be
beam is increased. Conversely, when the field obtainecJ by varying the negative voltage on the
becomes increasingly negative in the direction repeller electrocle.
of the beam (corresponding to the other half
cycle of the exciting voltage from that which
produced electron acceleration) the velocity
of the electrons in the beam is decreased. carried on mechanically in some klystrons by
When the velocity-modulated electron beam altering (by means of knob settings) the shape
reaches the drift space, where there is no field, of the resonant cavity.
those electrons which have been sped up on
one half-cycle overtake those immediately The Reflex Klystron The two-cavity klystron
ahead which were slowed down on the other as described in the pre-
half-cycle. In this way, the beam electrons be- ceding paragraphs is primarily used as a trans-
come bunched together. As the bunched groups mitting device since quite reasonable amounts
pass through the two grids of the catcher of power are made available in its output cir-
cavity, they impart pulses of energy to these cuit. However, for applications where a much
grids. The catcher grid-space is charged to smaller amount of power is required- power
different voltage levels by the passing electron levels in the milliwatt range- for low-power
bunches, and a corresponding oscillating field transmitters, receiver local oscillators, etc.,
is set up in the catcher cavity. The catcher is another type of klystron having only a single
designed to resonate at the frequency of the cavity is more frequently used.
velocity-modulated beam, or at a harmonic of The theory of operation of the single-cavity
this frequency. klystron is essentially the same as the multi-
In the klystron amplifier, energy delivered cavity type with the exception that the veloc-
by the buncher to the catcher grids is greater ity-modulated electron beam, after having left
than that applied to the buncher cavity by the the "buncher" cavity is reflected back into
input signal. In the klystron oscillator a feed- the area of the buncher again by a repeller
back loop connects the two cavities. Coupling electrode as illustrated in figure 23. The
to either buncher or catcher is provided by potentials on the various electrodes are ad-
small loops which enter the cavities by way of justed to the value such that proper bunching
concentric lines. of the electron beam will take place just as a
The klystron is an electron-coupled device. particular portion of the velocity-modulated
When used as an oscillator, its output voltage beam reenters the area of the resonant cavity.
is rich in harmonics. Klystron oscillators of Since this type of klystron has only one circuit
various types afford power outputs ranging it can be used only as an oscillator and not as
from less than 1 watt to many thousand watts. an amplifier. Effective modulation of the fre-
Operating efficiency varies between 5 and 30 quency of a single-cavity klystron for FM
per cent. Frequency may be shifted to some work can be obtained by modulating the re-
extent by varying the beam voltage. Tuning is peller electrode voltage.
HANDBOOK The Magnetron 83
ANODE
-;- MAGNET
: BATTERY
Figure 25
SIMPLE MAGNETRON OSCILLATOR
An external tank circuit Is usetl with this type
EYElET TUBUlATION
of magnetron oscillator for operation In the
lower u-h-1 range.
Figure 24
CUTAWAY VIEW OF
WESTERN ELECTRIC 416-B/6280
VHF PLANAR TRIODE TUBE In its simplest form the magnetron tube is a
filament-type diode with two half-cylindrical
The 416-B, clesignecl by the Bell
Telephone Laboratories is intenclecl plates or anodes situated coaxially with re-
for amplifier or frequency multiplier spect to the filament. The construction is
service in the 4000 me region. Em- illustrated in figure 25A. The anodes of the
ploying gricl wires having a diameter magnetron are connected to a resonant circuit
equal to fifteen wavelengths of light, as illustrated on figure 25B. The tube is sur-
the 416-B has a tronsconc/uctonce of round~d by an electromagnet coil which, in
50,000. Spacing between gricl one/ turn, 1s connected to a low-voltage d-e ener-
cathode is .0005, to reduce transit gizing source through a rheostat R for control-
time effects. Entire tube is gofc/ p/atecl.
ling the strength of the magnetic field. The
field coil is oriented so that the lines of
magnetic force it sets up are parallel to the
axis of the electrodes.
The Magnetron The magnetron is an s-h-f Under the influence of the strong magnetic
oscillator tube normally em- field, electrons leaving the filament are de-
ployed where very high values of peak power flected from their normal paths and move in
or moderate amounts of average power are circular orbits within the anode cylinder. This
required in the range from perhaps 700 Me. effect results in a negative resistance which
to 30,000 Me. Special magnetrons were de- sustains oscillations. The oscillation fre-
vel_oped for wartime use in radar equipments quency is very nearly the value determined by
whtch had peak power capabilities of several L and C. In other magnetron circuits, the fre-
million watts (megawatts) output at frequen- quency may be governed by the electron rota-
cies in the vicinity of 3000 Me. The normal tion, no external tuned circuits being em-
duty cycle of operation of these radar equip- ployed. Wavelengths of less than I centi-
ments was approximately I/10 of one per meter have been produced with such circuits.
cent (the tube operated about I/1000 of the More complex magnetron tubes employ no
time and rested for the balance of the operat- external tuned circuit, but utilize instead one
ing period) so that the average power output or more resonant cavities which are integral
of these magnetrons was in the vicinity of with the anode structure. Figure 26 shows a
1000 watts. magnetron of this type having a multi-cellular
84 Vacuum Tube Principles THE R AD I 0
--CATHODE LEADS
"H00E
,.t,NOOE SLOCK
"
Figure 27
Figure 26 THE TRAVELLING WAVE TUBE
MODERN MULTI-CAVITY MAGNETRON Operation ol this tube is the result of inter-
lllustratec:l Is an external-anode strapped mag action between the electron beam and wave
travelling along the helix.
netron of the type commonly usee/ in radar equip
ment for the 10-cm, range. A permanent magnet
of the general type used with such a magnetron
is shown in the right-hand portion of the drawing,
with the magnetron in place between the pole electron tube which permits the visual observa-
pieces of the magnet. tion of electrical signals. It may be incorpo-
rated into an oscilloscope for use as a test
instrument or it may be the display device for
anode of eight cavities. It will be noted, also, radar equipment or a television receiver.
that alternate cavities (which would operate at
the same polarity when the tube is oscillating) Operation of A cathode-ray tube always in-
are strapped together. Strapping was found to the CRT eludes an electron gun for pro-
improve the efficiency and stability of high- ducing a stream of electrons, a
power radar magnetrons. In most radar appli- grid for controlling the intensity of the elec-
cations of magnetron oscillators a powerful tron beam, and a luminescent screen for con-
permanent magnet of controlled characteristics verting the impinging electron beam into visi-
is employed to supply the magnetic field ble light. Such a tube always operates in con-
rather than the use of an electromagnet. junction with either a built-in or an external
means for focussing the electron stream into a
The Travelling The Travelling Wave Tube narrow beam, and a means for deflecting the
Wave Tube (figure 27) consists of a helix electron beam in accordance with an electrical
located within an evacuated signal.
envelope. Input and output terminations are The main electrical difference between
affixed to each end of the helix. An electron types of cathode-ray tubes lies in the means
beam passes through the helix and interacts employed for focussing and deflecting the
with a wave travelling along the helix to pro- electron beam. The beam may be focussed
duce broad band amplification at microwave and/ or deflected either electrostatically or
frequencies. magnetically, since a stream of electrons can
When the input signal is applied to the gun be acted upon either by an electrostatic or a
end of the helix, it travels along the helix wire magnetic field. In an electrostatic field the
at approximately the speed of light. However, electron beam tends to be deflected toward the
the signal velocity measured along the axis positive termination of the field (figure 28).
of the helix is considerably lower. The elec- In a magnetic field the stream tends to be
trons emitted by the cathode gun pass axially deflected at right angles to the field. Further,
through the helix to the collector, located at an electron beam tends to be deflected so that
the output end of the helix. The average veloc- it is normal (perpendicular) to the equipotential
ity of the electrons depends upon the potential lines of an electrostatic field- and it tends to
of the collector with respect to the cathode. be deflected so that it is parallel to the lines
When the average velocity of the electrons is of force in a magnetic field.
greater than the velocity of the helix wave, Large cathode-ray tubes used as kinescopes
the electrons become crowded together in the in television receivers usually are both focused
various regions of retarded field, where they and deflected magnetically. On the other hand,
impart energy to the helix wave. A power gain the medium-size CR tubes used in oscillo-
of 100 or more may be produced by this tube. scopes and small television receivers usually
are both focused and deflected electrostat-
4-8 The Cathode-Ray Tube ically. But CR tubes for special applications
may be focused magnetically and deflected
The Cathode-Ray Tube The cathode-ray tube electrostatically or vice versa.
is a special type of There are advantages and disadvantages to
HANDBOOK The Cathode Ray Tube 85
Figure 29
TYPICAL ELECTROMAGNETIC
CATHODE-RAY TUBE
long as the electron beam strikes in a given Mercury Vapor Mercury-vapor tubes, although
place at least sixteen times a second, the Tubes very widely used, have the
spot will appear to the human eye as a source disadvantage that they must be
of continuous light with very little flicker. operated within a specific temperature range
(25 to 70 C.) in order that the mercury vapor
Screen Materials- At least five types of lumi- pressure within the tube shall be within the
"Phasphars" nescent screen materials proper range. If the temperature is too low,
are commonly available on the drop across the tube becomes too high
the various types of CR tubes commercially causing immediate overheating and possible
available. These screen materials are called damage to the elements. If the temperature is
phosphors; each of the five phosphors is best too high, the vapor pressure is too high, and
suited to a particular type of application. The the voltage at which the tube will "flash back"
P-1 phosphor, which has a green flourescence is lowered to the point where destruction of
with medium persistence, is almost invariably the tube may take place. Since the ambient
used for oscilloscope tubes for visual observa- temperature range specified above is within
tion. The P-4 phosphor, with white fluores- the normal room temperature range, no trouble
cence and medium persistence, is used on will be encountered under normal operating
television viewing tubes ("Kinescopes"). The conditions. However, by the substitution of
P-5 and P-ll phosphors, with blue fluores- xenon gas for mercury it is possible to pro-
cence and very short persistence, are used duce a rectifier with characteristics comparable
primarily in oscilloscopes where photographic to those of the mercury-vapor tube except that
recording of the trace is to be obtained. The the tube is capable of operating over the range
P-7 phosphor, which has a blue flash and a from approximately -70 to 90 C. The 3B25
long-persistence greenish-yellow persistence, rectifier is an example of this type of tube.
is used primarily for radar displays where
retention of the image for several seconds Thyratron If a grid is inserted between the ca-
after the initial signal display is required. Tubes thode and plate of a mercury-vapor
gaseous-conduction rectifier, a neg-
ative potential placed upon the added element
will increase the plate-to-cathode voltage drop
4-9 Gas Tubes
required before the tube will ionize or "fire."
The potential upon the control grid will have
no effect on the plate-to-cathode drop after the
The space charge of electrons in the vicinity tube has ionized. However, the grid voltage
of the cathode in a diode causes the plate-to- may be adjusted to such a value that conduc-
cathode voltage drop to be a function of the tion will take place only over the desired
current being carried between the cathode and portion of the cycle of the a-c voltage being
the plate. This voltage drop can be rather high impressed upon the plate of the rectifier.
when large currents are being passed, causing
a considerable amount of energy loss which
shows up as plate dissipation. Voltage Regulator In a glow-discharge gas tube
Tubes the voltage drop across the
electrodes remains constant
Action of The negative space charge can over a wide range of current passing through
Positive Ions be neutralized by the presence the tube. This property exists because the
of the proper density of positive degree of ionization of the gas in the tube
ions in the space between the cathode and varies with the amount of current passing
anode. The positive ions may be obtained by through the tube. When a large current is
the introduction of the proper amount of gas or passed, the gas is highly ionized and the
a small amount of mercury into the envelope of internal impedance of the tube is low. When a
the tube. When the voltage drop across the small current is passed, the gas is lightly
tube reaches the ionization potential of the ionized and the internal impedance of the tube
gas or mercury vapor, the gas molecules will is high. Over the operating range of the tube,
become ionized to form positive ions. The the product (IR) of the current through the tube
positive ions then tend to neutralize the space and the internal impedance of the tube is very
charge in the vicinity of the cathode. The volt- nearly constant. Examples of this type of tube
age drop across the tube then remains constant are VR-150, VR-105 and the old 874.
at the ionization potential of the gas up to a
current drain equal to the maximum emission Vacuum Tube Vacuum tubes are grouped into
capability of the cathode. The voltage drop Classification three major classifications:
varies between 10 and 20 volts, depending commercial, ruggedized, and
upon the particular gas employed, up to the premium (or reliable). Any one of these three
maximum current rating of the tube. groups may also be further classified for
88 Vacuum Tube Principles THE R AD I 0
100
military duty (JAN classification). To qualify
for JAN classification, sample lots of the
-
IP= 2..5MA.
TRIODE PLA~E
FLUORESCENT ANODE Electron The electron-ray tube or magic eye
Ray Tubes contains two sets of elements, one
TRIODE CRIO - -- RAY CONTROL
ELECTRODE of which is a triode amplifier and
CATHODES the other a cathode-ray indicator. The plate of
the triode section is internally connected to
Figure 31
the ray-control electrode (figure 31), so that
SCHEMATIC REPRESENTATION
as the plate voltage varies in accordance with
OF "MAGIC EYE" TUBE
the applied signal the voltage on the ray-control
electrode also varies. The ray-control electrode
liable specimens of tubes trom ordinary stock
is a metal cylinder so placed relative to the
tubes proved that in the long run the selected
tubes were no better than tubes picked at cathode that it deflects some of the electrons
random. Long life and ruggedness had to be emitted from the cathode. The electrons which
built into the tubes by means of proper choice strike the anode cause it to fluoresce, or give
and 100% inspection of all materials used in off light, so that the deflection caused by the
the tube, by critical processing inspection and ray-control electrode, which prevents electrons
assembling, and by conservative ratings of the from striking part of the anode, produces a
tube. wedge-shaped electrical shadow on the fluores-
Pure tungsten wire is used for heaters in cent anode. The size of this shadow is deter-
preference to alloys of lower tensile strength. mined by the voltage on the ray-electrode. When
Nickel tubing is employed around the heater this electrode is at the same potential as the
wires at the junction to the stem wires to fluorescent anode, the shadow disappears; if
reduce breakage at this point. Element struc- the ray-electrode is less positive than the
tures are given extra supports and bracing. anode, a shadow appears the width of which
Finally, all tubes are given a 50 hour test run is proportional to the voltage on the ray-elec-
under full operating conditions to eliminate
trode. Magic eye tubes may be used as tuning
early failures. When operated within their
indicators, and as balance indicators in electri
ratings, ruggedized or premium tubes should
provide a life well in excess of 10,000 hours. cal bridge circuits. If the angle of shadow is
Ruggedized tubes will withstand severe calibrated, the eye tube may be used as a volt-
impact shocks for short periods, and will meter where rough measurements suffice.
HANDBOOK Miscellaneous 89
50
40
r:=~:
30
/i
I
(MA.
P
I
20
1/ I
/
10
vv
EG1:::12.6V
0
-10 -8
- 4
EG2 (VOLTS)
-2
Figure 33
CHARACTERISTIC CURVES OF 12AKS
SPACE-CHARGE TRIODE
Controlled Series heater strings are employed and by altering the electrode geometry a series
Warm-up in ac-dc radio receivers and tele- of low voltage tubes has been developed by
Tubes vision sets to reduce the cost, Tung-Sol that effectively perform with all elec-
size, and weight of the equipment. trodes energized by a 12-volt system. With a
Voltage surges of great magnitude occur in suitable power output transistor, this makes
series operated filaments because of variations possible an automobile radio without a vibrator
in the rate of warm-up of the various tubes. power supply. A special space-charge tube
As the tubes warm up, the heater resistance (12K5) has been developed that delivers 40
changes. This change is not the same between milliwatts of audio power with a 12 volt plate
tubes of various types, or even between tubes supply (figure 33).
of the same type made by different manu-
facturers. Some 6-volt tubes show an initial Foreign The increased number of imported
surge as high as 9-volts during warm-up, while Tubes radios and high-fidelity equipment
slow-heating tubes such as the 25BQ6 are have brought many foreign vacuum
underheated during the voltage surge on the tubes into the United States. Many of these
6-volt tubes. tubes are comparable to, or interchangeable
with standard American tubes. A complete
Standardization of heater characteristics in
listing of the electrical characteristics and
a new group of tubes designed for series heater
base connection diagrams of all general-pur-
strings has eliminated this trouble. The new
pose tubes made in all tube-producing coun-
tubes have either 600 rna. or 400 rna. heaters,
tries outside the "Iron Curtain" is contained
with a controlled warm-up time of approximately
in the Radio Tube Vade Mecum (norld's Radio
11 seconds. The 5U8, 6CG7, and 12BH7-A are
Tubes) available at most larger radio parts
examples of controlled warm-up tubes.
jobbers for $5.00, or by mail from the publish-
Low Introduction of the 12-volt ignition ers of this Handbook at $5.50 postpaid. The
Plate system 10 American automobiles Equivalent Tubes Vade Mecum (ltorld's Equiv-
Potential has brought about the design of a alent Tubes) available at the same prices
Tubes series of tubes capable of operation gives all replacement tubes for a given type,
with a plate potential of 12-14 both exact and near-equivalents (with points
volts. Standard tubes perform poorly at low of difference detailed). (Data on TV and spe-
plate potentials, as the amplification factor cial-purpose tubes if needed is contained in
of the tube drops rapidly as the plate voltage a companion volume Television Tubes Vade
is decreased (figure 32). Contact potential Mecum).
effects, and change of characteristics with
variations of filament voltage combine to make
operation at low plate potentials even more
erratic.
By employing special processing techniques
CHAPTER FIVE
Transistors and
Semi-Conductors
40
I 1 N34
CRYISTAL DIIOE }_ of certain impurities in carefully controlled
amounts to the pure germanium will alter the
en
UJ
TYPICAL ~TATIC \CHARACTERISTICS 1/
conductivity of the material. In addition, the
choice of the impurity can change the direction
f5 30
of conductivity through the crystal, some im-
a.
:l!
~
.J 2 0
I purities increasing conductivity to positive volt-
ages, and others increasing conductivity to neg-
I
.J
:l! ative voltages.
0
5-2 Mechanism of
-o. 1
0
/ Conduction
.
-o.2
-o .
-0 .
-so
,/
-4o 30 20 - 10
VOLTS
3
As indicated by their name, semiconductors
are substances which have a conductivity
intermediate between the high values observed
for metals and the low values observed for in-
Figure lA
TYPICAL CHARACTERISTIC CURVE sulating materials. The mechanism of conduc-
OF SEMI-CONDUCTOR DIODE tion in semiconductors is different from that
90
Transistors 91
ll
.a&~"
J
Figure 2A Figure 2B
CUT-AWAY VIEW OF JUNCTION PICTORIAL EQUIVALENT OF
TRANSISTOR, SHOWING PHYSICAL PNP JUNCTION TRANSISTOR
ARRANGEMENT
92 Transistors and Semi-Conductors THE RADIO
8A.5E. CONNECTION
~BASE BASE~
SUPPORT P-N-P TRANSISTOR OR N-P-N TRANSISTOR
POINT CONTACT TRANSISTOR
Figure 4
ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS
FOR TRANSISTORS
Figure 3
CONSTRUCTION DETAIL OF A Types of Transistors There are two basic
POINT CONTACT TRANSISTOR types of transistors, the
point-contact type and the junction type (fig-
ure 2). Typical construction detail of a point-
ing in nature and is called N (negative) type contact transistor is shown in Figure 3, and
germanium. The impurities which contribute the electrical symbol is shown in Figure 4. The
electrons are called donors. N-type germanium emitter and collector electrodes make contact
has better conductivity than pure germanium in with a small block of germanium, called the
one direction, and a continuous stream of elec- base. The base may be either N-type or P-type
trons will flow through the crystal in this direc- germanium, and is approximately .05" long
tion as long as an external potential of the and .03" thick. The emitter and collector elec-
correct polarity is applied across the crystal. trodes are fine wires, and are spaced about
Other impurities, such as amminum, gal- .005" apart on the germanium base. The com-
lium or indium add one hole to the semicon- plete assembly is usually encapsulated in a
ducting crystal by accepting one electron for small, plastic case to provide ruggedness and
each atom of impurity, thus creating additional to avoid contaminating effects of the atmos-
holes in the semiconducting crystal. The ma- phere. The polarity of emitter and collector
terial is now said to be hole-conducting, or P voltages depends upon the type of germanium
(positive! type germanium. The impurities employed in the base, as illustrated in figure 4.
which create holes are called acceptors. P-type The junction transistor consists of a piece
germanium has better conductivity than pure of either N-type or P-type germanium between
germanium in one direction. This direction is two wafers of germanium of the opposite type.
opposite to that of the N-type material. Either Either N-P-N or P-N-P transistors may be
the N-type or the P-type germanium is called made. In one construction called the grown
extrinsic conducting type. The doped materials crystal process, the original crystal, grown
have lower resistivities than the pure materials, from molten germanium or silicon, is created
and doped semiconductors in the resistivity in such a way as to have the two closely spaced
range of .01 to 10 ohm/em. are normally used junctions imbedded in it. In the other con-
in the production of transistors. struction called the fusion process, the crystals
are grown so as to make them a single con-
5-3 The Transistor ductivity type. The junctions are then pro-
duced by fusing small pellets of special metal
In the past few years an entire new tech- alloys into minute plates cut from the original
nology has been developed for the application crystal. Typical construction detail of a junction
of certain semiconducting materials in produc- transistor is shown in figure 2A.
tion of devices having gain properties. These The electrical schematic for the P-N-P junc-
gain properties were previously found only in tion transistor is the same as for the point-
vacuum tubes. The elements germanium and contact type, as is shown in figure 4.
silicon are the principal materials which ex-
hibit the proper semiconducting properties per- Transistor Action Presently available types of
mitting their application in the new ampli- transistors have three es-
fying devices called transistors. However, sential actions which collectively are called
other semiconducting materials, including the transistor action. These are: minority carrier
compounds indium antimonide and lead sulfide injection, transport, and collection. Figure 2B
have been used experimentally in the produc- shows a simplified drawing of a P-N-P junc-
tion of transistors. tion-type transistor, which can illustrate this
HANDBOOK Transistors 93
collective action. The P-N-P transistor con- Alpha Cutoff The alpha cutoff frequency of
sists of a piece of N-type germanium on op- Frequency a transistor is that frequency
posite sides of which a layer of P-type mate- at which the grounded base
rial has been grown by the fusion process. current gain has decreased to 0. 7 of the gain
Terminals are connected to the two P-sections obtained at 1 kc. For audio transistors, the
and to the N-type base. The transistor may be alpha cutoff frequency is in the region of 0. 7
considered as two P-N junction rectifiers Me. to 1.5 Me. For r-f and switching transis-
placed in close juxaposition with a semi- tors, the alpha cutoff frequency may be 5 Me.
conduction crystal coupling the two rectifiers or higher. The upper frequency limit of oper-
together. The left-hand terminal is biased in ation of the transistor is determined by the
the forward (or conducting) direction and is small but finite time it takes the majority car-
called the emitter. The right-hand terminal is rier to move from one electrode to another.
biased in the back (or reverse) direction and
is called the collector The operating potentials Drift Transistors As previously noted, the
are chosen with respect to the base terminal, signal current 10 a con-
which may or may not be grounded. If an ventional transistor is transmitted across the
N-P-N transistor is used in place of the P-N-P, base region by a diffusion process. The transit
the operating potentials are reversed. time of the carriers across this region is, there-
The P. - Nb junction on the left is biased fore relatively long. RCA has developed a
in the forward direction and holes from the technique for the manufacture of transistors
P region are injected into the Nb region, pro- which does not depend upon diffusion for
ducing therein a concentration of holes sub- transmission of the signal across the base re-
stantially greater than normally present in the gion. Transistors featuring this new process are
material. These holes travel across the base known as drift transistors. Diffusion of charge
region towards the collector, attracting neigh- carriers across the base region is eliminated and
boring electrons, finally increasing the avail- the carriers are propelled across the region by
able supply of conducting electrons in the a ""built in" electric field. The resulting reduc-
collector loop. As a result, the collector loop tion of transit time of the carrier permits drift
possesses lower resistance whenever the emit- transistors to be used at much higher fre-
ter circuit is in operation. In junction tran- quencies than transistors of conventional de-
sistors this charge transport is by means of sign.
diffusion wherein the charges move from a The "built in" electric field is in the base
region of high concentration to a region of region of the drift transistor. This field is
lower concentration at the collector. The col- achieved by utilizing an impurity density
lector, biased in the opposite direction, acts which varies from one side of the base to the
as a sink for these holes, and is said to col- other. The impurity density is high next to
lect them. the emitter and low next to the collector. Thus,
It is known that any rectifier biased in the there are more mobile electrons in the region
forward direction has a very low internal im- near the emitter than in the region near the
pedance, whereas one biased in the back direc- collector, and they will try to diffuse evenly
tion has a very high internal impedance. Thus, throughout the base. However, any displace-
current flows into the transistor in a low im- ment of the negative charge leaves a positive
pedance circuit, and appears at the output as charge in the region from which the electrons
current flowing in a high impedance circuit. came, because every atom of the base material
The ratio of a change in collector current to was originally electrically neutral. The dis-
a change in emitter current is called the current placement of the charge creates an electric
amplification, or alpha: field that tends to prevent further electron dif-
fusion so that a condition of equilibrium is
lc reached. The direction of this field is such as
a=-
ie to prevent electron diffusion from the high
density area near the emitter to the low density
where a= current amplification
area near the collector. Therefore, holes enter-
ic = change in collector current ing the base will be accelerated from the emit-
ie = change in emitter current ter to the collector by the electric field. Thus
Values of alpha up to 3 or so may be ob- the diffusion of charge carriers across the base
tained in commercially available point-contact region is augmented by the built-in electric
transistors, and values of alpha up to about field. A potential energy diagram for a drift
0.95 are obtainable in junction transistors. transistor is shown in figure 5.
94 Transistors and Semi-Conductors THE RADIO
-- --
DECREASING
!---",.....
~~
POTENTIAL ENERGY
OF MAJORITY CARRIER .u,l.
7
~ rs: ~ ...-
--
/
fv ~ p. f--
v
/
T-"0
~
-- --
1--" ~ ~
1--" ~~
f--"
I
/
/
.,-:6'"
~ -- -
,...- f--
1-- ~
1--" ~
!------ ~
REGION I RECION
= 1-tr
\0 20 30 40
l'\
so eo 70
I
COLLECTOR VOLTS
DISTANCE
Figure 5
POTENTIAL ENERGY DIAGRAM 100,---.----.---,----,---.----.---.---.
FOR DRIFT TRANSISTOR !2N247l
<
~ 40~--+---~~~~~~~4---~+--4--~
5-4 Transistor ...:
Characteristics ~ ~---r~~--~~~~~-+--~----+-=-~
a:
a:
The transistor produces results that may be 32o~--+-f--r~~---..f-~~~~---47L~
comparable to a vacuum tube, but there is a "'
f-
~ I0~-,~--~---4~--r-~~--~c-.~--~
basic difference between the two devices. The Q.
vacuum tube is a voltage controlled device
7~ 100 125 150 200
whereas the transistor is a current controlled PLATE VOLTS
device. A vacuum tube normally operates with
its grid biased in the negative or high resist-
ance direction, and its plate biased in the
positive or low resistance direction. The tube Figure 6
COMPARISON OF POINT-CONTACT
conducts only by means of electrons, and has TRANSISTOR AND VACUUM TUBE
its conducting counterpart in the form of the CHARACTERISTICS
N-P-N transistor, whose majority carriers are
also electrons. There is no vacuum tube equiv-
alent of the P-N-P transistor, whose majority order of 3 X 60 = 180. A junction transistor
carriers are holes. which has a value of alpha less than unity
The biasing conditions stated above provide nevertheless has a resistance gain of the order
the high input impedance and low output im- of 2000 because of its extremely high output
pedance of the vacuum tube. The transistor is resistance, and the resulting voltage gain is
biased in the positive or low resistance direc- about 1800 or so. For both types of transistors
tion in the emitter circuit, and in the negative, the power gain is the product of alpha squared
or high resistance direction in the collector times the resistance gain and is of the order
circuit resulting in a low input impedance of 400 to 500.
and a high output impedance, contrary to and The output characteristics of the junction
opposite from the vacuum tube. A comparison transistor are of great interest. A typical ex-
of point-contact transistor characteristics and ample is shown in figure 7. It is seen that the
vacuum tube characteristics is made in figure 6. junction transistor has the characteristics of
The resistance gain of a transistor is ex- an ideal pentacle vacuum tube. The collector
pressed as the ratio of output resistance to current is practically independent of the col-
input resistance. The input resistance of a lector voltage. The range of linear operation
typical transistor is low, in the neighborhood extends from a minimum voltage of about 0.2
of 300 ohms, while the output resistance is volts up to the maximum rated collector volt-
relatively high, usually over 20,000 ohms. For age. A typical load line is shown, which il-
a point-contact transistor, the resistance gain lustrates the very high load impedance that
is usually over 60. would be required for maximum power trans-
The voltage gain of a transistor is the fer. A grounded emitter circuit is usually used,
product of alpha times the resistance gain, since the output impedance is not as high as
and for a point-contact transistor is of the when a grounded base circuit is used.
HANDBOOK Transistor Characteristics 95
c( le
+
Cl)
w
/
a: I
~+
:::!i
<(
II EM TTE hAl ....... PS.
:J s
_J II
~+ 4 ~
a:
t-L ~ ~
g 1'-- 3 BASE
M+ 2 t--
::l " r- 1- VALUES Of THE EQUIVALENT CIRCUIT
8 POINT-CONTACT JUNCTION
0
-t.O -0.~ 0 +~ +1.0
COLLECTOR VOLTS
+1~ +20 +25 PARAMETER
I Ue~~~~~~~~~~v.) I {j.e:~~~~.~~~~3v.)
te -UUTTER toon. 30A
RESISTANCE
Figure 7 ~f5,~1~c 300I\ 300A
OUTPUT CHARACTERISTICS OF tc. COLLECTOR
RESISTANCE
20000 n. t MEGOHM
TYPICAL JUNCTION TRANSISTOR
~.::.;~~~~f:JION 2.0 0.97
Figure 9
The output characteristics of a typical point- LOW FREQUENCY EQUIVALENT
contact transistor are shown in figure 6. The <Common Basel CIRCUIT FOR POINT
CONTACT AND JUNCTION
pentode characteristics are less evident, 'lnd the TRANSISTOR
output impedance is much lower, with the
range of linear operation extending down to
a collector voltage of 2 or 3. Of greater prac-
tical interest, however, is the input character- convenient equivalent circuit for the low fre-
istic curve with short-circuited, or nearly short- quency small signal performance of both point-
circuited input, as shown in figure 8. It is contact and junction transistors is shown in
this point-contact transistor characteristic of figure 9. r., rb, and r,, are dynamic resistances
having a region of negative impedance that whi<;h can be associated with the emitter base
lends the unit to use in switching circuits. The and collector regions of the transistor: The
transistor circuit may be made to have two current generator ai., represents the transport
one or zero stabl!' operating points, dependin~ of charge from emitter to collector. Typical
upon the bias voltages and the load impedance values of the equivalent circuit are shown in
used. figure 9.
Equivalent Circuit As is known from net- Transistor There are three basic transis-
of a Transistor work theory, the small Configurations tor configurations: grounded
signal performance of base connection, grounded
any device in any network can be represented emitter connection, and grounded collector
by means of an equivalent circuit. The most connection. These correspond r o u g h 1 y to
grounded grid, grounded cathode, and ground-
ed plate circuits in vacuum tube terminology
.
~
(figure 10) .
~:
Cl) . The grounded base circuit has a low input
~ Impedance and high output impedance, and no
0
~~
> p_has~ reversal of signal from input to output
a:
w orcu1t. The grounded emitter circuit has a
~ .... ?igher input impedance and a lower output
:::!i
w Impedance than the grounded base circuit, and
a reversal of phase between the input and out-
put signal occurs. This circuit usually provides
maximum voltage gain from a transistor. The
?roun~ed collector circuit has relatively high
1nput Impedance, low output impedance, and
no phase reversal of signal from input to out-
Figure 8 put circuit. Power and voltage gain are both
EMITTER CHARACTERISTIC CURVE low.
FOR TYPICAL POINT CONTACT Figure 11 illustrates some practical vacuum
TRANSISTOR tube circuits, as applied to transistors.
96 Transistors and Semi-Conductors THE RADIO
Figure 10
COMPARISON OF BASIC VACUUM TUBE AND TRANSISTOR CONFIGURATIONS
~~
t---1-f~
BLOCKING OSCILLATOR AUDIO AMPLIFIER
CRYSTAL OSCILLATOR
DIRECT-COUPLED AMPLIFIER
Figure 11
TYPICAL TRANSISTOR CIRCUITS
HANDBOOK Transistor Circuitry 97
-E -E
LOAD
;:Nv;;....~-4_:.R:_:E.;_S t S TOR
R2=1oRe
Re =soo-1ooo .n.
50 ..UF
'----.--.--1----.J
-::-
+ (%~~~~~ ;:AL:::;;OR)
0 Figure 12
BIAS CONFIGURATIONS FOR TRANSISTORS.
The voltage divider system of Cis recommended for general transistor use. Ratio of R1/Rz
establishes base bias, and emitter bias is provided by voltage drop across Re.
Battery Polarity is reversed for N-P-N transistors.
wide variations in ambient temperature do not amplifier are given in the drawing. In this case,
occur, the bias system of figure 12B may be the input impedance of the amplifier is quite
used, with the bias resistor connected from low. When used with a high impedance driv-
base to collector. When the collector voltage ing source such as a crystal microphone a step
is high, the base current is increased, moving down input transformer should be employed
the operating point of the transistor down the as shown in figure 13B. The grounded collec-
load line. If the collector voltage is low, the tor circuit of figure 13C provides a high input
operating point moves upwards along the load impedance and a low output impedance, much
line, thus providing automatic control of the as in the manner of a vacuum tube cathode
base bias voltage. This circuit is sensitive to follower.
changes in ambient temperature, and may per- The circuit of a two stage resistance coupled
mit transistor failure when the transistor is amplifier is shown in figure 14A. The input
operated ncar maximum dissipation ratings. impedance is approximately 1100 ohms. Feed-
A better bias system is shown in figure 12C, back may be placed around this amplifier from
where the base bias is obtained from a voltage the emitter of the second stage to the base of
divider, ( R 1, R2), and the emitter is forward the first stage, as shown in figure 14B. A
biased. To prevent signal degeneration, the direct coupled version of the r-c amplifier is
emitter bias resistor is bypassed with a large shown in figure 14C. The input impedance is
capacitance. A high degree of circuit stability of the order of 15,000 ohms, and an overall
is provided by this form of bias, providing the voltage gain of 80 may be obtained with a
emitter capacitance is of the order of 50 JLfd. supply potential of 12 volts.
for audio frequency applications.
It is possible to employ N-P-N and P-N-P
Audio Circuitry A simple voltage amplifier transistors in complementary symmetry circuits
is shown in figure 13. Di- which have no equivalent in vacuum tube de-
rect current stabilization is employed in the sign. Figure 15A illustrates such a circuit. A
e nitter circuit. Operating parameters for the symmetrical push-pull circuit is shown 111
-12 v. -9 V. +12 v
~1]11
"'::' 500K.10K
VOL TAG GAIN== 80 VOLTAGE GAtN: 0.97
INPUT IMPEDANCE ""t' 1200 fl. INPUT IMPEDANCE 'U 300 X Jl
Figure 13
P-N-P TRANSISTOR VOLTAGE AMPLIFIERS
A resistance coupled amplifier employing an inexpensive CK-722 transistor is shown in A. For use with
a high impedance crystal microphone, a step~down translormer matches the low input impedance of the
transistor, as shown in B. The grounded collector configuration of C provides an Input impedance of
about 300,000 ohms.
98 Transistors and Semi-Conductors THE RADIO
0.1M 0.1 M
.tj - CK 722
10JJF
0
_B~
10 K 10JJF
L---V'RNI'--'.... 47K 10K
4.7K lO.UF -
GAIN'V ~ -
Figure 14
TWO STAGE TRANSISTOR AUDIO AMPLIFIERS
The feedback loop of B may be added to the r-c amplifier to reduce distortion, or to control the
audio response. A direct coupled amplifier is shown in C.
figure 15B. This circuit may be used to di- power output obtainable is limited to 0.5 the
rectly drive a high impedance loudspeaker, allowable dissipation of the transistor. The
eliminating the output transformer. A direct product I,E, determines the maximum collector
coupled three stage amplifier having a gain dissipation, and a plot of these values is shown
figure of 80 db is shown in figure 15C. in figure 16B. The load line should always lie
The transistor may also be used as a class under the dissipation curve, and should encom-
A power amplifier, as shown in figure 16A. pass the maximum possible area between the
Commercial transistors are available that will axes of the graph for maximum output condi-
provide five or six watts of audio power when tion. In general, the load line is tangent to the
operating from a 12 volt supply. The smaller dissipation curve and passes through the supply
units provide power levels of a few milli- voltage point at zero collector current. The d-e
watts. The correct operating point is chosen so operating point is thus approximately one-half
that the output signal can swing equally in the the supply voltage.
positive and negative directions, as shown in The circuit of a typical push-pull class B
the collector curves of figure 16B. transistor amplifier is shown in figure 17 A.
The proper primary impedance of the our- Push-pull operation is desirable for transistor
put transformer depends upon the amount of operation, since the even-order harmonics are
power to be delivered to the load: largely eliminated. This permits transistors to
be driven into high collector current regions
E,' without distortion normally caused by non-
R.=--
2P. linearity of the collector. Cross-over distortion
is reduced to a minimum by providing a slight
The collector current bias is: forward base bias in addition to the normal
2P. emitter bias. The base bias is usually less than
Ic-=-- 0.5 volt in most cases. Excessive base bias will
Ee
boost the quiescent collector current and there-
In a class A output stage, the maximum a-c by lower the overall efficiency of the stage.
Figure 15
COMPLEMENTARY SYMMETRY AMPLIFIERS.
N-P-N ond P-N-P transistors may be combined in circuits which hove no equivalent in vacuum tube
design. Direct coupling between cascaded stages using a single power supply source may be employed, as
in C. Impedance of power supply should be extremely low.
HANDBOOK Transistor Circuitry 99
2N 187A
Figure 16
TYPICAL CLASS-A
AUDIO POWER
TRANSISTOR CIRCUIT.
The correct operating paint is
chosen so that output signal can
swing equally in a positive or
negative direction, without ex-
ceeding maximum collector dis-
sipation.
0
The operating point of the class B ampli- configuration (figure 17C) to obtain high
fier is set on the I,=O axis at the point where power output at very low distortions compar-
the collector voltage equals the supply voltage. able with those found in quality vacuum tube
The collector to collector impedance of the circuits having heavy overall feedback. In ad-
output transformer is: dition, the transistor may be directly bolted to
the chassis, assuming a negative grounded
2E, 2 power supply Power output is of the order of
Rc-c=--
Po 10 watts, with about 0.5% total distortion.
In the class B circuit, the maximum a-c R-F Circuitry Transistors may be used for
power input is approximately equal to five radio frequency work provided
times the allowable collector dissipation of the alpha cutoff frequency of the units is
each transistor. Power transistors, such as the sufficiently higher than the operating fre-
2N301 have collector dissipation ratings of quency. Shown in figure 18A is a typical i-f
5.5 watts and operate with class B efficiency amplifier employing an N-P-N transistor. The
of about 67%. To achieve this level of opera- collector current is determined by a voltage
tion the heavy duty transistor relies upon ef- divider on the base circuit and by a bias re-
ficient heat transfer from the transistor case sistor in the emitter leg. Input and output are
to the chassis, using the large thermal capacity coupled by means of tuned i-f transformers.
of the chassis as a heat sink. An infinite heat Bypass capacitors are placed across the bias
sink may be approximated by mounting the resistors to prevent signal frequency degener-
transistor in the center of a 6" x 6" copper or ation. The base is connected to a low im-
aluminum sheet. This area may be part of a pedance untuned winding of the input trans-
larger chassis. former, and the collector is connected to a tap
The collector of most power transistors is on the output transformer to provide proper
electrically connected to the case. For appli- matching, and also to make the performance of
cations where the collector is not grounded a the stage relatively independent of variations
thin sheet of mica may be used between the between transistors of the same type. With a
case of the transistor and the chassis. rate-grown N-P-N transistor such as the G.E.
Power transistors such as the Phi/co T-1041 2N293, it is unnecessary to use neutralization
may be used in the common collector class B to obtain circuit stability. When P-N-P alloy
ADJUST R_ 1<..:FO:..R.=..;;c;;.-w1Kl/'--:!;-c-c_.=-o.3 ~~ ~:
0.4 II. BAS BIAS [CC (MAX.)=t.3!:>A.
Po= 10 WATTS
0
Figure 17
CLASS-B AUDIO AMPLIFIER CIRCUITRY.
The common collector circuit ol C permits the transistor to be bolte<t directly to the chassis for efficient
heat transfer from the transistor case to the chassis.
100 Transistors and Semi-Conductors THE RADIO
10 K 82. K -:-
+9V.
@
Figure 18
TRANSISTORIZED 1-F AMPLIFIERS.
Typical PN-P transistor must be neutralired because of high collector capacitance. Rate
grown N-P-N transistor does not usually require external neutraliring circuit.
Figure 19
AUTOMATIC VOLUME
CONTROL CIRCUIT
FOR TRANSISTORIZED
1-F AMPLIFIER.
A.V.C. LINE
0.1 M -9 v. +:J 10.UF
transistors are used, It 1s necessary to neutra- signal from the collector to the emitter caus-
lize the circuit to obtain stability (figure 18Bl. ing oscillation. Capacitor C tunes the oscillator
The gain of a transistor i-f amplifier will circuit to a frequency 4 55 kc. higher than that
decrease as the emitter current is decreased. of the incoming signal. The local oscillator
This transistor property can be used to control signal is inductively coupled into the emitter
the gain of an i-f amplifier so that weak and circuit of the transistor. The incoming signal
strong signals will produce the same audio is resonated in T, and coupled via a low im-
output. A typical i-f strip incorporating this pedance winding to the base circuit. Notice
automatic volume control action is shown in that the base is biased by a voltage divider
figure 19. circuit much the same as is used in audio fre-
R-f transistors may be used as mixers or quency operation. The two signals are mixed
autodyne converters much in the same manner in this stage and the desired beat frequency of
as vacuum tubes The autodyne circuit is shown 455 kc. is selected by i-f transformer T, and
m figure 20. Transformer T, feeds back a passed to the next stage. Collector currents of
0.6 rna. to 0.8 rna. are common, and the local
oscillator injection voltage at the emitter is m
the range of 0.15 to 0.25 volts, r.m.s.
A complete receiver "front end" capable of
C2
operation up to 23 Me. is shown in figure 21.
r
I
The RCA 2N24 7 drift transistor is used for
I
the r-f amplifier (TR1), mixer (TR2), and
high frequency oscillator (TR3). The 2N247
incorporates an interlead shield, cutting the
interlead capacitance to .003 fLpJd. If proper
shielding is employed between the tuned cir-
T3 cuits of the r-f stage, no neutralization of the
L
stage is required. The complete assembly ob-
tains power from a 9-volt transistor battery.
Note that input and output circuits of the tran-
Figure 20
THE AUTODYNE CONVERTER CIRCUIT sistors are tapped at low impedance points on
USING A 2N168A AS A MIXER. the r-f coils to achieve proper impedance match.
HANDBOOK Transistor Circuitry 101
r-------~------~~~------4r------9
39K 470 39 K 470
Figure 21
RF AMPLIFIER, MIXE.R,
,001
AND OSCILLATOR
STAGES FOR
TRANSISTORIZED
HIGH FREQUENCY
RECEIVER. THE RCA
I
I
I=
I
I
f - 1
L - - - - - - ----'- - - -- I
2N247 DRIFT
I
TRANSISTOR IS
39 K
CAPABLE OF
EFFICIENT OPERATION .05
UP TO 23 Me.
Transistor Sufficient coupling of the proper coupled to the base of the N-P-N transistor,
Oscillators phase between input and output and the emitter of the N-P-N transistor furn-
circuits of the transistor will per- ishes the correct phase reversal to sustain os-
mit oscillation up to and slightly above the cillation. Heavy feedback is maintained be-
alpha cutoff frequency. Various forms of tran- tween the emitter of the P-N-P transistor and
sistor oscillators are shown in figure 22. A the collector of N-P-N transistor. The degree
simple grounded emitter Hartley oscillator hav- of feedback is controlled by R,. The emitter
ing positive feedback between the base and the resistor of the second transistor is placed at the
collector ( 2 2A) is compared to a grounded
+-9V.
base Hartley oscillator ( 22B). In each case
the resonant tank circuit is common to the in-
put and output circuits of the transistor. Self-
bias of the transistor is employed in both these
circuits A more sophisticated oscillator em- ~-t--,~~~~~------+1~
ploying a 2N247 transistor and utilizing a - Q05 O.IM PNP
voltage divider-type bias system (figure 22C) _ 2N247
1N81 1N81-
is capable of operation up to 50 Me. or so.
The tuned circuit is placed in the collector,
= Figure 23
with a small emitter-collector capacitor provid- COMPLEMENTARY HARTLEY
ing feedback to the emitter electrode. OSCILLATOR
A P-N-P and an N-P-N transistor may be P-N-P and N-P-N transistors form high sta-
bility oscillator. Feedback between P-N-P
combined to form a complementary Hartley emitter and N-P-N collector is controlled by
oscillator of high stability (figure 23). The R,. INBI diodes are used as amplitude lim-
iters. Frequency of oscillation is determined
collector of the P-N-P transistor is directly by L, c,-c,.
RFC
-E
RFC
PNP
-E
J
Figure 22
TYPICAL TRANSISTOR OSCILLATOR CIRCUITS
A-Grounded Emitter Hartley
B-Grounded Base Hartley
C-2N247 Oscillator Suitable lor 50 Me. operation.
102 Transistors and Semi-Conductors THE RADIO
m
2N33 P01Nf-CONTACT
POl NT-CONTACT TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR
EE IC1 CHARGING
~ ~ PERIOD
R2 --t ----t--~IE
2 I
C1
E
0 @
Figure 25
RELAXATION OSCILLATOR USING
Figure 24
POINT-CONTACT OR SURFACE
NEGATIVE RESISTANCE OF BARRIER TRANSISTORS.
POINT-CONTACT TRANSISTOR
PERMITS HIGH FREQUENCY
OSCILLATION (50 Mel WITHOUT Relaxation Transistors have almost unlimit-
WITHOUT NECESSITY OF Oscillators ed use in relaxation and R-C os-
EXTERNAL FEEDBACK PATH. cillator service. The negative re-
sistance characteristic of the point contact tran-
center of the oscillator coil to eliminate load- sistor make it well suited to such application.
ing of the tuned circuit. Surface barrier transistors are also widely used
Two germanium diodes are employed as in this service, as they have the highest alpha
amplitude limiters, further stabilizing ampli- cutoff frequency among the group of "alpha-
fier operation. Because of the low circuit im- less-than-unity'" transistors. Relaxation oscilla-
pedances, it is permissible to use extremely tors used for high speed counting require tran-
high-C in the oscillator tank circuit, effectively sistors capable of operation at repetition rates
limiting oscillator temperature stability to var- of 5 Me. to 10 Me.
iations in the tank inductance. A simple emitter controlled relaxation os-
The point-contact transistor exhibits nega- cillator is shown in figure 25, together with
tive input and output resistances over part of its operating characteristic. The emitter of the
its operaing range, due to its unique ability transistor is biased to cutoff at the start of the
to multiply the input current. This character- cycle (point 1 ) . The charge on the emitter ca-
istic affords the use of oscillator circuitry hav- pacitor slowly leaks to ground through the
ing no external feedback paths (figure 24). emitter resistor, R,. Discharge time is deter-
A high impedance resonant circuit in the base mined by the time constant of R.C. When the
lead produces circuit instability and oscillation emitter voltage drops sufficiently low to permit
at the resonant frequency of the L-C circuit. the transistor to reach the negative resistance
Positive emitter bias is used to insure thermal region (point 2) the emitter and collector re-
circuit stability. sistances drop to a low value, and the collector
-E
+E
8.2 K
10 K
0 @
Figure 26
TRANSISTORIZED BLOCKING OSCILLATOR <Al AND ECCLES-JORDAN
BI-STABLE MULTIVIBRATOR (Bl.
High-alpha transistors must be employed in counting circuits to reduce effects of
storage time caused by transit lag in transistor base.
HANDBOOK Transistor Circuitry 103
<OK
PHONES
Figure 28
SCHEMATIC, TRANSISTORIZED BROADCAST BAND (500- 1600 KC.l SUPERHETER'O-
DYNE RECEIVER.
2N109
22.0 K ZP = 300
4 7
CRYSTcl-0
K !J -
PICKUP I
.05
-b- = 2JJF
4.7
1K
Figure 29
HIGH GAIN, LOW DISTORTION AUDI'O AMPLIFIER, SUITABLE FOR USE
WITH A CRYSTAL PICKUP. POWER OUTPUT IS 250 MILLIWATTS.
power may be obtained with a battery supply esting transistor projects will be shown in later
of 12 volts. Peak current drain under maxi- chapters of this Handbook.
mum signal conditions is 40 rna. Other inter-
E&E TECHNI-SHEET
TABLE OF WROUGHT STEEL STANDARD PIPE
(BLACK OR GALVANIZED) RANDOM LENGTHS. 20-21 FEET
106
Classes of Amplifiers 107
I
e ;h:CoUT
I
the stage gain. This expression assumes that
the vacuum tube is operating into a resistive
;.r:: load such as would be the case with an audio
c1N
I
_
... ---"'
I
stage working into a resistance plate load in
the middle audio range.
TRIODE PENTODE OR TETRODE The more complete expression for the input
admittance (vector sum of capacitance and
Figure 1 resistance) of an amplifier operating into any
STATIC INTER ELECTRODE
type of plate load is as follows:
CAPACI-
TANCES WITHIN A TRIODE, PENTODE, Input capacitance = Cgk + ( 1 + A cos e) Cgp
OR TETRODE
Class B A Class B amplifier is biased sub- The difference of potential between grid and
Amplifier stantially to cutoff of plate current cathode is called the grid bias of a vacuum
(without exciting voltage) so that tube. There are three general methods of
plate current flows essentially over one-half providing this bias voltage. In each of these
the input voltage cycle. The operating angle methods the purpose is to establish the grid
of plate current flow is essentially 180. The at a potential with respect to the cathode
Class B amplifier is almost always excited which will place the tube in the desired opera-
to such an extent that grid current flows. ting condition as determined by its charac-
teristics.
Class C A Class C amplifier is biased to a Grid bias may be obtained from a source of
Amplifier value greater than the value re- voltage especially provided for this purpose,
quired for plate current cutoff and as a battery or other d-e power supply. This
is excited with a signal of such amplitude method is illustrated in figure 2A, and is
that grid current flows over an appreciable known as fixed bias.
period of the input voltage waveshape. The A second biasing method is illustrated in
angle of plate current flow in a Class C am- figure 2B which utilizes a cathode resistor
plifier is appreciably less than 180, or in across which an IR drop is developed as a
other words, plate current flows appreciably result of plate current flowing through it. The
HANDBOOK Amplifier Distortion 1 09
. '"'J
I I
current which flows at this value of bias, as OUTPUT
SIGNAL
found from the tube characteristic curves.
A capacitor is shunted across the bias resistor
to provide a low impedance path to ground for
the a-c component of the plate current which
Figure 3
results from an a-c input signal on the grid.
Illustration of the effect of phase distortion
The third method of providing a biasing
on input wave containing a third harmonic
voltage is shown in figure 2C.' and is c~lled
signal
grid-leak bias. During the portion of the I_n~mt
cycle which causes the grid. to be positive
with respect to the cathode, gnd current flows
a two stage amplifier. Although the amplitudes
from cathode to grid, charging capacitor C~.
of both components are amplified by identical
When the grid draws current, the grid-to-~at?o.de
resistance of the tube drops from an mflmte ratios, the output waveshape is considerably
different from the input signal because the
value to a very low value, on the order of
1,000 ohms or so, making the chargin~ time phase of the third harmonic signal has. been
constant of the capacitor very short. This en- shifted with respect to the fundamental signal.
This phase shift is known as phase distortion,
ables Cg to charge up to essentially the full
and is caused principally by the coupling cir-
value of the positive input voltage and results
cuits between the stages of the amplifier.
in the grid (which is connected to the low po-
Most coupling circuits shift the phase of a
tential plate of the capacitor) being held es-
sine wave, but this has no effect on the shape
sentially at ground potent~al. During _the nega-
of the output wave. However, when a complex
tive swing of the input signal no gr_Id current
wave is passed through the same coupling
flows and the discharge path of Cg Is through
circuit, each component frequency of the wave-
the grid resistance which has a value of
shape may be shifted in phase by a different
500 000 ohms or so. The discharge time con-
sta~t for C 8 is, therefore, v~ry lon~ in com- amount so that the output wave is not a faith-
ful reproduction of the input waveshape.
parison to the period of the mput signal and
only a small part of the charge on C 8 is lo~t.
Amp Iitude If a signal is passed through a vac-
Thus, the bias voltage developed by the dis-
Distortion uum tube that is operating on any
charge of C 8 is substantially constant an~ ~he
non-linear part of its characteristic,
grid is not permitted to follow the posltive
portions of the input signal. amplitude distortion will occur. In such a re-
gion, a change in grid voltage ~oes. not. result
in a change in plate current which IS duectly
6-4 Distortion in Amplifiers proportional to the cha~ge in grid voltage. ~or
example, if an amplifier is excited wlth a sig-
nal that overdrives the tubes, the resultant
There are three main types of distortion that signal is distorted in amplitude, ~inc e th_e
may occur in amplifiers: ~requen_cy di_stortion, tubes operate over a non-linear portion of theu
phase distortion and amphtude distortion. characteristic.
Frequency Frequency distortion may occur
Distortion when some frequency components
of a signal are amplified more than
others. Frequency distortion occurs at low
6-5 Resistance-
frequencies if coupling capacitors b_etween Capacitance Coupled
stages are too small, or may occ~r at high fre- Audio-Frequency Amp I ifiers
quencies as a result of the shunting effects of
the distributed capacities in the circuit.
Present practice in the design of audio-fre-
Phase In figure 3 an input signal con- quency voltage amplifiers is almost exclusively
Di stortio'h sisting of a fundamental and a to use resistance-capacitance coupling be-
third harmonic is passed through tween the low-level stages. Both triodes and
11 0 Vacuum Tube Amplifiers THE R AD I 0
E =-.U EG
rn RG
REQ=--~~R~~--
1+B.k_+.B.!,_
HIGH FREQUENCY RANGE RG RP
1
Xs =
2TTF (CPK+CGK (OVN.O.MIC)
E=-.U Ec;
ITJ
p
Rc;
Xc
R
a
V1+(Xc/R)
1
""""'2""rr"""'c"'c=---------
= Rc; +
RL RP
.....,R.f.L'";:+-jR~P;:--
Figure 5
Equivalent circuits and gain equations for a triode R-C coupled amplifier stage. In using these
equations, be sure to select the values of mu and Rp which ore proper for the static current and
voltages with which the tube will operate. These values may be obtained from curves published
in the RCA Tube Handbook RC- 76.
HANDBOOK R-C Coupled Amplifiers 111
Figure 7
]]~} MID FREQUENCY RANGE
A= GM REQ
REQ = RL
1+~+~~
Equivalent circuits and
gain equations for a pen-
~
tode R-C coupled amplifier
stage. In using these equa-
A Htc;H FREQ.
tions be sure to select the
values of Gm and RP which __tlDCK(OYNAMIC)
A MID FREQ. V1+ (REQ/Xs)
ore proper for the static
currents and voltages with HIGH FREQUENCY RANGE
which the tube will oper-
ate. These values may be Xs =
2 TTF (CPK+ CGK (DYNAMIC)
~~
obtained from curves pub
lished in the RCA Tube
Handbook RC-16. A LOW FREO.
A MID FREQ.
__L_JRG
Xc =
LOW FREQUENCY RANGE 2 TTF Cc
R= RG + ~~+ ~:
1 12 Vacuum Tube Amplifiers THE R AD I 0
XLL = 0.!1 Xc AT fc
Figure 8
RL = Xc AT f'c
The variation of stage gain with frequency WHERE f C::: CUTOFF FREQUENCY OF AMPLIFIER
in an r-c coupled pentode amplifier for vari
LL = PEAKING INDUCTOR
ous values of plate load resistance
FOR COMPROMISE LOW FREQUENCY EQUALIZATION
Rs = RK (GM V1 RL)
ReCs=RKCK
stages is obtained by taking the product of the
Crc. = 25 TO 50 .UFO. IN PARALLEL WITH 001 MICA
voltage gains of each of the successive stages.
Ceo= CAPACITANCE FROM ABOVE WiTH 001 MICA IN PARALLEL
Sometimes the voltage gain of an amplifier
stage is rated in decibels. Voltage gain is
converted into decibels gain through the use Figure 9
of the following expression: db= 20 logio A, SIMPLE COMPENSATED VIDEO
where A is the voltage gain of the stage. The AMPLIFIER CIRCUIT
total gain of cascaded voltage amplifier stages Resistor RL in conjunction with coil L
can be obtained by adding the number of serves to flatten the high-frequency respons~
decibels gain in each of the cascaded stages. of the stage, while C and R serve to equal-
8
ize the low-frequency respo~se of this sim
R.C Amplifier A typical frequency response
pie video amplifier stage.
Response curve for an R-C coupled audio
amplifier is shown in figure 8.
It is seen that the amplification is poor for the
ohms connected d i r e c t I y between grid and
extreme high and low frequencies. The reduced
cathode of the tube. The cathode is grounded.
gain at the low frequencies is caused by the
Grid current flows at all times, and the effec-
loss of voltage across the coupling capacitor.
In some cases, a low value of coupling capaci- tive input resistance is about one-half the
tor is deliberately chosen to reduce the re resistance value of the grid leak. This circuit
sponse of the stage to hum, or to attenuate is particularly well suited as a high gain
the lower voice frequencies for communication amplifier following low output devices, such
purposes. For high fidelity work the product of as cry s t a I microphones, or dynamic micro-
the grid resistor in ohms times the coupling phones.
capacitor in microfarads should equal 25,000.
R.C Amplifier resistance-capacity A
(ie.: 500,000 ohms x 0.05 p.fd = 25,000).
General Characteristics coupled amplifier can
The amplification of high frequencies falls
off because of the Miller effect of the sub- be designed to provide
a good frequency response for almost any
sequent stage, and the shunting effect of resi
dual circuit capacities. Both of these effects desired range. For instance, such an amplifier
may be minimized by the use of a low value of can be built to provide a fairly uniform ampli-
plate load resistor. fication for frequencies in the audio range of
about 100 to 20,000 cycles. Changes in the
values of coupling capacitors and load re-
Grid Leak Bias The correct operating bias sistors can extend this frequency range to
for High Mu Triodes for a high-mu triode such cover the very wide range required for video
as the 6SL 7, is fairly crit service. However, extension of the range can
ical, and will be found to be highly variable only be obtained at the cost of reduced over
from tube to tube because of minute variations all amplification. Thus the R-C method of
in contact potential within the tube itself. A coupling allows good frequency response with
satisfactory bias method is to use grid leak minimum distortion, but low amplification.
bias, with a grid resistor of one to ten meg Phase distortion is less with R-C coupling
HANDBOOK Video Frequency Amplifiers 11 3
than with other types, except direct coupling. resistance-capacitance coupling is most com-
The R-C amplifier may exhibit tendencies to monly used, there are certain circuit condi
"motorboat" or oscillate if it is used with a tions wherein coupling methods other than
high impedance plate supply. resistance capacitance are more effective.
+B
= =
@ CATHODE COUPLING @ DIRECT COUPLING
Figure 10
INTERSTAGE COUPLING METHODS FOR AUDIO FREQUENCY VOLTAGE AMPLIFIERS
mentioned before, the d-e plate voltage on an stage be isolated from the primary of the cou-
R-C stage is approximately one-half the plate pling transformer. With most types of high-
supply voltage. permeability wide-response transformers it is
necessary that there be no direct-current flow
These two circuit ar
Impedance- Transformer through the windings of the transformer. The
rangements, illustrated
and Resistance Trans- impedance-transformer arrangement of figure
former Coup I in g in figures IOE and IOF, IOE will give a higher voltage output from
are employed when it is the stage but is not often used since the plate
desired to use transformer coupling for the coupling impedance (choke) must have very
reasons cited above, but where it is desired high inductance and very low distributed ca-
that the d-e plate current of the amplifier pacitance in order not to restrict the range of
HANDBOOK Phase Inverters 11 5
.01 Rs Rs
RP2
=
D.C.
INPUT
+
Ec EP
- llf:.:+-+--------+----.::r
Figure 14
+6,3001/, DIRECT COUPLED
D-C AMPLIFIER
Figure 13
VOLTAGE DIVIDER PHASE
INVERTER
same amplitude as the output of V,, but of
opposite phase.
Figure 15
LOFTIN-WHITE
Figure 16
D-C AMPLIFIER
PUSH-PULL D-C AMPLIFIER
WITH EITHER SINGLE-ENDED
OR PUSH-PULL INPUT
-(0. 68 X Ebb)
-ll ll
Where Ebb is the actual plate voltage of
the Class A stage, and ll is the amplifi-
cation factor of the tube.
@ IMPEDANCE COUPLING 3- Locate the Eg bias point on the Ip vs.
EP graph where the Eg bias line crosses
the plate voltage line, as shown in figure
18. Call this point P.
4- Locate on the plate family of curves the
value of zero-signal plate current, IP,
corresponding to the operating point, P.
5- Locate 2 x I P (twice the value of I p) on
the plate current axis (Y-axis). This
@ TRANSFORMER COUPLING point corresponds to the value of maxi-
mum signal plate current, imax
6- Locate point x on the d-e bias curve at
zero volts (Eg = 0), corresponding to the
value of imax
7- Draw a straight line(x- y) through points
x and P. This line is the load resistance
line. Its slope corresponds to the value
IMPEDANCE-TRANSFORMER COUPLING
of the load resistance.
8- Load Resistance, (in ohms)
emax- em in
RL =. .
lmax - lmin
25 0
Tl
0
"
Vl
W200
a:
g"' "'
I
0
w
Q_
0
;,. II- N
'I
0
:; ii
<(
" '
~150 0
7
~
!MAX
~ Figure 19
0
I 0
~0 ? Normal single-ended pentacle or beam tetrocle
,.
-t+--7- I HI ~.-"'"" '
i2
'
audio-frequency power output stage.
.~:I
- :"1:1;,c p
lMIN.
0
-~ fA'- wV
I
It Iilii'
'!II"
00"'
&
71'
,._
'-1
m=
1/1 /!;)
J{ '
ri plifier stage. Tubes of this type have largely
replaced triodes in the output stage of re-
1~0
...r
200
A
EIG ~0
12"
1/T
......-
400
H'J 500
ceivers and amplifiers due to the higher plate
efficiency (30%-40%) with which they operate.
EMIN. PLATE VOLTS EMAX.
AVERAGE PLATE CHARACTERISTICS- 2A3
Tetrode and pentode tubes do, however, intro-
duce a considerably greater amount of harmonic
Jl =4.2 Rp = 800 OHMS
distortion in their output circuit, particularly
PLATE DISSIPATION= 15 WATTS
odd harmonics. In addition, their plate circuit
impedance (which acts in an amplifier to damp
LOAD RESISTANCE
loudspeaker overshoot and ringing, and acts
in a driver stage to provide good regulation) is
many times higher than that of an equivalent
triode. The application of negative feedback
POWER OUTPUT acts both to reduce distortion and to reduce
the effective plate circuit impedance of these
tubes.
0. 9 Ep
% 2d harmonic =
lp
and the power output is somewhat less than
Ep X lp
- - - - - (x 100)
2
Figure 18 illustrates the above steps as These formulae may be used for a quick check
applied to a single Class A 2A3 ampli- on more precise calculations. To obtain the
fier stage. operating parameters for Class A pentode am-
plifiers, the following steps are taken:
1- The imax point is chosen so as to fall on
6-11 Single-ended Pentode the zero-bias curve, just above the
Amplifiers "knee" of the curve (point A, figure 20) .
2- A preliminary operating point, P, is deter-
Figure 19 illustrates the conventional cir- mined by the intersection of the plate
cuit for a single-ended tetrode or pentode am- voltage line, Ep, and the line of imax/2.
HANDBOOK Push-Pull Amplifiers 1 21
FIGURE 21
122 Vacuum Tube Amplifiers THE R AD I 0
300 300
tt
p\1/
II
=-i= UAAX
x A
25 0 -~~rl~::::~ i
250
-;;: r-
~
~20 0 200~
H
1/) Vl
w UJ
/1~6EP r-
"'a.w I "'a.
w
~IS 0 I 50 :::;:
<(
:J
_j tJ" ,~
_j
_j
:::;: ~I-
UJ 10 0
1-
""
,,'ll
'lf'-t-- A'
EG-lP
CURVE
'00 ~
:::;:
UJ
<( ,, I
_j
a. ' _j
a.
VALUE OF
_ZERO Sl t;NAL
+r.?$T '
so 50
~'fllcfY -l~r 7{ Ht~~ c TANGE._NT TO
~ CURVE
A fi
.J..'l .A. A' ijl'f\;
o..-r ..-!"' A' ~ B
so 200 -eo -10 -eo -5o -40 -3o -20 -10
'00PLATE 'VOLTS 2SO 300
(EP) GRID VOLTS (EG)
Figure 22
DETERMINATION OF OPERATING PARAMETERS FOR PUSH-PULL CLASS A
TRIODE TUBES
ated Class AB -in other words the tubes may a particular triode tube by the following steps:
be operated with bias and input signals of 1 Erect a vertical line from the plate volt-
such amplitude that the plate current of alter- age axis (x-axis) at 0. 6 Ep (figure 22),
nate tubes may be cut off during a portion of which intersects the Eg = 0 curve. This
the input voltage cycle. If a tube were operated point of intersection (P), interpolated to
in such a manner in a single-ended amplifier the plate current axis (y-axis) may be
the second harmonic amplitude generated would taken as imax. It is assumed for simplifi-
be prohibitively high. cation that imax occurs at the point of
. Push-pull Class AB operation allows a plate the zero-bias curve corresponding to
circuit efficiency of from 45 to 60 per cent to 0.6 Ep-
be obtained in an amplifier stage depending 2- The power output obtainable from the two
upon whether or not the exciting voltage is tubes is:
of such amplitude that grid current is drawn
by the tubes. If grid current is taken on input Power output (P0 )
voltage peaks the amplifier is said to be oper 5
ating Class AB2 and the plate circuit effi-
ciency can be as high as the upper value just where P 0 is expressed in watts, imax in
mentioned. If grid current is not taken by the amperes, and Ep is the applied plate
stage it is said to be operating Class AB 1 and voltage.
the plate circuit efficiency will be toward the
3- Draw a preliminary load line through
lower end of the range just quoted. In all Class
point P to the Ep point located on the
AB amplifiers the plate current will increase
x-axis (the zero p1ate current line). This
from 40 to 150 per cent over the no-signal load line represents J,i of the actual plate-
value when full signal is applied.
to-plate load of the Class A tubes. There-
fore:
of tubes especially designed for Class B audio a point at about the same amount of plate
amplifiers have been developed which require current mentioned above, just to the
zero average grid bias for their operation. The right of the region where the Ib line
811A, 838, 805, 809, HY-5514, and TZ-40 are takes a sharp curve downward. This will
examples of this type of tube. All these so- be the first trial point, and the plate
called "zero-bias" tubes have rated operating voltage at the point chosen should be
conditions up to moderate plate voltages not more than about 20 per cent of the
wherein they can be operated without grid d-e voltage applied to the tubes if good
bias. As the plate voltage is increased to plate-circuit efficiency is desired.
to their maximum ratings, however, a small 2- Note down the value of ipmax and epmin at
amount of grid bias, such as could be obtained this point.
from several 4 ~-volt C batteries, is required. 3- Subtract the value of epmin from the d-e
(3), A Class B audio-frequency power ampli- plate voltage on the tubes.
fier or modulator requires a source of plate 4- Substitute the values obtained in the
supply voltage having reasonably good regula- following equations:
tion. This requirement led to the development
of the swinging choke. The swinging choke is ipmax (Ebb - epmin)
P0 = ~ =Power output
essentially a conventional filter choke in 2 from 2 tubes
which the core air gap has been reduced. This
reduction in the air gap allows the choke to (Ebb- e .)
have a much greater value of inductance with
RL =4 . pmm
lpmax
low current values such as are encountered
with no signal or small signal being applied = Plate-to-plate load for 2 tubes
to the Class B stage. With a higher value of
current such as would be taken by a Class B Full signal efficiency (Np) =
stage with full signal applied the inductance
of the choke drops to a much lower value.
With a swinging choke of this type, having
adequate current rating, as the input inductor 78.5 1 -epmin
-- )
(
in the filter system for a rectifier power sup- Ebb
ply, the regulation will be improved to a point
which is normally adequate for a power supply
for a Class B amplifier or modulator stage.
Effects of Speech All the above equations are
Clipping true for sine-wave operating
The following proce-
Cal cui at ion of Operating conditions of the tubes con-
Conditions of Class B dure can be used for cerned. However, if a speech clipper is being
Power Amplifiers the calculation of the used in the speech amplifier, or if it is desired
operating conditions to calculate the operating conditions on the
of Class B power amplifiers when they are to basis of the fact that the ratio of peak power
operate into a resistive load such as the type to average power in a speech wave is approxi-
of load presented by a Class C power ampli- mately 4-to-1 as contrasted to the ratio of
fier. This procedure will be found quite satis- 2-to-1 in a sine wave- in other words, when
factory for the application of vacuum tubes as non-sinusoidal waves such as plain speech or
Class B modulators when it is desired to speech that has passed through a clipper are
operate the tubes under conditions which are concerned, we are no longer concerned with
not specified in the tube operating character- average power output of the modulator as far
istics published by the tube manufacturer. The as its capability of modulating a Class-C ampli-
same procedure can be used with equal effec- fier is concerned; we are concerned with its
tiveness for the calculation of the operating peak-power-output capability.
conditions of beam tetrodes as Class AB 2 Under these conditions we call upon other,
amplifiers or modulators when the resting more general relationships. The first of these
plate current on the tubes (no signal condi- is: It requires a peak power output equal to
tion) is less than 25 or 30 per cent of the the Class-C stage input to modulate that input
maximum-signal plate current. fully.
1- With the average plate characteristics The second one is: The average power out-
of the tube as published by the manu- put required of the modulator is equal to the
facturer before you, select a point on shape factor of the modulating wave multi-
the EP = Eg (diode bend) line at about plied by the input to the Class-C stage. The
twice the plate current you expect the shape factor of unclipped speech is approxi-
tubes to kick to under modulation. If mately 0. 25. The shape factor of a sine wave
beam tetrode tubes are concerned, select is 0. 5. The shape factor of a speech wave that
HANDBOOK Class B Parameters 125
80 0
I
..:
;:; l,oo :-- I
0
....- EF = 6. 3 VOLTS D.C.
.!::!- .ol/
0 60 0 0
a:
w 1-- 1--
<.!) "
u
u ....- ~
0
d
~
w
,t;; ----- '-" E.c.s;_;:..2-
Figure 24 0 40 0
~1!3o I
~~~--
.0 I"
1-
Typical Class B a-f amplifier ~
w I I
load line. The load line has
~ ~
--
f.- I-
been drawn on the overage ..J I ~!L.-
~ 200
characteristics of a
tube.
type 811
u
ci
I\
y
-+-- f-K ~
_Ic=+ +20
- --- -- -
~
' +eo
has been passed through a clipper-filter ar- tion shown in figure 25, or by reference to the
rangement is somewhere between 0. 25 and 0. 9 published characteristics on the tubes to be
depending upon the amount of clipping that used. (2) Determine the load impedance which
has taken place. With 15 or 20 db of clipping will be presented by the Class C amplifier
the shape factor may be as high as the figure stage to be modulated by dividing the operating
of 0. 9 mentioned above. This means that the plate voltage on that stage by the operating
audio power output of the modulator will be value of plate current in amperes. (3) Divide
90% of the input to the Class-C stage. Thus the Class C load impedance determined in (2)
with a kilowatt input we would be putting
900 watts of audio into the Class-C stage for
100 per cent modulation as contrasted to per- SAMPLE CALCULATION
haps 250 watts for unclipped speech modula-
tion of 100 per cent. CONDITION: 2 TYPE 611 TUBES, Ebb,= 1000
INPUT TO fiNAL STAI;E, 3!10 W.
PEAK POWER OUTPUT NEEDED= 3~0 + eo..b = 370 W.
Sample Calculation Figure 24 shows a set of FINAL AMPLIFIER Ebb= 2000 V.
Fl NAL AMPLIFIER [ b .175 A. =
far 811 A Tubes plate characteristics for fiNAL AMPLIFIER ZL = _iQQQ_ = 11400Il.
.175
a type SUA tube with a
load line for Class B operation. Figure 25 EXAMPLE: CHOSE POINT ON 811 CHARACTERISTICS JUST
lists a sample calculation for determining the TO RIGHT OF Ebb= Ecc. { POt~r X., F/6. :Z.4 J
IP MAX.= .410 A. EP MIN.::::+ 100
proper operating conditions for obtaining ap- lG MAX.= .tOO A. EG MAX.:::: + 80
proximately 185 watts output from a pair of
the tubes with 1000 volts d-e plate potential. PEAK Po= .410 x (tooo-100) = .410 x 900 = 369 w.
Also shown in figure 25 is the method of de- RL = 4 X _:;>g = 8800 .n.
termining the proper ratio for the modulation Np = 78.5 (1- 1 6~~ )= 76.5 (.9) = 10. o 'lb
transformer to couple between the Bll's or Wo {AVERAGE WITH SINE WAVE) :::: Po(~EAK)=-t84.5W
BllA' s and the anticipated final amplifier
which is to operate at 2000 plate volts and WIN = 1 ~ci.-: = 260 w.
lb (MAXIMUM WITH SINE WAVE) = 260 MA
175 rna. plate current. WG PEAK = . 100 X 80 :::: 8 W.
DRIVING POWER:::: W~ PK = 4 W.
TRANSFORMER:
Modulation TransformerThe method illustrated k- 11400 -
Calculation in figure 25 can be used ZP - 8800 - 1. 29
above by the plate-to-plate load impedance for called upon to deliver power to a varying load,
the modulator tubes determined in (1) above. For best operation of the Class B stage, the
The ratio determined in this way is the sec- grid excitation voltage should not drop as the
ondary-co-primary impedance ratio. (4) Take power taken by the grid circuit increases.
the square root of this ratio to determine the These opposing conditions call for a high or-
secondary-to-primary turns ratio. If the turns der of voltage regulation in the driver stage
ratio is greater than one the use of a step-up plate circuit. In order to enhance the voltage
transformer is required. If the turns ratio as regulation of this circuit, the driver tubes must
determined in this way is less than one a step- have low plate resistance, the driver trans-
down transformer is called for. former must have as large a step-down ratio
If the procedure shown in figure 25 has as possible, and the d-e resistance of both
been used to calculate the operating conditions primary and secondary windings of the driver
for the modulator tubes, the transformer ratio transformer should be low.
calculation can be checked in the following The driver transformer should reflect into
manner: Divide the plate voltage on the mod- the plate circuit of the driver tubes a load of
ulated amplifier by the total voltage swing on such value that the required driving power is
the modulator tubes: 2 (Ebb - emi0 ) . This ratio just developed with full excitation applied to
should be quae close numerically to the trans- the driver grid circuit. If this is done, the
former turns ratio as previously determined. driver transformer will have as high a step-
The reason for this condition is that the ratio down ratio as is consistent with the maximum
between the total primary voltage and the d-e drive requirements of the Class B stage. If
plate supply voltage on the modulated stage the step-down ratio of the driver transformer is
is equal to the turns ratio of the transformer, too large, the driver plate load will be so
since a peak secondary voltage equal co the high that the power required to drive the Class
plate voltage on the modulated stage is re- B stage to full output cannot be developed.
quired to modulate this stage 100 per cent. If the step-down ratio is too small the regula-
tion of the driver stage will be impaired.
Use of Clipper Speech When a clipper speech
Amplifier with Tetrode amplifier is used in Driver Stoge The parameters for the driver
Modulator Tubes conjunction with a Class Calculations stage may be calculated from
B modulator stage, the the plate characteristic curve, a
plate current on that stage will kick to a sample of which is shown in figure 24. The
higher value with modulation(due to the greater required positive grid voltage ( e g-max) for the
average power output and input) but the plate 811A tubes used in the sample calculation is
dissipation on the tubes will ordinarily be found at point X, the intersection of the load
less than with sine-wave modulation. However, line and the peak plate current as found on the
when tetrode tubes are used as modulators, y-axis. This is + 80 volts. If a vertical line
the screen dissipation will be much greater is dropped from point X to intersect the dotted
than with sine-wave modulation. Care must grid current curves, it will be found that the
be taken to insure that the screen dissipa- grid current for a single 8llA at this value of
tion rating on the modulator tubes is not ex- grid voltage is 100 milliamperes (point Y).
ceeded under full modulation conditions with The peak grid driving power is therefore
a clipper speech amplifier. The screen dissipa- 80 x 0.100 = 8 watts. The approximate average
tion is equal to screen voltage times screen driving power is 4 watts. This is an approxi-
current. mate figure because the grid impedance is not
constant over the entire audio cycle.
Practical Aspects af As stated previously, a A pair of 2A3 tubes will be used as drivers,
Class B Modulators Class B audio amplifier operating Class A, with the maximum excita-
requires the driving stage
tion to the drivers occuring just below the
to supply well-regulated audio power to the
point of grid current flow in the 2A3 tubes.
grid circuit of the Class B stage. Since the The driver plate voltage is 300 volts, and the
performance of a Class Bmodulator may easily grid bias is -62 volts. The peak power devel-
be impaired by an improperly designed driver oped in the primary winding of the driver
stage, it is well to study the problems in- transformer is:
curred in the design of the driver stage.
The grid circuit of a Class B modulator may
Peak Power (Pp) ~ 2RL (
p.Eg );z
be compared to a variable resistance which
(watts) Rp + RL
decreases in value as the exciting grid volt-
age is increased. This variable resistance ap- where p. is the amplification factor of the
pears across the secondary terminals of the driver tubes (4.2 for 2A3). E 8 is the peak grid
driver transformer so that the driver stage is swing of the driver stage (62 volts). RP is the
HANDBOOK Cathode Follower Amplifier 127
plate resistance of one driver tube (800 ohms). former may result if the plate load impedance
RL is Yz the plate-to-plate load of the driver of the modulator stage is too low.
stage, and Pp is 8 watts. When the modulator load impedance is too
Solving the above equation for RL, we high, the maximum power capability of the
obtain a value of 14,500 ohms load, plate-to- stage is reduced. An attempt to increase the
plate for the 2A3 driver tubes. output by increasing grid excitation to the
The peak primary voltage is: stage will result in peak-clipping of the audio
wave. In addition, high peak voltages may be
f1Eg built up in the plate circuit that may damage
epri ~ 2RL X---- ~ 493 volts
Rp + RL the modulation transformer.
TRIODE: lJ A = -..,"'J..l'--"R'-"L_ __
JJcF
JJ+1 RL(JJ+1) +Rp
(RK1+RK2) R~
Ro(CA.THOOE) = .UR+, RKt + RK2.+ RL1
PENTODE: Ra(CATHODEF 1
""""G;;"
A = GM ReQ
Figure 27
Equivalent lor pentocle (or tetrode)
factors
cathocle-follower power amplifiers.
pling r-f or i-f energy between two units sepa- FEEDBACK IN DECIBELS= 20 LOG (1 -A 8)
rated a considerable distance. In such an = 20 LOG ~:~ ;:~6: ~~~~% ~~;Ho~~:~~~~:CK
application a coaxial cable should be used to
carry the r-f or i-f energy. One such applica- DISTORTION WITH FEEDBACK:: DISTORT I(~ WI~H~Ir FEEDBACK
tion would be for carrying the output of a v-f-o
to a transmitter located a considerable dis-
tance from the operating position. Another WHERE>
application would be where it is desired to
R 0 =OUTPUT IMPEDANCE OF AMPLIFIER WITH FEEDBACK
feed a single-sideband demodulator, an FM
RN:: OUTPUT IMPEDANCE OF AMPLIFIER WITHOUT FEEDBACK
adaptor, or another accessory with inter-
RL =LOAD IMPEDANCE INTO WHICH AMPLIFIER OPERATI:":S
mediate frequency signal from a communica-
tions receiver. A tube such as a 6CB6 con-
nected in a manner such as is shown in figure Figure 28
26D would be adequate for the i-f amplifier FEEDBACK AMPLIFIER RELATIONSHIPS
coupler, while a 6L6 or a 6AG7 could be used
in the output stage of a v-f-o as a cathode
follower to feed the coaxial line which carries
the v-f-o signal from the control unit to the
at the frequency where the feedback voltage
transmitter proper.
is in phase with the input voltage of the am-
plifier. If the gain is equal to or more than
one at the frequency where the feedback volt-
6-15 Feedback Amp Iifiers age is in phase with the input the amplifier
will oscillate. This fact imposes a limitation
It is possible to modify the characteristics upon the amount of feedback which may be
of an amplifier by feeding back a portion of employed in an amplifier which is to remain
the output to the input. All components, cir stable. If the reader is desirous of designing
cuits and tubes included between the point amplifiers in which a large amount of feed-
where the feedback is taken off and the point back is to be employed he is referred to a
where the feedback energy is inserted are book on the subject by H. W. Bode.
said to be included within the feedback loop.
An amplifier containing a feedback loop is Types of Feedback may be either negative
said to be a feedback amplifier. One stage or Feedback or positive, and the feedback volt-
any number of stages may be included within age may be proportional either to
the feedback loop. However, the difficulty of output voltage or output current. The most
obtaining proper operation of a feedback am commonly used type of feedback with a-f or
plifier increases with the bandwidth of the video amplifiers is negative feedback pro-
amplifier, and with the number of stages and portional to output voltage. Figure 28 gives
circuit elements included within the feedback the general operating conditions for feedback
loop. amplifiers. Note that the reduction in distor-
tion is proportional to the reduction in gain of
Gain and Phase-shift The gain and phase the amplifier, also that the reduction in the
in Feedback Amplifiersshift of any amplifier output impedance of the amplifier is somewhat
are functions of fre- greater than the reduction in the gain by an
quency. For any amplifier containing a feed- amount which is a function of the ratio of the
back loop to be completely stable the gain of
such an amplifier, as measured from the input
H. W. Bode, "Network Analysis and Feedback Ampli-
back to the point where the feedback circuit fier Design," D. Van Nostrand Co., 250 Fourth Ave.,
connects to the input, must be less than one New York 3, N.Y.
130 Vacuum Tube Amplifiers THE R AD I 0
IIE3
back to an output pentode or tetrode amplifier
stage. The reduction in hum and distortion
may amount to 15 to 20 db. The reduction in
the effective plate impedance of the stage will
be by a factor of 20 to 100 dependent upon the
operating conditions. The circuit is commonly
used in commercial equipment with tubes such
as the 6SJ7 for V 1 and the 6V6 or 6L6 for V 2 .
08 FEEDBACK : 2.0 LOG [ Rc + RA J~MVZ Ro) J
:: zo LOG ( Rz + RA(v'if;AGE G,t.,IN OF Vz)J 6-16 Vacuum-Tube Voltmeters
GAIN OF BOTH STAGES = ( GMV1 (~)J
R +R,.,
X (GMVZ Ro)
The vacuum-tube voltmeter may be considered
8
to be a vacuum-tube detector in which the
RA = :: ~ :: rectified d-e current is used as an indication
Ra= _R_2_ _ of the magnitude of the applied alternating
GMVz Ro
Ro = REFLECTED LOAD IMPEDANCE ON Vz
voltage. The vacuum tube voltmeter (v.t.v.m.)
consumes little or no power and it may be
Rz:: fEEDBACK RESISTOR (USUALLY ABOUT ~00 K)
calibrated at 60 cycles and used at audio or
OUTPUT IMPEDANCE :: RN Rz radio frequencies with little change in the
(Rz+R...,(GMVzRo))X (1+ ~~)
calibration.
RN = PLATE IMPEDANCE OF Vz
ZERO-ADJUST
'-------iilllllt------'
+
Figure 31
D-C VACUUM TUBE VOLTMETER
Figure 32
BRIDGE-TYPE VACUUM TUBE
VOLTMETER
range switch (figure 31) may precede the v.t.
v.m. The voltage to be measured is applied to
voltage divider, R1, R2, R3, by means of the
"voltage range" switch. Resistor R4 is used microammeter is placed in the cathode circuit
to protect the meter from excessive input of a 12AU7 twin triode. The zero adjust control
voltage to the v.r.v.m. In the plate circuit of sets up a balance between the two sections of
the tube an additional battery and a variable the triode such that with zero input voltage
resistor ("zero adjustment") are used to applied to the first grid, the voltage drop across
balance out the meter reading of the normal each portion of the zero adjust control is the
plate current of the tube. The zero adjustment same. Under this condition of balance the
potentiometer can be so adjusted that the meter will read zero. When a voltage is applied
meter M reads zero current with no input volt- to the first grid, the balance in the cathode
age to the v.t.v.m. When a d-e input voltage circuits is upset and the meter indicates the
is applied to the circuit, current flows through degree of unbalance. The relationship between
the meter, and the meter reading is proportion- the applied voltage on the first grid and the
al to the applied d-e voltage. meter current is linear and therefore the meter
can be calibrated with a linear scale. Since
the tube is limited in the amount of current
The Bridge-type Another important use it can draw, the meter movement is elec-
V.T.V.M. of a d-e amplifier is to tronically protected.
show the exact point of The maximum test voltage applied to the
balance between two d-e voltages. This is 12AU7 rube is about 3 volts. Higher applied
done by means of a bridge circuit with two voltages are reduced by a voltage divider
d-e amplifiers serving as two legs of the which has a total resistance of about 10
bridge (figure 32). With no input signal, and megohms. An additional resistance of 1-megohm
with matched triodes, no current will be read is located in the d-e test prod, there by per-
on meter M, since the IR drops across R1 and mitting measurements to be made in high im-
R2 are identical. When a signal is applied to pedance circuits with minimum disturbance.
one rube, the IR drops in the plate circuits The rectifier portion of the v.t.v.m. is shown
become unbalanced, and meter M indicates in figure 34. When a-c measurements are de-
the unbalance. In the same way, two d-e volt- sired, a 6AL5 double diode is used as a full
ages may be compared if they are applied to wave rectifier to provide a d-e voltage pro-
the two input circuits. When the voltages are portionalto the applied a-c voltage. This d-e
equal, the bridge is balanced and no current voltage is applied through the voltage divider
flows through the meter. If one voltage changes, string to the 12AU7 tube causing the meter to
the bridge becomes unbalanced and indication indicate in the manner previously described.
of this will be noted by a reading of the meter. The a-c voltage scales of the meter are cali-
brated in both RMS and peak-to-peak values.
A Modern VTVM For the purpose of analysis, In the 1.5, 5, 15, 50, and 150 volt positions
the operation of a modern of the range switch, the full a-c voltage being
v.r.v.m. will be described. The Heathkit V-7A measured is applied to the input of the 6AL5
is a fit instrument for such a description, since full wave rectifier. On the 500 and 1500 volt
it is able to measure positive or negative d-e positions of the range switch, a divider net-
potentials, a-c r-m-s values, peak-to-peak work reduces the applied voltage in order to
values, and resistance. The circuit of this limit the voltage input to the 6AL5 to a safe
unit is shown in figure 33. A sensitive 200 d-e recommended level.
132 THE R AD I 0
z
_,
0
i'1
(/)
o
I
r-
-0
L_~~~~~~~~ I
II~ 't-VMivVVVIMVV'f'N'v-+-WM~r>'0N'fv"NifN
I
Figure 33
HANDBOOK Vacuum Tube Voltmeters 1 33
TO
VTVM
Figure 34
Figure 35
FULL-WAVE RECTIFIER
FOR V.T.V.M. R-F PROBE SUITABLE
FOR USE IN IKC-100 MC
RANGE
The a-c calibrate control (figure 33) is used
to obtain the proper meter deflection for the triode. The meter scale is calibrated in re-
applied a-c voltage. Vacuum tubes develop a sistance (ohms) for this function.
contact potential between tube elements. Such
contact potential developed in the diode would Test Probes Auxiliary test probes may
cause a slight voltage to be present at all be used with the v.t.v.m.
times. This voltage is cancelled out by proper to extend the operating range, or to measure
application of a bucking voltage. The amount radio frequencies with high accuracy. Shown
of bucking voltage is controlled by the a-c in figure 35 is a radio frequency probe which
balance control. This eliminates zero shift provides linear response to over 100 mega
of the meter when switching from a-c to d-e cycles. A crystal diode is used as a rectifier,
readings. and d-e isolation is provided by a .005 uufd
For resistance measurements, a 1.5 volt capacitor. The components of the detector are
battery is connected through a string of multi mounted within a shield at the end of a length
pliers and the external resistance to be meas of coaxial line, which terminates in the d-e
ured, thus forming a voltage divider across input jack of the v.t.v.m. The readings ob-
the battery, and a resultant portion of the tained are RMS, and should be multiplied by
battery voltage is applied to the 12AU7 twin 1.414 to convert to peak readings.
CHAPTER SEVEN
The art and science of the reproduction of As shown in figure 1, the sound wave of
sound has steadily advanced, following the the fork has frequency, period, and pitch. The
major audio developments of the last decade. frequency is a measure of the number of vi-
Public acceptance of home music reproduction brations per second of the sound. A fork tuned
on a "high fidelity" basis probably dates from to produce 261 vibrations per second is tuned
the summer of 1948 when the Columbia L-P to the musical note of middle-C. It is of in-
microgroove recording techniques were intro- terest to note that any object vibrating, moving,
duced. or alternating 261 times per second will pro-
The term high fidelity refers to the repro- duce a sound having the pitch of middle-C.
duction of sound in which the different dis- The pitch of a sound is that property which is
tortions of the electronic system are held below determined by the frequency of vibration of
limits which are audible to the majority of the source, and not by the source itself. Thus
listeners. The actual determination, therefore, an electric dynamo producing 261 c.p.s. will
of the degree of fidelity of a music system is have a hum-pitch of middle-C, as will a siren,
largely psychological as it is dependent upon a gasoline engine, or other object having the
the ear and temperament of the listener. By and same period of oscillation.
large, a rough area of agreement exists as to
what boundaries establish a "hi-fi" system. To
) ) )~
enumerate these boundaries it is first necessary
to examine sound itself.
iII))) ) ) ))))))
7-1 The Nature of Sound
Experiments with a simple tuning fork in TUNIN<; FORK
134
Nature of Sound 135
NOTE c D E F G A B C'
EQUAL-
TEMPERED 2.61.6 293.7 32.9.6 349.2 392.0 440.0 493.9 523.2
SCALE
Figure 2
THE EQUAL-TEMPERED SCALE CON- Figure 3
TAINS TWELVE INTERVALS, EACH OF THE COMPLEX SOUND OF A MUSICAL
WHICH IS 1.06 TIMES THE FREQUEN- INSTRUMENT IS A COMBINATION OF
CY OF THE NEXT LOWEST. THE HALF- SIMPLE SINE-WAVE SOUNDS, CALLED
TONE INTERVALS INCLUDE THE HARMONICS. THE SOUND OF LOWEST
ABOVE NOTES PLUS FIVE ADDITION- FREQUENCY IS TERMED THE FUNDA-
AL NOTES: 277.2, 311.1, 370, 415.3, MENTAL. THE COMPLEX VIBRATION
466.2 REPRESENTED BY THE BLACK OF A CLARINET REED PRODUCES A
KEYS OF THE PIANO. SOUND SUCH AS SHOWN ABOVE.
The Musical The musical scale is composed no matter how complex - can be analyzed
Scale of notes or sounds of various into pure tones, and can be reproduced by a
frequencies that bear a pleasing group of sources of pure tones. The number
aural relationship to one another. Certain com- and degree of the various harmonics of a tone
binations of notes are harmonious to the ear and their phase relationship determine the
if their frequencies can be expressed by the quality of the tone.
simple ratios of 1:2,2:3, 3:4, and 4:5. Notes For reproduction of the highest quality, these
differing by a ratio of 1 :2 are said to be sep- overtones must be faithfully reproduced. A mu-
arated by an octave. sical note of 523 cycles may be rich in twen-
The frequency interval represented by an tieth order overtones. To reproduce the origi-
octave is divided into smaller intervals, form- nal quality of the note, the audio system must
ing the musical scales. Many types of scales be capable of passing overtone frequencies of
have. been proposed and used, but the scale of the order of 11,000 cycles. Notes of higher
the piano has dominated western music for the fundamental frequency demand that the audio
last hundred or so years. Adapted by J. S. system be capable of good reproduction up to
Bach, the equal-tempered scale (figure 2) has the maximum response limit of the human
twelve notes, each differing from the next by ear, in the region of 15,000 cycles.
the ratio 1: 1.06. The reference frequency, or
Reproduction Many factors enter into the
American Standard Pitch is A, or 440.0 cycles.
Limitations problem of high quality audio
Harmonics and The complex sounds pro- reproduction. Most important
Overtones duced by a violin or a wind of these factors influence the overall design of
instrument bear little resem- the music system. These are:
blance to the simple sound wave of the tuning !-Restricted frequency range.
fork. A note of a clarinet, for example (when 2-Nonlinear distortions.
viewed on an oscilloscope) resembles figure 3. 3-Transient distortion.
Vocal sounds are even more complex than this. 4-Nonlinear frequency response.
In 1805 Joseph Fourier advanced his monu- 5-Phase distortion.
mental theorem that made possible a mathe- 6-Noise, "wow", and "flutter".
matical analysis of all musical sounds by show- A restricted frequency range of reproduction
ing that even the most complex sounds are will tend to make the music sound "tinny"
made up of fundamental vibrations plus har- and unrealistic. The fundamental frequency
monics, or overtones. The tonal qualities of range covered by the various musical instru-
any musical note may be expressed in terms of ments and the human voice lies between 15
the amplitude and phase relationship between cycles and 9,000 cycles. Overtones of the in-
the overtones of the note. struments and the voice extend the upper
To produce overtones, the sound source must audible limit of the music range to 15,000
be vibrating in a complex manner, such as is cycles or so. In order to fully reproduce the
shown in figure 3. The resulting vibration is musical tones falling within this range of fre-
a combination of simple vibrations, producing quencies the music system must be capable of
a rich tone having fundamental, the octave flawlessly reproducing all frequencies within
tone, and the higher overtones. Any sound - the range without discrimination.
136 High Fidelity Techniques THE RADIO
50 100 200 500 1000 2000 5000 50 100 200 500 1000 2000 5000
w
w 0
0 ::>
::> 1--
I-
.J
a.
::;
<(
+2 0
+1 5
~
+1 0
I :
10
0 +s ~ I
"RIAA EQUALIZER CURVE
I
~---
::> 0 I Figure S
a.
1--
I -.........b MODERN PHONOGRAPH RECORD EM-
::>- 5 I
0 I l" PLOYS CONSTANT AMPLITUDE CUT
w -1 0 t-
> I BELOW CROSSOVER POINT AND HIGH
~-1 0 I
FREQUENCY PRE-EMPHASIS (BOOST)
T~ "
<(
' I
t
.J
ABOVE CROSSOVER FREQUENCY
w-2
0::
I ,1-:,~ 1;;,~-~YBACK CURVE I '\
-2o
Sf--+ l
-3 0
10 20
i
40
II'
70 100
II IIIIi
300 500 1000 3000
I
10000 30000
FREQUENCY. CPS
The Phonograph The most popular types
Pickup of pickup cartridges in
and a constant amplitude groove was cut below use today are the high
this frequency (figure 5Bl. This system does impedance crystal unit, and the low tm-
not reproduce the higher audio notes, since the pedance variable reluctance cartridge. The
recording level rapidly drops into the surface crystal pickup consists of a Rochelle salt
noise level of the record as the cutting fre- element which is warped by the action of
quency is raised. The modern record employs the phonograph needle, producing an elec-
preemphasis of the higher frequencies to boost trical impulse whose frequency and ampli-
them out of the noise level of the record tude are proportional to the modulation of
(figure 5C). When such a record is played the record groove. One of the new "transducer"
back on properly compensated equipment, the crystal cartridges is shown in figure 6. When
audio level will remain well above the back- working into a high impedance load, the out-
ground noise level, as shown in figure 5D. put of a high quality crystal pickup is of the
138 High Fidelity Techniques THE RADIO
Figure 8
Figure 6 "RELUCTANCE" CARTRIDGE IS
NEW CRYSTAL "TRANSDUCER" STANDARD PICK-UP FOR
CARTRIDGE PROVIDES HIGH- MUSIC SYSTEM.
FIDELITY OUTPUT AT RELATIVELY Low stylus pressure of four grams insures
HIGH LEVEL minimum record wear. Dual stylus is used
having two needle tip diameters for long
playing and 78 R.P.M. recordings.
order of one-half volt or so. Inexpensive crystal
units used in 78 r.p.m. record changers and therefore, are designed to have interchangeable
ac-dc phonographs may have as much as two cartridges or needles to accomodate the dif-
or three volts peak output. The frequency re- ferent groove widths.
sponse oi a typical high quality crystal pickup
is shown in figure 7. 7-3 The High Fidelity Amplifier
The variable reluctance pickup is shown in
figure 8. The reluctance of the air gap in a A block diagram of a typical high fidelity
magnetic circuit is changed by the movement system is shown in figure 10. A preamplifier
of the phonograph needle, creating a variable is used to boost the output level of the phono-
voltage in a small coil coupled to the magnetic graph pickup, and to permit adjustment of in-
lines of force of the circuit. The output im- put selection, volume, record compensation,
pedance of the reluctance cartridge is of the and tone control. The preamplifier may be
order of a few hundred ohms, and the output mounted directly at the phonograph turntable
is approximately 10 millivolts. position, permitting the larger power amplifier
For optimum performance, an equalized pre- to be placed in an out of the way position.
amplifier stage is usually employed with the The power amplifier is designed to operate
reluctance pickup. The circuit of a suitable unit from an input signal of a volt or so derived
is shown in figure 9. Equalization is provided from the preamplifier, and to build this signal
by Rs, R., and C3, with a low frequency cross- to the desired power level with a minimum
over at about 500 cycles. Total equalization is amount of distortion. Maximum power output
15 db. High frequency response may be limited levels of ten to twenty watts are common for
by reducing the value of R, to 5,000- 15,000 home music systems.
ohms. The power supply provides the ,smoothed,
The standard pickup stylus for 78 r.p.m. d-e voltages necessary for operation of the pre-
records has a tip radius of .0025 inch, whereas amplifier and power amplifier, and also the
the microgroove (33 113 and 45 r.p.m.) stylus
,
has a tip radius of .001 inch. Many pickups,
OUTPUT
rll::::::
141ZH==+t
2.0
-1-1
50 100
Figure 1
2.00 500 1000 2000 5000
FREQUENCY (cps)
10000
B+ 100 V.
IPHONOGRAPH :-=t_
L__ _j I -, ~.~
L'":__j~
PREAMPLIFIER..__ AMPLIFIER w
r---~ Vl
z
0
Q_
~ -10f--t---+
a:
-~OL___L _ _ _ j _ L _ L_ _t_ _ __J__ _ J __ _ _ L _ _
r
R3 er is a function of the design and construction
of the speaker enclosure or cabinet that mounts
the reproducer.
EQUIVALENT CIRCUITS
Tone Equalizer networks are em-
R>
C~ R~
R3
C1
our. 1 }ouT
overall frequency response, 2) -to compensate
for inherent faults in the program material,
3 ) -or merely to satisfy the hearing preference
= -= l I of the listener. The usual compensation net-
works are combinations of RC and RL net-
Figure 11 works that provide a gradual attenuation over
SIMPLE R-C CIRCUITS MAY BE a given frequency range. The basic RC net-
USED FOR BASS AND TREBLE works suitable for equlizer service are shown
BOOST OR ATTENUATION. in figure 11. Shunt capacitance is employed
for high frequency attenuation, and series
filament voltages (usually a-c) for the heaters capacitance is used for low frequency atten-
of the various amplifier tubes. uation. A combination of these simple a-c
The loudspeaker is a device which couples voltage dividers may be used to provide almost
the electrical energy of the high fidelity sys- any response, as shown in figure 12. It is
tem to the human ear and usually limits the common practice to place equalizers between
overall fidelity of the complete system. Great two vacuum tubes in the low level stages of
advances in speaker design have been made in the preamplifier, as shown in figure 13. Bass
the past years, permitting the loudspeaker to and treble boost and attenuation of the order
.04
r.--....--lf-- OUTPUT
220 K
Figure 13
BASS AND TREBLE LEVEL 3.3K
CONTROLS, AS
EMPLOYED IN THE
HEATHKIT WA-P2
PREAMPLIFIER.
B+
18K
t--"{\/1/'----t"---jh:-- 0 U T PUT
5
BASS TREBLE
Figure 14
TRANSISTORIZED HIGH-FIDELITY PREAMPLIFIER FOR USE WITH
RELUCTANCE PHONOGRAPH CARTRIDGE.
+II 0
-..... Loudness The minimum threshold of
./"
+100 PAl N LEVEL Compensoton hearing and the maximum
~ +9 0 threshold of pain vary great-
:J +-8 0 ly with the frequency of the sound as shown
uJ
> +7 0 in the Fletcher-Munson curves of figure 15.
uJ
_j
~
+6 0
+5 0
" To maintain a reasonable constant tonal bal-
ance as the intensity of the sound is changed
Vl +4 0
z
uJ +3 0
f.-
~ +2 0
"" ~
1'-v,/~~~~~N~lMtT OF
it is necessary to employ extra bass and treble
boost as the program level is decreased. A
0 +I 0 "'-....1 1/ simple variable loudness control is shown in
z _b, _/ figure 16 which may be substituted for the
:::J 0
0 ordinary volume control used in most audio
Vl -1 0 !"-=:
2.0 50 100 2.00 500 1 00 2000 5000 10000
20000 equipment.
FREQUENCY (CPS)
IN PUT >----1
0.2
OUTPUT
Z
~
V')
:i!
~-1
_
o
5
/"-:' 11"+I L':'::c
__j______J_
alL :
L"o. ~j.----,
L LsPEAKER --t----t- '1
RJESPONSJE
~--~--~--~--~--~--~--L---~
_b
~~ ~
,
uJ
:.::
<!
uJ
R1 :E----<>--1'!'!'--' Q_
Vl
500K 100K R2.
IM
10 K
.03 "'J:
s"
uJ
v
R1-R2-R~~ THREE SECTION POTENTIOMETER, IRC
z
TYPE, BUILT OF THE FOLLOWINGi <!
0
Rt-/RC PQn-133 uJ
Q_
R2-/RC MULTISECTION MTJ-137 ::;;
R~-IRC MULTISECT/ON M13-1Z8
FREQUENCY (cps)
Figure 16
VARIABLE LOUDNESS CONTROL FOR Figure 17
USE IN LOW IMPEDANCE PLATE IMPEDANCE AND FREQUENCY
CIRCUITS. MAY BE PURCHASED RESPONSE OF "4-0HM" 12-INCH
AS IRC TYPE LC-1 LOUDNESS SPEAKER PROPERLY MOUNTED IN
CONTROL. MATCHING BAFFLE.
HANDBOOK High Fidelity Amplifier 141
FEEDBACK RESISTOR
Figure 18
TYPICAL TRIODE
AMPLIFIER WITH
FEEDBACK LOOP.
~~---,~O~K----~----~~K~------._--~~i~i:MA
:~~F~ ~~~~~
*=MATCHED PAIR RESISTORS
1 15 V, 'V
varying load of two to nearly one hundred Shown in figure 18 is a basic push-pull
ohms to the output stage (figure 17). It is triode amplifier, using inverse feedback around
necessary to employ a high quality output the power output and driver stage. A simple
transformer to match the loudspeaker load to triode inverter is used to provide 180-degree
the relatively high impedance plate circuit of phase reversal to drive the grid circuit of the
the power amplifier stage. In general, push- power amplifier stage. Maximum undistorted
pull amplifiers are employed for the output power output of this amplifier is about 8 watts.
stage since they have even harmonic cancelling A modification of the basic triode amplifier
properties and permit better low frequency is the popular Williamson circuit (figure 19)
response of the output transformer since there developed in England in 1947. This circuit
is no d -c core saturation effect present. rapidly became the "standard of comparison"
To further reduce the harmonic distortion in a few short years. Pentode power tubes are
and intermodulation inherent in the amplifier connected as triodes for the output stage, and
system a negative feedback loop is placed negative feedback is taken from the secondary
around one or more stages of the unit. Fre- of the output transformer to the cathode of
quency response is thereby improved, and the the input stage. Only the most linear portion
output impedance of the amplifier is sharply of the tube characteristic curve is used. Al-
reduced, providing a very low source im- though that portion has been extended by
pedance for the loudspeaker. higher than normal plate supply voltage, it
FEEDBACK RESISTOR
5 K-15K
807
~a +400 v.
AT 140 MA.
Figure 19
U. S. VERSION OF BRITISH "WILLIAMSON" AMPLIFIER PROVIDES 10 WATTS POWER
OUTPUT AT LESS THAN 2% INTERMODULATION DISTORTION. 6SN7 STAGE USES
DIRECT COUPLING.
142 High Fidelity Techniques THE RADIO
807/5881 TO FEEDBACK
CIRCUIT
FROM
6SN7C.T
PHASE
INVERTER
~~._--~~~~~~
I~0"""'
0.2.&
807/5881
NOTE: PIN CONNECTIONS ARE
FOR 807 ruBES
+400V.
Figure 20
"ULTRA-LINEAR" CONFIGURATION OF WILLIAMSON AMPLIFIER DOUBLES POWER OUT-
PUT, AND REDUCES IM LEVEL. SCREEN TAPS ON OUTPUT TRANSFORMER PERMIT
"SEMI-TETRODE" OPERATION.
is only a fraction of the curve normally used tortion may be obtained with this circuit
in amplifiers. Thus a comparatively low output (figure 20) .
power level is obtained with tubes capable of
much more efficient operation under less 7-4 Amplifier Construction
stringent requirements. With 400 volts ap- Wiring Assembly and layout of high
plied to the output stage, a power output of 10 Techniques fidelity audio amplifiers fol-
watts may be obained wtih less than 2% inter- lows the general technique des-
modulation distortion.
cribed for other forms of electronic equipment.
A recent variation of the Williamson cir-
Extra care, however, must be taken to insure
cuit involves the use of a tapped output trans- that the hum level of the amplifier is extreme-
former. The screen grids of the push-pull am-
ly low. A good hi-fi system has excellent re-
plifier stage are connected to the primary taps,
sponse in the 60 cycle region, and even a
allowing operating efficiency to approach that
minute quantity of induced a-c voltage will be
of the true pentode. Power output in excess
disagreeably audible in the loudspeaker. Spur-
of 25 watts at less than 2% intermodulation dis-
ious eddy currents produced in the chassis by
the power transformer are usually responsible
for input stage hum.
To insure the lowest hum level, the power
transformer should be of the "upright" type
instead of the "half-shell" type which can
wuple minute voltages from the windings to
a steel chassis. In addition, part of the windings
of the half-shell type project below the chassis
where they are exposed to the input wiring of
the amplifier. The core of the power trans-
former should be placed at right angles to the
core of a nearby audio transformer to reduce
spurious coupling between the two units to a
minimum.
It is common practice in amplifier design
to employ a ground bus return system for all
audio tubes. All grounds are returned to a
single heavy bus wire, which in turn is
grounded at one point to the metal chassis.
Figure 21 This ground point is usually at the input jack
"BABY HI-FI" AMPLIFIER IS DWARFED
BY 12-INCH SPEAKER ENCLOSURE of the amplifier. When this system is used,
This miniature music system is capable of ex- a-c chassis currents are not coupled into the
cellent performance in the small home or
apartment. Preamplifier, bass and treble con- amplifying stages. This type of construction is
trols, and volume control are all incorporated illustrated in the amplifiers described later in
in the unit. Amplifier provides 4 watts output
at 4% IM distortion. this chapter.
HANDBOOK Amplifier Construction 143
12AU7
.05 220 .01
10 K VOLUME
CONTROL
BASE TREBLE
L-C~O~N~T~R~O~L___c~O~N~T~R~O~L~------~+~7 ~
5 s~v.~.-+~~~~+205V.
4;gi w
~
1. ALL RESISTORS 0.5 WATT
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
2. ALL CAPACITOR VALUES IN MF
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
3. RESISTORS MARKED *ARE
MATCHED PAIRS
Figure 22
SCHEMATIC, "BABY HI-FI" AMPLIFIER
T,-260-0-260 volts at 90 ma., 6.3 volts at 4.0 CH,-1.5 henty at 200 ma. Chicago Standatd C-2327.
amp., upright mounting. Chicago-Standatd C,A-B-C-30-20-10 p.fd. 350 volt. Malloty Fp-330.7
PC-8420.
T:-10 K, CT. to 8, 16 ohms. Peerless (A/tee) NOTE-Feedback loop returns to 8 ohm tap on Tz
S-510F. when 8 ohm speaker is used.
Care should be taken to reduce the capaci- one watt in a high efficiency speaker will pro-
tance to the chassis of high impedance circuits, vide a comfortable listening level for a small
or the high frequency response of the unit will room, and levels in excess of two or three watts
suffer. Shielded "bath-tub" type capacitors are uncomfortably loud to the ear. The "Baby
should not be used for interstage coupling ca- Hi-Fi" amplifier has been designed for use
pacitors. Tubular paper capacitors are satis- in the small home, and will provide excellent
factory. These should be spaced well away from quality at a level high enough to rattle the
the chassis. windows.
It is a poor idea to employ the chassis as a Designed around the new Electro-Voice min-
common filament return, especially for low iature ceramic cartridge, the amplifier will pro-
level audio stages. The filament center-tap of vide over 4 watts power, measured at the sec-
the power transformer should be grounded, ondary of the output transformer. At this level,
and twisted filament wires run to each tube the distortion figure is below 1%, and the IM
socket. High impedance audio components and figure is 4%. At normal listening levels, the IM
wiring should be kept clear of the filament is much lower, as shown in figure 24.
lines, which may even be shielded in the vicin- The Amplifier The schematic of the ampli-
ity of the input stage. In some instances, the Circuit fier is shown in figure 22.
filament center tap may be taken from the arm
Bass and treble boost con-
of a low resistance, wirewound potentiometer
trols are incorporated in the circuit, as is the
placed across the filament pins of the input
volume control. A dual purpose 12AU7 double
tube socket. The arm of this potentiometer is
triode serves as a voltage amplifier with cath-
grounded, and the setting of the control is ad-
justed for minimum speaker hum. ode degeneration. A simple voltage divider
network is used in the grid circuit to prevent
7-5 The 11
Baby Hi Fi11 amplifier overloading when the ceramic cart-
ridge is used. The required input signal for
A definite need exists for a compact, high maximum output is of the order of 0.3 volts.
fidelity audio amplifier suitable for use in the The output level of the Electro-Voice cartridge
small home or apartment. Listening tests have is approximately twice this, as shown in figure
shown that an average power level of less than 7. The use of the high-level cartridge elimin-
144 High Fidelity Techniques THE RADIO
Figure 23
UNDER-CHASSIS
VIEW OF
"BABY HI-FI"
Low level audio stages are at
upper left, with components
mounted between socket pins
and potentiometer controls.
6X5 socket is at lower cen-
ter of photo with filter
choke CH, at right. Feed-
back resistor Rt is at left
of rectifier socket.
ates the necessity of high gain amplifiers re- output tubes. The feedback loop is run from
quired when low level magnetic pickup heads the secondary of the output transformer to the
are used. Problems of hum and distortion in- cathode of the input section of the phase in-
troduced by these extra stages are thereby verter.
eliminated, greatly simplifying the amplifier. The power supply of the "Baby Hi-Fi" con-
The second section of the 12AU7 is used for sists of a 6X5-GT rectifier and a capacitor in-
bass and treble boost. Simple R-C networks put filter. A second R-C filter section is used
are placed in the grid circuit permitting gain to smooth the d-e voltage applied to the
boost of over 12 db at the extremities of the 12AU7 tubes. A cathode-type rectifier is used
response range of the amplifier. in preference to the usual filament type to pre-
A second 12AU7 is employed as a direct vent voltage surges during the warm-up period
coupled "hot-cathode" phase inverter, capaci- of the other cathode-type tubes.
tively coupled to two 6AQ5 pentode connected Amplifier The complete amplifier is
Construction built upon a small "amplifier
1
2
l_/1""
v I graph of figure 23. The four audio tubes are
placed in a row across the front of the chassis.
I
Viewed from the front, the 12AU7 tubes are
'v 2 3
I
to the left, and the 6AQ5 tubes are to the right.
EQUIVALENT SINE WAVE WATTS
The three section filter capaoitor ( CA, B, C)
is a chassis mounting unit, and is placed be-
Figure 24 tween the rectifier tube and the four audio
INTERMODULATION CURVE FOR tubes. Since the chassis is painted, it is im-
"BABY HI-FI" AS MEASURED ON
HEATHKIT INTERMODULATION portant that good grounding points be made at
ANALYZER. each tube socket. The paint is cleared away
HANDBOOK 11
8 a by H'1- F//
1 145
Figure 25
TYPICAL
INTERMODULATION
TEST OF AUDIO
AMPLIFIER.
Audio tones of two fre-
quencies are applied to in-
put of amplifier under test,
and amplitude of 'sum" or
1
11
dilference" frequency is
measured, providing relative
inter-modulation figure.
beneath the socket bolt heads, and lock nuts of the 10 p,fd., 450-volt filter capacitor. All
are used beneath the socket retaining nuts to B-plus leads are run to this point. Most of the
insure a good ground connection. All ground components of the bass and treble boost system
leads of the first 12AU7 tube are returned to may be mounted between the tube socket ter-
the socket, whereas all grounds for the rest of minals and the terminals of the two potentio-
the circuit are returned to a ground lug of meters. The feedback resistor R1 is mounted
filter capacitor C. between the terminal of the coaxial output
Since the input level to the amplifier is of connector and a phenolic tie-point strip placed
the order of one-half volt, the problem of beneath an adjacent socket bolt.
chassis ground currents and hum is not so When the wiring has been completed and
prevalent, as is the case with a high gain input checked, the amplifier should be turned on,
stage. and the various voltages compared with the
Phonograph-type coax i a 1 receptacles are values given on the schematic. It is important
mounted on the rear apron of the chassis, serv- that the polarity of the feedback loop is correct.
ing as the input and output connections. The The easiest way to reverse the feedback polarity
four panel controls (bass boost, treble boost,
volume, and a-c on) are spaced equidistant
across the front of the chassis.
Amplifier The filament wiring should be
Wiring done first. The center-tap of the
filament winding is grounded to
a lug of the 6X5-GT socket ring, and the 6.3
volt leads from the transformer are attached
to pins 2 and 7 of the same socket. A twisted
pair of wires run from the rectifier socket to
the right-hand 6AQ5 socket (figure 23). The
filament leads then proceed to the next 6AQ5
socket and then to the two 12AU7 sockets in Figure 26
turn. 20-WATT "WILLIAMSON-TYPE
AMPLIFIER PROVIDES ULTIMATE IN
The 12AU7 preamplifier stage is wired next. LISTENING PLEASURE FOR THE
A two terminal phenolic tie-point strip is "GOLDEN EAR."
mounted to the rear of the chassis, holding the Amplifier chassis (left) employs two low level
stages driving push-pull 807 tubes in so-called
12K decoupling resistor and the positive lead 11
U/tra-linear 11
circuit. Power supply is at right.
146 High Fidelity Techniques
INPUT
PUT
470
BUS
NOTES'
1- A~L. RESISTORS 1-WATT UNLESS 5- ALL CAPACITOR VALUES GIVEN IN
OTHERWISE SPEC I Fl EO MFD, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED
1 4 3 2.
2.- RESISTORS MARKED * ARE
e- ~=~~~o:~~~Mrk~ STANCOR A-8072.
MATCHED PAl RS
is to cross-connect the two plate leads of the tion of such a system is not noticeable - even
6AQ5 tubes. If the feedback polarization is to the trained ear - over the results obtained
incorr~t, the amplifier will oscillate at a super- with this low priced amplifier. A full 20 watts
sonic frequency and the reproduced signal will of audio power are obtained over the frequency
sound fuzzy to the ear. The correct connection range of 20 to 50,000 cycles at less than 0.1%
may be determined with the aid of an oscillo- harmonic distortion. At the average listening
scope, as the oscillation will be easily found. level of 1 watt, the frequency response is plus
The builder might experiment with different or minus 1 decibel at 100,000 cycles, assuring
values of feedback resistor R., especially if a true high fidelity response over the entire aud-
speaker of different impedance is employed. ible range. Preamplification and tone compen-
Increasing the value of R. will decrease the sation are not included in this unit, as these
degree of feedback. For an 8-ohm speaker, R, functions are accomplished in the auxiliary
should be decreased in value to maintain the driving amplifier. If a variable reluctance cart-
same amount of feedback. ridge is employed, the preamplifiers of figure
This amplifier was used in conjunction with 9 or figure 14 may be used with this unit.
a General Electric S-1201A 12-inch speaker The Heathkit W A-P2 preamplifier is also
mounted in an Electro-Voice KD6 Aristocrat recommended for general use when several in-
speaker enclosure which was constructed from put circuits are to be employed.
a kit. The reproduction was extremely smooth,
with good balance of bass and treble. The Amplifier The schematic of this ampli-
Circuit fier is shown in figure 27.
7-6 A High Quality It is a "Williamson-type"
amplifier using the so-called "Ultra-linear"
25 Watt Amplifier screen-tap circuit on the output stage. A dual
This amplifier is recommended for the music triode 6SN7-GT serves as a voltage amplifier
lover who desires the utmost in high fidelity. and direct coupled phase inverter. Maximum
Capable of delivering 25 watts output at less signal input to this stage is approximately 0.8
than 1.5% intermodulation distortion, the am- volt, r.m.s. for rated output of the amplifier.
plifier will provide flawless reproduction at The feedback loop from the speaker voice coil
higher than normal listening levels. It is true is returned to the cathode circuit of the input
that other designs have been advocated pro- stage, placing all amplifying stages within the
viding greater power at a lower IM distortion loop.
level. However, the improvement in reproduc- A second 6SN7-GT is used as a push-pull
Figure 28
UNDER-CHASSIS VIEW
OF 20-WATT AMPLIFIER.
807 SOCKETS ARE AT
CENTER, WITH CATHODE
BALANCING
POTENTIOMETER AT
LOWER RIGHT.
Not!t ground bus, starting at
center, top filter capacitor, and
running in loop around under
side of chassis. Bus is grounded
to chassis at input plug (upper
left). Shielded leads run to vol-
ume control (center).
driver stage for the high level output amplifier. sulated from the chassis by fibre mounting
A plate potential of 430 volts is applied to this boards.
stage to insure ample grid drive to the output A common ground bus is used in this am-
stage. Large value coupling capacitors are used plifier, and all "grounds" are returned to the
between all stages to prevent signal degenera- bus, rather than to the chassis. The bus is
tion at the lower audio frequencies. Two 807 grounded at the input jack of the amplifier
beam-power tubes are employed in the final and runs around the underside of the chassis,
amplifier stage. Cathode bias is applied to these ending at the ground terminals of the high
tubes, and the current of the tubes may be voltage filter capacitors. Tie-point terminal
equalized by potentiometer R, in the bias strips are used to support the smaller com-
circuit. ponents, and direct point-to-point wiring is
Degenerative feedback is taken from the sec- used.
ondary of the output transformer and applied Matched pairs of resistors should be used
to the input of the amplifier. The amount of in the balanced audio circuits, and these resis-
feedback is controlled by the value of feed- tors are marked ( *) on the schematic. If possi-
back resistor Ra. A small capacitor is placed ble, measure a quantity of resistors in the store
across R, to reduce any tendency towards high with an ohmmeter, and pick out the pairs of
frequency parasitic oscillation sometimes en- resistors that are most evenly matched. The
countered when long leads are used to connect exact resistance value is not critical within 10%
the amplifier to the loudspeaker. as long as the two resistors are close in value.
An external power supply is used with the Care must be taken when these resistors are
amplifier, delivering 440 volts at a current of soldered in the circuit, as the heat of the sol-
1 7 5 milliamperes, and 6.3 volts at 5 amperes. dering iron may cause the resistance value to
vary. It is wise to grasp the resistor lead with
Amplifier The amplifier is built upon a a long-nose pliers, holding the lead between
Construction steel chassis measuring 9" x the point where the iron is applied and the
7"x2". Punched and drilled body of the resistor. The pliers will act as a
chassis for both the amplifier and power sup- "heat sink", protecting the resistor from exces-
ply may be obtained as standard parts, as speci- sive heat.
fied in figure 2 7, eliminating the necessity of The filament leads are made up of a twisted
considerable metal work. Placement of the pair of wires running between the various
major components may be seen in the top and sockets. Keep the twisted leads clear of the in-
under-chassis photographs. The two cathode put jack to insure minimum hum pickup. The
current jacks, J, and J, are mounted in over- plate leads from the 807 caps pass through
size holes and are insulated from the chassis %-inch rubber grommets mounted in the chas-
with tibre shoulder washers placed on the jack sis to phenolic tie points mounted beneath the
stem, and flat fibre washers beneath the retain- chassis. The plate leads of output transformer
ing nut. The can-type filter capacitors are in- T, attach to these tie points. Be sure you ob-
148 High Fidelity Techniques
5
a supply. Filament and plate voltages for the
Heathkit W A-P2 preamplifier may be derived
from receptacle SO-l. If the preamplifier is not
z
'~
4
0 used, or if another type of preamplifier is to
i=
..: be employed, the center-tap of the 6.3 volt
.J
::J filament winding of power transformer T,
0
0
::;
(green/yellow lead) should be grounded to
a: the chassis of the power supply.
,_
w 2
Wiring of this unit is straightforward, and
z
, no unusual precautions need be taken. It is
wise to attach the amplifier to the supply be-
fore it is turned to limit warm-up voltage
0 excursions.
0 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32
EQUIVALENT SINE WAVE WATTS
Amplifier The amplifier is attached to the
Figure 29
INTERMODULATION CURVE
Operation power supply by a short length
OF 20-WATT AMPLIFIER. of 4-wire cable. Make sure taht
the filament leads (pins 1 and 4, p,) are
serve the color code for these leads, as given made of sufficiently heavy wire to insure that
in figure 2 7, as the proper polarization of the the filaments of the amplifier receive a full
leads is required for proper feedback operation. 6.3 volts. The amplifier should be turned on
When the amplifier wiring is completed, all and all voltages checked against figure 27. A
connections should be checked for accidental speaker or suitable resistive load should be at-
grounds or transpositions. Make sure the meter tached to output terminal strip p,, and a 0-100
jacks are insulated from the chassis. d-e milliammeter plugged into jacks J, and ;,.
Balance potentiometer R, is now adjusted until
The Power A companion power supply for the two readings are the same. Each measure-
Supply the high fidelity amplifier is ment will be very close to 60 milliamperes
shown in figure 30. A cathode- when the currents are balanced. The amplifier
type 5V4-G rectifier is used to limit the warm- is now ready for operation, and has a fidelity
up surge voltages usually encountered in such curve similar to that shown in figure 29.
NOTE: IF HEATHKIT PREAMPLIFIER SOCKET FOR T1- 400-0-400 VOLTS, 2.00 MA .. ~VOLTS,
IS NOT USED, CENTER-TAP WIRE HEATH WA-P2 3 AMP., 8.3 VOLTS, 5. AMP.
(GREEN-YELLOW) OF a.3 FILAMENT PREAMPL.IFIER CHICAGO-STANDARD PC-8412
WINDING OF T1 MUST BE GROUNDED. CH 1- 4.5 HENRY AT 2.00 MA.
CHICAGO-STANDARD C-1411
Figure 30
POWER SUPPLY FOR 20-WATT AMPLIFIER.
CHAPTER EIGHT
Radio frequency
Vacuum Tube Amplifiers
Tuned r-f voltage amplifiers are used in re- first tuned circuit due to its equivalent cou-
ceivers for the amplification of the incoming pled resistance at resonance. The noise volt-
r-f signal and for the amplification of inter- age generated due to antenna radiation resist-
mediate frequency signals after the incoming ance and to equivalent tuned circuit resistance
frequency has been converted to the intermed- is similar to that generated in a resistor due
iate frequency by the mixer stage. Signal fre- to thermal agitation and is expressed by the
quency stages are normally called tuned r-f following equation:
amplifiers and intermediate-frequency stages
are called i-f amplifiers. Both tuned r-f and E02 = 4kTRM
i-f amplifiers are operated Class A and nor-
mally operate at signal levels from a fraction Where: En = r-m-s value of noise voltage over
of a microvolt to amplitudes as high as 10 to the interval ~f
50 volts at the plate of the last i-f stage in a k = Boltzman's constant= 1.374
receiver. X 10" 22 joule per K.
T = Absolute temperature K.
R = Resistive component of imped-
8-1 Grid Circuit
ance across which thermal noise
Considerations is developed.
~f = Frequency band across which
Since the full amplification of a receiver fol- voltage is measured.
lows the first tuned circuit, the operating con-
ditions existing in that circuit and in its cou- In the above equation ~f is essentially the
pling to the antenna on one side and to the frequency band passed by the intermediate fre-
grid of the first amplifier stage on the other quency amplifier of the receiver under consid-
are of greatest importance in determining the eration. This equation can be greatly simpli-
signal-to-noise ratio of the receiver on weak fied for the conditions normally encountered
signals. in communications work. If we assume the fol-
lowing conditions: T = 300 K or 27 C or
First Tuned It is obvious that the highest 80.5 F, room temperature; ~f = 8000 cycles
Circuit ratio of signal-to-noise be im- (the average pass band of a communications
pressed on the grid of the first receiver or speech amplifier), the equation re-
r-f amplifier tube. Attaining the optimum ratio duces to: Er.m.s. = 0.0115 y'Rffiicrovolts. Ac-
is a complex problem since noise will be gen- cordingly, the thermal-agitation voltage ap-
erated in the antenna due to its equivalent pearing in the center of half-wave antenna (as-
radiation resistance (this noise is in addition suming effective temperature to be 300 K)
to any noise of atmospheric origin) and in the having a radiation resistance of 73 ohms is
14 9
150 R-F Vacuum Tube Amplifiers THE R AD I 0
approximately 0.096 microvolts. Also, the ther- lower will be the notse output under a fixed
mal agitation voltage appearing across a 500,- set of conditions.
000-ohm grid resistor in the first stage of a The equivalent noise resistance of a tube
speech amplifier is approximately 8 microvolts must not be confused with the actual input
under the conditions cited above. Further, the loading resistance of a tube. For highest sig-
voltage due to the r m a 1 agitation being im- nal-to-noise ratio in an amplifier the input
pressed on the grid of the first r-f stage in a loading resistance should be as high as possi-
receiver by a first tuned circuit whose reson- ble so that the amount of voltage that can be
ant resistance is 50,000 ohms is approximately developed from grid to ground by the antenna
2.5 microvolts. Suffice to say, however, that energy will be as high as possible. The equi-
the value of thermal agitation voltage appear- valent noise resistance should be as low as
ing across the first tuned circuit when the an- possible so that the noise generated by this
tenna is properly coupled to this circuit will resistance will be lower than that attributable
be very much less than this value. to the antenna and first tuned circuit, and the
It is common practice to match the imped- losses in the first tuned circuit should be as
ance of the antenna transmission line to the low as possible.
input impedance of the grid of the first r-f am- The absolute sensitivity of receivers has
plifier stage in a receiver. This is the condi- been designated in recent years in government
tion of antenna coupling which gives maximum and commercial work by an arbitraty dimension-
gain in the receiver. However, when u-h-f tubes less number known as "noise factor" or N.
such as acorns and miniatures are used at fre- The noise factor is the ratio of noise output
quencies somewhat less than their maximum of a "perfect" receiver having a given amount
capabilities, a significant improvement in sig- of gain with a dummy antenna matched to its
nal-to-noise ratio can be attained by increas- input, to the noise output of the receiver under
ing the coupling between the antenna and first m~asurement having the same amount of gain
tuned circuit to a value greater than that which with the dummy antenna matched to its input.
gives greatest signal amplitude out of the re Although a perfect receiver is not a physically
ceiver. In other words, in the 10, 6, and 2 me realizable thing, the noise factor of a receiver
ter bands it is possible to attain somewhat im- under. measurement can be determined by cal-
proved signal-to-noise ratio by increasing an- culauon from the amount of additional noise
tenna coupling to the point where the gain of (from a temperature-limited diode or other cali-
the receiver is slightly reduced. brated noise generator) required to increase
It is always possible, in addition, to obtain the noise power output of a receiver by a pre-
improved signal-to-noise ratio in a v-h-f re- determined amount.
ceiver through the use of tubes which have
improved input impedance characteristics at Tube Input As has been mentioned in a pre-
the frequency in question over conventional Loading vious paragraph, greatest gain
types.
in a receiver is obtained when
the antenna is matched, through the r-f cou
Noise Factor The limiting condition for sen- pling transformer, to the input resistance of
sitivity in any receiver is the the r-f tube. However, the higher the ratio of
thermal noise generated in the antenna and in tube input resistance to equivalent noise re-
the first tuned circuit. However, with proper sistance of the tube the higher will be the sig-
coupling between the antenna and the grid of nal-to-noise ratio of the stage-and of course,
the tube, through the first tuned circuit, the the better will be the noise factor of the over
noise contribution of the first tuned circuit all receiver. The input resistance of a tube
can be made quite small. Unfortunately, though, is very high at frequencies in the broadcast
the major noise contribution in a properly de- band and gradually decreases as the frequency
signed receiver is that of the first tube. The increases. Tube input resistance on conven
noise contribution due to electron flow and tional tube types begins to become an import
due to losses in the tube can be lumped into ant factor at frequencies of about 25 Me. and
an equivalent value of resistance which, if above. At frequencies above about 100 Me. the
placed in the grid circuit of a perfect tube hav- use of conventional tube types becomes im
ing the same gain but no noise would give the practicable since the input resistance of the
same noise voltage output in the plate load. tube has become so much lower than the equi-
The equivalent noise resistance of tubes such valent noise resistance that it is impossible
as the 6SK7, 6SG7, etc., runs from 5000 to to attain reasonable signal-to-noise ratio on
10,000 ohms. Very high Gm tubes such as the any but very strong signals. Hence, special
6AC7 and 6AK5 have equivalent noise resist- v-h-f tube types such as the 6AK5, 6AG5, and
ances as low as 700 to 1500 ohms. The lower 6CB6 must be used.
the value of equivalent noise resistance, the The lowering of the effective input resist
HANDBOOK R-F Amplifiers 151
~~~~~RB~~~;~~~~y = 1. 2 K
8-2 Plate-Circuit MAXIMUM AMPLITUDE OCCURS AT CRITICAL COUPLING-
Considerations WHENK= -
1
--
VQPQS
Variable-Mu Tubes It is common practice to cases these signals will carry the modulation
in R- F Stages control the gain of a suc- of both the carriers which have been cross
cession of r-f or if am modulated to produce the spurious signal.
plifier stages by varying the average bias on The undesirable effect of cross modulation
their control grids. However, as the bias is can be eliminated in most cases and greatly
raised above the operating value on a conven- reduced in the balance through the use of a
tional sharp-cutoff tube the tube becomes in variablemu tube in all stages which have avc
creasingly non-linear in operation as cutoff of voltage or other large negative bias applied to
plate current is approached. The effect of such their grids. The variable-mu tube has a char
non-linearity is to cause cross modulation be acteristic which causes the cutoff of plate cur
tween strong signals which appear on the grid rent to be grad u a 1 with an increase in grid
of the tube. When a tube operating in such a bias, and the reduction in plate current is ac
manner is in one of the first stages of a re- companied by a decrease in the effective am
ceiver a number of signals are appearing on its plification factor of the tube. Variablemu tubes
grid simultaneously and cross modulation be- ordinarily have somewhat reduced Gm as com
tween them will take place. The result of this pared to a sharp-cutoff tube of the same group.
effect is to produce a large number of spurious Hence the sharp-cutoff tube will perform best
signals in the output of the receiver-in most in stages to which av-c voltage is not applied.
All modern transmitters in the mediumfre that no plate current will flow except when
quency range and an increasing percentage of plate voltage is very low. This, in fact, is the
those in the vhf and uhf ranges consist of fundamental reason why the plate circuit effi-
a comparatively low-level source of radiofre ciency of a Class C amplifier stage can be
quency energy which is multiplied in frequency made high-plate current is cut off at all times
and successively amplified to the desired power except when the plate-to-cathode voltage drop
level. Microwave transmitters are still predom across the tube is at its lowest value. Class
inately of the self-excited oscillator type, but C amplifiers almost invariably operate into a
when it is possible to use rf amplifiers in tuned tank circuit as a load, and as a result
shf transmitters the flexibility of their ap are used as amplifiers of a single frequency
plication will be increased. The following por or of a comparatively narrow band of frequen-
tion of this chapter will be devoted, however, cies.
to the method of operation and calculation of
operating characteristics of rf power ampli Relationships in Figure 2 shows the relation-
fiers for operation in the range of approximate Class C Stage ships between the various
ly 3.5 to 500 Me. voltages and currents over
one c y c 1 e of the exciting grid voltage for a
8-3 Class C R-F Class C amplifier stage. The notation given in
figure 2 and in the discussion to follow is the
Power Amplifiers
same as given at the first of Chapter Six un
der "Symbols for Vacuum Tube Parameters."
The majority of r-f power amplifiers fall into The various manufacturers of vacuum tubes
the Class C category since such stages can publish booklets listing in adequate detail al-
be made to give the best plate circuit efficien- ternative Class C operating conditions for the
cy of any present type of vacuum-tube ampli tubes which they manufacture. In addition,
fier. Hence, the cost of tubes for such a stage operating condition sheets for any particular
and the cost of the power to supply that stage type of vacuum tube are available for the ask
is least for any given power output. Neverthe ing from the different vacuum-tube manufac
less, the Class C amplifier gives less power turers. It is, nevertheless, often desirable to
gain than either a Class A or Class B ampli- determine optimum operating conditions for a
fier under similar conditions since the grid of tube under a particular set of circumstances.
a Class C stage must be driven highly posi- To assist in such calculations the following
tive over the portion of the cycle of the excit paragraphs are devoted to a method of calcu
ing wave when the plate voltage on the ampli lacing Class C operating conditions which is
fier is low, and must be at a large negative moderately simple and yet sufficiently accu
potential over a large portion of the cycle so rate for all practical purposes.
HANDBOOK Class C R-F Amplifiers 1 53
7. 0
J
0 0
j
l
lL _1
0 . 0 0 7. 0
~ i=
< ~
a:
v a:
v
v '\
"\
0 .0
v
./.
"' "'
v f't...
3. 0
.0
r-t:-:
1.> 1.6 1.& 1.0 -1.0 -1.~ - 2.0 2.> - 30
RATIO ~~~
Figure 3 Figure 4
Relationship between the peak value of the Relationship between the ratio of the peak
fundamental component of the tube plate cur- value of the fundamental component of the
rent, and average plate current; as compared grid excitation voltage, and the average grid
to the ratio of the instantaneous peak value bias; as compared to the ratio between in-
of tube plate current, and average plate stantaneous peale gricl current and average
current grid current
amount of artificial cooling required is fre- 2. Determine plate input from: Pin =
quendy less than for low-efficiency operation. Pout/Np.
On the other hand, high-efficiency operation
usually requires more driving power and in 3. Determine plate dissipation from:
volves the use of higher plate voltages and P p= Pin - Pout P p must not exceed
higher peak tube voltages. The better types maximum rated plate dissipation for tube
of triodes will ordinarily operate at a plate or tubes selected.
efficiency of 75 to 85 per cent at the highest
rated plate voltage, and at a plate efficiency 4. Determine average plate current from:
of 65 to 75 per cent at intermediate values of lb =Pin/Ebb
plate voltage.
The first determining factor in selecting a 5. Determine approximate ipmax from:
tube or tubes for a particular application is ipm ax= 4.9 lb for Np = 0.85
the amount of plate dissipation which will be ipmax = 4.5 lb for Np = 0.80
required of the stage. The total plate dissipa ipm ax = 4.0 lb for Np = 0. 75
tion rating for the tube or tubes to be used in ipmax = 3.5 h for Np = 0.70
the stage must be equal to or greater than that
6. Locate the point on constant-current
calculated from: P p = PIn - Pout
characteristics where the constant plate
After selecting a tube or tubes to meet the current line corresponding to the ap-
power output and plate dissipation require- proximate ipmax determined in step 5
ments it becomes necessary to determine from crosses the line of equal plate and grid
the tube characteristics whether the tube se voltages (diode line). Read epmin at this
lected is capable of the desired operation and, point. In a few cases the lines of con-
if so, to determine the driving power, grid stant plate current will inflect sharply
bias, and grid dissipation. upward before reaching the diode line.
The complete procedure necessary to deter- In these cases epmin should not be read
mine a set of Class C amplifier operating con- at the diode line but at the point where
ditions is given in the following steps: the plate current line intersects a line
1. Select the plate voltage, power output, drawn from the origin through these
and efficiency. points of inflection.
HANDBOOK Constant Current Calculations 155
FINAL POINT
EIMAC 250TH
CONSTANT CURRENT
CHARACTERISTICS
0
a:
(!)
Ecc=-240
.... ....
LOAD LINE -
PLATE VOLTAGE-VOLTS
....
FIGURES
Active portion of the operating loaclline for an Eimac 2SOTH Class C r-f power amplifier,
showing first trial point ancl the final operating point
7. Calculate Epm from: Epm =Ebb- epmin 13. Calculate the grid bias voltage from:
B. Calculate the ratio Ipm/h from: I
Ecc = X
Ipm 2 Np Ebb I - cos ep
--=
I2. Calculate the cosine of onehalf the I4. Calculate the peak fundamental grid ex
angle of plate current flow from: citation voltage from:
Egm = egmp- Ecc
18. Calculate approximate grid driving pow- 15. Egm/Ecc::: 480/ - 240::: - 2
er from;
P d = 0.9 Egmlc
16. igmax/Ic =5.75 (from figure 4)
17. lc = 0.430/5.75:::0.075 amp. (75 rna.
19. Calculate grid dissipation from: grid current)
Pg::: Pd + Ecclc
P g must not exceed the maximum rated
=
18. P d 0.9X480X0.075 =32.5 watts
driving power
grid dissipation for the tube selected.
19. P 8 = 32.5- (-240X0.75)::: 14.5 watts
grid dissipation
Sample A typical example of a Class C Max. P g for 250TH is 40 watts
Calculation amplifier calculation is shown
in the example below. Reference The power output of any type of r-f ampli-
is made to figures 3, 4 and 5 in the calcula- fier is equal to:
tion. IpmEpm/2::: Po
1. Desired power output-BOO watts. Ipm can be determined, of course, from the
ratio determined in step 8 above (in this type
2. Desired plate voltage-3500 volts. of calculation) by multiplying this ratio times
Desired plate efficiency-SO per cent lb.
(Np::: 0.80) It is frequently of importance to know the
Pin = 800/0.80 ::: 1000 watts value of load impedance into which a Class
C amplifier operating under a certain set of
3. P P = 1000 - 800 = 200 watts conditions should operate. This is simply R L=
Use 250TH; max. Pp 250w; ll= =37. Epm/Ipm In the case of the operating condi-
tions just determined for a 250TH amplifier
= =
4. Ib 1000/3500 0.285 ampere (285 rna.) stage the value of load impedance is:
Max. Ib for 250TH is 350 rna.
Epm 3240
RL =--= --= 6600 ohms
5. Approximate ipmax = 0.285 X 4.5 Ipm .495
= 1. 28 ampere
7. Epm::: 3500 - 260 = 3240 volts Q of Amplifier In order to obtain good plate
Tank Circuit tank circuit tuning and low
8. Ipm/Ib = 2X0.80X3500/3240::: radiation of harmonics from
5600/3240 ::: 1. 73
an amplifier it is necessary that the plate tank
9. ipmax/Ib = 4.1 (from figure 3) circuit have the correct Q. Charts giving com-
promise values of Q for Class C amplifiers
10. ipmax::: 0.285X4.1::: 1.17 are given in the chapter, Generation of R-F
Energy. However, the amount of inductance
11. egmp::: 240 volts required for a specified tank circuit Q under
igmax = 0.430 amperes specified operating conditions can be calcu
(Both above from final point on figure 5) lated from the following expression:
HANDBOOK Class B R-F Amplifiers 157
RL
wL=-
w
Q
= 2 TT X operating frequency
1.
0.98
0.96
0.94
0.9 2
- ~
~"'...
L = Tank inductance
RL = Required tube load impedance
0.90 -"' 1'\
0.88
Q = Effective tank circuit Q 0.88
\
A tank circuit Q of 12 to 20 is recommended F2
0.84 L\.
for all normal conditions. However, if a bal- 0.8 2
anced push-pull amplifier is employed the tank 0.80 l\.
receives two impulses per cycle and the cir- 0.78
cuit Q may be 1 ower e d somewhat from the ~
above values.
0.7
0.74
('\,.
0.7 2 ~
Quick Method of The plate circuit effi- 0.70 1\
Calculating Amp I ifier ciency of a Class B or o m m ~ ~ ~ ~ ro ~ ~ -m lB
Plate Efficiency Class C r-f amplifier I I "'.~ELEcTRICAL' DEGREES
J I I I I I I I
I I I
t-0 OtU 0.0. O.IN 0.7. . Oe4lO.~O.:MZO.t7" O.OO+O.H<IO.:MZ-0.~
can be determined from COS 6P
the following facts. The plate circuit efficiency
of such an amplifier is equal to the product of
two factors, F,, which is equal to the ratio of Figure 6
Epm to. Ebb (F, = Epm/Ebb) and F 2 , which is Relationship between Factor F 2 ancJ the
proportional to the one-half angle of plate cur- half-angle of plate current flow in an ampli-
rent flow, 8 p. A graph of F 2 against both () fier with sine-wave input and output voltage,
and cos () p is given in figure 6. Either () P 0~ operating at a gricJ-bias voltage greater than
cutoff
cos () p may be used to determine F 2 Cos ()
may. be dete_rmined either from the procedurg
previOusly gtven. for making Class C amplifier 5. Np= F, X F 2 = 0.91 X 0.79 = 0.72
computatiOns or It may be determined from the (72 per cent efficiency)
following expression:
F 1 could be called the plate-voltage-swing
P. Ecc +Ebb efficiency factor, and F 2 can be called the
cos ()p = - - - - - - - operating-angle efficiency factor or the maxi
mum possible efficiency of any stage running
/1 Egm- Epm
with that value of half-angle of plate current
flow.
Example af It is desired to know the one-half Np is, of course, only the ratio between
Method angle of plate current flow and power output and power input. If it is desired
the plate circuit efficiency for to determine the power input, exciting power,
an 812 tube operating under the following con and grid current of the stage, these can be ob-
ditions which have been assumed from inspec- tained through the use of steps 7, 8, 9, and 10
tion of the data and curves given in the RCA of the previously given method for power in-
Transmitting Tube Handbook HB-3: put and output; and knowing that igmax is
0.095 ampere the grid circuit conditions can
I. Ebb= llOO volts be determined through the use of steps 15, 16,
Ecc = -40 volts 17, 18 and 19.
p. = 29
Egm = 120 volts 8-4 Closs B Radio
Epm = 1000 volts Frequency Power Amp I ifiers
1.0
Ec2:: +400 v.
N' Ec~= a v.
u .9
-
b
I Ec = o&<L
"'a:w
w
a.
:::;; /
f.--
II-v
7
4: =
z A
w
w 6 - -
a:
"'a: s '
(.)
f.- 1
\ v
\
~Eel= +"'c
0 !
!--""
"'
w :Ivv I Ec1=+20
~. ~ v
a: 3
w I
a.
I IEc)o
~
...4:
w
.J
a.
.2
I
v
1//.' -~
KTrrc;;: Ec =+ 100
!c2. Ec.=+!.o
;tt"-
I
,~1-..::::- 1=.
...E.<..J=-Z!!.
Ec1- 40
I
0
o 100 2.00 300 400 soo aoo 100 aoo 900 1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 teoo 1100
PLATE VOLTS
Figure 7
AVERAGE PLATE CHARACTERISTICS OF 813 TUBE
fier than when operated as a Class C ampli- calculated. Then, with the exctung voltage
fier. reduced to one-half for the no-modulation con-
dition of the exciting wave, and with the same
Cql culation of Calculation of the operating value of load resistance reflected on the tube,
Operating conditions for this type of the plate input and plate efficiency will drop
Characteristics Class B r-f amplifier can be to approximately one-half the values at the
carried out in a manner simi- 100 per cent positive modulation peak and the
lar to that described in the previous para- power output of the stage will drop to one-
graphs, except that the grid bias voltage is set fourth the peak-modulation value. On the nega-
on the tube before calculation at the value: tive modulation peak the input, efficiency, and
Ecc = - Ebb//l. Since the grid bias is set at output all drop to zero.
cutoff the one-half angle of plate current flow In general, the proper plate voltage, bias
is 90; hence cos (JP is fixed at 0.00. The voltage, load resistance and power output
plate circuit efficiency for a Class B r-f am- listed in the tube tables for Class B audio
plifier operated in this manner can be deter- work will also apply to Class B linear r-f ap-
mined in the following manner: plication.
~+eov.
Ecr=+roov.
v._""
Ec1+ ~t-
1
0 ~
tion condition is substituted for the un- L~
modulated excitation case, and the lin-
ear amplifier runs at the resting or qui-
escent input of 42 watts with no exciting
0
"
Ecr:;:+zo .
100 200 .300 400
PLATE VOLTS EP
signal. The peak allowable power input
to the 813 is: Figure 8
Input Peak Power (Wp) = E9, VS. Ep CHARACTERISTICS OF 813
(wat~s) TUBE
Plate Dissipation X 100
-------=
( 100 - % plate efficiency)
125
8. The plate load resistance is:
- x 100 = 379 watts
33 Ep- epmin 1580
RL = --=
3. The maximum signal plate current is: 0.5ipm ax 0.5 X .189
= 6000 ohms
WP 379
ipmax =- = --= 0.189 ampere
EP 2000 9. If a loaded plate tank circuit Q of 12 is
desired, the reactance of the plate tank
4. The plate current flow of the linear am- capacitor at the resonant frequency
plifier is 1809, and the plate current should be:
pulses have a peak of 3.14 ti!llfs the
maximum signal current: RL 6000
Reactance {ohms)=- =--= 500 ohms
3.14 x 0.189 = 0.595 ampere
Q 12
5. Referring to figure 7, a current of 0.605
ampere (Point A) will flow at a positive
grid potential of 60 volts and a minimum 10. For an operating frequency of 4.0 Me.,
P!ate potential of 420 volts. The grid is the effective resonant capacity is:
b1ased at -45 volts, so a peak r-f grid 106
voltage of 60 +45 volts = 105 volts is re- c-------
quired. = 80 !1/lfd.
6.28 X 4.0 X 500
_ (EpM+6GMP) lGM
TOTAL POWER FROM DRIVER = - 2
POWER ABSORBED BY OUTPUT TUBE GRID AND BIAS SUPPLY: The 304TL tube is capable of operating as
= APPROX. 0. 9 (Ecc + GMP) 1C an r-f amplifier of the conventional type with
the full kilowatt input permitted amateur sta-
(EpM+ GMP)
1.e Ic tions. The tube is characterized by an enor-
mous reserve of filament emission, resulting
from the fact that about 130 watts is required
Figure 10
merely to light the four filaments. Where the
CATHODE-FOLLOWER R-F POWER heavy filament drain, plus the low amplifica-
AMPLIFIER tion factor of about 12, does not impose hard-
Showing the relationships between the tube ship in the design of the transmitter, the 304TL
rotentials and currents and the input and is quite satisfactory for amateur service.
output power of the stage. The approximate
grid impeclance also is given. The 304TL offers an additional feature in
that its plate-to-cathode capacitance is very
low (about 0.6 fLfL fd.) for a tube of its size
and power handling capabilities. This feature
permits the tube to be operated, without neu-
The design of such an amplifier stage is tralization, as a grounded-grid r-f power am
essentially the same as the design of a plifier.
grounded-grid amplifier stage as far as the
first step is concerned. Then, for the second Characteristics of A I though the excitation
step the operating conditions given in figure Grounded-Grid power of the tube is only
10 are applied to the data obtained in the first Operation 27.5 watts (which would be
step. As an example, take the 304TL stage the actual driving power
previously described. The total power required required if the tube were operating as a neu-
of the driver will be (from figure 10) approxi tralized amplifier) the driving power required
mately (2700X0.58Xl.8)/2 or 141 watts. Of into the cathode circuit from the exciter is
this 141 watts 27.5 watts (as before) will be about 200 watts. The extra 170 watts or so is
lost as grid dissipation and bias loss and the not lost, however, since it appears directly in
balance of 113.5 watts will appear as output. the output of the amplifier as additional ener-
The to tal output of the stage will then be ap- gy. Thus while the 304TL itself will deliver
proximately 963 watts. about 850 watts to the load circuit, the extra
170 watts supplied by the driver over and above
Cathode Tank for The cathode tank circuit the 27.5 watts required to excite the 304TL
G-GorC-F for either a grounded-grid appears added to the 850-watt output of the
Power Amp I ifier or cathode-follower rf 304TL. Thus the total output of the stage
power amplifier may be a would be about 1020 watts, even though the
conventional tank circuit if the filament trans- d-e input to the 304TL was only one kilowatt.
former for the stage is of the low-capacitance Nevertheless, the tube itself operates only at
high-voltage type. Conventional filament trans- its normal plate-circuit efficiency, the extra
formers, however, will not operate with the power output coming directly from the added
high values of r-f voltage present in such a eJU;itation power taken from the driver.
164 R-F Vacuum Tube Amplifiers THE R AD I 0
Figure 12
REAR OF THE GROUNDED-GRID
AMPLIFIER
HANDBOOK 304 TL G-G Amplifier 165
should have a reactance of 70 ohms. This 8-7 Class ABl Radio Frequency
value of reactance is represented by about 550
J111fd. at 4 Me., and proportionately smaller ca- Power Amplifiers
pacitances for higher frequencies. Since the
peak cathode voltage is only about 400, quite Class ABl r-f amplifiers operate under
small spacing in the cathode tank capacitor such conditions of bias and excitation that
can be used. grid current does not flow over any portion of
Figure 11 illustrates a practical grounded- the input cycle. This is desirable, since
grid amplifier, using a single 304TL tube. A distortion caused by grid current loading is
bifilar wound coil is used to feed the filament absent, and also because the stage is capable
voltage to the tube. Shunting inductors are of high power gain. Stage efficiency is about
used to tune the filament circuit to higher fre- 58% when a plate current operating angle of
quencies. When tuning the g-g stage, it must 2100 is chosen, as compared to 62% for Class
be remembered that the input tuned circuit is B operation.
effectively in series with the output circuit as
The level of static (quiescent) plate current
far as the output energy is concerned. Thus,
for lowest distortion is quite critical for
it is not possible to apply full excitation power
Class ABl tetrode operation. This value is
to the stage unless plate current is also flow-
determined by the tube characteristics, and is
ing. If full excitation is applied in the absence
of plate voltage, the grid of the output tube not greatly affected by the circuit parameters
would be damaged from excessive excitation. or operating voltages. The maximum d-e plate
Construction of the amplifier is illustrated in potential is therefore limited by the static
figures 12 and 13. dissipation of the tube, since the resting plate
A 3000-volt plate supply is used which current figure is fixed. The static plate current
should have good regulation. An output filter of a tetrode tube varies as the 3/2 power of
condenser of at least 10 microfarads should be the screen voltage. For example, raising the
employed for Class B operation. Class B oper- screen voltage from 300 to 500 volts will
ating bias is -260 volts, obtained from a well double the plate current. The optimum static
regulated bias supply. plate current for minimum distortion is also
For operation in TV areas, additional lead doubled, since the shape of the Eg-Ip curve
filtering is required, as well as complete does not change.
screening of the amplifier. In actual practice, somewhat lower static
plate current than optimum may be employed
without raising the distortion appreciably,
and values of static plate current of 0.6 to
0.8 of optimum may be safely used, depending
upon the amount of nonlinearity that can be
tolerated.
As with the class B linear stage, the mini-
mum plate voltage swing of the class ABl
amplifier must be kept above the d-e screen
potential to prevent operation in the nonlinear
portion of the characteristic curve. A low value
of screen voltage allows greater r-f plate
voltage swing, resulting in improvement in
plate efficiency of the tube. A balance be-
tween plate dissipation, plate efficiency, and
plate voltage swing must be achieved for best
linearity of the amplifier.
IP
MOSTL..INEAR
PORTION OF rt-- ~--f t t- -
~JR"JlT + - .Q\!]"eyT_
SIC:.NAL
.1-t ll -
.-it' R.F.
- EOUT
INPUT .)1
Sl~NAL
R.F. E IN
Figure 14 Figure 15
Eg-lp CURVE LINEARITY CURVE OF
TYPICAL TETRODE AMPLIFIER
Amplifier operation is eonfined to
most I inear portion of choracterist ic At point "A" the Instantaneous plate
curve. voltage is swinging down to the value
of screen voltage. At point "B" it is
swinging well below the sereen and is
approaching the point where saturation,
or plate eurrent limiting takes plaee.
The relationship between exc1t1ng voltage
in a Class AB1 amplifier and the r- plate
circuit voltage is shown in figure 15. With a
small value of static plate current the lower
portion of the line is curved. Maximum un- the screen voltage. In this case, the screen
distorted output is limited by the point on the voltage is 500, so the minimum plate voltage
line (A) where the instantaneous plate voltage excursion should be limited to 600 volts.
down to the screen voltage. This "hook" in Class AB1 operation implies no grid current,
the line is caused by current diverted from therefore the load line cannot cross the Eg=O
the plate to the grid and screen elements of line. At the point Ep=600, Eg=O, the maximum
the tube. The characteristic plot of the usual plate current is 580 ma (Point "B ").
linear amplifier takes the shape of an S-curve.
The lower portion of the curve is straightened Each point the load line crosses a grid volt-
out by using the proper value of static plate age axis may be taken as a point for construc-
current, and the upper portion of the curve is tion of the Eglp curve, just as was done in
avoided by limiting minimum plate voltage figure 22, chapter 6. A constructed curve
swing to a point substantially above the value shows that the approximate static bias voltage
of the screen voltage. is -74 volts, which checks closely with point A
of figure 16. In actual practice, the bias volt-
Operating Parameters The approximate oper- age is set to hold the actual dissipation slightly
for the Class AB 1 ating parameters may be be low the maximum figure of the tube.
Linear Amplifier obtained from the Con-
stant Current curves The single tone power output is:
(Eg-Ep) or the Eg-lp curves of the tube in
question. An operating load line is first Emax-EminXIpmax, or 3000-600 X. 58= 348 watts
approximated. One end of the load line is 4 4
determined by the d-e operating voltage of the The plate current-angle efficiency factor for
tube, and the required static plate current. this class of operation is 0. 73, and the actual
As a starting point, let the product of the plate plate circuit efficiency is:
voltage and current equal the plate dissipation
of the tube. Assuming we have a 4-400A Np=Emax-EminXO. 73, or 3000-600 X0. 73 = 58.4%
tetrode, this end of the load line will fall on Emax 3000
point A (figure 16). Plate power dissipation
is 360 watts (3000V @ 120 ma). The opposite The power input to the stage is therefore
end of the load line will fall on a point deter-
mined by the minimum instantaneous plate volt- 2_x 100 or, 348 = 595 watts
age, and by the maximum instantaneous plate Np 58.4
current. The minimum plate voltage, for best
linearity should be considerably higher than The plate dissipation is: 595-348 = 247 watts.
HANDBOOK AB 1 R.F. Power Amplifiers 167
+100
4-400A TUBE
+ 75
I E SCR = 500 VOLTS
+50 I
"
+ a5
r .0~POINT6
sco 1000 aooo 3000 400
I'\""IS
Ul
.i
~t -
~ ~ r- t---
f' - L!-+- I
4
--
-50
-100.l
i :"- ............. I
I
'
~
I I
-125 i t' I
! VALUE OF VAl-UE OF
:t
EP MIN.= eoo v., MAX. PLATE
-1.50 I~:o.58A DISSIPATION
It can be seen that the limiting factor for fore required. Screen dissipation is highly
this class of operation is the static plate diss i responsive to plate loading conditions, and the
pari on, which is quite a bit higher than the plate circuit should always be adjusted so as
operating dissipation level. It is possible, at to keep the screen current below the maximum
the expense of a higher level of distortion, to dissipation level as established by the applied
drop the static plate dissipation and to increase voltage.
the screen voltage to obtain greater power out
G-G Class B Linear Certain tetrode and pentode
put. If the screen voltage is set at 800, and
Tetrode Amplifier tubes, such as the 6AG7,
the bias increased sufficiently to drop the
83 7, and 803 perform we II
static plate current to 90 ma, the single tone
as grounded grid class B linear amplifiers. In
dc plate current may rise to 300 ma, for a
this configuration both grids and the suppressor
power input of 900 watts. The plate circuit
efficiency is 55 .6%, and the power output is are grounded, and exc it at ion is applied to the
500 watts. Static plate dissipation is 2 70 watts. cathode circuit of the tube. So connected, the
At a screen potential of 500 volts, the maxi tubes take on characteristics of high-mu triodes.
mum screen current is less than 1 rna, and under No bias or screen supplies are required for
certain loading conditions may be negative. this type of operation, and reasonably linear
When the screen potential is raised to 800 volts
maximum screen current is 18 ma. The per
formance of the tube depends upon the voltage
fields set up within the tube by the cathode,
control grid, screen grid, and plate. The quantity
of current flowing in the screen circuit is only
incidental to the fact that the screen is main
tained at a positive potential with respect to
the electron stream surrounding it.
The tube will perform as expected so long as B+ 300-700 V.
the screen current, in either direction, does
not create undesirable changes in the screen Figure 17
voltage, or cause excessive screen dissipation. SIMPLE GROUNDED-GRID
Good regulation of the screen supply is there- LINEAR AMPLIFIER
168 R- F Vacuum Tube Amplifiers THE R AD I 0
VI Vz V3 V4 V;
837 500 837 837 500 803 803 500
~
RF~
.001 -=-
5 KV
T, ~EACH
1'~'1'01
+1250V. 115 v rv +2500
Figure 18
An open frame filament transformer may
3-STAGE KILOWATT LINEAR
be used for Tl. Cathode taps are ad-
AMPLIFIER FOR 80 OR 40
justed for proper excitation of following
METER OPERATION
stage.
operation can be had with a very minimum of using a 4-400A tube for the h. f. region. The
circuit components (figure 17). The input im operating characteristics of the amplifier are
pedance of the gg stage falls between 100 summarized in figure 19. It can be noted that
and 250 ohms, eliminating the necessity of unusually low screen voltage is used on the
swamping resistors, even though considerable tube. The use of lower screen voltage has the
power is drawn by the cathode circuit of the adverse effect of increasing the driving power,
g-g stage. but at the same time the static plate current
Power gain of a g-g stage varies from ap- of the stage is decreased and linearity is im-
proximately 20 when tubes of the 6AG7 type improved. For grounded grid operation of the
are used, down to five or six for the 837 and 4-400A, a screen voltage of 300 volts (filament
803 tubes. One or more g-g stages may be to screen) gives a reasonable compromise be-
cascaded to provide up to a kilowatt of power, tween these factors.
as illustrated in figure 18.
The input and output circuits of cascaded
g-g stages are in series, and a variation in
load impedance of the output stage reflects
OPERATING DATA FOR 4-400A/4-250A
back as a proportional change on the input GcG. LINEAR AB1 AMPLIFIER
circuit. If the first g-g stage is driven by a high (SINGLE TONE)
impedance source, such as a tetrode amplifier, D-C SCREEN VOLTAGE +300 +300
any change in gain will automatically be com-
D-C PLATE VOLTAGE + 3000 +3500
pensated for. If the gain of V4-VS drops, the
input impedance to that stage will rise. This STATIC PLATE CURRENT 60 MA 60MA.
change will reflect through V2:-V3 so that the D-C GRID BIAS -60 V. -59 v.
load impedance of Vl rises. Since V1 has a
PEAK CATHODE SWING 87 v.. 113 v.
high internal impedance the output voltage
will rise when the load impedance rises. The MINIMUM PLATE VOLTA<;E 660 v 500 v.
increased output voltage will raise the output MAXIMUM StG.NAL GRID CURRENT 3.6 MA. 10 MA.
voltage of each g-g stage so that the overall
MAXIMUM SiGNAL SCREEN CURRENT 4.1 MA. 20MA.
output is nearly up to the initial value before
the drop in gain of V4-VS. MAXIMUM SIGNAL PLATE CURRENT 1 9~ MA. 2.67 MA.
The tank circuits, therefore, of all g-g stages MAXIMUM SICNAL PLATE DISSIPATION 235 w. 235 w.
must be resonated with low plate voltage and 180 w. 210W.
STATIC PLATE DISSIPATION
excitation applied to the tubes. Tuning of one
stage will affect the other stages, and the in- GRID DRIVING. POWER 0.63 w. 3.4 w.
put and coupling of each stage must be ad- FEEDTHRU POWER 6.55 w. 15.8 w.
justed in turn until the proper power limit is
POWER OUTPUT (MAXIMUM) 350 w. 700 w.
reached.
POWER INPUT (MAXIMUM) 565 w. 935 w.
The Oscilloscope
The cathode-ray oscilloscope (also called the rectptent of signals from two sources: the
oscillograph) is an instrument which permits vertical and horizontal amplifiers. The opera-
visual examination of various electrical phe- tion of the cathode-ray tube itself has been
nomena of interest to the electronic engineer. covered in Chapter 4; the auxiliary circuits
Instantaneous changes in voltage, current and pertaining to the cathode-ray tube will be
phase are observable if they take place slow- covered here.
ly enough for the eye to follow, or if they are
periodic for a long enough time so that the eye
can obtain an impression from the screen of The Vertical The incoming signal which is
the cathode-ray tube. In addition, the cathode- Amp I ifier to be examined is applied to
ray oscilloscope may be used to study any the terminals marked Vertical
variable (within the limits of its frequency Input and Ground. The Vertical Input terminal
response characteristic) which can be con- is connected through capacitor C 1 (figure 2) so
verted into electrical potentials. This conver- that the a-c component of the input signal ap-
sion is made possible by the use of some type pears across the vertical amplifier gain con-
of transducer, such as a vibration pickup unit, trol potentiometer, R 1 Thus the magnitude of
pressure pickup unit, photoelectric cell, mi- the incoming signal may be controlled to pro-
crophone, or a variable impedance. The use vide the desired deflection on the screen of
of such a transducer makes i:he oscilloscope
a valuable tool in fields other than electronics.
VERTICAL
INPUT
170
Time Base Generator 171
INTENSITY MOl),
c.
;;~,~~-'--~----------
Ca
0.1..1.6
O+
Figure 2
TYPICAL AMPLIFIER SCHEMATIC
'="120K
Figure 3
SCHEMATIC OF CATHODE-RAY TUBE
the cathode-ray tube. Also, as shown in figure
CIRCUITS
1, S 2 has been incorporated to by-pass the
vertical amplifier and capacitively couple the A SBP lA cathocle-ray tube Is usee/ in this
input signal directly to the vertical deflection instrument. As shown, the necessary poten-
plate if so desired. tials for operating this tube are obtainecl
In figure 2, V 1 is a 6AC7 pentode tube which from a voltage clivlcler macle up of resistors
is used as the vertical amplifier. As the sig- R21 through R26 inclusive. The intensity of
nal variations appear on the grid of V, varia- the beam is aclfustecl by moving the contact
tions in the plate current of V 1 will take place. on R21 This ac/fusts the potential on the
Thus signal variations will appear in opposite cathocle more or less negative with respect
phase and greatly amplified across the plate to the gric/ which is operatecl at the full neg
resistor, R 7 Capacitor C 2 has been added a atlve vo/tage-1200 volts. Focusing to the
cross R 2 in the cathode circuit of V 1 to flatten clesirecl sharpness is accompllshecl by acl
the frequency response of the amplifier at the fusting the contact on R23 to provicle the
high frequencies. This capacitor because of correct potential for anocle no. J. /ntercle
its low value has very little effect at low in penclency between the focus one/ the. inten
put frequencies, but operates more effectively s/ty controls is inherent In all electrostatl
as the frequency of the signal increases. The cally focusec/ cathocle-ray tubes. In short,
amplified signal delivered by V1 is now ap there Is an optimum seHing of the focus con
plied through the second half of switch S2 and trol for every seHing of the intensity con
capacitor C 4 to the free vertical deflection trol. The secane/ anoc/e of the SBP JA is oper
plate of the cathode-ray tube (figure 3). atecl at grounc/ potential in this Instrument.
AI so one of each pair of c/eflect/on plates is
operatec/ at grounc/ potential.
The cathocle is operatec/ at a high negative
The Horizontal The circuit of the horizontal potential (approximately 7200 volts) so that
Amplifier amplifier and the circuit of the total overall accelerating voltage of this
the vertical amplifier, de tube is regarc/ec/ as 7200 volts since the sec
scribed in the above paragraph, are similar. A one/ anocle Is operatec/ at grouncl potential.
switch in the input circuit makes provision for The vertical one/ horizontal positioning con-
the input from the Horizontal Input terminals trols which are connectec/ to their respective
to be capacitively coupled to the grid of the c/eflection plates are capable of-;IJpplylng
horizontal amplifier or to the free horizontal either a positive or negative c/.c potential
deflection plate thus by-passing the amplifier, to the cleflection plates. This permits the
or for the output of the sweep generator to be spot to be posltionecl at any cleslrecl place
capacitively coupled to the amplifier, as shown on the ttntire screen.
in figure 1.
SWEEP
GENERATOR
OUTPUT
R21
470K
R28
5M
EY.TERNAL
SYNC FINE FREQ.
~,;___ _ _ ____J CONTROL
Figure 5
SCHEMATIC OF SWEEP GENERATOR
HANDBOOK The Oscilloscope 173
Eb+
'!<-;;'/ /
<ul /
EP vs Eg EP+ ~; I
STATIC CONTROL ,;JI I
CHARACTERISTIC
01
--1--
I
r-
I
E~~
FIRING POTENTIAL
(D.C. BIAS)
Figure 6
ANALYSIS OF SYNCHRONIZATION OF TIME-BASE GENERATOR
CIOCl4, as well as the supply voltage Eb. time the plate potential rises to a sufficient
The exact relationship is given by: value, so that the sweep recurs at the same
or an integral sub-multiple of the synchroniz
ing signal rate. This is illustrated in figure 6.
I
The frequency of oscillation will be approx
imately:
~~o-----1[~----~ll~_~o~~----------------------------------------------------------------------------------~---------------------.
l-470K -1
::r
I'D
V6
5BP1A
0
VI
O. I n
4,7 M
0
IM VI
180K y POS n
0
"0
IM
I'D
FOCUS
EXT.
SYNC.
S1
SYNC. 390K 500K 12.0K
SELECTOR 82.0 K
0.1
------....
IOK
lOOK IM
X
POS.
4.7 t.A
-1
:::c
Slt;NAL
e>--J#r-X m
IOK
Figure 8
lt~~-0
r~sEcl:-t,sEcj
I
I
rvsJ~-
4--- .----~- .~--.:
TIME---...
1S& I
I
I 1 I I
I
'1:.
~~c 1"
7
I
I I
~Z~1=
;::: I I
J .35 SEC
I I
Figure 9 ,: ______ j_
PROJECTION DRAWING OF A SINEWAVE
APPLIED TO THE VERTICAL AXIS AND A
SAWTOOTH WAVE OF THE SAME FR~ Figure 10
QUENCY APPLIED SIMULTANEOUSLY ON PROJECTION DRAWING SHOWING THE RE-
THE HORIZONTAL AXIS SULTANT PATTERN WHEN THE FR~
QUENCYOF THE SAWTOOTH IS ONE-HALF
OF THAT EMPLOYED IN FIGURE 9
B C
Figure 12
METHOD OF CALCULATING FREQUENCY
RATIO OF LISSAJOUS FIGURES
-t-- -t$t- -$ -~
PHASE DIFFERENCE=o PHASE DIFFERENCE=4!t PHASE DIFFERENCE=9o PHASE DIFFERENCE=135
-~$*
PHASE OIFFERENcE=zz~o PHASE DIFFERENCE 270 PHASE DIFFERENCE 315
Figure 14
LISSAJOUS PATTERNS OBTAINED FROM THE MAJOR PHASE DIFFERENCE ANGLES
the number of loops which intersect BC as the plifier control is adjusted (3 inches). Re-
frequency of the horizontal signal is to the connect the signal to the vertical ampli
frequency of the vertical signal. fier.
Figure 13 shows other examples of Lissa- The resulting pattern will give an accurate
jous figures. In each case the frequency ratio picture of the exact phase difference between
shown is the frequency ratio of the signal on the two waves. If these two patterns are ex-
the horizontal axis to that on the vertical actly the same frequency but different in phase
axis. and maintain that difference, the pattern on
the screen will remain stationary. If, 'however,
Phase Differ Coming under the heading of one of these frequencies is drifting slightly,
ence Patterns Lissajous figures is the method the pattern will drift slowly through 360 . The
used to determine the phase phase angles of 0, 45, 90, 135, 180,
difference between signals of the same fre- 225 , 270 , 315 are shown in figure 14.
quency. The patterns in v o 1 v e d take on the Each of the eight patterns in figure 14 can
form of ellipses with different degrees of ec be analyzed separately by the previously used
centricity. ,
The following steps should be taken to ob-
tain a phase-difference pattern:
1. With no signal input to the oscilloscope,
the spot should be centered on the screen
of the tube.
2. Connect one signal to the vertical ampli
fier of the oscilloscope, and the other
signal to the horizontal amplifier.
3. Connect a common ground between the
two frequencies under investigation and
TIME-
the oscilloscope.
4. Adjust the vertical amplifier gain so as
to give about 3 inches of deflection on a
5 inch tube, and adjust the calibrated ~ _/
~"
scale of the oscilloscope so that the ver-
tical axis of the scale coincides precise-
ly with the vertical deflection of the spot.
5. Remove the signal from the vertical am-
plifier, being careful not to change the
Figure 15
setting of the vertical gain control.
6. Increase the gain of the horizontal am- PROJECTION DRAWING SHOWING THE RE-
plifier to give a deflection exactly the SULTANT PHASE DIFFERENCE PATTERN
same as that to which the vertical am- OF TWO SINE WAVES 45 OUT OF PHASE
178 The Oscilloscope THE R AD I 0
Figure 16
EXAMPLES SHOWING THE USE OF THE FORMULA FOR DETERMINATION OF PHASE
DIFFERENCE
projecthn method. Figure 15 shows two sine switch to direct and the outputs of the two
waves which differ in phase being projected signals must be adjusted to result in exactly
on to the screen of the cathode-ray tube. These the same vertical deflection as horizontal de-
signals represent a phase difference of 45 . flection. Once this deflection has been set by
It is extremely important: (1) that the spot either the oscillator output controls or the am-
has been centered on the screen of the cathode- plifier gain controls in the oscillograph, it
ray tube, (2) that both the horizontal and ver- should not be changed for the duration of the
tical amplifiers have been adjusted to give measurement.
exactly the same gain, and (3) that the cali-
brated scale be originally set to coincide with
the displacement of the signal along the ver- Determination of The relation commonly used
tical axis. If the amplifiers of the oscilloscope the Phase Angle in determining the ph as e
are not used for conveying the signal to the angle between signals is:
deflection plates of the cathode-ray tube, the Y intercept
coarse frequency switch should be set to hori- Sine e= -----
zontal input direct and the vertic a 1 input y maximum
C]
Figure 17
TRAPEZOIDAL MODULATION PATTERN
Figure 19
Figure 18 PROJECTION DRAWING SHOWING TRAPE-
MODULATED CARRIER WAVE PATTERN ZOIDAL PATTERN
HANDBOOK Trapezoidal Pattern 179
TIME---
CRO
Figure 20
PROJECTION DRAWING SHOWING MODU
LATED CARRIER WAVE PATTERN
B+
NOTE~ IF R.F, PICKUP IS INSUFFICIENT,
A TUNED CIRCUIT MAY BE USED
AT THE OSCILLOSCOPE AS SHOWN.
<J
TRAPEZOIDAL WAVE P~TTERN
<J
Figure 22 Figure 23 Figure 24
flection plates by a short 1 eng t h of coaxial figure 25. The internal sweep circuit of the
line will suffice. The amount of excitation to oscilloscope is applied to the horizontal
the plates of the oscilloscope may be adjusted plates, and the modulated r-f signal is applied
to provide a pattern of convenient size. Upon to the vertical plates, as described before. If
modulation of the transmitter, the trapezoidal desired, the internal sweep circuit may be sny-
pattern will appear. By changing the degree of chronized with the modulating signal of the
modulation of the carrier wave the shape of transmitter by applying a small portion of the
the pattern will change. Figures 22 and 23 modulator output signal to the external sync
show the trapezoidal pattern for various de- post of the oscilloscope. The percentage of
grees of modulation. The percentage of modu- modulation may be determined in the same
lation may be determined by the following for- fashion as with a trapezoidal pattern. Figures
mula: 26, 27 and 28 show the modulated wave pat-
Modulation percentage = tern for various degrees of modulation.
Emax - Emin
----=X 100
Emax + Emin
where Em ax and Em in are defined as in
figure 22.
9-5 Receiver 1-F Alignment
An overmodulated signal is shown in figure with an Oscilloscope
24.
The alignment of the i-f amplifiers of a re-
The Modulated The oscilloscope connections ceiver consists of adjusting all the tuned cir-
Wove Pattern for obtaining a mod u 1 ate d cuits to resonance at the intermediate frequen-
wave pattern are shown in cy and at the same time to permit passage of
a predetermined number of side bands. The
best indication of this adjustment is a reso-
nance curve representing the response of the
R.F. POWER AMPLIFIER CRO
i-f circuit to its particular range of frequencies.
As a rule medium and low-priced receivers
use i-f transformers whose bandwidth is about
5 kc. on each side of the fundamental frequen-
cy. The response curve of these i-f transform-
ers is shown in figure 29. High fide 1 it y re-
ceivers usually contain i-f transformers which
B+ FROM
have a broader bandwidth which is usually 10
MODULATOR kc. on each side of the fundamental. The re-
lC TUNES TO OP- sponse curve for this type transformer is shown
ERATING FREQUENCY
in figure 30.
Resonance curves such as these can be dis-
Figure 25 played on the screen of an oscilloscope. For
a complete understanding of the procedure it
MONITORING CIRCUIT FOR is important to know how the resonance curve
MODULATED WAVE PATTERN is traced.
HANDBOOK Receiver Alignment 181
The Resonance To present a resonance curve bulator, or its electronic equivalent, a react
Curve on the on the screen, a frequency- ance tube.
Screen modulated signal source must The method of presenting a resonance curve
be available. This signal on the screen is to connect the vertical chan
source is a signal generator whose output is nel of the oscilloscope across the detector
the fundamental i-f frequency which is fre- load of the receiver as shown in the detectors
quency-modulated 5 to 10 kc. each side of the of figure 31 (between point A and ground) and
fundamental frequency. A signal generator of the time-base generator output to the horizon
this type generally takes the form of an ordi- tal channel. In this way the dc voltage across
nary signal generator with a rotating motor the detector load varies with the frequencies
driven tuned circuit capacitor, called a wob which are passed by the if system. Thus, if
the time-base generator is set at the frequency
of rotation of the motor driven capacitor, or
the reactance tube, a pattern resembling fig
ure 32, a double resonance curve, appears on
the screen.
Figure 32 is explained by considering fig-
ure 33. In half a rotation of the motor driven
capacitor the frequency increases from 445
kc. to 465 kc., more than covering the range
of frequencies passed by the if system.
8KC 4KC 4KC IKC Therefore, a full resonance curve is presented
on the screen during this half cycle of rota
Figure 29 tion since only half a cycle of the voltage pro
ducing horizontal deflection has transpired.
FREQUENCY RESPONSE CURVE OF THE In the second half of the rotation the motor
1-F OF A LOW PRICED RECEIVER
Figure 30 Figure 31
GERMANIUM 2.5 MH
R-F SSB INPUT DIODE RFC.
67 ~~~i~'oTRAGE (cil-.-1~.....-'00"0'-.-.....---<.0J TO 6~g~~L~~~6~~
PICKUP COIL
Figure 37
SCHEMATIC OF
OSCILLOSCOPE ENVELOPE DETECTOR
Figure 36
BLOCK DIAGRAM OF
LINEARITY TRACER
that the distortion of each individual stage
can be observed. This is helpful in trouble-
shooting. By connecting the input envelope
detector to the output of the SSB generatoc,
obtainable with a specified signal-to-distortion
the overall distortion of the entire r-f circuit
ratio. The oscilloscope is a useful instrument
beyond this point is observed. The unit can
for measuring and studying distortion of all also serve as a voltage indicator which is
types that may be generated in single sideband useful in making tuning adjustments.
equipment.
The circuit of a typical envelope detector
is shown in figure 37. Two matched germainum
Single Tone When a SSB transmitter is modu-
diodes are used as detectocs. The detectors
Observations lated with a single audio tone,
are not linear at low signal levels, but if the
the r-f output should be a single
nonlinearity of the two detectors is matched,
radio frequency. If the vertical plates of the
the effect of their nonlinearity on the oscillo-
oscilloscope are coupled to the output of the
scope trace is cancelled. The effect of diode
transmitter, and the horizontal amplifier sweep
differences is minimized by using a diode load
is set to a slow rate, the scope presentation
of 5,000 to 10,000 ohms, as shown. It is im-
will be as shown in figure 35. If unwanted dis-
portant that both detectors operate at approxi-
tortion products or carrier are present, the top
mately the same signal level so that their
and bottom of the pattern will develop a "rip-
differences will cancel more exactly. The
ple" proportional to the degree of spurious
products. operating level should be lvolt or higher.
It is convenient to build the detector in a
small shielded enclosure such as an i-f trans-
The Linearity The linearity tracer is an aux- focmer can fitted with coaxial input and output
Tracer iliary detector to be used with connectors. Voltage dividers can be similarly
an oscilloscope for quick ob- constructed so that it is easy to insert the de-
servation of amplifier adjustments and para- sired amount of voltage attenuation from the
meter variations. This instrument consists of various sources. In some cases it is convenient
two SSB en vel ope detectors the outputs of to use a pickup loop on the end of a short
which connect to the horizontal and vertical length of coaxial cable.
inputs of an oscilloscope. Figure 36 shows a The phase shift of the amplifiers in the os-
block diagram of a typical linearity test set-up. cilloscope should be the same and their fre-
A two-tone test signal is normally employed quency response should be flat out to at least
to supply a SSB modulation envelope, but any twenty times the frequency difference of the
modulating signal that provides an envelope two test tones. Excellent high frequency charac-
that varies from zero to full amplitude may be teristics are necessary because the rectified
used. Speech modulation gives a satisfactory SSB envelope contains harmonics extending
trace, so that this instrument may be used as to the limit of the envelope detector's response.
a visual monitor of transmitter linearity. It is Inadequate frequency response of the vertical
particularly useful for monitoring the signal amplifier may cause a little "foot" to appear
level and clearly shows when the amplifier on the lower end of the trace, as shown in
under observation is overloaded. The linearity figure 38. If it is small, it may be safely neg-
trace will be a straight line regardless of the lected.
envelope shape if the amplifier has no dis- Another spurious effect often encountered
tortion. Overloading causes a sharp break in is a double trace, as shown in figure 3 9. This
the linearity curve. Distortion due to too much can usually be corrected with an R-C network
bias is also easily observed and the adjustment placed between one detector and the oscillo-
foe low distortion can easily be made. scope. The best method of testing the detectors
Another feature of the linearity detector is and the amplifiers is to connect the input of
184 The Oscilloscope
r-------------------------~e2
OUTPUT
SIGNAL
LEVEL
Figure 38
EFFECT OF INADEQUATE
RESPONSE OF VERTICAL
AMPLIFIER
0
Figure 41
ORDINATES ON LINEARITY
CURVE FOR 3RD ORDER
DISTORTION EQUATION
0000
TYPICAL LINEARITY TRACES
@
Figure 40
TYPICAL LINEARITY
TRACES
CHAPTER TEN
A whole new concept of vacuum tube appli- Diode Limiters The characteristics of a
cations has been developed in recent years. diode tube are such that the
No longer are vacuum tubes chained to the tube conducts only when the plate is at a posi-
field of communication. This chapter is de- tive potential with respect to the cathode. A
voted to some of the more common circuits en- positive potential may be placed on the cath-
countered in industrial and military applica- ode, but the tube will not conduct until the
tions of the vacuum tube. voltage on the plate rises above an equally
positive value. As the plate becomes more
positive with respect to the cathode, the diode
conducts and passes that portion of the wave
10-1 Limiting Circuits that is more positive than the cathode voltage.
Diodes may be used as either series or paral-
The term limiting refers to the removal or lel limiters, as shown in figure 1. A diode may
suppression by electronic means of the ex be so biased that only a certain portion of the
tremities of an e I e c t ron i c signal. Circuits positive or negative cycle is removed.
which perform this function are referred to as
limiters or clippers. Limiters are useful in Audio Peak An audio peak clipper consisting
wave-shaping circuits where it is desirable to Limiting of two diode limiters may be used
square off the extremities of the applied sig- to limit the amplitude of an au-
nal. A sine wave may be applied to a limiter dio signal to a predetermined value to provide
circuit to produce a rectangular wave. A a high average level of modulation without
peaked wave may be applied to a limiter cir danger of overmodulation. An effective limiter
cuit to eliminate either the positive or nega for this service is the series-diode gate clip-
ti ve peaks from the output. Limiter circuits per. A circuit of this clipper is shown in fig-
are employed in FM receivers where it is nee ure 2. The audio signal to be clipped is cou
essary to limit the amplitude of the signal ap pled to the clipper through C,. R, and R 2 are
plied to the detector. Limiters may be used to the clipper input and output load resistors.
reduce automobile ignition noise in short-wave The clipper plates are tied together and are
receivers, or to maintain a high average level connected to the clipping level control, R.,
of modulation in a transmitter. They may also through the series resistor, R 3 R 4 acts as a
be used as protective devices to limit input voltage divider between the high voltage sup
signals to special circuits. ply and ground. The exact point at which clip-
185
186 Special Vacuum Tube Circuits THE R AD I 0
_{\_;,.," __,__.,I0
----r:::rv
T :.~":.
, \J 'v
eiN
(\v(\v
-----.-f:\......--.-1-
I.,. cv =
e OUT
(\ "(\\}
-= -= @
0
(\~~ __I.,......,M+,._@
.....E_____ ;;~: \/~-
.,. -~)
Figure 1
VARIOUS DIODE LIMITING CIRCUITS
Series diodes limiting positive and negative peaks are shown in A and B. Parallel diodes limit-
ing positive and negative peaks are shown in C and D. Parallel diodes limiting above and below
ground are shown in E and F. Parallel diode limiters which pass negative and positive peaks
are shown in G and H.
ping will occur is set by R 4 , which controls the Assume that R 4 has been set to a point that
positive potential applied to the diode plates. will give 4 volts at the plates of the 6AL5.
Under static conditions, a d-e voltage is ob- When the peak audio input voltage is less than
tained from R 4 and applied through R 3 to both 4 volts, both halves of the tube conduct at all
plates of the 6AL5 tube. Current flows through times. As long as the tube conducts, its re-
R 4 , R 3 , and divides through the two diode sistance is very low compared with the plate
sections of the 6AL 5 and the two load resis- resistor R 3 Whenever a voltage change occurs
tors, R, and R 2 All parts of the clipper circuit across input resistor R., the voltage at all of
are maintained at a positive potential above the tube elements increases or decreases by
ground. The voltage drop between the plate the same amount as the input voltage change,
and cathode of each diode is very small com- and the voltage drop across R 3 changes by an
pared to the drop across the 300,000-ohm re- equal amount. As long as the peak input volt-
sistor (R 3 ) in series with the diode plates. age is less than 4 volts, the 6AL5 acts merely
The plate and cathode of each diode are there- as a conductor, and the output cathode is per-
fore maintained at approximately equal poten- mitted to follow all voltage changes at the in-
tials as long as there is plate current flow. put cathode.
Clipping does not occur until the peak audio If, under static conditions, 4 volts appear at
input voltage reaches a value greater than the the diode plates, then twice this voltage (8
static voltages at the plates of the diode. volts) will appear if one of the diode circuits
HANDBOOK Clamping Circuits 187
B+
(\(\
vv -=o=cA
=GRID-CATHODE RESISTANCE
WHEN GRID IS DRIVEN POSITIVE
Figure 2 Figure 3
THE SERIES-DIODE GATE CLIPPER FOR GRID LIMITING CIRCUIT
AUDIO PEAK LiMITING
is opened, removing its d-e load from the cir- the. plates will follow. Howe.ver, the output
cuit. As long as only one of the diodes con- cathode, grounded through R 2 , will stop at zero
tinues to conduct, the voltage at the diode potential as the plate becomes negative. Con-
plates cannot rise above twice the voltage se- duction through the second diode is impossible
lected by R 4 In this example, the voltage can- under these conditions. The output cathode
not rise above 8 volts. Now, if the input audio remains at zero potential until the voltage at
voltage applied through C, is increased to any the input cathode swings back to zero.
peak value between zero and plus 4 volts, the The voltage developed across output resis-
first cathode of the 6AL 5 will increase in volt- tor R 2 follows the input voltage variations as
age by the same amount to the proper value be- long as the input voltage does not swing to a
tween 4 and 8 volts. The other tube elements peak value greater than the static voltage at
will assume the same potential as the first the diode plates, determined by R 4 Effective
cathode. However, the 6AL5 plates cannot in- clipping may thus be obtained at any desired
crease more than 4 volts above their original level.
4-volt static level. When the input voltage to The square-topped audio waves generated
the first cathode of the 6AL5 increases to by this clipper are high in harmonic content,
more than plus 4 volts, the cathode potential but these higher order harmonics may be great-
increases to more than 8 volts. Since the plate ly reduced by a low-level speech filter.
circuit potential remains at 8 volts, the first
diode section ceases to conduct until the in- Grid Limiters A triode grid limiter is shown
put voltage across R, drops below 4 volts. in figure 3. On positive peaks
When the input volr.age swings in a negative of the input signal, the triode grid attempts to
direction, it will subtract from the 4-volt drop swing positive, and the grid-cathode resist-
across R, and decrease the voltage on the in- ance drops to a value on the order of 1000
put cathode by an amount equal to the input ohms or so. The voltage drop across R (usu-
voltage. The plates and the output cathode will ally of the order of 1 megohm) is large com-
follow the voltage lfvel at the input cathode pared to the grid-cathode drop, and the result-
as long as the input voltage does not swing ing limiting action removes the top part of the
below minus 4 volts. If the input voltage does positive input wave.
not change more than 4 volts in a negative
direction, the plates of the 6AL5 will also be-
come negative. The potential at the output
cathode will follow the input cathode voltage 10-2 Clamping Circuits
and decrease from its normal value of 4 volts
until it reaches zero potential. As the input A circuit which holds either amplitude ex-
cathode voltage decr,~ases to less than zero, treme of a waveform to a given reference level
0=-rrrrr
-100-- --
""-;1
--
I i>
-: -:
Oo"'- -
+tOO--
0~:-
-- ---
Figure 4
SIMPLE POSITIVE AND NEGATIVE CLAMPING CIRCUITS
188 Special Vacuum Tube Circuits THE R AD I 0
B+
Figure 5 Figure 7
NEGATIVE CLAMPING CIRCUIT EM- THE CHARGE AND DISCHARGE PATHS
PLOYED IN ELECTROMAGNETIC SWEEP IN FREE-RUNNING MUL TIVIBRATOR OF
SYSTEM FIGURE 6
10-3 Multivibrators
Figure 6
BASIC MUL TIVIBRA TOR CIRCUIT The multivibrator, or relaxation oscillator,
is used for the generation of nonsinusoidal
waveforms. The output is rich in harmonics,
but the inherent frequency stability is poor.
The multivibrator may be stabilized by the
of potential is called a clamping circuit or a introduction of synchronizing voltages of har-
d-e restorer. Clamping circuits are used after monic or subharmonic frequency.
RC cpupling circuits where the waveform In its simplest form, the multivibrator is a
swing is required to be either above or below simple two-stage resistance-capacitance cou-
the reference voltage, instead of alternating pled amplifier with the output of the second
on both sides of it (figure 4). Clamping cir stage coupled through a capacitor to the grid
cuits are usually encountered in oscilloscope of the first tube, as shown in figure 6. Since
sweep circuits. If the sweep voltage does not the output of the second stage is of the proper
always start from the same reference point, polarity to reinforce the input signal applied
the trace on the screen does not begin at the to the first tube, oscillations can readily take
same point on the screen each time the sweep place, started by thermal agitation noise and
B+ B+ B+
@
DIRECT-COUPLED CATHODE ELECTRON-COUPLED MULTIVIBRATOR WITH SINE-WAVE
MULTIVIBRATOR MULTIVIBRATOR SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL APPLIED
TO ONE TUBE
Figure 8
VARIOUS FORMS OF MUL TIVIBRATOR CIRCUITS
HANDBOOK Multivibrators 189
B+ B+
PULSE
OUTPUT
C1
TRIGGER"~
INPUT
R1
BASIC ECCLES-JORDAN TRIGGER ONE -SHOT MULTIVIBRATOR
CIRCUIT
Figure 9
miscellaneous tube noise. Oscillation il' main- Figure 9B illustrates a modified Eccles
tained by the process of building up and dis Jordan circuit which accomplishes a complete
charging the store of energy in the grid cou cycle when triggered with a positive pulse.
piing capacitors of the two tubes. The charg Such a circuit is called a one-shot multivibra
ing and discharging paths are shown in figure tor. For initial action, V, is cutoff and V2 is
7. Various forms of multivibrators are shown conducting. A large positive pulse applied to
in figure 8. the grid of V 1 causes this tube to conduct, and
The output of a multivibrator may be used the voltage at its plate decreases by virtue of
as a source of square waves, as an electronic the IR drop through R,. Capacitor C 2 is charged
switch, or as a means of obtaining frequency rapidly by this abrupt change in V 1 plate volt
division. Submultiple frequencies as low as age, and V 2 becomes cutoff while V1 conducts.
one-tenth of the injected synchronizing fre This condition exists until C 2 discharges, al
quency may easily be obtained. lowing vl to conduct, raising the cathode bias
of V 1 until it is once again cutoff.
The Eccles-Jordan The Eccles Jordan trigger
A direct, cathode-coupled multivibrator is
Circuit circuit is shown in figure
shown in figure SA. RK is a common cathode
9A. This is not a true mul-
resistor for the two tubes, and coupling takes
tivibrator, but rather a circuit that possesses
place across this resistor. It is impossible for
two conditions of stable equilibrium. One con
a tube in this circuit to completely cutoff the
clition is when V 1 is conducting and V2 is cut
other tube, and a circuit of this type is called
off; the other when V 2 is conducting and V1 is
a free-running multivibrator in which the con
cutoff. The circuit remains in one or the other
of these two stable conditions with no change clition of one tube temporarily cuts off the
in operating potentials until some external other.
action occurs which causes the nonconducting
tube to conduct. The tubes then reverse their
functions and remain in the new condition as
long as no plate current flows in the cutoff + RF RF RF
tube. This type of circuit is known as a flip- PULSE PULSE PULSE
flop circuit. ~ ~ ~
00 0 I
00, 'on'
I U l.\
'00
1 VV
1
1----l CUTOFF
CUTOFF
1----..j
TIME TIME
VI RI VI R1
@
POSITIVE COUNTING Cl RCUIT WITH
POSITIVE COUNTING CIRCUIT NEGATIVE COUNTING CIRCUIT
METER INDICATION
Figure 12
POSITIVE AND NEGATIVE COUNTING CIRCUITS
10-4 The Blocking Oscillator ing units to be counted, and produces a volt
age that is proportional to the frequency of
A blocking oscillator is any oscillator which the pulses. A counting circuit may be used in
cuts itself off after one or more cycles caused conjunction with a blocking oscillator to pro-
by the accumulation of a negative charge on duce a trigger pulse which is a submultiple of
the grid capacitor. This negative charge may of the frequency of the applied pulse. Either
gradually be drained off through the grid re positive or negative pulses may be counted.
sistor of the tube, allowing the circuit to os- A positive counting circuit is shown in figure
cillate once again. The process is repeated 12A, and a negative counting circuit is shown
and the tube becomes an intermittent oscilla in figure 12B. The positive counter allows a
tor. The rate of such an occurance is deter certain amount of current to flow through R 1
mined by the R-C time constant of the grid cir- each time a pulse is applied to C,.
cuit. A single-swing blocking oscillator is The positive pulse charges C, and makes
shown in figure 10, wherein the tube is cutoff the plate of V 2 positive with respect to its
before the completion of one cycle. The tube cathode. V 2 conducts until the exciting pulse
produces single pulses of energy, the time p~ssc;s .. C, is then discharged by V,, and the
between the pulses being regulated by the cucult 1s ready to accept another pulse. The
discharge time of the grid RC network. The average current flowing through R 1 increases
self-pulsing blocking oscillator is shown in as the pulse-repetition frequency increases,
figure 11, and is used to produce pulses and decreases as the p.r.f. decreases.
of rf energy, the number of pulses being de By reversing the diode c on n e c t ion s, as
termined by the timing network in the grid cir shown in figure 12B, the circuit is made to
cuit of the oscillator. The rate at which these respond to negative pulses. In this circuit, an
pulses occur is known as the pulse-repetition increase in the p.r.f. causes a decrease in the
frequency, or p.r.f. average current flowing through R 1 , which is
opposite to the effect in the positive counter.
Figure 14
The step-&ystep counter usee/ to trig9er a
Figure 13 &locking oscillator. The &locking oscillator
STEP-BY-STEP COUNTING CIRCUIT serves as a frequency clivicler.
HANDBOOK R-C Oscillators 1 91
+
lOOK 500'\.o
.---------~~ ~
.01
Figure 15 Figure 16
THE WIEN-BRIDGE AUDIO OSCILLATOR THE PHASE-SHIFT OSCILLATOR
1~0 K
I
47 K
I
"NOTCH" FREQUENCY 1 I
F=--'- ~
2 Tr RC ..J
WHERE g
C=~ POSITIVE
FEEDBACK
(LOOP 1)
-r-
~FREQ. OF OSCILLATION
+ I
C1 .
~IRz
"-
J:
"V
:a~.-------*-------~ ..
OUT Cz "'J:
~
"NOTCW NETWORK
Figure 19
BRIDGE-T FEEDBACK
Figure 18
LOOP CIRCUITS
THE NBS BRIDGE-T
Oscillation will occur at the null
OSCILLATOR CIRCUIT AS USED frequency of the bridge, at which
IN THE HEATH AG-9 AUDIO frequency the bridge allows
GENERATOR
minimum degeneration in loop 2.
A bridge-type phase shift oscillator is and effect system. The furnace (F) raises the
shown in figure 17. The bridge is so propor room temperature (T) to a predetermined value
tioned that at only one frequency is the phase at which point the sensing thermostat (TH)
shift through the bridge 180. Voltages of other reduces the fuel flow to the furnace. When the
frequencies are fed back to the grid of the tube room temperature drops below the predeter-
out of phase with the existing grid signal, and mined value the fuel flow is increased by the
are cancelled by being amplified out of phase. thermostat control. An interdependent control
The NBS Bridge-T oscillator developed by system is created by this arrangement: the
the National Bureau of Standards consists of room temperature depends upon the thermostat
a two stage amplifier having two feedback action, and the thermostat action depends upon
loops, as shown in figure 18. Loop 1 consists the room temperature. This sequence of events
of a regenerative cathode-to-cathode loop, con may be termed a closed loop feedback system.
sisting of Lp 1 and C3. The bulb regulates the
positive feedback, and tends to stabilize the
output of the oscillator, much as in the man-
ner of the Wien circuit. Loop 2 consists of a
grid-cathode degenerative circuit, containing
the bridge-T. Oscillation will occur at the
null frequency of the bridge, at which frequen
I
cy the bridge allows minimum degeneration
in loop 2 (figure 19).
--
FEEDBACK
(ERROR SlbNAL)
10-7 Feedback
Feedback amplifiers have been discussed
in Chapter 6, section 15 of this Handbook. A Figure 20
more general use of feedback is in automatic SIMPLE CLOSED LOOP
control and regulating systems. Mechanical FEEDBACK SYSTEM
feedback has been used for many years in such
forms as engine speed governors and steering Room temperature (T) controls
servo engines on ships. fuel supply to furnace (F) by feed-
A simple fee--dback system for temperature bock loop through Thermostat
control is shown in figure 20. This is a cause (TH) control.
HANDBOOK Feedback 193
Electronic Computers
Mechanical computing machines were first technology requires that machines assume many
produced in the seventeenth cenmry in Eu- of the information processing systems former-
rope although the simple Chinese abacus (a ly done by the human mind. Computing ma-
digital computer) had been in use for cen- chines can perform routine operations more
turies. Until the last decade only simple me- quickly and more accurately than a human be-
chanical computers (such as adding and book- ing, processing mathematical and logistical
keeping machines) were in general use. data on a production line basis. The computer,
The transformation and transmission of the however, cannot create, but can only follow
volume of information required by modern instructions. If the instructions are in error,
THE IBM
COMPUTER
AND
"MEMORY"
The '~704" Com-
putet is used with
32,000 "word"
memory storage
unit for research
programs. Heart
of this auxiliary
unit are small,
doughnut-shaped
iron fettites which
store information
by means of mag-
netism. The unit
Is the first of Its
kind to be Instal-
led with I B M's
704 computer.
Components of the
system seen in the
foreground are
(left) card punch
and (right) card
reader. In the
center of the pic-
ture is the 704's
processing unit.
Digital Computers 195
NORTH SHORE 9
BUZZ.ER BATTERY
Figure 2
A SEQUENCE COMPUTER.
Three correct buttons will sound the buzzer.
~ ~::
DECIMAL NOTATION BINARY NOTATION
CD - ,,, - -
I 0 0
1 1
DIGIT TUBE(S)
1 1 2. 1, 0
3 1,1
2. 2.
3 2.+1
4 1, o, 0
4 4 s 1, o,,
0 1, 1, 0
s 4+1
7 1,1,1
0 4+2.
7 4+2.+1 0 1, o,o,o
0 0 I 1, 0 1 0 1 I
10
0+1
0+2.
10 1, 0, 1, 0
11 8+2+1
Figure 5
0+4
BINARY NOTATION SYSTEM
12.
REQUIRES ONLY TWO NUMBERS,
13 1+4+1 "0" AND "1."
14 8+4+2.
IS 8+ ... +2+1
bols for all numbers. Computer service usual-
Figure 4 ly employs "zero" and "one" as these symbols.
BINARY DECIMAL NOTATION. ONLY Decimal notation and binary notation for com-
FOUR TUBES ARE REQUIRED TO mon numbers are shown in figure 5. The
REPRESENT DIGITS FROM 1 TO 15.
THE DIGIT "12" IS INDICATED binary notation represents 4-digit numbers
ABOVE. (thousands) with ten bits, and 7-digit num-
bers (millions) with 20 bits. Only one elec-
tron tube is required to display an information
The tubes (or their indicator lamps) can be bit. The savings in components and primary
arranged in five columns of 10 tubes each. power drain of a binary-type computer over
From right to left the columns represent units, the older ENIAC-type computer is obvious.
tens, hundreds, thousands, etc. The bottom tube Figure 6 illustrates a computer board show-
in each column represents "zero," the second ing the binary indications from one to ten.
tube represents "one," the third tube "two,"
and so on. Only one tube in each column is Digital The digital computer is em-
excited at any given instant. If the number Computer Uses ployed in a "yes-no" situa-
73092 is to be displayed, tube number seven tion. It may be used for
in the fifth column is excited, tube number routine calculations that would ordinarily re-
three in the fourth column, tube number zero quire enormous man-hours of time, such as
in the third column, etc. as shown in figure 3. checking stress estimates in aircraft design, or
A simpler system employs the binary deci- military logistics, and problems involving the
mal notation, wherein any number from one manipulation of large masses of figures.
to fifteen can be represented by four tubes.
Each of the four tubes has a numerical value
DECIMAL NOTATION COMPUTER NOTATION
that is associated with its position in the tube
0
group. More than one tube of the group may
be excited at once, as illustrated in figure 4. 1 0
The values assigned to the tubes in this par-
ticular group are 1, 2, 4, and 8. Additional
2.
3
0
0 0
4 0
tubes may be added to the group, doubling the
notation of the tube thus: 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32,
5
0
0
0
0
8 0
played by the correct tube combination.
0 0
A third system employs the binary notation
which makes use of a bit (binary digit) repre-
10 0
e=oFF
0
O=oN
senting a single morsel of information. The
binary system has been known for over forty Figure 6
BINARY NOTATION AS REPRESENTED
centuries, and was considered a mystical revel- ON COMPUTER BOARD FOR NUMBERS
ation for ages since it employed only two sym- FROM 1 TO 10.
HANDBOOK Analog Computers 197
+t!IOV.
~~
y LLJ ~eouT
- -
::~~'
eouT
_ ( e, R1 ez Rz) ( R3 -) ..,.
eouT- R1+Rz + R1+R2. R1 Rz ~----------~~-8+
[R1+Rz]+R3
EouT
Figure 7
SUMMATION OF TWO VOLTAGES
BY ELECTRICAL MEANS.
THE
HEATHKIT
ELECTRONIC
ANALOG
DIGITAL
COMPUTER
This 11
electronic
slide rule11 simu-
lates equations or
physical problems
electronically, sub-
stituting one phys-
ical system as a
model lor a sec-
ond system that
is usually more
difficult or costly
to construct or
measure, and that
obeys equations ol
the same form.
198 Electronic Computers THE RADIO
eouT =EX
R1
e1
J:TL_~
~eour
c
~eour e
-
Cffy
R
= +
OUT
Figure 9
ELECT~ONIC MULTIPLICATION
MAY BE ACCOMPLISHED BY
CALIBRATED POTENTIOMETERS, Figure 11
WHEN OUTPUT VOLTAGE IS ELECTRONIC DIFFERENTIATION
PROPORTIONAL TO THE INPUT
VOLTAGE MULTIPLIED BY A The time derivative of a voltage can be
expressed as a charge on a capacitor (A).
CONSTANT CR2/R1l. Operational amplifier (B) employs feed
back principle lor short differentiation
time.
complex circuits employ vacuum tubes, as in
figure 8. Synchronous transformers may be de
used to add expressions of angular rotation, eo=RCdt
(2)
and circuits have been developed for adding
time delays, or pulse counting. For highest accuracy, a small RC product
should be used, permitting the maximum pos-
Multiplication Electronic multiplication and sible differentiation time. The output of the
and Division division may be accomplished differentiator may be amplified to any suitable
with the use of potentiome- level.
ters where the output voltage is proportional to A more accurate differentiating device
the input voltage multiplied by a constant makes use of an operational amplifier. This
which may be altered by changing the physical unit is a high gain, negative feedback d-e
arrangement of the potentiometer (figure 9l. amplifier (discussed in section 11-4) with the
Variable autotransformers may also be used to resistance portion of the RC product appearing
perform multiplication. in the feedback loop of the amplifier (figure
A simple bridge may be used to obtain an llB). A shorter differentiation time may be
output that is the product of two inputs divided employed if the junction point between R and
by a third input, as shown in figure 10. C could be held at a constant potential. The
Differentiation The time derivative of a feedback amplifier shown inverts the output
signal and applies it to the RC nerwork, hold-
voltage can be expressed as
ing the junction potential constant.
a charge on a capacitor by:
Integration Integration is a process of ac-
-c dt
1-
de
(1)
cumulation, or summation, and
requires a device capable of storing physical
and is shown in figure llA. The charging cur- quantities. A capacitor will store an electrical
rent is converted into a voltage by the use charge and will give the time integral of a
of a resistor, R. If the input to the RC circuit current in respect to a voltage:
is charging at a uniform rate so that the cur- 1
rent through C and R is constant, the output eo=- i dt ( 3)
voltage eo is: c
In most computers, the input signal is in
the form of a voltage, and the input charging
current of the capacitor must be taken through
a series resistance as in figure 12. If the inte-
grating time is short the charging current is
R 1 ~ R3.
OUTPUT"\..
2 approximately proportional to the input vol-
tage. The charging current may be made a
true measure of the input voltage by the use
Figure 12
Figure 10 SIMPLE ;:---J1 f3l
ELECTRONIC MU LTl PLICATION BY
BRIDGE CIRCUIT PROVIDES IN~~~~J~ON ~ fc ~eour
OUTPUT THAT IS PRODUCT OF Making use of
TWO INPUTS DIVIDED BY A charging current
THIRD INPUT. of capacitor.
HANDBOOK Operational Amplifier 199
~~heo"' ., +
Amplifier
Mathematical operations are performed by
using a high gain d-e amplifier, termed an
Figure 13 operational amplifier. The symbol of this unit
"MILLER FEEDBACK" INTEGRATOR
SUITABLE FOR COMPUTER USE. is a triangle, with the apex pointing in the di-
rection of operation (figure 15). The gain of
such an amplifier is -A, so:
eo
eo = - Ae., or e. = - A (4 )
Figure 14
R-L NETWORK USED FOR If -A approaches infinity, e. will be ap-
INTEGRATION PURPOSES. proximately zero. In practice this condition is
realized by using amplifiers having open loop
gains of 30,000 to 60,000. If eo is set at 100
volts, e. will be of the order of a few milli-
volts. Thus, considering e. equal to zero:
-eo - Rr
Figure 15
- - oreo=--e (5)
Rr' R,
OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER C-Al
Mathematical operations may be performed which may be written:
by any operational amplifier, usually a
stable, high-gain d-e amplifier, such as Rr
shown in Figure 16. eo= - Ke, where K = -
' R, (6)
of an operational amplifier wherein the ca- This amounts to multiplication by a constant
pacitance portion of the RC product appears coefficient, since R, and Rr may be fixed in
in the feedback loop of the amplifier, holding value. The circuit of a typical operational am-
the junction point between R and C at a con- plifier is shown in figure 16.
stant potential. A simple integrator is shown
in figure 13 employing the Miller feedback Amplifier Two voltages may be added by
principle. Integration is also possible with an Operation the amplifier, as shown in figure
RL network (figure 14). 17. Keeping in mind that e. is
1M (RF)
lOOK
eo
1~0 K
3K 2!>0K
(BALANCE) ('AIN)
2K 00 K
1K NE-51
1 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -- GAl N = -A --
Figure 16
HIGH GAIN OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER, SUCH AS USED IN HEATH COMPUTER.
200 Electronic Computers THE RADIO
RF
eo
u_2.____.!_G____.f
Figure 17
y
OPERATE OPERATE
RELAY RELAY SET VOLTAGE TO Y;Yo AT
TIMEt =o (INITIAL
DISPLACEMENT)
1.0 1.0
'"
'"
y --c~; -Kv+f'!tl
'" TO DISPLAY
OS C.\ LLOSCO PE
'lc
'"
'"
f'(t J >------H\1'-----l
c;; -P(tJ
Figure 20
ANALOG SOLUTION FOR "MASS-SPRING-
DAMPER" PROBLEM OF FIGURE 19.
output of the summing amplifier (A3) to the velocity. That, in turn, will become y, or dis-
input of the first as shown in figure 20 satis- tance, at the output of the second amplifier.
fies the equation. Before the problem can be solved on the
To obtain a solution to the problem, the computer it is necessary to determine the time
initial displacement and velocity must be speci- of solution desirable and the output amplitude
fied. This is done by charging the integrating of the solution. The time of solution is de-
capacitors to the proper voltages. Three oper- termined by the RC constant of the integrating
ational amplifiers and a summing amplifier amplifiers. If RC is set at unity, computer
are required. time is equal to real time. The computer time
A second problem that may be solved by desirable is determined by the method of read-
the analog computer is the example of a freely out. When using an oscilloscope for read-out,
falling body. Disregarding air resistance, the a short solution time is desirable. For a re-
body will fall (due to the action of gravity) corder, longer solution time is better.
with a constant acceleration. The equation
describing this action is: Suppose, for example, in the problem of the
d'y falling body, the distance of fall in 2.5 seconds
F = mg = m dt' ) is desired. Using an RC constant of 1 would
08 give a solution time of 2.5 seconds. This would
Integration of equation (18) will give the be acceptable for a recorder but is slow for an
. o rdy- , an d.mtegrauon
veloCity, . a second ume
. oscilloscope. A convenient time of solution for
dt the 'scope would be 25 milliseconds. This is
will give displacement, or y. The block dia- 11100 of the real time, so an RC constant of
gram of a suitable computer for this problem .01 is needed. This can be obtained with C
is shown in figure 21. equal to 0.1 1'-fd, and R equal to 100,000
If a voltage proportional to g and hence to ohms.
d'y is introduced into the first amplifier, the It is now necessary to choose an input volt-
dt' age which will not overdrive the amplifiers.
dy The value of g is known to be approximately
output of that unit will be - dt, or the
32 ft/ sec./ sec. A check indicates that if we
set g equal to 3 2 volts, the voltage represent-
ing the answer will exceed 100 volts. Since
the linear response of the amplifier is only
100 volts, this is undesirable. An input of 16
volts, however, should permit satisfactory op-
eration of the amplifiers. Output voltages near
zero should also be avoided. In general, output
voltage should be about 50 volts or so, with
Figure 21 amplifier gains of 20 to 60 being preferable.
ANALOG COMPUTER FOR
"FREELY FALLING BODY" Thus, for this particular problem the time-
PROBLEM. scale factor and amplitude-scale factor have
202 Electronic Computers THE RADIO
0.1 0.1
Figure 22
ANALOG SOLUTION FOR
"FALLING BODY PROBLEM"
OF FIGURE 21. Figure 24
LIMITING CIRCUIT TO SIMULATE
TIME IN SECONDS-
NON-LINEAR FUNCTIONS SUCH AS
ENCOUNTERED IN HYSTERESIS,
cs=. 1
--
2 (2 5}
-~----
I
3
144
a function is defined differently for different
regions of the independent variable. Such a
function might be defined as follows:
Figure 23
READ-OUT SOLUTION OF "FREELY eo=-K,,e, -K, (19)
FALLING BODY" PROBLEM.
eo = e, , - K e, K, ( 20)
eo = K,, e' K, ( 21)
been chosen. The problem now looks like
figure 22. where K, and K, are constants.
To solve the problem, relays A and A' are Various limiting circuits can be used, one of
opened. The solution should now appear on which is shown in figure 24. This is a series
the oscilloscope as shown in figure 23. The limiter circuit which is simple and does not
solution of the problem leaves the integrating require special components. Commonly en-
capacitors charged. It is necessary to remove countered problems requiring these or similar
this charge before the problem can be rerun. limiting techniques include hysteresis, back-
This is done by closing relays A and A'. lash, and certain types of friction.
NOTE: REPLACE C WITH A 1 MEG. RESISTOR
FOR FUNCTION SETUP
RAMP- FUNCTION
GENERATOR
820 K -
Figure 25
SIMPLIFIED DIAGRAM OF FUNCTIONAL GENERATOR TO APPROXIMATE NON-LINEAR
FUNCTIONS.
HANDBOOK Non-Linear Functions 203
~----- ---,
I
1
I "AND" GATES I
+Y I
I
I
POSITIVE
Figure 26 _ ___]I
TYPICAL NON-LINEAR FUNCTION Figure 27
WHICH MAY BE SET UP WITH ELECTRONIC PACKAGE IN
FUNCTION GENERATOR. DIGITAL COMPUTER.
Stylized diagram of tube package. Lines car-
rying negative pulses are marked by a small
The Function A function generator may be circle at each end. Gates are indicated by
Generator used to approximate almost a semi-circle with "pins 11 lor each input.
any non-linear function. This
is done by use of straight line segments which the output of the summing amplifier will be
are combined to approximate curves such as zero. If, on the other hand, potentiometer P
are found in trigonometric functions as well is adjusted one way or the other from center,
as in stepped functions. In a typical generator the bridge will be unbalanced and the sum-
ten line segments are used, five in the plus-x ming amplifier output will vary linearly with
direction, and five in the minus-x direction. respect to the input in either a positive or neg-
Five 6AL5 double diodes are used. Each line ative y direction, depending upon which side
segment is generated by a modified bridge of center potentiometer P is set.
circuit (figure 2 5). A ramp function or volt- The break voltage, or value of x at which a
age is fed into one arm of the bridge while straight line segment will begin is set by
the opposite arm is connected to a biased diode. biasing the diode to the particular voltage level
The other two arms of the bridge combine to or value of x desired. The ramp function gen-
form the output. The voltage appearing across erator has either a positive or negative input
one of these arms is fed through a sign-chang- which because of the 180 degree phase shift
ing amplifier and then summed with the volt- in the amplifier, gives a minus- or plus-x out-
age appearing at the opposite arm. If the arm put respectively. A typical function such as
of potentiometer P (the slope control) is set shown in figure 26 may be set up with the
in the center, the bridge will be balanced and function generator. The initial condition volt-
IBM's new "608," the
first completely tran-
sistorized calculator
for commerdal appli-
cations, o p e r a t e s
without the use of a
single vacuum tube.
Transistors--tiny ger-
manium devices that
perform many of the
functions of conven-
tional vacuum tubes
-make possible 50%
reduction in compu-
ter-unit size and a
90% reduction in
power requirements
over a comparable
IBM tube-model ma-
chine. They are
mounted, along with
related circuitry, on
banks of printed wir-
Ing panels in the
608.
The machine's 11 inter-
nal storage, or mem-
ory," is made up of
magnetic cores-mi-
nute, doughnut-shap-
ed objects that can
"remembet 11 informa-
tion indefinitely, and
recall it for use in
calculations in a few
millionths of a
cl!lrl\nrl.
204 Electronic Computers THE RADIO
age is set to the value of X1. The break-voltage can be connected in series to form operational
control is increased until the output of the circuits. The input "and" and '"or" gates are
summing amplifier increases abruptly, indi- biased to conduction by external voltages. The
cating the diode is conducting. The input ""and" diode gate transmits a pulse only when
voltage from the initial condition power supply all the input terminals are pulsed positively,
is set to the value X, The slope control (P) and the "or" diode gate transmits a positive
is now set to value Y,. A second function gen- pulse applied to any one of its input terminals.
erator may be used to set points X, and X,, The input pulses pass through the gates and
using the break-voltage control and the initial drive the amplifier stage, which delivers an
condition voltage adjustments. Points X, and amplified pulse to the positive and negative
X, are finally set with a third generator. The output gates, and to accompanying memory
x-output of the function generator system may circuits.
be read on an oscilloscope, using the x-output
Memory Circuits A memory circuit consists
of the ramp-function generator amplifier as
of some sort of delay line
the horizontal sweep for the oscilloscope.
which is capable of holding an information
11-7 Digital Circuitry pattern for a period of time. A simple electri-
cal delay line capable of holding a pulse for
Digital circuits dealing with "and," or, a fraction of a microsecond is shown in figure
and ""not" situations may be excited by electri- 29. The amount of delay is proportional to
cal pulses representing these logical operations. the frequency of the input signal as shown in
Sorting and amplifying the pulses can be ac- the graph. A "long" transmission line may
complished by the use of electronic packages, also be used as a delay line, with the signal
such as shown in figure 27. Logical operations being removed from the "far" end of the line
may be accomplished by diode-resistor gates after being delayed an interval equal to the
operating into an amplifier stage. Negative and time of transmission along the line. Lines of
positive output pulses from the amplifier are this type are constructed much in the manner
obtained through diode output gates. The driv- of a standard coaxial cable, except that the
ing pulses may be obtained from a standard inner conductor is a long, thin coil as illustrat-
oscillator, operating at or near 1 me. ed in figure 30. Other memory circuits make
A circuit of a single digital package is shown use of magnetostrictive or piezoelectric effects
in figure 28. Other configurations, such as a to retard the pulse. Information may also be
"flip-flop" may be used. Many such packages stored in electrostatic storage tubes, upon mag-
"AND GATES
+
INPUT #1
LIMITING
DIODES
INPUT# 2
INPUT#:3
INPUT#4
INPUT41:5
INPUT'I:6
INPUT*- 7
INPUT# 8
Figure 28
TYPICAL DIGITAL PACKAGE SHOWING INPUT AND OUTPUT DIODE GATES AND
PULSE AMPLIFIER.
HANDBOOK Digital Circuitry 205
INPUT OUTPUT
I I I
0.5
Figure 30
UNIFORM DELAY LINE BEARS
RESEMBLANCE TO COAXIAL CABLE,
0.4t----+--+---+,--+----t-- EXCEPT FOR COILED INNER
CONDUCTOR.
F (MC)
Figure 29
SIMPLE DELAY LINE COMPOSED OF memories capable of retaining over 10,000
LUMPED INDUCTANCE AND separate bits of information. The memory may
CAPACITANCE. GRAPH SHOWS HOW be "read" or "interrogated" by sending pulses
DELAY TIME VARIES WITH through the matrix and observing the resulting
FREQUENCY OF INPUT PULSE. induced voltage in a secondary circuit. The
output from the memory circuit may be used
netic recording tape, and in ferromagnetic to excite a program control system, permitting
cores. Experimental magnetic cores have been the computer to drive another mechanism in
developed that will permit construction of the proper sequence.
E &. E TECHNI-SHEET
TABLE OF ALUMINUM TUBING, ROUND DRAWN, 12 FOOT LENGTHS
207
208 Radio Receiver Fundamentals THE R AD I 0
TRIODE
AUDIO OUTPUT
Figure 1
AUDIO OUTPUT
ELEMENTARY FORM OF RECEIVER
This is the basis of the "crystal set" type of re-
ceiver, although a vacuum cliocle may be usee/ in
place of the crystal cliocle. The tank circuit L2-C1
is tuned to the frequency it is clesirecl to receive.
The by-pass capacitor across the phones should
have a low reactance to the carrier frequency be-
ing received, but a high reactance to the moclula-
tion on the received signal. -B +B
CATHODE-TAP REGENERATION WITH SCREEN VOLTAGE
REGENERATION CONTROL.
12-2 Superregenerative
Receivers
TO AUDIO
AMPLIFIER
Ar ultra-high frequencies, when ir is de-
sired to keep weight and cost ar a minimum
a special form of rhe regenerative receive~
known as rhe superregenerator is often used
for radi.orelephony reception. The superregen-
erator iS essenually a regenerative receiver
Figure 3
wHh a means provided to throw the detector
rapidly in and our of oscillation. The frequency SUPERREGENERATIVE DETECTOR CIRCUIT
at which the detector is made to go in and out A self-quenched superregenerative detector such
as illustrated above is capable of giving good
of oscillation varies with the frequency to be sensitivity in the v-h-f range. However, the circuit
received, bur is usually between 20,000 and has the disadvantage that its selectivity is rela-
5.00,000 times a second. This superregenera- tively poor. Also, such a circuit should be pre-
uve action considerably increases the sen- ceded by an r-f stage to suppress the radiation of
a signal by the oscillating detector.
sitivity of rhe oscillating detector so rhat the
usual "backgrou~d hiss" is greatly amplified
when no s1gnal 1s being received. This hiss
diminishes. in proportion ro the strength of the
rece1ved s1gnal, loud signals eliminating the The optimum quenching frequency is a func-
hiss entirely. tion of rhe signal frequency. As rhe operating
frequency goes up, so does rhe optimum quench-
Quench There are two systems in common
ing frequency. When the quench frequency is
Methods use for causing the detector to break
roo low, maximum sensitivity is nor obtained.
in and our of oscillation rapidly. In
When ir is roo high, both sensitivity and selec-
one: a separate interruption-frequency oscilla-
tivity suffer. In fact, rhe optimum quench fre-
tor 1s arranged so as to vary the voltage rapid-
quency for an operating frequency below 15 Me.
ly on one of rhe detector tube elements (usual-
is in rhe audible range. This makes rhe super-
ly rhe plate, sometimes the screen) at the high
regenerator impracticable for use on rhe lower
rate. necessary. The interruption-frequency
frequencies.
oscdlaror commonly uses a conventional tick-
The high background noise or hiss which
~er-feedback circuit with coils appropriate for
is heard on a properly designed superregener-
HS operating frequency.
ator when no signal is being received is not
The s~cond, and simplest, type of super-
the quench frequency component; ir is rube
regenerative de.rector circuit is arranged so
and tuned circuit fluctuation noise, indicating
as ~o p~oduce Hs own interruption frequency
rhar rhe receiver is extremely sensitive.
ose1llauon, wHhout rhe aid of a separate tube.
A moderately strong signal will cause rhe
The detector rube damps (or "quenches") itself
background noise to disappear completely,
our of signal-frequency oscillation ar a high
because rhe superregeneraror has an inherent
ra~e by vurue of the use of a high value of
and instantaneous automatic volume control
gr~d leak and proper size plate-blocking and
characteristic. This same a-v-e characteristic
gnd capacHors, In conjunction wirh an excess
makes rhe receiver comparatively insensitive
of feedback. In this rype of "self-quenched"
to impulse noise such as ignition pulses-a
detector, rhe grid leak is quire often returned
highly desirable feature. This characteristic
to the P.osiri ve side ofrhe power supply (through
also resulrs in appreciable distortion of a re-
the co.tl) rather than ro rhe cathode. A repre-
ceived radiotelephone signal, bur nor enough
sentative self-quenched superregenerarive de-
ro affect rhe intelligibility.
rector circuit is shown in figure 3.
The selectivity of a superregenerator is
Except where ir is impossible ro secure
rather poor as compared to a superheterodyne,
sufficient reg.enerarive feedback to permit
but is surprisingly good for so simple a re-
~uperregeneration, rhe self-quenching circuit
ceiver when figured on a percentage basis
~s ro be preferred; ir is simpler, is self-adjusr-
rather than absolute kc. bandwidth.
mg as regards quenching amplitude, and can
have good quenching wave form. To obtain
as good results wirh a separately quenched FM Reception A superregenerarive receiver
sul?erregenerator, very careful design is re- will receive frequency modu-
quued. However, separately quenched circuits lated signals with resulrs comparing favorably
are useful when it is possible ro make a cer- with amplitude modulation if rhe frequency
tain. t~be. oscil~ate on a very high frequency s~ing of the FM transmitter is sufficiently
b.ur n iS impossible to obtain enough regenera- high. For such reception, rhe receiver is de-
tion for self-quenching action. tuned slightly ro either side of resonance.
210 Radio Receiver Fundamentals THE R AD I 0
I ANTENNA AUDIO
OUTPUT
&2 0
r ----, r- ---,
I R.F. t I I
AUDIO 1
I AMPLIFIER
I
L---
I
_J r~p~~~~:J
~~~~~1~0
IOSCJLLATORI
I (FORC.W.)I
L------'
Figure 5
ESSENTIAL UNITS OF A
SUPERHETERODYNE RECEIVER
The basic portions of the receiver are shown
In solicl blocks. Practicable receivers em-
ploy the clotted blocks oncl also usually in-
clude such oclclitlonol circuits as o noise
limiter, an a-v-e circuit, and a crystal filter
in the i-f amplifier.
Figure 4
theory of operation of the superheterodyne
THE FREMODYNE SUPERREGENERATIVE
should be famili~r to every radio student and
SUPERHETERODYNE DETECTOR FOR
experimenter. The following discussion con-
FREQUENCY MODULATED SIGNALS
cerns superheterodynes for amplitud~-modul~
tion reception. It is, however, appltcable 1n
part to receivers for frequency modulation.
Superregenerative receivers radiate a strong,
Principle of In the superheterodyne, the in-
broad, and rough signal. For this reason, it is
Operation coming signal is applied to a
necessary in most applications to employ a
mixer consisting of a non-linear
radio frequency amplifier stage ahead of the
impedance such as a vacuum tube or a diode.
detector, with thorough shielding throughout
The signal is mixed with a steady signal gen-
the receiver.
erated locally in an oscillator stage, with the
result that a signal bearing all the modulation
The Fremodyne The Haze It in e- Fremodyne
applied to the original signal but of a fre-
Detector superregenerative circuit is
quency equal to the difference between the
expressly designed for re-
local oscillator and incoming signal frequen-
ception of FM signals. This versatile circuit
cies appears in the mixer output circuit. The
combines the action of the superregenerative
output from the mixer stage is fed into a fixed-
receiver with the superhetrodyne, converting
tuned intermediate-frequency amplifier, where
FM signals directly into audio signals in one
it is amplified and detected in the usual man-
double triode tube (figure 4). One section of ner, and passed on to the audio amplifier. Fig-
the triode serves as a superregenerative mixer, ure 5 shows a block diagram of the fundamen-
producing an i-f of 22 Me., an i-f amplifier, and tal superheterodyne arrangement. The basic
a FM detector. The detector action is accom- components are shown in heavy lines, the
plished by slope detection tuning on the side simplest superheterodyne consisting simply
of the i-f selectivity curve. of these three units. However, a good com-
This circuit greatly reduces the radiated munications receiver will comprise all of the
signal, characteristic of the superregenerative elements shown, both heavy and dotted blocks.
detector, yet provides many of the desirable
features of the superregenerator. The pass- Superheterodyne The advantages of super-
band of the Fremodyne detector is about Advantages heterodyne reception are
400 kc.
directly attributable to the
use of the fixed-tuned intermediate,-frequency
(i-f) amplifier. Since all signals are converted
12-3 Superheterodyne
to the intermediate frequency, this section of
Receivers the receiver may be designed for optimum se-
lectivity and high amplification. High a~pli
Because of its superiority and nearly uni" fication is easily obtained in the intermediate-
versa! use in all fields of radio reception, the frequency amplifier, since it operates at a
HANDBOOK The Superhetrodyne 211
INP<p: _ _ _ _ _ -~
VARIABLE-.U
PE.NTOOE
an overwhelming advantage over the tuned
radio frequency (t-r-0 type of receiver because
JH L---~-_j
I
I
I
I
oo-
300
of what is commonly known as arithmetical
selectivity.
This c_an best be illustrated by considering
two receivers, one of the t-r-f type and one of
the superheterodyne type, both attempting to
receive a desired signal at 10,000 kc. and
1ME.G. -= BY-PASS CAPACITORS .0!> TO 0.1 .1JFD.
eliminate a strong interfering signal at 10,010
TO A.V.C kc. In the t-r-f receiver, separating these two
signals in the tuning circuits is practically
Figure 6 impossible, since they differ in frequency by
TYPICAL 1-F AMPLIFIER STAGE only 0.1 per cent. However, in a superhetero-
dyne with an intermediate frequency of, for ex-
ample, 1000 kc., the desired signal will be
converted to a frequency of 1000 kc. and the
relatively low frequency, where conventional interfering signal will be converted to a fre-
pentodetype tubes give adequate voltage gain. que~cy of 1010 kc., both signals appearing at
A typical i-f amplifier is shown in figure 6. the mput of the i-f amplifier. In this case the
From the diagram it may be seen that both two signals may be separated much more ;ead-
the grid and plate circuits are tuned. The tuned ily, since they differ by 1 per cent, or 10 times
circuits used for coupling between i-f stages as much as in the first case.
are known as i-f transformers. These will be
more fully discussed later in this chapter. The Converter The converter stage, or mixer,
Stage of a superheterodyne receiver
Choice of Inter- The choice of a frequency can be either one of two types:
mediate Frequency for the i-f amplifier in- ( 1) it may use a single envelope converter
volves several considera- tube, such as a 6K8, 6SA7, or 6BE6, or (2) it
tions. One of these considerations concerns may use two tubes, or two sets of elements in
selectivity; the lower the intermediate fre- the same envelope, in an oscillator-mixer ar-
quency the greater the obtainable selectivity. rangement. Figure 7 shows a group of circuits
On the other hand, a rather high intermediate of both types to illustrate presellt practice
frequency is desirable from the standpoint of with regard to types of converter stages.
image elimination, and also for the reception Converter tube combinations such as shown
of signals from television and FM transmitters in figures 7 A and 7B are relatively simple and
and modulated self-controlled oscillators, all inexpensive, and they do an adequate job for
of which occupy a rather wide band of frequen- most applications. With a converter tube such
cies, making a broad selectivity characteristic as the 6SB7-Y or the 6BA7 quite satisfactory
desirable. Images are a pecularity common to performance may be obtained for the reception
all superheterodyne receivers, and for this of relatively strong signals (as for example
reason they are given a detailed discussion FM broadcast reception) up to frequencies in
later in this chapter. excess of 100 Me. However, the equivalent in-
While intermediate frequencies as low as put noise resistance of such tubes is of the
50 kc. are used where extreme selectivity is order of 200,000 ohms, which is a rather high
a requirement, and frequencies of 60 Me. and value indeed. So such tubes are not suited for
above are used in some specialized forms of operation without an r-f stage in the high-
receivers, most present-day communications frequency range if weak-signal reception is
superheterodynes use intermediate frequencies desired.
around either 455 kc. or 1600 kc. The 6L 7 mixer circuit shown in figure 7C,
Home-type broadcast receivers almost al- and the 6BA7 circuit of figure 7D also are
ways use an i-f in the vicinity of 455 kc., characterized by an equivalent inpu~ noise re-
while auto receivers usually use a frequency sistance of several hundred thousand ohms, so
of about 262 kc. The standard frequency for that these also must be preceded by one or
the i-f channel of FM receivers is 10.7 Me. more r-f stages with a fairly high gain per
Television receivers use an i-f which covers stage if a low noise factor is desired of the
the band between about 21.5 and 27 Me., al- complete receiver.
though a new band between 41 and 46 Me. is However, the circuit arrangements shown
coming into more common usage. at figures 7F and 6F are capable of low-noise
operation within themselves, so that these
Arithmetical Aside from allowing the use of circuits may be fed directly from the antenna
Selectivity fixed-tuned band-pass amplifier without an r-f stage and still provide a good
stages, the superheterodyne has noise factor to the complete receiver. Note
212 Radio Receiver Fundamentals THE R AD I 0
~
[[ ~
[[
TOI.F.
AMP.
[[
2 ..UJJF.
TO I.F.
AMP.
[[
+150V.
Figure 7
TYPICAL FREQUENCY-CONVERTER (MIXER) STAGES
The relative aclvantages of the clifferent circuits are cliscussecl in the text
that both these circuits use control grid in quency limit for conventional mixer stages,
jection of both the incoming signal and the mixers of the diode type are most commonly
local-oscillator voltage. Hence, paradoxically, employed. The diode may be either a vacuum-
circuits such as these should be preceded by tube heater diode of a special u-h-f design
an rf stage if local- oscillator radiation is to such as the 9005, or it may be a crystal diode
be held to any reasonable value of field in of the general type of the 1N21 through 1N28
tensity. series.
both these efiects can largely be obviated by optimum injection voltage is not at all critical
the same remedy, they will be considered to- just so it is adequate. Typical optimum in-
gether. jection voltages will run from 1 to 10 volts for
control grid injection, and 45 volts or so for
Mixer Noise Mixer noise of the shot-effect screen or suppressor grid injection.
type, which is evidenced by a
hiss in the audio output of the receiver, is Images There always are two signal frequen-
caused by small irregularities in the plate cur- cies which will combine with a given
rent in the mixer stage and will mask weak frequency to produce the same difference fre-
signals. Noise of an identical nature is gen- quency. For example: assume a superhetero-
erated in an amplifier stage, but due to the dyne with its oscillator operating on a higher
fact that the conductance in the mixer stage frequency than the signal, which is common
is considerably lower than in an amplifier practice in present superheterodynes, tuned to
stage using the same tube, the proportion of receive a signal at 14,100 kc. Assuming an
inherent noise present in a mixer usually is i-f amplifier frequency of 450 kc., the mixer
considerably greater than in an amplifier stage input circuit will be tuned to 14,100 kc., and
using a comparable tube. the oscillator to 14,100 plus 450, or 14,550 kc.
Although this noise cannot be eliminated, Now, a strong signal at the oscillator frequen-
its effects can be greatly minimized by plac- cy plus the intermediate frequency (14, 550
ing sufficient signal-frequency amplification plus 450, or 15,000 kc.) will also give a dif
having a high signal-to-noise ratio ahead of ference frequency of 450 kc. in the mixer out-
the mixer. This remedy causes the signal out- put and will be. heard al_so. Note that the image
put from the mixer to be large in proportion to 1s always twtce the mtermediate frequency
the noise generated in the mixer stage. In- away from the desired signal. Images cause
creasing the gain after the mixer will be of no repeat points on the tuning dial.
advantage in eliminating mixer noise difficul- The only way that the image could be elimi-
ties; greater selectivity after the mixer will nated in this particular case would be to make
help to a certain extent, but cannot be carried the selectivity of the mixer input circuit, and
too far, since this type of selectivity decreases any circuits preceding it, great enough so that
the i-f band-pass and if carried too far will the 15,000-kc. signal never reaches the mixer
not pass the sidebands that are an essential grid in sufficient amplitude to produce inter-
part of a voice-modulated signal. ference.
. For any particular intermediate frequency,
Triode Mixers A triode having a high trans- image interference troubles become increas-
conductance is the quietest ingly greater as the frequency to which the
mixer tube, exhibiting somewhat less gain but signal-frequency portion of the receiver is
a better signal-to-noise ratio than a compar tuned is increased. This is due to the fact that
able multi-grid mixer tube. However, below 30 the percentage difference between the desired
Me. it is possible to construct a receiver that frequency and the image frequency decreases
will get down to the atmospheric noise level as the receiver is tuned to a higher frequency.
without resorting to a triode mixer. The addi- The ratio of strength between a signal at the
tional difficulties experienced in avoiding image frequency and a signal at the frequency
pulling, undesirable feedback, etc., when using to which the receiver is tuned producing equal
a triode with control-grid injection tend to make output is known as the image ratio. The higher
multi-grid tubes the popular choice for this this ratio, the better the receiver in regard to
application on the lower frequencies. image-interference troubles.
On very high frequencies, where set noise With but a single tuned circuit between the
rather than atmospheric noise limits the weak mixer grid and the antenna, and with 400-500
signal response, triode mixers are more widely kc. i-f amplifiers, image ratios of 60 db and
used. A 6J6 miniature twin triode with grids over are easily obtainable up to frequencies
in push-pull and plates in parallel makes an around 2000 kc. Above this frequency, greater
excellent mixer up to about 600 Me. selectivity in the mixer grid circuit through
the use of additional tuned circuits between
Injection The amplitude of the injection volt- the mixer and the antenna is necessary if a
Voltage age will affect the conversion trans- good image ratio is to be maintained.
conductance of the mixer, and there-
fore should be made optimum if maximum sig-
nal-to-noise ratio is desired. If fixed bias is 12-5 R-F Stages
employed on the injection grid, the optimum
injection voltage is quite critical. If cathode Since the necessary tuned circuits between
bias is used, the optimum voltage is not so the mixer and the antenna can be combined
critical; and if grid leak bias is employed, the with tubes to form r-f amplifier stages, the
214 Radio Receiver Fundamentals THE R AD I 0
t
6AB4, 6J6,
6J4, {: 12A T7
GROUNDED-GRID
+f20V.
Figure 8
TYPICAL PENTODE R-F AMPLIFIER STAGE
CATHODE -COUPLED 6J6
------,
I
I
I
I
I
II
11~--~
Figure 10
TYPICAL DOUBLE-CONVERSION SUPERHETERODYNE RECEIVERS
Illustrated at (A) is the basic circuit of a commercial clouble-conversion superheteroclyne receiver. At (B) is
illustrated the application of an accessory sharp i-f channel for obtaining improved selectivity from a con
ventlonal communications receiver through the use of the double-conversion principle.
than half the Gm of either of the two tubes ratio, at the expense of i-f selectivity, by
taken alone. placing the desired signal and the image far-
ther apart. To give both good image ratio at
The Cascode The Cascode r-f amplifier, de- the higher frequencies and good selectivity in
Amplifier veloped at the MIT Radiation the i-f amplifier, a system known as double
Laboratory during World War II, conversion is sometimes employed. In this sys-
is a low noise circuit employing a grounded tem, the incoming signal is first converted to
cathode triode driving a grounded grid triode, a rather high intermediate frequency, and then
as shown in figure 9C. The stage gain of such amplified and again converted, this time to a
a circuit is about equal to that of a pentode much lower frequency. The first intermediate
tube, while the noise figure remains at the low frequency supplies the necessary wide separa-
level of a triode tube. Neutralization of the tion between the image and the desired sig-
first triode tube is usually unnecessary below nal, while the second one supplies the bulk of
50 Me. Above this frequency, a definite im- the i-f selectivity.
provement in the noise figure may be obtained The double-conversion system, as illus-
rhrough the use of neutralization. The neutral- trated in figure 10, is receiving two general
izing coil, LN, should resor.ate at the operat- types of application at the present time. The
ing frequency with the grid-plate capacity of first application is for the purpose of attaining
the first triode tube. extremely good stability in a communications
The 6BQ7 A and 6BZ7 tubes are designed for receiver through the use of crystal control of
use in cascode circuits, and may be used to the first oscillator. In such an arrangement,
good advantage in the 144 Me. and 220 Me. am- as used in several types of Collins receivers,
ateur bands (figure 9D). For operation at higher the first oscillator is crystal controlled and is
frequencies, the 6AJ4 tube is recommended. followed by a tunable i-f amplifier which then
is followed by a mixer stage and a fixed-tuned
Double Conversion As previously mentioned, i-f amplifier on a much lower frequency.
the use of a higher inter- Through such a circuit arrangement the sta-
mediate frequency will also improve the image bility of the complete receiver is equal to the
216 Radio Receiver Fundamentals THE R AD I 0
PADDING CAPACITOR
TUNING CAPACITOR
MIXER
ITE
oc
s
~ ~
OSCILLATOR
Figure 12 Figure 13
SERIES TRACKING EMPLOYED BANDSPREAD CIRCUITS
IN THE H-F OSCILLATOR OF A Parallel banclspreacl is illustrated at (A) ancl (B),
series banclspreacl at (C), ancl tappecl-coil bancl-
SUPERHETERODYNE spreacl at (D),
The series tracking capacitor permits the use of
iclentical gangs in a ganged capacitor, since the
tracking capacitor slows clown the rate of frequen
cy change in the oscillator so that a constant clif
ference in frequency between the oscillator ancl a combination of both methods is usually em-
the r-f stage (equal to the i-f amplifier frequency)
may be maintained. ployed, the coils being changed from one band
to another, and variable capacitors being used
to tune the receiver across each band. In prac-
tical receivers, coils may be changed by one
ganged. The usual method of obtaining good of two methods: a switch, controllable from
tracking is to operate the oscillator on the the panel, may be used to switch coils of dif-
high-frequency side of the mixer and use a ferent sizes into the tuning circuits or, alter-
series tracking capacitor to slow down the natively, coils of different sizes may be
tuning rate of the oscillator. The oscillator plugged manually into the receiver, the con-
tuning rate must be slower because it covers nection into the tuning circuits being made by
a smaller range than does the mixer when both suitable plugs on the coils. Where there are
are expressed as a percentage of frequency. several plug-in coils for each band, they are
At frequencies above 7000 kc. and with ordi sometimes arranged to a single mounting sttip,
nary intermediate frequencies, the difference allowing them all to be plugged in simultan
in percentage between the two tuning ranges eously.
is so small that it may be disregarded in re
ceivers designed to cover only a small range, Bandspread In receivers using large tuning
such as an amateur band. Tuning capacitors to cover the short
A mixer and oscillator tuning arrangement wave spectrum with a minimum
in which a series tracking capacitor is provid of coils, tuning is likely to be quite difficult,
ed is shown in figure 12. The value of the owing to the large frequency range covered by
tracking capacitor varies considerably with a small rotation of the variable capacitors.
different intermediate frequencies and tuning To alleviate this condition, some method of
ranges, capacitances as low as .0001 flfd. slowing down the tuning rate, or bandspread-
being used at the lower tuning-range frequen ing, must be used.
cies, and values up to .01 flfd. being used at Quantitatively, bandspread is usually desig
the higher frequencies. nated as being inversely proportional to the
Superheterodyne receivers designed to cover range covered. Thus, a large amount of band-
only a single frequency range, such as the spread indicates that a small frequency range
standard broadcast band, sometimes obtain is covered by the bandspread control. Con-
tracking between the oscillator and the rf cir versely, a small amount of bandspread is taken
cuits by cutting the variable plates of the os- to mean that a large frequency range is covered
cillator tuning section to a different shape by the bandspread dial.
from those used to tune the r-f stages.
than the dial knob. In this system, there is and the latter representing allwa ve sets with
often a separate scale or pointer c!ither con- bandswitching, large tuning capacitors, and
nected or geared to the dial knob to facilitate conventional tubes.
accurate dial readings. However, there is a
practical limit to the amount of mechanical
bandspread which can be obtained in a dial 12-7 1-F Tuned Circuits
and capacitor before the speed-reduction unit
and capacitor bearings become prohibitively
expensive. Hence, most receivers employ a !famplifiers usually employ bandpass cir-
combination of electrical and mechanical band- cuits of some sort. A bandpass circuit is ex-
spread. In such a system, a moderate reduc- ~ctly what the name implies-a circuit for pass-
tion in the tuning rate is obtained in the dial, lOg a band of frequencies. Bandpass arrange-
and the rest of the reduction obtained by elec- ments ca? _be designed for almost any degree
trical bandspreading. of selectivity, the type used in any particular
case depending upon the ultimate application
Stray Circuit In this book and in other radio of the amplifier.
Capacitance literature, mention is sometimes
made of stray or circuit capaci- 1-F Intermediate frequency trans-
tance. This capacitance is in the usual sense Transformers formers ordinarily consist of
defined as the capacitance remaining across two or more tuned circuits and
a coil when all the tuning, bandspread, and some method of coupling the tuned circuits
padding capacitors across the circuit are at together. Some representative arrangements
their minimum capacitance setting. are shown in figure 14. The circuit shown at
Circuit capacitance can be attributed to two A is the conventional i-f transformer with the
general sources. One source is that due to the coupling, M, between the tuned circ~its being
input and output capacitance of the tube when provided by inductive coupling from one coil
its cathode is heated. The input capacitance to the other. As the coupling is increased, the
varies somewhat from the static value when selectivity curve becomes less peaked, and
the tube is in actual operation. Such factors ~hen a condition known as critical coupling
as plate load impedance, grid bias, and fre- IS reached, the top of the curve be gins to flat-
quency will cause a change in input capaci- ten out. When the coupling is increased still
tance. However, in all except the extremely more, a dip occurs in the top of the curve.
high-transconductance tubes, the published The windings for this type of i-f transformer,
measured input capacitance is reasonably close as well as most others, nearly always consist
to the effective value when the tube is used of small, flat universal-wound pies mounted
within its recommended frequency range. But either on a piece of dowel to provide an air
in the high-transconductance types the effec- core or on powdered-iron for iron core i-f trans-
tive capacitance will vary considerably from formers. The iron-core transformers generally
the published figures as operating conditions have somewhat more gain and better selectivity
are changed. than equivalent aircore units.
The second source of circuit capacitance, The circuits shown at figure 14-B and C are
and that which is more easily controllable, is quite similar. Their only difference is the type
that contributed by the minimum capacitance of mutual coupling used, an inductance being
of the variable capacitors across the circuit used at B and a capacitance at C. The opera-
and that due to capacitance between the wir- tion of both circuits is similar. Three reson-
ing and ground. In well-designed high-fre- ant circuits are formed by the components. In
quency receivers, every effort is made to keep B, for example, one resonant circuit is formed
this portion of the circuit capacitance at a by L" C" C 2 and L 2 all in series. The fre-
minimum since a large capacitance reduces quencyof this resonant circuit is just the same
the tuning range available with a given coil as that of a single one of the coils and capaci
and prevents a good L/C ratio, and conse- tors, since the coils and capacitors are simi-
quently a high-impedance tuned circuit, from lar in both sides of the circuit, and the reson-
being obtained. ant frequency of the two capacitors and the
A good percentage of stray circuit capaci- two coils all in series is the same as that of
tance is due also to distributed capacitance a single coil and capacitor. The second reson-
of the coil and capacitance between wiring ant frequency of the complete circuit is deter-
points and chassis. mined by the characteristics of each half of
Typical values of circuit capacitance may the circuit containing the mutual coupling de-
run from 10 to 75 p.p.fd. in high-frequency re- vice. In B, this second frequency will be lower
ceivers, the first figure representing concen- than the first, since the resonant frequency of
tric-line receivers with acorn or miniature L,, C, and the inductance, M, or L,, C 2 and M
tubes and extremely small tuning capacitors, is lower than that of a single coil and capaci-
HANDBOOK 1-F Amplifiers 21 9
Figure 16
ELECTRICAL EQUIVALENT OF
QUARTZ FILTER CRYSTAL
The crystal is e~ivalent to a very large value of
inductance in series with small values of capaci-
tance anrl resistance, with a larger though still
small value of capacitance across the whole cir-
cuit "(representing holcler capacitance plus stray
-15 -10 -5 455 +5 +10 +15
capacitances).
KC.
z,
Figure 18
Figure 17 TYPICAL CRYSTAL FILTER CIRCUIT
EQUIVALENT OF CRYSTAL
FILTER CIRCUIT
For a given voltage out of the generator, the volt-
age developed across zl depends upon the ratio put circuit and passes it to the output side of
of the impedance of X to the sum of the impedances
of Z and Z1. Because of the high Q of the crystal, the crystal in proper phase to neutralize that
Its impedance changes rapidly with changes in passed through the holder capacitance. A rep-
frequency. resentative practical filter arrangement is
shown in figure 18. The balanced input circuit
may be obtained either through the use of a
split-stator capacitor as shown, or by the use
of a center-tapped input coil.
a good crystal of high Q) is very low. Capaci-
tance C, represents the shunt capacitance of Varlable-Selec- In the circuit of figure 18, the
the electrodes, plus the crystal holder and tivity Filters selectivity is minimum with
wiring, and is many times the capacitance of the crystal input circuit tuned
C. This makes the crystal act as a parallel to resonance, since at resonance the imped-
resonant circuit with a frequency only slightly ance of the tuned circuit is maximum. As the
higher than that of its f r e que n c y of series input circuit is detuned from resonance, how-
resonance. For crystal fi 1 t e r use it is the ever, the impedance decreases, and the selec-
series resonant characteristic that we are pri- tivity becomes greater. In this circuit, the out
marily interested in. put from the crystal filter is tapped down on
The electrical equivalent of the basic crys- the i-f stage grid winding to provide a low
tal filter circuit is shown in figure 17. If the value of series impedance in the output cir-
impedance of Z plus Z 1 is low compared to the cuit. It will be recalled that for maximum selec-
impedance of the crystal X at resonance, then tivity, the total impedance in series with the
the current flowing through Z 1 , and the voltage crystal (both input and output circuits) must
developed across it, will be almost in inverse be low. If one is made low and the other is
proportion to the impedance of X, which has made variable, then the selectivity may be
a very sharp resonance curve. varied at will from sharp to broad.
If the impedance of Z plus Z 1 is made high The circuit shown in figure 19 also achieves
compared to the resonant impedance of X, then variable selectivity by adding a variable im-
there will be no appreciable drop in voltage pedance in series with the crystal circuit. In
across Z 1 as the frequency departs from the this case, the variable impedance is in series
resonant frequency of X until the point is with the crystal output circuit. The impedance
reached where the impedance of X approaches of the output circuit is varied by varying the
that of Z plus Z 1 This has the effect of broad- Q. As the Q is reduced (by adding resistance
ening out the curve of frequency versus voltage in series with the coil), the impedance de-
developed across Z., which is another way of creases and the selectivity becomes greater.
saying that the selectivity of the crystal filter The input circuit impedance is made low by
(but not the crystal proper) has been reduced. using a non-resonant secondary on the input
In practicable filter circuits the impedances transformer.
Z and z, usually are represented by some form A variation of the circuit shown at figure
of tuned circuit, but the basic principle of 19 consists of placing the variable resistance
operation is the same. across the coil and capacitor, rather than in
series with them. The result of adding the re-
Practical Filters It is necessary to balance sistor is a reduction of the output impedance,
out the capacitance across and an increase in selectivity. The circuit be-
the crystal holder (C., in figure 16) to prevent haves oppositely to that of figure 19, however;
bypassing around the crystal undesired signals as the resistance is lowered the selectivity
off the crystal resonant frequency. The hal becomes greater. Still another variation of fig-
ancing is done by a phasing circuit which ure 19 is to use the tuning capacitor across
takes out-of-phase voltage from a balanced in- the output coil to vary the output impedance.
222 Radio Receiver Fundamentals THE R AD I 0
+ SELECTIVITY
CONTROL
Figure 19
VARIABLE SELECTIVITY
40
CRYSTAL FILTER
This circuit permits of a greater a>ntrol of selec- 45
ONE SUPPORTING
DISC AT
EACH END
10K
/.<~~~~~~)
IL __ _
rrO 2ND'
31]ijb-ffr-~
POT. J DETECTOR
B+ '=- :- B+
Figure 24
VARIABLE-OUTPUT B-F-0 CIRCUIT
A beat-frequency oscillator whose output is con-
trollable is of considerable assistance In copying
cw signals over a wide range of levels, one/ such
a control is almost a necessity for satisfactory
copying of single-siclebancl racliophone signals.
~-c--jj~----1~_---AUDIO
R.f. MIXER
-~
100M
500M
.05~
Figure 26
TYPICAL A-V-C CIRCUIT USING A DOUBLE DIODE
Any of the small clual-c/ioc/e tubes may be usee/ in this circuit. Or, if c/esirec/, a c/uo-c/ioc/e-
trioc/e may be usee/, with the triode acting as the first audio stage. The left-hone/ c/ioc/e serves
as the detector, while the right-hone/ side acts as the a-v-e rectifier. The use of separate
c/ioc/es for detector one/ a-vc reduces distortion when receiving an AM signal with a high
modulation percentage.
ages on the bf-o tube is changed, as the latter diode, plate, or infinite-impedance types. Oc
circuits usually change the frequency of the casionall y, grid-leak detectors are used in re
b.f.o. at the same time they change the strength, ceivers using one if stage or none at all, in
making it necessary to reset the trimmer each which case the second detector usually is
time the output is adjusted. made regenerative.
The b.f.o. usually is provided with a small Diodes are the most popular second detect
trimmer which is adjustable from the front ors because they allow a simple method of
panel to permit adjustment over a range of 5 obtaining automatic volume control to be used.
or 10 kc. For single-signal reception the b.f.o. Diodes load the tuned circuit to which they
always is adjusted to the high-frequency side, are connected, however, and thus reduce the
in order to permit placing the heterodyne image selectivity slightly. Special if transformers
in the rejection notch. are used for the purpose of providing a low
In order to reduce the bfo signal output impedance input circuit to the diode detector.
voltage to a reasonable level which will pre Typical circuits for grid-leak, diode, plate
vent blocking the second detector, the signal and infinite-impedance detectors are shown
voltage is delivered through a low-capacitance in figure 25.
(high-reactance) capacitor having a value of
1 to 2 wfd.
Automatic Vol The elements of an automatic
Care must be taken with the b.f.o. to pre
ume Contro I volume control (a. v. c.) sy s
vent harmonics of the oscillator from being
tern are shown in figure 26.
picked up at multiples of the bfo frequency.
A dual-diode tube is used as a combination
The complete b.f.o. together with the coupling
diode detector and avc rectifier. The left
circuits to the second detector, should be thor
hand diode operates as a simple rectifier in
oughly shielded to prevent pickup of the har
the manner described earlier in this chapter.
monies by the input end of the receiver.
Audio voltage, superimposed on a dc voltage,
If bfo harmonics still have a tendency to
appears across the 500,000-ohm potentiometer
give trouble after complete shielding and iso
(the volume control) and the .0001-f.Lfd. capa
lation of the bfo circuit has been accom
citor, and is passed on to the audio amplifier.
plished, the passage of these harmonics from
The right-hand diode receives signal voltage
the bfo circuit to the rest of the receiver can
directly from the primary of the last if ampli
be stopped through the use of a low-pass filter
fier, and acts as the avc rectifier. The pul
in the lead between the output of the b-fo cir
sating d-e voltage across the 1-megohm a. v.c.-
cuit and the point on the receiver where the
diode load resistor is filtered by a 500,000-ohm
bfo signal is to be injected.
resistor and a .05-f.Lfd. capacitor, and applied
as bias to the grids of the rf and if amplifier
12-8 Detector, Audio, and tubes; an increase or decrease in signal
Control Circuits strength will cause a corresponding increase
or decrease in av-c bias voltage, and thus the
Detectors Second detectors for use in super gain of the receiver is automatically adjusted
heterodynes are usually of the to compensate for changes in signal strength.
226 Radio Receiver Fundamentals THE R AD I 0
ode-voltage gain control. In this case a 0-1 over the audio-frequency range. The speaker
d-e milliammeter in conjunction with a resistor and transformer will tend to present a rising
from 1000 to 3000 ohms can be used as shown i~pedance to the tube as the frequency in-
as a signal-strength meter. With this circuit creases, and the parallel capacitor will tend
the meter will read backwards with increasing to make the total impedance more constant
signal strength as in the circuit previous! y since it will tend to present a decreasing im-
discussed. pedance with increasing audio frequency.
Figure 27C is the circuit of a forward-read- A still better way of improving the frequency
ingS meter as is often used in communications characteristic of the output stage, and at the
receivers. The instrument is used in an un- same time reducing the harmonic distortion,
balanced bridge circuit with the d-e plate re- is to use shunt feedback from the plate of the
sistance of one i-f tube as one leg of the output tube to the plate of a tube such as a
bridge and with resistors for the other three 6SJ7 acting as an audio amplifier stage ahead
legs. The value of the resistor R must be de- of the output stage.
termined by trial and error and will be some-
where in the vicinity of 50,000 ohms. Some-
times the screen circuits of the r-f and i-f
stages are taken from this point along with 12-9 Noise Suppression
the screen-circuit voltage divider.
Electron-ray tubes (sometimes called "magic The problem of noise suppression confronts
eyes") can also be used as indicators of rela- the listener who is located in places where
tive signal strength in a circuit similar to that interference from power lines, electrical ap-
shown in figure 270. A 6U5/6G5 tube should pliances, and automobile ignition systems is
be used where the a-v-e voltage will be from troublesome. This noise is often of such in-
5 to 20 volts and a type 6E5 tube should be tensity as to swamp out signals from desired
used when the a-v-e voltage will run from 2 stations.
to 8 volts. There are two principal methods for reduc-
ing this noise:
Audio Amp I ifiers Audio amp I if i e r s are em- (1) A-c llne filters at the source of inter-
ployed in n e a r I y all radio ference, if the noise is created by an
receivers. The audio amplifier stage or stages electrical appliance.
are usually of the Class A type, although Class (2) Noise-limiting circuits for the reduc-
AB push-pull stages are used in some re- tion, in the receiver itself, of interfer-
ceivers. The purpose of the audio amplifier is ence of the type caused by automobile
to bring the reJatively weak signal from the ignition systems.
detector up to a strength sufficient to operate
a pair of headphones or a loud speaker. Either Power Line Many household appliances, such
triodes, pentodes, or beam tetrodes may be Filters as electric mixers, heating pads,
used, the pentodes and beam tetrodes usually vacuum sweepers, refrigerators,
giving greater output. In some receivers, par- oil burners, sewing machines, doorbells, etc.,
ticularly those employing grid leak detection, create an interference of an intermittent na-
it is possible to operate the headphones di- ture. The insertion of a line filter near the
rectly from the detector, without audio ampli- source of interference often will effect a com-
fication. In such receivers, a single audio plete cure. Filters for small appliances can
stage with a beam tetrode or pentode tube is consist of a 0.1-11fd. capacitor connected a-
ordinarily used to drive the loud speaker. cross the 110-volt a-c line. Two capacitors
Most communications receivers, either home- in series across the line, with the midpoint
constructed or factory-made, have a single- connected to ground, can be used in conjunc-
ended beam tetrode (such as a 6L6 or 6V6) or tion with ultraviolet ray machines, refriger-
pentode (6F6 or 6K6-GT) in the audio output ators, oil burner furnaces, and other more stub-
stage feeding the loudspeaker. If precautions born offenders. In severe cases of interfer-
are not taken such a stage will actually bring ence, additional filters in the form of heavy-
about a decrease in the effective signal-to- duty r-f choke coils must be connected in
noise ratio of the receiver due to the rising series with the 110-volt a-c line on both sides
high-frequency characteristic of such a stage of the line right at the interfering appliance.
when feeding a loud-speaker. One way of im-
proving this condition is to place a mica or Peak Noise Numerous noise-limiting circuits
paper capacitor of approximately 0.003 11fd. Limiters which are beneficial in overcom-
capacitance across the primary of the output ing key clicks, automobile ig-
transformer. The use of a capacitor in this nition interference, and similar noise impulses
manner tends to make the load impedance seen have become popular. They operate on the
by the plate of the output tube more constant principle that each individual noise pulse is
228 Radio Receiver Fundamentals THE R AD I 0
1ST OET.
of very short duration, yet of very high ampli- ISTI.f,
6L7
2ND l,f,
tude. The popping or clicking type of noise
from electrical ignition systems may produce
a signal having a peak value ten to twenty
times as great as the incoming radio signal,
but an average power much less than the sig
nal.
As the duration of this type of noise peak
is short, the receiver can be made inoperative
during the noise pulse without the human ear
detecting the total loss of signal. Some noise
limiters actually punch a hole in the signal,
while others merely limit the maximum peak
signal which reaches the headphones or loud-
speaker. 6AB7 6H6
The noise peak is of such short duration
that it would not be objectionable except for
the fact that it produces an over-loading effect
on the receiver, which increases its time con
stant. A sharp voltage peak will give a kick
to the diaphragm of the headphones or speak
er, and the momenrum or inertia keeps the
diaphragm in motion until the dampening of
the diaphragm stops it. This movement pro
duces a popping sound which may completely
Figure 28
obliterate the desired signal. If the noise pulse
THE LAMB 1-F NOISE SILENCER
can be limited to a peak amplitude equal to
that of the desired signal, the resulting inter
ference is practically negligible for moder
atel y low repetition rates, such as ignition stage and in addition sets the bias level on
noise. the 6H6 diode so that the incoming signal will
In addition, the if amplifier of the receiver not be rectified. Only noise peaks louder than
will also tend to lengthen the duration of the the signal can overcome the resting bias of
noise pulses because the relatively highQ if
the 6H6 and cause it to conduct. A noise pulse
runed circuits will ring or oscillate when ex
rectified by the 6H6 is applied as a negative
cited by a sharp pulse, such as produced by voltage to the control grid of the 6L 7 if tube,
ignition noise. The most effective noise limiter
disabling the tube, and punching a hole in the
would be placed before the highQ if tuned
signal at the instant of the noise pulse. By
circuits. At this point the noise pulse is the
varying the bias control of the noise limiter,
sharpest and has not been degraded by pass
the negative control voltage applied to the
age through the if transformers. In addition,
6L 7 may be adjusted until it is barely suffi-
the pulse is eliminated before it can produce
cient to overcome the noise impulses applied
ringing effects in the if chain.
to the It 1 control grid without allowing the
modulation peaks of the carrier to become
badly distorted.
The Lamb An if noise limiter is shown in
Noise Limiter figure 28. This is an adapta The Bishop Another effective i-f noise
tion of the Lamb noise silenc- Noise Limiter limiter is the Bishop limiter.
er circuit. The if signal is fed into a double This is a full-wave shunt type
grid tube, such as a 6L 7, and thence into the diode limiter applied to the primary of the last
i-f chain. A 6AB7 high gain pentode is capa if transformer of a receiver. The limiter is
city coupled to the input of the i-f system. self-biased and automatically adjusts itself
This auxiliary rube amplifies both signal and to the degree of modulation of the received
noise that is fed to it. It has a minimum of signal. The schematic of this limiter is shown
selectivity ahead of it so that it receives the in figure 29. The bias circuit time constant is
true noise pulse before it is degraded by the determined by C, and the shunt resistance,
if strip. A broadly runed if transformer is used which consists of R, and R 2 in series. The
to couple the noise amplifier to a 6H6 noise plate resistance of the last i-f tube and the
rectifier. The gain of the noise amplifier is capacity of C 1 determine the charging rate of
controlled by a potentiometer in the cathode the circuit. The limiter is disabled by opening
of the 6AB7 noise amplifier. This potenti- S, which allows the bias to rise to the value
ometer controls the gain of the noise amplifier of the i-f signal.
HANDBOOK Noise Limiters 229
C, -0.1-).Lfd. paper
C.,-50-).L).Lfd. mica
C,-1 00-).L).Lfd. mica
C., Cs -0.01-).Lfd. paper
R1, R2 -1 megohm,
Y2 watt
R3 , R.-220,000 ohms,
Yz watt
Rs, R,;-1 megohm,
Y2 watt
R,-2-megohm paten
tiometer
Figure 30
NOISE LIMITER CIRCUIT, WITH ASSOCIATED A-V-C
This I imiter is of the series type, one/ is seff-acljusting to carrier strength for phone reception. For proper
operatio'l several volts shoulcl be clevelopecl across the seconclary of the last i-f transformer (/FT) uncler
carrier conditions.
If this feature is not provided, the bfo injec the mid-point of the heater potential for the
tion should be reduced to the lowest value that noise-limiter diode be as close to ground
will give a satisfactory beat. When this is potential as possible. This means that the
done, effective limiting and a good beat can center-tap of the heater supply for the tubes
be obtained by prope adjustment of the rf should be grounded wherever possible rather
and a-f gain controls. It is assumed, of course, than grounding one side of the heater supply
that the a. v.c. is cut out of the circuit for as is often done. Difficulty with hum pickup
c-w telegraphy reception. in the limiter circuit may be encountered when
one side of the heater is grounded due to the
Alternative The c i r cui t of figure 31 is high values of resistance necessary in the
Limiter Circuit more e ff e c t i v e than that limiter circuit.
shown in figure 30 under cer- The circuit of figure 31 has been used with
tain conditions and requires the addition of excellent success in several home-constructed
only one more resistor and one more capaci- receivers, and in the BC-312/BC-342 and BC-
tor than the other circuit. Also, this circuit 348 series of surplus communications receiv-
involves a smaller loss in output level than ers. It is also used in certain manufactured
the circuit of figure 30. This circuit can be receivers.
used with equal effectiveness with a com- An excellent check on the operation of the
bined diode-triode or diode-pentode tube (6R7, noise limiter in any communications receiver
6SR 7, 6Q7, 6SQ7 or similar diode-triodes, or can be obtained by listening to the Loran sig-
688, 6SF7, or similar diode-pentodes) as diode nals in the 160-meter band. With the limiter
detector and first audio stage. However, a out a sharp rasping buzz will be obtained
separate diode must be used for the noise when one of these stations is tuned in. With
limiter, D2 This diode may be one-half of a the noise limiter switched into the circuit the
6H6, 6AL5, 7A6, etc., or it may be a triode buzz should be greatly reduced and a low-
connected 6]5, 6C4 or similar type. pitched hum should be heard.
Note that the return for the volume control
must be made to the cathode of the detector The Full-Wave The most satisafctory diode
diode (and not to ground) when a dual tube is Limiter noise limiter is the series full-
used as combined second-detector first-audio. wave limiter, shown in figure
This means that in the circuit shown in figure 32. The positive noise peaks are clipped by
31 a connection will exist across the points diode A, the clipping level of which may be
where the "X" is shown on the diagram since adjusted to clip at any modulation level be-
a common cathode lead is brought out of the tween 25 per cent and 100 per cent. The nega-
tube for D, and V,. If desired, of course, a ative noise peaks are clipped by diode B at
single dual diode may be used for D, and D 2 a fixed level.
in this circuit as well as in the circuit of fig-
ure 30. Switching the limiter in and out with The TNS Limiter The Twin Noise Squelch,
the switch S brings about no change in volume. popularized by CQ maga-
In any diode limiter circuit such as the ones zine, is a combination of a diode noise clipper
shown in these two figures it is important that and an audio squelch tube. The squelch cir-
HANDBOOK U-H-F Circuits 2 31
Figure 31
ALTERNATIVE NOISE LIMITER CIRCUIT
cuir is useful in eliminating the grinding back- wavelength sections of parallel conductors or
ground noise that is the residual left by the concentric transmission line are nor on! y more
diode clipper. In figure 33, the setting of the efficient but also become of practical dimen
470K potentiometer determines the operating sions.
level of the squelch action and should be set
to eliminate the residual background noise.
Because of the low inherent distortion of the
TNS, it may be left in the circuit at all times. Tuning Tubes and tuning capacitors con
As with other limiters, the TNS requires a Short Lines nected to the open end of a trans
high signal level at the second detector for mission line provide a capaci-
maximum limiting effect. tance that makes the resonant length less than
a quarter wave-length. The amount of shorten
ing for a specified capacitive reactance is
12-10 Special Considerations determined by the surge impedance of the line
in U-H-F Receiver Design
AUDIO
Figure 32
THE FULL-WAVE SERIES AUDIO Figure 33
NOISE LIMITER THE TNS AUDIO NOISE LIMITER
2 32 Radio Receiver Fundamentals THE R AD I 0
CAVITY CAVITY
0~
I
I I
I
-~~~INE
I I
->I -ol
TO ANT. I
I TO ANT. I I
u u
Figure 34
COUPLING AN ANTENNA TO A
HOLE
@6itt2 ELECTRON
BEAM
COAXIALRESONANT CIRCUIT
(A) shows the recommenclecl methocl for coup/in!l
a coaxial line to a coaxial resonant circuit. (BJ
Figure 35
shows an alternative methocl for use with an open- METHODS OF EXCITING A RESONANT
wire type of antenna feeclline. CAVITY
section. It is given by the equation for reso- circuit can be made directly on the inner con-
nance: ductor at the point where it is properly matched
(figure 34). For low impedances, such as a con-
1 centric line feeder, a small one-half turn loop
= Z 0 tan l can be inserted through a hole in the outer
2 rr fC
conductor of the coaxial circuit, being in ef-
in which rr = 3.1416, I is the frequency, C the fect a half of the hairpin type recommended
capacitance, Z 0 the surge impedance of the for coupling balanced feeders to coaxial re-
line, and tan l is the tangent of the electrical sonant lines. The size of the loop and close-
length in degrees. ness to the inner conductor determines the
The capacitive reactance of the capacitance impedance matching and loading. Such loops
across the end is 1/(2rr 1 C) ohms. For reson- coupled in near the shorting disc do not alter
ance, this must equal the surge impedance of the tuning appreciably, if not overcoupled.
the line times the tangent of its electrical
length (in degrees, where 90 equals a quar-
ter wave). It will be seen that twice the capac- Resonant A cavity is a closed resonant
itance will resonate a line if its surge imped- Cavities chamber made of metal. It is
ance is halved; also that a given capacitance known also as a rhumbatron. The
has twice the loading effect when the frequen- cavity, having both inductance and capaci-
cy is doubled. tance, supersedes coil-capacitor and capaci-
tance-loaded transmission-line tuned circuits
Coupling Into It is possible to couple into at extremely high frequencies where conven-
Lines and a parallel-rod line by tapp- tional L and C components, of even the most
Coaxial Circuits ing directly on one or both refined design, prove impractical because of
rods, preferably through the tiny electrical and physical dimensions
blocking capacitors if any d.c. is present. they must have. Microwave cavities have high
More commonly, however, a hairpin is induc- Q factors and are superior to conventional
tively coupled at the shorting bar end, either tuned circuits. They may be employed in the
to the bar or to the two rods, or both. This manner of an absorption wavemeter or as the
normally will result in a balanced load. Should tuned circuit in other r-f test instruments, and
a loop unbalanced to ground be coupled in, in microwave transmitters and receivers.
any resulting unbalance reflected into the rods Resonant cavities usually are closed on all
can be reduced with a simple Faraday screen, sides and all of their walls are made of elec-
made of a few parallel wires placed between trical conductor. However, in some forms,
the hairpin loop and the rods. These should small openings are present for the purpose of
be soldered at only one end and grounded. excitation. C~vities have been produced in
An unbalanced tap on a coaxial resonant several shape~ including the plain sphere,
HANDBOOK U-H-F Circuits 233
TUNING
SLUGS
@
Figure 36 Figure 37
TUNING METHODS FOR CYLINDRICAL THE BUTTERFLY RESONANT CIRCUIT
RESONANT CAVITIES Shown at (A) is the physical appearance of the
butterfly circuit as usecl in the v-h-f ancl lower
u-h-f range. (B) shows an electrical representa
tion of the circuit.
Butterfly circuits have been applied specifi- tor and new principles must be enlisted. In
cally to oscillators for transmitters, super general, the improvements embodied in exist-
heterodyne receivers, and heterodyne frequen ing tubes have consisted of (1) reducing elec-
cy meters in the 100-1000-Mc. frequency range. trode spacing to cut down electron transit
time, (2) reducing electrode areas to decrease
Receiver The types of resonant circuits de interelectrode capacitances, and (3) shorten-
Circuits scribed in the previous paragraphs ing of electrode leads either by mounting the
have largely replaced conventional electrode assembly close to the tube base or
coil-capacitor circuits in the range above 100 by bringing the leads out directly through the
Me. Tuned short lines and butterfly circuits glass envelope at nearby points. Through re-
are used in the range from about 100 Me. to duction of lead inductance and interelectrode
perhaps 3500 Me., and above about 3500 Me. capacitances, input and output resonant fre
resonant cavities are used almost exclusively. quencies due to tube construction have beet,
The resonant cavity is also quite generally increased substantially.
employed in the 2000-Mc. to 3500-Mc. range. Tubes embracing one or more of the fea-
In a properly designed receiver, thermal tures just outlined include the later loctal
agitation in the first tuned circuit is amplified types, high-frequency acorns, button-base
by subsequent tubes and predominates in the types, and the lighthouse types. Type 6]4
output. For good signal-to-set-noise ratio, button-base triode will reach 500 Me. Type
therefore, one must strive for a high gain low- 6F4 acorn triode is recommended for use up to
noise rf stage. Hiss can be held down by giv- 1200 Me. Type 1A3 button-base diode has a
ing careful attention to this point. A mixer resonant frequency of 1000 Me., while type
has about 0.3 of the gain of an r-f tube of the 9005 acorn diode resonates at 1500 Me. Light-
same type; so it is advisable to precede a house type 2C40 can be used at frequencies
mixer by an efficient r-f stage. It is also of up to 3500 Me. as an oscillator.
some value to have good r-f selectivity before
the first detector in ordelr to reduce noises Crystal More than two decades have
produced by beating noise at one frequency Rectifiers passed since the crystal (mineral)
against noise at another, to produce noise at rectifier enjoyed widespread use
the intermediate frequency in a superheter- in radio receivers. Low-priced tubes complete-
odyne. ly supplanted the fragile and relatively insen-
The frequency limit of a tube is reached sitive crystal detector, although it did con-
when the shortest possible external connec tinue for a few years as a simple meter recti-
tions are used as the tuned circuit, except for fier in absorption wavemeters after its demise
abnormal types of oscillation. Wires or size- as a receiver component.
able components are often best considered as Today, the crystal detector is of new im-
sections of transmission lines rather than as portance in microwave communication. It is
simple resistances, capacitances, or induct being employed as a detector and as a mixer
ances. in receivers and test instruments used at ex-
So long as small triodes and pentodes will tremely high radio frequencies. At some of
operate normally, they are generally preferred the frequencies employed in microwave opera-
as v-hf tubes over other receiving methods tions, the crystal rectifier is the only satis-
that have been devised. However, the input factory detector or mixer. The chief advan-
capacitance, input conductance, and transit tages of the crystal rectifier are very low ca-
time of these tubes limit the upper frequency pacitance, relative freedom from transit-time
difficulties, and its two-terminal nature. No
at which they may be operated. The input re-
batteries or ac power supply are required for
sistance, which drops to a low value at very
its operation.
short wave-lengths, limits the stage gain and
broadens the tuning. The crystal detector consists essentially of
a small piece of silicon or germanium mount-
ed in a base of low-melting-point alloy and
YH-F The first tube in a v-h-f receiver is contacted by means of a thin, springy feeler
Tubes most important in raising the signal wire known as the cat whisker. This arrange-
above the noise generated in succes- ment is shown in figure 38A.
sive stages, for which reason small vh-f types The complex physics of crystal rectification
are definitely preferred. is beyond the scope of this discussion. It is
Tubes employing the conventional grid-con- sufficient to state that current flows from sev-
trolled and diode rectifier principles have been eral hundred to several thousand times more
modernized, through various expedients, for readily in one direction through the contact of
operation at frequencies as high, in some new cat whisker and crystal than in the opposite
types, as 4000 Me. Beyond that frequency, direction. Consequently, an alternating current
electron transit time becomes the limiting fac- (including one of microwave frequency) will
HANDBOOK Receiver Adjustment 235
amplifier is to operate, dip the "hot" output 1-F SIGNAL I N - - - - - - r - - - - + 1 - F SICNAL OUT
lead from the generator to the last i-f stage
through a small fixed capacitor to the control
grid. Adjust both trimmer capacitors in the
last i-f transformer (the one between the last
i-f amplifier and the second detector) to reson-
ance as indicated by maximum deflection of
the output meter.
Each i-f stage is adjusted in the same man-
ner, moving the hot lead, stage by stage, back
toward the front end of the receiver and back- 1-F PLUS Q MULTIPLIER
ing off the attenuator as the signal strength
increases in each new position. The last ad-
justment will be made to the first i-f trans-
former, with the hot signal generator lead con-
nected to the control grid of the mixer. Oc-
casionally it is necessary to disconnect the
mixer grid lead from the coil, grounding it
through a 1,000- or 5,000-ohm resistor, and
coupling the signal generator through a small Figure 39
capacitor to the grid. THE Q-MUL TIPLIER
When the last i-f adjustment has been com-
pleted, it is good practice to go back through The loss resistance of a high-Q circuit
the i-f channel, re-peaking all of the trans- is neutralizecl by regeneration in a
formers. It is imperative that this recheck be simple feedback amplifier. A highly
made in sets which do not include a crystal selective passband is pracluced which
filter, and where the simple alignment of the is coupled to the i-f circuit of the
i-f amplifier to the generator is final. receiver.
TO PLATE TERMINAL
OF FIRST 1-F TUBE THRU
2.' OF COAXIAL LINE
.ooo L1 ~
P~o:5
- .
Q MULTIPLIER "NULL''
i 12AX7
10K W.,
4,Bfill+g
5
+200-30QV_ -= 6.3V.
4~5 KC
L1=GRAYBURNE Ve CHOKE (0.6-6.0 MH)
FR EQU ENC.Y L2.=GRAY8URN "LOOPSTICK" COIL
Figure 40 Figure 41
Q-MUL TIPLIER NULL CIRCUIT
SCHEMATIC OF A 455KC
Q-MUL TIPLIER
The addition of a second triode permits
the Q-Multiplier to be used for nulling
Coil L7 is required to tune out the
out an unwanted hetrodyne.
reactance of the coaxial line. It is ad-
justed for maximum signal response.
Ll may be omitted if the Q-multiplier
is connected to the receiver with a
the intermediate frequency, and the loss re- short length of wire, and the i-f trans-
sistance of the circuit is neutralized by the former within the receiver is retuned.
positive feedback circuit composed of C3 and
the vacuum tube. Too great a degree of positive
feedback will cause the circuit to break into
oscillation. may be used as a second detector in a receiver
in place of the usual diode detector. The diode
At the resonant frequency, the impedance of
is an envelope detector (section 12-1) and de-
the tuned circuit is very high, and when shunted
velops a d-e output voltage from a single r-f
across an i-f stage will have little effect upon
signal, and audio "beats" from two or more
the signal. At frequencies removed from reso-
input signals. A product detector (figure 42)
nance, the impedance of the circuit is low, re-
requires that a local carrier voltage be present
sulting in high attenuation of the i-f signal.
The resonant frequency of the Q-multiplier may in order to produce an audio output signal.
by varied by changing the value of one of the
components in the tuned circuit.
The Q-multiplier may also be used to "null"
a signal by employing negative feedback to AUDIO OUTPUT
control the plate resistance of an auxiliary
amplifier stage as shown in figure 40. Since the
grid-cathode phase shift through the Q-multiplier
is zero, the plate resistance of a second tube
may be readily controlled by placing it across
the Q-multiplier. At resonance, the high nega-
tive feedback drops the plate resistance of
V2, shunting the i-f circuit. Off resonance, the
feedback is reduced and the plate resistance
of V2 rises, reducing the amount of signal at- Figure 42
tenuation in the i-f strip. A circuit combining THE PRODUCT
both the "peak" and "null" features is shown DETECTOR
in figure 41.
Audio output signal is
The Product Detector A version of the common developed only when
mixer or converter stage local oscillator is on.
23 8 Radio Receiver Fundamentals
20 K 7
470T BEAT OSC.
Slt;NAL
BEAT OSC
SIGNAL
Figure 44
Figure 43
TRIPLE-TRIODE
PENTAGRID MIXER
PRODUCT DETECTOR
USED AS PRODUCT
DETECTOR
Vl and V2 act as cathode follow-
ers, delivering sideband signal
and local oscillator signal to
grounded grid triode mixer (V3 ).
Such a detector is useful for single sideband
work, since the inter-modulation distortion IS
extremely low.
A pentagrid product detector is shown in
figure 43. The incoming signal is applied to
grid 3 of the mixer tube, and the local oscillator .01
is injected on grid 1. Grid bias is adjusted for r-'-"----t-...- (----AU D I 0 OUT
100 K
is removed, the audio output from an unmodu-
lated signal applied to grid 3 should be reduced
approximately 30 to 40 db below normal de-
tection level. When the frequency of the local
oscillator is synchronized with the incoming
carrier, amplitude modulated signals may be
received by exalted carrier reception, wherein
the local carrier substitutes for the transmitted
Figure 45
carrier of the a-m signal.
DOUBLE-TRIODE
Three triodes may be used as a product
PRODUCT DETECTOR
detector (figure 44). Triodes V1 and V2 act
as cathode followers, delivering the sideband
signal and the local oscillator signal to a
grounded grid triode (V3) which functions as
the mixer stage. A third version of the product "plate" detector, the cathode of which is
detector is illustrated in figure 45. A twin common with the cathode follower amplifier.
triode tube is used. Section V 1 functions as The local oscillator signal is injected into the
a cathode follower amplifier. Section V2 is a grid circuit of tube V2.
II.
Figure 46
EXPLODED VIEW OF COLLINS
MECHANICAL FILTER
CHAPTER THIRTEEN
Generation of
Radio Frequency Energy
239
240 Generation of R-F Energy THE R AD I 0
R R
- +B
L2
Figure 1
COMMON TYPES OF SELF-EXCITED OSCILLATORS
Fixecl capacitor ~a/ues ~re ~ypical, but will vary somewhat with the application.
In the Clapp OSCillator CirCUitS (G) ancl (H), capacitors cl ancl c2 should have a
reactance of ~0 to 10~ ohms at t.he operating frequency of the oscillator. Tuning of
these two osc1llators IS accompl1shecl by capacitor C. In the circuits of (E) (F) ancl
(H), tuning of the tank circuit in the plate of the oscillator tube will have ~elatlvely
s':'all effect on the frequency. of oscillation. The plate tank circuit also may, if cle-
s~recl, be tunecl to a harmomc of the oscillation frequency, or a broadly resonant
circuit may be usecl In this circuit position.
to a particular application. They can further trol grid is biased negatively with respect to
be subdivided into the classifications of: neg the cathode. Common types of negative-grid
ative-grid oscillators, electron-orbit oscilla- oscillators are diagrammed in figure 1.
tors, negative-resistance oscillators, velocity
modulation oscillators, and magnetron oscil-
lators. The Hartley Illustrated in figure 1 (A) is the
oscillator circuit which finds the
Negotive-Grid A negative-grid oscillator is most general application at the present time;
Oscillators essentially a vacuum-tube am this circuit is commonly called the Hartley.
plifier with a sufficient por The operation of this oscillator will be de-
tion of the output energy coupled back into the scribed as an index to the operation of all
input circuit to sustain oscillation. The con- negative-grid oscillators; the only real differ-
HANDBOOK Oscillators 241
ence between the various circuits is the man- sired frequency and the plate capacitor to the
ner in which energy for excitation is coupled high side. A broadly resonant coil may be sub-
from the plate to the grid circuit. stituted for the grid tank to form the T. N. T.
When plate voltage is applied to the Hartley oscillator shown at (D).
oscillator shown at (A), the sudden flow of
plate current accompanying the application of Electron-Coupled In any of the oscillator cir-
plate voltage will cause an electro-magnetic Oscillators cuits just described it is
field to be set up in the vicinity of the coil. possible to take energy from
The building-up of this field will cause a po- the oscillator circuit by coupling an external
tential dr6p to appear from turn-to-turn along load to the tank circuit. Since the tank circuit
the coil. Due to the inductive coupling be- determines the frequency of oscillation of the
tween the portion of the coil in which the plate tube, any variations in the conditions of the
current is flowing and the grid portion, a po- external circuit will be coupled back into the
tential will be induced in the grid portion. frequency determining portion of the oscillator.
Since the cathode tap is between the grid These variations will result in frequency in-
and plate ends of the coil, the induced grid stability.
voltage acts in such a manner as to increase The frequency determining portion of an
further the plate current to the tube. This ac- oscillator may be coupled to the load circuit
tion will continue for a short period of time only by an electron stream, as illustrated in
determined by the inductance and capacitance (E) and (F) of figure 1. When it is considered
of the tuned circuit, until the flywheel effect that the screen of the tube acts as the plate
of the tuned circuit causes this action to come to the oscillator circuit, the plate merely act-
to a maximum and then to reverse itself. The ing as a coupler to the load, then the sim-
plate current then decreases, the magnetic ilarity between the cathode-grid-screen circuit
field around the coil also decreasing, until a of these oscillators and the cathode-grid-plate
minimum is reached, when the action starts circuits of the corresponding prototype can be
again in the original direction and at a greater seen.
amplitude than before. The amplitude of these The electron-coupled oscillator has good
oscillations, the frequency of which is de- stability with respect to load and voltage var-
termined by the coil-capacitor circuit, will in- iation. Load variations have a relatively small
crease in a very short period of time to a limit effect on the frequency, since the only cou-
determined by the plate voltage of the oscil- pling between the oscillating circuit and the
lator tube. load is through the electron stream flowing
through the other elements to the plate. The
The Colpitts Figure 1 (B) shows a version of plate is electrostatically shielded from the
the Colpitts oscillator. It can oscillating portion by the bypassed screen.
be seen that this is essentially the same cir- The stability of the e.c.o. with respect to
cuit as the Hartley except that the ratio of a variations in supply voltages is explained as
pair of capacitances in series determines the follows: The frequency will shift in one direc-
effective cathode tap, instead of actually us- tion with an increase in screen voltage, while
ing a tap on the tank coil. Also, the net ca- an increase in plate voltage will cause it to
pacitance of these two capacitors comprises shift in the other direction. By a proper pro-
the tank capacitance of the tuned circuit. This portioning of the resistors that comprise the
oscillator circuit is somewhat less suscep- voltage divider supplying screen voltage, it is
tible to parasitic (spurious) oscillations than possible to make the frequency of the oscil-
the Hartley. lator substantially independent of supply volt-
For best operation of the Hartley and Col- age variations.
pitts oscillators, the voltage from grid to cath-
ode, determined by the tap on the coil or the The Clapp A relatively new type of oscillator
setting of the two capacitors, normally should Oscillator circuit which is capable of giving
be from 1/3 to 1/5 that appearing between excellent frequency stability is
plate and cathode. illustrated in figure IG. Comparison between
the more standard circuits of figure IA through
The T.P. T.G. The tuned-plate tuned-grid os- IF and the Clapp oscillator circuits of figures
cillator illustrated at (C) has IG and lH will immediately show one marked
a tank circuit in both the plate and grid cir- difference: the tuned circuit which controls
cuits. The feedback of energy from the plate the operating frequency in the Clapp oscillator
to the grid circuits is accomplished by the is series resonant, while in all the more stand-
plate-to-grid inter-electrode capacitance with- ard oscillator circuits the frequency control-
in the tube. The necessary phase reversal in ling circuit is parallel resonant. Also, the
feedback voltage is provided by tuning the capacitors C, and C 2 are relatively large in
grid tank capacitor to the low side of the de- terms of the usual values for a Colpitts oscil-
242 Generation of R-F Energy THE R AD I 0
lator. In fact, the value of capacitors C 1 and lation of succeeding stages from the oscillat
. C 2 will be in the vicinity of 0.001 p.fd. to ing circuit is desired, the electron-coupled
0.0025 p.fd. for an oscillator which is to be Clapp oscillator diagrammed in figure 1H may
operated in the 1.8-Mc. band. be used. Output then may be taken from the
The Clapp oscillator operates in the follow- plate circuit of the tube by capacitive coupling
ing manner: at the resonant frequency of the with either a tuned circuit, as shown, or with
oscillator tuned circuit (L, C) the impedance an r-f choke or a broadly resonant circuit in
of this circuit is at minimum (since it oper- the plate return. Alternatively, energy may be
ates in series resonance) and maximum cur- coupled from the output circuit L 2-C 3 by link
rent flows through it. Note however, that C, coupling. The considerations with regard to
and C 2 also are included within the current C,, C 2 , and the grid tuned circuit are the same
path for the series resonant circuit, so that at as for the triode oscillator arrangement of
the frequency of resonance an appreciable figure 1G.
voltage drop appears across these capacitors.
The voltage drop appearing across C, is ap-
plied to the grid of the oscillator tube as ex- Negative Resist- Negative-resistance oscil-
citation, while the amplified output of the ance Oscillators lators often are used when
oscillator tube appears across C 2 as the driv- . . . . unusually high frequency
ing power to keep the circuit in oscillation. stablltty IS desired, as in a frequency meter.
Capacitors C, and C 2 should be made as The dynatron of a few years ago and the newer
large in value as possible, while still permit- transitron are examples of oscillator circuits
which make use of the negative resistance
ting the circuit to oscillate over the full tun-
ing range of C. The larger these capacitors characteristic between different elements in
some multi-grid tubes.
are made, the smaller will be the coupling be-
tween the oscillating circuit and the tube, and In the dynatron, the negative resistance is a
consequently the better will be oscillator sta- consequence of secondary emission of elec-
trons from the plate of a tetrode tube. By a
bility with respect to tube variations. High Gm
tubes such as the 6AC7, 6AG7, and 6CB6 will prop_er propor~ioning of the electrode voltage,
an Increase 10 screen voltage will cause a
permit the use of larger values of capacitance
decrease in screen current, since the increased
at C, and C 2 than will more conventional tubes
screen voltage will cause the screen to attract
such as the 6SJ7, 6V6, and such types. In gen-
a ~arger number of the secondary electrons
eral it may be said that the reactance of ca-
emttted by the plate. Since the net screen cur-
pacitors C, and C 2 should be on the order of
rent flowing from the screen supply will be
40 to 120 ohms at the operating frequency of
decreased by an increase in screen voltage,
the oscillator-with the lower values of re-
it is said that the screen circuit presents a
actance going with highGm tubes and the negative resistance.
higher values being necessary to permit oscil-
lation with tubes having Gm in the range of If any type of tuned circuit, or even a re-
2000 micromhos such as the 6S J7, sistance-capacitance circuit, is connected in
It will be found that the Clapp oscillator series with the screen, the arrangement will
will have a tendency to vary in power output oscillate-provided, of course, that the external
over the frequency range of tuning capacitor circuit impedance is greater than the negative
C. The output will be greatest where C is at resistance. A negative resistance effect simi-
its largest setting, and will tend to fall off lar to the dynatron is obtained in the transitron
with C at minimum capacitance. In fact, if circuit, which uses a pentode with the suppres-
capacitors C, and C 2 have too large a value sor coupled to the screen. The negative re-
the circuit will stop oscillation near the mini- sistance in this case is obtained from a com-
mum capacitance setting of C. Hence it will bination of secondary emission and inter-elec-
be necessary to use a slightly smaller value trode coupling, and is considerably more stable
of capacitance at C, and C 2 (to provide an in- than that obtained from uncontrolled secondary
crease in the capacitive reactance at this emission alone in the dynatron. A representa-
point), or else the frequency range of the oscil- tive transitron oscillator circuit is shown in
lator must be restricted by paralleling a fixed figure 2.
capacitor across C so that its effective capaci- The chief distinction between a conven-
tance at minimum setting will be increased to tional negative grid oscillator and a negative
a value which will sustain oscillation. resistance oscillator is that in the former the
In the triode Clapp oscillator, such as shown tank circuit must act as a phase inverter in
at figure 1G, output voltage for excitation of order to permit the amplification of the tube
an amplifier, doubler, or isolation stage nor- to act as a negative resistance, while in the
mally is taken from the cathode of the oscil- latter the tube acts as its own phase inverter.
lator tube by capacitive coupling to the grid Thus a negative resistance oscillator requires
of the next tube. However, where greater iso- only an untapped coil and a single capacitor
HANDBOOK Oscillators 24 3
Figure 2
TWO-TERMINAL OSCILLATOR CIRCUITS
0 TRANSITRON OSCILLATOR
TRANSITION OSCILLATOR
c,-0.01-!Lfd. mica for r.f. 10-!Lfd. elect. for a.f.
C,-0.00005-!Lfd. mica for r.f. 0.1- !Lid. paper for
a. f.
C,-0.003- /Lfd. mica for r.f. 0.5- !Lid. paper for
a. f.
C..-0.01- !Lid. mica for r.f. 8- !Lid. elect. for a. f.
R1 -220K ~-watt carbon
R2 -1800 ohms ~-watt carbon
c, R3 -22K 2-watt carbon
R.-22K 2-watt carbon
CATHODE-COUPLED OSCILLATOR
C,-0.00005-!Lfd. mica for r.f. 0.1-!Lid. poper
for audio
C,-0.003- !Lid. mica lor r.f. 8- !Lid. elect. for
B+ 100- 1!!10 V. audio
R1 -47K ~-watt carbon
@ CATHODE COUPLED OSCILLATOR R2 -1 K 1-watt carbon
as the frequency determining tank circuit, and herently good stability is with respect to tube
is classed as a two terminal oscillator. In fact, variations; instability of the tuned circuit with
the time constant of an R/C circuit may be respect to vibration or temperature will of
used as the frequency determining element and course have as much effect on the frequency of
such an oscillator is rather widely used as a oscillation as with any other type of oscillator
tunable audio frequency oscillator. circuit. Solid mechanical construction of the
components of the oscillating circuit, along
The Frankl in The Franklin oscillator makes with a small negative-coefficient compensating
Oscillator use of two cascaded tubes to capacitor included as an element of the tuned
obtain the negative-resistance circuit, usually will afford an adequate degree
effect (figure 3). The tubes may be either a of oscillator stability.
pair of triodes, tetrodes, or pentodes, a dual
triode, or a combination of a triode and a multi
grid tube. The chief advantage of this oscil
lator circuit is that the frequency determining
tank only has two terminals, and one side of
the circuit is grounded.
The second tube acts as a phase inverter to
give an effect similar to that obtained with the
dynatron or transitron, except that the effective
transconductance is much higher. If the tuned
circuit is omitted or is replaced by a resistor, -B+
the circuit becomes a relaxation oscillator or
a multivibrator. Figure 3
THE FRANKLIN OSCILLATOR CIRCUIT
Oscillator The Clapp oscillator has proved A separate phase Inverter tube is usee/ in
Stability to be inherently the mOst stable this oscillator to feecl a portion of the output
of all the oscillator circuits dis back to the Input In the proper phase to sus
fain oscillation. The values of C z one/ C z
cussed above, since minimum coupling be shoulrl be as small as will permit oscillations
tween the oscillator tube and its associated to be sustained over the c/es/rec/ frequency
tuned circuit is possible. However, this in range.
244 Generation of R-F Energy THE R AD I 0
'~~~;
V.F.O. Transmit When used to control the fre-
"f
L1
ter Controls quency of a transmitter in
~LC2
I ~:
which there are s t ring en t
limitations on frequency tolerance, several pre- Li Ll
cautions are taken to ensure that a variable (LARGE) I (sTRAY
I SHUNT)
frequency oscillator will stay on frequency.
The oscillator is fed from a voltage regulated R1 I
(SMALL) I
power supply, uses a well designed and tem- _..J
perature compensated tank circuit, is of rugged
mechanical construction to avoid the effects 0 @
of shock and vibration, is protected against
excessive changes in ambient room tempera- Figure 4
ture, and is isolated from feedback or stray EQUIVALENT ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT OF
coupling from other portions of the transmitter QUARTZ PLATE IN A HOLDER
by shielding, filtering of voltage supply leads,
At (A) is shown the equivalent series-reso-
and incorporation of one or more buffer-ampli- nant circuit of the crystal itself, at (B) is
fier stages. In a high power transmitter a small shown how the shunt capacitance of the
amount of stray coupling from the final ampli- holder electrodes and associated wiring af-
fier to the oscillator can produce appreciable fects the circuit to the combination circuit
of (C) which exhibits both series resonance
degradation of the oscillator stability if both and parallel resonance (anti-resonance), the
are on the same frequency. Therefore, the os- separation in frequency between the two
cillator usually is operated on a subharmonic modes being very small and determined by
of the transmitter output frequency, with one the ratio of C 1 to C 2
or more frequency multipliers between the os
cillator and final amplifier.
AT+35"15'
BT-49
CT-t-36
OT-52'
ET"-t66
Figure 5 fT-57'
ORIENTATION OF THE
COMMON CRYSTAL CUTS
ZERO TE~PERATURE
COEFFICIENT
o OSCILLATORS
A MT LONGITUDINAL CRYSTAL
B NT FLEXURE CRYSTAL
The crystal blank is then rough-ground al- The first quartz plates used were either Y
most to frequency, the frequency increasing cut or X cut. The former had a very high tem-
in inverse ratio to the oscillating dimension perature coefficient which was discontinuous,
(usually the thickness). It is then finished to causing the frequency to jump at certain criti-
exact frequency either by careful lapping, by cal temperatures. The X cut had a moderately
etching, or plating. The latter process con- bad coefficient, but it was more continuous,
sists of finishing it to a frequency slightly and by keeping the crystal in a temperature
higher than that desired and then silver plating controlled oven, a high order of stability could
the electrodes right on the crystal, the fre- be obtained. However, the X cut crystal was
quency decreasing as the deposit of silver is considerably less active than the Y cut, es-
increased. If the crystal is not etched, it must pecially in the case of poorly ground plates.
be carefully scrubbed and "baked" several For frequencies between 500 kc. and about
times to stabilize it, or otherwise the frequen- 6 Me., the AT cut crystal now is the most
cy and activity of the crystal will change with widely used. It is active, can be made free
time. Irradiation by X-rays recently has been from spurious responses, and has an excellent
used in crystal finishing. temperature characteristic. However, above
Unplated crystals usually are mounted in about 6 Me. it becomes quite thin, and a diffi-
pressure holders, in which two electrodes are cult production job. Between 6 Me. and about
held against the crystal faces under slight 12 Me., the BT cut plate is widely used. It
pressure. Unplated crystals also are some- also works well between 500 kc. and 6 Me.,
times mounted in an air-gap holder, in which but the AT cut is more desirable when a high
there is a very small gap between the crystal order of stability is desired and no crystal
and one or both electrodes. By making this oven is employed.
gap variable, the frequency of the crystal may For low frequency operation on the order of
be altered over narrow limits (about 0.3% for 100 kc., such as is required in a frequency
certain types). standard, the GT cut crystal is recommended,
The temperature coefficient of frequency for though CT and DT cuts also are widely used
various crystal cuts of the "-T" rotated fam- for applications between 50 and 500 kc. The
ily is indicated in figure 5. These angles are CT, DT, and GT cut plates are known as con-
typical, but crystals of a certain cut will vary tour cuts, as these plates oscillate along the
slightly. By controlling the orientation and di- long dimension of the plate or bar, and are
mensioning, the turning point (point of zero much smaller physically than would be the
temperature coefficient) for a BT cut plate may case for a regular AT or BT cut crystal for
be made either lower or higher than the 75 de- the same frequency.
grees shown. Also, by careful control of axes
and dimensions, it is possible to get AT cut
crystals with a very flat temperature-frequency Crystal Holders Crystals normally are pur-
characteristic. chased ready mounted. The
246 Generation of R-F Energy THE R AD I 0
phenolic holder with rubber gasket will serve BASIC "PIERCE" OSCILLATOR HOT-CATHODE "PIERCE'
OSCILLATOR
where requirements are not too exacting.
crystal oscillator should not be run at high confusion, we shall refer to it as the tuned-
plate input in an attempt to obtain consider- plate crystal oscillator. It is essentially an
able power directly out of the oscillator, as Armstrong or tuned plate-tuned grid oscillator
such operation will cause the crystal to heat, with the crystal replacing the usual L-C grid
with resultant frequency drift and possible tank. The plate tank must be tuned to a fre-
fracture. quency slightly higher than the anti-resonant
(parallel resonant) frequency of the crystal.
Whereas the Pierce circuits of figure 6 will
oscillate at (or very close to) the anti-reso-
nant frequency of the crystal, the circuits of
13-3 Crystal Oscillator figure 7 will oscillate at a frequency a little
Circuits above the anti-resonant frequency of the
crystal.
Considerable confusion exists as to nomen- The diagram shown in figure 7 A is the basic
clature of crystal oscillator circuits, due to a circuit. The most popular version of the tuned
tendency to name a circuit after its discoverer. plate oscillator employs a pentode or beam
Nearly all the basic crystal oscillator circuits tetrode with cathode bias to prevent excessive
were either first used or else developed inde- plate dissipation when the circuit is not oscil-
pendently by G. W. Pierce, but he has not been lating. The cathode resistor is optional. Its
so credited in all the literature. omission will reduce both crystal current and
Use of the crystal oscillator in master os- oscillator efficiency, resulting in somewhat
cillator circuits in radio transmitters dates more output for a given crystal current. The
back to about 1924 when the first application tube usually is an audio or video beam pentode
articles appeared. or tetrode, the plate-grid capacitance of such
tubes being sufficient to ensure stable oscilla
The Pierce The circuit of figure 6A is the sim- tion but not so high as to offer excessive feed-
Oscillator plest crystal oscillator circuit. It back with resulting high crystal current. The
is one of those de v e 1 oped by 6AG7 makes an excellent all-around tube for
Pierce, and is generally known among ama- this type circuit.
teurs as the Pierce oscillator. The crystal
simply replaces the tank circuit in a Colpitts Pentode The usual type of crystal-
or ultra-audion oscillator. The r-f excitation Harmonic Crystal controlled h-f transmitter
voltage available to the next stage is low, be- Oscillator Circuits operates, at least part of
ing somewhat less than that developed across the time, on a frequency
the crystal. Capacitor C, will make more of which is an integral multiple of the operating
the voltage across the crystal available for frequency of the controlling crystal. Hence,
excitation, and sometimes will be found nec- oscillator circuits which are capable of pro-
essary to ensure oscillation. Its value is small, viding output on the crystal frequency if de-
usually approximately equal to or slightly sired, but which also can deliver output energy
greater than the stray capacitance from the on harmonics of the crystal frequency have
plate circuit to ground (including the grid of come into wide use. Four such circuits which
the stage being driven). have found wide application are illustrated in
If the r-f choke has adequate inductance, a figures 7C, 70, 7E, and 7F.
crystal (even a harmonic cut crystal) will al- The circuit shown in figure 7C is recom-
most invariably oscillate on its fundamental. mended for use with harmonic-cut crystals
The Pierce oscillator therefore cannot be used when output is desired on a multiple of the
with harmonic cut crystals. oscillating frequency of the crystal. As an
The circuit at (B) is the same as that of example, a 25-Mc. harmonic-cut crystal may
(A) except that the plate instead of the cath- be used in this circuit to obtain output on 50
ode is operated at ground r-f potential. All of Me., or a 48-Mc. harmonic-cut crystal may be
the r-f voltage developed across the crystal used to obtain output on the 144-Mc. amateur
is available for excitation to the next stage, band. The circuit is not recommended for use
but still is low for reasonable values of crys- with the normal type of fundamental-frequency
tal current. For best operation a tube with low crystal since more output with fewer variable
heater-cathode capacitance is required. Exci- elements can be obtained with the circuits of
tation for the next stage rna y also be taken 70 and 7F.
from the cathode when using this circuit. The Pierce-harmonic circuit shown in fig-
ure 70 is satisfactory for many applications
Tuned. Plate The circuit shown in fig- which require very low crystal current, but
Crystal Oscillator ure 7A is also one used by has the disadvantage that both sides of the
Pierce, but is more widely crystal are above ground potential. The Tri-tet
referred to as the "Miller" oscillator. To avoid circuit of figure 7E is widely used and can
248 Generation of R-F Energy THE R AD I 0
BASIC TUNED-PLATE OSCILLATOR RECOMMENDED TUNED-PLATE SPECIAL CIRCUIT FOR USE WITH
OSCILLATOR HARMONIC-CUT CRYSTAL.
@)
Figure 7
COMMONLY USED CRYSTAL OSCILLATOR CIRCUITS
Shown ot (A) is the basic tunec/-p/ate crystal oscillator with a trioc/e oscillator tube.
The plate tank must be tunecl on the /ow-capacitance s/c/e pf resonance to sustain
asci/lotion. (B) shows the tunecl-p/ote oscillator as it Is normally usecl, with an a-f
power pentacle to permit high output with relotively /qw crystal current.
Schematics (C), (D), (E), ancl (F) illustrote crystal oscillator circuits which can cle-
1iver moderate output energy on harmonics of the oscilloting frequency of the crys-
tal. (C) shows a spec/a/ circuit which will permit use of a harmonic-cut crystal to
obtain output energy we// into the v-h-f range. (D) is valuable when extremely low
crystal current is a requirement, but clel Ivers relatively low output. (E) is commonly
usecl, but is subject to crystal clamage if the cothocle circuit is m/stunecl. (F) is
recommenclec/ as the most generally sotlsfactory from the standpoints of: low crys
tal current regarcl/ess of mls-acltustment, goocl output on harmonic frequencies, one
sicle of crystal Is grounclecl, will osci//ote with crystals from 1.5 to 10 Me. without
adjustment, output tank may be tunecl to the crystal frequency for fundamental out-
put without stopping oscillation or changing frequency.
give excellent output with low crystal current. tremely low; (3) one side of the crystal is
However, the circuit has the disadvantages of grounded, which facilitates crystal-switching
requiring a cathode coil, of requiring careful circuits; (4) the circuit will operate straight
setting of the variable cathode capacitor to through without frequency pulling, or it may
avoid damaging the crystal when changing fre be operated with output on the second, third,
quency ranges, and of having both sides of or fourth harmonic of the crystal frequency.
the crystal above ground potential.
The Colpitts harmonic oscillator of figure Crystal Oscillator The tunable circuits of all
7F is recommended as being the most gener Tuning oscillators i 11 us t rated
ally satisfactory harmonic crystal oscillator should be tuned for maxi
circuit since it has the following advantages: mum output as indicated by maximum excita
(1) the circuit will oscillate with crystals tion to the following stage, except that the
over a very wide frequency range with no oscillator tank of tuned-plate oscillators (fig
change other than plugging in or switching in ure 7A and figure 7B) should be backed off
the desired crystal; (2) crystal current is ex slightly towards the low capacitance side from
HANDBOOK All-band Crystal Oscillator 24 9
12AU7 6J6
3F
P
r-----,---jr--- 6, 9 F 0
50 RFC 7 ~ 1 L:O
L1
}
5
;::;
62 K B
0 =
-= ':"' .001
100 100 1000 100
f::eMc.
IK
+200V,
l I =5 T. # !8,-f"
0. SPACED
l2=1r. HOOKUP WIRE, fH D.
+300V.
Figure 9
VARIOUS TYPES OF OVERTONE OSCILLATORS USING MINIATURE DOUBLE-TRIODE
TUBES
an 8-Mc. crystal, output from the first section case consists of C,, C 2 and RFC between the
of the 6J6 tube may be obtained on either 24 grid, cathode and ground of the first section
~!c. or 40 Me., depending upon the resonant of the 6J6. The plate circuit of the first sec-
frequency of the plate circuit inductor, L,. The tion is tuned to the second overtone of the
second half of the 6J6 acts as a frequency crystal, and the second section of the 6J6
multiplier, its plate circuit, L 2 , tuned to the doubles to the fourth harmonic of the crystal.
sixth or ninth harmonic frequency when L, is This circuit is useful in obtaining 28-Mc. out-
tuned to the third overtone, or to the tenth put from a 7-Mc. crystal and is highly popular
harmonic frequency when L, is tuned to the in mobile work.
fifth overtone. The circuit of figure 9C shows a typical re-
Figure 98 illustrates a Colpitts overtone generative overtone oscillator employing a
oscillator employing a 6J6 tube. This is an 12AU7 double triode tube. Feedback is con-
outgrowth of the Colpitts harmonic oscillator trolled by the number of turns in L 2 , and the
of figure 7F. The regenerative loop in this coupling between L 2 and L,. Only enough feed-
HANDBOOK R-F Amplifiers 251
back should be employed to maintain proper mum harmonic output is desired in a particu-
oscillation of the crystal. Excessive feedback lar stage. A Class B amplifier operates witlt
will cause the first section of the 12AU7 to cutoff bias and a comparatively small amount
oscillate as a self-excited TNT oscillator, of excitation. Power gains of 20 to 200 or so
independent of the crystal. A variety of this are obtainable in a well-designed Class B
circuit is shown in figure 9D, wherein a tapped amplifier. The plate efficiency of a Class B
coil, L 1 , is used in place of the two separate c-w amplifier will run around 65 per cent.
coils. Operation of the circuit is the same in
either case, regeneration now being controlled The Class B Another type of Class B ampli-
by the placement of the tap on L 1 Linear fier is the Class B linear stage
as employed in radiophone work.
A cathode follower overtone oscillator is This type of amplifier is used to increase the
shown in figure 9E. The cathode coil, L., is
level of a modulated carrier wave, and de-
chosen so as to resonate with the crystal and
pends for its operation upon the linear rela-
tube capacities just below the third overtone
tion between excitation voltage and output
frequency of the crystal. For example, with an
voltage. Or, to state the fact in another man-
8-Mc. crystal, L, is tuned to 24 Me., L 1 reson-
ner, the power output of a Class B linear stage
ates with the circuit capacities to 23.5 Me., varies linearly with the square of the excita-
and the harmonic tank circuit of the second
tion voltage.
section of the 12AT7 is tuned either to 48 Me.
or 72 Me. If a 24-Mc. overtone crystal is used The Class B linear amplifier is operated
in this circuit, L, may be tuned to 72 Me., L 1 with cutoff bias and a small value of excita-
resonates with the circuit capacities to 70 tion, the actual value of exciting power being
Me., and the harmonic tank circuit, L 2 , is tuned such that the power output under carrier con-
to 144 Me. If there is any tendency towards ditions is one-fourth of the peak power capa-
self-oscillation in the circuit, it may be elimi- bilities of the stage. Class B linears are very
nated by a small amount of inductive coupling widely employed in broadcast and commercial
between L 2 and L,. Placing these coils near installations, but are comparatively uncommon
each other, with the winding of L 2 correctly in amateur application, since tubes with high
polarized with respect to L, will prevent self- plate dissipation are required for moderate
oscillation of the circuit. output. The carrier efficiency of such an am-
The use of a 144-Mc. overtone crystal is plifier will vary from approximately 30 per
illustrated in figure 9F. A 6AB4 or one-half cent to 35 per cent.
of !l 12AT7 tube may be used, with output
directly in the 2-meter amateur band. A slight The Class C Class C amplifiers are very wide-
amount of regeneration is provided by the one Amplifier ly used in all types of trans-
turn link, L, which is loosely coupled to the mitters. Good power gain may be
144-~lc. tuned tank circuit, L 1 in the plate cir- obtained (values of gain from 3 to 20 are com-
cuit of the oscillator tube. If a 12AT7 tube mon) and the plate circuit efficiency may be,
and a 110-Mc. crystal are employed, direct out- under certain conditions, as high as 85 per
put in the 220-Mc. amateur band may be ob- cent. Class C amplifiers operate with consider-
tained from the second half of the 12A T7. ably more than cutoff bias and ordinarily with
a large amount of excitation as compared to a
Class B amplifier. The bias for a normal Class
C amplifier is such that plate current on the
13-4 Radio Frequency stage flows for approximately 120 of the 360
Amplifiers excitation cycle. Class C amplifiers are used
in transmitters where a fairly large amount of
The output of the oscillator stage in a trans- excitation power is available and good plate
mitter (whether it be self-controlled or crystal circuit efficiency is desired.
controlled) must be kept down to a fairly low
level to maintain stability and to maintain a Plate Modulated The characteristic of a Class
factor of safety from fracture of the crystal Class C C amplifier which makes it
when one is used. The low power output of line a r with respect to
the oscillator is brought up to the desired changes in plate voltage is that which allows
power level by means of radio-frequency am- such an amplifier to be plate modulated for
plifiers. The two classes of r-f amplifiers that radiotelephony. Through the use of higher bias
find widest application in radio transmitters than is required for a c-w Class C amplifier
are the Class B and Class C types. and greater excitation, the linearity of such
an amplifier may be extended from zero plate
. The Class B Class B amplifiers are used in a voltage to twice the normal value. The output
Amp I ifier radio-telegraph transmitter when power of a Class C amplifier, adjusted for
maximum power gain and mini- plate modulation, varies with the square of the
252 Generation of R-F Energy THE R AD I 0
plate voltage. This is the same condition that Excessive grid current damages tubes by
would take place if a resistor equal to the overheating the grid structure; beyond a cer-
voltage on the amplifier, divided by its plate tain point of grid drive, no increase in power
current, were substituted for the amplifier. output can be obtained for a given plate volt-
Therefore, the stage presents a resistive load age.
to the modulator.
13-5 Neutralization of
Grid Modulated If the grid current to a Class
Class C C amplifier is reduced to a R.F. Amplifiers
low value, and the plate load-
ing is increased to the point where the plate The plate-to-grid feedback capacitance of
dissipation approaches the rated value, such triodes makes it necessary that they be neu-
an amplifier may be grid modulated for radio- tralized for operation as r-f amplifiers at fre-
telephony. If the plate voltage is raised to quencies above about 500 kc. Those screen-
quite a high value and the stage is adjusted grid tubes, pentodes, and beam tetrodes which
carefully, efficiencies as high as 40 to 43 per have a plate-to-grid capacitance of 0.1 pp.fd.
cent with good modulation capability and com- or less may be operated as an amplifier with-
paratively low distortion may be obtained. out neutralization in a well-designed amplifier
Fixed bias is required. This type of operation up to 30 Me.
is termed Class C grid-bias modulation.
Neutralizing The object qf neutralization is
Grid Excitation Adequate grid ex citation Circuits to cancel or neutralize the ca-
must be available for Class pacitive feedback of energy from
B or Class C service. The excitation for a plate to grid. There are two general methods
plate-modulated Class C stage must be suffi- by which this energy feedback may be elimi-
cient to produce a normal value of d-e grid cur- nated: the first, and the most common method,
rent with rated bias voltage. The bias voltage is through the use of a capacitance bridge,
preferably should be obtained from a combina- and the second method is through rhe use of a
tion of grid leak and fixed C-bias supply. parallel reactance of equal and opposite po-
Cutoff bias can be calculated by dividing larity to the grid-to-plate capacitance, to nul-
the amplification factor of the tube into the lify the effect of this capacitance.
d-e plate voltage. This is the value normally Examples of the first method are shown in
used for Class B amplifiers (fixed bias, no figure 10. Figure lOA shows a capacity neu-
grid resistor). Class C amplifiers use from 1 ~ tralized stage employing a balanced tank cir-
to 5 times this value, depending upon the avail- cuit. Phase reversal in the tank circuit is ob-
able grid drive, or excitation, and the desired tained by grounding the center of the tank coil
plate efficiency. Less grid excitation is need- to radio frequency energy by condenser C.
ed for c-w operation, and the values of fixed Points A and B are 180 degrees out of phase
bias (if greater than cutoff) may be reduced, or with each other, and the correct amount of out
the value of the grid leak resistor can be low- of phase energy is coupled through the neu-
ered until normal rated d-e grid current flows. tralizing condenser NC to the grid circuit of
The values of grid excitation listed for each the tube. The equivalent bridge circuit of this
type of tube may be reduced by as much as is shown in figure IIA. It is seen that the
50 per cent if only moderate power output and bridge is not in balance, since the plate-fila-
plate efficiency are desired. When consulting ment capacity of the tube forms one leg of the
the tube tables, it is well to remember that bridge, and there is no corresponding capacity
the power lost in the tuned circuits must be from the neutralizing condenser (point B) to
taken into consideration when calculating the ground to obtain a complete balance. In addi-
available grid drive. At very high frequencies, tion, it is mechanically difficult to obtain a
the r-f circuit losses may even exceed the perfect electrical balance in the tank coil, and
power required for actual grid excitation. the potential between point A and ground and
Link coupling between stages, particularly point B and ground in most cases is unequal.
to the final amplifier grid circuit, normally will This circuit, therefore, holds neutralization
provide more grid drive than can be obtained over a very small operating range and unless
from other coupling systems. The number of tubes of low interelectrode capacity are used
turns in the coupling link, and the location of the inherent unbalance of the circuit will per-
the turns on the coil, can be varied with res- mit only approximate neutralization.
pect to the tuned circuits to obtain the great-
est grid drive for allowable values of buffer Split-Stator Figure lOB shows the neu-
or doubler plate current. Slight readjustments Plate Neutrali- tralization circuit which is
sometimes can be made after plate voltage zation most widely used in single-
has been applied to the driver tube. ended r-f stages. The use of
HANDBOOK Neutralization 253
NC
Figure 10
COMMON NEUTRALIZING CIRCUITS FOR SINGLE-ENDED AMPLIFIERS
a split-stator plate capacitor makes the electri- of the grid coil. If an r-f voltmeter is placed
cal balance of the circuit substantially inde- between point A and ground, and a second
pendent of the mutual coupling within the coil voltmeter placed between point B and ground
and also makes the balance independent of the the loading effect of the tube will be notice-
place where the coil is tapped. With conven able. When the tube is supplied excitation
tional tubes this circuit will allow one neutral- with no plate voltage, NC may be adjusted
ization adjustment to be made on, say, 28 Me., until the circuit is in balance. When plate
and this adjustment usually will hold suffi- voltage is applied to the stage, the voltage
ciently close for operation on all lower fre- from point A to ground will decrease, and the
quency bands. voltage from point B to ground will increase,
Condenser C 1 is used to balance out the both in direct proportion to the amount of cir-
plate-filament capacity of the tube to allow a cuit unbalance. The use of this circuit is not
perfect neutralizing balance at all frequencies. recommended above 7 Me., and it should be
The equivalent bridge circuit is shown in fig- used below that frequency only with low in-
ure llB. If the plate-filament capacity of the ternal capacity tubes.
tube is extremely low (lOOTH triode, for ex-
ample), condenser C 1 may be omitted, or may Push-Pull Two tubes of the same type
merely consist of the residual capacity of NC Neutralization can be connected for push-pull
to ground. operation so as to obtain twice
as much output as that of a single tube. A
Grid Neutralization A split grid tank circuit push-pull amplifier, such as that shown in fig-
may also be used for neu- ure 12 also has an advantage in that the cir
tralization of a triode tube as shown in figure cuit can more easily be balanced than a single-
10C. Out of phase voltage is developed across tube r-f amplifier. The various inter-electrode
a balanced grid circuit, and coupled through capacitances and the neutralizing capacitors
NC to the single-ended plate circuit of the are connected in such a manner that the re-
tube. The equivalent bridge circuit is shown actances on one side of the tuned circuits are
in figure llC. This circuit is in balance until exactly equal to those on the opposite side.
the stage is in operation when the loading ef- For this reason, push-pull r-f amplifiers can
fect of the tube upon one-half of the grid cir- be more easily neutralized in very-high-fre-
cuit throws the bridge circuit out of balance. quency transmitters; also, they usually remain
The amount of unbalance depends upon the in perfect neutralization when tuning the am
grid-plate capacity of the tube, and the amount plifier to different bands.
of mutual inductance between the two halves The circuit shown in figure 12 is perhaps
254 Generation of R-F Energy THE R AD I 0
c
Figure 12
,~,
STANDARD CROSS-NEUTRALIZED
PUSH-PULL TRIODE AMPLIFIER
C1YCP-F
-)
Figure 14
BEAM TETRODES
-c -HV +SG +HV
A conventional cross neutralized circuit lor use with push-pull beam tetrocles is
shown ot (A). The neutralizing capacitors (NC) usually consist of small plates or
rocls mountec/ olongsicle th,. plot,. e/,.m,.nts of the tubes. (B) one/ (C) show 11 gricl
neutroliz:ecl" circuits for use with o single-enclecl tetrocle stage having either link
coupling or capacitive coupling into the gricl tonk. (D) shows o methocl of tuning the
screen-leoc/ incluctonce to accomplish neutroliz:otion in o single-frequency v-h-f
tetrocle amplifier, while (E) shows o methocl of neutroliz:otion by increasing the grid
to-plate copocitonc .. on o t ..trocle when the operating frequency is higher than that
frequency where the tetrocle is 11 self-neutral izec/ 11 as a result of series resonance
in the screen /,.ocl. Methods (D) one/ (E) normally ore not procticoble ot frequencies
below about 50 Me. with the usual types of beam tetroc/e tubes.
stage for miscellaneous feedback between the tubes. This order of capacitance is far less
grid and plate circuits, and make the neces- than can be obtained with a conventional neu
saty circuit revisions to reduce this feedback tralizing capacitor at minimum setting, so the
to an absolute minimum, it is wise to neutral- neutralizing atrangement is most commonly
ize the tetrode just as if it were a triode tube. made especially for the case at hand. Most
In most pushpull tetrode amplifiers the sim common procedure is to bring a conductor (con
plest method of accomplishing neutralization nected to the opposite grid) in the vicinity of
is to use the cross-neutralized capacitance the plate itself or of the plate tuning capacitor
bridge arrangement as normally employed with of one of the tubes. Either one or two such
tdode tubes. The neutralizing capacitances, capacitors may be used, two being normally
however, must be very much smaller than used used on a higher frequency amplifier in order
with triode tubes, values of the order of 0.2 to maintain balance within the stage.
~tfdd.normallybeing required with beam tetrode An example of this is shown in figure 14A.
HANDBOOK Tetrode Neutralization 257
Neutralizing A single-ended tetrode r-f am- though the socket terminal on the tube is care-
Single- Ended plifier stage may be neutral- fully by-passed to ground. This condition takes
Tetrode Stages ized in the same manner as place even though the socket pin is bypassed
iII us t rated for a push-pull since the reactance of the screen lead
stage in figure 14A, provided a split-stator will allow a moderate amount of r-f potential
tank capacitor is in use in the plate circuit. to appear on the screen itself inside the elec-
However, in the majority of single-ended ret- trode assembly in the tube. This effect has
rode r-f amplifier stages a single-section ca- been reduced to a very low amount in such
pacitor is used in the plate tank. Hence, other tubes astheHytron5516, andtheEimac 4Xl50A
neutralization procedures must be employed and 4X500A but it is still quite appreciable in
when neutralization is found necessary. most beam-tetrode tubes.
The circuit shown in figure 14B is not a The effect of screen-lead inductance on the
true neutralizing circuit, in that the plate-to- stability of a stage can be eliminated at any
grid capacitance is not balanced out. However, particular frequency by one of two methods.
the circuit can afford the equivalent effect by These methods are: (1) Tuning out the screen-
isolating the high resonant impedance of the lead inductance by series resonating the screen
grid tank circuit from the energy fed back from lead inductance with a capacitor to ground.
plate to grid. When NC and C are adjusted to This method is illustrated in figure 140 and is
bear the following ratio to the grid-to-plate common! y employed in commercial! y-built equip-
capacitance and the total capacitance from ment for operation on a narrow frequency band
grid-to-ground in the output tube: in the range above about 75 Me. The other
method (2) is illustrated in figure 14E and
consists in feeding back additional energy
from plate to grid by means of a small capac-
itor connected between these two elements.
Note that this capacitor is connected in such
both ends of the grid tank circuit will be at the a manner as to increase the effective grid-to-
same voltage with respect to ground as a result plate capacitance of the tube. This method
of r-f energy fed back to the grid circuit. This has been found to be effective with 807 tubes
means that the impedance from grid to ground in the range above 50 Me. and with tubes such
will be effectively equal to the reactance of as the 4-125A and 4-2SOA in the vicinity of
the grid-to-cathode capacitance in parallel their upper frequency limits.
with the stray grid-to-ground capacitance, since Note that both these methods of stabilizing
the high resonant impedance of the tuned cir- a beam-tetrode v-h-f amplifier stage by can-
cuit in the grid has been effectively isolated cellation of screen-lead inductance are suit-
from the feedback path. It is important to note able only for operation over a relatively narrow
that the effective grid-to-ground capacitance band of frequencies in the v-h-f range. At low-
of the tube being neutralized includes the er frequencies both these expedients for re-
rated grid-to-cathode or input capacitance of ducing the effects of screen-lead inductance
the tube, the capacitance of the socket, wiring will tend to increase the tendency toward os-
capacitances and other strays, but it does not cillation of the amplifier stage.
include the capacitances associated with the
grid tuning capacitor. Also, if the tube is be-
ing excited by capacitive coupling from a pre- Neutralizing When a stage cannot be com-
ceding stage (as in figure 14C), the effective Problems pletely neutralized, the difficulty
grid-to-ground capacitance includes the out- usually can be traced to one or
put capacitance of the preceding stage and more of the following causes: (1) Filament
its associated socket and wiring capacitances. leads not by-passed to the common ground of
that particular stage. (2) Ground lead from the
rotor cqnnection of the split-stator tuning ca-
Cancellation of The provisions discussed in pacitor to filament open or too long. (3) Neu-
Screen-Lead the previous paragraphs are tralizing capacitors in a field of excessive
Inductance for neutralization of the small, r.f. from one of the tuning coils. (4) Electro-
though still important at the magnetic coupling between grid and plate
higher frequencies, grid-to-plate capacitance coils, or between plate and preceding buffer
of beam-tetrode tubes. However, in the vicinity or oscillator circuits. (5) Insufficient shielding
of the upper-frequency limit of each tube type or spacing between stages, or between grid
the inductance of the screen lead of the tube and plate circuits in compact transmitters.
becomes of considerable importance. With a (6) Shielding placed too close to plate circuit
tube operating at a frequency where the in- coils, causing induced currents in the shields.
ductance of the screen lead is appreciable, (7) Parasitic oscillations when plate voltage
the screen will allow a considerable amount is applied. The cure for the latter is mainly a
of energy leak-through from plate to grid even matter of cut and try-rearrange the parts,
258 Generation of R-F Energy THE R AD I 0
GRID
LEAK
INTERWOUNO COILS
(UNITY COUPLING)
Figure 16
CONVENTIONAL TRIODE FREQUENCY
MULTIPLIER
f"IL. +HV
Small triodes such as the 6C4 operate sotis
lactorily as frequency multipliers, and can
Figure 15 deliver output well into the v-h-f range. Re-
GROUNDED-GRID AMPLIFIER sistor R normally wilt hove o value in the
vicinity of 100,000 ohms.
This type of triode ompl ifier requires no
neutralization, but can be usee/ only with
tubes having o relatively low plate-to-cathode
capacitance
given output, because a moderate amount of
power is delivered to the amplifier load by the
driver stage of a grounded-grid amplifier.
change the length of grid or plate or neutraliz-
ing leads, insert a parasitic choke in the grid
lead or leads, or eliminate the grid r-f chokes
which may be the cause of a low-frequency 13-8 Frequency Multipliers
parasitic (in conjunction with plate r-f chokes).
Quartz crystals and variable-frequency os-
Grounded Grid cillators are not ordinarily used for direct con-
13-7 trol of the output of high-frequency transmit-
Amplifiers ters. Frequency multipliers are usually em-
ployed to multiply the frequency to the desired
Certain triodes have a grid configuration value. These multipliers operate on exact mul-
and lead arrangement which results in very low tiples of the excitation frequency; a 3.6-Mc.
plate to filament capacitance when the control crystal oscillator can be made to control the
grid is grounded, the grid acting as an effec- output of a transmitter on 7.2 or 14.4 Me., or
tive shield much in the manner of the screen on28.8 Me., by means of one or more frequency
in a screen-grid tube. multipliers. When used at twice frequency,
By connecting such a triode in the circuit of they are often termed frequency doublers. A
figure 15, taking the usual precautions against simple doubler circuit is shown in figure 16.
stray capacitive and inductive coupling be- It consists of a vacuum tube with its plate cir-
tween input and output leads and components, cuit tuned to twice the frequency of the grid
a stable power amplifier is realized which re- driving circuit. This doubler can be excited
quires no neutralization. from a crystal oscillator or another multiplier
At ultra-high frequencies, where it is diffi- or amplifier stage.
cult to obtain satisfactory neutralization with Doubling is best accomplished by operating
conventional triode circuits (particularly when the tube with high grid bias. The grid circuit
a wide band of frequencies is to be covered), is driven approximately to the normal value of
the grounded-grid arrangement is about the only d-e grid current through the r-f choke and grid-
practicable means of employing a triode am- leak resistor, shown in figure 16. The resist-
plifier. ance value generally is from two to five times
Because of the large amount of degeneration as high as that used with the same tube for
inherent in the circuit, considerably more ex- straight amplification. Consequently, the grid
citation is required than if the same tube were bias is several times as high for the same
employed in a conventional grounded-cathode value of grid current.
circuit. The additional power required to drive Neutralization is seldom necessary in a
a triode in a grounded-grid amplifier is not doubler circuit, since the plate is tuned to
lost, however, as it shows up in the output cir- twice the frequency of the grid circuit. The
cuit and adds to the power delivered to the impedance of the grid driving circuit is very
load. But nevertheless it means that a larger low at the doubling frequency, and thus there
driver stage is required for an amplifier of is little tendency for self-excited oscillation.
HANDBOOK Frequency Multipliers 25 9
1(CUTOF'F')
1\ (\
H
A
- ,'J-/\ /\- /\
~ 1E G\ L\ M 0 /S
I
U\
[\
w y
1
\../ \_J I I I
D HI I I I
= N(CUTOFF)-- - - -
I
- 1L - -t- I
-1p_--
I I
-ly--- -
I I
\ ,.___ E:XCITATION
\ I VOLTAGE
'Q'
Figure 18
ILLUSTRATING THE ACTION OF A
FREQUENCY DOUBLER
Figure 19
Figure 20
PUSH-PUSH FREQUENCY DOUBLER
PUSH-PULL FREQUENCY TRIPLER
The output of a cloubler stage may be materi-
ally increased through the use of a push-push The push-pull tripler is advantageous in the
circuit such as illustratecl above. v-h-1 range since circuit balance is main
tainecl both in the input ancl output circuits.
If the circuit is neutralized it may be usee/
either as a straight amplifier or as a tripler.
Either triocles or tetrocles may be usee/; dual-
citation pulses will be at least 90 degrees at unit tetrocles such as the 815, 832A, one/
the exciting frequency, with correspondingly 8298 are particularly effective in the v-h-f
range.
low efficiency, but it is more practicable to
accept the low efficiency and build up the out
put in succeeding amplifier stages. The effi-
ciency can become quite low before the power
gain becomes less than unity.
center tap of the grid coil being by-passed to
ground).
Push-Push Two tubes can be connected in
Multipliers parallel to give twice the output Push-Pull Frequency It is frequently desirable
of a single-tube doubler. If the Triplers in the case of u-h-f and
grids are driven out of phase instead of in v-h-f transmitters that
phase, the tubes then no longer work simul- frequency multiplication stages be balanced
taneously, but rather one at a time. The effect with respect to ground. Further it is just as
is to fill 'in the missing pulses (figure 18). easy in most cases to multiply the crystal or
Not only is the output doubled, but several v-f-o frequency by powers of three rather than
advantages accrue which cannot be obtained multiplying by powers of two as is frequently
by straight parallel operation. done on lower frequency transmitters. Hence
Chief among these is the effective neutral- the use of push-pull triplers has become quite
ization of the fundamental and all odd harmon- prevalent in both commercial and amateur
ics, an advantage when spurious emissions v-h-f and u-h-f transmitter designs. Such stages
must be minimized. Another advantage is that are balanced with respect to ground and appear
when the available excitation is low and ex- in construction and on paper essentially the
citation pulses exceed 90 degrees, the output same as a push-pull r-f amplifier stage with
and efficiency will be greater than for the the exception that the output tank circuit is
same tubes connected in parallel. tuned to three times the frequency of the grid
The same arrangement may be used as a tank circuit. A circuit for a push-pull tripler
quadrupler, with considerably better efficiency stage is shown in figure 20.
than for straight parallel operation, because A push-pull tripler stage has the further
seldom is it practicable to supply sufficient advantage in amateur work that it can also be
excitation to permit 45 degree excitation used as a conventional push-pull r-f amplifier
pulses. As pointed out above, the push-push merely by changing the grid and plate coils
arrangement exhibits better efficiency than a so that they tune to the same frequency. This
single ended multiplier when excitation is in- is of some advantage in the case of operating
adequate for ideal multiplier operation. the 50-Mc. band with 50-Mc. excitation, and
A typical push-push doubler is illustrated then changing the plate coil to tune to 144
in figure 19. When high transconductance tubes Me. for operation of the stage as a tripler from
are employed, it is necessary to employ a exci$8tion on 48 Me. This circuit arrangement
split-stator grid tank capacitor to prevent self is excellent for operation with push-pull beam
oscillation; with well screened tetrodes or tetrodes such as the 6360 and 829B, although
pentodes having medium values of transcon- a pair of tubes such as the 226, or 5763 could
ductance, a split-coil arrangement with a sin- just as well be used if proper attention were
gle-section capacitor may be employed (the given to the matter of screen-lead inductance.
HANDBOOK Tank Circuits 261
0
which means simply that the resistance pre-
sented by the tank circuit to the Class C tube
is approximately equal to one-half the d-e load
resistance which the Class C stage presents
7
to the power supply (and also to the modulator
in case high-level modulation of the stage is
2ND
HARMONIC
to be used) .
4
Combining the above simplified expression
for the r-f impedance presented by the tank to
'
2
>RD
HARMONIC
the tube, with the expression for tank Q given
1 I'N.III in a previous paragraph we have the following
0
[[l_t expression which relates the reactance of the
10 1!. 20 >0 tank capacitor or coil to the d-e input to the
TANK CIRCUIT Q
Class C stage:
Figure 22
Xc = XLt""J Rd.c.
----
RELATIVE HARMONIC OUTPUT 2Q
PLOTTED AGAINST TANK CIRCUIT Q
The above expression is the basis of the
usual charts giving tank capacitance for the
various bands in terms of the d-e plate voltage
and current to the Class C stage, including
the plate voltage swing will be approximately the charts of figure 23, figure 24 and figure 25.
equal to 0.85 to 0.9 times the d-e plate voltage
on the stage, and the plate circuit efficiency Harmonic Radio- The problem of harmonic
will be from 70 to 80 per cent (Np of 0. 7 to tion vs. Q radiation from transmitters
0.8), the higher values of efficiency normally has long been present, but
being associated with the higher values of it has become critical only relatively recently
plate voltage swing. With these two assump- along with the extensive occupation of the
tions as to the normal Class C amplifier, the v-h-f range. Television signals are particularly
expression for the plate load impedance can susceptible to interference from other signals
be greatly simplified to the following approxi- falling within the pass band of the receiver,
mate but useful expression: so that the TVI problem has received the major
emphasis of all the services in the v-h-f range
Rd.c. which are susceptible to interference from
RL ! : : : : ! - - -
harmonics of signals in the h-f or lower v-h-f
2 range.
~ \1\\ 1\
~
Q=l2
1\
1\ f\\1\ \
rTF
10
~ ..> __'t'_
000
000
IV..
\ """'I\
" ~ -B +SG +B
~ ~ ~
000
1\ \
\
\ l"... ~
~~\ ~
~
u
ci
a:
I -c +B -c tB
!t 10 20 50 100 200 500 1000 2000
TOTAL CAPACITANCE ACROSS LC CIRCUIT (Ci)
Figure 23
PLATE-TANK CIRCUIT ARRANGEMENTS
Shown above In the case of each of the tonk circuit tyl?es is the recommenc/ec/ tank circuit ca
pacitance. (A) is a conventional tetroc/e amplifier, (8} is a coil-neutrallzec/ triocle amplifier,
(C) is a grounc/ec/-gric/ triocle amplifier, (D) is a gric/-neutra/izec/ trioc/e amplifier.
HANDBOOK Tank Circuits 263
20
l\ ~ \ Q=12
1\
10
\ \\
1\ 1\
000
'ol
I~
000
~ "'\ \ :\
\ \ _\
[\.\ \ RFC
_:\ \ \ \
II
1\ \ B+
i\ \
1\
u
1\ 1\
0
IX
1\1\
I
I Z 3 5 7 10 20 30 50 100 200 500 1000
CORRECT VALUES OF TANK CIRCUIT CAPACITANCE (C) FOR
OPERATING Q OF 12 WITH SINGLE-ENDED SPLIT TANK COILS
Figure 24
PLATE-TANK CIRCUIT ARRANGEMENTS
Shown above for each of the tank circuit types is the recommenclecl tank circuit capacitance at
the operating frequency for an operating Q of 12. (A) is a split-stator tank, each section of which
is twice the capacity value reac/ on the graph. (B) is circuit using tappec/ coil for phase reversal.
0000
\ [\
E1p ~-
llr--;- ~
8000
UJI- <Co
<.?Z f.-
<(UJ 6000 \
1-0: \
..Ja:
0:::>
>U \ \ i\ r-. B+
UJUJ
\:(~
..J..J 3
\ \ 1\
~ [\
(l.(l. \ \
J
2000
@
\
0
a:
\ [\'l\\ l\ \
1000 1\ \
I 2 3 ~ 7 10 20 30 50 100 200 500 1000
CORRECT VALUES OF TANK CIRCUIT CAPACITANCE (C 1) FOR
OPERATING Q OF 6 WITH PUSH-PULL TANK CIRCUITS
Figure 2S
PLATE-TANK CIRCUIT ARRANGEMENTS FOR PUSH-PULL STAGES
Shown above is recommenclecl tank circuit capacity at operating frequency for a Q of 6. (A) i.:
split-stator tank, each section of which is twice the capacity value reacl on the graph. (B) is
circuit using tappecl coil for phase reversal.
pull, or whether it is shunt fed or series fed. circuit has the effect of increasing the series
The important thing in establishing the oper resistance, though in this case the power is
ating Q of the tank circuit is the ratio of the consumed as useful radiation by the antenna.
loaded resonant impedance across its termi Mathematically, the antenna increases the
nals to the reactance of the L and the C which value of R in the expression Q = wL/R where
make up the tank. L is the coil inductance in microhenrys and
Due to the unknowns involved in determin w is the term 2rrf, f being in megacycles.
ing circuit stray capacitances it is sometimes The coupling from the final tank circuit to
more convenient to determine the value of L the antenna or antenna transmission line can
required for the proper circuit Q (by the method be varied to obtain values of Q from perhaps
discussed earlier in this Section) and then to 3 at maximum coupling to a value of Q equal
vary the tuned circuit capacitance until reso- to the unloaded Q of the circuit at zero an-
nance is reached. This method is most fre tenna coupling. This value of unloaded Q can
quently used in obtaining proper circuit Q in be as high as 500 or 600, as mentioned in the
commercial transmitters. preceding paragraph. However, the value of
The values of Rp for using the charts are Q = 12 will not be obtained at values of nor-
easily calculated by dividing the d-e plate sup mal d-e plate current in the Class C amplifier
ply voltage by the total d-e plate current (ex stage unless the C-toL ratio in the tank cir-
pressed in amperes). Correct values of total cuit is correct for that frequency of operation.
tuning capacitance are shown in the chart for
the different amateur bands. The shunt stray Tuning Capacitor To determine the required
capacitance can be estimated closely enough Air Gap tuning capacitor air gap for
for all practical purposes. The coil inductance a particular amplifier cir-
should then be chosen which will produce cuit 1t ts first necessary to estimate the peak
resonance at the desired frequency with the rf voltage which will appear between the
total calculated tuning capacitance. plates of the tuning capacitor. Then, using
figure 26, it is possible to estimate the plate
Effect of Load- The Q of a circuit depends spacing which will be required.
ing on Q upon the resistance in series The instantaneous r-f voltage in the plate
with the capacitance and in- circuit of a Class C amplifier tube varies from
ductance. This series resistance is very low nearly zero to nearly twice the dc plate volt-
for a low-loss coil not loaded by an antenna age. If the dc voltage is being 100 per cent
circuit. The value of Q may be from 100 to 600 modulated by an audio voltage, the rf peaks
under these conditions. Coupling an antenna will reach nearly four times the d-e voltage.
HANDBOOK L and Pi Networks 265
FIGURE 26 L
-
RP =Q2 RA (APPROX)
USUAL BREAKDOWN RATINGS OF
COMMON PLATE SPACINGS RP C RA Q=~~=~; =~~ =~:
Air-gap in Peak voltage
inches breakdown RFC XL=Xc
.030 1,000
.050 2,000 PLATE CURRENT
.070
.100
3,000
4,000
+B -= RP= 225 RA
FOR OPERATING CIRCUIT
.125 4,500
.150 5,200 Q OF 15 Xc = ~;
.170 6,000
.200 7,500 XL=~
.250 9,000
.350 11,000
.500 15,000
.700 20,000 Figure 27
THE L NETWORK IMPEDANCE
Recommended air-gap for use when no d-e TRANSFORMER
voltage appears across plate tank condenser
(when plate circuit is shunt fed, or when the The L network is useful with a moderate
plate tank condenser is insulated from operating Q for high values of impedance
ground). transformation, ancl it may be used for appli~
cations other than in the plate circuit of a
D.C. PLATE PLATE tube with relatively low values of operating
VOLTAGE c.w. MOD. Q for moderate impedance transformations.
400 .030 .050 Exact and approximate design equations are
600 .050 .070 given .
750 .050 .084
1000 .070 .100
1250 .070 .144
1500 .078 .200
2000 .100 .250
2500 .175 .375
3000 .200 .500 between the plate tank circuit of an amplifier
3500 .250 .600
and a transmission line, or they may be used
to match directly from the plate circuit of an
Spacings should be multiplied by 1.5 for
same safety factor when d-e voltage appears
amplifier to the line without the requirement
across pi ate tank condenser. for a tank circuit-provided the network is de-
signed in such a manner that it has sufficient
operating Q for accomplishing harmonic atten-
uation.
These rules apply to a loaded amplifier or The L Matching The L network is of limited
buffer stage. If either is operated without an Network utility in impedance match-
r-f load, the peak voltages will be greater and ing since its ratio of imped-
can exceed the d-e plate supply voltage. For ance transformation is fixed at a value equal
this reason no amplifier should be operated 2
to (Q +1). The operating Q may be relatively
without load when anywhere near normal d-e
low (perhaps 3 to 6) in a matching network be-
plate voltage is applied.
tween the plate tank circuit of an amplifier
If a plate blocking condenser is used, it and a transmission line; hence impedance
must be rated co withstand the d-e plate volt-
transformation ratios of 10 to 1 and even lower
age plus any audio voltage. This capacitor
may be attained. But when the network also
should be rated at a d-e working voltage of at
acts as the plate tank circuit of the amplifier
least twice the d-e plate supply in a plate mod-
stage, as in figure 27, the operating Q should
ulated amplifier, and at least equal to the d-e
be at least 12 and preferably 15. An operating
supply in any other type of r-f amplifier.
Q of 15 represents an impedance transforma-
tion of 225; this value normally will be too
high even for transforming from the 2000 to
L and Pi Matching 10,000 ohm plate impedance of a Class C am-
13-10 plifier stage down to a 50-ohm transmission
Networks line.
However, the L network is interesting since
The L and pi networks often can be put to it forms the basis of design for the pi network.
advantageous ~se in accomplishing an imped- Inspection of figure 27 will show that the L
ance match between two differing impedances. network in reality must be considered as a
Common applications are the matching between parallel-resonant tank circuit in which RA
a transmission line and an antenna, or between represents the coupled-in load resistance;
the plate circuit of a single-ended amplifier only in this case the load resistance is di
stage and an antenna transmission line. Such reedy coupled into the tank circuit rather than
networks may be used to accomplish a match being inductively coupled as in the conven-
266 Generation of R-F Energy THE R AD I 0
Ro.c. = ~ ~b X 2 =-RA
C
I RP
RA(Q2+1 )- RP
work, L, 0 , will be greater than L, for normal
values of impedance transformation. For high
transformation ratios r_ will be only slightly
greater than L 1 ; for a transformation ratio of
1.0, L, 0 , will be twice as great ao; L,. The
amount of inductance which must be added to
L 1 to restore resonance and maintain circuit
Q is obtained through use of the expression
for X., 2 in figure 28.
The peak voltage rating of the main tuning
Figure 28
capacitor C 1 should be the normal value for a
THE PI NETWORK Class C amplifier operating at the plate volt-
The pi network is valuable for use as an im age to be employed. The inductor Ltot may be
pee/once transformer over a w I cl e ratio of a plug-in coil which is changed for each band
transformation values. The operating Q shoulcl
be at least 12 ancl preferably 15 to 20 when of operation, or some sort of variable inductor
the circuit is to be usee/ in the plate circuit may be used. A continuously variable slider
of a Class C amp/ ifier. Design equations type of variable inductor, such as used in cer-
are given above. The inductor Ltot repre- tain items of surplus military equipment, may
sents a single incluctance, usually variable,
be used to good advantage if available, or a
with a value equal to the sum of Lt ancl L2.
tapped inductor such as used in the ART-13
may be employed. However, to maintain good
circuit Q on the higher frequencies when a
variable or tapped coil is used on the lower
frequencies, the tapped or variable coil should
tiona! arrangement where the load circuit is
be removed from the circuit and replaced by
coupled to the tank circuit by means of a link.
a smaller coil which has been especially de-
When RA is shorted, L and C comprise a con
signed for the higher frequency ranges.
ventional parallel-resonant tank circuit, since
for proper operation L and C must be resonant The peak voltage rating of the output or
in order for the network to present a resistive loading capacitor, C 2 , is determined by the
load to the Class C amplifier. power level and the impedance to be fed. If a
50-ohm coaxial line is to be fed from the pi
network, receiving-type capacitors will be
satisfactory even up to the power level of a
The Pi Network The pi impedance matching plate-modulated kilowatt amplifier. In any
network, illustrated in figure event, the peak voltage which will be im-
28, is much more general in its application pressed across the output capacitor is ex
than the L network since it offers greater har- pressed by: Epk 2 = 2 Ra W0 , where Epk is the
monic attenuation, and since it can be used peak voltage across the capacitor, R 0 is the
to match a relatively wide range of impedances value of resistive load which the network is
while still maintaining any desired operating feeding, and W0 is the maximum value of the
Q. The values of C 1 and L 1 in the pi network average power output of the stage. The har
of figure 28 can be thought of as having the monic attenuation of the pi network is quite
same values of the L network in figure 27 for good, although an external low-pass filter will
the same operating Q, but what is more impor- be required to obtain harmonic attenuation
tant from the comparison standpoint these val- value upward of 100 db such as normally re-
ues will be the same as in a conventional tank quired. The attenuation to second harmonic
circuit. energy will be approximately 40 db for an oper
The value of the capacitance may be deter- ating Q of 15 for the pi network; the value
mined by calculation, with the operating Q and increases to about 45 db for a 1:1 transforma
the load impedance which should be reflected tion and falls to about 38 db for an impedance
to the plate of the Class C amplifier as the step-down of 80:1, assuming that the oper-
two knowns-or the actual values of the ca- ating Q is maintained at 15.
HANDBOOK Grid Bias 267
<j>+B
~RFC1
Ce L
Q' IU
:t:
:;~
l
RFC2 ~ ?~C2 ~xoAx
OUTPUT
l
.,.-B
WHERE EB IS PLATE VOL TAG
PLATE LOAD (OHMS) z~~B AND I 8 IS PLATE CURRENT
!NA,NPI!IiES.
Estimated Plate
load (ohms) 1,000 1,500 2,000 2,500 3,000 3,500 4,000 4,500 s,ooo 6,ooo NOTES
C1 in p.!.J.f, 3.5 Me 520 360 280 210 laO 155 135 120 110 90 The actual capacitance setting
7 260 laO 140 lOS 90 76 6a 60 S6 45 for cl equals the value in this
14 130 90 70 52 4S 3a 34 30 2a 23 table minus the published tube
21 as 60 47 35 31 25 23 20 19 lS output capacitance. Air gap
2a 65 45 35 26 23 19 17 lS 14 11 approx. 10 mils/100 v En.
L in p.h, 3.5 Me 4.5 6.S a.s 10.5 12.5 14 lS.S la 20 25 Inductance values are lor a
7 2.2 3.2 4.2 5.2 6.2 7 7.a 9 10 12.5 SO-ohm load. For a 70ohm
14 1.1 1.6 2.1 2.6 3.1 3.5 3.9 4.5 s 6.2 load, values are approx. 3%
21 0.73 l.Oa 1.3a 1.7 2.05 2.3 2.6 3 3.3 -4.1 higher.
2a o.ss o.a l.OS 1.2a l.SS 1.7 1.9S 2.25 2.5 3.1
C2 in f..L/.Lf, 3.5 Me 2,400 2,100 1,aoo l,SSO 1,400 1,250 1,100 1,000 900 700 For 50-ohm transmission line.
7 1.200 1,060 900 760 700 630 S60 soo 460 350 Air gap for C2 is approx. 1
14 600 530 -450 3ao 350 320 2aO 250 230 175 mil/100 v E~..
21 400 350 300 250 230 210 las 165 lSS 120
2a 300 265 225 190 175 160 140 125 115 90
C2 in ~J.)J..f, 3.5 Me l,aOO 1,500 1,300 1,100 1,000 900 aoo 720 640 soo For 70-ohm transmission line.
7 900 7SO 6SO 560 soo 450 400 360 320 250
14 450 370 320 2aO 250 220 200 laO 160 125
21 300 250 215 190 170 145 130 120 110 as
2a 225 las 160 140 125 110 100 90 ao 6S
Values given are approximations. All components shown in Table I are for a Q of 12. For other values of Q, use
Qa Ca Qa lt,
:-:-:: - and - = - When the estimated plate load is higher than 5,000 ohms, it is recommended that the
Q,, C,, Qh .La
components be selected for a circuit Q between 20 and 30.
Component Chart To simplify design pro- with a sinusoidal excitation voltage, the oper-
for Pi-Networks cedure, a pi-network chart, ating grid bias must be at least sufficient to
compiled by M. Seybold, cut off the plate current. In very high efficien-
W2RYI (reproduced by courtesy of R.C.A. Tube cy Class C amplifiers the operating bias may
Division, Harrison, N.J.) is shown in table 1. be many times the cutoff value. Cutoff bias,
This chart summarizes the calculations of fig- it will be recalled, is that value of grid volt-
ure 28 for various values of plate load. age which will reduce the plate current to
zero at the plate voltage employed. The method
for cal"culating it has been indicated previous-
ly. This theoretical value of cutoff will not
reduce the plate current completely to zero,
13-11 Grid Bias due to the variable-11 tendency or "knee"
which is characteristic of all tubes as the
Radio-frequency amplifiers require some cutoff point is approached.
form of grid bias for proper operation. Prac-
tically all r-f amplifiers operate in such a man- Class C Bias Amplitude modulated Class C
ner that plate current flows in the form of amplifiers should be operated
short pulses which have a duration of only a with the grid bias adjusted to a value greater
fraction of an r-f cycle. To accomplish this than twice cutoff at the operating plate volt-
268 Generation of R-F Energy THE R AD I 0
'''""'"'"~~ R1 I
41 -BIAS SUPPLY
Figure 29
Figure 30
GRID-LEAK BIAS
The grid leak on an amplifier or multiplier
COMBINATION GRIDL EAK AND
stage may a/ so be used as the shunt feed FIXED BIAS
impedance to the grid of the tube when a Grid-leak bios often is used in conjunction
high value of grid leak (greater than perhaps with a fixed minimum value of power supply
20,000 ohms) is used. When a lower value of bias. This arrangement permits the operating
grid leak is to be employed, an r-f choke bias to be established by the excitation ener.
should be used between the grid of the tube gy, but in the absence of excitation the elec
and the grid leak to reduce rf losses in the trode currents to the tube will be held to safe
grid leak resistance. values by the fixed-minimum power supply
bias. If a relatively low value of grid leak
is to be used, on rf choke should be con-
nected between the grid of the tube and the
grid leak as discussed in figure 29.
age. This procedure will insure that the tube
is operating at a bias greater than cutoff when
the plate voltage is doubled on positive modu
lation peaks. C-w telegraph and FM trans-
mitters can be operated with bias as low as
excitation. Grid-leak bias cannot be used for
cutoff, if only limited excitation is available
grid-modulated or linear amplifiers in which
and moderate plate efficiency is satisfactory.
the . aver~ge dc grid current is constantly
In a c-w transmitter, the bias supply or re varymg with modulation.
sistor should be adjusted to the point which
will allow normal grid current to flow for the
particular amount of grid driving r-f power Safety Bios Grid-leak bias alone provides no
available. This form of adjustment will allow protection against ex c e s s i v e
more output from the under-excited rf ampli plate current in case of failure of the source
fier than when higher bias is used with corre- of rf grid excitation. A C-battery or C-bias
sponding lower values of grid current. In any supply can be connected in series with the
event, the operating bias should be set at as grid leak, as shown in figure 30. This fixed
low a value as will give satisfactory opera protective bias will protect the tube in the
tion, since harmonic generation in a stage in event of failure of grid excitation. "Zero-bias"
creases rapidly as the bias is increased. tubes do not require this bias source in addi
tion to the grid leak, since their plate current
GridLeak Bias A resistor can be connected will drop to a safe value when the excitation
in the grid circuit of a Class is removed.
C amplifier to provide grid-leak bias. This re-
sistor, R, in figure 29, is part of the dc path Cathode Bios A resistor can be connected in
in the grid circuit. series with the cathode or cen
The r-f excitation applied to the grid cir tertapped filament lead of an amplifier to se-
cuit of the tube causes a pulsating direct cur cure automatic bias. The plate current flows
rent to flow through the bias supply lead, due through this resistor, then back to the cathode
to the rectifying action of the grid, and any or filament, and the voltage drop across the
current flowing through R, produces a voltage resistor can be applied to the grid circuit by
drop across that resistor. The grid of the tube connecting the grid bias lead to the grounded
is positive for a short duration of each r-f or power supply end of the resistor R as shown
cycle! and draws electrons from the filament in figure 31. '
or cathode of the tube during that time. These The grounded (Bminus) end of the cathode
electrons complete the circuit through the dc resistor is negative relative to the cathode
grid return. The voltage drop across the re by an amount equal to the voltage drop across
sistance in the grid return provides a nega the resistor. The value of resistance must be
tive bias for the grid. so chosen that the sum of the desired grid
Grid-leak bias automatically adjusts itself and plate current flowing through the resistor
over fairly wide variations of rf excitation. will bias the tube for proper operation.
The value of gridleak resistance should be . Thi~ type of bias is used more extensively
such that normal values of grid current will In. a.udiofrequency than in radio-frequency am-
flow at the maximum available amount of r-f phfters. The voltage drop across the resistor
HANDBOOK Protective Circuits 26 9
FROM
DRIVERI\iJ
RFC
C
---
R
FROM-ju--
ORIVER
RFC
-
.JII _
+
BATTERY-
Figure 32
Figure 31 R-F STAGE WITH BATTERY BIAS
R-F STAGE WITH CATHODE BIAS Battery bias is seldom usecl, clue to cleteriora
Cathode bias sometimes is advantageous for tion of the cells by the reverse gricl current.
use in an rf stage that operates with a rela- However, it may be usee/ in certain special
tively small amount of r-f excitation. applications, or the fixed bias voltage may
be supplied by a bias power supply.
must be subtracted from the total plate supply siderably when it is flowing through the bias-
voltage when calculating the power input to supply bleeder resistance.
the amplifier, and this loss of plate voltage
in an rf amplifier may be excessive. A Class
A audio amplifier is biased only to approxi-
mately one-half cutoff, whereas an r-f amplifier
may be biased to twice cutoff, or more, and
thus the plate supply voltage loss may be a 13-12 Protective Circuits for
large percentage of the total available voltage Tetrode Transmitting Tubes
when using low or medium f-t tubes.
Oftentimes just enough cathode bias is em-
ployed in an r-f amplifier to act as safety bias The tetrode transmitting tube requires three
to protect the rubes in case of excitation fail- operating voltages: grid bias, screen voltage,
ure, with the rest of the bias coming from a and plate voltage. The current requirements of
grid leak. these three operating voltages are somewhat
interdependent, and a change in potential of
Separate Bias An external sup p 1 y often is one voltage will affect the current drain of the
Supply used for grid bias, as shown in tetrode in respect to the other two voltages.
figure 32. Battery bias gives In particular, if the grid excitation voltage is
very good voltage regulation and is satisfac- interrupted as by keying action, or if the plate
tory for grid-modulated or linear amplifiers, supply is momentarily interrupted, the resulting
whtch operate at low grid current. In the case voltage or current surges in the screen circuit
of. Class C amplifiers which operate with high are apt to permanently damage the tube.
gnd current, battery bias is not satisfactory.
This direct current has a charging effect on The Series Screen A simple method of obtain-
the dry batteries; after a few months of service Supply ing screen voltage is by
the cells will become unstable, bloated, and means of a dropping resis-
noisy. torfrom the high voltage plate supply, as shown
A separate a-c operated power supply is in figure 33. Since the current drawn by the
commonly used for grid bias. The bleeder re- screen is a function of the exciting voltage
sistance across the output of the filter can be applied to the tetrode, the screen voltage will
made sufficiently low in value that the grid rise to equal the plate voltage under condi-
current of the amplifier will not appreciably tions of no exciting voltage. If the control grid
change the amount of negative grid-bias volt- is overdriven, on the other hand, the screen
age. Alternately, a voltage regulated grid-bias current may become excessive. In either case,
supply can be used. This type of bias supply damage to the screen and its associated com-
is used in Class B audio and Class B r-f lin- ponents may result. In addition, fluctuations
ear amplifier service where the voltage regu- in the plate loading of the tetrode stage will
lation in the C-bias supply is important. For cause changes in the screen current of the
a Class C amplifier, regulation is not so im- tube. This will result in screen voltage fluc-
portant, and an economical design of compo- tuations due to the inherently poor voltage
nents in the power supply, therefore, can be regulation of the screen series dropping resis-
utilized. In this case, the bias voltage must tor. These effects become dangerous to tube
be adjusted with normal grid current flowing, life if the plate voltage is greater than the
as the grid current will raise the bias con- screen voltage by a factor of 2 or so.
270 Generation of R-F Energy THE R AD I 0
E
+B
NEGATIVE{
OPERATING
Figure 33 8/ASCUTS
OFF CLAMP
TUBE ':'"
DROPPING RESISTOR SCREEN SUPPLY
Figure 34
The Clamp Tube A clamp tube may be added CLAMP-TUBE SCREEN SUPPLY
to the series screen supply,
as shown in figure 34. The clamp tube is nor
mally cut off by virtue of the d-e grid bias drop
developed across the grid resistor of the tet pling. The latter is a special form of induc-
rode tube. When excitation is removed from tive coupling. The choice of a coupling method
the tetrode, no bias appears across the grid depends upon the purpose for which it is to
resistor, and the clamp tube conducts heavily, be used.
dropping the screen voltage to a safe value.
When excitation is applied to the tetrode the Capacitive Capacitive coupling between an
clamp tube is inoperative, and fluctuations of Caupl ing amplifier or doubler circuit and a
the plate loading of the tetrode tube could preceding driver stage is shown
allow the screen voltage to rise to a damaging in figure 36. The coupling capacitor, C, iso
value. Because of this factor, the clamp tube lates the d-e plate supply from the next grid
does not offer complete protection to the tet and provides a low impedance path for the rf
rode. energy between the tube being driven and the
driver tube. This method of coupling is simple
The Separate A low voltage screen supply and economical for low powe& amplifier or ex-
Screen Supply may be used instead of the citer stages, but has certain disadvantages,
series screen dropping resis particularly for high frequency stages. The
tor. This will protect the screen circuit from grid leads in an amplifier should be as short
excessive voltages when the other tetrode as possible, but this is difficult to attain in
operating parameters shift. However, the screen the physical arrangement of a high power am
can be easily damaged if plate or bias volt- plifier with respect to a capacitively-coupled
age is removed from the tetrode, as the screen driver stage.
current will reach high values and the screen
dissipation will be exceeded. If the screen Disadvantages of One significant disadvan-
supply is capable of providing slighdy more Capacitive tage of capacitive coupling
screen voltage than the tetrode requires for Coupling is the difficulty of adjusting
proper operation, a series wattage-limiting re- the load on the driver stage.
sistor may be added to the circuit as shown Impedance adjustment can be accomplished
in figure 35. With this resistor in the circuit by tapping the coupling lead a part of the way
it is possible to apply excitation to the tet down on the plate coil of the tuned stage of
rode tube with screen voltage present (but in the driver circuit; but often when this is done
the absence of plate voltage) and still not dam-
age the screen of the tube. The value of the
resistor should be chosen so that the product
of the voltage applied to the screen of the
tetrode times the screen current never exceeds
the maximum rated screen dissipation of the
tube.
SERIES RESISTOR -
LOW VOLTAGE +B
SCREEN SUPPLY
Figure 36
Figure 37
CAPACITIVE INTERSTAGE COUPLING
BALANCED CAPACITIVE COUPLING
Balancecl capacitive coupling sometimes is
useful when it is clesirable to use a rei atively
large inc/uctonce in the interstage tank cir-
a parasitic oscillation will take place in the cuit, or wltere the exciting stage is neutraf...
stage being driven. izecl as shown above.
One main disadvantage of capacitive coupl
ing lies in the fact that the grid-to-filament
capacitance of the driven tube is placed di-
rectly across the driver tuned circuit. This Inductive coupling is used extensively for
condition sometimes makes the r-f amplifier coupling rf amplifiers in radio receivers. How-
difficult to neutralize, and the increased mini- ever, the mechanical prohlems involved in ad-
mum circuit capacitance makes it difficult to justing the degree of coupling limit the use
use a reasonable size coil in the v-h-f range. fulness of direct inductive coupling in trans-
Difficulties from this source can be partially mitters. Either the primary or the secondary
eliminated by using a center-tapped or split- or both coils may be tuned.
stator tank circuit in the plate of the driver
stage, and coupling capacitively to the oppo
site end from the plate. This method places Unity Coupling If the grid tuning capacitor of
the plate-to-filament capacitance of the driver figure 38 is removed and the
across one-half of the rank and the grid-to coupling increased to the maximum practicable
filament capacitance of the following stage value by interwinding the turns of the two coils,
across the other half. This type of coupling is the circuit insofar as r.f. is concerned acts
shown in figure 37. like that of figure 36, in which one tank serves
Capacitive coupling can be used to advan both as plate tank for the driver and grid tank
tage in reducing the total number of tuned cir- for the driven stage. The inter-wound grid
cuits in a transmitter so as to conserve space winding serves simply to isolate the d-e plate
and cost. It also can be used to advantage be voltage of the driver from the grid of the driven
tween stages for driving beam tetrode or pen- stage, and to provide a return for d-e grid cur
rode amplifier or douhler stages. rent. This type of coupling, illustrated in fig-
ure 39, is commonly known as unity coupling.
Inductive Inductive coupling (figure 38) re Because of the high mutual inductance, both
Coupling suits when two coils are electro primary and secondary are resonated by the
magnetically coupled to one an one tuning capacitor.
other. The degree of coupling is controlled by
varying the mutual inductance of the two coils,
which is accomplished by changing the spac INTE'RWOUND
ing or the relationship between the axes of
the coils.
Figure 39
"UNITY" INDUCTIVE COUPLING
Due to the high value of coupling between
the two coils, one tuning capacitor tunes
both circuits, This a"angement olten is use-
Figure 38 ful In coupling from a s/ngle-enclecl to a push-
INDUCTIVE INTERSTAGE COUPLING pull stage.
272 Generation of R-F Energy THE R AD I 0
F~~3U1e e 3
liif
LINK COUPLING
AT "COLO" ENOS.
UPPER ENDS "HOT"
LINK COUPLING
AT "COLD" CENTER.
ENDS "HOT"
Figure 40
INTERSTAGE COUPLING BY MEANS Figure 41
OF A "LINK"
PUSH-PULL LINK COUPLING
Link interstage coupling is very commonly
used since the two stages may be separated
by a consiclerable distance, since the amount
of a coup/ ing between the two stages may be
easily varied, and since the capacitances of
the two stages may be isolated to permit use
of larger incluctances in the v-h-f range. The link-coupling line and links can be
made of no. 18 push-back wire for coupling
between low-power stages. For coupling be-
twe.en higher powered stages the 150-ohm
Link Coup I ing A special form of inductive Twtn-Lead transmission line is quite effective
coupling which is widely em- and has very low loss. Coaxial transmission is
ployed in radio transmitter circuits is known most satisfactory between high powered am-
as link coupling. A low impedance r-f trans- plifier stages, and should always be used
where harmonic attenuation is important.
mission line couples the two tuned circuits
together. Each end of the line is terminated
in one or more turns of wire, or links, wound
around the coils which are being coupled to-
gether. These links should be coupled to each
tuned circuit at the point of zero r-f potential, 13-14 Radio-Frequency
or nodal point. A ground connection to one Chokes
side of the link usually is used to reduce har-
monic coupling, or where capacitive coupling
Radio-frequency chokes are connected in
between two circuits must be minimized. Co-
circuits for the purpose of stopping the pas-
axial line is commonly used to transfer energy
sage of r-f energy while still permitting a di-
between the two coupling links, although Twin-
rect current or audio-frequency current to pass.
Lead may be used where harmonic attenuation
They consist of inductances wound with a
is not so important.
large number of turns, either in the form of a
Typical link coupled circuits are shown in
figures 40 and 41. Some of the advantages of solenoid,. a s.eri~s of solenoids, a single uni-
versal pte wmdtng, or a series of pie wind-
link coupling are the following:
ings. These inductors are designed to have as
much inductance and as little distributed or
(1) It eliminates coupling taps on tuned cir-
cuits. shunt capacitance as possible. The unavoid-
(2) It permits the use of series power supply able small amount of distributed capacitance
connections in both tuned grid and tuned resonates the inductance, and this frequency
plate circuits, and thereby eliminates the normally should be much lower than the fre-
need of shunt-feed r-f chokes. quency at which the transmitter or receiver
(3) It allows considerable separation between circuit is operating. R-f chokes for operation
transmitter stages without appreciable on several bands must be designed carefully
r-f losses or stray chassis currents. so that the impedance of the choke will be ex-
(4) It reduces capacitive coupling and there- tremely high (several hundred thousand ohms)
by makes neutralization more easily at- in each of the bands.
tainable in r-f amplifiers. The direct current which flows through the
(5) It provides semi-automatic impedance r-f choke largely determines the size of wire
matching between plate and grid tuned to be used in the winding. The inductance of
circuits, with the result that greater grid r-f chokes for the v-h-f range is much less
drive can be obtained in comparison to than for chokes designed for broadcast and
capacitive coupling. ordinary short-wave operation. A very high
(6) It effectively reduces the coupling of har- inductance r-f choke has more distributed ca-
monic energy. pacitance than a smaller one, with the result
HANDBOOK Shunt and Series Feed 2 73
-1~
RFC! -}
+SG +HV
-BIAS -BIAS
PARALLEL PLATE FEED SERIES PLATE FEED
PARALLEL BIAS FEED SERIES BIAS FEED
Figure 42
ILLUSTRATING PARALLEL AND Figure 43
SERIES PLATE FEED
ILLUSTRATING SERIES AND
Parallel plate feecl is desirable fram a safety PARALLEL BIAS FEED
standpoint since the tank circuit is at ground
potential with respect to cl.c. However, a
high-impedance r-f choke is required, ancl
the r-f choke must be able to withstand the
peak r-f voltage output of the tube. Series
plate feed eliminates the requirement for a Parallel and
high-performance r-f choke, but requires the 13-15
use of a relatively large value of by-pass Push-Pull Tube Circuits
capacitance at the bottom encl of the tank
circuit, as contrasted to the moderate value
of coupling capacitance which may be usee/ The comparative r-f power output from paral-
at the top of the tank circuit for parallel lel or push-pull operated amplifiers is the same
plate feecl. if proper impedance matching is accomplished,
if sufficient grid excitation is available in
both cases, and if the frequency of measure-
ment is considerably lower than the frequency
limit of the tubes.
that it will actually offer less impedance at
very high frequencies. Parallel Operating tubes in par a 11 e I has
Another consideration, just as important as Operation some advantages in transmitters
the amount of d.c. the winding will carry, is designed for operation below 10
the r-f voltage which may be placed across Me., particularly when tetrode or pen rode tubes
the choke without its breaking down. This is are to be used. Only one neutralizing capacitor
a function of insulation, turn spacing, frequen- is required for parallel operation of triode
cy, number and spacing of pies and other fac- tubes, as against two for push-pull. Above
tors. about 10 Me., depending upon the tube type,
Some chokes which are designed to have a parallel tube operation is not ordinarii y recom-
high impedance over a very wide range of fre- mended with triode tubes. However, parallel
quency are, in effect, really two chokes: a operation of grounded-grid stages and stages
u-h-f choke in series with a high-frequency using low-C beam tetrodes often will give ex-
choke. A choke of this type is polarized; that cellent results well into the v-h-f range.
is, it is important that the correct end of the
combination choke be connected to the "hot" Push-Pull The push-pull connection provides
side of the circuit. Operation a well-balanced circuit insofar as
miscellaneous capacitances are
Shunt and Direct-current grid and p 1 ate concerned; in addition, the circuit can be neu-
Series Feed connections are made either by tralized more completely, especially in high-
series or parallel feed systems. frequency amplifiers. The L/C ratio in a push-
Simplified forms of each are shown in figures pull amplifier can be made higher than in a
42 and 43. plate-neutralized parallel-tube operated am-
Series feed can be defined as that in which plifier. Push-pull amplifiers, when perfectly
the d-e connection is made to the grid or plate balanced, have less second-harmonic output
circuits at a point of very low r-f potential. than parallel or single-tube amplifiers, but in
Shunt feed always is made to a point of high practice undesired capacitive coupling and
r-f voltage and always requires a high imped- circuit unbalance more or less offset the theo-
ance r-f choke or a relatively high resistance retical harmonic-reducing advantages of push-
to prevent waste of r-f power. pull rf circuits.
CHAPTER FOURTEEN
R-f feedback
B+
~u~q
1OEour
fHAS -:-
Figure 1
SIMILAR CATHODE FOLLOWER CIRCUITS HAVING DIFFERENT R-F GROUND POINTS.
274
R-F Feedback Circuits 275
B+ B+
BIAS BIAS B+
Figure 2 Figure 4
SINGLE STAGE AMPLIFIER WITH R-F AMPLIFIER WITH FEEDBACK
R-F FEEDBACK CIRCUIT AND IMPEDANCE MATCHING
OUTPUT NETWORK.
Tuning and loading ore accomplished by C:
B+ and C,,. C1 and L1 are tuned in unison to
establish the correct degree of feedback.
f-- R-F OUT
Figure 5
BASIC CIRCUIT OF TWO-STAGE AMPLIFIER WITH R-F FEEDBACK
Feedback voltage is obtained from o voltage divider across the output circuit and
applied directly to the cathode of the first tube. The input tonk circuit is thus
outside the feedback loop.
276 R-F Feedback THE RADIO
of both tubes as effectively as using individual cuit 1s inductive there is energy transferred
feedback loops around each stage, yet will from the plate to the grid circuit (positive
allow a higher level of overall gain. With feedback) which will introduce negative resist-
only two tuned circuits in the feedback loop, ance in the grid circuit. When this shunt
it is possible to use 12 to 15 db of feedback negative resistance across the grid circuit is
and still leave a wide margin for stability. It lower than the equivalent positive resistance
is possible to reduce the distortion by nearly of the grid loading, circuit losses, and driving
as many db as are used in feedback. This cir- source impedance, the amplifier will oscillate.
cuit has two advantages that are lacking in the When the plate circuit is in resonance
single stage feedback amplifier. First, the fila- (phase angle equal to zero) the input resist-
ment of the output stage can now be operated ance due to the grid-plate capacitance becomes
at r-f ground potential. Second, any conven- infinite. As the plate circuit is tuned to the
tional pi output network may be used. capacitive side of resonance, the input resist-
R- f feedback will correct several types of ance becomes positive and power is actually
distortion. It will help correct distortion caused transferred from the grid to the plate circuit.
by poor power supply regulation, too low grid This is the reason that the grid current in an
bias, and limiting on peaks when the plate unneutralized tetrode r-f amplifier varies from
voltage swing becomes too high. a low value with the plate circuit tuned on the
low frequency side of resonance to a high value
Neutralization The purpose of neutraliza- on the high frequency side of resonance The
and R-F Feedback tion of an r-f amplifier grid current is proportional to the r-f voltage
stage is to balance out ef- on the grid which is varying under these con-
fects of the grid-plate capacitance coupling in ditions. In a tetrode class AB1 amplifier, the
the amplifier. In a conventional amplifier us- effect of grid-plate feedback can be observed
ing a tetrode tube, the effective input capaciry by placing a r-f voltmeter across the grid cir-
is given by: cuit and observing the voltage change as the
Input Capacitance= Cn + C.p ( 1 +A cos 8) plate circuit is tuned through resonance.
If the amplifier is over-neutralized, the ef-
where: Cn =tube input capacitance fects reverse so that with the plate circuit
cgp =grid-plate capacitance tuned to the low frequency side of resonance
A = voltage amplification from grid the grid voltage is high, and on the high fre-
to plate quency side of resonance, it is low.
8 = phase angle of load
Amplifier A useful "rule of
In a typical unneutralized tetrode amplifier Neutralization Check thumb" method of
having a stage gain of 33, the input capaci- checking neutraliza-
tance of the tube with the plate circuit in tion of an amplifier stage (assuming that it
resonance is increased by 8 l'l'fd. due to the is nearly correct to start with) is to tune both
unneutralized grid-plate capacitance. This is grid and plate circuits to resonance. Then, ob-
unimportant in amplifiers where the gain (A) serving the r-f grid current, tune the plate cir-
remains constant but if the tube gain varies, cuit to the high frequency side of resonance.
serious detuning and r-f phase shift may result. If the grid current rises, more neutralization
A grid or screen modulated r-f amplifier is an capacitance is required. Conversely, if the grid
example of the case where the stage gain var- current decreases, less capacitance is needed.
ies from a maximum down to zero. The gain This indication is very sensitive in a neutral-
of a tetrode r-f amplifier operating below plate ized triode amplifier, and correct neutraliza-
current saturation varies with loading so that tion exists when the grid current peaks at the
if it drives a following stage into grid current point of plate current dip. In tetrode power
the loading increases and the gain falls off. amplifiers this indication is less pronounced.
The input of the grid circuit is also affected Sometimes in a supposedly neutralized tetrode
by the grid-plate capacitance, as shown in this amplifier, there is practically no change in
equation: grid voltage as the plate circuit is tuned
1 through resonance, and in some amplifiers it
Input Resistance = is unchanged on one side of resonance and
21rf X c.p ( Asin8)
drops slightly on the other side. Another ob-
This resistance is in shunt with the grid servation sometimes made is a small dip in
current loading, grid tank circuit losses, and the center of a broad peak of grid current.
driving source impedance. When the plate cir- These various effects are probably caused by
HANDBOOK R-F Feedback Circuits 277
E()UT Er")IJT
R-F IN R-~ IN
Figure 6 Figure 7
SINGLE STAGE R-F AMPLIFIER NEUTRALIZED AMPLIFIER AND
WITH FEEDBACK RATIO OF INHERENT FEEDBACK CIRCUIT.
C,/C, to C"v!C" 1 DETERMINES Neutralization is achieved by varying
STAGE NEUTRALIZATION the capacity of Cn.
coupling from the plate to the grid circuit tential when r-f is impressed upon the cathode.
through other paths which are not balanced The output voltage available with capacity
out by the particular neutralizing circuit used. coupling, of course, is less than the plate-
cathode r-f voltage developed by the amount
Feedback and Figure 6 shows an r-f am- of feedback voltage across C..
Neutralization plifier with negative feed-
of a One-Stage back. The voltage developed
R-F Amplifier across c, due to the voltage 14-2 Feedback and
divider action of c, and C. Neutralization of a
is introduced in series with the voltage devel-
oped across the grid tank circuit and is in
Two-Stage R-F Amplifier
phase-opposition to it. The feedback can be Feedback around two r-f stages has the ad-
made any value from zero to 100% by proper- vantage that more of t~he tube gain can be
ly choosing the values of C, and C.. realized and nearly as much distortion reduc-
For reasons stated previously, it is necessary tion can be obtained using 12 db around two
to neutralize this amplifier, and the relation- stages as is realized using 12 db around each
ship for neutralization is: of two stages separately. Figure 9 shows a
basic circuit of a two stage feedback ampli-
fier. Inductive output coupling is used, al-
c. c., though a pi-network configuration will also
It is often necessary to add capacitance from work well. The small feedback voltage required
plate to grid to satisfy this relationship is obtained from the voltage divider C. - C,
Figure 7 is identical to figure 6 except that and is applied to the cathode of the driver
it is redrawn to show the feedback inherent in tube. C is only a few 1-'1-'fd., so this feedback
this neutralization circuit more clearly. Cn and voltage divider may be left fixed for a wide
C replace c, and C., and the main plate tank frequency range. If the combined tube gain is
tuning capacitance is Cs. The circuit of figure 160, and 12 db of feedback is desired, the ratio
7 presents a problem in coupling to the grid of C, to C is about 40 to 1. This ratio in
circuit. Inductive coupling is ideal, but the practice may be 400 1-'1-'fd. to 2.5 1-'1-'fd., for
extra tank circuits complicate the tuning of a example.
transmitter which uses several cascaded am- A complication is introduced into this sim-
plifiers with feedback around each one. The plified circuit by the cathode-grid capacitance
grid could be coupled to a high source imped-
ance such as a tetrode plate, but the driver
then cannot use feedback because this would
cause the source impedance to be low. A pos-
sible solution is to move the circuit ground
point from the cathode to the bottom end of
the grid tank circuit. The feedback voltage then
appears between the cathode and ground
(figure 8). The input can be capacitively
coupled, and the plate of the amplifier can
be capacitively coupled to the next stage. Also, Figure 8
UNBALANCED INPUT AND OUTPUT
cathode type transmitting tubes are available CIRCUITS FOR SINGLE-STAGE
that allow the heater to remain at ground po- R-F AMPLIFIER WITH FEEDBACK
278 R-F Feedback THE RADIO
V1 V2
Figure 9
TWO-STAGE AMPLIFIER WITH FEEDBACK.
Included is a capacitor (C,) for neutra/iring the cathode-grid capacity of the first tube. V, is neutralired
by capacitor c,, and Vz is neutra/ired by the correct ratio of c,;c,.
of the first tube which causes an undersired more feedback from the output stage to over-
coupling to the input grid circuit. It is neces- come.
sary to neutralize out this capacitance coupling,
as illustrated in figure 9. The relationship for Tests For Neutralizing the circuit of
Neutralization figure 9 balances out cou-
neutralization is:
pling between the input
c. c., tank circuit and the output tank circuit, but it
c. c. does not remove all coupling from the plate
circuit to the grid-cathode tube input. This
The input circuit may be made unbalanced latter coupling is degenerative, so applying a
by making C. five times the capacity of C.. signal to the plate circuit will cause a signal
This will tend to reduce the voltage across to appear between grid and cathode, even
the coil and to minimize the power dissipated though the stage is neutralized. A bench test
by the coil. For proper balance in this case, for neutralization is to apply a signal to the
C. must be five times the grid-filament capaci- plate of the tube and detect the presence of a
tance of the tube. signal in the grid coil by inductive coupling
Except for tubes having extremely small to it. No signal will be present when the stage
grid-plate capacitance, it is still necessary to is neutralized. Of course, a signal could be in-
properly neutralize both tubes. If the ratio of ductively coupled to the input and neutraliza-
C. to c, is chosen to be equal to the ratio of tion accomplished by adjusting one branch of
the grid-plate capacitance to the grid-filament the neutralizing circuit bridge ( C, for ex-
capacitance in the second tube (V,), this tube ample) for minimum signal on the plate cir-
will be neutralized. Tubes such as a 4X-150A cuit.
have very low grid-plate capacitance and prob-
ably will not need to be neutralized when used Neutralizing the cathode-grid capacitance of
in the first ( V,) stage. If neutralization is the first stage of figure 9 may be accomplished
necessary, capacitor C, is added for this pur- by applying a signal to the cathode of the tube
pose and the proper value is given by the and adjusting the bridge balance for minimum
following relationship: signal on a detector inductively coupled to the
input coil.
c.. c., c.
c.- c, c. Tuning a Two-Stage
Feedback Amplifier
Tuning the two-stage
feedback amplifier of
If neither tube requires neutralization, the figure 9 is accom-
bottom end of the interstage tank circuit may plished in an unconventional way because the
be returned to r-f ground. The screen and output circuit cannot be tuned for maximum
suppressor of the first tube should then be output signal. This is because the output cir-
grounded to keep the tank output capaci- cuit must be tuned so the feedback voltage
tance directly across this interstage circuit and applied to the cathode is in-phase with the
to avoid common coupling between the feed- input signal applied to the first grid. When
back on the cathode and the interstage circuit. the feedback voltage is not in-phase, the result-
A slight amount of degeneration occurs in the ant grid-cathode voltage increases as shown
first stage since the tube also acts as a grounded in figure 10. When the output circuit is
grid amplifier with the screen as the grounded properly tuned, the resultant grid-cathode volt-
grid. The JL of the screen is much lower than age on the first tube will be at a minimum, and
that of the control grid so that this effect may the voltage on the interstage tuned circuit will
be unnoticed and would only require slightly also be at a minimum.
HANDBOOK Neutra I ization 279
VOLTAGE-
INPUT <;AID
TO
GROUND VOLTAGE- CATHODE TO C. ROUND---
(FEEDBACK)
+ BIAS
Figure 12
INTERSTAGE CIRCUIT WITH
Figure 10 SEPARATE NEUTRALIZING
AND FEEDBACK CIRCUITS.
VECTOR RELATIONSHIP OF
FEEDBACK VOLTAGE
A= Output Circuit Properly Tuned It is convenient, however, to separate these cir-
B=Output Circuit Mis-Tuned
cuits so neutralization and feedback can be
adjusted independently. Also, it may be de-
The two-stage amplifier may be tuned by sirable to be able to switch the feedback out
placing a r-f voltmeter across the interstage of the circuit. For these reasons, the circuit
tank circuit ("hot" side to ground) and tuning shown in figure 12 is often used. Switch s,
the input and interstage circuits for maximum removes the feedback loop when it is closed.
meter reading, and tuning the output circuit A slight tendency for low frequency para-
for minimum meter reading. If the second tube sitic oscillations still exists with this circuit.
is driven into the grid current region, the grid L. should have as little inductance as possible
current meter may be used in place of the r-f without upsetting the feedback. If the value of
voltmeter. On high powered stages where oper- L. is too low, it cancels out part of the re-
ation is well into the Class AB region, the actance of feedback capacitor C. and causes
plate current dip of the output tube indicates the feedback to increase at low values of radio
correct output circuit tuning, as in the usual frequency. In some cases, a swamping resistor
amplifier. may be necessary across L. The value of this
resistor should be high compared to the re-
Parasitic Oscillations in Q"..Iite often low fre- actance of C. to avoid phase-shift of the r-f
the Feedback Amplifier q u en c y parasitics feedback.
may be found in
the interstage circuit of the two-stage feedback
amplifier. Oscillation occurs in the first stage 14-3 Neutralization
due to low frequency feedback in the cathode Procedure in
circuit. R-f chokes, coupling capacitors, and Feedback-Type Amplifiers
bypass capacitors provide the low frequency
tank circuits. When the feedback and second Experience with feedback amplifiers has
stage neutralizing circuits are combined, it is brought out several different methods of neu-
necessary to use the configuration of figure 11. tralizing. An important observation is that
This circuit has the advantage that only one when all three neutralizing adjustments are
capacitor ( Ca) is required from the plate of correctly made the peaks and dips of various
the output tube, thus keeping the added ca- tuning meters all coincide at the point of cir-
pacitance across the output tank at a minimum. cuit resonance. For example, the coincident in-
dications when the various tank circuits are
tuned through resonance with feedback oper-
ating are:
A-When the PA plate circuit is tuned
through resonance:
1-PA plate current dip
2-Power output peak
+ BIAS
3-PA r-f grid voltage dip
4-PA grid current dip
Figure 11
(Note: The PA grid current peaks
INTERSTAGE CIRCUIT COMBINING
NEUTRALIZATION AND when feedback circuit is disabled
FEEDBACK NETWORKS. and the tube is heavily driven)
280 R-F Feedback THE RADIO
C11
~R-FOUT
y
BIAS B+ BIAS +
Figure 13
TWO-STAGE AMPLIFIER WITH FEED BACK CIRCUIT.
Amplitude Modulation
If the output of a c-w transmitter is varied frequencies are mixed with a radio frequency
in amplitude at an audio frequency rate in- carrier so that the voice frequencies are con-
stead of interrupted in accordance with code verted to radio frequency sidebands. Though
characters, a tone will be heard on a receiver it may be difficult to visualize, tbe amplitude
tuned to the signal. If the audio signal con- of the radio frequency carrier does not vary
sists of a band of audio frequencies com- during conventional amplitude modulation.
prising voice or music intelligence, then the Even though the amplitude of radio fre-
voice or music which is superimposed on the quency voltage representing the composite
radio frequency carrier will be heard on the signal (resultant of the carrier and sidebands,
receiver. called the envelope) will vary from zero to
When voice, music, video, or other intelli- twice the unmodulated signal value during
gence is superimposed on a radio frequency full modulation, the amplitude of the carrier
carrier by means of a corresponding variation component does not vary. Also, so long as
in the amplitude of the radio frequency output the amplitude of the modulating voltage does
of a transmitter, amplitude modulation is the not vary, the amplitude of the sidebands will
result. Telegraph keying of a c-w transmitter remain constant. For this to be apparent, how-
is the simplest form of amplitude modulation, ever, it is necessary to measure the amplitude
while video modulation in a television trans- of each component with a highly selective
mitter represents a highly complex form. Sys- filter. Otherwise, the measured power or volt-
tems for modulating the amplitude of a carrier age will be a resultant of two or more of the
envelope in accordance with voice, music, or components, and the amplitude of the resultant
similar types of complicated audio waveforms will vary at the modulation rate.
are many and varied, and will be discussed If a carrier frequency of 5000 kc. is modu-
later on in this chapter. lated by a pure tone of 1000 cycles, or 1 kc.,
two sidebands are formed: one at 5001 kc.
(the sum frequency) and one at 4999 kc. (the
difference frequency). The frequency of each
15-1 Sidebands sideband is independent of the amplitude of
the modulating tone, or modulation percent-
age: the frequency of each sideband is deter-
Modulation is essentially a form of mtxtng mined only by the frequency of the modulat-
or combining already covered in a previous ing tone. This assumes, of course, that the
chapter. To transmit voice at radio frequencies transmitter is not modulated in excess of its
by means of amplitude modulation, the voice linear capability.
282
Modulation 283
Speech Waveform The manner in which the The use of the proper polarity of the incom
Dissymmetry human voice is produced ing speech wave in modulating a transmitter
by the vocal cords gives can afford an increase of approximately two
rise to a certain dissymmetry in the waveform to one in the amount of speech audio power
of voice sounds when they are picked up by which may be placed upon the carrier for an
a good-quality microphone. This is especially amplitude-modulated transmitter for the same
pronounced in the male voice, and more so amount of sideband splatter. More effective
on certain voiced sounds than on others. The methods for increasing t h e amount of audio
result of this dissymmetry in the waveform is power on the carrier of an AM phone trans-
that the voltage peaks on one side of the mitter are discussed later in this chapter.
average value of the wave will be consider-
ably greater, often two or three times as great, Single-Sideband Because the same intelli
as the voltage excursions on the other side Transmission gibility is contained in each
of the zero axis. The average value of volt- of the sidebands associated
age on both sides of the wave is, of course, with a modulated carrier, it is not necessary
the same. to transmit sidebands on both sides of the
As a result of this dissymmetry in the male carrier. Also, because the carrier is simply a
voice waveform, there is an optimum polarity single radio frequency wave of unvarying am
of the modulating voltage that must be ob- plitude, it is not necessary to transmit the
served if maximum sideband energy is to be carrier if some means is provided for inserting
obtained without negative peak clipping and a locally generated carrier at the receiver.
generation of "splatter" on adjacent channels. When the carrier is suppressed but both
A double-pole double-throw "phase revers upper and lower sidebands are transmitted, it
ing" switch in the input or output leads of any is necessary to insert a locally generated
transformer in the speech amplifier system will carrier at the receiver of exactly the same
permit poling the extended peaks in the direc frequency and phase as the carrier which was
tion of maximum modulation capability. The suppressed. For this reason, suppressed-
optimum polarity may be determined easily by carrier double-sideband systems have little
listening on a selective receiver tuned to a practical application.
frequency 30 to 50 kc. removed from the de- When the carrier is suppressed and only the
sired signal and adjusting the phase reversing upper or the lower sideband is transmitted, a
switch to the position which gives the least highly intelligible signal may be obtained at
"splatter" when the transmitter is modulated the receiver even though the locally generated
rather heavily. If desired, the switch then may carrier differs a few cycles from the frequency
be replaced with permanent wiring, so long as of the carrier which was suppressed at the
the microphone and speech system are not to transmitter. A communications system utiliz-
be changed. ing but one group of sidebands with carrier
A more conclusive illustration of the lop suppressed is known as a single sideband
sidedness of a speech waveform may be ob- system. Such systems are widely used for
tained by observing the modulated waveform commercial point to point work, and are being
of a radiotelephone transmitter on an oscillo- used to an increasing extent in amateur com-
scope. A portion of the carrier energy of the munication. The two chief advantages of the
transmitter should be coupled by means of a system are: (I) an effective power gain of
link direct 1 y to the vertical plates of the about 9 db results from putting all the radiat
'scope, and the horizontal sweep should be a ed power in intelligence carrying sideband
sawtooth or similar wave occurring at a rate frequencies instead of mostly into radiated
of approximately 30 to 70 sweeps per second. carrier, and (2) elimination of the selective
With the speech signal from the speech am fading and distortion that normally occurs in
plifier connected to the transmitter in one po a conventional double-sideband system when
larity it will be noticed that negative-peak the carrier fades and the sidebands do not, or
clipping-as indicated by bright "spots" in the sidebands fade differently.
the center of the 'scope pattern whenever the
carrier amplitude goes to zero-will occur at
a considerably lower level of average modula- 15-3 Systems of Amp I itude
tion than with the speech signal being fed to Modulation
the transmitter in the other polarity. When the
input signal to the transmitter is polarized in
such a manner that the "fingers" of the There are many different systems and meth-
speech wave extend in the direction of posi ods for amplitude modulating a carrier, but
tive modulation these fingers usually will be most may be grouped under three general clas
clipped in the plate circuit of the modulator sifications: ( 1) variable efficiency systems
at an acceptable peak modulation level. in which the average input to the stage re-
286 Amplitude Modulation THE R AD I 0
mains constant with and without modulation Average input with 1007o
and the variations in the efficiency of the modulation .............................. 100 watts
stage in accordance with the modulating sig- Average output with 100% modula-
nal accomplish the modulation; (2) constant tion (35 watts carrier plus 17.5
efficiency systems in which the input to the watts sideband) ...................... 52.5 watts
stage is varied by an external source of modu- Average efficiency with 100%
lating energy to accomplish the modulation; modulation .............................. 52.5%
and (3) so-called high-efficiency systems in
which circuit complexity is increased to ob-
high plate circuit efficiency in the modulated Systems of Efficiency There are many sys-
stage without the requirement of an external Modulation terns of efficiency mod-
high-level modulator. The various systems ulation, but they all
under each classification have individual have the general limitation discussed in the
characteristics which make certain ones best previous paragraph-so long as the carrier
suited to particular applications. amplitude is to remain constant with and
without modulation, the efficiency at carrier
level must be not greater than one-half the
Variable Efficiency Since the average input peak modulation efficiency if the stage is to
Modulation remains constant in a be capable of 100 per cent modulation.
stage employing variable The classic example of efficiency modula-
efficiency modulation, and since the average tion is the Class B linear r-f amplifier, to be
power output of the stage increases with modu- discussed below. The other three common
forms of efficiency modulation are control-
lation, the additional average power output
grid modulation, screen-grid modulation, and
from the stage with modulation must come from
suppressor-grid modulation. In each case,
the plate dissipation of the tubes in the stage.
including that of the Class B linear amplifier,
Hence, for the best relation between tube cost
note that the modulation, or the modulated
and power output the tubes employed should
signal, is impressed on a control electrode
have as high a plate dissipation rating per
of the stage.
dollar as possible.
The plate efficiency in such an amplifier is
doubled when going from the unmodulated The Class B This is the simplest practi-
condition to the peak of the modulation cycle. Linear Amplifier cable type amplifier for an
Hence, the unmodulated efficiency of such an amplitude-modulated wave
amplifier must always be less than 45 per or a single-sideband signal. The system pos-
cent, since the maximum peak efficiency ob- sesses the disadvantage that excitation, grid
tainable in a conventional amplifier is in the bias, and loading must be carefully controlled
vicinity of 90 per cent. Since the peak effi- to preserve the linearity of the stage. Also,
ciency in certain types of amplifiers will be the grid circuit of the tube, in the usual appli-
as low as 60 per cent, the unmodulated effi- cation where grid current is drawn on peaks,
ciency in such amplifiers will be in the vici presents a widely varying value of load im-
nity of 30 per cent. pedance to the source of excitation. Hence it
Assuming a typical amplifier having a peak is necessary to include some sort of swamping
efficiency of 70 per cent, the following fig- resistor to reduce the effect of grid-imped-
ures give an idea of the operation of an ideal- ance variations with modulation. If such a
ized efficiency-modulated stage adjusted for swamping resistance across the grid tank is
100 per cent sine-wave modulation. It should not included, or is too high in value, the posi-
be kept in mind that the plate voltage is con- tive modulation peaks of the incoming modu-
stant at all times, even over the audio cycles. lated signal will tend to be flattened with
resultant distortion of the wave being amplified.
The dass B linear amplifier has long been
Plate input without modulation ........ 100 watts
used in broadcast transmitters, but recently
Output without modulation .............. 35 watts
has received much more general usage in the
Efficiency without modulation ......... 35%
h-f range for two significant reasons: (a) the
Input on 100% positive modulation Class B linear is an excellent way of increas-
peak (plate current doubles) ........ 200 watts ing the power output of a single-sideband
Efficiency on 100% positive peak .... 70% transmitter, since the plate efficiency with
Output on 100% positive modula- full signal will be in the vicinity of 70 per
tion peak ................................. 140 watts cent, while with no modulation the input to
the stage drops to a relatively low value; and
Input on 100% negative peak ......... . 0 watts (b) the Class B linear amplifier operates with
Efficiency on 100% negative peak ... . 0% relatively low harmonic output since the grid
Output on 100% negative peak ....... . 0 watts bias on the stage normally is slightly less
HANDBOOK Class B Linear Amplifier 287
than the value which will cut off plate current peak output of the r-f envelope should fall to
to the stage in the absence of excitation. half the value obtained on positive modula-
Since " Oass B linear amplifier is biased tion peaks.
to extended cutoff with no excitation (the
grid bias at extended cutoff will be approxi- Class C. One widely used system of
mately equal to the plate voltage divided by Grid Modulation efficiency modulation for
the amplification factor for a triode, and will communications work is
be approximately equal to the screen voltage Class C control-grid bias modulation. The dis-
divided by the grid-screen mu factor for a tortion is slightly higher than for a properly
tetrode or pentode) the plate current will flow operated Class B linear amplifier, but the effi-
essentially in 180-degree pulses. Due to the ciency is also higher, and the distortion can
relatively large operating angle of plate cur- be kept within tolerable limits for communi-
rent flow the theoretical peak plate efficiency cations work.
is limited to 78.5 per cent, with 65 to 70 per Class C grid modulation requires high plate
cent representing a range of efficiency nor- voltage on the modulated stage, if maximum
mally attainable, and the harmonic output output is desired. The plate voltage is nor-
will be low. mally run about 50 per cent higher than for
The carrier power output from a Class B maximum output with plate modulation.
linear amplifier of a normal 100 per cent mod- The driving power required for operation of
ulated AM signal will be about one-half the a grid-modulated amplifier under these condi-
rated plate dissipation of the stage, with opti- tions is somewhat more than is required for
mum operating conditions. The peak output operation at lower bias and plate voltage, but
from a Class B linear, which represents the the increased power output obtainable over-
maximum-signal output as a single-sideband balances the additional excitation require-
amplifier, or peak output with a 100 per cent ment. Actually, almost half as much excitation
AM signal, will be about twice the plate dis- is required as would be needed if the same
sipation of the tubes in the stage. Thus the stage were to be operated as a Class C plate-
carrier-level input power to a Class B linear modulated amplifier. The resistor R across
should be about 1.5 times the rated plate dis- the grid tank of the stage serves as swamping
sipation of the stage. to stabilize the r-f driving voltage. At least
The schematic circuit of a Class B linear 50 per cent of the output of the driving stage
amplifier is the same as a conventional single- should be dissipated in this swamping resistor
ended or push-pull stage, whether triodes or under carrier conditions.
beam tetrodes are used. However, a swamping A comparatively small amount of audio power
resistor, as mentioned before, must be placed will be required to modulate the amplifier stage
across the grid tank of the stage if the oper- 100 per cent. An audio amplifier having 20
ating conditions of the tube are such that watts output will be sufficient to modulate an
appreciable grid current will be drawn on modu- amplifier with one kilowatt input. Proportion-
lation peaks. Also, a fixed source of grid bias ately smaller amounts of audio will be re-
must be provided for the stage. A regulated quired for lower powered stages. However, the
grid-bias power supply is the usual source of audio amplifier that is being used as the grid
negative bias voltage. modulator should, in any case, either employ
low plate resistance tubes such as 2A3's,
Adjustment of a Class With grid bias adjusted employ degenerative feedback from the output
B Linear Amplifier to the correct value, stage to one of the preceding stages of the
and with provision for speech amplifier, or be resistance loaded with
varying the excitation voltage to the stage a resistor across the secondary of the modu-
and the loading of the pl~te circuit, a fully lation transformer. This provision of low driv
modulated signal is applied to the grid circuit ing impedance in the grid modulator is to insure
of the stage. Then with an oscilloscope cou- good regulation in the audio driver for the grid
pled to the output of the stage, excitation and modulated stage. Good regulation of both the
loading are varied until the stage is drawing audio and the r-f drivers of a grid-modulated
the normal plate input and the output wave- stage is quite important if distortion-free
shape is a good replica of the input signal. modulation approaching 100 per cent is desired,
The adjustment procedure normally will re- because the grid impedance of the modulated
quire a succession of approximations, until stage varies widely over the audio cycle.
the optimum set of adjustments is attained. A practical circuit for obtaining grid-bias
Then the modulation being applied to the in- modulation is shown in figure 3. The modula-
put signal should be removed to check the tor and bias regulator tube have been com-
linearity. With modulation removed, in the bined in a single 6B4G tube.
case of a 100 per cent AM signal, the input The regulator-modulator tube operates as
to the stage should remain constant, and the a cathode-follower. The average d-e voltage
288 Amplitude Modulation THE R AD I 0
tetrode, or other type of screen-grid tube. The swing at peak-modulation leveL This condition
modulation obtained in this way .is not es- must exist in any type of conventional effi-
pecially linear, but screen-grid modulation ciency- modulated stage if 100 per cent posi-
~oes _offer other advantages and the linearity tive modulation is to be attainable. Since the
Is quae adequate for communications work. plate-voltage swing is at half amplitude, and
There are two significant and worthwhile since the screen voltage is at half its full-
advantages of screen-grid modulation for com- modulation value, the screen current is rela-
munications work: ( 1) The excitation require- tively low. But at the positive modulation peak
ments for an amplifier which is to be modu- the screen voltage is approximately doubled,
lated in the screen are not at all critical and and the plate-voltage swing also is at twice
good regulation of the excitation volta~e is the carrier amplitude. Due to the increase in
not required. The normal rated grid-circuit plate-voltage swing with increasing screen
operating conditions specified for Class C voltage, the screen current increases more than
c-w operation are quite adequate for screen- linearly with increasing screen voltage.
grid modulation. (2) The audio modulating In a test made on an amplifier with an 813
power requirements for screen-grid modulation tube, the screen current at carrier level was
are relatively low. about 6 rna. with screen potential of 190 volts;
A screen-grid modulated r-f amplifier oper- but under conditions which represented a posi-
ates as an efficiency-modulated amplifier, the tive modulation peak the screen current meas-
same as does a Class B linear amplifier and ured 25 rna. at a potential of 400 volts. Thus
a grid-modulated stage. Hence, plate circuit instead of screen current doubling with twice
loading is relatively critical as in any effi- screen voltage as would be the case if the
ciency-modulated stage, and must be adjusted screen presented a resistive impedance, the
to the correct value if normal power output screen current became about four times as
with full modulation capability is to be ob- great with twice the screen voltage.
tained. As in the case of any efficiency-modu- Another factor which must be considered
lated stage, the operating efficiency at the in the design of a screen-modulated stage, if
peak of the modulation cycle will be between full modulation is to be obtained, is that the
70 and 80 per cent, with efficiency at the car- power output of a screen-grid stage with zero
rier level (if the stage is operating in the nor- screen voltage is still relatively large. Hence,
mal manner with full carrier) about half of the if anything approaching full modulation on
peak-modulation value. negative peaks is to be obtained, the screen
There are two main disadvantages of screen- potential must be made negative with respect
grid modulation, and several factors which to ground on negative modulation peaks. In
must be considered if satisfactory operation the usual types of beam tetrode tubes the
of the screen-grid modulated stage is to be screen potential must be 20 to 50 volts nega-
obtained. The disadvantages are: (1) As men- tive with respect to ground before cut-off of
tioned before, the linearity of modulation with output is obtained. This condition further com-
~espe~t to screen-grid voltage of such a stage plicates the problem ofobtaining good linearity
Is satisfactory only for communications work, in the audio modulating voltage for the screen-
unless carrier-rectified degenerative feed-back modulated stage, since the screen voltage
is employed around the modulated stage to must be driven negatively with respect to
straighten the linearity of modulation. ( 2) The ground over a portion of the cycle. Hence the
impedance of the screen grid to the modulating screen draws no current over a portion of the
signal is non-linear. This means that the mod- modulating cycle, and over the major portion
ulating signal must be obtained from a source of the cycle when the screen does draw cur-
of quite low impedance if audio distortion of rent, it presents approximately a square-law
the signal appearing at the screen grid is to impedance.
be avoided.
Circuits for Laboratory analysis of a large
Screen-Grid Instead of being linear with re- Screen-Grid number of circuits for accom-
lmpedance spect to modulating voltage, as Modulation plishing screen modulation has
is the plate circuit of a plate- led to the conclusion that the
modulated Class C amplifier, the screen grid audio modulating voltage must be obtained
presents approximately a square-law imped- from a low-impedance source if low-distor-
ance to the modulating signal over the region tion modulation is to be obtained. Figure 4
of signal excursion where the screen is posi- shows a group of sketches of the modulation
tive with respect to ground. This non-linearity envelope obtained with various types of modu-
may be explained in the following manner: At lators and also with insufficient antenna coup-
the carrier level of a conventional screen ling. The result of this laboratory work led
modulated stage the plate-voltage swing of to the conclusion that the cathode-follower
the modulated tube is one-half the voltage modulator of the basic circuit shown in figure
2 90 Amplitude Modulation THE R AD I 0
Figure 4
SCREEN-MODULATION CIRCUITS
Three common screen modulation circuits are illustrated above. All three circuits
are capable of giving intelligible voice modulation although the waveform distortion
in the circuits of (A) and (B) Is likely to be rather severe. The arrangement at (A)
is often call eel "clamp tube" screen modulation; by returning the grid leak on the
clamp tube to ground the circuit will give control/eel-carrier screen modulation. This
circuit has the advantage that it is simple one/ is well suited to use in mobile trans-
mitters. (B) is an arrangement using a transformer coup/eel modulator, and offers no
particular advantages. The arrangement at (C) is capable of giving goocl modulation
linearity clue to the low impedance of the cathode-follower modulator. However, clue
to the relatively low heater-cathode ratings on tubes suited for use as the modula-
tor, a separate heater supply for the moclulator tube normally is requirecl. This limi
tation mokes application of the circuit to the mobile transmitter a special problem,
since an isolatecl heater supply normally is not available. Shown at (D) as an assist
once in the tuning of a screenmoclulatecl transmitter (or any efficiencymoclulatecl
transmitter for that matter) is the type of moclulation envelope which results when
loading to the moclulatecl stage is insufficient.
5 is capable of g1vmg good-quality screen- grid stage since it acts as a relatively low-
grid modulation, and in addition the circuit impedance source of modulating voltage for
provides convenient adjustments for the car- the screen-grid circuit. In addition the cathode-
rier level and the output level on negative follower modulator allows the supply voltage
modulation peaks. This latter control, P2 in both for the modulator and for the screen grid
figure 5, allows the amplifier to be adjusted of the modulated tube to be obtained from the
in such a manner that negative-peak clipping high-voltage supply for the plate of the screen-
cannot take place, yet the negative modulation grid tube or beam tetrode. In the usual case
peaks may be adjusted to a level just above the plate supply for the cathode follower, and
that at which sideband splatter will occur. hence for the screen grid of the modulated
tube, may be taken from the bleeder on the
The Cathode- The cathode follower is high-voltage power supply. A tap on the bleeder
Follower Modulator ideally suited for use as may be used, or two resistors may be connect-
the modulator for a screen- ed in series to make up the bleeder, with ap-
HANDBOOK Modulation Systems 2 91
to ground.
The voltage applied to the plate of the
cathode follower should be about 100 volts
greater than the rated screen voltage for the 22 K
2W
tetrode tube as a c-w Class C amplifier. Hence -100 v.
1~ K POT.
the cathode-follower plate voltage should be P2
about 350 volts for an 815, 2E26, or 8298, +250V.
which will accomplish full modulation. With transformer or filament winding. Note also that
correct adjustments of the operating conditions the operating plate-to-cathode voltage on the
of the stage it can be made to clip positive 6L6 modulator tube does not exceed the 360-
and negative modulation peaks symmetrically. volt rating of the tube, since the operating
However, the inherent peak clipping ability of potential of the cathode is considerably above
the stage should not be relied upon as a means ground potential.
of obtaining a large amount of speech com-
pression, since excessive audio distortion and Suppressor-Grid Still another form of effi
excessive screen current on the modulated Modulation ciency modulation may be
stage will result. obtained by applying the
audio modulating signal to the suppressor grid
Characteristics of a An important character- of a pentode Class C rf amplifier. Basically,
Typical Screen- istic of the screenmodu suppressor-grid modulation operates in the
Modulated Stage lated stage, when using same general manner as other forms of effi
the cathode-follower mod- ciency modulation; carrier plate circuit effi
ulator, is that excessive plate voltage on the ciency is about 35 per cent, and antenna coup-
modulated stage is not required. In fact, full ling must be rather tight. However, suppressor
output usually may be obtained with the larger grid modulation has one sizeable disadvantage,
tubes at an operating plate voltage from one in addition to the fact that pentode tubes are
half to two-thirds the maximum rated plate not nearly so widely used as beam tetrodes
voltage for cw operation. This desirable con- which of course do not have the suppressor
dition is the natural result of using a low element. This disadvantage is that the screen
impedance source of modulating signal for grid current to a suppressor-grid modulated
the stage. amplifier is rather high. The high screen cur
As an example of a typical screenmodu rent is a natural consequence of the rather high
lated stage, full output of 75 watts of carrier negative bias on the suppressor grid, which
may be obtained from an 813 tube operating reduces the plate-voltage swing and plate cur-
with a plate potential of only 1250 volts. No rent with a resulting increase in the screen
increase in output from the 813 may be ob- current.
tained by increasing the plate voltage, since In tuning a suppressor-grid modulated am-
the tube may be operated with full rated plate plifier, the grid bias, grid current, screen volt-
dissipation of 125 watts, with normal plate age, and plate voltage are about the same as
efficiency for a screen-modulated stage, 37.5 for Class C cw operation of the stage. But
per cent, at the 1250-volt potential. the suppressor grid is biased negatively to a
The operating conditions of a screenmodu value which reduces the plate-circuit effici
lated 813 stage are as follows: ency to about one-half the maximum obtainable
from the particular amplifier, with antenna
Plate voltage-1250 volts coupling adjusted until the plate input is about
Plate current -160 rna. 1. 5 times the rated plate dissipation of the
Plate input-200 watts stage. It is important that the input to the
Grid current-11 rna. screen grid be measured to make sure that the
Grid bias-110 volts rated screen dissipation of the tube is not
Carrier screen vol tage-190 volts being exceeded. Then the audio signal is ap
Carrier screen current-6 rna. plied to the suppressor grid. In the normal
Power output-approx. 75 watts application the audio voltage swing on the
suppressor will be somewhat greater than the
With full 100 per cent modulation the plate negative bias on the element. Hence sup
current decreases about 2 rna. and the screen pressor-grid current will flow on modulation
current increases about 1 rna.; hence plate, peaks, so that the source of audio signal volt-
screen, and grid current remain essentially age must have good regulation. Tubes suitable
constant with modulation. Referring to figure for suppressor-grid modulation are: 2E22,
5, which was the circuit used as modulator 837, 4E27/8001, 5125, 804 and 803. A typi-
for the 813, (E 1) measured plus 155 volts, ( E2) cal suppressor-grid modulated amplifier is
measured -50 volts, ( E3) measured plus 190 illustrated in figure 6.
volts, ( E4 ) measured plus 500 volts, and the
r.m. s. swing at (E5) for full modulation me as
ured 210 volts, which represents a peak swing Input Modulation
of about 296 volts. Due to the high positive 15-4
voltage, and the large audio swing, on the Systems
cathode of the 6L6 (triode connected) modu-
lator tube, it is important that the heater of Constant efficiency variable-input modula
of this tube be fed from a separate filament tion systems operate by virtue of the addition
HANDBOOK Plate Modulation 293
CARRIER
OUTPUT
to the plate circuit of an r-f amplifier. The rf
:.33W. amplifier must be operated Class C for this
type of modulation in order to obtain a radio-
R.F. INPUT ----..--1- frequency output which changes in exact ac-
IG=
8 MA.
....-+-..+--+---+++-l~+------'E cordance with the variation in plate voltage.
The r-f amplifier is 100 per cent modulated
when the peak a-c voltage from the modulator
22. K is equal to the d. c. voltage applied to the r- f
6J5 +1500 v. tube. The positive peaks of audio voltage in-
"'"'"'1
crease the instantaneous plate voltage on the
PEAK SWING FOR FULL r-f tube to twice the d-e value, and the nega-
MODULATION= 210 V.
tive peaks reduce the voltage to zero.
The instantaneous plate current to the r-f
stage also varies in accordance with the modu-
+300V. -210V.
lating voltage. The peak alternating current
in the output of a modulator must be equal to
Figure 6 the d-e plate current of the Class C r-f sta8e
AMPLIFIER WITH SUPPRESSOR-GRID at the point of 100 per cent modulation. This
MODULATION combination of change in audio voltage and
Recommended operating conditions for lin-
current can be most easily referred to in terms
ear suppressor-grid modulation of a 4E27/
of audio power in watts.
2578/8001 stage ore given on the drawing.
In a sinusoidally modulated wave, the an-
tenna current increases approximately 22 per
cent for 100 per cent modulation with a pure
tone input; an r-f meter in the antenna circuit
indicates this increase in antenna current.
of external power to the modulated stage to
The average power of the r-f wave increases
effect the modulation. There are two general
50 per cent for 100 per cent modulation, the
classifications that come under this heading;
efficiency remaining constant.
those systems in which the additional power
This indicates that in a plate-modulated
is supplied as audio frequency energy from a
radiotelephone transmitter, the audio-frequency
modulator, usually called plate modulation
channel must supply this additional 50 per
systems, and those systems in which the addi-
cent increase in average power for sine-wave
tional power to effect modulation is supplied
as direct current from the plate supply. modulation. If the power input to the modu-
lated stage is 100 watts, for example, the
Under the former classification comes Heis-
ing modulation (probably the oldest type of
average power will increase to 150 watts at
100 per cent modulation, and this additional
modulation to be applied to a continuous car-
50 watts of power must be supplied by the
rier), Class B plate modulation, and series
modulator when plate modulation is used. The
modulation. These types of plate modulation
actual antenna power is a constant percentage
are by far the easiest to get into operation,
of the total value of input power.
and they give a very good ratio of power input
One of the advantages of plate (or power)
to the modulated stage to power output; 65 to
modulation is the ease with which proper ad-
80 per cent efficiency is the general rule. It
justments can be made in the transmitter. Also,
is for these two important reasons that these
modulation systems, particularly Class B plate there is less plate loss in the r-f amplifier for
modulation, are at present the most popular a given value of carrier power than with other
for communications work. forms of modulation because the plate effi-
ciency is higher.
Modulation systems coming under the sec-
ond classification are of comparatively recent By properly matching the plate impedance
development but have been widely applied to of the r-f tube to the output of the modulator,
broadcast work. There are quite a few systems the ratio of voltage and current swing to d-e
in this class. Two of the more widely used voltage and current is automatically obtained.
are the Doherty linear amplifier, and the Ter- The modulator should have a peak voltage
man-Woodyard high-efficiency grid-modulated output equal to the average d-e plate voltage
amplifier. Both systems operate by virtue of on the modulated stage. The modulator should
a carrier amplifier and a peak amplifier con- also have a peak power output equal to the
nected together by electrical quarter-wave d-e plate input power to the modulated stage.
lines. They will be described later in this
section. The average power output of the modulator will
depend upon the type of waveform. If the am
Plate Modulation Plate modulation is the ap- plifier is being Heising modulated by a Class
plication of the audio power A stage, the modulator must have an average
294 Amplitude Modulation THE R AD I 0
MODU~ATtD C~ASS C
R.f'. AMPLIFIER
R,f. DRIVE
+B
Figure 7
HEISING PLATE MODULATION
MOD.+B R.F.+B
This type of moc/ulotion was the first form
of plate moc/ulotlon. It is sometimes known
as "constant current'' moclulation. Because
Figure 8
of the eHeetive 1:1 ratio of the coupling
ehoke, it is impossible to obtain 700 per eent CLASS B PLATE MODULATION
modulation unless the plate voltage to the This type of moc/ulotion is the most flexible
moc/ulotec/ stage is dropped slightly by re- in thot the loading adjustment eon be mode
sistor R. The eopoeitor C merely bypasses in o short period of time one/ without el abo-
the audio around R, so thot the full o-f out- rote test equipment alter o ehonge in oper-
put voltage of the moc/ulotor is Impressed oting frequency of the Class C amplifier has
on the Closs C stage. been mac/e.
power output capability of one-half the input the maximum available a-c peak voltage if
to the Class C stage. If the modulator is a 100% modulation is to be obtained.
Class B audio amplifier, the average power A higher degree of distortion can be toler-
required of it may vary from one quarter to more ated in low-power emergency phone transmitters
than one-half the Class C input depending which use a pentode modulator tube, and the
upon the waveform. However, the peak power series resistor and by-pass capacitor are
output of any modulator must be equal to the usually omitted in such transmitters.
Class C input to be modulated.
Class B High-level Class B plate
Heising Heising modulation is the oldest Plate Modulation modulation is the least ex
Modulation system of plate modulation, and pensive method of plate
usually consists of a Class A modulation. Figure 8 shows a conventional
audio amplifier coupled to the rf amplifier by Class B plate-modulated Class C amplifier.
means of a modulation choke coil, as shown The statement that the modulator output
in figure 7. power must be one-half the Class C input for
The d.c. plate voltage and plate current in 100 per cent modulation is correct only if the
the rf amplifier must be adjusted to a value waveform of the modulating power is a sine
which will cause the plate impedance to match wave. Where the modulator waveform is un-
the output of the modulator, since the modula clipped speech, the average modulator power
tion choke gives a 1-to-1 coupling ratio. A for 100 per cent modulation is considerably
series resistor, by-passed for audio frequen less than one-half the Class C input.
cies by means of a capacitor, must be connect
ed in series with the plate of the rf amplifier Power Relations inIt has been determined ex-
to obtain modulation up to 100 per cent. The Speech Waveforms perimentally that the ratio
peak output voltage of a Class A amplifier of peak to average power
does not reach a value equal to the d-e voltage in a speech waveform is approximately 4 to 1
applied to the amplifier and, consequently, as contrasted to a ratio of 2 to 1 in a sine
the d-e plate voltage impressed across the wave. This is due to the high harmonic con-
rf tube must be reduced to a value equal to tent of such a waveform, and to the fact that
HANDBOOK Plate Modulation 2 95
this high harmonic content manifests itself by a pair of 8ll tubes operating at 1500 plate
making the wave unsymmetrical and causing volts will deliver 225 watts of audio output.
sharp peaks or "fingers" of high energy con- The plate-to-plate load resistance for these
tent to appear. Thus for unclipped speech, the tubes under the specified operating conditions
average modulator plate current, plate dissi- is 18,000 ohms. Hence our problem is to match
pation, and power output are approximately the Class C amplifier load resistance of 8888
one-half the sine wave values for a given peak ohms to the 18,000-ohm load resistance re-
output power. quired by the modulator tubes.
Both peak power and average power are A 200-to-300 watt modulation transformer
necessarily associated with waveform. Peak will be required for the job. If the taps on the
power is just what the name implies; the power transformer are given in terms of impedances
at the peak of a wave. Peak power, although it will only be necessary to connect the sec
of the utmost importance in modulation, is of ondary for 8888 ohms (or a value approximately
no great significance in a-c power work, ex- equal to this such as 9000 ohms) and the pri-
cept insofar as the average power may be de- mary for 18,000 ohms. If it is necessary to
termined from the peak value of a known wave determine the proper turns ratio required of the
form. transformer it can be determined in the follow-
There is no time element implied in the ing manner. The square root of the impedance
definition of peak power; peak power may be ratio is equal to the turns ratio, hence:
instantaneous-and for this reason average
power, which is definitely associated with
- 18888 = ..; 0.494 0.703
time, is the important factor in plate dissipa-
tion. It is possible that the peak power of a v TsOoO
given waveform be several times the average
value; for a sine wave, the peak power is twice The transformer must have a turns ratio of
the average value, and for unclipped speech approximately 1-to-0. 7 step down, total pri-
the peak power is approximately four times mary to total secondary. The greater number
the average value. For 100 per cent modula- of turns always goes with the higher imped-
tion, the peak (instantaneous) audio power ance, and vice versa.
must equal the Class C input, although the
average power for this value of peak varies
widely depending upon the modulator wave- Plote-and-Screen When only the plate of a
form, being greater than 50 per cent for speech Modulation screen-grid tube is modu-
that has been clipped and filtered, 50 per cent lated, it is impossible to ob-
for a sine wave, and about 25 per cent for typ- tain high-percentage linear modulation under
ical unclipped speech tones. ordinary conditions. The plate current of such
a stage is not linear with plate voltage. How-
Modulation The modulation transformer is ever, if the screen is modulated simultaneously
Transformer a device for matching the load with the plate, the instantaneous screen volt-
Colculations impedance of the Class C am- age drops in proportion to the drop in the plate
plifier to the recommended load voltage, and linear modulation can then be ob-
impedance of the Class B modulator tubes. tained. Four satisfactory circuits for accom-
Modulation transformers intended for com- plishing combined plate and screen modula-
munications work are usually designed to tion are shown in figure 9.
carry the Class C plate current through their The screen r-f by-pass capacitor C2 , should
secondary windinss, as shown in figure 8. not have a greater value than 0.005 /lfd., pref-
The manufacturer's ratings should be con- erably not larger than 0. 001 /lfd. It should be
sulted to insure that the d-e plate current large enough to bypass effectively all r-f volt-
passed through the secondary winding does age without short-circuiting high-frequency
not exceed the maximum rating. audio voltages. The plate by-pass capacitor
A detailed discussion of the method of can be of any value from 0. 002 /lfd. to 0. 005
making modulation transformer calculations ftld. The screen-dropping resistor, R1, should
has been given in Chapter Six. However, to reduce the applied high voltage to the value
emphasize the method of making the calcula specified for operating the particular tube in
tion, an additional example will be given. the circuit. Capacitor C 1 is seldom required
Suppose we take the case of a Class C am- yet some tubes may require this capacitor in
plifier operating at a plate voltage of 2000 order to keep c2 from attenuating the high fre-
with 225 rna. of plate current. This amplifier quencies. Different values between .0002 and
would present a load resistance of 2000 divi- .002 ftfd. should be tried for best results.
ded by 0.225 amperes or 8888 ohms, The plate Figure 9C shows another method which uses
power input would be 2000 times 0.225 or 450 a third winding on the modulation transformer,
watts. By reference to Chapter Six we see that through which the screen-grid is connected to
2 96 Amplitude Modulation THE RA0 I 0
B+ S.G. B+
B+S.G. B+
Figure 9
PLATE MODULATION OF A BEAM TETRODE OR SCREEN-GRID TUBE
These alternative arrangements for plate moc/ulat/on of tetroc/es or pentacles are clis
cussec/ In cletail in the text, The arrangements shown at (B) or (D) are recommenc/ec/
for most applications,
a low-voltage power supply. The ratio of turns in plate voltage. This circuit arrangement is
between the two output windings depends upon illustrated in figure 9B.
the type of screen-grid tube which is being A similar application of this principle is
modulated. Normally it will be such that the shown in figure 9D. In this case the screen
screen voltage is being modulated 60 per cent voltage is fed directly from a low-voltage sup-
when the plate voltage is receiving 100 per ply of the proper potential through a choke L.
cent modulation. A conventional filter choke having an induc-
If the screen voltage is derived from a drop- tance from 10 to 20 henries will be satisfac-
ping resistor (not a divider) that is bypassed tory for L.
for r.f. but not a.f., it is possible to secure To afford protection of the tube when plate
quite good modulation by applying modulation voltage is not applied but screen voltage is
only to the plate. Under these conditions, the supplied from the exciter power supply, when
screen tends to modulate itself, the screen using the arrangement of figure 9D, a resistor
voltage varying over the audio cycle as a re- of 3000 to 10, 000 ohms can be connected in
sult of the screen impedance increasing with series with the chokeL. In this case the screen
plate voltage, and decreasing with a decrease supply voltage should be at least 1Yz_ times as
HANDBOOK Cathode Modulation 2 97
much as is requtred tor actual screen voltage, upon the relative percentages of grid and
and the value of resistor is chosen such that plate modulation.
with normal screen current the drop through Since the system is a compromise between
the resistor and choke will be such that nor- the two fundamental modulation arrangements,
mal screen voltage will be applied to the tube. a value of efficiency approximately half way
When the plate voltage is removed the screen between the two would seem to be the best
current will increase greatly and the drop compromise. Experience has proved this to be
through resistor R will increase to such a the case. A compromise efficiency of about
value that the screen voltage will be lowered 56.5 per cent, roughly half way between the
to the point where the screen dissipation on two limits, has proved to be optimum. Cal-
the tube will not be exceeded. However, the culation has shown that this value of effi-
supply voltage and value of resistor R must ciency can be obtained from a cathode-modu-
be chosen carefully so that the maximum rated lated amplifier when the audio-frequency modu-
screen dissipation cannot be exceeded. The lating power is approximately 20 per cent of
maximum possible screen dissipation using the d-e input to the cathode-modulated stage.
this arrangement is equal to: W = E'/ 4R where
E is the screen supply voltage and R is the An Economical Series cathode modulation is
combined resistance of the resistor in figure Series Cathode ideally suited as an economi-
9D and the d-e resistance of the choke L. It Modulator cal modulating arrangement
is wise, when using this arrangement to check, for a high-power triode c-w
using the above formula, to see that the value transmitter. The modulator can be constructed
of W obtained is less than the maximum rated quite compactly and for a minimum component
screen dissipation of the tube or tubes used cost since no power supply is required for it.
in the modulated stage. This same system can When it is desired to change over from c-w to
of course also be used in figuring the screen 'phone, it is only necessary to cut the series
supply circuit of a pentode or tetrode ampli- modulator into the cathode return circuit of the
fier stage where modulation is not to be c-w amplifier stage. The plate voltage for the
applied. modulator tubes and for the speech amplifier
The modulation transformer for plate-and- is taken from the cathode voltage drop of the
screen-modulation, when utilizing a dropping modulated stage across the modulator unit.
resistor as shown in figure 9A, is similar to Figure 10 shows the circuit of such a modu-
the type of transformer used for any plate lator, designed to cathode modulate a Class C
modulated phone. The combined screen and amplifier using push-pull 810 tubes, running
plate current is divided into the plate voltage
at a supply voltage of 2500, and with a plate
in order to obtain the Class C amplifier load input of 660 watts. The modulated stage runs
impedance. The peak audio power required to at about 50% efficiency, giving a power output
obtain 100 per cent modulation is equal to the of nearly 350 watts, fully modulated. The volt-
d-e power input to the screen, screen resistor,
age drop across the cathode modulator is 400
and plate of the modulated r-f stage.
volts, allowing a net plate to cathode voltage
of 2100 volts on the final amplifier. The plate
current of the 810' s should be about 330 rna.,
15-5 Cathode Modulation and the grid current should be approximately
40 rna., making the total cathode current of the
Cathode modulation offers a workable com- modulated stage 370 rna. Four parallel 6L6
promise between the good plate efficiency but modulator tubes can pass this amount of plate
expensive modulator of high-level plate modu- current without difficulty. It must be remem-
lation, and the poor plate efficiency but in- bered that the voltage drop across the cathode
expensive modulator of grid modulation. Cathode modulator is also the cathode bias of the modu-
modulation consists essentially of an ad- lated stage. In most cases, no extra grid bias
mixture of the two. is necessary. If a bias supply is used for c-w
The efficiency of the average well-designed operation, it may be removed for cathode modu-
plate-modulated transmitter is in the vicinity lation, as shown in figure 11. With low-mu
of 75 to 80 per cent, with a compromise per- triodes, some extra grid bias (over and above
haps at 77.5 per cent. On the other hand, the that amount supplied by the cathode modulator)
efficiency of a good grid-modulated transmitter may be needed to achieve proper linearity of
may run from 28 to maybe 40 per cent, with the modulated stage. In any case, proper oper-
the average falling at about 34 per cent. Now ation of a cathode modulated stage should be
since cathode modulation consists of simul- determined by examining the modulated output
taneous grid and plate modulation, in phase waveform of the St!lge on an oscilloscope.
with each other, we can theoretically obtain
any efficiency from about 34 to 77.5 per cent Excitation The r-f driver for a cathode-mod-
from our cathode-modulated stage, depending ulated stage should have about
2 98 Amplitude Modulation THE R AD I 0
TO CATHOOE
MODULATED
STAGE
6AU6 6AU6 6L6 6L6 6L6
~4~.M7~K--.---~:;~
-= 10
lHJF
2.5K
lOW
+ IOK,IW +
~ ~
ALL R-ESISTORS 0.5 WATT UNLESS CAUTION -FILAMENTS OF t!JL6 TUBES MUST BE AT OPERATING
OTHERWISE NOTED. TEMPERATURE BEFORE PLATE VOLTAGE IS APPLIED
ALL CAPACITORS IN .lJF UNLESS TO MODULATED AMPLIFIER.
OTHERWISE NOTED.
Figure 10
SERIES CATHODE MODULATOR FOR A HIGH-POWERED TRIODE R-F
AMPLIFIER
the same power output capabilities as would supplies the unmodulated carrier, and whose
be required to drive a cw amplifier to the same output is reduced to supply negative peaks,
input as it is desired to drive the cathode and a peak tube (V 2 ) whose function is to
modulated stage. However, some form of exci supply approximately half the positive peak
tation control should be available since the of the modulation cycle and whose additional
amountof excitation power has a direct bearing function is to lower the load impedance on the
on the linearity of a cathode-modulated am carrier tube so that it will be able to supply
plifier stage. If link coupling is used between the other half of the positive peak of the modu-
the driver and the modulated stage, variation lation cycle.
in the amount of link coupling will afford The peak tube is enabled to increase the
iiJIIple excitation variation. If much less than output of the carrier tube by virtue of an im-
40% plate modulation is employed, the stage
pedance inverting line between the plate cir-
begins to resemble a grid-bias modulated cuits of the two tubes. This line is designed
stage, and the necessity for good rf regula to have a characteristic impedance of one-half
tion will apply. the value of load into which the carrier t1,1be
operates under the carrier conditions. Then a
Cathode Modulation Cathode modulation has
load of one-half the characteristic impedance
of Tetrodes not proved too satisfac
of the quarter-wave line is coupled into the
tory for use with beam
output. By experience with quarter-wave lines
tetrode tubes. This is a result of the small in antenna-matching circuits we know that
excitation and grid swing requirements for
such a line will vary the impedance at one
such tubes, plus the fact that some means for end of the line in such a manner that the geo-
holding the screen voltage at the potential of metric mean between the two terminal imped-
the cathode as far as audio is concerned is ances will be equal to the characteristic im-
usually necessary. Because of these factors, pedance of the line. thus, if we have a value
cathode modulation is not recommended for of load of one-half the characteristic imped-
use with tetrode rf amplifiers. ance of the line at one end, the other end of
the line will present a value of twice the char-
15-6 The Doherty and the acteristic impedance of the lines to the car
Termon-Woodyard rier tube V1
Modulated Amplifiers This is the situation that exists under the
carrier conditions when the peak tube merely
floats across the load end of the line and con
These two amplifiers will be described to- tributes no power. Then as a positive peak of
gether since they operate upon very similar modulation comes along, the peak tube starts
principles. Figure 12 shows a greatly simpli- to contribute power to the load until at the
fied schematic diagram of the operation of both peak of the modulation cycle it is contributing
types. Both systems operate by virtue of a car- enough power so that the impedance at the
rier tube (V 1 in both figures 12 and 13) which load end of the line is equal to R, instead of
HANDBOOK Doherty Amplifier 2 99
R.F. AMPLIFIER
Figure 12
DIAGRAMMATIC REPRESENTATION OF
THE DOHERTY LINEAR
t.AJC 6AU6 6AU8 4-6L6'S desirable phase shift of 90 between the plate
circuits of the carrier and peak tubes, an equal
and opposite phase shift must be introduced in
the exciting voltage to the grid circuits of the
two tubes so that the resultant output in the
plate circuit will be in phase. This additional
Figure 11 phase shift has been indicated in figure 12 and
a method of obtaining it has been shown in
CATHODE MODULATOR INSTALLATION figure 13.
SHOWING PHONE-C.W. TRANSFER SWITCH
Comparison Between The difference between
Linear ond the Doherty linear jllll
the R/2 that is presented under the carrier Grid Modulator plifier and the Terman-
conditions. This is true because at a positive Woodyard grid-modulated
modulation peak (since it is delivering full amplifier is the same as the difference between
power) the peak tube subtracts a negative any linear and grid-modulated stages. Modulated
resistance of R/2 from the load end of the r.f.is applied to the grid circuit of the Doherty
line. linear amplifier with the carrier tube biased to
Now, since under the peak condition of modu cutoff and the peak tube biased to the point
lation the load end of the line is terminated where it draws substantially zero plate current
in R ohms instead of R/2, the impedance at at the carrier condition.
the carrier-tube will be reduced from 2R ohms In the TermanWoodyard grid-modulated am-
to R ohms. This again is due to the impedance plifier the carrier tube runs Class C with com
inverting action of the line. Since the load re paratively high bias and high plate efficiency,
sistance on the carrier tube has been reduced while the peak tube again is biased so that it
to half the carrier value, its output at the peak
draws almost no plate current. Unmodulated
of the modulation cycle will be doubled. Thus r.f. is applied to the grid circuits of the two
we have the p.ecessary condition for a 100 tubes and the modulating voltage is inserted
per cent modulation peak; the amplifier will in series with the fixed bias voltages. From
deliver four times as much power as it does one-half to two-thirds as much audio voltage
under the carrier conditions. is required at the grid of the peak tube as is
On negative modulation peaks the peak tube required at the grid of the carrier tube.
does not contribute; the output of the carrier
tube is reduced until on a 100 per cent nega Operating The resting carrier efficiency of
tive peak its output is zero. Efficiencies the grid-modulated amplifier may
run as high as is obtainable in
The Electrical While an electrical quarter any Class C stage, 80 per cent or better. The
Quarter-Wave wave line (consisting of a pi resting carrier efficiency of the linear will be
Line network with the inductance about as good as is obtainable in any Class
and capacitance units having B amplifier, 60 to 70 per cent. The overall
a reactance equal to the characteristic imped- efficiency of the bias-modulated amplifier at
ance of the line) does have the desired im 100 per cent modulation will run about 75 per
pedanceinverting effect, it also has the un- cent; of the linear, about 60 per cent.
desirable effect of introducing a 90 phase In figure 13 the plate tank circuits are de-
shift across such a line. If the shunt elements tuned enough to give an effect equivalent to
are capacitances, the phase shift across the the shunt elements of the quarter-wave "line"
line lags by 90; if they are inductances, the of figure 12. At resonance, the coils L, and
phase shift leads by 90. Since there is an un- L2 in the grid circuits of the two tubes have
300 Amplitude Modulation THE R AD I 0
Figure 14 0
SPEECH-WAVEFORM AMPLITUDE
MODULATION
Showing the effect of using the prop
er polarity of a speech wave for
modulating a transmitter. (A) shows
the effect of proper speech polarity
on a transmitter having an upward
modulation capability of greater
than 100 per cent. (B) shows the
effect of using proper speech polar
ity on a transmitter having an up
ware/ modulation capability of only
100 per cent. Both these conditions
will give a clean signal without
ob;ectionable splatter. (C) shows
the effect of the use of improper
speech polarity. This condition will
cause serious splatter clue to nega
tivepeak clipping in the moclulatecl @
amp/ ifier stage.
negative peaks of modulation. This aspect of to a mm1mum. However, if there is phase shift
the problem has been discussed in more detail after the clipper-filter the system does not
in the section on Speech Waveform Dissymmetry completely break down. The presence of phase
earlier in this chapter. The effect of feeding shift mere! y requires that the audio gain fol-
the proper speech polarity from the speech am lowing the clipper-filter be reduced to the point
plifier is shown in figure 14. where the cant applied to the clipped speech
A much more desirable and effective method waves still cannot cause overmodulation. This
of obtaining speech clipping is actual! y to em effect is illustrated in figures 15 and 16.
ploy a clipper circuit in the earlier stages of The cant appearing on the tops of the square
the speech amplifier, and then to filter out the waves leaving the clipper-filter centers about
objectionable distortion components by means the clipping level. Hence, as the frequency
of a sharp lowpass filter having a cutoff fre- being passed through the system is lowered,
quency of approximately 3000 cycles. Tests on the amount by which the peak of the canted
clipper-filter speech systems have shown that wave exceeds the clipping level is increased.
6 db of clipping on voice is just noticeable,
12 db of clipping is quite acceptable, and Phase Shift In a normal transmitter having a
values of clipping from 20 to 25 db are toler- Correction moderate amount of phase shift
able under s..;ch conditions that a high degree the cant applied to the tops of
of clipping is necessary to get through heavy the waves will cause overmodulation on fre-
QRM or QRN. A signal with 12 db of clipping quencies below those for which the gain fol-
doesn't sound quite natural but it is not un- lowing the clipper-filter has been adjusted un-
pleasant to listen to and is much more read- less remedial steps have been taken. The fol-
able than an unclipped signal in the presence lowing steps are advised:
of strong interference. ( 1) Introduce bass suppression into the speech
The use of a clipper-filter in the speech am- amplifier ahead of the clipper-filter.
plifier, to be completely effective, requires
that phase shift between the clipper-filter (2) Improve the low-frequency response char-
stage and the final modulated amplifier be kept acteristic insofar as it is possible in the
3 02 Amplitude Modulation THE R AD I 0
Figure 15
ACTION OF A CLIPPER-FILTER
INCOMING SPEECH WAVE
ON A SPEECH WAVE
The drawing (A) shows the incom-
Ing speech wave before it reaches
the clipper stage. (B) shows the
output of the clipper-filter, illus
tratlng the manner in which the
peaks are clipped and then the
AVERAGE LEVEL
sharp edges of the clipped wave
NEGATIVE CLIPPING LEVEL removed by the filter. (C) shows
CLIPPED AND FILTERED SPEECH WAVE the eHect of phase shift in the
stages following the clipper-filter.
(C) a/so shows the manner in which
the transmiHer may be adjusted for
- _fQQ ~P_Q_S!.!.!~ MO...QUh_A..II~
100 per cent modulation of' the
___ _!0~ _!()!JTJYE_MO_Q_UJ..~TI,P~
"canted" peaks of the wave, the
sloping top of the wave reaching
AVERA VE about 70 per cent modulation.
_ _ .!._O~N~GA_!!V~QQ~A_I!O~
100 "'b NEGATIVE MODULATION
MODULATED WAVE AFTER UNDERGOING PHASE SHIFT
stages following the clipper-filter. Feed- (3) Again with the normal talking into the
ing the plate current to the final amplifier microphone adjust the gain following the
through a choke rather than through the clipper-filter to the point where the side-
secondary of the modulation transformer band splatter is being heard, and then
will help materially. slightly back off the gain after the clip-
Even with the normal amount of improvement per-filter until the splatter disappears.
which can be attained through the steps men- If the phase shift in the transmitter or mod-
tioned above there will still be an amount of ulator is not excessive the adjustment proced-
wave cant which must be compensated in some ure given above will allow a clean signal to be
manner. This compensation can be done in radiated regardless of any reasonable voice
either of two ways. The first and simpler way level being fed into the microphone.
is as follows: If a cathode-ray oscilloscope is available
(1) Adjust the speech gain ahead of the clip- the modulated envelope of the transmitter
per-filter until with normal talking into should be checked with 30 to 70 cycle saw-
the microphone the distortion being intro- tooth waves on the horizontal axis. If the upper
duced by the clipper-filter circuit is quite half of the envelope appears in general the
apparent but not objectionable. This amount same as the drawing of figure 15C, all is well
of distortion will be apparent to the normal and phase-shift is not excessive. However, if
listener when 10 to 15 db of clipping is much more slope appears on the tops of the
taking place. waves than is illustrated in this figure, it will
be well to apply the second step in compen-
( 2) Tune a selective communications receiver sation in order to insure that sideband splatter
about 15 kc. to one side or the other of the cannot take place and to afford a still higher
frequency being transmitted. Use a short average percentage of modulation. This second
antenna or no antenna at all on the re- step consists of the addition of a high-level
ceiver so that the transmitter is not block- splatter suppressor such as is illustrated in
ing the receiver. figure 17.
HANDBOOK Splatter Suppression 303
0~~4-~~~4-~-+~+-~-+4-~~_L
TO
PLATE-MODULATED
CLASS-C AMPLIFIER
3000 '\..WAVE FIL. TRANS. 7500-10000 OHMS
(0001
---INSULATED
FOR H.V.
LOAD
\
..r--
+B MOO. 11!JV.A.C. +B R.F. FINAL
Figure 17
HIGH-LEVEL SPLATTER SUPPRESSOR
This circuit is effective In reclucing splatter
I 000 '\..WAVE causecl by negative-peak clipping in the mocl-
ulatecl amplifier stage. The use of a two-
section Filter as shown is recommenclec/, al-
though either a single m-clerivecl or a con
stantk section may be usecl for greater econ
omy. Suitable chokes, a Ion g with recom
menclecl capacitor values, are available from
several manufacturers.
300 '\..WAVE
Hence negative-peak clipping with its attend
Figure 16 ant splatter cannot take place. Such a device
ILLUSTRATING THE EFFECT OF PHASE can, of course, also be used in a transmitter
SHIFT AND FILTERED WAVES OF DIF- which does not incorporate a clipper-filter sys
FERENT FREQUENCY tem. However, the full increase in average
Sketch (A} shows the eHect of a clipper ancl
modulation level without serious distortion,
a filter having a cutoff of about 3500 cycles
afforded by the clipper-filter system, will not
be obtained.
on a wave of 3000 cycles. Note that no har
monics are present in the wave so that phase
A word of caution should be noted at this
shift following the clipper-filter will have
time in the case of tetrode final modulated
no significant effect on the shape of the
amplifier stages which afford screen voltage
modulation by virtue of a tap or a separate
wave. (B) ancl (C) show the effect of phase
winding on the modulation transformer such
shift on waves well below the cutoff frequen
as is shown in figure 9C of this chapter. If
cy of the filter. Note that the" cant" p/acec/
such a system of modulation is in use, the
upon the top of the wave causes the peak
high-level splatter suppressor shown in figure
value to rise higher ancl higher above the
17 will not operate satisfactorily since nega
clipping Ieve/ as the frequency is lo werecl.
tivepeak clipping in the stage can take place
It is for this reason that bass suppression
when the screen voltage goes too low.
before the clipper stage is desirable. lm
provecl low-frequency response following the
Clipper Circuits Two effective low-level clip
clipper-filter will recluce the phase shift ancl
per-filter circuits are shown
therefore the canting of the wave at the lower
in figures 19 and 20. The circuit of figure 19
voice frequencies.
employs a 6J6 double triode as a clipper, each
half of the 6]6 clipping one side of the ;m
pressed waveform. The optimum level at which
The use of a high-level splatter suppressor the clipping operation begins is set by the
after a clipper-filter system will afford the re value of the cathode resistor. A maximum of
sult shown in figure 18 since such a device 12 to 14 db of clipping may be used with this
will not permit the negative-peak clipping circuit, which means that an extra 12 to 14 db
which the wave cant caused by audio-system of speech gain must precede the clipper. For
phase shift can produce. The high-level splat a peak output of 8 volts from the clipper-filter,
ter suppressor operates by virtue of the fact a peak audio signal of about 40 volts must be
that it will not permit the plate voltage on the impressed upon the clipper input circuit. The
modulated amplifier to go completely to zero 6C4 speech amplifier stage must therefore be
regardless of the incoming signal amplitude. considered as a part of the clipper circuit as
304 Amplitude Modulation THE R AD I 0
Figure 18
ACTION OF HIGH-LEVEL
SPLATTER SUPPRESSOR
A high-level splatter suppressor
may be used in a transmitter with-
ZERO AXIS out a cl ipperfilter to reduce nega
five-peak clipping, or such a unit
may be used following a clipper
filter to allow a higher average
100 CIJb NEG. MODULATION
modulation level by eliminating the
\ ,'~, SPLATTER-CAUSING
...... NEGATIVE OVERMODULATION PEAK negative-peak clipping which the
CUTOFF BY "HIGH-LEVEL'
SPLATTER SUPPRESSOR!' wave-cant caused by phase shift
might produce.
/ADJUST GAIN
TO NEXT
GRID
500 K
Figure 19
CLIPPER FILTER USING 6J6 DOUBLE TRIODE STAGE
HANDBOOK Splatter Suppression 305
56 K
Figure 20
CLIPPER FILTER USING 6ALS STAGE
Regardless of the point in the system fol- shown in figure 21 and discussed previously.
lowing the speech amplifier where the high Another method which will give excellent re
audio frequencies may be generated, these fre sults in some cases and poor results in others,
quencies can still cause a broad signal to be dependent upon the characteristics of the mod
transmitted even though all frequencies above ulation transformer, is to "build out" the mod
3000 or 3500 cycles have been cut off in the ulation transformer into a filter section. This
speech amplifier. The effects of distortion in is accomplished as shown in figure 22 by plac
the audio system following the speech ampli- ing mica capacitors of the correct value across
fier can be eliminated quite effectively through the primary and secondary of the modulation
the use of a post-modulator filter. Such a filter transformer. The proper values for the capaci-
must be used between the modulator plate cir
cuit and the rf amplifier which is being mod-
ulated.
This filter may take three general forms in
a normal case of a Class C amplifier plate mod
ulated by a Class B modulator. The best meth
od is to use a high level low-pass filter as
MODUL.ATOR
CLASS C AMPLIFIER
MODULATOR
~II
Figure 22
"BUILDING-OUT" THE MODULATION
TRANSFORMER
This expedient uti/ires the leakage react
once of the moc/ul at ion translormer in con
junction with the capacitors shown to make
B+ MOD. 8+ R.F. up a single-section lowpass li/ter. In order
to determine exact values for CI and c2 plus
Figure 21 C3, It is necessary to use a measurement
ADDITIONAL HIGH-LEVEL LOW-PASS FIL setup such as Is shown In figure 23. How
TER TO FOLLOW MODULATOR WHEN A ever, experiment has shown in the case of a
LOW-LEVEL CLIPPER FILTER IS USED number of commercially available modulotion
Suitable choke, alon9 with recommended ca transformers that a value for C 1 of 0.002-f.l-fd.
pacitor values, is a v a i I a b I e lrom several ancl c2 plus c3 af 0.004-J.Lfc/. will give satls
manufacturers. factory results.
306 Amplitude Modulation THE R AD I 0
R1
0
AUDIO
OSCILLOSCOPE
I
v /
OSCILLATOR
+
2 R3 .C, yg[\.METE
2f----.o0~
v /
C3
J 9 ~ ]I
4 / ?j
Figure 23 ID cf o"~ Tl
2- 5
TEST SETUP FOR BUILDING-OUT z -6
j_(_'?(~~~~~:'tt:t;,~~7f_,R~~~FOR
MODULATION TRANSFORMER 0
f= -7
..:
I II II
Through the use of a test setup such as is I
f1!.
::J
shown ancJ the methocJ cJescribecJ in the text z -
it is possible to determine the correct values
w
I-
I- - . I I
for a specified filter characteristic In the ..:
I
10 II RG=sooK
built-out modulation transformer.
II
... -
12 I JU
100
I 200 300 .500 700
Ill
1000 2000 3000 5000
tors cl and c2 must, in the ideal case, be de FREQUENCY (CPS)
termined by trial and error. Experiment with
a number of modulators has shown, however, Figure 24
that if a 0. 002 l!fd. capacitor is used for C1,
BASE ATTENUATION CHART
and if the sum of C2 and y is made 0. 004 l!fd.
(0.002 l!fd. for C2 and 0. 002 for C3) the ideal Frequency attenuation caused by various
condition of cutoff above 3000 cycles will be values of coupling capacitor with a grlcJ re
approached in most cases with the "multiple sistor of 0.5 megohm in the following stage
match" type of modulation transformer. (RG > RL)
If it is desired to determine the optimum
values of the capacitors across the transformer
this can be determined in several ways, all of
which require the use of a calibrated audio amplifier of such amplitude that limiting does
oscillator. One way is diagrammed in figure 23. not take place, a substantially clean sine wave
The series resistors R1 and R2 should each be should be obtained on the carrier of the trans-
equal to l-i the value of the recommended plate mitter at all input frequencies up to the cutoff
to-plate load resistance for the Class B modu- frequency of the filter system in the speech
lator tubes. Resistor ~ should be equal to the amplifier and of the filter which includes the
value of load resistance which the Class C modulation transformer. Above these cutoff
modulated stage will present to the modulator. frequencies very little modulation of the carrier
The meter V can be any type of ac voltmeter. wave should be obtained. To obtain a check
The indicating instrument on the secondary of on the effectiveness of the "built out" modu-
the transformer can be either a cathode-ray lation transformer, the capacitors across the
oscilloscope or a high-impedance ac volt primary and secondary should be removed for
meter of the vacuum-tube or rectifier type. the test. In most cases a marked deterioration
With a set-up as shown in figure 23 a plot of in the waveform output of the modulator will
output voltage against frequency is made, at be noticed with frequencies in the voice range
all times keeping the voltage across V con from 500 to 1500 cycles being fe<l into the
stant, using various values of capacitance for speech amplifier.
cl and c2 plus c3. When the proper values of A filter system similar to that shown in fig
capacitance have been determined which give ure 17 may be used between the modulator
substantially constant output up to about 3000 and the modulated circuit in a grid-modulated
or 3500 cycles and decreasing output at all fre or screen-modulated transmitter. Lower-voltage
quencies above, high-voltage mica capacitors capacitors and low-current chokes may of
can be substituted if receiving types were used course be employed.
in the tests and the transformer connected to
the modulator and Class C amplifier. Bass Suppression Most of the power repre
With the transformer reconnected in the sented by ordinary speech
transmitter a check of the modulated-wave (particularly the male voice) lies below 1000
output of the transmitter should be made using cycles. If all frequencies below 400 or 500
an audio oscillator as signal generator and an cycles are eliminated or substantially atten
oscilloscope coupled to the transmitter output. uated, there is a considerable reduction in
With an input signal amplitude fed to the speech power but insignificant reduction in intelligi
HANDBOOK Bass Suppression 307
.01
bility. This means that the speech level may
sr~
be increased considerably without overmodu-
lation or overload of the audio system. In
addition, if speech clipping is used, attenua-
tion of the lower audio frequencies before the
clipper will reduce phase shift and canting of +B L .. "IOHENRY"'MIDGET
A C-DC FILTER CHOKE
the clipper output. (STANCOR C-/JJJ)
CLASS C
+lP
AMPLIFIER
I I p (MAX SIGNAL)
-EG /
I PLATE CURRENT
EXCUrSION
I p (NO Sf GNAL)
+Eo
1
CUT-OFF
@ 0
BIAS
81 AS -SH 1FT
EXC URSION
~ -[p
CLASS A OPERATING
BIAS LINE
QUIESCENT
BIAS LINE
Figure 28
BLOCK DIAGRAM OF
Figure 27 BIAS-SHIFT MODULATOR
BIAS-SHIFT MODULATOR
OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS
B+ TO MODULATED B+ 10 MODULATED
R-F AMPLl Fl ER SPEECH R-F AMPLIFIER
~
+
B lAS CONTROL
RECTI Fl ER
NE<;ATIVE
MODULATOR BIAS
Figure 29
"SERIES" CONTROL CIRCUIT
FOR BIAS-SHIFT MODULATOR Figure 30
"PARALLEL" CONTROL
The internal resistance of the CIRCUIT FOR BIAS-SHIFT
bias control tube is varied ot a MODULATOR
syllabic rate to change the
operating bias of the modulator The resistance to ground of point
tube. A in the bias network is varied
at a syllabic rate by the bias
control tube.
304-TL
Figure 31
500-WATT BIAS SHIFT MODULATOR
~,
0.2
o.4
0.5
I.
.
.,,
,_02_3___
1.047
1.096
1.122
_ ___
---1-----
~ ,. .JF ___, :- -- .....
.0,_2_ _ _ _ _ _ _
1.023
1.047
1.059
I,
~
14
16
------
17
____ ~53
25 119
39 611
50.119
4.467
5.012
..m
6.310
7.079
_
r----
o.e
0. 7
,_,4a
1.1_7_5_ _ ,
, 012.
1.084
IL-.......-
=-:]~--- - 1s
19 '
63.o9e
-79.433
_ _ _---l
7.94_3
8.9_1_3_ _ _ _
~~:: -c-~:
1.0
-
~---------~----------+---------1
1.259
::~::
1.122
EJ' --~+---=1' -~.::0
24 251.19
:::::: --
15.849
1.2 26
_
I 1318 1.148 388,11 19.953
34 ----1----2~- 50.119
2. 2 o 1. 288 L 36 ---+-
l_::3_9_8..c'c.c.'_ _ _ _-+--6-3_.c:.oc:.9_6c___ _
2.4 8 1.318 I ---38___ 6309.6 i 79.433
I
6 3 0. 96
794.33
1ooo.o
9 ___ -~~- -7-_..-9-4-, -
10
________ -2.~---~ 70-- ----,-o-7 _3_,__6__ _ _ _ ____,
2 3
r----------t------------j------';---'-6"'2=-~~~~:::_],
I 0 00 0 _ _ -~--- -=---;-;-s ------ ~o_o_ _ _ -
11 12.589 3.548 !1 9o _____ ~------l-~'623 o
r---1-2_ _ _ _ _+--,-5-.-8-4_9_ _ _--t---3-.-9-8-,-------J, 1------1-o--o- , o' o 1 , ooo_o_o_o_ _ _ ____,
CHAPTER SIXTEEN
Exciter systems for FM and single sideband the advantages of FM for certain types of com-
transmission are basically similar in that modi- munication pointed out. Since the distinguish-
fication of the signal in accordance with the ing features of the two types of transmission
intelligence to be transmitted is normally ac- lie entirely in the modulating circuits at the
complished at a relatively low level. Then the transmitter and in the detector and limiter cir-
intelligence-bearing signal is amplified to the cuits in the receiver, these parts of the com-
desired power level for ultimate transmission. munication system will receive the major por-
True, amplifiers for the two types of signals tion of attention.
are basically different; linear amplifiers of the
Class, A or Class B type being used for ssb Modulation Modulation is the process of al-
signals, while Class C or non-linear Class B tering a radio wave in accordance
amplifiers may be used for FM amplification. with the intelligence to be transmitted. The
But the principle of low-level generation and nature of the intelligence is of little impor-
subsequent amplification is standard for both tance as far as the process of modulation is
types of transmission. concerned; it is the method by which this in
telligence is made to give a distinguishing
characteristic to the radio wave which will
16-1 Frequency Modulation enable the receiver to convert it back into in-
telligence that determines the type of modu-
The use of frequency modulation and the lation being used.
allied system of phase modulation has become Figure 1 is a drawing of an r-f carrier am-
of increasing importance in recent years. For plitude modulated by a sine-wave audio volt-
amateur communication frequency and phase age. After modulation the resultant modulated
modulation offer important advantages in the r-f wave is seen still to vary about the zero
reduction of broadcast and TV interference axis at a constant rate, but the strength of the
and in the elimination of the costly high-level individual r-f cycles is proportional to the am-
modulation equipment most commonly employed plitude of the modulation voltage.
with amplitude modulation. For broadcast work In figure 2, the carrier of figure 1 is shown
FM offers an improvement in signal-to-noise frequency modulated by the same modulating
ratio for the high field intensities available voltage. Here it may be seen that modulation
in the local-coverage area of FM and TV broad- voltage of one polarity causes the carrier fre-
cast stations. quency to decrease, as shown by the fact that
In this chapter various points of difference the individual r-f cycles of the carrier ate
between FM and amplitude modulation trans- spaced farther apart. A modulating voltage of
mission and reception will be discussed and the opposite polarity causes the frequency to
312
Frequency Modulation 313
CARRIER
w
Cl
;:: SIDE FREQUENCY SIDE FREQUENCY
J
0..
::;
<
FREQUENCY
Figure 3
AM SIDE FREQUENCIES
For each AM modulating frequency, a pair of side
FIGURE 1 FIGURE 2 frequencies is produced. The side frequencies are
spaced away from the carrier by an amount equal
to the modulation frequency, and their arrplitude
is directly proportional to the arrplitude of the
modulation. The arrplitude of the carrier does not
AM AND FM WAVES change under modulation.
Figure 1 shows a sketch of the scope pattern of
an arrpl itude modulated wave at the boHom. The
center sketch shows the modulating wave and the
upper sketch shows the carrier wave.
Figure 2 shows at the bottom a sketch of a fre- Carrier-Wave The second characteristic of FM
quency modulated wave. In this case the center Distortion and AM waves revealed by fig-
sketch also shows the modulating wave and the
upper sketch shows the carrier wave. Note that ures 1 and 2 is that both types
the carrier wave and the modulating wave are the of modulation result in distortion of the r-f
same in either case, but that the waveform of the carrier. That is, after modulation, the rf cy-
modulated wave is quite different in the twa cles are no longer sine waves, as they would
cases.
be if no frequencies other than the fundamen-
tal carrier frequency were present. It may be
shown in the amplitude modulation case illus-
trated, that there are only two additional fre-
increase, and this is shown by the r-f cycles quencies present, and these are the familiar
being squeezed together to allow more of them side frequencies, one located on each side of
to be completed in a given time interval. the carrier, and each spaced from the carrier
Figures 1 and 2 reveal two very important by a frequency interval equal to the modula-
characteristics about amplitude- and frequen- tion frequency. In regard to frequency and am-
cy-modulated waves. First, it is seen that plitude, the situation is as shown in figure 3.
while the amplitude (power) of the signal is The strength of the carrier itself does not vary
varied in AM transmission, no such variation during modulation, but the strength of the side
takes place in FM. In many cases this advan- frequencies depends upon the percentage of
tage of FM is probably of equal or greater im- modulation. At 100 per cent modulation the
portance than the widely publicized noise re- power in the side frequencies is equal to half
duction capabilities of the system. When 100 that of the carrier.
per cent amplitude modulation is obtained, the Under frequency modulation, the carrier wave
average power output of the transmitter must again becomes distorted, as shown in figure
be increased by 50 per cent. This additional 2. But, in this case, many more than two addi-
output must be supplied either by the modu- tional frequencies are formed. The first two of
lator itself, in the high-level system, or by these frequencies are spaced from the carrier
operating one or more of the transmitter stages by the modulation frequency, and the additional
at such a low output level that they are capa- side frequencies are located out on each side
ble of producing the additional output without of the carrier and are also spaced from each
distortion, in the low-level system. On the other by an amount equal to the modulation fre-
other hand, a frequency-modulated transmitter quency. Theoretically, there are an infinite
requires an insignificant amount of power from number of side frequencies formed, but, for-
the modulator and needs no provision for in- tunately, the strength of those beyond the fre-
creased power output on modulation peaks. quency swing of the transmitter under modula-
All of the stages between the oscillator and tion is relatively low.
the antenna may be operated as high-efficiency One set of side frequencies that might be
Class B or Class C amplifiers or frequency formed by frequency modulation is shown in
multipliers. figure 4. Unlike amplitude modulation, the
314 FM Transmission THE R AD I 0
"1-
:::> SIDE
FREQUENCIES
SIDE
FREQUENCIES
the resting frequency is obtained during each
:; ~~
cycle of the modulating signal, and the total
0..
~ frequency range covered by the FM transmitter
< is sometimes known as the swing. If, for in-
stance, a transmitter operating on 1000 kc.
FREQUENCY has its frequency shifted from 1000 kc. to 1010
kc., back to 1000 kc., then to 990 kc., and
Figure 4
again back to 1000 kc. during one cycle of the
FM SIDE FREQUENCIES
modulating wave, the deviation would be 10
With FM each modulation frequency corrponent
kc. and the swing 20 kc.
causes a large number of sicle frequencies to be The modulation index of an FM signal is
pmclucecl. The sicle frequencies are separated the ratio of the deviation to the audio modu-
fmm each other one/ the carrier by an amount equal lating frequency, when both are expressed in
to the rrr>clulation frequency, but their arrpl itucle the same units. Thus, in the example above
varies greatly as the amount of modulation Is
changed. The ca"ier strength also varies greatly if the signal is varied from 1000 kc. to 1010
with frequency modulation. The sicle frequencies kc. to 990 kc., and back to 1000 kc. at a rate
shown represent a case where the clevlation each (frequency) of 2000 times, a second, the mod-
sicle of the "carrier" frequency is equal to five ulation index would be 5, since the deviation
times the moclul ati ng frequency. Other amounts of
deviation with the same moclulat/on frequency (10 kc.) is 5 times the modulating frequency
woulcl cause the relative strengths of the various (2000 cycles, or 2 kc.).
siclebancls to change widely. The relative strengths of the FM carrier and
the various side frequencies depend directly
upon the modulation index, these relative
strengths varying widely as the modulation
strength of the component at the carrier fre- index is varied. In the preceding example, for
quency varies widely in FM and it may even instance, side frequencies occur on the high
disappear entirely under certain conditions. side of 1000 kc. at 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008,
The variation of strength of the carrier com- 1010, 1012, etc., and on the low frequency
ponent is useful in measuring the amount of side at 998, 996, 994, 992, 990, 988, etc. In
frequency modulation, and will be discussed proportion to the unmodulated carrier strength
in detail later in this chapter. (100 per cent), these side frequencies have
One of the great advantages of FM over AM the following strengths, as indicated by a
modulation index of 5: 1002 and 998-33 per
is the reduction in noise at the receiver which
cent, 1004 and 996-5 per cent, 1006 and 994-
the system allows. If the receiver is made re-
36 per cent, 1008 and 992-39 per cent, 1010
sponsive only to changes in frequency, a con-
and 990-26 per cent, 1012 and 988-13 per
siderable increase in signal-to-noise ratio is
cent. The carrier strength (1000 kc.) will be
made possible through the use of FM, when 18 per cent of its unmodulated value. Chang-
the signal is of greater strength than the noise. ing the amplitude of the modulating signal will
The noise reducing capabilities of FM arise change the deviation, and thus the modulation
from the inability of noise to cause appreciable index will be changed, with the result that the
frequency modulation of the noise-plus-signal side frequencies, while still located in the
voltage which is applied to the detector in the same places, will have different strength values
receiver. from those given above.
The deviation ratio is similar to the modu-
FM Terms Unlike amplitude modulation, the lation index in that it involves the ratio be-
term percentage 11KJdulation means tween a modulating frequency and deviation.
little in FM practice, unless the receiver char- In this case, however, the deviation in ques-
acteristics are specified. There are, however, tion is the peak frequency shift obtained under
three terms, deviation, modulation index, and full modulation, and the audio frequency to be
deviation ratio, which convey considerable considered is the maximum audio frequency to
information concerning the character of the be transmitted. When the maximum audio fre-
FMwave. quency to be transmitted is 5000 cycles, for
Deviation is the amount of frequency shift example, a deviation ratio of 3 would call for
each side of the unmodulated carrier frequency a peak deviation of 3 x 5000, or 15 kc. at full
which occurs when the transmitter is modu- .nodulation. The noise-suppression capabili-
lated. Deviation is ordinarily measured in kilo- ties of FM are directly related to the devia-
cycles, and in a properly operating FM trans- tion ratio. As the deviation ratio is increased,
HANDBOOK Narrow Band FM 315
the noise suppression becomes better if the the transmitter is swung are so small that
signal is somewhat stronger than the noise. most of them may be ignored. In FM trans-
Where the noise approaches the signal in mission, when a complex modulating wave
strength, however, low deviation ratios allow (speech or music) is used, still additional
communication to be maintained in many cases side frequencies resulting from a beating to-
where high-deviation-ratio FM and conven- gether of the various frequency components
tional AM are incapable of giving service. in the modulating wave are formed. This is a
This assumes that a narrow-band FM receiver situation that does not occur in amplitude
is in use. For each value of r-f signal-to-noise modulation and it might be thought that the
quio at the receiver, there is a maximum de- large number of side frequencies thus formed
viation ratio which may be used, beyond which might make the frequency spectrum produced
the output audio signal-to-noise ratio de- by an FM transmitter prohibitively wide. Analy-
creases. Up to this critical deviation ratio, sis shows, however, that the additional side
however, the noise suppression becomes pro- frequencies are of very small amplitude, and,
gressively better as the deviation ratio is in- instead of increasing the bandwidth, modula-
creased. tion by a complex wave actually reduces the
For high-fidelity FM broadcasting putposes, effective bandwidth of the FM wave. This is
a deviation ratio of 5 is ordinarily used, the especially true when speech modulation is
maximum audio frequency being 15,000 cycles, used, since most of the power in voiced sounds
and the peak deviation at full modulation be- is concentrated at low frequencies in the vicin-
ing 75 kc. Since a swing of 150 kc. is covered ity of 400 cycles.
by the transmitter, it is obvioll's that wide- The bandwidth required in an FM receiver
band FM transmission must necessarily be is a function of a number of factors, both theo-
confined to the v-h-f range or higher, where retical and practical. Basically, the bandwidth
room for the signals is available. required is a function of the deviation ratio
In the case of television sound, the devia- and the maximum frequency of modulation,
tion ratio is 1.67; the maximum modulation although the practical consideration of drift
frequency is 15,000 cycles, and the trans- and ease of receiver tuning also must be con-
mitter deviation for full modulation is 25 kc. sidered. Shown in figure 5 are the frequency
The sound carrier frequency in a standard TV
spectra (carrier and sideband frequencies)
signal is located exactly 4.5 Me. higher than
associated with the standard FM broadcast
the picture carrier frequency. In the inter-
signal, the TV sound signal, and an amateur-
carrier TV sound system, which recently has
band narrow-band FM signal with full modula-
become quite widely used, this constant differ-
tion using the highest permissible modulating
ence between the picture carrier and the sound
carrier is employed within the receiver to ob- frequency in each case. It will be seen that
tain an FM sub-carrier at 4.5 Me. This 4.5 for low deviation ratios the receiver band-
Me. sub-carrier then is demodulated by the FM widrh should be at least four times the maxi-
detector to obtain the sound signal which mum frequency deviation, but for a deviation
accompanies the picture. ratio of 5 the receiver bandwidth need be only
about 2. 5 times the maximum frequency de-
Narrow-Band Narrow-band FM trans- viation.
FM Transmission mission has become stand-
ardized for use by the mo-
bile services such as police, fire, and taxi- 16-2 Direct FM Circuits
cab communication, and also on the basis of
a temporary authorization for amateur work in Frequency modulation may be obtained either
portions of each of the amateur radiotelephone by the direct method, in which the frequency
bands. A maximum deviation of 15 kc. has of an oscillator is changed directly by the
been standardized for the mobile and commer- modulating signal, or by the indirect method
cial communication services, while a maxi- which makes use of phase modulation. Phase-
mum deviation of 3 kc. is authorized for ama- modulation circuits will be discussed in sec-
teur NBFM communication. tion 16-3.
A successful frequency modulated trans-
Bandwidth Re As the above discussion has mitter must meet two requirements: (1) The
qulred by FM indicated, many side frequen- frequency deviation must be symmetrical about
cies are set up when a radio- a fixed frequency, for symmetrical modulation
frequency carrier is frequency modulated; theo- voltage. (2) The deviation must be directly
retically, in fact, an infinite number of side proportional to the amplitude of the modula-
frequencies is formed. Fortunately, however, tion, and independent of the modulation fre-
the amplitudes of those side frequencies fall- quency. There are several methods of direct
ing outside the frequency range over which frequency modulation which will fulfill these
316 FM Transmission THE R AD I 0
0 FM BROADCAST DEVIATION- 75 KC
MOO. FREQ,-15 KC.
OSCILLATOR IN
f. 7 5 MC. RANGE
MOO. INDEX-~
+1S0-200V.
TV SOUND DEVIATION- 25 KC.
MOO. FREQ.- 1~ KC.
REGULATED
47K
lOOK
rl~
LQ-
is to apply the audio to a grid other than the
control grid in a mixer or pentagrid converter
tube which is used as the modulator. Gener-
ally, it will be found that the transconductance
variation per volt of control-element voltage
C3, .001 variation will be greatest when the control
AUDIO +I!:.0-250 v. (audio) voltage is applied to the control grid.
IN REGULATED
In cases where it is desirable to separate com-
pletely the audio and rf circuits, however,
Figure 7 applying audio voltage to one of the other ele-
ALTERNATIVE REACTANCE- TUBE ments will often be found advantageous de-
MODULATOR spite the somewhat lower sensitivity.
This circuit is often preferable for use in the
lower frequency range, although it may be Adjusting the One of the simplest methods
usee! at 1. 75 Me. ancl above if clesirecl. In the
schematic above the reactance tube is shown Phase Shift of adjusting the phase shift to
connected across the voltageclivicler capaci the correct amount is to place
tors of a Clapp oscillator, although the moclu- a pair of earphones in series with the oscilla
lator circuit may be usee/ with any common
type of oscillator. tor cathode-to-ground circuit and adjust the
phase-shift network until minimum sound is
heard in the phones when frequency modula-
tion is taking place. If an electron-coupled or
Hartley oscillator is used, this method re-
However, better control of the operating con- quires that the cathode circuit of the oscilla-
ditions of the modulator may be had through tor be inductively or capacitively coupled to
the use of a variable capacitor as C 3 Resist- the grid circuit, rather than tapped on the grid
ance R will usually have a value of between coil. The phones should be adequately by-
4700 and 100,000 ohms. Either resistance or passed for r.f. of course.
transformer coupling may be used to feed audio
voltage to the modulator grid. When a resist-
ance coupling is used, it is necessary to shield Stabilization Due to the presence of the react-
the grid circuit adequately, since the high im- ance-rube frequency modulator,
pedance grid circuit is prone to pick up stray the stabilization of an FM oscillator in regard
r-f and low frequency a-c voltage, and cause to voltage changes is considerably more in-
undesired frequency modulation. volved than in the case of a simple self-con-
An alternative reactance modulator circuit trolled oscillator for transmitter frequency
is shown in figure 7. The operating conditions control. If desired, the oscillator itself may be
are generally the same, except that the r-f made perfectly stable under voltage changes,
excitation voltage to the grid of the reactance but the presence of the frequency modulator
tube is obtained effectively through reversing destroys the beneficial effect of any such
the R and C 3 of figure 6. In this circuit a small stabilization. It thus becomes desirable to
capacitance is used to couple r.f. into the grid apply the stabilizing arrangement to the modu-
of the reactance tube, with a relatively small lator as well as the oscillator. If the oscilla-
value of resistance from grid to ground. This tor itself is stable under voltage changes, it
circuit has the advantage that the grid of the is only necessary to apply voltage-frequency
tube is at relatively low impedance with re- compensation to the modulator.
spect to r.f. However, the circuit normally is
not suitable for operation above a few mega- Reactance Tube Two simple reactance-tube
cycles due to the shunting capacitance within Modulators modulators that may be applied
the tube from grid to ground. to an existing v.f.o. are illus-
Either of the reactance-tube circuits may trated in figures 8 and 9. The circuit of figure
be used with any of the common types of os- 8 is extremely simple, yet effective. Only two
cillators. The reactance modulator of figure tubes are used exclusive of the voltage regu-
6 is shown connected to the high-impedance lator tubes which perhaps may be already in-
point of a conventional hot-cathode Hartley corporated in the v.f.o. A 6AU6 serves as a
oscillator, while that of figure 7 is shown con- high-gain voltage amplifier stage, and a 6CL6
nected across the low-impedance capacitors is used as the reactance modulator since its
of a seriestuned Clapp oscillator. high value of transconductance will permit a
There are several possible variations of the large value of lagging current to be drawn
basic reactance-tube modulator circuits shown under modulation swing. The unit should be
318 FM Transmission THE R AD I 0
6AU6 6CL6
Figure 8
SIMPLE FM REACTANCE-TUBE MODULATOR
mounted in close proximity to the v.f.o. so that The reactance modulator may best be ad
the lead from the 6CL6 to the grid circuit of justed by listening to the signal of the vfo
the oscillator can be as short as possible. A exciter at the operating frequency and adjust
practical solution is to mount the reactance ing the gain and clipping controls for the best
modulator in a small box on the side of the modulation level consistent with minimum side
vfo cabinet. band splatter. Minimum clipping occurs when
By incorporating speech clipping in the re the Adj. Clip. potentiometer is set for ma11:imum
actance modulator unit, a much more effective voltage on the plates of the 6AL5 clipper tube.
use is made of a given amount of deviation. As with the case of all reactance modulators,
When the FM signal is received on an AM re a voltage regulated plate supply is required.
ceiver by means of slope detection, the use
of speech clipping will be noticed by the great
ly increased modulation level of the FM sig
nal, and the attenuation of the center frequency It is almost a necessity to run
Linearity Test
null of no modulation. In many cases, it is a static test on the reactance-
difficult to tell a speechclipped FM signal tube frequency modulator to determine its line
from the usual AM signal. arity and effectiveness, since small changes
A more complex FM reactance modulator in in the values of components, and in stray ca
corporating a speech clipper is shown in fig pacitances will almost certainly alter the modu
ure 9. A 12AX7 double triode speech amplifier lator characteristics. A frequencyversuscon
provides enough gain for proper clipper action trolvoltage curve should be plotted to ascer
when a high level crystal microphone is used. tain that equal increments in control voltage,
A double diode 6AL5 speech clipper is used, both in a positive and a negative direction,
the clipping level being set by the potentiome cause equal changes in frequency. If the curve
ter controlling the plate voltage applied to the shows that the modulator has an appreciable
diode. A 6CL6 serves as the reactance modu amount of non-linearity, changes in bias, elec-
lator. trode voltages, r-f excitation, and resistance
6AL5 6CL6
ADJUST FOR
CORRECT VR CURRENr
Figure 9
FM REACTANCE MODULATOR WITH SPEECH CLIPPER
HANDBOOK Phase Modulation 319
TO MODUl-ATOR
CONTROL ELEMENT
which the modulator operates, but is depend
ent only upon the phase deviation which is
being produced and upon the modulation fre
&ooon. quency. Expressed as an equation:
4.!)V. 4.~v.
F d "' Mp modulating frequency
-
ltll+ ltil + Where F d is the frequency deviation one way
from the mean value of the carrier, and Mp is
the phase deviation accompanying modulation
expressed in radians (a radian is approximately
Figure 10
57 .3). Thus, to take an example, if the phase
REACTANCE TUBE LINEARITY CHECKER
deviation is ~ radian and the modulating fre
quency is 1000 cycles, the frequency deviation
applied to the carrier being passed through
the phase modulator will be 500 cycles.
values may be made to obtain a straight-line It is easy to see that an enormous amount
characteristic. of multiplication of the carrier frequency is
Figure 10 shows a method of connecting required in order to obtain from a phase modu
two 4~-volt C batteries and a potentiometer lator the frequency deviation of 75 kc. required
to plot the characteristic of the modulator. It for commercial FM broadcasting. However, for
will be necessary to use a zero-center volt- amateur and commercial narrow-band FM work
meter to measure the grid voltage, or else re (NBFM) only a quite reasonable number of
verse the voltmeter leads when changing from multiplier stages are required to obtain a de-
positive to negative grid voltage. When a viation ratio of approximately one. Actually,
straight-line characteristic for the modulator
phase modulation of approximately one-half
is obtained by the static test method, the ca
radian on the output of a crystal oscillator in
pacitances of the various by-pass capacitors
the SO-meter band will give adequate deviation
in the circuit must be kept small to retain this
for 29-Mc. NBFM radiotelephony. For example;
characteristic when an audio voltage is used
if the crystal frequency is 3700 kc., the de
to vary the frequency in place of the dc volt
viation in phase produced is ~ radian, and the
age with which the characteristic was plotted.
modulating frequency is 500 cycles, the devia
tion in the SO-meter band will be 250 cycles.
16-3 Phase Modulation But when the crystal frequency is multiplied
on up to 29,600 kc. the frequency deviation
By means of phase modulation (PM) it is will also be multiplied by S so that the result
possible to dispense with self-controlled os ing deviation on the 10-meter band will be 2 kc.
cillators and to obtain directly crystal-con either side of the carrier for a total swing in
trolled FM. In the final analysis, PM is sim carrier frequency of 4 kc. This amount of de-
ply frequency modulation in which the devia viation is quite adequate for NBFM work.
tion is directly proportional to the modulation Odd-harmonic distortion is produced when
frequency. If an audio signal of 1000 cycles FM is obtained by the phase-modulation meth
causes a deviation of ~ kc., for example, a od, and the amount of this distortion that can
2000-cycle modulating signal of the same am be tolerated is the limiting factor in determin
plitude will give a deviation of 1 kc., and so ing the amount of PM that can be used. Since
on. To produce an FM signal, it is necessary the aforementioned frequency-correcting net
to make the deviation independent of the modu- work causes the lowest modulating frequency
lation frequency, and proportional only to the to have the greatest amplitude, maximum phase
modulating signal. With PM this is done by modulation takes place at the lowest modu
including a frequency correcting network in lating frequency, and the amount of distortion
the transmitter. The audio correction network that can be tolerated at this frequency deter
must have an attenuation that varies directly mines the maximum deviation that can be ob
with frequency, and this requirement is easily tained by the PM method. For high-fidelity
met by a very simple resistance-capacity net broadcasting, the deviation produced by PM is
work. limited to an amount equal to about one-third
The only disadvantage of PM, as compared of the lowest modulating frequency. But for
to direct FM such as is obtained through the NBFM work the deviation may be as high as
use of a reactance-tube modulator, is the fact 0.6 of the modulating frequency before distor
that very little frequency deviation is pro tion becomes objectionable on voice modula-
duced directly by the phase modulator. The tion. In other terms .this means that phase de
deviation produced by a phase modulator is viations as high as 0.6 radian may be used for
independent of the actual carrier frequency on amateur and commercial NBFM transmission.
320 FM Transmission THE R AD I 0
12AX7 6CL6
Figure 12
REACTANCE MODULATOR FOR 10, 15 AND 20 METER OPERATION
16-4 Reception of FM
Signals
Figure 14
FM RECEIVER BLOCK DIAGRAM Figure IS
Up to the amp/ /tude I /miter stage, the FM SLOPE DETECTION OF FM SIGNAL
receiver is similar to an AM receiver, except One side of the response characteristic of a
for a somewhat wider i-f bandwidth. The lim tuned circuit or of an i-f amp/ ifier may be
iter removes any amplitude moclulation, one/ used as shown to convert frequency varia-
the frequency detector following the limiter tions of an incoming signal into amplitude
converts frequency variations into amplitucle variations.
variations.
bilities of the FM system ot transmission are of frequency variations into amplitude varia-
desired, is a limiting device to eliminate am tions, since the linear portion of the curve is
plitude variations before they reach the de rather shon. Any frequency variation which
tector. A block diagram of the essential parts exceeds the linear portion will cause distor-
of an FM receiver is shown in figure 14. tion of the recovered audio. It is also obvious
by inspection of figure 15 that an AM receiver
The Frequency The simplest device for con- used in this manner is wide open to signals
Detector verting frequency variations on the peak of the resonance curve and also
to amplitude variations is an to signals on the other side of the resonance
"offtune" resonant circuit, as illustrated in curve. Further, no noise limiting action is af
figure 15. With the carrier tuned in at point forded by this type of reception. This system,
"A," a certain amount of r-f voltage will be therefore, is not recommended for FM recep-
developed across the tuned circuit, and, as tion, although widely used by amateurs for
the frequency is varied either side of this fre- occasional NBFM reception.
quency by the modulation, the r-f voltage will
increase and decrease to points "C" and "B" Travis Discriminator Another form of frequen
in accordance with the modulation. If the volt cy detector or dis crimi
age across the tuned circuit is applied to an nator, is shown in figure 16. In this arrange
ordinary detector, the detector output will vary ment two tuned circuits are used, one tuned
in accordance with the modulation, the ampli on each side of the i-f amplifier frequency,
tude of the variation being proportional to the and with their resonant frequencies spaced
deviation of the signal, and the rate being slightly more than the expected transmitter
equal to the modulation frequency. It is obvious swing. Their outputs are combined in a differ
from figure 15 that only a small portion of the entia! rectifier so that the voltage across the
resonance curve is usable for linear conversion series load resistors, R, and R 2 , is equal to
the algebraic sum of the individual output
voltages of each rectifier. When a signal at the
Figure 18
FOSTER-SEELEY DISCRIMINATOR
This discriminator is the most wiclely usee/
circuit since it is capable of excellent lin
earity one/ is relatively simple to align when
proper test equipment is available. Figure 19
DISCRIMINATOR VECTOR DIAGRAM
A signal at the resonant frequency of the
secondary will cause the secondary voltage
i-f mid-frequency is received, the voltages to be 90 clegrees out of phase with the pri-
mary voltage, as shown at A, one/ the result-
across the load resistors are equal and oppo- ant voltages R one/ R' are equal. If the sig-
site, and the sum voltage is zero. As the r-f nal frequency changes, the phase relation-
signal varies from the mid-frequency, however, ship also changes, one/ the resultant voltages
these individual voltages become unequal, and are no longer equal, as shown at B. A cliffer-
a voltage having the polarity of the larger volt- ential rectifier is usee/ to give an output volt-
age proportional to the difference between
age and equal to the difference between the R one/ R'.
two voltages appears across the series resis-
tors, and is applied to the audio amplifier.
The relationship between frequency and dis-
criminator output voltage is shown in figure
ing and the primary winding in series, the re-
17. The separation of the discriminator peaks
sultant r-f voltages applied to each are equal,
and the linearity of the output voltage vs. fre-
and the voltages developed across each diode
quency curve depend upon the discriminator
load resistor are equal and of opposite polar-
frequency, the Q of the tuned circuits, and the
ity. Hence, the net voltage between the top of
value of the diode load resistors. As the inter-
the load resistors and ground is zero. This is
mediate (and discriminator) frequency is in-
shown vectorially in figure 19A where the re-
creased, the peaks must be separated further to
secure good linearity and output. Within limits, sultant voltages R and R' which are applied
as the diode load resistance or the Q is re- to the two diodes are shown to be equal when
duced, the linearity improves, and the separa- the phase angle between primary and second-
tion between the peaks must be greater. ary voltages is 90 degrees. If, however, the
signal varies from rhe resonant frequency, the
Foster-Seeley The most widely used form of 90-degree phase relationship no longer exists
Discriminator discriminator is that shown in between primary and secondary. The result of
figure 18. This type of discrimi- this effect is shown in figure 198 where the
nator yields an output-voltage-versus-frequen- secondary r-f voltage is no longer 90 degrees
cy characteristic similar to that shown in fig- out of phase with respect to the primary volt-
ure 19. Here, again, the output voltage is equal age. The resultant voltages applied to the two
to the algebraic sum of the voltages developed diodes are now no longer equal, and a d-e
across the load resistors of the two diodes, voltage proportional to the difference between
the resistors being connected in series to the r-f voltages applied to the two diodes will
ground. However, this Foster-Seeley discrim- exist across the series load resistors. As the
inator requires only two tuned circuits instead signal frequency varies back and forth across
of the three used in the previous discriminator. the resonant frequency of the discriminator,
The operation of the circuit results from the an a-c voltage of the same frequency as the
phase relationships existing in a transformer original modulation, and proportional to the
having a tuned secondary. In effect, as a close deviation, is developed and passed on to the
examination of the circuit will reveal, the pri- audio amplifier.
mary circuit is in series, for r.f., with each
half of the secondary to ground. When the re- Ratio One of the more recent types of FM
ceived signal is at the resonant frequency of Detector detector circuits, called the ratio
the secondary, the r-f voltage across the sec- detector is diagrammed in figure 20.
ondary is 90 degrees out of phase with that The input transformer can be designed so that
across the primary. Since each diode is con- the parallel input voltage to the diodes can be
nected across one half of the secondary wind- taken from a tap on the primary of the trans-
324 FM Transmission THE R AD I 0
RFC
A.V.C OUTPUT
33 fOJJF.
K +
TO
DISCRIM-
100K INATOR
+250
A.F. OUTPUT
Figure 21
Figure 20 LIMITER CIRCUIT
RATIO DETECTOR CIRCUIT One, or sometimes two, limiter stages nor ..
The parallel voltage to the c/ioc/es in a ratio molly precede the discriminator sa that a con-
detector may be obtained from a tap on the stant signal level will be feel to the FM de
primary winding of the transformer or from tector. This procedure eliminates amplitude
a third winding. Note that one of the cliocles variations in the signal feel to the discrimi
is reversed from the system usee/ with the nator, so that it will respond only to frequen-
Foster-Seeley discriminator, ancl that the cy changes.
output circuit is completely different. The
ratio detector c/oes not hove to be prececlecl
by a limiter, but is more difficult to align for
distortion-free output than the conventional
discriminator. an incoming signal. This factor alone means
that the r-f and i-f gain ahead of the detector
can be much less than the conventional dis-
criminator for the same overall sensitivity.
former, or this voltage may be obtained from a Further, the circuit provides a-v-e voltage for
tertiary winding coupled to the primary. The controlling the gain of the preceding r-f and
r-f choke used must have high impedance at i-f stages. The ratio detector is, however, sus-
the intermediate frequency used in the receiver, ceptible to variations in the amplitude of the
although this choke is not needed if the trans- incoming signal as is any other detector cir-
former has a tertiary winding. cuit except the discriminator with a limiter
The circuit of the ratio detector appears preceding it, so that a-v-e should be used on
very similar to that of the more conventional the stages preceding the detector.
discriminator arrangement. However, it will be
noted that the two diodes in the ratio detector
are poled so that their d-e output voltages add, Limiters The limiter of an FM receiver using
as contrasted to the Foster-Seeley circuit a conventional discriminator serves
wherein the diodes are poled so that the d-e to remove amplitude modulation and pass on
output voltages buck each other. At the center to the discriminator a frequency modulated
frequency to which the discriminator trans- signal of constant amplitude; a typical circuit
former is tuned the voltage appearing at the is shown in figure 21. The limiter tube is oper-
top of the !-megohm potentiometer will be one- ated as an i-f stage with very low plate volt-
half the d-e voltage appearing at the a-v-e out- age and with grid leak bias, so that it over-
put terminal-since the contribution of each loads quite easily. Up to a certain point the
diode will be the same. However, as the input output of the limiter will increase with an in-
frequency varies to one side or the other of crease in signal. Above this point, however,
the tuned value (while remaining within the the limiter becomes overloaded, and further
pass band of the i-f amplifier feeding the de- large increases in signal will not give any in-
tector) the relative contributions of the two crease in output. To operate successfully, the
diodes will be different. The voltage appearing limiter must be supplied with a large amount
at the top of the 1-megohm volume control will of signal, so that the amplitude of its output
increase for frequency deviations in one direc- will not change for rather wide variations in
tion and will decrease for frequency deviations amplitude of the signal. Noise, which causes
in the other direction from the mean or tuned little frequency modulation but much ampli-
value of the transformer. The audio output volt- tude modulation of the received signal, is vir-
age is equal to the ratio of the relative contri- tually wiped out in the limiter.
butions of the two diodes, hence the name The voltage across the grid resistor varies
ratio detector. with the amplitude of the received signal. For
The ratio detector offers several advantages this reason, conventional amplitude modulated
over the simple discriminator circuit. The cir- signals may be received on the FM receiver
cuit does not require the use of a limiter pre- by connecting the input of the audio amplifier
ceding the detector since the circuit is inher- to the top of this resistor, rather than to the
ently insensitive to amplitude modulation on discriminator output. When properly filtered
HANDBOOK NBFM Adapter 325
Sideband Transmission
While single-sideband transmtmon (SSB) The problem solved by the carrier system
has attracted significant interest on amateur was that of translating the 300-30()0 cycle
frequencies only in the past few years, the prin- voice band of frequencies to a higher frequen-
ciples have been recognized and put to use in cy (for example, 40.3 to 43-0 kc.) for trans-
various commercial applications for many years. mission on the toll wires, and then to reverse
Expansion of single-sideband for both com- the translation process at the receiving termi-
mercial and amateur communication has await- nal. It was possible in some short-haul equip-
ed the development of economical components ment to amplitude modulate a 40 kilocycle
possessing the required characteristics (such as carrier with the voice frequencies, in which
sharp cutoff filters and high stability crystals) case the resulting signal would occupy a band
demanded by SSB techniques. The availability of frequencies between 3 7 and 43 kilocycles.
of such components and precision test equip- Since the transmission properties of wires and
ment now makes possible the economical test- cable deteriorate rapidly with increasing fre-
ing, adjustment and use of SSB equipment on quency, most systems required the bandwidth
a wider scale than before. Many of the seem- conservation characteristics of single-sideband
ingly insurmountable obstacles of past years transmission. In addition, the carrier wave was
no longer prevent the amateur from achieving generally suppressed to reduce the power
the advantages of SSB for his class of oper- handling capability of the repeater amplifiers
ation. and diode modulators. A substantial body of
literature on the components and circuit tech-
niques of SSB has been generated by the large
17-1 Commercial and continuing development effort to produce
Applications of SSB economical carrier telephone systems.
The use of SSB for overseas radiotelephony
Before discussion of amateur SSB equipment, has been practiced for several years though
it is helpful to review some of the commercial the number of such circuits has been numeri-
applications of SSB in an effort to avoid prob- cally small. However, the economic value of
lems that are already solved. such circuits has been great enough to war-
The first and only large scale use of SSB rant elaborate station equipment. It is from
has been for multiplexing additional voice cir- these stations that the impression has been ob-
cuits on long distance telephone toll wires. tained that SSB is too complicated for all but
Carrier systems came into wide use during the a corps of engineers and technicians to handle.
30's, accompanied by the development of high Components such as lattice filters with 40
Q toroids and copper oxide ring modulators or more crystals have suggested astronomical
of controlled characteristics. expense.
327
328 Sideband Transmission THE RADIO
"~
that the carrier of an AM signal remains un-
changed in amplitude, whether it is being mod-
ulated or not. Of course the carrier appears
SIDEBAND I SIDEBAND to be modulated when we observe the modu-
CARRIER
FREQ,
lated signal on a receiving system or indicator
which passes a sufficiently wide band that
FREQUENCY SPECTRUM WITH CARRIER ENVELOPE WITH
COMPLEX MODULATING. WAVE COMPLEX MODULATING WAVE the carrier and the modulation sidebands are
Figure 1 viewed at the same time. This apparent change
REPRESENTATION OF A in the amplitude of the carrier with modula-
CONVENTIONAL AM SIGNAL tion is simply the result of the sidebands beat-
ing with the carrier. However, if we receive
More recently, SSB techniques have been the signal on a highly selective receiver, and if
used to multiplex large numbers of voice chan- we modulate the carrier with a sine wave of
nels on a microwave radio band using equip- 3000 to 5000 cycles, we will readily see that
ment principally developed for telephone ca;- the carrier, or either of the sidebands can be
rier fipplications. It should be noted that all tuned in separately; the carrier amplitude, as
production equipment employed in these ser- observed on a signal strength meter, will re-
vices uses the filter method of generating the main constant, while the amplitude of the side-
single-sideband signal, though there is a wide bands will vary in direct proportion to the
variation in the types of filters actually used. modulation percentage.
The SSB signal is generated at a low fre-
Elimination of It is obvious from the pre-
quency and at a low level, and then trans-
the Carrier and vious discussion that the
lated and linearly amplified to a high level
One Sideband carrier is superfluous so far
at the operating frequency.
Considerable development effort has been as the transmission of in-
expended on high level phasing type trans- telligence is concerned. It is obviously a con-
venience, however, since it provides a signal
mitters wherein the problems of linear ampli-
at the receiving end for the sidebands to beat
fication are exchanged for the problems of
with and thus to reproduce the original mod-
accurately controlled phase shifts. Such equip-
ulating signal. It is equally true that the trans-
ment has featured automatic tuning circuits,
mission of both sidebands under ordinary con-
servo-driven to facilitate frequency changing,
ditions is superfluous since identically the
but no transmitter of this type has been suffi-
same intelligence is contained in both side-
ciently attractive to warrant appreciable pro-
bands. Several systems for carrier and side-
duction.
band elimination will be discussed in this
chapter.
17-2 Derivation of
Single-Sideband Signals Power Advantage Single sideband is a very
of SSB over AM efficient form of voice
The single-sideband method of communica- communication by radio.
tion is, essentially, a procedure for obtaining The amount of radio frequency spectrum oc-
more efficient use of available frequency spec- cupied can be no greater than the frequency
trum and of available transmitter capability. range of the audio or speech signal transmitted,
As a starting point for the discussion of sin- whereas other forms of radio transmission re-
gle-sideband signals, let us take a conven- quire from two to several times as much spec-
tional AM signal, such as shown in figure 1, trum space. The r-f power in the transmitted
as representing the most common method for SSB signal is directly proportional to the power
transmitting complex intelligence such as in the original audio signal and no strong
. .
voice or musiC. carrier is transmitted. Except for a weak pilot
It will be noted in figure 1 that there are carrier present in some commercial usage,
three distinct portions to the signal: the car- there is no r-f output when there is no audio
rier, and the upper and the lower sideband input.
group. These three portions always are present The power output rating of a SSB trans-
in a conventional AM signal. Of all these por- mitter is given in terms of peak envelope
tions the carrier is the least necessary and power (PEP). This may be defined as the
the most expensive to transmit. It is an actual r-m-s power at the crest of the modulation
HANDBOOK Derivation 329
~0 4KC
AUDIO SPECTRUM
"'
c
...::::i
"'
~ 4000KC. 4004KC
SSB SPECTRUM
3996KC.4000KC
SSB SPECTRUM
c::0
-....J
~
transmitter of the same power rating. (UPPER SIDEBAND) (LOWERS IDE BAND)
A
f"2 /
I
I
I
,., I
. I I
FREQUENCY
OF
f"t f"2
0
CARRIER Figure 7A Figure 78
FOUR TONE SSB ENVELOPE
SSB ENVELOPE OF A SQUARE
Figure 4 when equal tones WAVE.
VECTOR REPRESENTATION OF with equal frequency Peak of wave reaches
TWO-TONE SSB ENVELOPE spacings are used infinite amplitude.
HANDBOOK Derivation 331
ws.
~T
B+ PUSH-PULL 8+
PUSH-PULl_ B+ AUDIO IN
AUDIO IN
BALANCED TRIODE MODULATOR BALANCED PENTAGRID CON-
PLATE MODULATED BALANCED
WITH Sl NGLE ENDED INPUT CIRCUITS VERTER MODULATOR
TRIODE MODULATOR
Figure 10
BALANCED MODULATORS
HANDBOOK Carrier Elimination 333
HIGH Z
SIDEBAND LOW Z LOWZ
OUTPUT MODULATING SIDEBAND
VOLTAGE OUTPUT
0
DOUBLE-BALANCED RING MODULATOR SHUNT-QUAD MODULATOR SERIES-QUAD MODULATOR
Figure 11
DIODE RING MODULATORS
Diode Ring Modulation in telephone car- work are normally manufactured to order. They
Modulators rier equipment has been very offer no particular advantage to the amateur,
successfully accomplished with though their excellent long-term stability is
copper-oxide double balanced ring modulators. important in commercial applications. Recti-
More recently, germanium diodes have been fier types intended to be used as meter recti-
applied to similar circuits. The basic diode fiers are not likely to have the balance or high
ring circuits are shown in figure 11. The most frequency response desirable in amateur SSB
widely applied is the double balanced ring trans mir:ters.
(A). Both carrier and input are balanced with Vacuum diodes such as the 6AL5 may be
respect to the output, which is advantageous used as modulators. Balancing the heater-
when the output frequency is not sufficiently cathode capacity is a major difficulty except
different from the inputs to allow ready sep- when the 6AL5 is used at low source and load
aration by filters. It should be noted that the impedance levels. In addition, contact poten-
carrier must pass through the balanced input tials of the order of a few tenths of a volt may
and output transformers. Care must be taken also disturb low level applications (figure 13).
in adapting this circuit to minimize the carrier The double diode circuits appear attractive,
power that will be lost in these elements. The but in general it is more difficult to balance a
shunt and series quad circuits are usable when transformer at carrier frequency than an addi-
the output frequencies are entirely different tional pair of diodes. Balancing potentiometers
(i.e.: audio and r.f.). The shunt quad (B) may be employed, but the actual cause of the
is used with high source and load impedances unbalance is far more subtile, and cannot be
and the series quad (C) with low source and adequately corrected with a single adjustment.
load impedances. These two circuits may be A signal produced by any of the above cir-
adapted to use only two diodes, substituting a cuits may be classified as a double sideband,
balanced transformer for one side of the suppressed-carrier signal.
bridge, as shown in figure 12. It should be
noted that these circuits present a half-wave
load to the carrier source. In applying any of 0
these circuits, r-f chokes and capacitors must SHUNT-PAl R
SIDEBAND MODULATOR
be employed to control the path of signal and OUTPUT
impedances. Figure 12
Copper-oxide diodes suitable for carrier DOUBLE-DIODE PAIRED MODULATORS
334 Sideband Transmission THE RADIO
B+
I
0
A'JDIO
IN -1 0 /
~ 470 -20 I
v
-3 0
<1)-40 /
...J
PUSH-PULL R.F.
w \
ID -> 0~~~--+--+--+-~---~
/
CARRIER IN
v \
u
~ \
w- 0
0
-70f----l--f----1r----l---l--~
@ SERIES-BALANCED DIODE MODULATOR
USING 6AL5 TUBE -80>1--l----1r----l'-----l---l--l-1-----\--l
6AL5 -o -!1 -4 -3 -2 -1 o +I
KILOCYCLES DEVIATION
R.F.CAR
Figure 15
RIER IN BANDPASS CHARACTERISTIC OF
BURNELL S-15000 SINGLE
SIDEBAND FILTER
Figure 14
BLOCK DIAGRAM OF FILTER EXCITER EMPLOYING A 50-K.C.
SIDEBAND FILTER
HANDBOOK Generation of S.S. B. 335
+3!10V.
$0htA.
PUSH-PULL R.F. TO BALANCED
MODULATOR FOR CONVERSION
TO 160 METERS
Figure 16
OPERATIONAL CIRCUIT FOR SSB EXCITER USING THE BURNELL
50-KC. SIDEBAND FILTER
component in the whole system-the first side- late the SSB signal to the desired frequency.
band filter. It is the function of this first side- Since only linear amplification may be used,
band filter to separate the desired 47 to 50 kc. it is not possible to use frequency multiplying
sideband from the unneeded and undesired 50 stages. Any frequency changing must be done
to 53 kc. sideband. Hence this filter must have by the beating-oscillator technique. An oper-
low attenuation in the region between 47 and ational circuit of this type of SSB exciter is
50 kc., a very rapid slope in the vicinity of shown in figure 16.
50 kc., and a very high attenuation to the A second type of filter-exci~er for SSB may
sideband components falling between 50 and be built around the Collins Mechanical Filter.
53 kilocycles. Such an exciter is diagrammed in figure 1 7.
Burnell & Co., Inc., of Yonkers, New York Voice frequencies in the range of 200-3000
produce such a filter, designated as Burnell cycles are amplified and fed to a low imped-
S-15,000. The passband of this filter is shown ance phase-inverter to furnish balanced audio.
in figure 15. This audio, together with a suitably chosen
Appearing, then, at the output of the filter r-f signal, is mixed in a ring modulator, made
is a single sideband of 47 kc. to 50 kc. This up of small germanium diodes. Depending
sideband may be passed through a phase in- upon the choice of frequency of the r-f oscilla-
verter to obtain a balanced output, and then tor, either the upper or lower sideband may be
fed to a balanced mixer. A local oscillator applied to the input of the mechanical filter.
operating in the range of 1750 kc. to 1950 kc. The carrier, to some extent, has been rejected
is used as the conversion oscillator. Additional by the ring modulator. Additional carrier re-
conversion stages may now be added to trans- jection is afforded by the excellent passband
Figure 17
BLOCK DIAGRAM OF FILTER EXCITER EMPLOYING A 455-KC.
MECHANICAL FILTER FOR SIDEBAND SELECTION
336 Sideband Transmission THE RADIO
CH~O CH!aO
460.~
K.C. 10
OUT .../
zo
I 1\
CH~O CH$0
\
FT-241 CHANNEL 49 CRYSTAL c 451.1 KC.
FT-241 CHANNEL SO CRYSTAL = 462,9KC. 4- CARRIER
j
0 FREQUENCY.
Figure 18
SIMPLE CRYSTAL LATTICE FILTER
\
I
0
459 460 461 462 463 464
FREQUENCY (K.C.)
characteristics of the mechanical filter. For Q of the filter inductances should be 10 times
simplicity, the mixing and filtering operation the reciprocal of this, or 160. Appropriate Q is
usually takes place at a frequency of 455 kilo- generally obtained from toroidal inductances,
cycles. The single-sideband signal appearing though there is some possibility of using iron
at the output of the mechanical filter may be core solenoids between 10 kc. and 20 kc. A
translated directly to a higher operating fre- characteristic impedance below 1000 ohms
quency. Suitable tuned circuits must follow should be selected to prevent distributed ca-
the conversion stage to eliminate the signal pacity of the inductances from spoiling overall
from the conversion oscillator. performance. Paper capacitors intended for
bypass work may not be trusted for stability
Wove Filters The heart of a filter-type SSB or low loss and should not be used in filter
exciter is the sideband filter. circuits. Care should be taken that the levels
Conventional coils and capacitors may be of both accepted and rejected signals are low
used to construct a filter based upon standard enough so that saturation of the filter induct-
wave filter techniques. The Q of the filter in- ances does not occur.
ductances must be high when compared with
the reciprocal of the fractional bandwidth. If Crystal Filters The best known filter re-
a bandwidth of 3 kc. is needed at a carrier fre- sponses have been obtained
quency of 50 kc., the bandwidth expressed in with crystal filters. Types designed for pro-
terms of the carrier frequency is 3/50 or 6%. gram carrier service cut-off 80 db in less than
This is expressed in terms of fractional band- 50 cycles. More than 80 crystals are used in
width as 1I 16. For satisfactory operation, the this type of filter. The crystals are cut to con-
trol reactance and resistance as well as the
resonant frequency. The circuits used are based
on full lattices.
The war-surplus low frequency crystals may
LhWER ~IDEB1ND \ { U+R SI~EB ...ND be adapted to this type of filter with some
0 success. Experimental designs usually syn-
;o
8 z0
\i/ \ thesize a selectivity curve by grouping sharp
notches at the side of the passband. Where the
\
,_CARRIER
z FREQUENCY width of the passband is greater than twice
0
f- 30 the spacing of the series and parallel reso-
<(
::> I
nance of the crystals, special circuit techni-
z 40 ques must be used. A typical crystal filter using
I1J
f-
f-
<( , 0
/:\ ~ these surplus crystals, and its approximate pass-
band is shown in figure 18.
0
246 2.47 248 2.49
I :\
2SO 2.5-1 2.52 2~ 254
l 255
Mechanical Filters Filters using mechanical
FREQUENCY (K.C.) resonators h a v e been
Figure 19
studied by a number of companies and are
PASSBAND OF LOWER AND UPPER offered commercially by the Collins Radio Co.
SIDEBAND MECHANICAL FILTER They are available in a variety of bandwidths
HANDBOOK Generation of S.S.B. 337
Figure 20
BLOCK DIAGRAM OF THE "PHASING" METHOD
The phasing method of obtaining a single-sideband signal is simpler than the filter system in regard to
the number of tubes ond circuits required. The system is also less expensive In regard to the components
required, but is more critical in regard to adjustments for the transmission of a pure single-sideband signal.
at center frequencies of 250 kc. and 455 kc. mitted, as is the case with all SSB transmis-
The 2 50 kc. series is specifically intended for sions, but only the sum or the difference of the
sideband selection. The selectivity attained by modulation band from the nominal carrier is
these filters is intermediate between good LC transmitted (figure 20) .
filters at low center frequencies and engineered The phasing system has the obvious advan-
quartz crystal filters. A passband of two 250 tage that all the electrical circuits which give
kc. filters is shown in figure 19. In application rise to the single sideband can operate in a
of the mechanical filters some special precau- practical transmitter at the nominal output fre-
tions are necessary. The driving and pick-up quency of the transmiter. That is to say that
coils should be carefully resonated to the op- if we desire to produce a single sideband whose
erating frequency. If circuit capacities are un-
nominal carrier frequency is 3.9 Me., the
known, trimmer capacitors should be used
balanced modulators are fed with a 3-9-Mc.
across the coils. Maladjustment of these tuned signal and with the audio signal from the
coils will increase insertion loss and the peak-
phase splitters. It is not necessary to go through
to-valley ratio. On high impedance filters (ten several frequency conversions in order to ob-
to twenty thousand ohms) signals greater than
tain a sideband at the desired output fre-
2 volts at the input should be avoided. D-e
quency, as in the case with the filter method
should be blocked out of the end coils. While
of sideband generation.
the filters are rated for 5 rna. of coil current,
they are not rated for d-e plate voltage. Assuming that we feed a speech signal to
the balanced modulators along with the 3900-
The Phasing There are a number of points kc. carrier ( 3.9 Me.) we will obtain in the out-
System of view from which the op- put of the balanced modulators a signal which
eration of the phasing system is either the sum of the carrier signal and the
of SSB generation may be described. We may speech band, or the difference between the car-
state that we generate two double-sideband rier and the speech band. Thus if our speech
suppressed carrier signals, each in its own bal- signal covers the band from 200 to 3000
anced modulator, that both the r-f phase and cycles, we will obtain in the output a band of
the audio phase of the two signals differ by frequencies from 3900.2 to 3903 kc. (the sum
90 degrees, and that the outputs of the two of the two, or the "upper" sideband), or a band
balanced modulators are added with the result from 3897 to 3899.8 kc. (the difference be-
that one sideband is increased in amplitude tween the two or the "lower" sideband) . A
and the other one is cancelled. This, of course, further advantage of the phasing system of
is a true description of the action that takes sideband generation is the fact that it is a very
place. But it is much easier to consider the simple matter to select either the upper side-
phasing system as a method simply of adding band or the lower sideband for transmission.
(or of subtracting) the desired modulation A simple double-pole double-throw reversing
frequency and the nominal carrier frequency. switch in two of the four audio leads to the
The carrier frequency of course is not trans- balanced modulators is all that is required.
338 Sideband Transmission THE RADIO
+U0\1.
+1~0V
Figure 23 Figure 24
LOW-Q R-F PHASE-SHIFT NETWORK DOME AUDIO-PHASE-SHIFT NETWORK
The r-f phase-shift system illustrated above This circuit arrangement is convenient for ob-
is convenient in a case where it is desired to taining the audio phase shift when it is desired
make small changes in the operating fre- to use a minimum of circuit components and
quency of the system without the necessity tube elements.
of being precise in the adJustment of two
coupled circuits as used tor r-f phase shift
in the circuit of figure 21.
variable and should have a lower value of in-
ductance than that value of inductance which
would have the same reactance as resistor R.
Radio-Frequency A single-sideband genera- Inductor L may be considered as being made
Phasing tor of the phasing type up of two values of inductance in parallel; (a)
requires that the two bal- a value of inductance which will resonate at
anced modulators be fed with r-f signals hav- the operating frequency with the circuit and
ing a 90-degree phase difference. This r-f tube capacitances, and (b) the value of induct-
phase difference may be obtained through the ance which is equal in reactance to the resist-
use of two loosely coupled resonant circuits, ance R. In a network such as shown in figure
such as illustrated in figures 21A and 21B. 23, equal and opposite 45-degree phase shifts
The r-f signal is coupled directly or inductive- are provided by the RL and RC circuits, thus
ly to one of the tuned circuits, and the coupling providing a 90-degree phase difference be-
between the two circuits is varied until, at tween the excitation voltages applied to the
resonance of both circuits, the r-f voltages two balanced modulators.
developed across each circuit have the same
amplitude and a 90-degree phase difference. Audio-Frequency The audio-frequency phase-
Phasing shifting networks used in
The 90-degree r-f phase difference also may generating a single-side-
be obtained through the use of a low-Q phase band signal by the phasing method usually are
shifting network, such as illustrated in figure based on those described by Dome in an ar-
23; or it may be obtained through the use of ticle in the December, 1946, Electronics. A
a lumped-constant quarter-wave line. The low- relatively simple network for accomplishing
Q phase-shifting system has proved quite prac- the 90-degree phase shift over the range from
ticable for use in single-sideband systems, 160 to 3500 cycles is illustrated in figure 24.
particularly on the lower frequencies. In such The values of resistance and capacitance must
an arrangement the two resistances R have be carefully checked to insure minimum devia-
the same value, usually in the range between tion from a 90-degree phase shift over the 200
100 and a few thousand ohms. Capacitor C, in to 3000 cycle range.
shunt with the input capacitances of the tubes
and circuit capacitances, has a reactance at Another version of the Dome network is
the operating frequency equal to the value of shown in figure 25. This network employs
the resistor R. Also, inductor L has a net in- three 12AU7 tubes and provides balanced out-
ductive reactance equal in value at the oper- put for the two balanced modulators. As with
ating frequency to resistance R. the previous network, values of the resistances
within the network must be held to very close
The inductance chosen for use at L must tolerances. It is necessary to restrict the speech
take into account the cancelling effect of the range to 300 to 3000 cycles with this network.
input capacitance of the tubes and the circuit Audio frequencies outside this range will not
capacitance; hence the inductance should be have the necessary phase-shift at the output
340 Sideband Transmission THE RADIO
12AU7
o.o TO BAL.
MOD.l* 1
. 01
o--j
PUSH-PULL
1.6K
....
lOOK
.... r
lOOK
1215
o-j AUDIO
INPUT
100 JJJJF
....
TO BAL.
TO BAL.
1.6K 133.3 K rMOO. tt z
MOO.tt1
o-----j
TO BAL. o.o
MOD.2
Figure 26
PASSIVE AUDIO-PHASE-SHIFT
NETWORK, USEFUL OVER RANGE
OF 300 TO 3000 CYCLES.
+10$V. REI;ULATEO
CONVERSION
2000KC.
FREQUENCY
(2.5 v.)
rf+l 6BE6
::;:;:
:::
':"'
+
IH
TUNE TO SELECT
~ 2.000+~~0=22.~0KC.
c::_.2000-2.$0=t750 KC.
+
t---;~
100
SSB OUTPUT
Figure 27
PENTAGRID MIXER CIRCUIT FOR
SSB FREQUENCY CONVERSION Figure 28
TWIN TRIODE MIXER CIRCUIT FOR
SSB FREQUENCY CONVERSION
quency into the # 3 grid. This is the reverse of
the usual grid connections, but it offers about
10 db improvement in distortion. The plate push-pull circuits and the tubes into exact
circuit is tuned to select the desired output amplitude and phase balance, about 20 db
frequency product. Actually, the output of the of injection frequency cancellation is all that
mixer tube contains all harmonics of the two can be depended upon. With suitable trim-
input signals and all possible combinations of ming adjustments the cancellation can be made
the sum and difference frequencies of all the as high as 40 db, however, in fixed frequency
harmonics. In order to avoid distortion of the circuits.
SSB signal, it is fed to the mixer at a low The Twin Triode Mixer The mixer circuit
level, such as 0.1 to 0.2 volts. The conversion shown in figure 28
frequency is fed in at a level about 20 db has about 10 db lower distortion than the con-
higher, or about 2 volts. By this means, har- ventional 6BE6 converter tube. It has a lower
monics of the incoming SSB signal generated voltage gain of about unity and a lower out-
in the mixer tube will be very low. Usually put impedance which loads the first tuned
the desired output frequency is either the sum circuit and reduces its selectivity. In some ap-
or the difference of the SSB generator carrier plications the lower gain is of no consequence
frequency and the conversion frequency. For but the lower distortion level is important
example, using a SSB generator carrier fre- enough to warrant its use in high performance
quency of 250 kc. and a conversion injection equipment. The signal-to-distortion ratio of
frequency of 2000 kc. as shown in figure 27, this mixer is of the order of 70 db compared
the output may be tuned to select either 2250 to approximately 60 db for a 6BE6 mixer
kc. or 1750 kc. when the level of each of two tone signals is
Not only is it necessary to select the desired 0.5 volt. With stronger signals, the 6BE6
mixing product in the mixer output but also distortion increases very rapidly, whereas the
the undesired products must be highly attenu- 12AU7 distortion is much better compara-
ated to avoid having spurious output signals tively.
from the transmitter. In general, all spurious
signals that appear within the assigned fre-
quency channel should be at least 60 db below 6AS6's
the desired signal, and those appearing out-
side of the assigned frequency channel at least
80 db below the signal level.
When mixing 250 kc. with 2000 kc. as in
the above example, the desired product is the
2250 kc. signal, but the 2000 kc. injection
frequency will appear in the output about 20
db stronger than the desired signal. To reduce
it to a level 80 db below the desired signal
means that it must be attenuated 100 db.
The principal advantage of using balanced
modulator mixer stages is that the injection
frequency theoretically does not appear in the -BIAS CARRIER
IN
+ 120 V.
AT SMA,
output. In practice, when a considerable fre-
Figure 29
quency range must be tuned by the balanced BALANCED MODULATOR CIRCUIT
modulator and it is not practical to trim the FOR SSB FREQUENCY CONVERSION
342 Sideband Transmission THE RADIO
I
I I
80
Figure 30
RESPONSE OF "N" NUMBER OF TUNED CIRCUITS,
ASSUMING EACH CIRCUIT Q IS 50
HANDBOOK Frequency Conversion 343
In practical equipment where the injection actually tuned to 4220 kc. instead of 4250 kc.,
frequency is variable and trimming adjust- tl.f 220 .
the Lwould be or 0.0522. Check1ng
ments and tube selection cannot be used, it 4220
may be easier and more economical to obtain the curves shows that 7 circuits would just
this extra 20 db of attenuation by using an barely provide 100 db of attenuation. This
extra tuned circuit in the output than by using illustrates the need for very accurate tuning
a balanced modulator circuit. A balanced mod- and tracking in circuits having high attenua-
ulator circuit of interest is shown in figure tion properties.
29, providing a minimum of 20 db of carrier
attenuation with no balancing adjustment. Coupled Tuned When as many as 7 tuned
Circuits circuits are required for pro-
Selective Tuned Circuits The selectivity re- per attenuation, it is not
quirements of the necessary to have the gain that 6 isolating am-
tuned circuits following a mixer stage often plifier tubes would provide. Several vacuum
become quite severe. For example, using an tubes can be eliminated by using two or three
input signal at 250 kc. and a conversion in- coupled circuits between the amplifiers. With
jection frequency of 4000 kc. the desired out- a coefficient of coupling between circuits 0.5
put may be 4250 kc. Passing the 4250 kc. of critical coupling, the overall response is
signal and the associated sidebands without very nearly the same as isolated circuits. The
attenuation and realizing 100 db of attenuation gain through a pair of circuits having 0.5
at 4000 kc. (which is only 250 kc. away) is coupling is only eight-tenths that of two criti-
a practical example. Adding the requirement cally coupled circuits, however. If critical
that this selective circuit must tune from 2250 coupling is used between two tuned circuits,
kc. to 4250 kc. further complicates the basic the nose of the response curve is broadened
requirement. The best solution is to cascade a and about 6 db is lost on the skirts of each
number of tuned circuits. Since a large num- pair of critically coupled circuits. In some
ber of such circuits may be required, the most cases it may be necessary to broaden the nose
practical solution is to use permeability tun- of the response curve to avoid adversely af-
ing, with the circuits tracked together. An ex- fecting the frequency response of the desired
ample of such circuitry is found in the Collins passband. Another tuned circuit may be re-
KWS-1 sideband transmitter. quired to make up for the loss of attenuation
If an amplifier tube is placed between each on the skirts of critically coupled circuits.
tuned circuit, the overall response will be the
Frequency Conversion The example in the
sum of one stage multiplied by the number
Problems previous section shows
of stages (assuming identical tuned circuits) .
Figure 30 is a chart which may be used to the difficult selectivi-
determine the number of tuned circuits re- ty problem encountered when strong undesired
quired for a certain degree of attenuation at signals appear near the desired frequency. A
some nearby frequency. The Q of the circuits high frequency SSB transmitter may be re-
is assumed to be 50, which is normally realized quired to operate at any carrier frequency in
in small permeability tuned coils. The number the range of 1.75 Me. to 30 Me. The problem
of tuned circuits with a Q of 50 required for is to find a practical and economical means of
providing 100 db of attenuation at 4000 kc. heterodyning the generated SSB frequency to
while passing 4250 kc. may be found as fol- any carrier frequency in this range. There are
lows: many modulation products in the output of the
mixer and a frequency scheme must be found
tl.f is 4250-4000=250 kc. that will not have undesired output of appre-
f, is the resonant frequency, 4250 kc. ciable amplitude at or near the desired signal.
When tuning across a frequency range some
tl.f 250 products may "cross over" the desired fre-
and - = -- = 0.059
f, 4250 quency. These undesired crossover frequencies
should be at least 60 db below the desired
The point on the chart where .059 inter- signal to meet modern standards. The ampli-
sects 100 db is between the curves for 6 and 7 tude of the undesired products depends upon
tuned circuits, so 7 tuned circuits are required. the particular characteristics of the mixer and
Another point which must be considered in the particular order of the product. In general,
practice is the tuning and tracking error of most products of the 7th order and higher
the circuits. For example, if the circuits were will be at least 60 db down. Thus any cross-
344 Sideband Transmission THE RADIO
FRO>J sse
CENERATOR
Figure 31 Figure 32
SSB DISTORTION PRODUCTS, BLOCK DIAGRAM OF AUTOMATIC
SHOWN UP TO NINTH ORDER LOAD CONTROL (A.L.C.) SYSTEM
over frequency lower than the 7th must be loaded, these spurious frequencies can extend
avoided since there is no way of attenuating far outside the original channel width and
them if they appear within the desired pass- cause an unintelligible "splatter" type of in-
band. The General Electric Ham News, volume terference in adjacent channels. This is usually
11 # 6 of Nov.-Dec., 1956 covers the subject of far more importance than the distortion of
of spurious products and incorporates a "mix- the original tones with regard to intelligibility
selector" chart that is useful in determining or fidelity. To avoid interference in another
spurious products for various different mixing channel, these distortion products should be
schemes. down at least 40 db below adjacent channel
In general, for most applications when the signal. Using a two-tone test, the distortion is
intelligence bearing frequency is lower than given as the ratio of the amplitude of one
the conversion frequency, it is desirable that test tone to the amplitude of a third order
the ratio of the two frequencies be between 5 product. This is called the signal-to-distortion
to 1 and 10 to 1. This is a compromise be- ratio ( S/D) and is usually given in decibels.
tween avoiding low order harmonics of this The use of feedback r-f amplifiers make SID
signal input appearing in the output, and ratios of greater than 40 db possible and prac-
minimizing the selectivity requirements of the tical.
circuits following the mixer stage.
Automatic Two means may be used to
17-6 Distortion Products Load Control keep the amplitude of these
Due to Nonlinearity of distortion products down to
acceptable levels. One is to design the ampli-
R-F Amplifiers fier for excellent linearity over its amplirude
When the SSB envelope of a voice signal or power range. The other is to employ a
is distorted, a great many new frequencies are means of limiting the amplitude of the SSB
generated. These represent all of the possible envelope to the capabilities of the amplifier.
combinations of the sum and difference fre- An automatic load control ssytem ( ALC) may
quencies of all harmonics of the original fre- be used to accomplish this result. It should be
quencies. For purposes of test and analysis, noted that the r.f wave shapes of the SSB sig-
two equal amplirude tones are used as the nal are always sine waves because the tank cir-
SSB audio source. Since the SSB radio fre- cuits make them so. It is the change in gain
quency amplifiers use tank circuits, all distor- with signal level in an amplifier that distorts
tion products are filtered out except those the SSB envelope and generates unwanted dis-
which lie close to the desired frequencies. tortion products. An ALC system may be used
These are all odd order products; third order, to limit the input signal to an amplifier to
fifth order, etc .. The third order products are prevent a change in gain level caused by ex-
2p-q and 2q-p where p and q represent the cessive input level.
two SSB r-f tone frequencies. The fifth order The ALC system is adjusted so the power
products are 3p-2q and 3q-2p. These and amplifier is operating near its maximum power
some higher order products are shown in capability and at the same time is protected
figure 31. It should be noted that the fre- from being over-driven. In amplitude modu-
quency spacings are always equal to the dif- lated systems it is common to use speech com-
ference frequency of the two original tones. pressors and speech clipping systems to per-
Thus when a SSB amplifier is badly over- form this function. These methods are not
HANDBOOK Distortion Products 345
6BA6
Figure 34
SIMPLIFIED SCHEMA-
TIC OF AUTOMATIC
LOAD CONTROL AM-
PLIFIER. OPERATING
+
I
+
TOP-A
PLATE +2.!0V.
POINT OF ALC
CIRCUIT MAY BE
SET BY VARYING
ls 2.2K
ALC ZERO
':"COMPRESSION ADJ. "='
INDICATOR
346 Sideband Transmission THE RADIO
12AU7
12AT7
6AG7
C2.A,B,C,O=EACH SECTION 2.0JJF, 450 V. ELECTROLYTIC G1,2.,3,4= 1N52. GERMANIUM DIODE OR EQUIVALENT
C1= 2430 lJJJFD (.002.JJFD MICA 5"=' WITH 170-780 UUFO TRIMMER) L 1, L2.= 33T. N 2.1 E. WIRE CLOSE WOUND ON MILLEN N ~904e
C8=4860JJJJF0.(.0043JJFDMICA -5 WITH 170-780.U1JFOTRIMMER) IRON CORE ADJUSTABLE SLUG COIL FORM. LINK OF 6
C9= 12.1!1 .U.UFD.(.OOI .UFO MICA :1:5% WITH 50-380JJ1JFDTRIMMER) TURNS OF HOOKUP WIRE WOUND ON OPEN END.
C10=607.~.U.UFD (500.UUFD MICA 5'Jb WITH 9-180.UJJFDTRIMMER)L3=16T. N 19 E. WIRE SPACED TO FILL MILLEN N 69046
Ct8=350JJJJFD 600V. MIC.A 10'M:I (2.$0.U.UFO AND 100JJJJFO PARALLEL) COIL FORM. TAP AT 8 TURNS. LINK OF 1 TURN AT CENTER.
R7,R10=133,3000HMS 1 112WATT :1% l4=SAMEAS l1 EXCEPTNOLINKUSED.
R8,R9= 100,000 OHMS, 1/2 WATT 1'Yo L5= 2.8 T. OFN19 E. WIRE. LINK ON END TO MATCH LOAD.
T1 =STANCO!/ A-S3C TRANSFORMER. (4 TURN LINK MATCHES 72. OHM LOAD)
T2,T3= UTC R-38A TRANSFORMER.
51= DPDT TOGGLE SWITCH *=MOUNTING END OF COILS.
Figure 36
SCHEMATIC, SSB, JR.
HANDBOOK S.B. Exciters 347
having a push-pull output circuit tuned to the tal oscillator stage works into the matched,
r-f "carrier" frequency. The modulator drives balanced modulator consisting of four 1N48
a linear amplifier directly at the output fre- diodes.
quency. The complete circuit of the exciter The resulting 9 Me. SSB signal may be con-
is shown in figure 36. verted to the desired operating frequency in a
The first tube, a 12AU7, is a twin-triode 6BA 7 mixer stage. Eight volts of r-f from an
serving as a speech amplifier and a crystal external v-f-o injected on grid # 1 of the
oscillator. The second tube is a 12AT7, act- 6BA 7 is sufficient for good conversion effic-
ing as a twin channel audio amplifier follow- iency and low distortion. The plate circuit of
ing the phase-shift audio network. The linear the 6BA 7 is tuned to the sum or difference
amplifier stage is a 6AG 7, capable of a peak mixing frequency and the resulting signal is
power output of 5 watts. amplified in a 6AG7 linear amplifier stage.
Sideband switching is accomplished by the Two "tweet" traps are incorporated in the
reversal of audio polarity in one of the audio 6BA 7 stage to reduce unwanted responses of
channels (switch s,), and provision is made the mixer which are apparent when the unit is
for equalization of gain in the audio channels operating in the 14 Me. band. Band-changing
(R,). This adjustment is necessary in order is accomplished by changing coils L, and L,
to achieve normal sideband cancellation, which and the frequency of the external mixing sig-
may be of the order of 35 db or better. Phase- nal. Maximum power output is of the order
shift network adjustment may be achieved by of 5 watts at any operating frequency.
adjusting potentiometer R,. Stable modulator
balance is achieved by the balance potentio- A Simple 80 Meter A SSB exciter employ-
meters R" and Rn in conjunction with the Phasing Exciter ins r-f and audio phas-
germanium diodes. ing circuits is shown
The SSE, Jr. is designed for spot frequency in figure 38. Since the r-f phasing circuits are
operation. Note that when changing frequency balanced only at one frequency of operation,
L,, L,, L,, L,, and L should be readjusted, the phasing exciter is necessarily a single fre-
since these circuits constitute the tuning ad- quency transmitter unless provisions are made
justments of the rig. The principal effect of to re-balance the phasing circuits every time a
mistuning L,, L,, and L, will be lower output. frequency shift is made. However for mobile
The principal effect of mistuning L,, however, operation, or spot frequency operation a rela-
will be degraded sideband suppression. tively simple phasing exciter may be made to
perform in a satisfactory manner.
Power requirements of the SSE, Jr. are 300
volts at 60 rna., and -10.5 volts at 1 rna. A 12AU7 is employed as a Pierce crystal
Under load the total plate current will rise to oscillator, operating directly on the chosen
about 80 rna. at full level with a single tone SSB frequency in the 80 meter band. The sec-
input. With speech input, the total current ond section of this tube is used as an isolation
will rise from the resting value of 60 rna. to stage, with a tuned plate circuit, L,. The out-
about 70 rna., depending upon the voice wave- put of the oscillator stage is link coupled to a
form. 90o r-f phase-shift network wherein the audio
signal from the audio phasing network is com-
The "Ten-A" The Model 1OcA phasing ex- bined with the r-f signals. Carrier balance
Exciter citer produced by Central is accomplished by adjustment of the two 1000
Electronics, Inc. is an ad- ohm potentiometers in the r-f phase network.
vanced version of the SSE, Jr. incorporating The output of the r-f phasing network is cou-
extra features such as VFO control, voice op- pled through L, to a single 6CL6 linear am-
eration, and multi-band operation. A simpli- plifier which delivers a 3 watt peak SSB sig-
fied schematic of the Model 1OA is shown in nal on 80 meters.
figure 3 7. The 12AX7 two stage speech am- A cascade 12AT7 and a single 6C4 comprise
plifier excites a transformer coupled V2-12BH7 the speech amplifier used to drive the audio
low impedance driver stage and a voice oper- phase shift network. A small inter-stage trans-
ated (VOX) relay system employing a 12AX7 former is used to provide the necessary 180 o
and a 6AL5. A transformer coupled 12AT7 audio phase shift required by the network. The
follows the audio phasing network, providing output of the audio phasing network is cou-
two audio channels having a 90-degree phase pled to a 12AU7 dual cathode follower which
difference. A simple 90-degree r-f phase shift provides the necessary low impedance circuit
network in the plate circuit of the 9 Me. crys- to match the r-f phasing network. A double-
AUDIO PHASE SHIFT
w
NETWORK
ol:lo
PS-1 12AT7 CIO
Vl
Q..
(1)
o-
0
::::s
Q..
R2
2.2 K -j
.....
0
R11 ::::s
10K V>
3
V>
V>
"'n::c TO VOICE 0
CONTROL STAGES ::::s
~
~:!! 9 MC.
-fiD BALANCED MODULATOR
-c
n;;
.......
Ow
-i
z"'
~
"'
n><
::::j
"'
;;u
R39 R4o
+300V.
~CONTROL
":' REL.AY CONTACTS
ca1
0.25:f
10 K lOOK
-100V.
0
HANDBOOK S.B. Exciters 349
12AU7 6CL6
L3
fc
.3W.PEAK
558
+300 v.
MIC,
2
,.,
1K IM
Figure 38
SIMPLE 3-WATT PHASING TYPE SSB EXCITER
pole double-throw switch in the output circuit carrier frequency to be adjusted to the "20
of the cathode follower permits sideband se- decibel" points on the response curve of the
lection. filter, as shown in figure 40. Proper r-f sig-
nal balance to the diode modulator may be
A Filter-Type Exciter A simple SSB filter- obtained by adjustment of the padding capaci-
for 80 and 40 Meters type exciter employ- tor in the cathode circuit of the triode section
ing the Collins me- of the 6U8 r-f tube. Carrier balance is set by
chanical filter illustrates many of the basic means of a 50K potentiometer placed across
principles of sideband generation. Such an ex- the balanced modulator.
citer is shown in figure 39. The exciter is de-
signed for operation in the 80 or 40 meter One half of a 12AU7 serves as a speech am-
phone bands and delivers sufficient output to plifier delivering sufficient output from a
drive a class AB, tetrode such as the 2E26, 807, high level crystal microphone to drive the sec-
or 6146. A conversion crystal may be em- ond half of the tube as a low impedance cath-
ployed, or a separate conversion v-f-o can be ode follower, which is coupled to the balanced
used as indicated on the schematic illustration. modulator. The two 1N81 diodes act as an
The exciter employs five tubes, exclusive electronic switch, impressing a double side-
of power supply. They are: 6U8 low frequency band, suppressed-carrier signal upon the me-
oscillator and r-f phase inverter, 6BA6 i-f am- chanical filter. By the proper choice of fre-
plifier, 6BA 7 high frequency mixer, 6AG 7 quency of the beating oscillator, the unwanted
linear amplifier, and 12AU7 speech amplifier sideband may be made to fall outside the pass-
and cathode follower. The heart of the exciter band of the mechanical filter. Thus a single
is the balanced modulator employing two sideband suppressed-carrier signal appears at
1N81 germanium diodes and the 455 kc., the output of the filter. The 455 kc. SSB sig-
3500-cycle bandwidth mechanical filter. The nal is amplified by a 6BA6 pentode stage, and
input and output circuits of the filter are re- is then converted to a frequency in the 80
sonated to 455 kc. by means of small padding meter or 40 meter band by a 6BA 7 mixer
capacitors. stage. Either a crystal or an external v-f-o may
A series-tuned Clapp oscillator covers the be used for the mixing signal.
range of 452 kc. - 457 kc. permitting the To reduce spurious signals, a double tuned
MAj AliA
P~T POINT
a:
w, 0 II j .-PfSSBANOOF MCHANICA~-
~
FILTER 1
f-
<( 70
I
I
Ill
0 I
452 453 454 457 458
FREQUENCY (KC.)
Figure 40
THE "TWENTY DB" CARRIER
.... >- POINTS ON THE FILTER CURVE
<(
Ill
u
z
w '".. .,....'" ..'" "'~
~
The beating oscillator should be adjusted so
that its frequency corresponds to the 20 db
'"';'
. ..
Cl
"' ::J
aw I I I attenuation points of the mechanical filter
"' "' "'~ "'"'~ passband. The carrier of the SSB signal is
a: "'"' .."' thus attenuated 20 db in addition to the
"-
z
Q
.
.... ..
"' a:
a:
Inherent carrier attenuation of the balanced
mixer. A total carrier attenuation of 50 db
is achieved. Unwanted sideband rejection is
II)
a: 1- :;; of the same order.
w
>
z .." "..
0 0
r;-4-U-~h-::-----<t~-----+-'-1+HI
0 0
u
a:
~ .. a:
0 6BE6 RFC
"'
<(
Ill "'o:>
1-
-'"
"' >o
oo
..,,_
o~
+-<
.
~~~N
FROM...
IF AMP.
LUll
T
"'"' Figure 41
THE PRODUCT DETECTOR
The aboye configuration resembles pentagrid
converter circuit.
q 0
t--M,._+----t---------+-'1+ f----l~~
@ r 1 CYCLEOF
MODULATING
WAVEFORM
1
~
-
..."' L'JWER UPPER
SIDEBAND SIDEBAND
CARRIER
FREQ.
Figure 42
DOUBLE-SIDEBAND
SUPPRESSED-CARRIER SIGNAL
Figure 39 The envelope shown at B also is obtained on
the oscilloscope when two audio frequencies
SCHEMATIC, FILTER-TYPE SSB EXCITER of the same amplitude are fed to the input
FOR 80 OR 40 METER OPERATION of a single-sideband transmitter.
S.B. Exciters 351
transformer is placed between the mixer stage meter # 2 of the 6U8 phase inverter in order
and the 6AG 7 output stage. A maximum sig- to obtain a sufficiently strong signal for prop-
nal of 3 watts may be obtained from the 6AG 7 er alignment of T,.
linear amplifier. A conversion crystal is next plugged in the
Selection of the upper or lower sideband is 6BA 7 conversion oscillator circuit, and the op-
accomplished by tuning the 6U8 beating os- eration of the oscillator is checked by moni-
cillator across the passband of the mechanical toring the crystal frequency with a nearby re-
filter, as shown in figure 40. If the 80 meter ceiver. The SSB "carrier" produced by the un-
conversion oscillator is placed on the low fre- baiance of potentiometer # 2 should be heard
quency side of the SSB signal, placing the at the proper sideband frequency in either the
6U8 beating oscillator on the low frequency 80 meter or 40 meter b~nd. The coupled cir-
side of the passband of the mechanical filter cuit between the 6BA 7 and the 6AG 7 is re-
will produce the upper sideband on 80 meters. sonated for maximum carrier voltage at the
When the beating oscillator is placed on the grid of the amplifier stage. Care should be
high frequency side of the passband of the taken that this circuit is tuned to the sideband
mechanical filter the lower sideband will be frequency and not to the frequency of the con-
generated on 80 meters. If the 80 meter con- version oscillator. Finally, the 6AG 7 stage is
version oscillator is placed on the high fre- tuned for maximum output. When these ad-
quency side of the SSB signal, the sidebands justments have been completed, the 455 kc.
will be reversed from the above. The variable beating oscillator should be moved just out
oscillator should be set at approximately the of the passband of the mechanical filter. The
20 db suppression point of the passband of 80 meter "carrier" will disappear. If it does
the mechanical filter for best operation, as not, there is either energy leaking around the
shown in figure 40. If the oscillator is closer filter, or the amplifier stages are oscillating.
in frequency to the filter passband than this, Careful attention to shielding (and neutrali-
carrier rejection will suffer. If the oscillator is zation) should cure this difficulty.
moved farther away in frequency from the Audio excitation is now applied to the ex-
passband, the lower voice frequencies will be citer, and the S-meter of the receiver should
attenuated, and the SSB signal will sound high- kick up with speech, but the audio output of
pitched and tinny. A little practice in setting the receiver should be unintelligible. As the
the frequency of the beating oscillator while frequency of the beating oscillator is adjusted
monitoring the 80 meter SSB signal in the so as to bring the oscillator frequency within
station receiver will quickly acquaint the oper- the passband of the mechanical filter the mo-
ator with the proper frequency setting of the dulation should become intelligible. A single
beating oscillator control for transmission of sideband a.m. signal is now being generated.
either sideband. The BFO of the receiver should now be turned
If desired, an amplitude modulated signal on, and the beating oscillator of the exciter
with full carrier and one sideband may be moved out of the filter passband. When the
transmitted by placing the 6U8 low frequency receiver is correctly tuned, clean, crisp speech
oscillator just inside either edge of the pass- should be heard. The oscillator should be set
band of the filter (designated "AM point", at one of the "20 decibel" points of the filter
figure 40). curve, as shown in figure 40 and all adjust-
After the 6U8 oscillator is operating over ments trimmed for maximum carrier suppres-
the proper frequency range it should be possi- sion.
ble to tune the beating oscillator tuning capac-
itor across the passband of the mechanical fil- 17-8 Reception of
ter and obtain a reading on the S-meter of a Single Sideband Signals
receiver tuned to the filter frequency and cou-
pled to the input grid of the 6BA6 i-f ampli- Single-sideband signals may be received,
fier tube. The two carrier balance controls of after a certain degree of practice in the tech-
the 6U8 phase inverter section should be ad- nique, in a quite adequate and satisfactory
justed for a null reading of the S-meter when manner with a good communications receiver.
the oscillator is placed in the center of the However, the receiver must have quite good
filter passband. The 6BA6 stage is now frequency stability both in the high-frequency
checked for operation, and transformed T1 oscillator and in the beat oscillator. For this
aligned to the carrier frequency. It may be reason, receivers which use a crystal-con-
necessary to unbalance temporarily potentio- trolled first oscillator are likely to offer a
352 Sideband Transmission THE RADIO
greater degree of satisfaction than the more tor is approached the voice will begin to sound
common type which uses a self-controlled os- natural but will have a background growl on
cillator. each syllable. At the correct frequency for the
Beat oscillator stability in most receivers beat oscillator the speech will clear complete-
is usually quite adequate, but many receivers ly and the voice will have a clean, crisp qual-
do not have a sufficient amplitude of beat os- ity. It should also be mentioned that there is
cillator injection to allow reception of strong a narrow region of tuning of the beat oscillator
SSB signals without distortion. In such re- a small distance on the wrong side of the side-
ceivers it is necessary either to increase the band where the voice will sound quite bassy
amount of beat-oscillator injection into the and difficult to understand.
diode detector, or the manual gain control of With a little experience it will be possible
the receiver must be turned down quite low. to identify the sound associated with improper
The tuning procedure for SSB signals is as settings of the beat-oscillator control so that
follows: The SSB signals may first be located corrections in the setting of the control can be
by tuning over the band with receiver set made. Note that the main tuning control of the
for the reception of c-w.; that is, with the man- receiver is not changed after the sideband
ual gain at a moderate level and with the beat once is tuned into the pass band of the re-
oscillator operating. By tuning in this manner ceiver. All the fine tuning should be done with
SSB signals may be located when they are far the beat oscillator control. Also, it is very im-
below the amplitude of conventional AM sig- portant that the r-f gain control be turned to
nals on the frequency band. Then after a sig- quite a low level during the tuning process.
nal has been located, the beat oscillator should Then after the signal has been tuned properly
be turned off and the receiver put on a.v.c. the r-f gain may be increased for good signal
Following this the receiver should be tuned level, or until the point is reached where best
for maximum swing of the S meter with modu- oscillator injection becomes insufficient and
lation of the SSB signal. It will not be possible the signal begins to distort.
to understand the SSB signal at this time, but
Single-Sideband Greatly simplified tuning,
the receiver may be tuned for maximum deflec-
Receivers and coupled with strong atten-
tion. Then the receiver is put back on manual
Adapters uation of undesired sig-
gain control, the beat oscillator is turned on
again, the manual gain is turned down until nals, can be obtained
through the use of a single-sideband receiver
the background noise level is quite low, and
or receiver adapter. The exalted carrier prin-
the beat oscillator control is varied until the
ciple usually is employed in such receivers, with
signal sounds natural.
a phase-sensitive system sometimes included
The procedure in the preceding paragraph for locking the local oscillator to the frequency
may sound involved, but actually all the steps of the carrier of the incoming signal. In order
except the last one can be done in a moment. for the locking system to operate, some carrier
However, the last step is the one which will must be transmitted along with the SSB signal.
require some practice. In the first place, it is Such receivers and adapters include a means
not known in advance whether the upper or for selecting the upper or lower sideband by
lower sideband is being transmitted. So it will the simple operation of a switch. For the re-
be best to start tuning the beat oscillator from ception of a single-sideband signal the switch
one side of the pass band of the receiver to obviously must be placed in the correct posi-
the other, rather than starting with the beat tion. But for the reception of a conventional
oscillator near the center of the pass band as AM or phase-modulated signal, either sideband
is normal for c-w reception. may be selected, allowing the sideband with
With the beat oscillator on the wrong side the least interference to be used.
of the sideband, the speech will sound inverted;
that is to say that low-frequency modulation The Product Detector An unusually satis-
tones will have a high pitch and high-frequen- factory form of de-
cy modulation tones will have a low pitch- modulator for SSB service is the product de-
and the speech will be quite unintelligible. tector, shown in one form in figure 41. This
With the beat oscillator on the correct side of circuit is preferred since it reduces intermodu-
the sideband but too far from the correct posi- lation products and does not require a large
tion, the speech will have some intelligibility local carrier voltage, as contrasted to the more
but the voice will sound quite high pitched. common diode envelope detector. This product
Then as the correct setting for the beat oscilla- detector operates much in the same manner as
HANDBOOK S.S.B. Reception 353
6L6
MODUL.ATORS
B+ 4000 v.
Figure 43
HIGH-LEVEL DSB BALANCED MODULATOR
a multi-grid mixer tube. The SSB signal is and excited from a push-pull r-f source. The
applied to the control grid of the tube and plates of such a modulator are connected in
the locally generated carrier is impressed upon parallel to the tank circuit, as shown in figure
the other control grid. The desired audio out- 43. This DSB modulator is capable of !-kilo-
put signal is recovered across the plate resist- watt peak power output at a plate potential of
ance of the demodulator tube. Since the cath- 4000 volts. The circuit is self-neutralizing and
ode current of the tube is controlled by the the tune-up process is much the same as with
simultaneous action of the two grids, the cur- any other class-C amplifier stage. As in the
rent will contain frequencies equal to the sum case of SSB, the DSB signal may also be gen-
and difference between the sideband signal and erated at a low level and amplified in linear
the carrier. Other frequencies are suppressed by stages following the modulator.
the low-pass r-f filter in the plate circuit of the
stage, while the audio frequency is recovered Synchronous A DSB signal may be re-
from the i-f sideband signal. Detection ceived with difficulty on a
conventional receiver, and
17-9 Double Sideband one of the two sidebands may easily be received
on a single sideband receiver. For best recep-
Transmission tion, however, a phase-locked local oscillator
and a synchronous detector should be em-
Many systems of intelligence transmission ployed. This operation may be performed eith-
lie in the region between amplitude modula- er at the frequency of reception or at a con-
tion on the one hand and single sideband sup- venient intermediate frequency. A block dia-
pressed-carrier transmission on the other hand.
One system of interest to the amateur is the
Synchronous Communications System, popular-
ly known as "double sideband" (DSB-) trans-
mission, wherein a suppressed-carrier double
sideband signal is transmitted (figure 42) .
Reception of such a signal is possible by util-
izing a local oscillator phase-control system
which derives carrier phase information from
the sidebands alone and does not require the
use of any pilot carrier.
The DSB Transmitter A balanced modulator
of the type shown in
figure 8 may be employed to create a DSB
signal. For higher operating levels, a pair of Figure 44
class-C type tetrode amplifier tubes may be BLOCK DIAGRAM OF DSB
screen modulated by a push-pull audio system RECEIVING ADAPTER
354 Sideband Transmission
gram of a DSB synchronous receiver is shown rors. The reactance tube therefore locks the
in figure 44. The DSB signal is applied to local oscillator to the correct phase. Phase con-
two detectors having their local oscillator con- trol information is derived entirely from the
version voltages in phase quadrature to each sideband component of the signal .and the
other so that the audio contributions of the carrier (if present) is not employed. Phase
control ceases with no modulation of the sig-
upper and lower sidebands reinforce one an- nal and is reestablished with the reappearance
other. The in-phase oscillator voltage is ad- of modulation.
justed to have the same phase as the suppressed
carrier of the transmitted signal. The !-ampli- Interference Rejection Interference falling
fier audio output, therefore, will contain the within the passband
demodulated audio signal, while the Q-ampli- of the receiver can be reduced by proper com-
fier (supplied with quadrature oscillator volt- bination of the I- and Q- audio signals. Under
age) will produce no output due to the quad- phase lock conditions, the !-signal is com-
rature null. Any frequency change of the local posed of the audio signal plus the undesired
oscillator will produce some audio output in interference, whereas the Q-signal contains
the Q-amplifier, while the !-amplifier is rela- only the interference component. Phase can-
tively unaffected. The Q-amplifier audio will cellation obtained by combining the two sig-
have the same polarity as the !-channel audio nals will reduce the interference while still
for one direction of oscillator drift, and oppo- adding the desired information contained in
site polarity for oscillator drift in the opposite both side-bands. The degree of interference re-
direction. The Q-amplifier signal level is pro- jection is dependent upon the ratio of inter-
portional to the magnitude of the local oscilla- ference falling upon the two sidebands of the
tor phase angle error (the oscillator drift) for received signal and upon the basic design of
small errors. By combining the !-signal and. the audio networks. A schematic and descrip-
the Q-signal in the audio phase discriminator tion of a complete DSB receiving adapter is
a d-e control voltage is developed which auto- shown in the June, 1957 issue of CQ maga-
matically corrects for local oscillator phase er- zine.
E 1!. E TECHNI-SHEET
AI RWOUND INDUCTORS
COIL DIA. TURNS PER INDUCTANCE COIL DIA. TURNS PER B&W INDUCTANCE
INCHES INCH
B&W AIR DUX
.UH INCHES INCH
AIR DUX
.UH
1
8 3014 808T 4.2. 4 - 2.004 10.1
10 - 810T 6.6
2.!.._
6 3905-1 2.008 2.3.0
10 - 2.410 89.0
CHAPTER EIGHTEEN
Transmitter Design
The excellence of a transmitter is a func- attention to detail, with a good working know-
tion of the design, and is dependent upon the ledge of the limitations of the components,
execution of the design and the proper choice and with a basic conception of the actions of
of components. This chapter deals with the ground currents, the average amateur will be
study of transmitter circuitry and of the basic able to build equipment that will work "just
components that go to make up this circuitry. like the book says."
Modern components are far from faultless. Re- The twin problems of TVI and parasitics
sistors have inductance and distributed ca- are an outgrowth of the major problem of over-
pacity. Capacitors have inductance and re- all circuit design. If close attention is paid
sistance, and inductors have resistance and to the cardinal points of circuitry design, the
distributed capacity. None of these residual secondary problems of TVI and parasitics
attributes show up on circuit diagrams, yet will in themselves be solved.
they are as much responsible for the success
or failure of the transmitter as are the neces-
sary and vital bits of resistance, capacitance
and inductance. Because of these unwanted
attributes, the job of translating a circuit on
18-1 Resistors
paper into a working piece of equipment often
becomes an impossible task to those individ- The resistance of a conductor is a function
uals who disregard such important trivia. of the material, the form the material takes,
Rarely do circuit diagrams show such pitfalls the temperature of operation, and the frequen-
as ground loops and residual inductive cou- cy of the current passing through the resist-
pling between stages. Parasitic resonant cir- ance. In general, the variation in resistance
cuits are rarely visible from a study of the due to temperature is direct! y proportional to
schematic. Too many times radio equipment is the temperature change. With most wire-wound
rushed into service before it has been entirely resistors, the resistance increases with tem-
checked. The immediate and only too apparent perature and returns to its original value when
results of this enthusiasm are transmitter in- the temperature drops to normal. So-called
stability, difficulty of neutralization, r.f. wan- composition or carbon resistors have less
dering all over the equipment, and a general reliable temperature/ resistance characteris-
"touchiness" of adjustment. Hand in glove tics. They usually have a positive tempera-
with these problems go the more serious ones ture coefficient, but the retrace curve as the
of TVI, key-clicks, and parasitics. By paying resistor is cooled is often erratic, and in
356
Resistors 357
+5
+4 +4
....... ~ I
I \..L RESISTOR A
w 31':-,.
+3
- '"
u +
w N I z ["--.,
u+ 2 ......., ~ +2.
z
;!+ I ; ...::::.. --:--. ~I U)
U) +I
1""-...
"'
~ / I w
~
l-RESISTOR 8
a:
U)
w
a:
:'!:
0
I
I~ t:r I-"' z
w
I
.......
b, v
w- 2 "z - 2
"
z<( -3
I
<(
J: -3
u
u -4 f. -4
~
-5
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 !tO 60 70 BO 90 100 -~~0 -~ 0 ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ M ro ~~I~
DEGREES CENTIGRADE DEGREES CENTIGRADE
Figure 1
many cases the resistance does not return to sistor will vary from these curves depending
its original value after a heat cycle. It is for upon the manufacturer, the size and wattage
this reason that care must be taken when sol- of the resistor, etc.
dering composition resistors in circuits that
require close control of the resistance value.
Matched resistors used in phase-inverter serv- Inductance of Every resistor because of its
ice can be heated out of tolerance by the act Resistors physical size has in addition
of soldering them into the circuit. Long leads to its desired resistance, less
should be left on the resistors and a long- desirable amounts of inductance and distrib-
nose pliers should grip the lead between the uted capacitance. These quantities are illus-
iron and the body of the resistor to act as a trated in figure 2A, the general equivalent cir-
heat block. General temperature character- cuit of a resistor. This circuit represents the
istics of typical carbon resistors are shown actual impedance network of a resistor at any
in figure 1. The behavior of an individual re- frequency. At a certain specified frequency
Figure 2
0
Ul
r---..~ r--- t:SESISTOR 0 .Li:
::;
~ I~ ~ !,;"_REsiSTOR c
.9.'
I
'\ ,.............. y ~
w 7
~
u
c z
<( 6 ~ ~
RESISTOR B ~
f--
U)
U)
w
a:
.5
A
"' ~RESISTOR A
~
EQUIVALENT CIRCUIT OF A RESISTOR w
> 3
""-...
......
~
~...J .2 L::::--::,
'"'----~~~ w
a: .I
~~
0
5 10 15
FREQUENCY (MC.)
Figure 3
EQUIVALENT CIRCUIT OF A RESISTOR FREQUENCY EFFECTS ON SAMPLE
AT A PARTICULAR FREQUENCY COMPOSITION RESISTORS
358 Transmitter Design THE R AD I 0
60,;-,------,-------r------.-----~
RSHUNT
1/)
~ C L RSERIES
~ of---+-----P.-7"-=~f+----\---H-~.-----1
0 Figure 5
"- EQUIVALENT CIRCUIT OF A CAPACITOR
0
1/)
0
z
<
1/)
:::>
0
I
f- IOI--+-----b''----"tr---.ft-'""--""'--1 depend to a large extent upon the physical
configuration of the capacitor and upon the
material of which it is made. Of great interest
5 10 to the amateur constructor is the series in
FREQUENCY (MC.)
ductance of the capacitor. At a certain fre
quency the series inductive reactance of the
Figure 4 capacitor and the capacitive reactance are
equal and opposite, and the capacitor is in
CURVES OF THE IMPEDANCE OF WIRE itself series resonant at this frequency. As
WOUND RESISTORS AT RADIO the operating frequency of the circuit in which
FREQUENCIES the capacitor is used is increased above the
series resonant frequency, the effectiveness
of the capacitor as a by-passing element de
the impedance of the resistor may be thought teriorates until the unit is about as effective
of as a series reactance (X 8 ) as shown in fig as a block of wood.
ure 2B. This reactance may be either indue
tive or capacitive depending upon whether the By-Pass The usual forms of bypass ca
residual inductance or the distributed capaci Capacitors pacitors have dielectrics of paper,
tance of the resistor is the dominating factor. mica, or ceramic. For audio work,
As a rule, skin effect tends to increase the and low frequency rf work up to perhaps 2 Me.
reactance with frequency, while the capacity or so, the paper capacitors are satisfactory
between turns of a wirewound resistor, or ca as their relatively high internal inductance has
pacity between the granules of a composition little effect upon the proper operation of the
resistor tends to cause the reactance and re circuit. The actual amount of internal induct
sistance to drop with frequency. The behavior ance will vary widely with the manufacturing
of various types of composition resistors over process, and some types of paper capacitors
a large frequency range is shown in figure 3. have satisfactory characteristics up to a fre
By proper component design, non-inductive re quency of 5 Me. or so.
sistors having a minimum of residual react When considering the design of transmitting
ance characteristics may be constructed. Even equipment, it must be remembered that while
these have reactive effects that cannot be ig the transmitter is operating at some relatively
nored at high frequencies. low frequency of, say, 7 Me., there will be
Wirewound resistors act as lowQ inductors harmonic currents flowing through the various
at radio frequencies. Figure 4 shows typical bypass capacitors of the order of 10 to 20
curves of the high frequency characteristics times the operating frequency. A capacitor
of cylindrical wirewound resistors. In addition that behaves properly at 7 Me. however, may
to resistance variations wirewound resistors offer considerable impedance to the flow of
exhibit both capacitive and inductive react these harmonic currents. For minimum har
ance, depending upon the type of resistor and monic generation and radiation, it is obviously
the operating frequency. In fact, such resis of greatest importance to employ by-pass ca
tors perform in a fashion as lowQ rf chokes pacitors having the lowest possible internal
below their parallel selfresonant frequency. inductance.
Mica dielectric capacitors have much less
internal inductance than do most paper con
densers. Figure 6 lists self-resonant frequen
18-2 Capacitors cie s of various mica capacitors having various
lead lengths. It can be seen from inspection
The inherent residual characteristics of ca of this table that most mica capacitors be
pacitors include series resistance, series in come self-resonant in the 12Mc. to 50-Mc.
ductance and shunt resistance, as shown in region. The inductive reactance they would
figure 5. The series resistance and inductance offer to harmonic currents of 100 Me. or so
HANDBOOK Capacitors 35 9
22.0
MC.
MC .
MC.
capacitor. These capacitors ex~Iblt supenor
by-passing qualities at frequencies up to 200
Me. and the bulkhead type are especially ef-
.001 JJF CERAMIC cJ.:
4
90 MC. fective when used to filter leads passing
.01 JJF CERAMIC f 14.!:1 MC. through partition walls between two stages.
monly done. A large transmuting capacitor Tinned or stranded wire will show greater
may have an inherent inductance as large as losses at these frequencies. Tank coil and
0.1 microhenry, making the capacitor suscep- tank capacitor leads should be of heavier wire
tible to parasitic resonances in the 50 Me. to than other r-f leads.
150 Me. range of frequencies. The best type of flexible lead from the en-
The question of optimum C/L ratiq and ca- velope of a tube to a terminal is thin copper
Pacitor plate spacing is covered in Chapter strip, cut from thin sheet copper. Heavy, rigid
Thirteen. For all-band operation of a high power leads to these terminals may crack the enve-
stage, it is recommended that a capacitor just lope glass when a tube heats or cools.
large enough for 40-meter phone operation be Wires carrying only a.f. or d.c. should be
chosen. (This will have sufficient capacitance chosen with the voltage and current in mind.
for phone operation on all higher frequency Some of the low-filament-voltage transmitting
bands.) Then use fixed padding capacitors for tubes draw heavy current, and heavy wire must
operation on 80 meters. Such padding capaci- be used to avoid voltage drop. The voltage is
tors are available in air, ceramic, and vacuum low, and hence not much insulation is required.
types. Filament and heater leads are usually twisted
Specially designed variable capacitors are together. An initial check should be made on
recommended for u-h-f work; ordinary capaci- the filament voltage of all tubes of 25 watts
tors often have "loops" in the metal frame or more plate dissipation rating. This voltage
which may resonate near the operating fre- should be measured right at the tube sockets.
quency. If it is low, the filament transformer voltage
should be raised. If this is impossible, heavier
Variable Vacuum Variable vacuum capacitors or parallel wires should be used for filament
Capacitars because of their small phy- leads, cutting down their length if possible.
sical size have less inher- Coaxial cable may be used for high voltage
ent inductance per unit of capacity than do leads when it is desirable to shield them from
variable air capacitors. Their losses are ex- r-f fields. RG-8/U cable may be used at d-e
tremely low, and their dielectric strength is potentials up to 8000 volts, and the lighter
high. Because of increased production the RG-17 /U may be used to potentials of 3000
cost of such units is now within the reach of volts. Spark-plug type high-tension wire may
the designer of amateur equipment, and their be used for unshielded leads, and will with-
use is highly recommended in high power tank stand 10,000 volts.
circuits.
If this cable is used, the high-voltage leads
may be cabled with filament and other low-
voltage leads. For high-voltage leads in low-
power exciters, where the plate voltage is not
18-3 Wire and Inductors over 450 volts, ordinary radio hookup wire of
good quality will serve the purpose.
Any length of wire, no matter how short, No r-f leads should be cabled; in fact it is
has a certain value of inductance. This prop- better to use enamelled or bare copper wire
erty is of great help in making coils and in- for r-f leads and rely upon spacing for insula-
ductors, but may be of great hindrance when tion. All r-f joints should be soldered, and the
it is not taken into account in circuit design joint should be a good mechanical junction
and construction. Connecting circuit elements before solder is applied.
(themselves having residual inductance) to- The efficiency and Q of air coils commonly
gether with a conductor possessing additional used in amateur equipment is a factor of the
inductance can often lead to puzzling difficul- shape of the coil, the proximity of the coil to
ties. A piece of no. 10 copper wire ten inches other objects (including the coil form) and the
long (a not uncommon length for a plate lead material of which the coil is made. Dielectric
in a transmitter) can have a self-inductance of losses in so-called "air wound" coils are
0.15 microhenries. This inductance and that low and the Q of such coils runs in the neigh-
of the plate tuning capacitor together with the borhood of 300 to 500 at medium frequencies.
plate-to-ground capacity of the vacuum tube Unfortunately, most of the transmitting type
can form a resonant circuit which may lead to plug-in coils on the market designed for link
parasitic oscillations in the v-h-f regions. To coupling have far too small a pick up link for
keep the self-inductance at a minimum, all r-f proper operation at 7 Me. and 3.5 Me. The co-
carrying leads should be as short as possible efficient of coupling of these coils is about
and should be made out of as heavy material 0.5, and additional means must be employed
as possible. to provide satisfactory coupling at these low
At the higher frequencies, solid enamelled frequencies. Additional inductance in series
copper wire is most efficient for r-f leads. with the pick up link, the whole being reso-
HANDBOOK Inductors 361
~ C DISTRIBUTED
@
Figure 8
nated to the operating frequency will often At low frequencies, the distributed capacity
permit satisfactory coupling. has little effect and the electrical equivalent
circuit of the rf choke is as shown in figure
Coil Placement For best Q a coil should be SA. As the operating frequency of the choke
in the form of a solenoid with is raised the effect of the distributed capacity
length from one to two times the diameter. For becomes more evident until at some particular
minimum interstage coupling, coils should be frequency the distributed capacity resonates
made as small physically as is practicable. with the inductance of the choke and a parallel
The coils should then be placed so that ad- resonant circuit is formed. This point is shown
joining coils are oriented for minimum mutual in figure 88. As the frequency of operation
coupling. To determine if this condition exists, is further increased the overall reactance of
apply the following test: the axis of one of the the choke becomes capacitive, and finally a
two coils must lie in the plane formed by the point of series resonance is reached (figure
center turn of the other coil. If this condition SC.). This cycle repeats itself as the operating
is not met, there will be appreciable coupling frequency is raised above the series resonant
unless the unshielded coils are very small in point, the impedance of the choke rapidly be-
diameter or are spaced a considerable dis- coming lower on each successive cycle. A
tance from each other. chart of this action is shown in figure 9. It
can be seen that as the rf choke approaches
Insulation On frequencies above 7 Me., cera and leaves a condition of series resonance,
mic, polystyrene, or Mycalex in- the performance of the choke is seriously im
sulation is to be recommended. Cold flow must paired. The condition of series resonance
be considered when using polystyrene (Am- may easily be found by shorting the terminals
phenol 912, etc.). Bakelite has low losses on of the r-f choke in question with a piece of
the lower frequencies but should never be wire and exploring the windings of the choke
used in the field of high-frequency tank cir- with a grid-dip oscillator. Most commercial
cuits. transmitting type chokes have series reso
Lucite (or Plexiglas), which is available nances in the vicinity of 11 Me. or 24 Me.
in rods, sheets, or tubing, is satisfactory for
use at all radio frequencies where the rf volt
ages are not especially high. It is very easy
to work with ordinary tools and is not expen-
~2~rr----,-----~~TT----.-----.----.
sive. The loss factor depends to a consider J:
able extent upon the amount and kind of plas- 0
~
ticizer used. 61.5
The most important thing to keep in mind
w
regarding insulation is that the best insulation u
is air. If it is necessary to reinforce air-wound ~ 1.0
HOLES FOR
METER STUDS
tAETER
LEAD
Figure llA
SIMPLE METER SHIELD
HOLE
4 800
j_iJ~R :1: "'f{Cz ~ Changing the filament by-pass capacitors to
.01-(Lfd. lowered the filament resonance fre-
TC1 RFC :;:Cz I quency to 2.2 Me. and cured this effect. A
~I
ISO
~II
capacitors smaller in value than .01-fLfd.
110
should be used with caution.
_LCI RFC ..,LS:I RFC
Various parasitic resonances are also found
lc4 '!!!' Ic4 ~ fez ' I
10
Y TIGHT ELECTRICALLY-TIGHT
T COMPARTMENT
NC
RFC1 RFC2.
GRID PLATE
"TANK "TANK.,
+
R.F. CIRCUIT PARASITIC CIRCUIT FOR CURE
LOW FREQ. OSCILLATION
Figure 15
THE CAUSE AND CURE OF LOW FREQUENCY PARASITICS
of such tubes. Try larger and smaller screen It may be said in general that the presence
by-pass capacitors to determine whether or not of low-frequency parasitics indicates that
they have any effect. If the condition is com- somewhere in the oscillating circuit there is
ing from the screen circuit an audio choke with an impedance which is high at a frequency in
a resistor across it in series with the screen the upper audio or low r-f range. This imped-
feed lead will often eliminate the trouble. ance may include one or more r-f chokes of
Low-frequency parasitic oscillations can the conventional variety, power supply chokes,
often take place in the audio system of an AM modulation components, or the high impedance
transmitter, and their presence will not be may be presented simply by an RC circuit
known until the transmitter is checked on a such as might be found in the screen-feed cir-
receiver. It is easy to determine whether or cuit of a beam-tetrode amplifier stage.
not the oscillations are coming from the modu-
lator simply by switching off the modulator
tubes. If the oscillations are coming from the
modulator, the stage in which they are being 18-8 Elimination of V-H-F
generated can be determined by removing tubes Parasitic Oscillations
successively, starting with the first speech
amplification stage, until the oscillation stops.
When the stage has been found, remedial steps V-h-f parasitic oscillations are often diffi-
can be taken on that stage. cult to locate and difficult to eliminate since
If the stage causing the oscillation is a low- their frequency often is only moderately above
level speech stage it is possible that the the desired frequency of operation. But it may
trouble is coming from r-f or power-supply be said that v-h-f parasitics always may be
feedback, or it may be coming about as a re- eliminated if the operating frequency is appre-
sult of inductive coupling between two trans- ciably below the upper frequency limit for the
formers. If the oscillation is taking place in tubes used in the stage. However, the elimi-
a high-level audio stage, it is possible that nation of a persistent parasitic oscillation on
inductive or capacitive coupling is taking a frequency only moderately higher than the
place back to one of the low-level speech desired operating frequency will involve a
stages. It is also possible, in certain cases, sacrifice in either the power output or the
that parasitic push-pull oscillation can take power sensitivity of the stage, or in both.
place in a Class B or Class AB modulator as Beam-tetrode stages, particularly those
a result of the grid-to-plate capacitance with- using 807 type tubes, will almost invariably
in the tubes and in the stage wiring. This con- have one or more v-h-f parasitic oscillations
dition is more likely to occur if capacitors unless adequate precautions have been taken
have been placed across the secondary of the in advance. Many of the units described in
driver transformer and across the primary of the constructional section of this edition had
the modulation transformer to act in the reduc- parasitic oscillations when first constructed.
tion of the amplitude of the higher audio fre- But these oscillations were eliminated in each
quencies. Relocation of wiring or actual neu- case; hence, the expedients used in these
tralization of the audio stage in the manner equipments should be studied. V-h-f parasitics
used for r-f stages may be required. may be readily identified, as they cause a
HANDBOOK Parasitic Oscillations 367
PC=3 T. #18. ON
52.11,2 W. CAR-
BON RESISTOR
RFC=OHMITE Z-50 OR
EQUIVALENT
+ +
Figure 17
SCREEN PARASITIC SUPPRESSION CIR
CUlT FOR TETRODE TUBES
FOR 60 7, ETC.
PC=~r:#te. ON41.n.~zw.
PC=ar.~t-JBE.ON COMPOSITION RESISTOR
22.D.,2W. COM-
POSITION RESISTOR FOR 4-250A, ETC.
PC:..5-.570J2., 2 W. COMPOSITION
RESISroRS IN PARALLEL WITH
ST.IIIG. /AI" DIA.
+ + + +
Figure 19
and tested. Therefore it is always wise to fol- and plate currents of the tube should drop to
low a definite procedure in checking a new zero. Grid and plate tuning condensers should
transmitter for parasitic oscillations. be tuned to minimum capacity. No change in
Parasitic oscillations of all types are most resting grid, screen or plate current should
easily found when the stage in question is be observed. If a parasitic is present, grid cur-
running by itself, with full plate (and screen) rent will flow, and there will be an abrupt in-
voltage, sufficient protective bias to limit the crease in plate current. The size of the lamp
plate current to a safe value, and no excita- bulb in series with the high voltage supply may
tion. One stage should be tested at a time, be varied until the stage can oscillate contin-
and the complete transmitter should never be uously, without exceeding the rated plate dis-
put on the air until all stages have been thor- sipation of the tube.
oughly checked for parasitics. 3. The frequency of the parasitic may now
To protect tetrode tubes during tests for be determined by means of an absorption wave
parasitics, the screen voltage should be ap- meter, or a neon bulb. Low frequency oscilla-
plied through a series resistor which will limit tions will cause a neon bulb to glow yellow.
the screen current to a safe value in case the High frequency oscillations will cause the
plate voltage of the tetrode is suddenly re- bulb to have a soft, violet glow. Once the fre-
moved when the screen supply is on. The cor- quency of oscillation is determined, the cures
rect procedure for parasitic testing is as fol- suggested in this chapter may be applied to
lows (figure 20): the stage.
1. The stage in question should be coupled 4. When the stage can pass the above test
to a dummy load, and tuned up in correct oper- with no signs of parasitics, the bias supply of
ating shape. Sufficient protective bias should the tube in question should be decreased until
be applied to the tube at all times. For pro- the tube is dissipating its full plate rating
tection of the stage under test, a lamp bulb when full plate voltage is applied, with no r-f
should be added in series with one leg of the
primary circuit of the high voltage power sup-
ply. As the plate supply load increases during
a period of parasitic oscillation, the voltage
drop across the lamp increases, and the effec-
tive plate voltage drops. Bulbs of various
size may be tried to adjust the voltage under
testing conditions to the correct amount. If a
Variac or Powerstat is at hand, it may be used
in place of the bulbs for smoother voltage con-
trol. Don't test for parasitics unless some type
of voltage control is used on the high voltage
supply! When a stage breaks into parasitic
oscillations, the plate current increases vio-
lently, and some protection to the tube under
Figure 20
test must be used.
2. The r-f excitation to the tube should now SUGGESTED TEST SETUP FOR PARASITIC
be removed. When this is done, the grid, screen TESTS
370 Transmitter Design
371
372 TV and Broadcast Interference THE R AD I 0
TO TV ANTENNA COAX
FITTING
L2 } TO ANTENNA
TERMINALS
OF TV SET
C2
nated as a source of interference to reception, must be readjusted whenever the band of oper-
work may then be begun on or in the vicinity ation is changed, or even when moving from
of the transmitter toward eliminating the other one extreme end of a band to the other. Hence,
two types of interference. wavetraps are not recommended except when
operation will be confined to a relatively nar-
Taking Out More or less standard SCI- row portion of one amateur band. However, fig-
the Fundamental type practice is most com- ure 1 shows two of the most common signal
monly used in taking out trapping arrangements.
fundamental interference. Wavetraps and fil-
ters are installed, and the antenna system may High-Pass Filters High-pass filters in the
or may not be modified so as to offer less re- antenna lead of the TV set
sponse to the signal from the amateur trans- have proven to be quite sat is factory as a
mitter. In regard to a comparison between means of eliminating TVI of the overloading
wavetraps and filters, the same considerations type. In many cases when the interfering trans-
apply as have been effective in regard to BCI mitter is operated only on the bands below
for many years; wavetraps are quite effective 7.3 Me., the use of a high-pass filter in the
when properly installed and adjusted, but they antenna lead has completely eliminated all
HANDBOOK Harmonic Radiation 3 73
~~~~~~~~E 2ND 3RD 4TH 5TH 6TH 7TH 8TH 9TH 10TH
~
21.45 H~NEL CHANNEL FM CH@EL
(TV I. F.) BROAD-
CAST
~E
FM
54.0 BROAD-
CAST
~@~ INTERFERENCE
TO U H-F CHANNELS
Figure 4
HARMONICS OF THE AMATEUR BANDS
Shown are the harmoni~ frequency ranges of the amateur bancls between 7 one/ 54 Me., with the
TV ~hannels (one/ TV 1-f systems) which are most likely to receive interference from these har-
momcs. Uncler certain conclitions amateur signals in the 1.8 one/ 3.5 Me. bancls can cause inter-
ference as a result of clirect pickup in the vic/eo systems of TV receivers which are not acle-
quately shielclecl.
VIDEO
I
t:
~
I TV I r TV I
1
cHANNEL 1 !CHANNELl
I@ I I@) I
I I I
66
LOW BAND
SOLJ.ND
~ ~ "'"':.., ""'"'
~ N
"' "' "' "' "' "' "' _<! "' "' "'I
TV
I(CHANNEL il
I
I TV
cHANNEL
I I TV
1cHANNEL 1
I I TV
tCHANNEL I
I
I1CHANNEL1
TV il TV
!CHANNEL
I
I
I TV I
1cHANNEL 1
I I
I
0 I
I
1
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I@
I
:j
I
I
t
([j) I
I
I@
I
t
I
I
I
@ u
I
174 180 186 192 198 204 210 216
HIGH BAND
Figure 5
FREQUENCIES OF THE V-H-F TV CHANNELS
Showing the frequency ranges of TV channels 2 through 13, with the picture carrier and sound
carrier frequencies also shown.
ing harmonic will fall as far as possible from The first check can best be made with the
the picture carrier. The worst possible inter neighbor who is receiving the most serious
ference to the picture from a continuous car or the most general interference. Turn on the
rier will be obtained when the interfering sig transmitter and check all channels to deter
nal is very close in frequency to the video mine the extent of the interference and the
carrier. number of channels affected. Then disconnect
the antenna and substitute a group of 100-watt
Isolating Throughout the testing proce lamps as a dummy load for the transmitter. Ex
the Source of dure it will be necessary to perience has shown that 8 100-watt lamps con
the Interference have some sort of indicating nected in two seriesed groups of four in par-
device as a means of deter allel will take the output of a kilowatt trans
mining harmonic field intensities. The best mitter on 28 Me. if connections are made sym
indicator for field intensities some distance metrically to the group of lamps. Then note
from the transmitting antenna will probably be the interference. Now remove plate voltage
the TV receiver of some neighbor with whom from the final amplifier and determine the ex
friendly relations are still maintained. This tent of interference c au sed by the e x cite r
person will then be able to give a check, oc stages.
casionally, on the relative nature of the inter In the average case, when the final ampli
ference. But it will probably be necessary to fier is a beam tetrode stage and the exciter is
go and check yourself periodically the results
obtained, since the neighbor probably will not
be able to give any sort of a quantitative anal
ysis of the progress which has been made.
An additional device for checking relative
ly high field intensities in the vicinity of the
transmitter will be almost a necessity. A sim
pie crystal diode wavemeter, shown in figure
6 will accomplish this function. Also, it will
be very helpful to have a receiver, with an S
meter, capable of covering at least the 50 to
100 Me. range and preferably the range to 216
Me. This device may consist merely of the
Figure 6
station receiver and a simple converter using
the two halves of a 6]6 as oscillator and Crystal-diode wavemeter suitable for check-
ing high-intensity harmonics in TV region.
mixer.
376 TV and Broadcast Interference THE R AD I 0
Figure 9
PHOTOGRAPH OF THE (B) FILTER WITH COVER REMOVED
The mic/-section in this filter is ocljustecl for maximum rejection of channel 4. Note that the main
coils of the filter are mountec/ at an angle of about 45 clegrees so that there will be minimum
inductive coupling from one settion to the next through the holes in the aluminum partitions.
Mounting the coifs in this mann"' was founc/ to give a m"asurab/., improv.,ment in th" attenua-
tion characteristics of the filter.
378 TV and Broadcast Interference THE R AD I 0
Figure 11
HALF-WAVE FILTER
FOR THE 28-MC. BAND
Showing one possible type
of construction of a 52-ohm
half-wave filter for relative
ly low power operation on
the 28-Mc. bane/.
to check the standing-wave ratio of the load and is in good repair, the burden of rectifying
being presented to the output of the filter with the trouble rests with the owner of the inter-
a standing-wave meter of any of the conven- fering station. Phone and c-w stations both
tional types. Then the antenna termination or are capable of causing broadcast interference,
the antenna coupled should be adjusted, with key-click annoyance from the code transmitters
low power on the transmitter, until the s.w.r. being particularly objectionable.
of the load being presented to the filter is A knowledge of each of the several types
less than 2.0, and preferably below 1.5. of broadcast interference, their cause, and
methods of eliminating them is necessary for
Half-Wave Filters Half-wave f i 1 t e r s ("Hac- the successful disposition of this trouble. An
monikers") have been dis- effective method of combating one variety of
cussed in various publications including the interference is often of no value whatever in
Nov.-Dec. 1949 GE Ham News. Such filters the correction of another type. Broadcast in-
are relatively simple and offer the advantage terference seldom can be cured by "rule of
that they present the same value of impedance thumb" procedure.
at their input terminals as appears as load Broadcast interference, as covered in this
across their output terminals. Such filters nor- section refers primarily to standard (amplitude
mally are used as one-band affairs, and they modulated, 550-1600 kc.) broadcast. Interfer-
offer high attenuation only to the third and ence with FM broadcast reception is much
higher harmonics. Design data on the half- less common, due to the wide separation in
wave filter is given in figure 10. Construction frequency between the FM broadcast band and
of half-wave filters is illustrated in figure 11. the more popular amateur bands, and due also
to the limiting action which exists in all types
of FM receivers. Occasional interference with
19-4 Broadcast FM broadcast by a harmonic of an amateur
transmitter has been reported; if this condi-
Interference
tion is encountered, it may be eliminated by
the procedures discussed in the first portion
Interference to the reception of signals in of this chapter under Television Interference.
the broadcast band (540 to 1600 kc.) or in the The use of frequency-modulation transmis-
FM broadcast band (88 to 108 Me.) by amateur sion by an amateur station is likely to result
transmissions is a serious matter to those in much less interference to broadcast recep-
amateurs living in densely populated areas. tion than either amplitude-modulated telephony
Although broadcast interference has recently or straight keyed c.w. This is true because,
been overshadowed by the seriousness of tele- insofar as the broadcast receiver is concerned,
vision interference, the condition of BCI is the amateur FM transmission will consist of a
still present. plain unmodulated carrier. There will be no
In general, signals from a transmitter oper- key clicks or voice reception picked up by
ating properly are not picked up by receivers the b-c-1 set (unless it happens to be an FM
tuned to other frequencies unless the receiver receiver which might pick up a harmonic of
is of inferior design, or is in poor condition. the signal), although there might be a slight
Therefore, if the receiver is of good design click when the transmitter is put on or taken
380 TV and Broadcast Interference THE R AD I 0
BROADCAST
RECEIVER
A
BROADCAST
RECEIVER
G
BROADCAST Figure 13
RECEIVER HIGH-ATTENUATION WAVE- TRAP
CIRCUIT
The two circuits may be tuned to the some
frequency for highest attenuation of a strong
signa/, or the two traps may be tuned sep-
arately for different bonds of operation.
Figure 12
WAVE-TRAP CIRCUITS
The circuit at (A) is the most common or unintelligible. Keying of the carrier which
rongement, but the circuit at (B) may give produces the blanketing will cause an annoy
improved results under certain conditions. ing fluctuation in the volume of the broadcast
Manufactured wove traps for the desired bond
of operation may be purchased or the traps signals.
may be assembled from the data given in Blanketing generally occurs in the imme-
figure !4. diate neighborhood (inductive field) of a pow-
erful transmitter, the affected area being di-
rectly proportional to the power of the trans-
mitter. Also it is more prevalent with trans
off the air. This is one reason why narrow- mitters which operate in the 160-meter and
band FM has become so popular with phone SO-meter bands, as compared to those on the
enthusiasts who reside in densely populated higher frequencies.
areas. The remedies are to (1) shorten the receiv
ing antenna and thereby shift its resonant fre
Interference Depending upon whether it is quency, or ( 2) remove it to the interior of the
Classifications traceable directly to causes building, (3) change the direction of either
within the station or within the receiving or transmitting antenna to mini-
the receiver, broadcast interference may be mize their mutual coupling, or ( 4) keep the
divided into two main classes. For example, interfering signal from entering the receiver
that type of interference due to transmitter input circuit by installing a wavetrap tuned
over-modulation is at once listed as being to the signal frequency (see figure 12) or a
caused by improper operation, while an inter low-pass filter as shown in figure 21.
fering signal that tunes in and out with a A suitable wave-trap is quite simple in con
broadcast station is probably an indication of struction, consisting only of a coil and midget
cross modulation or image response in the re- variable capacitor. When the trap circuit is
ceiver, and the poorl ydesigned input stage tuned to the frequency of the interfering sig-
of the receiver is held liable. The various nal, little of the interfering voltage reaches
types of interference and recommended cures the grid of the first tube. Commercially manu
will be discussed in the following paragraphs. factured wave-traps are available from several
concerns, including the J. W. Miller Co. in
Blanketing This is not a tunable effect, but Los Angeles. However, the majority of ama-
a total blocking of the receiver. teurs prefer to construct the traps from spare
A more or less complete "washout" covers components selected from the "junk box."
the entire receiver range when the carrier is The circuit shown in figure 13 is particu
switched on. This produces either a complete larly effective because it consists of two
blotting out of all broadcast stations, or else traps. The shunt trap blocks or rejects the
knocks down their volume several decibels- frequency to which it is tuned, w hi 1 e the
depending upon the severity of the interfer- series trap across the antenna and ground ter-
ence. Voice modulation of the carrier causing minals of the receiver provides a very low im
the blanketing will be highly distorted or even pedance path to ground at the frequency to
HANDBOOK Wavetraps 381
which it is tuned and by-passes the signal to Broadcast interference due to overmodula-
ground. In moderate interference cases, either tion is frequently encountered. The remedy is
the shunt or series trap may be used alone, to reduce the modulation percentage or to use
while similarly, one trap may be tuned to one a clipper-filter system or a high-level splatter
of the frequencies of the interfering trans- suppressor in the speech circuit of the trans-
mitter and the other trap to a different inter- mitter.
fering frequency. In either case, each trap is
effective over but a small frequency range Cross Cross modulation or cross talk is
and must be readjusted for other frequencies. Modulation characterized by the amateur sig-
The wave-trap must be installed as close nal riding in on top of a strong
to the receiver antenna terminal as practic- broadcast signal. There is usually no hetero-
able, hence it should be as small in size as dyne note, the amateur signal being tuned in
possible. The variable capacitor may be a and out with the program carriers.
midget air-tuned trimmer type, and the coil This effect is due frequently to a faulty in-
may be wound on a l-inch dia. form. The table put stage in the affected receiver. Modulation
of figure 14 gives winding data for wave-traps
of the interfering carrier will swing the oper-
built around standard variable capacitors. For
ating point of the input tub e. This type of
best results, both a shunt and a series trap
trouble is seldom experienced when a varia-
should be employed as shown.
ble-p tube is used in the input stage.
Figure 15 shows a two-circuit coupled
Where the receiver is too ancient to incor-
wave-trap that is somewhat sharper in tuning
porate such a tube, and is probably poorly
and more efficacious. The specifications for
shielded at the same time, it will be better to
the secondary coil L, may be obtained from
attach a wave-trap of the type shown in figure
the table of figure 14. The primary coil of the
12 rather than to attempt rebuilding of the re-
shunt trap consists of 3 to 5 closewound turns
ceiver. The addition of a good ground and a
of the same size wire wound in the same di-
rection on the same form as L 1 and separated shield can over the input tube often adds to
from the latter by 'Ia of an inch. the effectiveness of the wave-trap.
2 TO fOMEG.
Low-frequency parasitics may actually oc-
cur on broadcast frequencies or their near sub-
harmonics, causing direct interference to pro-
grams. An all-wave monitor operated in the
vicinity of the transmitter will detect these Figure 17
spurious signals.
The remedy will be obvious in individual CIRCUITS FOR ELIMINATING AUDIO-
cases. Elsewhere in this book are discussed STAGE RECTIFICATION
methods of complete neutralization and the
suppression of parasitic oscillations in r-f
and audio stages.
audio tube. The impedance may be an amateur
A-c/d-c Receivers Inexpensive tab 1 e- model band r-f choke (such as a National R-100U)
a-c/ d-e receivers are par- for best results, but for a majority of cases
ticularly susceptible to interference from ama- it will be found that a 47,000-ohm Yz-watt re-
teur transmissions. In fact, it may be said sistor in series with this lead will give satis-
with a fair degree of assurance that the major- factory operation. Suitable circuits for such
ity of BCI encountered by amateurs operating an operation on the receiver are given in fig-
in the 1.8-Mc. to 29-Mc. range is a result of ure 17.
these inexpensive receivers. In most cases In many a.c.-d.c. receivers there is no r-f
the receivers are at fault; but this does not by-pass included across the plate supply recti-
absolve the amateur of his responsibility in fier for the set. If there is an appreciable
attempting to eliminate the interference. level of r-f signal on the power line feeding
the receiver, r-f rectification in the power
Stray Receiver In most cases of interference rectifier of the receiver can cause a particu-
Rectification to inexpensive receivers, par- larly bad type of interference which may be
ticularly those of the a-c/ d-e received on other broadcast receivers in the
type, it will be found that stray receiver recti- vicinity in addition to the one causing the
fication is causing the trouble. The offending rectification. The soldering of a 0.0 1-JLfd. disc
stage usually will be found to be a high-mu ceramic capacitor directly from anode to cath-
triode as the first audio stage following the ode of the power rectifier (whether it is of the
second detector. Tubes of this type are quite vacuum-tube or selenium-rectifier type) usual-
non-linear in their grid characteristic, and ly will by-pass the r-f signal across the recti-
hence will readily rectify any r-f signal ap- fier and thus eliminate the difficulty.
pearing between grid and cathode. The r-f sig-
nal may get to the tube as a result of direct "Floating" Volume Several sets have been
signal pickup due to the lack of shielding, but Control Shafts encountered where there
more commonly will be fed to the tube from was only a slightly inter-
the power line as a result of the series heater fering signal; but, upon placing one's hand up
string. to the volume control, the signal would great-
The remedy for this condition is simply to ly increase. Investigation revealed that the
insure that the cathode and grid of the high-mu volume control was installed with its shaft
audio tube (usually a 12SQ7 or equivalent) are insulated from ground. The control itself was
at the same r-f potential. This is accomplished connected to a critical part of a circuit, in
by placing an r-f by-pass capacitor with the many instances to the grid of a high-gain au-
shortest possible leads directly from grid to dio stage. The cure is to install a volume con-
cathode, and then adding an impedance in the trol with all the terminals insulated from the
lead from the volume control to the grid of the shaft, and then to ground the shaft.
384 TV and Broadcast Interference THE R AD I 0
METAL 60X
3.5 Me.
17 turns
no. 14 enameled 1 00-tt.ufd. variable TO A. C. c I TO TRANSMITTE.R
l-inch diameter
LINE c OR RECEIVER
~------~~~~~~~~~SH=I~E=~~O=B~R=A~IO~~~~--
l-1j4-inch length
7.0 Me.
11 turns
no. 14 enameled
2Vrinch
diameter
1 00-JL.ufd. variable
L--}-J
1 V2 -inch length
4 turns Figure 19
14 and no. 10 enameled 1 00-JLJLfd. variable RESONANT POWER-LINE
21 Me. 3-inch diameter
1 Va-inch length WAVE-TRAP CIRCUIT
3 turns
The resonant type of power-line filter is
27 and 1j4-inch o.d. more effective than the more conventional
28 Me. copper tubing 1 00-,u.ufd. variable "brute force .. type of I ine filter, but requires
'2.-inch diameter tuning to the operating frequency of the
l-inch length
transmitter.
Figure 18
apply, wave-traps must be installed in the
COIL AND CAPACITOR TABLE power lines at the transmitter to remove r-f
FORA-CLINE TRAPS energy passing back into the lighting system.
The wave-traps used in the power lines at
transmitter or receiver must be cap a b 1 e of
passing relatively high current. The coils are
Power-Line Wh en radio-frequency energy accordingly wound with heavy wire. Figure 18
Pickup from a radio transmitter enters a lists the specifications for power line wave-
broadcast receiver through the trap coils, while figure 19 illustrates the meth-
a-c power lines, it has either been fed back od of connecting these wave-traps. Observe
into the lighting system by the offending trans- that these traps are enclosed in a shield box
mitter, or picked up from the air by over-head of heavy iron or steel, well grounded.
power lines. Underground lines are seldom re-
sponsible for spreading this interference. All-Wove Each complete-coverage home re-
To check the path whereby the interfering Receivers ceiver is a potential source of an-
signals reach the line, it is only necessary to noyance to the transmitting ama-
replace the transmitting antenna with a dum- teur. The novice short-wave broadcast-listener
my antenna and adjust the transmitter for max- who tunes in an amateur station often con-
imum output. If the interference then ceases, siders it an interfering signal, and complains
overhead lines have been picking up the en- accordingly.
ergy. The trouble can be cleared up by install- Neither selectivity nor image rejection in
ing a wave-trap or a commercial line filter in most of these sets is comparable to those
the power lines at the receiver. If the receiver properties in a communication receiver. The
is reasonably close to the transmitter, it is result is that an amateur signal will occupy
very doubtful that changing the direction of too much dial space and appear at more than
the transmitting antenna to right angles with one point, giving rise to interference on ad-
the overhead lines will eliminate the trouble. jacent channels and distant channels as well.
If, on the contrary, the interference con- If carrier-frequency harmonics are present
tinues when the transmitter is connected to in the amateur transmission, serious interfer-
the dummy antenna, radio-frequency energy is ence will result at the all-wave receiver. The
being fed directly into the power line by the harmonics may, if the carrier frequency has
transmitter, and the station must be inspected been so unfortunately chosen, fall directly
to determine the cause. upon a favorite short-wave broadcast station
One of the following reasons for the trouble and arouse warranted objection.
will usually be found: ( 1) the r-f stages are The amateur is apt to be blamed, too, for
not sufficiently bypassed and/ or choked, (2) transmissions for which he is not responsible,
the antenna coupling system is not performing so great is the public ignorance of short-wave
efficiently, (3) the power transformers have allocations and signals. Owners of all-wave
no electrostatic shields; or, if shields are pre- receivers have been quick to ascribe to ama-
sent, they are ungrounded, (4) power lines are t-eur stations all signals they hear from tape
running too close to an antenna or r-f circuits machines and V-wheels, as well as stray tones
carrying high currents. If none of these causes and heterodyne flutters.
HANDBOOK lmaqe Interference 38 5
The amateur cannot be held responsible The second variety of superhet interference
when his carrier is deliberately tuned in on is the result of harmonics of the receiver h-f
an all-wave receiver. Neither is he account oscillator beating with amateur carriers to pro
able for the width of his signal on the receiver duce the intermediate frequency of the receiv
dial, or for the strength of image repeat points, er. The amateur transmitter will always be
if it can be proven that the receiver design found to be on a frequency equal to some har
does not afford good selectivity and image re monic of the receiver hf oscillator, plus or
jection. minus the intermediate frequency.
If he so desires, the amateur (or the owner As an example: when a broadcast superhet
of the receiver) might sharpen up the received with 465-kc. i.f. is tuned to 1000 kc., its high-
signal somewhat by shortening the receiving frequency oscillator operates on 1465 kc. The
antenna. Set retailers often supply quite a third harmonic of this oscillator frequency is
sizeable antenna with all-wave receivers, but 4395 kc., which will beat with an amateur sig-
most of the time these sets perform almost as nal on 3930 kc. to send a signal through the
well with a few feet of inside antenna. i-f amplifier. The 3930 kc. signal would be
The amateur is accountable for harmonics tuned in at the 1000-kc. point on the dial.
of his carrier frequency. Such emissions are Some oscillator harmonics are so related to
unlawful in the first place, and he must take amateur frequencies that more than one point
all steps necessary to their suppression. Prac of interference will occur on the receiver dial.
tical suggestions for the elimination of har Thus, a 3500-kc. signal may be tuned in at
monies have been given earlier in this chap six points on the dial of a nearby broadcast
ter under Television Interference. superhet having 175 kc. i.f. and no r-f stage.
Insofar as remedies for image and harmonic
superhet interference are concerned, it is well
Image Interference In addition to those types to remember that if the amateur signal did not
of interference aIr e ad y in the first place reach the input stage of the
discussed, there are two more which are com receiver, the annoyance would not have been
mon to superhet receivers. The prevalence of created. It is therefore good policy to try to
these types is of great concern to the ama eliminate it by means of a wave-trap or low
teur, although the responsibility for their ex pass filter. Broadcast superhets are not al-
istence more properly rests with the broadcast ways the acme of good shielding, however,
receiver. and the amateur signal is apt to enter the cir
The mechanism whereby image production cuit through channels other than the input cir-
takes place may be explained in the following cuit. If a wave-trap or filter will not cure the
manner: when the first detector is set to the trouble, the only alternative will be to attempt
frequency of an incoming signal, the high-fre
quency oscillator is operating on another fre
quency which differs from the signal by the
number of kilocycles of the intermediate fre
quency. Now, with the setting of these two
stages undisturbed, there is another signal
which will beat with the high-frequency oscil-
lator to produce an i-f signal. This other sig-
nal is the so-called image, which is separated
from the desired signal by twice the inter
mediate frequency. CONSTANT K TYPE
Thus, in a receiver with 175-kc. i.f., tuned
to 1000 kc.: the hf oscillator is operating on
1175 kc., and a signal on 1350 kc. (1000 kc.
plus 2 x 175 kc.) will beat with this 1175 kc.
oscillator frequency to produce the 175-kc. i-f
signal. Similarly, when the same receiver is
tuned to 1400 kc., an amateur signal on 1750
kc. can come through.
:-H:UT
o-J.___J_o
If the image appears only a few cycles or
kilocycles from a broadcast carrier, heterodyne M- DERIVED TYPE
interference will be present as well. Other
wise, it will be tuned in and out in the manner Figure 20
of a station operating in the broadcast band. TYPES OF LOW-PASS FILTERS
Sharpness of tuning will be comparable to that
Filters such as these may be used in the
of broadcast stations producing the same a-vc circuit between the antenna and the input
voltage at the receiver. of the receiver.
386 TV and Broadcast Interference
0
I' !2 C3 !4 0 TO RECEIVER ~NO. POST
effective than either type operating alone. A
composite filter composed of one Ksection
GND. and one shunt-derived Msection is shown in
figure 21, and is highly recommended. The
Figure 21 Msection is designed to have maximum atten
uation at 1700 kc., and for that reason C,
COMPOSITE LOW-PASS FILTER
should be of the "close tolerance" variety.
CIRCUIT
Likewise, C, should not be stuffed down in-
This filter is highly effective in reducing side L 2 in the interest of compactness, as
broadcast interference from all high frequen-
cy stations, one/ requires no tuning. Con- this will alter the inductance of the coil appre
stants for 400 ohm terminal impedance and ciably, and likewise the resonant frequency.
1600 kc. cutoff ore os follows: Lt, 65 turns If a fixed 150 /-(f!fd. mica capacitor of 5 per
no. 22 d. c. c. c/osewound on 1!1 in. clio. form. cent tolerance is not available for C., a com
L2, 41 turns ditto, not coupled to Lt. Ct,
250 !l+'fd. fixed mica capacitor. c2.
400 !l+'fd. pression trimmer covering the range of 125-
fixed mica capacitor. c3 and c4.150 !l+'fd. 175 /-(f!fd. may be substituted and adjusted to
fixed mica capacitors, former of 5% toler- give maximum attenuation at about 1700 kc.
ance. With some receivers, better results
will be obtained with o 200 ohm carbon re
sistor inserted between the filter and on 19-5 HI-FI Interference
tenno post on the rece1"ver, With other re-
ceivers the effectiveness will be improved The rapid growth of high-fidelity sound systems
with o 600 ohm carbon resistor placed from
the antenna post to the ground post on the in the home has brought about many cases of
receiver. The filter s h o u I d be placed as interference from a nearby amateur transmitter.
close to the receiver terminals as possible. In most cases, the interference is caused by
stray pickup of the rf signal by the interconnect
ing leads of the hifi system and audio rectifi
cation in the 'low level stages of the amplifier.
to select a transmitter frequency such that The solution to this difficulty, in general, is to
neither image nor harmonic interference will be
bypass and filter all speaker and power leads
set up on favorite stations in the susceptible
to the hi-fi amplifier and preamplifier. A com
receivers. The equation given earlier may be
used to determine the proper frequencies. bination of a VHF choke and 5 00 f!f!Id ceramic
disc capacitors in each power and speaker lead
Low Pass Filters The greatest drawback of will eliminate rf pickup in the high level section
the wave-trap is the fact of the amplifier. A filter such as shown in figure
that it is a single-frequency device; i.e.-it 17 A placed in the input circuit of the first audio
may be set to reject at one time only one fre stage of the preamplifier will reduce the level of
quency (or, at best, an extremely narrow band the r-f signal reaching the input circuit of the
of frequencies). Each time the frequency of amplifier. To prevent loss of the higher audio
the interfering transmitter is changed, every frequencies it may be necessary to decrease the
wave-trap tuned to it must be retuned. A much value of the grid bypass capacitor to 50 f!f!Id
more satisfactory device is the wave filter or so.
which requires no cuning. One type, the low Shielded leads should be employed between the
pass filter, passes all frequencies below one amplifier and the turntable or f-m tuner. The
critical frequency, and eliminates all higher shield should be. grounded at both ends of the
frequencies. It is this property that makes the line to the chassis of the equipment, and care
device ideal for the task of removing amateur should be taken to see that the line does not
frequencies from broadcast receivers. approach an electrical half-wave length of the
A good low-pass filter designed for maxi radio signal causing the interference. In some
mum attenuation around 1700 kc. will pass
instances, shielding the power cable to the hifi
all broadcast carriers, but will reject signals
equipment will aid in reducing interference. The
originating in any amateur band. Naturally
such a device should be installed only in framework of the phonograph turntable should be
standard broadcast receivers, never in all- grounded to the chassis of the amplifier to reduce
wave sets. stray r-f pickup in the turntable equipment.
CHAPTER TWENTY
387
388 Transmitter Keying and Control THE R AD I 0
Figure 1
THE PLAN {A) POWER SYSTEM
Figure 2
A-c line power from the main fuse box in the
house is run separately to the receiving THE PLAN {B) POWER SYSTEM
equipment ancl to the transmitting equipment. This system is less convenient than the (A}
Separate switches ancl fuse blacks then are system, hut does not require extensive re ..
available for the transmitters ancl for the wiring of the electrical system within the
auxiliary equipment. Since the fuses in the house to accommoclate the a"angement. Thus
boxes at the operating room will be in series it is better lor a temporary or semi .. permanent
with those at the main fuse box, those in the installation. In most cases it will be neces-
operating room shaulcl have a lower rating sary to run an extra conduit from the main
than those at the main fuse box. Then it will fuse box to the outlet from which the trans
always be possible to replace blown fuses mitter is powered, since the stone/arc/ arrange-
without leaving the operating room. The fuse ment in most houses is to run all the outlets
boxes can conveniently be lacatecl alongside in one room (ancl sometimes all in the house}
one another on the wall of the operating room. from a single pair of fuses anclleacls.
type. It is possible also that the BX cable will to the transmitter. Control and keying wires
have to be permanently affixed to the trans can best be grouped into a multiple-wire rubber
mitter with the connector at the fuse-box end. covered cable between the desk and the trans
These details may be worked out in advance mitter. Such an arrangement gives a good ap
with the electrical inspector for your area. pearance, and is particularly practical if cable
The general aspects of Plan (B) are shown connectors are used at each end. High-level
in figure 2. The basic difference between the audio at a moderate impedance level (600 ohms
two plans is that (A) represents a permanent or below) may be run in the same control cable
installation even though a degree of mobility as the other leads. However, low-level audio
is allowed through the use of BX for power can best be run in a small coaxial cable. Small
leads, while plan (B) is definitely a temporary coaxial cable such as RG-58/U or RG-59/U
type of installation as far as the electrical in- also is quite satisfactory and quite convenient
spector is concerned. While it will be permis for the signal from the v .f.o. to the r-f stages
sible in most areas to leave the transmitter in the transmitter. Coaxial-cable connectors of
cord plugged into the outlet even though it is the UG series are quite satisfactory for the
turned off, the Fire Insurance Underwriters terminations both for the v-f-o lead and for any
codes will make it necessary that the cord low-level audio cables.
which runs to the group of outlets at the back
of the operating desk be removed whenever the Checking an To make sure that an outlet will
equipment is not actually in use. Outlet with a stand the full load of the entire
Whether the general aspects of plans (A) or Heavy Load transmitter, plug in an electric
(B) are used it will be necessary to run a num- heater rated at about 50 per cent
ber of control wires, keying and audio leads, greater wattage than the power you expect to
and an excitation cable from the operating desk draw from the line. If the line voltage does
HANDBOOK Transmitter Control 389
not drop more than 5 volts (assuming a 117- to energize or cut the power from the outlet
volt line) under load and the wiring does not strip on the rear of the operating desk. Through
overheat, the wiring is adequate to supply the the use of such a switch it is not necessary to
transmitter. About 600 watts total drain is the remember to switch off a large number of sepa-
maximum that should be drawn from a 117-volt rate switches on each of the items of equip-
lighting outlet or circuit. For greater power, ment on the operating desk. The alternative
a separate pair of heavy conductors should be arrangement, and that which is approved by the
run right from the meter box. For a 1-kw. phone Underwriters, is to remove the plugs from the
transmitter the total drain is so great that a wall both for the transmitter and for the oper-
230-volt "split" system ordinarily will be re- ating-desk outlet strip when a period of oper-
quired. Most of the newer homes are wired with ation has been completed.
this system, as are homes utilizing electricity While the insertion of plugs or operation of
for cooking and heating. switches usually will be found best for ap-
With a three-wire system, be sure there is plying the a-c line power to the equipment, the
no fuse in the neutral wire at the fuse box. A changing over between transmit and receive
neutral fuse is not required if both "hot" legs can best be accomplished through the use of
are fused, and, should a neutral fuse blow, relays. Such a system usually involves three
there is a chance that damage to the radio relays, or three groups of relays. The relays
transmitter will result. and their functions are: (1) power control relay
If you have a high power transmitter and do for the transmitter-applies 115-volt line to the
a lot of operating, it is a good idea to check primary of the high-voltage transformer and
on your local power rates if you are on a turns on the exciter; ( 2) control relay for the
straight lighting rate. In some cities a lower receiver-makes the receiver inoperative by
rate can be obtained (but with a higher "mini- any one of a number of methods when closed,
mum") if electrical equipment such as an also may apply power to the v.f.o. and to a
electric heater drawing a specified amount keying or a phone monitor; and (3) the antenna
of current is permanently wired in. It is not changeover relay-connects the antenna to the
required that you use this equipment, merely transmitter when the transmitter is energized
that it be permanently wired into the electrical and to the receiver when the transmitter is not
system. Naturally, however, there would be no operating. Several circuits illustrating the ap-
saving unless you expect to occupy the same plication of relays to such control arrangements
dwelling for a considerable length of time. are discussed in the paragraphs to follow in
this chapter.
Outlet Strips The outlet strips which have
Controlling Transmitter It is necessary, in
been suggested for installation
Power Output order to comply with
in the baseboard or for use on the rear of a desk
FCC regulations, that
are obtainable from the large electrical supply
transmitter power output be limited to the mini-
houses. If such a house is not in the vicinity
mum amount necessary to sustain communica-
it is probable that a local electrical contractor
tion. This requirement may be met in several
can order a suitable type of strip from one of
ways. Many amateurs have two transmitters;
the supply house catalogs. These strips are
one is capable of relatively high power output
quite convenient in that they are available in
for use when calling, or when interference is
varying lengths with provision for inserting
severe, and the other is capable of consider-
a-c line plugs throughout their length. The
ably less power output. In many cases the
a-c plugs from the various items of equipment
on the operating desk then may be inserted lower powered transmitter acts as the exciter
in the outlet strip throughout its length. In for the higher powered stage when full power
output is required. But the majority of the ama-
many cases it will be desirable to reduce the
teurs using a high powered equipment have
equipment cord lengths so that they will plug
neatly into the outlet strip without an excess some provision for reducing the plate voltage
to dangle behind the desk. on the high-level stages when reduced power
output is desired.
Contactors and The use of power-control con- One of the most common arrangements for
Relays tactors and relays often will obtaining two levels of power output involves
add considerably to the oper- the use of a plate transformer having a double
ating convenience of the station installation. primary for the high-voltage power supply. The
The most practicable arrangement usually is majority of the high-power plate transformers
to have a main a-c line switch on the front of of standard manufacture have just such a dual-
the transmitter to apply power to the filament primary arrangement. The two primaries are
transformers and to the power control circuits. designed for use with either a 115-volt or 230-
It also will be found quite convenient to have volt line. When such a transformer is to be
a single a-c line switch on the operating desk operated from a 115-volt line, operation of both
390 Transmitter Keying and Control THE R AD I 0
TO EXCITER POWER SUPPLIES low-voltage power supplies from the other side,
and the primaries of the high-voltage trans
former across the whole line for full power
s output. Then when reduced power ourput is
~~<rt~--~ required, the primary of the high-voltage plate
I transformer is operated from one side to center
~~~Q~~~
115V.A.C. tap rather than across the whole line. This
LINE
procedure places 115 volts across the 230-volt
winding the same as in the case -discussed in
the previous paragraph. Figure 3 illustrates
the two standard methods of power reduction
POWER CONTROL RELAY
with a plate transformer having a double pri
mary; (A) shows the connections for use with
a 115-volt line and (B) shows the arrangement
TO FILAMENT TRANSFORMERS
for a 230-volt ac power line to the transmitter.
The full-voltage/half-voltage methods for
controlling the power input to the transmitter,
f 15 V, TO EXCITER POWER SUPPLIES
as just discussed, are subject to the limitation
that only two levels of power input (full power
and quarter power) are obtainable. In many
cases this will be found to be a limitation to
flexibility. When tuning the transmitter, the
antenna coupling network, or the antenna sys
tern itself it is desirable to be able to reduce
the power input to the final stage to a rela-
230V.A.C. tively low value. And it is further convenient
SINGLE PHASE
WITH GROUNDED to be able to vary the power input continuous
NEUTRAL
ly from this relatively low input up to the full
power capabilities of the transmitter. The use
of a variable-ratio auto-transformer in the cir
TO Fl LAMENT TRANSFORMERS
cuit from the line to the primary of the plate
transformer will allow a continuous variation
Figure 3
in power input from zero to the full capability
of the transmitter.
FULL-VOLTAGE/HALF-VOLTAGE
POWER CONTROL SYSTEMS Variable-Ratio There are several types
The circuit at (A) is for use with a 175-volt Auto- Transformers of variable-ratio auto-trans
o-c line. Transformer T is of the stanclarcJ formers available on the
type having two 115-volt primaries; these market. Of these, the most common are the
primaries are connected in series lor half- Variac manufactured by the General Radio
voltage output when the power control relay
Company, and the Powerstat manufactured by
Kt is energizecl but the hl-lo relay K2 is not the Superior Electric Company. Both these
operatecl. When both relays ore energizecl the
types of variable-ratio transformers are excel
full output voltage is obtoinecl. At (B) is a
lently constructed and are available in a wide
circuit for use with a stanclarcJ 230-volt resi range of power capabilities. Each is capable
clence I ine with grounclecJ neutral. The two
of controlling the line voltage from zero to
relays control the output of the power sup about 15 per cent above the nominal line volt
plies the some as at (A). age. Each manufacturer makes a single-phase
unit capable of handling an output power of
about 175 watts, one capable of about 750 to
800 watts, and a unit capable of about 1500 to
primaries in parallel will deliver full ourput 1800 watts. The maximum power-output capa
from the plate supply. Then when the two pri bility of these units is available only at ap
maries are connected in series and still oper proximately the nominal line voltage, and must
ated from the 115-volt line the ourput voltage be reduced to a maximum current limitation
from the supply will be reduced approximately when the ourput voltage is somewhat above or
to one half. In the case of the normal class C below the input line voltage. This, however, is
amplifier, a reduction in plate voltage to one not an important limitation for this type of
half will reduce the power input to the stage application since the ourput voltage seldom
to one quarter. will be raised above the line voltage, and when
If the transmitter is to be operated from a the ourput voltage is reduced below the line
230-volt line, the usual procedure is to operate voltage the input to the transmitter is reduced
the filaments from one side of the line, the accordingly.
HANDBOOK Transmitter Control 3 91
TO FILAMENT
TRANSFORMERS
EXTERNAL VARIAC
Figure 5
OR POWERSTAT
PROTECTIVE CONTROL CIRCUIT
Figure 4 With this circuit arrangement either switch
may be closed first to light the heaters of
CIRCUIT WITH VARIABLE-RATIO
all tubes and the filament pilot light. Then
AUTO-TRANSFORMER
when the second switch is closed the high
When the dummy plug is inserted into the re voltage will be oppl ied to the transmitter and
ceptocle on the equipment, closing of the the red pilot will light. With a 30-second de-
power control relay will apply full voltage loy between the closing of the first switch
to the primaries. With the cab I e from the and the closing of the second, the rectifier
Variac or Powerstot plugged into the socket tubes will be adequately protected. Similarly,
the voltage output of the high-voltage power the opening of either swItch will remove
supply may be varied from zero to about l 5 plate voltage from the rectifiers while the
per cent above normal.
heaters remain lighted.
One convenient arrangement for using a plate voltage, the conditions of impedance
Variac or Powerstat in conjunction with the match will not be serious! y upset. In several
high-voltage transformer of a transmitter is high power transmitters using this system, and
illustrated in figure 4. In this circuit a heavy using beam-tetrode modulator tubes, it is pos
three-wire cable is run from a plug on the trans sible to vary the plate input from about 50
mitter to the Variac or Powerstat. The Variac watts to one kilowatt without a change other
or Powerstat then is installed so that it is ac than a slight increase in audio distortion at
cessible from the operating desk so that the the adjustment which gives the lowest power
input power to the transmitter may be con output from the transmitter.
trolled during operation. If desired, the cable
With triode tubes as modulators it usually
to the Variac or Powerstat may be unplugged
will be found necessary to vary the grid bias
from the transmitter and a dummy plug inserted
at the same time that the plate voltage is
in its place. With the dummy plug in place the
changed. This will allow the tubes to be op
transmitter will operate at normal plate voltage.
erated at approximately the same relative point
This arrangement allows the transmitter to be
on their operating characteristic when the plate
wired in such a manner that an external Variac
voltage is varied. When the modulator tubes are
or Powerstat may be used if desired, even
operated with zero bias at full plate voltage, it
though the unit is not available at the time
will usually be possible to reduce the modu
that the transmitter is constructed.
lator voltage along with the voltage on the
.modulated stage, with no apparent change in
Notes on the Use Plate voltage to the modula
the voice quality. However, it will be necessary
of the Variac tors may be controlled at the to reduce the audio gain ar the same time that
or Powerstat same time as the plate volt- the plate voltage is reduced.
age to the final amplifier is
varied if the modulator stage uses beam tetrode
tubes; variation it;t the plate voltage on such 20-2 Transmitter
tubes used as modulators causes only a mod-
erate change in the standing plate current.
Control Methods
Since the final amplifier plate voltage is being
controlled simultaneously with the modulator Almost everyone, when getting a new trans
392 Transmitter Keying and Control THE R AD I 0
r - - - - - - Q R E C E I V E R POWER
,------oTRANSFORMER C.T.
51 HUSKY TOC.GLE SWITCH
ON TRANSMITTER
PROTECTIVE
INTERLOCKS
TRANSMIT-
RECEIVE SWITCH
TUNE-UP
INDICATOR LIGHTS SWITCH
r1 r1
ALL FILAMENT TRANSFORMERS e.3v. EXCITER H.V.
TRANSFORMER
Figure 6
TRANSMITTER CONTROL CIRCUIT
Closing S1 lights all filaments in the transmitter one/ starts the time-c/elay relay in its cycle.
When the time-c/elay relay has operatecl, closing the transmit-receive switch at the operating po
sition will apply plate power to the transmitter one/ c/isable the receiver. A tune-up switch has
been p r o vi c/ e c/ so that the exciter stages may be tune c/ without p~ate voltage on the final
amplifier.
mitter on the air, has had the experience of be incorporated into the circuit to give a con
having to throw several switches and pull or trol circuit such as is shown in figure 6. This
insert a few plugs when changing from receive arrangement uses a llSvolt thermal (or motor
to transmit. This is one extreme in the direc- operated) time-delay relay and a d-p-dt ll5
tion of how not to control a transmitter. At the volt control relay. Note that the protective
other extreme we find systems where it is only interlocks are connected in series with the
necessary to speak into the microphone or coil of the relay which applies high voltage to
touch the key to change both transmitter and the transmitter. A tune-up switch has been in
receiver over to the transmit condition. Most eluded so that the transmitter may be tuned up
amateur stations are intermediate between the as far as the grid circuit of the final stage is
two extremes in the control provisions and use concerned before application of high voltage
some relatively simple system for transmitter to the final amplifier. Provisions for operat
control. ing an antenna-changeover relay and for cut
In figure 5 is shown an arrangement which ring the plate voltage to the receiver when the
protects mercury-vapor rectifiers against pre- transmitter is operating have been included.
mature application of plate voltage without A circuit similar to that of figure 6 but in-
resorting to a time-delay relay. No matter which corporating push-button control of the trans
switch is thrown first, the filaments will be mitter is shown in figure 7. The circuit features
turned on first and off last. However, double- a set of START-STOP and TRANSMIT-RE-
pole switches are required in place of the usual CEIVE buttons at the transmitter and a sepa-
single-pole switches. rate set at the operating position. The control
When assured time delay of the proper inter- push buttons operate independently so that
val and greater operating convenience are de- either set may be used to control the trans
sired, a group of inexpensive ac relays may mitter. It is only necessary to push the START
HANDBOOK Safety Precautions 3 93
PROTECTIVE
INTERLOCKS
OVERLOAD)'
RELAY
CONTACTS
~~t-----1--------------t-----cHd~:N~N;J~:A
Q--1~---i----~RELAY
Figure 7
PUSH-BUTTON TRANSMITTER-CONTROL CIRCUIT
Pushing the START button either at the transmitter or at the operating position will light all
filaments one/ start the time-cleloy reI a y in its cycle. When the c y c I e has been completed, a
touch of the TRANSMIT button will put the transmitter on the air one/ eli sable the receiver. Push
ing the RECEIVE button will clisoble the transmitter one/ restore the receiver. Pushing the STOP
button will instantly clrop the entire transmitter from the oc line. If clesirecl, a switch may be
plocecl in series with the leocl from the RECEIVE button to the protective interlocks; opening
the switch will make it impossible for any person occiclentolly to put the transmitter on the air.
Various other safety provisions, such as the protective-interlock arrangement clescribecl in the
text have been incorporated.
With the circuit arrangement shown lor the overloacl-relay contacts, it is only necessary to use
a simple normolly-closecl cl-c relay with a variable shunt across the coil of the relay. When the
current through the coil becomes great enough to open the normo/ly-closecl contacts the holcl-
circuit on the plate-voltage relay will be broken one/ the plate voltage will be removecl. If the
overloacl is only momentary, such as a moclulot/on peak or u tonk flashover, merely pushing the
TRANSMIT button will again put the transmitter on the air. This simple circuit provision elimi
nates the requirement for expensive overloocl relays of the mechanically-latching type, but still
gives excellent overloocl protection.
button momentarily to light the transmitter fila- transmit control system. Such systems are fre
ments and start the time-delay relay in its cy quently used in industrial electronic control.
de. When the standby light comes on it is only
necessary to touch the TRANSMIT button to
put the transmitter on the air and disable the
receiver. Touching the RECEIVE button will
turn off the transmitter and restore the receiver. 20-3 Safety Precautions
After a period of operation it is only necessary
to touch the STOP button at either the trat\s The best way for an operator to avoid ser
mitter or the operating position to shut down ious accidents from the high voltage supplies
the transmitter. This type of control arrange of a transmitter is for him to use his head, act
ment is called an electrically-locking push-to only with deliberation, and not take unneces-
394 Transmitter Keying and Control THE R AD I 0
For 100 per cent protection, just obey the to make certain adjustments, such as coupling
following rule: never work on the transmitter and neutralizing, unless the transmitter is run-
or reach inside any protective cover except ning. The best. thing to do is to make all neu-
when the green pilots are glowing. To avoid tralizing and coupling devices adjustable from
confusion, no other green pilots should be used the front panel by means of flexible control
on the transmitter; if you want an indicator shafts which are broken with insulated cou-
jewel to show when the filaments are lighted, plings to permit grounding of the panel bearing.
use amber instead of green. If your particular transmitter layout is such
that this is impracticable and you refuse to
Safety Bleeders Filter capacitors of good qual- throw the main switch to make an adjustment
ity hold their charge for some -throw the main switch-take a reading-throw
time, and when the voltage is more than 1000 the main switch-make an adjustment-and so
volts it is just about as dangerous to get across on, then protect yourself by making use of long
an undischarged 4-p.fd. filter capacitor as it is adjusting rods made from ~-inch dowel sticks
to get across a high-voltage supply that is which have been wiped with oil when perfectly
turned on. Most power supplies incorporate free from moisture.
bleeders to improve regulation, but as these If you are addicted to the use of pickup loop
are generally wire-wound resistors, and as and flashlight bulb as a resonance and neutral-
wire-wound resistors occasionally open up izing indicator, then fasten it to the end of a
without apparent cause, it is desirable to in- long dowel stick and use it in that manner.
corporate an auxiliary safety bleeder across
each heavy-duty bleeder. Carbon resistors will Protective lnoterlocks With the increasing ten-
not stand much dissipation and sometimes dency toward construc-
change in value slightly with age. However, tion of transmitters in enclosed steel cabinets
the chance of their opening up when run well a transmitter becomes a particularly lethal de-
within their dissipation rating is very small. vice unless adequate safety provisions have
To make sure that all capacitors are bled, it been incorporated. Even with a combined safety
is best to short each one with an insulated signal and switch as shown in figure 8 it is
screwdriver. However, this is sometimes awk- still conceivable that some person unfamiliar
with the transmitter could come in contact with
ward and al-ways inconvenient. One can be vir-
high voltage. It is therefore recommended that
tually sure by connecting auxiliary carbon
bleeders across all wire-wound bleeders used the transmitter, wherever possible, be built
on supplies of 1000 volts or more. For every into a complete metal housing or cabinet and
500 volts, connect in series a 500,000-ohm that all doors or access covers be provided
1-watt carbon resistor. The drain will be neg- with protective interlocks (all interlocks must
ligible (l rna.) and each resistor will have to be connected in series) to remove the high
dissipate only 0. 5 watt. Under these condi- voltage whenever these doors or covers are
tions the resistors will last indefinitely with opened. The term "high voltage" should mean
little chance of opening up. For a 1500-volt any voltage above approximately 150 volts,
supply, connect three 500,000-ohm resistors in although it is still possible to obtain a serious
series. If the voltage exceeds an integral num- burn from a 150-volt circuit under certain cir-
ber of 500 volt divisions, assume it is the next cumstances. The 150-volt limit usually will
higher integral value; for instance, assume mean that grid-bias packs as well as high-
1800 volts as 2000 volts and use four resistors. voltage packs should have their primary cir-
Do not attempt to use fewer resistors by cuits opened when any interlock is opened.
using a higher value for the resistors; not over
500 volts should appear across any single
1-watt resistor.
In the event that the regular bleeder opens 20-4 Transmitter Keying
up, it will take several seconds for the auxil-
iary bleeder to drain the capacitor~ down to a The carrier from a c-w telegraph transmitter
safe voltage, because of the very high resist- must be broken into dots and dashes for the
ance. Therefore, it ill best to allow 10 or 15 transmission of code characters. The carrier
seconds after turning off the plate supply be- signal is of constant amplitude while the key
fore attempting to work on the t'ransmitter. is closed, and is entirely removed when the
If a 0-1 d-e milliammeter is at hand, it may key is open. When code characters are being
be connected in series with the auxiliary transmitted, the carrier may be considered as
bleeder to act as a high voltage voltmeter. being modulated by the keying. If the change
from the no-output condition to full-output, or
vice versa, occurs too rapidly, the rectangular
"Hot" Adjustments Some amateurs contend pulses which form the keying characters con-
that it is almost impossible tain high-frequency components which take up
396 Transmitter Keying and Control THE R AD I 0
TO
CATHODE OF
KEYED STAGE
STANCOR PA8421
2.K,2W
L__ _ _ +
H.V. SUPPLY
Figure 10
VACUUM TUBE KEYERS FOR CENTER-TAP KEYING CIRCUITS
The type A keyer is suitable far keying stages running up to 1250 volts on the plate. Two 2A3
or 6A3 tubes can safely key 160 milliamperes of cathode current. The simple 6Y6 keyer in fig
ure B is for keying stages running up to 650 volts on the plate. A single 6Y6 can key 80 milli-
amperes. Two in parallel may be used for plate currents under 160 ma. If softer keying is cle-
sirecl, the 500-!"-!"-fcl. mica condenser should be increased to .001 !"'fcl.
amplifier. If a low-level stage, which is fol that placing the fingers across the key will
lowed by a series of class C .amplifiers, is not result in an electrical shock. In other words,
keyed, serious transients will be generated the keying circuit should be inherently safe.
in the output of the transmitter even though All these requirements have been met in the
the keyed stage is being turned on and off very keying circuits to be described.
smoothly. This condition arises as a result of
pulse sharpening, which has been discussed
previously.
Third, the output from the stage should be 20-5
completely cut off when the key is up, and the Cathode Keying
time constant of the rise and decay of the key
ing wave should be easily controllable. The lead from the cathode or center-tap con
Fourth, it should be possible to make the nection of the filament of an rf amplifier can
rise period and the decay period of the keying be opened and closed for a keying circuit. Such
wave approximately equal. This type of keying a keying system opens the plate voltage cir
envelope is the only one tolerable for commer cuit and at the same time opens the grid bias
cial work, and is equally desirable for obtain return lead. For this reason, the grid circuit
ing clean cut and easily readable signals in is blocked at the same time the plate circuit
amateur work. is opened. This helps to reduce the backwave
Fifth, it is desirable that the keying circuit that might otherwise leak through the keyed
be usable without a keying relay, even when stage.
a high-power stage is being keyed. The simplest cathode keying circuit is il
Last, for the sake of simplicity and safety, lustrated in figure 9, where a key-click filter
it should be possible to ground the frame of is employed, and a hand key is used to break
the key, and yet the circuit should be such the circuit. This simple keying circuit is not
3 98 Transmitter Keying and Control THE R AD I 0
PC
Figure 11
SIMPLE BLOCKED-GRID KEYING
SYSTEM
The blocking bias must be sufficient to cut
Figure 12
off plate current to the amplifier stage in the
presence of the excitation voltage. Rz Is nor SELF-BLOCKING KEYING SYSTEM FOR
mal bios resistor for the tube. R2 one/ Cz HIGH-MU TRIODE
should be acljustecl for correct keying wave Rz and Cz adjustecl for correct keying wave-
form. form. Rz is bias resistor of tube.
recommended for general use, as considerable blocking bias is applied to them, and as a
voltage will be developed across the key when very low resistance when the bias is removed.
it is open. The desired amount of lag or cushioning effect
An electronic switch can take the place of can be obtained by employing suitable resist
the hand key. This will remove the danger of ance and capacitance values in the grid of the
shock. At the same time, the opening and clos keyer tube(s). Because very little spark is
ing characteristics of the electronic switch produced at the key, due to the small amount
may easily be altered to suit the particular of power in the key circuit, sparking clicks
need at hand. Such an electronic switch is are easily suppressed.
called a vacuum tube keyer. Low internal re One type 45 tube should be used for every
sistance triode tubes such as the 45, 6A3, or 50 rna. of plate current. Type 6B4G or 2A3
6AS7 are used in the keyer. These tubes act tubes may also be used; allow one 6B4G tube
as a very high resistance when sufficient for every 80 rna. of plate current.
Because of the series resistance of the keyer
tubes, the plate voltage at the keyed tube will
be from 30 to 60 volts less than the power
supply voltage. This voltage appears as cath
ode bias on the keyed tube, assuming the bias
return is made to ground, and should be taken
into consideration when providing bias.
Some typical cathode circuit vacuum tube
keying units are shown in figure 10.
Figure 15
TOP VIEW OF SCREEN
GRID KEYER SHOWN IN
FIGURE 16
400 Transmitter Keying and Control THE RADIO
E -27~ -275
IOK
lOW
Figure 16
TWO-STAGE SCREEN GRID KEYER UNIT
guished, removing the screen voltage from the the W1DX keyer, this keyer turns on the ex-
tetrode r-f tube. At the same time, rectified citer a moment before the tetrode stage is
grid bias is applied to the screen of the tetrode turned on. The tetrode stage goes off an in-
through the 1 megohm resistor between screen stant before the exciter does. Thus any key-
and key. This voltage effectively cuts off the ing chirp of the oscillator is effectively re-
screen of the tetrode until the key is closed moved from the keyed signal.
again. The RC circuit in the grid of the 6L6 By listening in the receiver one can hear
tube determines the keying characteristic of the exciter stop operating a fraction of a sec-
the tetrode tube. ond after the tetrode stage goes off. In fact,
A more elaborate screen grid keyer is shown during rapid keying, the exciter may be heard
in figures 15 and 16. This keyer is designed as a steady signal in the receiver, as it has
to block-grid key the oscillator or a low pow- appreciable time lag in the keying circuit. The
ered buffer stage, and to screen key a medium clipping effect of following stages has a defi-
powered tetrode tube such as an 807, 2E26 or nite hardening effect on this, however.
6146. The unit described includes a simple
dual voltage power supply for the positive 20-8 Differential Keying Circuits
screen voltage of the tetrode, and a negative
supply for the keyer stages. A 6K6 is used as Excellent waveshaping may be obtained by
the screen keyer, and a 12AU7 is used as a a differential keying system whereby the
cathode follower and grid block keyer. As in master oscillator of the transmitter is turned
HANDBOOK Differential Keying 401
VACUUM
TUBE
KEYER
(F!G.lO)
Figure 18
Figure 17
TIME SEQUENCE OF A
DIFFERENTIAL KEYER veloped by WliCP (Feb., 1956 QST) is shown
in figure 19. A 6AL5 switch tube turns the
oscillator on before the keying action starts,
and holds it on until after the keying se-
on a moment before the rest of the stages are quence is completed. Time constant of the
energized, and remains on a moment longer keying cycle is determined by values of C
than the other stages. The "chirp" or frequen- and R. When the key is open, a cut-off bias
cy shift associated with abrupt switching of of about -110 volts is applied to the screen
the oscillator is thus removed from the emitted grid circuits of the keyed stages. When the
signal. In addition, the differential keyer can key is closed, the screen grid voltage rises
apply waveshaping to the amplifier section to the normal value at a rate determined by
of the transmitter, eliminating the "click" the time constant R-C. Upon opening the key
caused by rapid keying of the latter stages. again, the screen voltage returns to cut-off
The ideal keying system would perform as value at the predetermined rate.
illustrated in figure 17. When the key is The potentiometer R 1 serves as an output
closed, the oscillator reaches maximum out- control, varying the minimum internal re-
put almost instantaneously. The following sistance of the 12BH7 keyer tube, and is a
stages reach maximum output in a fashion useful device to limit power input during tune-
determined by the waveshaping circuits of up periods. Excitation to the final amplifier
the keyer. When the key is released, the out- stage may be controlled by the screen po-
put of the amplifier stages starts to decay tentiometer R3 in the second buffer stage.
in a predetermined manner, followed shortly An external bias source of approximately -120
thereafter by cessation of the oscillator. The volts at 10 milliamperes is required for oper-
overall result of these actions is to provide ation of the keyer, in addition to the 300-volt
relatively soft "make" and "break" to the screen supply.
keyed signal, meanwhile preventing oscilla- Blocking voltage may be removed from the
tor frequency shift during the keying se- oscillator for "zeroing" purposes by closing
quence. switch S1, rendering the diode switch in-
The rates of charge and decay in a typical operative.
R-C keying circuit may be varied independent A second popular keying system is shown
ly of each other by the blocking diode system in figure 20, and is widely used in many
of figure 18. Each diode permits the charging Johnson transmitters. Grid block keying is
current of the timing capacitor to flow through used on tubes V2 and V3. A waveshaping
only one of the two variable potentiometers, filter consisting of R2, R3, and C1 is used
thus permitting independent adjustment of in the keying control circuit of V2 and V3.
the "make" and "break" characteristics of To avoid chirp when the oscillator (Vl) is
the keying system. keyed, the keyer tube V4 allows the oscillator
A practical differential keying system de- to start quickly--before V2 and V3 start
402
1K
t-------~- +300 v.
50 K
2W
R OUTPUT
CONTROL
R1
'--------<>---'!; 100 K
2W
-120V.
Figure 19
DIFFERENTIAL KEYING SYSTEM WITH
OSCILLATOR SWITCHING DIODE
V2 V3
BUFFER DRIVER
100 K
VFO "HOLD"
-sov.
Figure 20
DIFFERENTIAL KEYER EMPLOYED IN
"JOHNSON" TRANSMITTERS
conducting--and then continue operating This may be adjusted to cut off the VFO
until atter V2 and V3 have stopped con- between marks of keyed characters, thus
ducting. Potentiometer R 1 adjusts the "hold" allowing rapid break-in operation.
time for VFO operation after the key is opened.
CHAPTER TWENTY-ONE
Radiation, Propagation
and Transmission Lines
Radio waves are electromagnetic waves possible change in the electrical constants
similar in nature but much lower in frequency of a line is that which occurs at the open end
than light waves or heat waves. Such waves of a wire. Therefore, a dipole has a great mis-
represent electric energy traveling through match at each end, producing a high degree of
space. Radio waves travel in free space with reflection. We say that the ends of a dipole
the velocity of light and can be reflected and are terminated in an infinite impedance.
refracted much the same as light waves. A returning wave which has been reflected
meets the next incident wave, and the voltage
and current at any point along the antenna are
the vector sum of the two waves. At the ends
of the dipole, the voltages add, while the cur
21-1 Radiation from an rents of the two waves cancel, thus producing
Antenna high voltage and low current at the ends of the
dipole or half wave section of wire. In the
Alternating current passing through a con- same manner, it is found that the currents add
ductor creates an alternating electromagnetic while the voltages cancel at the center of the
field around that conductor. Energy is alter- dipole. Thus, at the center there is high cur
nate! y stored in the field, and then returned rent but low voltage.
to the conductor. As the frequency is raised, Inspection of figure 1 will show that the
more and more of the energy does not return current in a dipole decreases sinusoidally
to the conductor, but instead is radiated off towards either end, while the voltage similarly
into space in the form of electromagnetic increases. The voltages at the two ends of the
waves, called radio waves. Radiation from a antenna are 180 out of phase, which means
wire, or wires, is materially increased when- that the polarities are opposite, one being plus
ever there is a sudden change in the electrical while the other is minus at any instant. A
constants of the line. These sudden changes curve representing either the voltage or cur-
produce reflection, which places standing rent on a dipole represents a standing wave
waves on the line. on the wire.
When a wire in space is fed radio frequency
energy having a wavelength of approximately Radiation from Radiation can and does take
2.1 times the length of the wire in meters, the Sources other place from sources other than
wire resonates as a half-wave dipole antenna than Antennas antennas. Undesired radiation
at that wavelength or frequency. The greatest can take place from open-wire
403
4 04 Radiation, Propagation and Lines THE R AD I 0
-- -,~oLTA!iE
Because the orientation of a simple linear
radiator is the same as the polarization of the
',
', ----t---
CURRENJ ... ""'(, I
CENTER
........... ,c~RENT
waves emitted by it, the radiator itself is re-
ferred to as being either vertically or horizon-
.,.,""
,.""" ' ', '! ......
',, tally polarized. Thus, we say that a horizontal
--ex" '~ 'ICDI-- antenna is horizontally polarized.
t--HALF-wAVE ANTENNA i '', , l Figure 2A illustrates the fact that the polar-
ization of the electric field of the radiation
'' from a vertical dipole is vertical. Figure 28,
SHOWIN~ HOW STANDIN!; WAVES
EXIST ON A HORIZONTAL ANTENNA.
' ', on the other hand, shows that the polarization
CURRENT IS MAXIMUM AT CENTER~
VOLTAGE IS MAXIMUM AT ENDS.
'
VOLTAGE'...,
-- of electric-field radiation from a vertical slot
radiator is horizontal. This fact has been uti-
lized in certain commercial F.M antennas where
Figure 1 it is desired to have horizontally polarized
STANDING WAVES ON A RESONANT radiation but where it is more convenient to
ANTENNA use an array of vertically stacked slot arrays.
If the metallic sheet is bent into a cylinder
with the slot on one side, substantially omni-
directional horizontal coverage is obtained
transmission lines, both from single-wire lines with horizontally-polarized radiation when the
and from lines comprised of more than one cylinder with the slot in one side is oriented
wire. In addition, radiation can be made to vertically. An arrangement of this type is shown
take place in a very efficient manner from elec- in figure 2C. Several such cylinders may be
tromagnetic horns, from plastic lenses or from stacked vertically to reduce high-angle radia-
electromagnetic lenses made up of spaced con- tion and to concentrate the radiated energy
ducting planes, from slots cut in a piece of at the useful low radiation angles.
metal, from dielectric wires, or from the open In any event the polarization of radiation
end of a wave guide. from a radiating system is parallel to the elec-
tric field as it is set up inside or in the vici-
nity of the radiating system.
Directivity of The radiation from any phys-
Rodiation ically practicable radiating
system is directive to a certain
degree. The degree of directivity can be en-
hanced or altered when desirable through the 21-2 General Character-
combination of radiating elements in a pre- istics of Antennas
scribed manner, through the use of reflecting
planes or curved surfaces, or through the use All antennas have certain general character-
of such systems as mentioned in the preceding istics to be enumerated. It is the result of
paragraph. The construction of directive an- differences in these general characteristics
tenna arrays is covered in detail in the chap- which makes one type of antenna system most
ters which follow. suitable for one type of application and an-
other type best for a different application. Six
Polarization Like light waves, radio waves
of the more important characteristics are: (1)
can have a definite polarization.
polarization, (2) radiation resistance, (3) hori-
In fact, while light waves ordinarily have to
zontal directivity, (4) vertical directivity,
be reflected or passed through a polarizing
(5) bandwidth, and (6) effective power gain.
medium before they have a definite polariza-
The polarization of an antenna or radiating
tion, a radio wave leaving a simple radiator
system is the direction of the electric field
will have a definite polarization, the polar-
and has been defined in Section 21-1.
ization being indicated by the orientation of
The radiation resistance of an antenna sys-
the electric-field component of the wave. This,
tem is normally referred to the feed point in
in turn, is determined by the orientation of the
an antenna fed at a current loop, or it is re-
radiator itself, as the magnetic-field component
ferred to a current loop in an antenna system
is always at right angles to a linear radiator,
fed at another point. The radiation resistance
and the electric-field component is always in
is that value of resistance which, if inserted
the same plane as the radiator. Thus we see
in series with the antenna at a current loop,
that an antenna that is vertical with respect
would dissipate the same energy as is actually
to the earth will transmit a vertically polar-
ized wave, as the electrostatic lines of force radiated by the antenna if the antenna current
will be vertical. Likewise, a simple horizontal at the feed point were to remain the same.
antenna will radiate horizontally polarized The horizontal and vertical directivity can
waves. best be expressed as a directive pattern which
HANDBOOK Antenna Characteristics 405
Figure 2
ANTENNA POLARIZATION
I I
The polarization (electric fielc{} of
the radiation from a resonant dipole
such as shown at (A) above is paral-
ELECTRIC
lel to the length of the radiator. In
the case of a resonant slot cut in a "'
fiELD
(POLARIZATION)
VERTICAL
0
l
sheet of metal ancl usee! as a raclia
tor, the polarization (of the elec
tric fielcl) is perpendicular to the
8 "
length of the slot. In both cases, a:
however, the polarization of the
"'z
J
0
METALLIC SH!ET
racliatecl fielcl is parallel to the po :::;
~I1
tential gradient of the radiator; in 1;
the case of the a/pole the electric ELECTRIC FIELD
lines of force are from end to encl, (POLARIZATION)
HORIZONTAL
while in the case of the slot the
fielcl is across the sicles of the
slot. The metal/ ic sheet containing
the slot may be formed into a cyl-
inder to make up the radiator shown
at (C). With this type of radiator
the racliatec! fielcl will be horizon
tally polarized even though the
radiator is mounted vertically.
is a graph showing the relative radiated field wire resonates at a wavelength of about 2.1
intensity against azimuth angle for horizontal times its length in meters. If the diameter of
directivity and field intensity against elevation the conductor begins to be an appreciable frac-
angle for vertical directivity. tion of a wavelength, as when tubing is used
The bandwidth of an antenna is a measure as a v-h-f radiator, the factor becomes slightly
of its ability to operate within specified limits less than 0. 95. For the use of wire and not
over a range of frequencies. Bandwidth can tubing on frequencies below 30 ~lc., however,
be expressed either "operating frequency plus the figure of 0.95 may be taken as accurate.
or-minus a specified per cent of operating fre This assumes a radiator removed from sur-
quency" or "operating frequency plus-or-minus rounding objects, and with no bends.
a specified number of megacycles" for a cer Simple conversion into feet can be obtained
tain standing-wave-ratio limit on the trans by using the factor 1. 56. To find the physical
mission line feeding the antenna system. length of a half-wave 80-meter antenna, we
The effective power gain or directive gain multiply 80 times 1. 56, and get 124.8 feet for
of an antenna is the ratio between the power the length of the radiator.
required in the specified antenna and the power
required in a reference antenna (usually a half It is more common to use frequency than
wave dipole) to attain the same field strength wavelength when indicating a specific spot in
in the favored direction of the antenna under the radio spectrum. For this reason, the rela-
measurement. Directive gain may be expressed tionship between wavelength and frequency
either as an actual power ratio, or as is more must be kept in mind. As the velocity of radio
common, the power ratio may be expressed waves through space is constant at the speed
in decibels. of light, it will be seen that the more waves
that pass a point per second (higher frequency),
Physical Length If the cross section of the the closer together the peaks of those waves
of a Half-Wave conductor which makes up must be (shorter wavelength). Therefore, the
Antenna the antenna is kept very higher the frequency, the lower will be the
small with respect to the wavelength.
antenna length, an electrical half wave is a A radio wave in space can be compared to
fixed percentage shorter than a physical half a wave in water. The wave, in either case, has
wavelength. This percentage is approximately peaks and troughs. One peak and one trough
5 per cent. Therefore, most linear half-wave an constitute a full wave, or one wavelength.
tennas are close to 95 per cent of a half wave- Frequency describes the number of wave
length long physically. Thus, a half-wave an- cycles or peaks passing a point per second.
tenna resonant at exactly 80 meters would be Wavelength describes the distance the wave
one-half of 0.95 times 80 meters in length. An travels through space during one cycle or
other way of saying the same thing is that a oscillation of the antenna current; it is the
4 06 Radiation, Propagation and Lines THE R AD I 0
"'>-
~
u
. ~
~ ...........
I
---
1
A frequency of 1,000,000 cycles per second ~
(1,000 kc.) equals a wavelength of 300 meters. I
0
Multiplying frequency by 10 and dividing wave- 40 !>0 60 200 300 400 600 800 1000 2000 3000
10000 t6000
/DIAMETER=
9000 0
(1 -DIAMETER= IO~OOO
8000 +400 0
U)
::;
I r
I
0 7000 +300 0 I I
~
I I
~ 6000 ~ +200 0
I I
z I
0
I yoiAMETER=M
~
(f) sao0 ~ +100 0
/( II
U) w }/_ //
w
0:: 400 0
0
z o L -;;('\ PI
1-
z DIAMETER= ~ v/ ..--'\ /?Z ~-4
u r/DIAMETER=~
0a_ ~ ~II II
0
3000
0::
-100
OI II II
UJ
w
"- 2000
1-
z -200 0 I I
0a. I I
1000
DIAMETER=-,&,
\\ ~ -3000 I I
IJ 1'\.\ If .\. w
"-
I I
0
0.15..\
v
0.5>.. 1.0>.
' - J .
1.5>..
/ 2.0A
~
2.5),
-400 0 ll
OVERALL LENGTH OF RADIATOR -5000
FigureS -fiCO
0.15), 0.5).. 1.0.>.. 1.5).. 2.0>.. 2.5>..
FEED POINT RESISTANCE OF A CENTER
OVERALL LENGTH OF RADIATOR
DRIVEN RADIATOR AS A FUNCTION OF
PHYSICAL LENGTH IN TERMS OF FREE
SPACE WAVELENGTH
Figure 6
REACTIVE COMPONENT OF THE FEED
POINT IMPEDANCE OF A CENTER
When the antenna is resonant, ann it always DRIVEN RADIATOR AS A FUNCTION OF
should be for best results, the impedance at PHYSICAL LENGTH IN TERMS OF FREE
the center is substantially resistive, and is SPACE WAVELENGTH
termed the radiation resistance. Radiation re-
sistance is a fictitious term; it is that value
of resistance (referred to the current loop)
which would dissipate the same amount of tenna is simply one-half of a dipole. For that
power as being radiated by the antenna, when reason, the radiation resistance is roughly
fed with the current flowing at the current loop. half the 73-ohm impedance of the dipole or
The radiation resistance depends on the 36.5 ohms. The radiation resistance of a Mar-
antenna length and its proximity to nearby coni antenna such as a mobile whip will be
objects which either absorb or re-radiate pow- lowered by the proximity of the automobile
er, such as the ground, other wires, etc. body.
The Marconi Before going too far with the Antenna Because the power throughout the
Antenna discussion of radiation resist- Impedance antenna is the same, the imped-
ance, an explanation of the Mar- ance of a resonant antenna at any
coni (grounded quarter wave) antenna is in point along its length merely expresses the
order. The Marconi antenna is a special type ratio between voltage and current at that point.
of Hertz antenna in which the earth acts as the Thus, the lowest impedance occurs where the
"other half" of the dipole. In other words, the current is highest, namely, at the center of a
current flows into the earth instead of into a dipole, or a quarter wave from the end of a
similar quarter-wave section. Thus, the current Marconi. The impedance rises uniformly toward
loop of a ~Jarconi antenna is at the base rather each end, where it is about 2000 ohms for a
than in the center. In either case it is a quarter dipole remote from ground, and about twice a,s
wavelength from the end. high for a vertical Marconi.
A half-wave dipole far from ground and other If a vertical half-wave antenna is set up so
reflecting objects has a radiation resistance that its lower end is at the ground level, the
ar the center of about 73 ohms. A Marconi an- effect of the ground reflection is to increase
HANDBOOK Antenna Impedance 409
HEIGHT IN WAVELENGTHS OF CENTER OF VERTICAL and the feed point reactance change more slow-
HALF-WAVE ANTENNA ABOVE PERFECT GROUND ly with overall radiator length (or with fre-
.25 4 .!1 .e .1 .7!1
quency with a fixed length) as the conductor
1\. I r diameter is increased, indicating that the ef-
~ 80
I VERTICAL
:I ~1'/lt~'l.':i"'-
fective "Q" is lowered as the diameter is in-
1\ ,.....
5 creased. However, in view of the fact that the
~ 80 damping resistance is nearly all "radiation
'I. 1\ ~
r-.. ~f- resistance" rather than loss resistance, the
~ 70
lower Q does not represent lower efficiency.
~ \ /
If) 00 Therefore, the lower Q is desirable, because
iii I f-"'
it permits use of the radiator over a wider fre-
"'
a: I
a"' quency range without resorting to means for
eliminating the reactive component. Thus, the
~ 40
i5 use of a large diameter conductor makes the
<
a: 30
overall system less frequency sensitive. If the
diameter is made sufficiently large in terms of
wavelengths, the Q will be low enough to qual-
.1 .2 .3 .4 .s .e .1 .e .t 1.0
ify the radiator as a "broad-band" antenna.
HEIGHT IN WAVELENGTHS OF HORIZONTAL HALF-
WAVE ANTENNA ABOVE PERFECT GROUND The curves of figure 7 indicate the theoreti-
cal center-point radiation resistance of a half-
Figure 7
wave antenna for various heights above perfect
ground. These values are of importance in
EFFECT OF HEIGHT ON THE RADIATION matching untuned radio-frequency feeders to
RESISTANCE OF A DIPOLE SUSPENDED the antenna, in order to obtain a good imped-
ABOVE PERFECT GROUND ance match and an absence of standing waves
on the feeders.
ic resistance of the wire, ground resistance direction with respect to an antenna in free
(in the case of a Marconi), corona discharge, space as a result of inherent directivity is
and insulator losses. called the free space directivity power gain
The approximate effective radiation effi- or just space directivity gain of the antenna
ciency (expressed as a decimal) is equal to: (referred to a hypothetical isotropic radiator
N, = Ra!<Ra+ RL) where Ra is equal to the which is assumed to radiate equally well in
radiation resistance and RL is equal to the all directions). Because the fictitious isotropic
effective loss resistance of the antenna. The radiator is a pure! y academic antenna, not phy-
loss resistance will be of the order of 0.25 sically realizable, it is common practice to use
ohm for large-diameter tubing conductors such as a reference antenna the simplest unground-
as are most commonly used in multi-element ed resonant radiator, the half-wave Hertz, or
parasitic arrays, and will be of the order of resonant doublet. As a half-wave doublet has
0.5 to 2.0 ohms for arrays of normal construc- a space directivity gain of 2.15 db over an iso-
tion using copper wire. tropic radiator, the use of a resonant dipole
When the radiation resistance of an antenna as the comparison antenna reduces the gain
or array is very low, the current at a voltage figure of an array by 2.15 db. However, it should
node will be quite high for a given power. Like- be understood that power gain can be expressed
wise, the voltage at a current node will be very with regard to any antenna, just so long as it
high. Even with a heavy conductor and excel- is specified.
lent insulation, the losses due to the high volt- As a matter of interest, the directivity of
age and current will be appreciable if the radi- an infinitesimal dipole provides a free space
ation resistance is sufficiently low. directivity power gain of 1.5 (or 1. 76 db) over
Usually, it is not considered desirable to an isotropic radiator. This means that in the
use an antenna or array with a radiation resist- direction of maximum radiation the infinitesi-
ance of less than approximately 5 ohms unless mal dipole will produce the same field of
there is sufficient directivity, compactness, strength as an isotropic radiator which is radi-
or other advantage to offset the losses result- ating 1.5 times as much total power.
ing from the low radiation resistance. A half-wave resonant doublet, because of
its different current distribution and signifi-
Ground The radiation resistance of a Mar- cant length, exhibits slight! y more free space
Resistance coni antenna, especially, should power gain as a result of directivity than does
be kept as high as possible. This the infinitesimal dipole, for reasons which will
will reduce the antenna current for a given be explained in a later section. The space
power, thus minimizing loss resulting from the directivity power gain of a half-wave resonant
series resistance offered by the earth connec- doublet is 1.63 (or 2.15 db) referred to an iso-
tion. The radiation resistance can be kept high tropic radiator.
by making the Marconi radiator somewhat longer
than a quarter wave, and shortening it by series Horizontal When choosing and orienting an
capacitance to an electrical quarter wave. This Directivity antenna system, the radiation pat-
reduces the current flowing in the earth con- terns of the various common types
nection. It also should be removed from ground of antennas should be given careful considera-
as much as possible (vertical being ideal). tion. The directional characteristics are of
Methods of minimizing the resistance of the still greater importance when a directive an-
earth connection will be found in the discus- tenna array is used.
sion of the Marconi antenna. Horizontal directivity is always desirable
on any frequency for point-to-point work. How-
ever, it is not always attainable with reason-
21-4 Antenna Directivity able antenna dimensions on the lower fre-
quencies. Further, when it is attainable, as
All practical antennas radiate better in some on the frequencies above perhaps 7 Me., with
directions than others. This characteristic is reasonable antenna dimensions, operating con-
called directivity. The more directive an an- venience is greatly furthered if the maximum
tenna is, the more it concentrates the radiation lobe of the horizontal directivity is control-
in a certain direction, or directions. The more lable. It is for this reason that rotatable an-
the radiation is concentrated in a certain direc- tenna arrays have come into such common
tion, the greater will be the field strength pro- usage.
duced in that direction for a given amount of Considerable horizontal directivity can be
total radiated power. Thus the use of a direc- used to advantage when: ( 1) only point-to-
tional antenna or array produces the same re- point work is necessary, (2) several arrays are
sult in the favored direction as an increase in available so that directivity may be changed
the power of the transmitter. by selecting or reversing antennas, (3) a single
The increase in radiated power in a certain rotatable array is in use. Sinals follow the
HANDBOOK Antenna Directivity 4 11
g .
i/ ~
band it is often possible for different modes
of propagation to provide signals between two
~ .7 ......_
\!'il7 f:(~ 1--- ...\ points. This means, of course, that more than
one angle of radiation can be used. If no eleva
~ ./ I~ tion directivity is being used under this con-
r- I dition of propagation, selective fading will
d 'I\
.
a: take place because of interference between the
..."I\ 1/ 1\\ waves arriving over the different paths .
\ J \
.. \ J
:; \\
On the 28-Mc. band it is by far the most com
mon condition that only one mode of propagation
will be possible between two points at any
.......
0
~ a a ~ u ~ ~
WAVE ANGLE IN DEGREES
~ 12 ~ a e 4 2 "' o
one time. This explains, of course, the reason
why rapid fading in general and selective fad
ing in particular are almost absent from sig-
nals heard on the 28-Mc. band (except for fad
Figure 8 ing caused by local effects).
VERTICAL-PLANE DIRECTIONAL CHAR- Measurements have shown that the angles
ACTERISTICS OF HORIZONTAL AND VER- useful for communication on the 14-Mc. band
TICAL DOUBLETS ELEVATED 0.6 WAVE- are from 3 to about 30; angles above about
LENGTH AND ABOVE TWO TYPES OF 15 being useful only for local work. On the
GROUND 28-Mc. band measurements have shown that
H 1 represents a horizontal doublet over typi
the useful angles range from about 3 to 18;
cal farmland. H2 over salt water. V1 Is a angles above about 12 being useful only for
vertical pattern of radiation from a vertical local (less than 3000 miles) work. These fig
doublet over typical farmland, over salt v2 ures assume normal propagation by virtue of
water. A salt water ground is the closest
approach to an extensive ideally perfect the ~ layer.
ground that will be met in actual practice.
Figure 9
VERTICAL RADIATION
PATTERNS
Showing the vertical racliation
patterns for half-wave antennas
(or colinear half-wave or ex
tenclecl half-wave antennas) at
different heights above average
grouncl one/ perfect grouncl. Note
that such antennas one-quarter
wave above ground concentrate
most racliation at the very high
angles which are useful for com
municotion only on the lower fre
quency bancls. Antennas one-half
wave above g r o u n c/ are n o t
shown, but the elevation pattern
shows one lobe on each sicle ot
POWER OUTPUT an angIe of 30 above hori-
zontal.
dipole could be increased by raising the an additional means for suppressing high-angle
tenna higher above the ground. This is true to radiation.
an extent in the case of the horizontal dipole;
the low-angle radiation does increase slowly Suppression of High-angle radiation can be
after a height of 0.6 wavelength is reached Highangle suppressed, and this radiation
but at the expense of greatly increased high- Radiation can be added to that going out
angle radiation and the formation of a number
at low angles, only through the
of nulls in the elevation pattern. No signal use of some sort of directive antenna system.
can be transmitted or received at the elevation There are three general types of antenna ar-
angles where these nulls have been formed. rays composed of dipole elements commonly
Tests have shown that a center height of 0.6 used which concentrate radiation at the lower
wavelength for a vertical dipole (0.35 wave- more effective angles for high-frequency com-
length to the bottom end) is about optimum for munication. These types are: (1) The close-
this type of array. spaced out-of-phase system as exemplified by
Figure 9 shows the effect of placing a hori- the "flat-top" beam or WSJK array. Such con-
zontal dipole at various heights above ground. figurations are classified as end fire arrays.
It is easily seen by reference to figure 9 (and (2) The wide-spaced in-phase arrays, as exem-
figure 10 which shows the radiation from a di- plified by the "Lazy H" antenna. These con-
pole at % wave height) that a large percentage figurations are classified as broadside arrays.
of the total radiation from the dipole is being (3) The close-spaced parasitic systems, as
radiated at relatively high angles which are exemplified by the three element rotary beam.
useless for communication on the 14-Mc. and A comparison between the radiation from a
28-Mc. bands. Thus we see that in order to ob- dipole, a "flat-top beam" and a pair of dipoles
tain a worthwhile increase in the ratio of low- stacked one above the other (half of a "lazy
angle radiation to high-angle radiation it is H"), in each case with the top of the antenna
necessary to place the antenna high above at a height of % wavelength is shown in figure
ground, and in addition it is necessary to use 11. The improvement in the amplitude of low-
Figure 10
VERTICAL RADIATION
PATTERNS
Showing vertical-plane racliation
patterns of a horizontal single
section flottop beam with one
eighth wave spacing (solicl
curves) one/ a horizontal half.
wave antenna ( clashecl curves)
when both are 0.5 wavelength
(A) one/ 0.75 wavelength (B) a
bove grouncl.
Figure 11
COMPARATIVE VERTICAL
RADIATION PATTERNS
Showing the vertical radiation
patterns of a horizontal single-
section flat-top beam (A), an
array of two stacked horizontal
in-phase half-wave elements-
half of a "Lazy H"-(B), and
a horizontal dipole (C). In each
case the top of the antenna sys-
tem is 0.75 wavelength above
ground, as shown to the left of
the curves.
21-5 Bandwidth
':\.'
~
wave from the combination of the direct wave ley, published by Editors and Engineers, Ltd., Summer-
and the ground-reflected wave) or to a com land, Calif.
HANDBOOK Ground Wave Communication 415
200
uo
/F2 a virtual height of approximately 175 miles at
night, and in the daytime it splits up into two
100
/F1 MIDDAY
layers, the upper one being called the F 2 layer
and the lower being called the F, layer. The
height of the F 2 layer during daylight hours is
:JE normally about 250 miles on the average and
"'
w
-'
:::;:
~
50
0
200
VD the F, layer often has a height of as low as
140 miles. It is the F 2 layer which supports
all nighttime dx communication and nearly all
1-
I
'-' 150
)F2 daytime dx propagation.
36
~
...... I'\. I most highly ionized layer of the ionosphere
4
I I at the time of transmission. However, the skip
32
0 I 1\ distance is always present on the 14-Mc. band
II \ WINTER and is almost always present on the 3.5-Mc.
28 -
y SUNSPOT-
and 7-Mc. bands at night. The actual measure
24
MAXIMUM
"''
a:
0
1\. ....... ,_.... The Sporadic-E Occasional patches of ex
-
...
'\ Layer tremel y high ionization den-
6
4
2
- ........... f.--- sity appear at intervals
throughout the year at a height approximately
4 10 12 14 16 16 20 22 24
equal to that of the E layer. These patches,
LOCAL TIME called the sporadic-E layer may be very small
or may be up to several hundred miles in ex-
tent. The critical frequency of the sporadic-E
Figure 17 layer may be greater than twice that of the
TYPICAL CURVES SHOWING CHANGE IN normal ionosphere layers which exist at the
M.U.F. AT MAXIMUM AND MINIMUM same time.
POINTS IN SUNSPOT CYCLE It is this sporadic-E condition which pro-
vides "short-skip" contacts from 400 to per-
haps 1200 "!iles on the 28-Mc. band in the
evening. It is also the sporadic-E condition
which provides the more common type of "band
The m.u.f. often drops to frequencies below opening" experienced on the 50-Mc. band when
10 Me. in the early morning hours. The high very loud signals are received from stations
m.u.f. in the middle of the day is brought about from 400 to 1200 miles distant.
by reflection from the F 2 layer. M.u.f. data is
published periodically in the magazines de Cycles in The ionization density of
voted to amateur work, and the m.u.f. can be Ionosphere Activity the ionosphere is deter-
calculated with the aid of Basic Radio Propa- mined by the amount of
gation Predictions, CRPL-D, published month- radiation (probably ultra violet) which is be-
ly by the Government Printing Office, Wash- ing received from the sun. Consequently, iono-
ington, D.C. sphere activity is a function of the amount of
radiation of the proper character being emitted
Absorption and The optimum working fre- by the sun and is also a function of the rela-
Optimum Working quency for any particular tive aspect of the regions in the vicinity of
Frequency direction and distance is the location under discussion to the sun. There
usually about 15 per cent are four main cycles in ionosphere activity.
less than the m. u. f. for contact with that par- These cycles are: the daily cycle which is
ticular location. The absorption by the iono- brought about by the rotation of the earth, the
sphere becomes greater and greater as the 27-day cycle which is caused by the rotation
operating frequency is progressively lowered of the sun, the seasonal cycle which is caused
below the m.u.f. It is this condition which by the movement of the earth in its orbit, and
causes signals to increase tremendously in the 11-year cycle which is a cycle in sunspot
strength on the 14-Mc. and 28-Mc. bands just activity. The effects of these cycles are super-
before the signals drop completely out. At the imposed insofar as ionosphere activity is con
time when the signals are greatest in ampli- cerned. Also, the cycles are subject to short
tude the operating frequency is equal to the term variations as a result of magnetic storms
m.u.f. Then as the signals drop out the m.u.f. and similar terrestrial disturbances.
has become lower than the operating frequency. The most recent minimum of the 11-year
sunspot cycle occured during the winter of
Skip Distance The shortest distance from a 1954-1955, and we are currently moving up
transmitting location at which the slope of a new cycle, the maximum of
signals reflected from the ionosphere can be which will probably occur during the year
returned to the earth is called the skip dis- 1958. The current cycle is pictured in figure 18.
tance. As was mentioned above under Critical
Frequency there is no skip distance for a fre- Fading The lower the angle of radiation of
quency below the critical frequency of the the wave, with respect to the hori-
HANDBOOK 11-Year Sunspot Cycle 419
17 0
16 0 Ml1'~UM
150
a:
~
14 0
130
"'
::<120
\
!
::0
z II 0
I
f- 100
I
a: 90
1/
II
I\
\
::i 80
~ 70
I \ I
o60
I 1\ I
\
~
TRANSMITTER
~ 5 -~or- I
~
::>
5 Of-- -~ ~-
0 3 Of-- -~
::;
<1) 2 ob.
0
oL
42
~
--:u
44
I :
46 48 50 52
"1"'-. ..,~~
54
EF 58
Figure 19
IONOSPHERE-REFLECTION WAVE PATHS
Showing typical Ionosphere-reflection wove
poths during daylight hours when Ionization
YEAR density is such that frequencies as high as
28 Me. will &e returnee/ to earth. The dis
tance between graunclwave range and thot
Figure 18 range where the ionospherereflectecl wave of
THE YEARLY TREND OF THE 11-YEAR a specific frequency first will &e returnee/ to
earth Is call eel the skip distance.
SUNSPOT CYCLE. RADIO CONDITIONS IN
GENERAL WILL IMPROVE DURING 1955-
1958 AS THE CYCLE ADVANCES
dent, particularly a "flutter fade" and a char considered specular or mirror reflection. But
acteristic "hollow" or echo effect. upon striking a mountain range, for instance,
Deviations from a great circle path are es- the reradiation or reflected energy is scattered,
pecially noticeable in the case of great circle some of it being directed back towards the
paths which cross or pass near the auroral transmitter, thus providing another mechanism
zones, because in such cases there often is for producing a signal within the skip zone.
complete or nearly complete absorption of the
direct sky wave, leaving off-path scattered Meteors and When a meteor strikes the earth's
reflections the only mechanism of propagation. "Bursts" atmosphere, a cylindrical region
Under such conditions the predominant wave of free electrons is formed at
will appear to arrive from a direction closer approximately the height of the E layer. This
to the equator, and the signal will be notice- slender ionized column is quite long, and when
ably if not considerably weaker than a direct first formed is sufficiently dense to reflect
sky wave which is received under favorable radio waves back to earth most readily, in-
conditions. cluding vhf waves which are not ordinarily
Irregular reflection of radio waves from returned by the F 2 layer.
"scattering patches" is divided into two cate- The effect of a single meteor, of normal size,
gories: "short scatter" and "long scatter". shows up as a sudden "burst" of signal of
Short scatter is the scattering that occurs short duration at points not ordinarily reached
when a radio wave first reaches the scattering by the transmitter. After a period of from 10
patches or media. Ordinarily it is of no parti to 40 seconds, recombination and diffusion
cular benefit, as in most cases it only serves have progressed to the point where the effect
to fill in the inner portion of the skip zone of a single fairly large meteor is not percep-
with a weak, distorted signal. tible. However, there are many small meteors
Long scatter occurs when a wave has been impinging upon earth's atmosphere every min-
refracted from the F 2 layer and strikes scatter ute, and the aggregate effect of their transient
ing patches or media on the way down. When ionized trails, including the small amount of
the skip distance exceeds several hundred residual ionization that exists for several
miles, long scatter is primarily responsible minutes after the original flash butis too weak
for reception within the skip zone, particu- and dispersed to prolong a "burst", is be-
larly the outer portion of the skip zone. Dis lieved to contribute to tbe existence of tbe
tortion is much less severe than in the case "nighttime E" layer, and perhaps also to
of short scatter, and while the signal is like sporadic E patches.
wise weak, it sometimes can be utilized for While there are many of these very small
satisfactory communication. meteors striking the earth's atmosphere every
During a severe ionosphere disturbance in minute, meteors of normal size (sufficiently
the north auroral zone, it sometimes is possible large to produce individual "bursts") do not
to maintain communication between the Eastern strike nearly so frequently except during some
United States and Northern Europe by the fol- of the comparatively rare meteor "showers".
lowing mechanism: That portion of the energy During one of these displays a "quivering"
which is radiated in the direction of the great ionized layer is produced which is intense
circle path is completely absorbed upon reach- enough to return signals in the lower v-h-f
ing the auroral zone. However, the portion of range with good strength, but with a type of
the wave leaving the United States in a south- "flutter" distortion which is characteristic
easterly direction is refracted downward from of this type of propagation.
the F 2 layer and encounters scattering patches
or media on its downward trip at a distance
of approximately 2000 miles from the trans
mitter. There it is reflected by "long scatter" 21-9 Transmission Lines
in all directions, this scattering region acting
like an isotropic radiator fed with a very small
For many reasons it is desirable to place
fraction of the original transmitter power. The
an antenna or radiating system as high and in
great circle path from this southerly point to
the clear as is physically possible, utilizing
northern Europe does not encounter unfavor-
some form of nonradiating transmission line
able ionosphere conditions, and the wave is
to carry energy with as little loss as possible
propagated the rest of the trip as though it had from the transmitter to the radiating antenna,
been radiated from the scattering region. and conversely from the antenna to the re
Another type of scatter is produced when ceiver.
a sky wave strikes certain areas of the earth. There are many different types of transmis-
Upon striking a comparatively smooth surface sion lines and, generally speaking, practically
such as the sea, there is little scattering, the any type of transmission line or feeder system
wave being shot up again by what could be may be used with any type of antenna. How-
HANDBOOK Transmission Lines 421
ATTENUATION
db/100FEET VELO-
=t.O
F~~ ~';?
VSWR
REMARKS
30 MC 100 MC 300 MC v FT.
4.1
...
3.0
8.0
o.&8
o.ee
o.ee
20.5
29..5
28.5
WILL HANDLE 1.4 KW AT 30 MC. IF VSWR IS LOW. 0.4"0.D. 7/26 CONDUCTOR .
WILL HANDLE 7.0 KW. AT 30 MC. IF VSWR IS LOW. 0.87" 0.0. 0.19" DIA. CONDUCTOR
WILL HANDLE 430 WATTS AT 30 MC. IF VSWR IS LOW. 0.2" 0.0. N"" 20 CONDUCTOR.
RG-59/U COAX (73 OHMS) 1.9 3.8 7.0 o.ee 21 WILL HANDLE 080 WATTS AT 30 MC. IF VSWR IS LOW. Q.24"0.D. N 22 CONDUCTOR.
rv..:.sg COAX (720HMS) 2.0 4.0 7.0 o.ee 22 COMMERCIAL" VERSION OF RG-.59/U FOR LESS EXACTING APPLICATIONS. LESS
EXPENSIVE.
RG-22/U SHIELDED 1.7 3.0 5.5 o.ee 18 -FOR SHIELDED, BALANCED-TO-GROUND APPLICATIONS. VERY LOW NOISE
PAIR (9.5 OHMS)
PICK UP. 0.4 II O.D.
K-1 1 1 SHI ELOED PAl R DESIGNED FOR TV LEAD-IN IN NOISY LOCATIONS. LOSSES HIGHER THAN
(300 OHMS) 2.0 3.~ 0.1 - 4 REGULAR 300 OHM RIBBON, BUT DO NOT INCREASE AS MUCH FROM WEATHERING.
FIGURE 21
EJT
range, are listed with their pertinent char- !: CONCENTRIC LINE
~
and because the energy dissipation on the line
will be localized, causing overheating of the
line at the points of maximum current. 0 0.5
Because moderate standing waves can be =
SWR 3.o ZL = 3.0 OR 0.33 Zo
toleratedon open-wire lines without much loss,
a standing-wave ratio of 2/1 or 3/1 is con-
:~
sidered acceptable with this type of line, even
when used in an untuned system. Strictly
speaking, a line is untuned, or non-resonant,
only when it is perfectly flat, with a standing- @
wave ratio of 1 (no standing waves). However, SWR =co ZL = 0 OR co
amplitude, in turn, depends upon the mismatch presence of the resonant tank circuit formed
at the line termination. A line of no. 12 wire, by parallel tuning of the antenna" coil.
spaced 6 inches with good ceramic or plastic
spreaders, has a surge impedance of approx-
imately 600 ohms, and makes an excellent
tuned feeder for feeding anything between 60 21-12 Line Discontinuities
and 6000 ohms (at frequencies below 30 Me.).
If used to feed a load of higher or lower imped- In the previous discussion we have assumed
ance than this, the standing waves become a transmission line which was uniform through-
great enough in amplitude that some loss will out its length. In actual practice, this is
occur unless the feeder is kept short. At fre- usually not the case.
quencies above 30 Me., the spacing becomes Whenever there is any sudden change in the
an appreciable fraction of a wavelength, and characteristic impedance of the line, partial
radiation from the line no longer is negligible. reflection will occur at the point of discon-
Hence, coaxial line or close-spaced parallel- tinuity. Some of the energy will be transmitted
wire line is recommended for v-h-f work. and some reflected, which is essentially the
If a transmission line is not perfectly match- same as having some of the energy absorbed
ed, it should be made resonant, even though and some reflected in so far as the effect upon
the amplitude of the standing waves (voltage the line frolll the generator to that point is
variation) is not particularly great. This pre- concerned. The discontinuity can by ascribed
vents reactance from being coupled into the a reflection coefficient just as in the case of
final amplifier. A feed system having moderate
an unmatched load.
standing waves may be made to present a non-
In a simple case, such as a finite length of
reactive load to the amplifier either by tuning
or by pruning the feeders to approximate reso- uniform line having a characteristic impedance
nance. of 5 00 ohms feeding into an infinite length of
Usually it is preferable with tuned feeders uniform line having a characteristic impedance
to have a current loop (voltage minimum) at the of 100 ohms, the behavior is easily predicted.
transmitter end of the line. This means that The infinite 100 ohm lin~ will have no standing
when voltage- feeding an antenna, the tuned waves and will accept the same power from the
feeders should be made an odd number of quar- 500 ohm line as would a 100 ohm resistor,
ter wavelengths long, and when current-feeding and the rest of the energy will be reflected at
an antenna, the feeders should be made an the discontinuity to produce standing waves
even number of quarter wavelengths long. Actu- from there back to the generator. However, in
ally, the feeders are made about 10 per cent of the case of a complex discontinuity placed at
a quarter wave longer than the 4:alculated an odd distance down a line terminated in a
value (the value given in the tables) when complex impedance, the picture becomes com-
they are to be series tuned to resonance by plicated, especially when the discontinuity is
means of a capacitor, instead of being trimmed neither sudden nor gradual, but intermediate
and pruned to resonance. between the two. This is the usual case with
When tuned feeders are used to feed an an-
amateur lines that must be erected around
tenna on more than one band, it is necessary
buildings and trees.
to compromise and make provision for both
In any case, when a discontinuity exists
series and parallel tuning, inasmuch as it is
impossible to cut a feeder to a length that somewhere on a line and is not a smooth,
will be optimum for several bands. If a voltage gradual change embracing several wavelengths,
loop appears at the transmitter end of the line it is not possible to avoid standing waves
on certain bands, parallel tuning of the feed- throughout the entire length of the line. If the
ers will be required in order to get a transfer discontinuity is sharp enough and is great
of energy. It is impossible to transfer energy enough to be significant, standing waves must
by inductive coupling unless current is flow- exist on one side of the discontinuity, and
ing. This is effected at a voltage loop by the may exist on both sides in many cases.
CHAPTER TWENTY-TWO
Antennas for the lower frequency portion of Usually a high-frequency doublet is mounted
the h-f spectrum (perhaps from 1.8 to 7.0 Me.), as high and as much in the clear as possible,
and temporary or limited use antennas for the for obvious reasons. However, it is sometimes
upper portion of the h-f range, usually are of justifiable to bring part of the radiating sys-
a relatively simple type in which directivity tem directly to the transmitter, feeding the an-
is not a prime consideration. Also, it often is tenna without benefit of a transmission line.
desirable, in amateur work, that a single an- This is permissible when ( 1) there is insuffi-
tenna system be capable of operation at least cient room to erect a 75- or SO-meter horizon-
on the 3.5-Mc. and 7.0-Mc. range, and prefer- tal dipole and feed line, (2) when a long wire
ably on other frequency ranges. Consequently, is also to be operated on one of the higher
the first portion of this chapter will be de- frequency bands on a harmonic. In either case,
voted to a discussion of such antenna sys- it is usually possible to get the main portion
tems. The latter portion of the chapter is de- of the antenna in the clear because of its
voted to the general problem of matching the length. This means that the power lost by
antenna transmission line to antenna systems bringing the antenna directly to the transmitter
of the fixed type. Matching the antenna trans- is relatively small.
mission line to the rotatable directive array Even so, it is not best practice to bring the
is discussed in Chapter Twenty-five. high-voltage end of an antenna into the oper-
ating room because of the increased difficulty
in eliminating BCI and TVI. For this reason
one should dispense with a feed line in con-
22-1 End-Fed Half-Wave junction with a Hertz antenna only as a last
resort.
Horizontal Antennas
End-Fed The end-fed antenna has no form
The half-wave horizontal dipole is the most Antennas of transmission line to couple it
common and the most practical antenna for the to the transmitter, but brings the
3.5-Mc. and 7-Mc. amateur bands. The form of radiating portion of the antenna right down to
the dipole, and the manner in which it is fed the transmitter, where some form of coupling
are capable of a large number of variations. system is used to transfer energy to the an-
Figure 2 shows a number of practicable forms tenna.
of the simple dipole antenna along with meth- Figure 1 shows two common methods of
ods of feed. feeding the Fuchs antenna or end-fed Hertz.
426
Center-Fed Antennas 427
\
FROM TRANSMITTER
is de sired, the zepp has some decided ad-
vantages.
As the radiating portion of the zepp antenna
system must always be some multiple of a
I ANY EVEN NUMBl:R OF QUARTER-WAY S
half wave long, there is always high voltage
present at the point where the live zepp feed
er attaches to the end of the radiating portion
of the antenna. Thus, this type of zepp an-
tenna system is voltage fed.
t~-------1
STUB-FED
END-FED TYPES
@ = TUNED DOUBLET
~
300-6000HM
LINE OPEN
QUARTER-WAVE
STUB-FED
300-600.C.. LINE
t+--~0.9> X/2----i r------ 0.9> X/2 ______, f--- 0.9> X/2 ----1
15011 TWINLEAD
0.193 OF FREE
SPACE WAVE-
LENGTH OR
0. 77 OF A/4
Figure 2
ALTERNATIVE
METHODS OF
FEEDING A
HALF-WAVE DIPOLE
300 OHM TWIN LEAD 3000HM TWIN LEAD 600 OHM LINE
ANY LENGTH ANY LENGTH ANY LENGTH
o=14':bOF
@ TOTAL LENGTH
CENTER-FED TYPES
THE R AD I 0 Multi-wire Doublets 429
in series with the antenna coil or in parallel ance transmission line may be used is shown
with it. A series tuning capacitor can be in figures 2J and 2K. This system utilizes
placed in series with one feeder leg without more than one wire in parallel for the radiating
unbalancing the system. element, but only one of the wires is broken
The tuned-doublet antenna is shown in fig- for attachment of the feeder. The most com-
ure 2D. The antenna is a current-fed system mon arrangement uses two wires in the flat
when the radiating wire is a half wave long top of the antenna so that an impedance multi-
electrically, or when the system is operated plication of four is obtained.
on its odd harmonics, but becomes a voltage- The antenna shown in figure 2J is the so-
fed radiator when operated on its even har- called Twin-Lead folded dipole which is a
monics. commonly used antenna system on the medium-
The antenna has a different radiation pat- frequency amateur bands. In this arrangement
tern when operated on its harmonics, as would both the antenna and the transmission line to
be expected. The arrangement u sed on the the transmitter are constructed of 300-ohm
second harmonic is better known as the Frank- Twin-Lead. The flat top of the antenna is
lin colinear array and is described in Chapter made slightly less than the conventional
Twenty-three. The pattern is similar to a Yrwave length (462/FMc. instead of 468/FMc. for a
dipole except that it is sharper in the broad- single-wire flat top) and the two ends of the
side direction. On higher harmonics of oper- Twin-Lead are joined together at each end.
ation there will be multiple lobes of radiation The center of one of the conductors of the
from the system. Twin-Lead flat top is broken and the two ends
of the Twin-Lead feeder are spliced into the
Figures 2E and 2F show alternative arrange-
flat top leads. As a protection against mois-
ments for using an untuned transmission line
ture pieces of flat polyethylene taken from
between the transmitter and the tuned-doublet
radiator. In figure 2E a half-wave shorted line another piece of 300-ohm Twin-Lead may be
is used to resonate the radiating system, molded over the joint between conductors with
while in figure 2F a quarter-wave open line is the aid of an electric iron or soldering iron.
utilized. The adjustment of quarter-wave and Better bandwidth characteristics can be ob-
half-wave stubs is discussed in Section 19-8. tained with a folded dipole made of ribbon line
if the two conductors of the ribbon line are
Doublets with The average value of feed im- shorted a distance of 0.82 (the velocity factor
Quarter-Wave pedance for a center-fed half- of ribbon line) of a free-space quarter wave-
Transformers wave doublet .ls 75 ohms. The length from the center or feed point. This pro-
actual value varies with height cedure is illustrated in figure 3A. An alter-
and is shown in Chapter Twenty-one. Other native arrangement for a Twin-Lead folded
methods of matching this rather low value of dipole is illustrated in figure 3B. This type of
impedance to a medium-impedance transmis- half-wave antenna system is convenient for
sion line are shown in (G), (H), and (I) of fig- use on the 3.5-Mc. band when the 116 to 132
ure 2. Each of these three systems uses a foot distance required for a full half-wave is
quarter-wave transformer to accomplish the not quite available in a straight line, since the
impedance transformation. The only difference single-wire end pieces may be bent away or
between the three systems lies in the type of downward from the direction of the main sec
transmission line used in the quarter-wave tion of the antenna.
transformer. (G) shows the Johnson Q system Figure 2K shows the basic type of 2-wire
whereby a line made up of Yz-inch dural tubing doublet or folded dipole wherein the radiating
is used for the low-impedance linear trans- section of the system is made up of standard
former. A line made up in this manner is fre- antenna wire spaced by means of feeder
quently called a set of Q bars. Illustration spreaders. The feeder again is made of 300-
(H) shows the use of a four-wire line as the ohm Twin-Lead since the feed-point imped-
linear transformer, and (I) shows the use of a ance is approximately 300 ohms, the same as
piece of 150-ohm Twin-Lead electrically ~ that of the Twin-Lead folded dipole.
wave in length as the transformer between the The folded-dipole type of antenna has the
center of the dipole and a piece of 300-ohm broadest response characteristic (greatest
Twin-Lead. In any case the impedance of the bandwidth) of any of the conventional half-
quarter-wave transformer will be of the order wave antenna systems constructed of small
of 150 to 200 ohms. The use of sections of wires or conductors. Hence such an antenna
transmission line as linear transformers is may be operated over the greatest frequency
discussed in detail in Section 22-8. range without serious standing waves of any
common half-wave antenna type.
Multi-Wire An alternative method for increas- The increased bandwidth of the multi-wire
Doublets ing the feed-point impedance of a doublet type of radiator, and the fact that the
dipole so that a medium-imped- feed-point resistance is increased sever a 1
430 Antennas and Antenna Matching THE R AD I 0
i T
IlL.
I
I
r-
094>.12
ii}~ED
l
@ 300-0HM RIBBON
lVERTICAL
STUB-FED
VERTICAL
L-C- FED
VERTICAL
r~
4
i
1-------- 404
fMc.
---------1
----
Figure 4
@ 300-0HM RIBBON
\
30
FMC.
HALF-WAVE VERTICAL ANTENNA SHOW-
ING ALTERNATIVE METHODS OF FEED
l
will give a somewhat blj,tter impedance match
at normal antenna heights. Due to the asym
Figure 3
metty of the coaxial feed system difficulty
FOLDED DIPOLE WITH SHORTING may be encountered with waves traveling on
STRAPS the outside of the coaxial cable. For this rea-
The impeclance match one/ banclwiclth char- son the use of Twin-Lead is normally to be
acteristics of a folclecl clipole may be improvecl preferred over the use of coaxial c a b I e for
by shorting the two wires of the ribbon a c/is
tance out from the center equal to the veloci feeding the center of a half-wave dipole.
ty factor of the ribbon times the half-length
of the clipole as shown at (A}. An alternative Off-Center The system shown in figure
arrangement with bent clown encls for space Fed Doublet 2 (0) is sometimes used to
conservation is illustratecl at (B). feed a half-wave dipole, espe-
cially when it is desired to use the same an-
tenna on a number of harmonically-related fre
quencies. The feeder wire (no. 14 enamelled
times over the radiation resistance of the ele wire should be used) is tapped a distance of
ment, have both contributed to the frequent 14 per cent of the total length of the antenna
use of the multi-wire radiator as the driven either side of center. The feeder wire, operat-
element in a parasitic antenna array. ing against ground for the return current, has
an impedance of approximately 600 ohms. The
Delta-Matched These two types of radiat system works well over high I y conducting
Doublet and ing elements are shown in ground, but will introduce rather high losses
Standard Doublet figure 2L and figure 2M. The when the antenna is located above rocky or
delta-matched do ubI e t is poorly conducting soil. The off-center fed an-
described in detail in Section 228 of this tenna has a further disadvantage that it is
chapter. The standard doublet, shown in fig- highly responsive to harmonics fed to it from
ure 2M, is fed in the center by means of 75 the transmitter.
ohm Twin-Lead, either the transmitting or the The effectiveness of the antenna system in
receiving type, or it may be fed by means of radiating harmonics is of course an advantage
twisted-pair feeder or by means of parallel when operation of the antenna on a number of
wire lamp-cord. Any of these types of feed frequency bands is desired. But it is neces
line will give an approximate match to the sary to use a harmonic filter to insure that
center impedance of the dipole, but the 75- only the desired frequency is fed from the
ohm Twin-Lead is far to be preferred over the transmitter to the antenna.
other types of low-impedance feeder due to
the much lower losses of the polyethylene
dielectric transmission line.
The coaxial-cable-fed doublet shown in fig- 22-3 The Half-Wave
ure 2N is a variation on the system shown in Vertical Antenna
figure 2M. Either 52-ohm coaxial cable or 75-
ohm coaxial cable may be used to feed the The half-wave vertical antenna with its bot
center of the dipole, although the 75-ohm type tom end from 0.1 to 0.2 wavelength above
HANDBOOK Vertical Antennas 4 31
Figure 5 Figure 6
THE LOW-FREQUENCY GROUND PLANE 80 METER LOADED GROUND PLANE
ANTENNA ANTENNA
The radials of the ground plane antenna Number of turns in loacllng coil to be acljustecl
should lie in a horizontal plane, although until antenna system resonates at cleslrecl
slight departures from this caused by nearby frequency in 80 meter bane/,
objects is allowable. The whip may be
mounted on a short post, or on the roof of a
building, The wire radials may slope clown
wards towards their tips, acting as guy
wires for the installation,
teur band is the ground-plane antenna, shown
in figure 5. So called because of the radial
ground wires, the ground-plane antenna is not
ground is an effective transmitting antenna for affected by soil conditions in its vicinity due
low-angle radiation, where ground conditions to the creation of an artificial ground system
in the vicinity of the antenna are good. Such by the radial wires. The base impedance of
an antenna is not good for short-range sky- the ground plane is of the order of 30 to 35
wave communication, such as is the normal ohms, and it may be fed with 52-ohm coaxial
usage of the 3. 5-Mc. amateur band, but is ex- line with o.Vy a slight impedance mis-match.
cellent for short-range ground-wave communi- For a more exact match, the ground-plane an-
cation such as on the standard broadcast band tenna may be fed with a 72-ohm coaxial line
and on the amateur 1.8-Mc. band. The vertical and a quarter-wave matching section made of
antenna normally will cause greater BCI than 52-ohm coaxial line.
an equivalent horizontal antenna, due to the The angle of radiation of the ground-plane
much greater ground-wave field intensity. Al- antenna is quite low, and the antenna will be
so, the vertical antenna is poor for receiving found less effective for contacts under 1000
under conditions where man-made interference miles or so on the 80 and 40 meter bands than
is severe, since such interference is predomi- a high angle radiator, such as a dipole. How-
nantly vertically polarized. ever, for DX contacts of 1000 miles or more,
Three ways of feeding a half-wave vertical the ground-plane antenna will prove to be
antenna from an untuned transmission line are highly effective.
illustrated in figure 4. The J-fed system shown
in figure 4A is obviously not practicable ex-
The SO-Meter A vertical antenna of 66 feet
cept on the higher frequencies where the ex-
Loaded in height presents quite a prob-
tra length for the stub may easily be obtained. Ground-Plane lem on a small lot, as the sup-
However, in the normal case the ground-plane
porting guy wires will tend to
vertical antenna is to be recommended over
take up quite a large portion of the lot. Under
the J -fed system for high frequency work.
such conditions, it is possible to shorten the
length of the vertical radiator of the ground-
plane by the inclusion of a loading coil in the
22-4 The Ground Plane Antenna vertical whip section. The ground-plane an-
tenna may be artificially loaded in this man-
An effective low angle radiator for any ama- ner so that a 25-foot vertic a 1 whip may be
432 Antennas and Antenna Matching THE R AD I 0
I
cycles with a low SWR is possible on 80 me
ters. Operation over a larger frequency range
is possible if a .higher standing wave ratio is
tolerated on the transmission line. The radia-
tion resistance of a loaded SO-meter ground- COAX. f'ROM TRANS.
LOADING.
COILS .. HAT"'
Figure 8
I.!>..
4
r
.l>.
4
I
.l>.
4 LESS
THAN
T
l l l
LOADING THE -t
MARCONI ANTENNA
The various loading systems
are cliscussec/ in the accom-
ponying text. -::'
-= -::'
-=
j -= -::'
@ @
current flows through a r e s i s tor, or if the is the possibility of high resistance joints in
ground itself presents some resistance, there the pipe, due to the "dope" put on the cou-
will be a power loss in the form of heat. Im- pling threads. By attaching the ground wire
proving the ground connection, therefore, pro- to a junction with three or more legs, the pos-
vides a definite means of reducing this power sibility of requiring the main portion of the
loss, and thus increasing the radiated power. r-f current to flow through a high resistance
The best possible ground consists of as connection is greatly reduced.
many wires as possible, each at least a quar- The presence of water in the pip e adds
ter wave long, buried just below the surface nothing to the conductivity; therefore it does
of the earth, and extending out from a common not relieve the problem of high resistance
point in the form of radials. Copper wire of joints. Bonding the joints is the best insur-
any size larger than no. 16 is satisfactory, ance, but this is, of course, impracticable
though the larger sizes will take longer to dis- where the pipe is buried. Bonding together
integrate. In fact, the radials need not even with copper wire the various water faucets
be buried; they may be supported just above above the surface of the ground will improve
the earth, and insulated from it. This arrange- the effectiveness of a water-pipe ground sys-
ment is called a counterpoise, and operates tem hampered by high-resistance pipe cou-
by virtue of its high capacitance to ground. plings.
If the antenna is physically shorter than a
quarter wavelength, the antenna current is
higher, due to lower radiation resistance. Con- Marconi A Marconi antenna is an odd
sequently, the power lost in resistive soil is Dimensions number of electrical quarter
greater. The importance of a good ground with waves long (usually only one
short, inductive-loaded Marconi radiators is, quarter wave in length), and is always reso-
therefore, quite obvious. With a good ground nated to the operating frequency. The correct
system, even very short (one-eighth wave- loading of the final amplifier is accomplished
length) antennas can be expected to give a by varying the coupling, rather than by detun-
high percentage of the efficiency of a quarter- ing the antenna from resonance.
wave antenna used with the same ground sys- Physically, a quarter-wave Marconi may be
tem. This is especially true when the short made anywhere from one-eighth to three-eighths
radiator is top loaded with a high Q (low loss) wavelength overall, meaning the total length of
coil. the antenna wire and ground lead from the end
of the antenna to the point where the ground
Water-Pipe Water pipe, because of its com- lead attaches to the junction of the radials or
Grounds paratively large surface and cross counterpoise wires, or where the water pipe
section, has a relatively low r-f enters the ground. The longer the antenna
resistance. If it is possible to attach to a is made physically, the lower will be the cur-
junction of several water pipes (where they rent flowing in the ground connection, and the
branch in several directions and run for some greater will be the overall radiation efficiency.
distance under ground), a satisfactory ground However, when the antenna length exceeds
connection will be obtained. If one of the three-eighths wavelength, the antenna be-
pipes attaches to a lawn or garden sprinkler comes difficult to resonate by me an s of a
system in the immediate vicinity of the anten- series capacitor, and it begins to take shape
na, the effectiveness of the system will ap- as an end-fed Hertz, requiring a method of
proach that of buried copper radials. feed such as a pi network.
The main objection to water-pipe grounds A radiator physically much shorter than a
434 Antennas and Antenna Matching THE R AD I 0
'
6"FEEOER
SPREAOERS
-.2"Ft:EOER
SPREADERS
I
WIRES SHORTED TO-
GETHER AT END
Figure 10
~FT.
TWIN-LEAD MARCONI ANTENNA FOR THE
T
_!_FT.
Ft.~c.
_L
300 .0. TWINLEAO
80 AND 160 METER BANDS
FIGURE A
CUTOFF SHIELD AND OUTER REMOVE OUTER JACKET
JACKET A.S SHOWN. ALLOW FROM A SHORT LENGTH OF
DIELECTRIC TO EXTEND PART CABLE AS SHOWN HERE.
WAY TO OTHER CABLE. COVER UNBRAIO THE SHIELD OF
ALL EXPOSED SHIEL.D AND COAX C. CUTOFF THE DI-
DIELECTRIC ON BOTH CABLES ELECTRIC AND INNER CON-
WITH A CONTINUOUS WRAP- DUCTOR fLUSH WITH THE
PING OF SC.OTCH ELECTRICAL OUTER JACKET. 00 NOT CUT
TAPE TO EXCLUDE MOISTURE. THE SHIELD. WRAP SHIELD
OF COAX C AROUND SHIELD
OF COAX D. SOLDER THE
CONNECTION, BEING VERY
CAREfUL NOT TO DAMAGE
THE DIELECTRIC MATERIAL
HOLD CABL.E 0 STRAIGHT FOR DETAIL SEE FIGURE B
FOR DETAIL SEE FIGURE 8 WHILE SOLDERING. COVER
THE AREA WITH A CONTIN-
52 OHhA R~-8/U, ANY LENGTH UOUS WRAPPING OF SCOTCH
ELECTRICAL TAPE. NO CON-
NECTION TO INNER CONDUC-
TORS.
DIMENSIONS SHOWN HERE ARE FOR THE 40 METER BAND. THIS ANT- DIMENSIONS SHOWN HERE ARE FOR THE MJ METER BAND. THIS ANT-
ENNA MAY BE BUILT FOR OTHER BANDS BY USING DIMENSIONS THAT ENNA MofY BE BUILT FOR CTTHER BANOS BY USING DIMENSIONS THAT
ARE MULTIPLES OR SUBMULTIPLES OF THE DIMENSIONS SHOWN~ ARE MULTIPLES OR SUBMULTIPLES OF THE DIMENSIONS SHOWN.
BALUNSPACIN~ IS 1.50N ALL BANDS.
BALUN SPACING IS 1.5 ON ALL BAND$.
Figure 11 Figure 12
HALF-WAVE ANTENNA WITH QUARTER BROADBAND ANTENNA WITH QUARTER
WAVE UNBALANCED TO BALANCED WAVE UNBALANCED TO BALANCED
TRANSFORMER (BALUN) FEED SYSTEM TRANSFORMER (BALUN) FEED SYSTEM
FOR 40-METER OPERATION FOR 80-METER OPERATION
sions in terms of frequency are given on the antenna had been made full length it would
drawing. An antenna of this type is 93 feet be possible to cover about half again as much
long for operation on 3600 kc. and 86 feet long frequency range for the same amount of mis-
for operation on 3900 kc. This type of antenna match on the extremes of the frequency range.
has the additional advantage that it may be
operated on the 7-Mc. and 14-Mc. bands, when The Twin-Lead Much of the power loss in
the flat top has been cut for the 3.5-Mc. band, Marconi Antenna the Marconi antenna is a re-
simply by changing the position of the short- sult of low radiation resist-
ing bar and the feeder line on the stub. ance and high ground resistance. In some
A sacrifice which must be made when using cases, the ground resistance may even be
a shortened radiating system, as for example be higher than the radiation resistance, caus-
the types shown in figure 9, is in the band- ing a loss of 50 per cent or more of the trans-
width of the radiating system. The frequency mitter power output. If the radiation resistance
range which may be covered by a shortened of the Marconi antenna is raised, the amount
antenna system is approximately in proportion of power lost in the ground resistance is pro-
to the amount of shortening which has been portionately less. If a Marconi antenna is made
employed. For example, the antenna system out of 300 ohm TV-type ribbon line, as shown
shown in figure 9C may be operated over the in figure 10, the radiation resistance Qf the
range from 3800 kc. to 4000 kc. without ser- antenna is raised from a low value of 10 or 15
ious standing waves on the feed line. If the ohms to a more reasonable value of 40 to 60
436 Antennas and Antenna Matching THE RA0 I 0
~:1
r----ANTNNA~
f'bl bfd
3.5 3.0 3. 7
FREQUENCY
3.8
("c)
3.8 4.0
PHENOL.IC Bl..OCKS,-t-tiJ"'/,1
SEE nc;. 12.
80 METERS
L =13'&"
C = 400.lJJJF
40 t.4TERS
L=7'3"
C ::: 2.00 .U.U F
Figure 14
SHORT BALUN FOR 40 AND 80 METERS
ohms. The ground losses are now reduced by
a factor of 4. In addition, the antenna may be
directly fed from a 50-ohm coaxial line, or di
rectly from the unbalanced output of a pi net available operating time, and then to have an
work transmitter. additional multi-band antenna which may be
Since a certain amount of power may still pressed into service for operation on another
be lost in the ground connection, it is still of band when propagation conditions on the most
greatest importance that a good, low resist frequently used band are not suitable. Most
ance ground be used with this antenna. amateurs use, or plan to install, at least one
directive array for one of the higher-frequency
The Collins Shown in figures 11 and 12 bands, but find that an addi tiona! antenna
Broad-band are broad-band dipoles for which may be used on the 3. 5-Mc. and 7 .0-Mc.
Dipole System the 40 and 80 meter amateur band, or even up through the 28-Mc. band is
bands, designed by Collins almost indispensable.
Radio Co. for use with the Collins 32V3 and The choice of a multi-band antenna depends
KW-1 transmitters. These fan-type dipoles upon a number of factors such as the amount
have excellent broad-band response, and are of space available, the band which is to be
designed to be fed with a 52-ohm unbalanced used for the majority of operating with the an-
coaxial line, making them suitable for use with tenna, the radiation efficiency which is de-
many of the other modern transmitters, such sired, and the type of antenna tuning network
as the Barker and Williamson 5100, Johnson to be used at the transmitter. A number of
Ranger, and Viking. The antenna system con recommended types are shown in the next
sists of a fan-type dipole, a balun matching pages.
section, and a suitable coaxial feedline. The
Q of the half-wave 80 meter doublet is low The l4-Wave Figure 15 shows an antenna
ered by decreasing the effective length-to- Folded Doublet type which will be found to
diameter ratio. The frequency range of opera- be very effective when a
tion of the doublet is increased considerably moderate amount of space is available, when
by this change. A typical SWR curve for the most of the operating will be done on one band
80 meter doublet is shown in figure 13. with occasional operation on the second har-
The balanced doublet is matched to the un monic. The system is quite satisfactory for
balanced coaxial line by the one-quarter wave use with high-power transmitters since a 600-
balun. If desired, a shortened balun may be ohm non-resonant line is used from the anten-
used (figure 14). The short balun is capacity na to the transmitter and since the antenna
loaded at the junction between the balun and system is balanced with respect to ground.
the broad-band dipole. With operation on the fundamental frequency
of the antenna where the flat top is % wave
long the switch SW is left open. The system
affords a very close match between the 600-
22-7 Multi-Band Antennas ohm line and the feed point of the antenna.
Kraus has reported a standing-wave ratio of
The availability of a multi-band antenna is approximately 1.2 to 1 over the 14-Mc. band
a great operating convenience to an amateur when the antenna was located approximately
station. In most cases it will be found best to one-half wave above ground.
install an antenna which is optimum for the For operation on the second harmonic the
band which is used for the m a j or it y of the switch SW is closed. The antenna is still an
HANDBOOK Multi-band Antennas 4 37
6000HM LINE:
TO TRANSMITTER
Figure 15
THE THREE-QUARTER WAVE FOLDED SHORTED END 600 OHM LINE
TO TRANSMIT.,-ER
DOUBLET
l =67FT. WHEN ANTENNA IS 195 FT.
This antenna arrangement will give very L =33 FT. " 96FT.
satisfactory operation with a 600-ohm feecl L= 16.5 FT. " "A9.6 FT.
line for operation with the switch open on
the fundamental frequency ancl with the
switch closed on twice frequency.
Figure 16
AUTOMATIC BANDSWITCHING STUB FOR
THE THREE-QUARTER WAVE FOLDED
effective radiator on the second harmonic but DOUBLET
the pattern of radiation will be different from
The antenna of Figure 15 may be usecl with
that on the fundamental, and the standing-wave
a shortecl stub line in place of the switch
ratio on the feed line will be greater. The flat normally usee/ for seconcl harmonic operation.
top of the antenna must be made of open wire
rather than ribbon or tubular line.
For greater operating convenience, the short-
ing switch may be replaced with a section of many other antenna types, but it is particular-
transmission line. If this transmission line is ly convenient when it is desired to install an
made one-quarter wavelength long for the fun- antenna in a hurry for a test, or for field-day
damental frequency, and the free end of the work. The flat top of the radiator should be
line is shorted, it will act as an open circuit as high and in the clear as possible. In any
across the center insulator. At the second har- event at least three quarters of the total wire
monic, the transmission line is one-half wave- length should be in the clear. Dimensions for
length long, and reflects the low impedance optimum operation on various amateur bands
of the shorted end across the center insulator. are given in addition in figure 17.
Thus the switching action is automatic as the
frequency of operation is changed. Such an The End-Fed The end- fed Zepp has long
installation is shown in figure 16. Zepp been a favorite for multi-band
operation. It is shown in fig-
The End-Fed The end- f e d Hertz antenna ure 18 along with recommended dimensions
Hertz shown in figure 17 is not as for operation on various amateur band groups.
effective a radiating system as
L-SEE BELOW
BANDS L1 L, TYPE OF
TUNING
1
SERIES I
3.5,7,1-t. A.NO Z& MC. L=1ae PARALLEL I
FROM
XMTR.
J'H BANDS
~-----------------L~------------------~
3.9 MC
PHONE
L1 L,
TYPE OF
TUNING
IF 300tl. HIANSMISSION LINE IS
USED FOR L2 THE IMPEDANCE AT
I~~ET~A~~~~~:~~:TNEDL~:F
1200 OHMS
r-17--
L= 90' FOR 10-40 METER OPERATION
...... PARALLEL
PARALLEL 1200 OHMS
' MC
PARALLEL
L~,~~"~'~'~'"~"~'----~~
14 MC
JJJJF "PARALLEL
SERIES I~
14 MC PARALLEL
160-80 METER OPERATION PARALLEL
~-----------------134' ----------------~
-
;ANTENNA TUNER
OR
I -
L Rl
!TRANSMITTER
"'MATCHBOX I Cf~:~AL
Figure 21
Figure 22
MUL Tl BAND ' ANTENNA USING FAN
FOLDED TOP DUAL-BAND ANTENNA
DIPOLE TO LIMIT IMPEDANCE EXCUR
SIONS ON HARMONIC FREQUENCIES
Q4.0
i 3.5
s "'~>
. 3.0
~-
z 2. 5
1i
z
c( 2.0
E.. 1.5 CUT -OFF FREQUENCY
Figure 25
VOLTAGE CURVES
CENTER
----------r~--+~~AN~TE~NN~AW~IR~E--~--
FEEDER
Figure 27
SINGLE-WIRE-FED ANTENNA FOR ALL
BAND OPERATION
An antenna of this type for 40-, 20- ancl 10-
meter operotjon woulcl have a racliator 67
feet long, with the feecler tappecl 11 feet off
center. The feecler can be 33, 66 or 99 feet
long. The same type of antenna for 80-, 40-,
20- ancl 10-meter operation woulcl have a
racliator 134 feet long, with the feecler tappecl
22 feet off center. The feecler can be either
66 or 132 feet long. This system shoulcl be
usee/ only with those coupling methocls which
provicle g oocl harmonic suppression.
0 +
MOVEABLE CLAMP
r-- \_ GAMMA ROD
RESONATING CONDENSER
"TWIN-LEAD" FLAT-TOP OR
CONDUCTORS SPACED 1" TO 12" .50-70 OHM COAXIAL FEED LINE
3000HMS
ANY LENGTH
Figure 30
TME GAMMA MATCH FOR CONNECTING
AN UNBALANCED COAXIAL LINE TO A
) ) D"'" ELEM"'
BALANCED DRIVEN ELEMENT
300-600
OHM FEEDERS
The open stub should be resonated in the half, to 300 ohms. If the resistance at the far
same manner as the shorted stub before at end is made half the original v a 1 u e of 600
taching the transmission 1 in e; however, in ohms or 300 ohms, the impedance at the near
this case, it is necessary to prune the stub end doubles the original value of 600 ohms,
to resonance, as there is no shorting bar. and becomes 1200 ohms. As one resistance
Sometimes it is handy to have a stub hang goes up, the other goes down proportionately.
from the radiator to a point that can be reached It will always be found that the character-
from the ground, in order to facilitate adjust istic surge impedance of the quarter-wave
ment of the position of the transmission-line matching line is the geometric mean between
attachment. For this reason, a quarter-wave the impedance at both ends. This relationship
stub is sometimes made three-quarters wave- is shown by the following formula:
length long at the higher frequencies, in order
to bring the bottom nearer the ground. Opera
tion with any odd number of quarter waves is
ZMs = V
ZA ZL
where
the same as for a quarter-wave stub.
Any number of half waves can be added to ZMs =Impedance of matching section.
either a quarter-wave stub or a half-wave stub ZA = Antenna resistance.
without disturbing the operation, though losses ZL = Line impedance.
and frequency sensitivity will be lowest if
the shortest usable stub is employed. See fig- Quarter-Wave The impedance inverting char-
ure 31. Matching acteristic of a quarter-wave
Transformers section of transmission line is
widely used by making such a
Stub Length Current-Fed Voltage-Fed section of line act as a quarter-wave trans
(Electrical) Radiator Radiator former. The Johnson Q feed system is a wide
!4-*-1 !4-etc. Open Shorted ly known application of the quarter-wave trans-
wavelengths Stub Stub former to the feeding of a dipole antenna and
l-2-1-1 l-2-2-etc. Shorted Open array consisting of two dipoles. However, the
wavelengths Stub Stub
quarter-wave transformer may be u s e d in a
wide number of applications wherever a trans-
former is required to match two impedances
whose geometric mean is somewhere between
Linear R.F A resonant quarter-wave line perhaps 25 and 750 ohms when transmission
Transformers has the unusual property of line sections can be used. Paralleled coaxial
acting much as a transformer. lines may be used to obtain the lowest im-
Let us take, for example, a section consisting pedance mentioned, and open-wire lines com
of no. 12 wire spaced 6 inches, which happens posed of small conductors spaced a moderate
to have a surge impedance of 600 ohms. Let distance may be used to obtain the higher im-
the far end be terminated with a pure resist pedance. A short list of impedances, which
ance, and let the near end be fed with radio- may be matched by quarter-wave sections of
frequency energy at the frequency for which transmission line having specified imped-
the line is a quarter wavelength long. If an ances, is given below.
impedance measuring set is used to measure
the impedance at the near end while the im-
pedance at the far end is varied, an interest- Load or Ant. ~ ~Feed-Line
ing relationship between the 600-ohm charac Impedance 300 480 600 Impedance
teristic surge impedance of this particular 20 77 98 110 Quarter
quarter-wave matching line, and the imped- _10 95 120 134 Wave
ance at the ends will be discovered. so 110 139 155 Transformer
When the impedance at the far end of the 75 150 190 212 Impedance
line is the same as the characteristic surge 100 173 220 245
impedance of the line itself (600 ohms), the
impedance measured at the near end of the
quarter-wave line will also be found to be
600 ohms. Johnson-Q The standard form of Johnson
Under these conditions, the line would not Feed System Q feed to a doublet is shown
have any standing waves on it, since it is in figure 32. An impedance
terminated in its characteristic impedance. match is obtained by utilizing a matching sec-
Now, let the resistance at the far end of the tion, the surge impedance of which is the geo-
line be doubled, or changed to 1200 ohms. metric mean between the transmission line
The impedance measured at the near end of surge impedance and the radiation resistance
the line will be found to have been cut in of the radiator. A sufficiently good match usu-
HANDBOOK Matching Systems 447
- - - - - L FEET=~ ----------1
Center to Impedance Impedance
Center in Ohms in Ohms 11
Spacing for Y:!" for Y4
in Inches Diameters Diameters
1 170 250
1.25 188 277
1.5 207 298
Za=~ 1.75 225 318
2 248 335
SL
ance of 123 ohms. Z 4 is one-quarter wavelength been concerned primarily with the electrical
long at the mid-frequency and has an imped- characteristics and considerations of anten-
ance of 224 ohms. Z 5 is the balanced line to nas. Some of the physical aspects and mech-
be matched (in this case 300 ohms) and may be anical problems incident to the actual erec-
any length. tion of antennas and arrays will be discussed
Other system parameters for different output in the following section.
and input impedances may be calculated from Up to 60 feet, there is little point in using
the following: mast-type antenna supports unless guy wires
Transformation ratio (r) for each section is: either must be eliminated or kept to a mini-
mum. While a little more difficult to erect, be-
r=~
cause of their floppy nature, fabricated wood
poles of tbe type to be described will be just
Z;, as satisfactory as more rigid types, provided
many guy wires are used.
Rather expensive when purchased through
Where N is the number of sections. In the the regular channels, 40- and 50-foot tele-
above case, phone poles sometimes can be obtained quite
reasonably. In the latter case, they are hard
to beat, inasmuch as they require no guying
r=~
zl
if set in the ground six feet (standard depth),
and the resultant pull in any lateral direction
is not in excess of a hundred pounds or so.
For heights of 80 to 100 feet, either three-
Impedance between sections, as Z 2 3 , is r sided or four-sided lattice type masts are most
times the preceding section. Z 2 3 = r X Z, and practicable. They can be made self-sup~ort
Z 3 4 = r X Z 2 3 ing, but a few guys will enable one to use a
smaller eros s section without danger from
Mid-frequency (m):
high winds. The torque exerted on the base
F, + F2 of a high self-supporting mast is terrific dur-
m=
2 ing a strong wind.
T r
"1 t,..
T 1
ltO' ... ~~TS
2.X4
Figure 34 1XO
if a gin pole about 20 feet high is installed than seems sufficient for the job, should be
about 30 or 40 feet to the rear of the direction used. The heavier wire is a little harder to
in whi-ch the antenna is to be raised. A line handle, but costs only a little more and takes
from a pulley on the top of the gin pole is then longer to rust through. Care should be taken
run to the top of the pole to be raised. The to make sure that no kinks exist when the pole
gin pole comes into play when the center of or tower is ready for erection, as the wire will
the mast has been raised 10 to 20 feet above be greatly weakened at such points if a kink
the ground and an additional elevated pull is is pulled tight, even if it is later straightened.
required to keep the top of the mast coming If "dead men" are used for the guy wire
up as the center is raised further above terminations, the wire or rod reaching from the
ground. dead men to the surface should be of non-rust
ing material, such as brass, or given a heavy
Using TV Masts Steel tubing masts of the coating of asphalt or other protective sub-
telescoping variety are wide stance to prevent destructive action by the
ly available at a moderate price for use in sup damp soil. Galvanized iron wire will last only
porting television antenna arrays. These masts a short time when buried in moist soil.
usually consist of several 10-foot lengths of Only strain-type (compression) insulators
electrical metal tubing (EMT) of sizes such should be used for guy wires. Regular ones
that the sections will telescope. The 30-foot might be sufficiently strong for the job, but it
and 40-foot lengths are well suited as masts is not worth taking chances, and egg-type
for supporting antennas and arrays of the strain halyard in s u 1 at or s are no more ex-
types used on the amateur bands. The masts pensive.
are constructed in such a manner that the bot Only a brass or bronze p u 11 e y should be
tom 10-foot length may be guyed permanently used for the halyard, as a high pole with a
before the other sections are raised. Then the rusted pulley is truly a sad affair. The bear
upper sections may be extended, beginning ing of the pulley should be given a few drops
with the top-mast section, until the mast is at of heavy machine oil before the pole or tower
full length (provided a strong wind is not blow is raised. The halyard itself should be of good
ing) following which all the guys may be an material, preferably water-proofed. Hemp rope
chored. It is important that there be no load of good quality is better than window sash
on the top of the mast when the "vertical" cord from several standpoints, and is less ex
raising method is to be employed. pensive. Soaking it thoroughly in engine oil of
medium viscosity, and then wiping it off with
a rag, will not only extend its life but minim-
Guy Wires Guy wires should never be pulled ize shrinkage in wet weather. Because of the
taut; a small amount of slack is difficulty of replacing a broken halyard it is
desirable. Galvanized wire, somewhat heavier a good idea to replace it periodically, without
450 Antennas and Antenna Matching THE R AD I 0
waiting for it to show excessive wear or de- so strong initially, redwood will deteriorate
terioration. much more slowly when buried than will the
It is an excellent idea to tie both ends of white woods, such as pine.
the halyard line together in the manner of a
flag-pole line. Then the antenna is tied onto Antenna Wire The antenna or array itself
the place where the two ends of the halyard presents no especial problem.
are joined. This procedure of making the hal- A few considerations should be borne in mind,
yard into a loop prevents losing the top end however. For instance, soft-drawn copper
of the halyard should the antenna break near should not be used, as even a short span will
the end, and it also prevents losing the hal- stretch several per cent after whipping around
yard completely should the end of the halyard in the wind a few weeks, thus affecting the
carelessly be allowed to go free and be pulled resonant frequency. Enameled-copper wire,
through the pulley at the top of the mast by as ordinarily available at radio stores, is us-
the antenna load. A somewhat longer piece ally soft drawn, but by tying one end to some
of line is required but the insurance is well object such as a telephone pole and the other
worth the cost of the additional length of rope. to the frame of an auto, a few husky tugs can
be given and the wire, after stretching a bit,
Trees as Often a tall tree can be called up- is equivalent to hard drawn.
Supports on to support one end of an anten- Where a long span of wire is required, or
na, but one should not attempt to where heavy insulators in the center of the
attach anything to the top, as the swaying of span result in considerable tension, copper-
the top of the tree during a heavy wind will clad steel wire is somewhat better than hard-
complicate matters. drawn copper. It is a bit more expensive,
If a tree is utilized for support, provision though the cost is far from prohibitive. The
should be made for keeping the antenna taut use of such wire, in conjunction with strain
without submitting it to the possibility of be insulators, is advisable, where the antenna
ing severed during a heavy wind. This can be would endanger persons or property should it
done by the simple expedient of using a pul- break.
ley and halyard, with weights attached to the For transmission I in e s and tuning stubs
lower end of the halyard to keep the antenna steel-core or hard-drawn wire will prove awk-
taut. Only enough weight to avoid excessive ward to handle, and soft-drawn copper should,
sag in the antenna should be tied to the hal- therefore, be used. If the I in e is Ion g, the
yard, as the continual swaying of the tree sub- strain can be eased by supporting it at several
mits the pulley and halyard to considerable points.
wear. More important from an electrical standpoint
Galvanized iron pipe, or steel-tube conduit, than the actual size of wire used is the sol-
is often used as a vertical radiator, and is dering of joints, especially at current loops
quite satisfactory for the purpose. However, in an antenna of low radiation resistance. In
when used for supporting antennas, it should fact, it is good practice to solder all joints,
be remembered that the grounded supporting thus insuring quiet operation when the anten-
poles will distort the field pattern of a verti- na is used for receiving.
cally polarized antenna unless spaced some
distance from the radiating portion. lnsulatlor A question that often arises is
that of insulation. It depends, of
Painting The life of a wood mast or pole can course, upon the r-f voltage at the point at
be increased several hundred per which the insulator is placed. The r-f voltage,
cent by protecting it from the elements with a in turn, depends upon the distance from a cur-
coat or two of paint. And, of course, the ap- rent node, and the radiation resistance of the
pearance is greatly enhanced. The wood should antenna. Radiators having low radiation re-
first be given a primer coat of flat white out- sistance have very high voltage at the voltage
side house paint, which can be thinned down loops; consequently, better than usual insula-
a bit to advantage with second-grade linseed tion is advisable at those points.
oil. For the second coat, which should not be Open-wire lines operated as non-resonant
applied until the first is thoroughly dry, alumi- lines have little voltage across them; hence
num paint is not only the best from a preserva- the most inexpensive ceramic types are suffi-
tive standpoint, but looks very well. This type ciently good electrically. With tuned lines, the
of paint, when purchased in quantities, is con- voltage depends upon the amplitude of the
siderably cheaper than might be gathered from standing waves. If they are very g r e at, the
the price asked for quarter-pint cans. voltage will reach high values at the voltage
Portions of posts or poles below the surface loops, and the best spacers available are none
of the soil can be protected from termites and too good. At the current loops the voltage is
moisture by painting with creosote. While not quite low, and almost anything will suffice.
HANDBOOK Antenna Coupling Systems 451
When in51ulators are subject to very high rf tween the output of the transmitter and the an-
voltages, they should be cleaned occasionally tenna system.
if in the vicinity of sea water or smoke. Salt Although TVI may be eliminated through in-
scum and soot are not readily dislodged by clusion of a filter between the output of a
rain, and when the coating becomes heavy shielded transmitter and the antenna system,
enough, the efficiency of the insulators is the fact that such a filter must be included in
greatly impaired. the link between transmitter and antenna makes
If a very pretentious installation is to be it necessary that the transmitter-loading prob-
made, it is wise to check up on both under- lem be re-evaluated in terms of the necessity
writer's rules and local ordinances which for inclusion of such a filter.
might be applicable. If you live anywhere near Harmonic-attenuating filters must be oper-
an airport, and are contemplating a tall pole, ated at an impedance level which is close to
it is best to investigate possible regulations their design value; therefore they must operate
and ordinances pertaining to towers in the dis- into a resistive termination substantially equal
trict, before starting construction. to the characteristic impedance of the filter.
If such filters are operated into an impedance
which is not resistive and approximately equal
to their characteristic impedance: (1) the ca-
pacitors used in the filter sections will be
Coup Iing to the subjected to high peak voltages and may be
22-10 damaged, (2) the harmonic-attenuating proper-
Antenna System ties of the filter will be decreased, and (3) the
impedance at the input end of the filter will
When coupling an antenna feed system to a be different from that seen by the filter at the
transmitter the most important considerations load end (except in the case of the half-wave
are as follows: ( 1) means should be provided type of filter). It is therefore important that
for varying the load on the amplifier; (2) the the filter be included in the transmitter-to-an-
two tubes in a push-pull amplifier should be tenna circuit at a point where the impedance
equally loaded; (3) the load presented to the is close to the nominal value of the filter, and
final amplifier should be resistive (non-reac- at a point where this impedance is likely to
tive) in character; and (4) means should be remain fairly constant with variations in fre-
provided to reduce harmonic coupling between quency.
the final amplifier plate tank circuit and the
antenna or antenna transmission line to an ex- Block Diagrams of There are two basic
tremely low value. Transmitter-to-Antenna arrangements w h i c h
Coupling Systems include all the provi-
The Transmitter- The problem of coupling the sions required in the
Loading Problem power output of a high-fre- transmitter-to-antenna coupling system, and
quency or v-h-f transmitter which permit the harmonic-attenuating filter to
to the radiating portion of the antenna system be placed at a position in the coupling system
has been materially complicated by the virtual where it can be operated at an impedance
necessity for eliminating interference to TV re- level close to its nominal value. These ar-
ception. However, the TVI-elimination portion rangements are illustrated in block-diagram
of the problem may always be accomplished form in figures 35 and 36.
by adequate shielding of the transmitter, by The arrangement of figure 35 is recommend-
filtering of the control and power leads which ed for use with a single-band antenna system,
enter the transmitter enclosure, and by the in- such as a dipole or a rotatable array, wherein
clusion of a harmonic-attenuating filter be- an impedance matching system is included
Figure 35
ANTENNA COUPLING SYSTEM
The harmonic suppressing antenna coupling system illustratecl above is lor use when the anten-
na transmission I ine has a low stanJing-wave ratio, anJ when the characteristic impeclance of
the antenna transmission line is the same as the nominal impeclonce ol the low-pass harmonic-
attenuating filter.
452 Antennas and Antenna Matching THE R AD I 0
Figure 36
ANTENNA COUPLING SYSTEM
The antenna coupling system illustrated above is for use when the antenna transmis~ion line
does not have the same characteristic impedance as the TV/ filter, and when the stanclmgwave
ratio on the antenna transmission line may or may not he low.
within or adjacent to the antenna. The feed coupler, if used. In any event the impedance
line coming down from the antenna system at the input term in a 1 of the harmonic filter
should have a characteristic impedance equal should be very close to the nominal impedance
to the nominal impedance of the harmonic fil- of the filter. Then the Coupling Adjustment
ter, and the impedance matching at the anten- provides means for transforming this imped-
na should be such that the standing-wave ratio ance value to the correct operating value of
on the antenna feed line is less than 2 to 1 load impedance which should be presented to
over the range of frequency to be fed to the the final amplifier stage.
antenna. Such an arrangement may be used There are two common ways for accomplish-
with open-wire line, ribbon or tubular line, or ing the antenna coupling adjustment, as illus-
with coaxial cable. The use of coaxial cable trated in figures 37 and 38. Figure 37 shows
is to be recommended, but in any event the the variable-link arrangement most commonly
impedance of the antenna transmission line used in home-constructed equipment, while the
should be the same as the nominal impedance pi-netowrk coup 1 in g arrangement commonly
of the harmonic filter. The arrangement of fig- used in commercial equipment is illustrated in
ure 35 is more or less standard for commercial- figure 38. Either method may be used, and each
ly manufactured equipment for amateur and has its advantages.
commercial use in the h-f and v-h-f range.
The arrangement of figure 36 merely adds Variable-Link The variable-link method il-
an antenna coupler between the output of the Coupl ing lustrated in figure 3 7 has the
harmonic attenuating filter and the antenna advantage that standard man-
transmission line. The antenna coupler will ufactured components may be used with no
have some harmonic-attenuating action, but its changes. However, for greatest bandwidth of
main function is to transform the impedance operation of the coupling circuit, the reactance
at the station end of the antenna transmission of the link coil, L, and the reactance of the
line to the nominal value of the harmonic filter. link tuning capacitor, C, should both be be-
Hence the arrangement of figure 36 is more tween 3 and 4 times the nominal load imped-
general than the figure 35 system, since the ance of the harmonic filter. This is to say that
inclusion of the antenna coupler allows the the inductive reactance Qf the coupling link L
system to feed an antenna transmission line should be tuned out or resonated by capacitor
of any reasonable impedance value, and also C, and the operating Q of the L-C link circuit
without regard to the standing-wave ratio should be between 3 and 4. If the link coil is
which might exist on the antenna transmission not variable with respect to the tank coil of
line. Antenna couplers are discussed in a fol- the final amplifier, capacitor C may be used
lowing section. as a loading control; however, this system is
not recommended since its use will require
adjustment of C whenever a frequency change
Output Coup I ing It will be noticed by refer- is made at the transmitter. If L and C are made
Adjustment ence to both figure 35 and resonant at the center of a band, with a link
figure 36 that a box labeled circuit Q of 3 to 4, and coupling adjustment is
Coupling Adjustment is included in the block made by physical adjustment of L with respect
diagram. Such an element is necessary in the to the final amplifier tank coil, it usually will
complete system to afford an adjustment in the be possible to operate over an entire amateur
value of load impedance presented to the tubes band without change in the coupling system.
in the final amplifier stage of the transmitter. Capacitor C normally may have a low voltage
The impedance at the input terminal of the rating, even with a high power transmitter, due
harmonic filter is established by the antenna, to the low Q and low impedance of the coupling
through its matching system and the antenna circuit.
HANDBOOK Pi-Network Coupling Systems 453
COAX. TO
RECEIVER
TO ANTENNA
FEEDUNE OR
TO ANTENNA
COUPLER
Figure 37
TUNED-LINK OUTPUT CIRCUIT
Capacitor C should be acljustecl so as to tune out the lncluctlve reactance of the coupling link,
L. Loading of the ompllfler then Is var/ecl by physically varying the coupling between the plate
tank of the final amp/ lfler ancl the antenna coup/ ing I Ink,
COAX TO
RECEIVER
TO FEED LINE
OR ANTENNA
COUPLER
Figure 38
P~NETWORK ANTENNA COUPLER
The design of,plnetwork output circuits is cliscussecl in Chapter Thirteen, The aclclitiona/ output
end shunting capacitors selected by switch S are for use on the fower frequency ronges. /ncluc
tor L may be selectee/ by a tap switch, it may be continuously variable, or plug-in Inductors
may be usee/.
454 Antennas and Antenna Matching THE RA0 I 0
l PARALLEL-WIRE
LINE TO ANTENNA
SINGLE-WIRE
ZEPP HERTZ ANTENNA
FEEDERS OR FEEDER
51 N!;L.E-WIRE
NTENNA OR COAX. LINE
FEEDL.INE TO ANTENNA
Figure 39
ALTERNATIVE ANTENNA-COUPLER CIRCUITS
Plug-in coils, one or two variable capacitors of the split-stator variety, one/ a system of
switches or plugs one/ jocks may be usee/ in the antenna coupler to accomrlish the feecling of
clifferent types of antennas one/ antenna transmission lines from the coax/a input I ine from the
transmitter or from the antenna changeover relay. Link L shou/c/ be resonotec/ with capacitor
C at the operating frequency of the transmitter so that the harmonic filter will operate Into a
resistive loacl impeclance of the correct nom/no/ value.
ended output stage down to the 50-ohm imped- of capacitance is required at C 2 , assuming that
ance of the usual harmonic filter and its sub- the values of C 1 and L are correct.
sequent load.
In a pi network of this type the harmonic
attenuation of the section will be adequate 22-11 Antenna Couplers
when the correct value of C, and L are being
used and when the r e sonant dip in C 1 is As stated in the previous section, an anten-
sharp. If the dip in C 1 is broad, or if the plate na coupler is not required when the impedance
current persists in being too high with C 2 at of the antenna transmission line is the same
maximum setting, it means that a greater value as the nominal impedance of the harmonic fil-
HANDBOOK Antenna Couplers 455
TO ~INGLE WIRE
PARALLEL-WIRE TO
ANTENNA
4000 M, ANTENNA RECEIVER
r------------ ~2.1l
COAXIAL
1
~~~~ ::jF===:=J
I XMTR
""t:.....+I
115 V. TO RELAY
COIL I
I Figure 42
I
______ j
ANTENNA TUNER AND SWR
TO
TRANSMITTER THROUGH
INDICATOR FOR RANDOM
HARMONIC FILTER LENGTH HERTZ ANTENNA
Figure 41
ALTERNATIVE COAXIAL ANTENNA
COUPLER
rise to several thousand ohms (near half-wave
This circuit is recommenclecl not only as be- resonance) and the reactive component of the
Ing most desirable when coaxial lines with
low s. w. r. are being userl to feerl antenna load can rapidly change from positive to nega
systems such as rotatable beams, but when tive values, or vice-versa.
It also Is cles/recl to feecl through open-wire It is possible to match a 52ohm trans
line to some sort of multi-bancl antenna for
the lower frequency ranges. The tunecl clr mission line to such an antenna at almost any
cult of the antenna coupler is operative only frequency between 1.8 me and 30 me with the
when using the open-wire feerl, ancl then It use of a simple tuner of the type shown in
Is In operation both for transmit anrl receive.
figure 42. A vatiable series inductor L, and a
variable shunt capacitor CI permit circuit
resonance and impedance transformation to
in such an application will be found to be ade be established for most antenna lengths.
quate, since hatmonic attenuation has been Switch SI permits the selection of series
accomplished ahead of the antenna coupler. capacitor C for those instances when the
However, the circuit will be easier to tune; single wire antenna exhibits large values of
although it will not have as great a bandwidth, positive reactance.
if the operating Q is made higher. To provide indication for the tuning of the
An alternative arrangement shown in figure network, a radio frequency bridge (SWR meter)
41 utilizes the antenna coupling tank circuit is included to indicate the degree of mis
only when feeding the coaxial output of the match (standing wave ratio) existing at the
transmitter to the open-wire feed line (or simi- input to the tuner. All adjustments to the
lat multi-band antenna) of the 40- 80 meter an- tuner are made with the purpose of reaching
tenna. The coaxial lines to the 10-meter beam unity standing wave ratio on the coaxial feed
and to the 20-meter beam would be fed directly system between the tuner and the transmitter.
from the output of the coaxial antenna change
over relay through switch S. A Practical A simple antenna tuner for
Antenna Tuner use with transmitters of
250 watts power or less
22-12 A Single-Wire Antenna Tuner is shown in figures 43 through 46. A SWR
bridge circuit is used to indicate tuner re
One of the simplest and least expensive sonance. The resistive arm of the bridge con
antennas for transmission and reception is sists of ten 10ohm, lwatt carbon resistors
the single wire, end-fed Hertz antenna. When connected in parallel to form a 1ohm resistor
used over a wide range of frequencies, this (R1). The other pair of bridge arms are ca
type of antenna exhibits a very great range of paCIUve rather than resistive. The bridge
input impedance. At the low frequency end of detector is a simple rf voltmeter employing a
the spectrum such an antenna may present a 1N56 crystal diode and a 01 d.c. milliammeter.
resistive load of less than one ohm to the A sensitivity control is incorporated to prevent
transmitter, combined with a large positive or overloading the meter when power is first
negative value of reactance. As the frequency applied to the tuner. Final adjustments are
of operation is raised, the resistive load may made with the sensitivity control at its maxi
HANDBOOK Single-wire Antenna Tuner 457
52 n INPUT
FROM XMTR L1
L1- ;~5~!-'~~J<;*(~i:~D~~"j
Cl-JOHNSON 35020
Figure 43 C2-CENTRALA8 TYPE 822
TAP AT 15 T., 2.7 T.,
ANTENNA TUNER IS HOUSED FROM POINT A J 1-TYPE S0-239 RECEPTACLE
mum (clockwise) pos1t1on. The bridge is Bridge The SWR bridge must be
balanced when the input impedance of the Calibration calibrated for 52 ohm sei:
tuner is 52 ohms resistive. This is the con- vice. This can be done by
dition for maximum energy transfer between temporarily disconnecting the lead between the
transmission line and antenna. The meter is bridge and the antenna tuner and connecting a
graduated in arbitrary units, since actual SWR 2-watt, 52 ohm carbon resistor to the junction
value is not required. of Rl and the negative terminal of the 1N56
diode. The opposite lead of the carbon resistor
is grounded to the chassis of the bridge. A
small amount of r-f energy is fed to the input
Tuner Major parts placement in of the bridge until a reading is obtained on
Con stru cti on the tuner is shown in the r-f voltmeter. The 25 mmfd bridge balancing
figures 43 and 45. Tapped capacitor C2 (see figure 46) is then adjusted
coil Ll is mounted upon ~-inch ceramic in- with a fibre-blade screwdriver until a zero
sulators, and all major components are mounted reading is obtained on the meter. The sensi-
above deck with the exception of the SWR tivity control is advanced as the meter null
bridge (figure 46). The components of the grows, in order to obtain the exact point of
bridge are placed below deck, adjacent to bridge balance. When this point is found, the
the coaxial input plug mounted on the rear carbon resistor should be removed and the
apron of the chassis. The ten 10-ohm resistors bridge attached to the antenna tuner. The
are soldered to two l-inch rings made of copper bridge capacitor is sealed with a drop of nail
wire as shown in the photograph. The bridge polish to prevent misadjustment.
capacitors are attached to this assembly with
extremely short leads. The 1N56 crystal mounts
at right angles to the resistors to insure mini- Tuner All tuning adjustments are
mum amount of capacitive coupling between the Adjustments made to obtain proper
resistors and the detector. The output lead transmitter loading with a
from the bridge passes through a ceramic feed- balanced (zero meter reading) bridge condition.
thru insulator to the top side of the chassis. The tuner is connected to the transmitter
Connection to the antenna is made by means through a random length of 52 ohm coaxial
of a large feedthru insulator mounted on the line, and the single wire antenna is attached
back of the tuner cabinet. This insulator is to the output terminal of the tuner. Transmitter
not visible in the photographs. loading controls are set to approximate a 52
Figure 45
REAR VIEW OF
TUNER SHOWING
PLACEMENT OF
MAJOR COMPON-
ENTS.
Figure 46
CLOSE-UP OF SWR BRIDGE
Simple SWR briclge is mountecl
below the chassis of the tuner.
Carbon resistors are mounted to
two copper rings to form low
inductance one-ohm resistor.
Bridge capacitors lorm triangular
configuration for lowest I eocl
lncluctance. Balancing capacitor
C2 is at lower right.
CHAPTER TWENTY-THREE
It is becoming of increasing importance in justed. They all are dipoles, and the feeder
most types of radio communication to be cap- system, if it does not radiate in itself, will
able of concentrating the radiated signal from have no effect on the radiation pattern.
the transmitter in a certain desired direction
and to be able to discriminate at the receiver
against reception from directions other than
the desired one. Such capabilities involve the 23-1 Directive Antennas
use of directive antenna arrays.
Few simple antennas, except the single ver- When a multiplicity of radiating elements is
tical element, radiate energy equally well in located and phased so as to reinforce the radi-
all azimuth (horizontal or compass) directions. ation in certain desired directions and to neu-
All horizontal antennas, except those specifi- tralize radiation in other directions, a direc-
cally designed to give an omnidirectional azi- tive antenna array is formed.
muth radiation pattern such as the turnstile, The function of a directive antenna when
have some directive properties. These proper- used for transmitting is to give an increase in
ties depend upon the length of the antenna in signal strength in some direction at the ex-
wavelengths, the height above ground, and the pense of radiation in other directions. For re-
slope of the radiator. ception, one might find useful an antenna giv-
The various forms of the half-wave horizon- ing little or no gain in the direction from which
tal antenna produce maximum radiation at right it is desired to receive signals if the antenna
angles to the wire, but the directional effect is able to discriminate against interfering sig-
is not great. Nearby objects also minimize the nals and static arriving from other directions.
directivity of a dipole radiator, so that it hard- A good directive transmitting antenna, however,
ly seems worth while to go to the trouble to can also be used to good advantage for recep-
rotate a simple half-wave dipole in an attempt tion.
to improve transmission and reception in any If radiation can be c o n f i n e d to a narrow
direction. beam, the signal intensity can be increased a
The half-wave doublet, folded dipole, zepp, great many times in the desired direction of
single-wire-fed, matched impedance, and John- transmission. This is equivalent to increasing
son Q antennas all have practically the same the power output of the transmitter. On the
radiation pattern when properly built and ad- higher frequencies, it is more economical to
459
460 High Frequency Directive Antennas THE R AD I 0
;--...~--.
~ DOUBLE HOP
. ~" l
~
r-- ~
f--- ~-- 'll
~~
.
.
SINGLE HOP
liJUI
30 50 100 300 500
"" T<IJ
1000 3000 10000
GREAT CIRCLE DISTANCE IN MILES
Figure I
OPTIMUM ANGLE OF RADIATION
WITH RESPECT TO DISTANCES
Shown above is a plot of the optimum angle
of radiation for one-hop ancl two-hop com-
munication. An operating frequency close to
the optimum working frequency for the com- Figure 2
munication distance is assumed.
FREE-SPACE FIELD PATTERNS OF
LONG-WIRE ANTENNAS
The presence of the earth distorts the fielcl
pattern in such a manner that the azimuth
pattern becomes a function of the elevation
use a directive antenna than to increase trans- angle.
mitter power, if more than a few watts of power
is being used.
Directive antennas for the high-frequency
range have been designed and used commer-
cially with gains as high as 23 db over a sim- higher than this optimum angle oftentimes is
ple dipole radiator. Gains as high as 35 db are not nearly so effective.
common in direct-ray microwave communication For this reason, the horizontal directivity
and radar systems. A gain of 23 db represents pattern as measured on the ground is of no im-
a power gain of 200 times and a gain of 35 db port when dealing with frequencies and dis-
represents a power gain of almost 3500 times. tances dependent upon sky-wave propagation.
However, an antenna with a gain of only 15 to It is the horizontal directivity (or gain or dis-
20 db is so sharp in its radiation pattern that crimination) measured at the most useful ver-
it is usable to full advantage only for point- tical angles of r ad i at ion that is of conse-
to-point work. quence. The horizontal radiation pattern; as
The increase in radiated power in the de- measured on the ground, is considerably differ
sired direction is obtained at the expense of ent from the pattern obtained at a vertical
radiation in the undesired directions. Power angle of 15, and still more different from a
gains of 3 to 12 db seem to be most practi- pattern obtained at a vertical angle of 30.
cable for amateur communication, since the In general, the energy which is radiated at
width of a beam with this order of power gain angles higher than approximately 30 above
is wide enough to sweep a fairly large area. the earth is effective at any frequency only for
Gains of 3 to 12 db represent effective trans local work.
mitter power increases from 2 to 16 times. For operation at frequencies in the vicinity
of 14 Me., the most effective angle of radiation
Horizontal Pattern There is a certain optimum is usually about 15 above the horizon, from
vs. Vertical Angle vertical angle of radiation any kind of antenna. The most effective angles
for sky-wave communica- for 10-meter operation are those in the vicinity
tion, this angle being dependent upon distance, of 10. Figure 1 is a chart giving the optimum
frequency, time of day, etc. Energy radiated at vertical angle of radiation for sky-wave propa-
an angle much lower than this optimum angle gation in terms of the great-circle distance be-
is largely lost, while radiation at angles much tween the transmitting and receiving antennas.
HANDBOOK Long Wire Radiators 461
... LONG STRAIGHT WIRE ANTENNAS v
1/)
:X:
/
t; 12 lL
z ~
IU
.J
~ 10
lL_
~ ~
/'
~
:X:
v
Figure 3
t; 1/
DIRECTIVE GAIN OF z
IU
.J
v
LONG-WIRE ANTENNAS
IU
a: .. ~
i ~
2 L
...... ~""
........
0
12.3"' 5 e
DB POWER RATIO Of MAIN LOBE TO A DIPOLE
1 a 10
Types of There is an enormous vari- The horizontal radiation pattern of such an-
Directive Arrays ety of directive antenna ar- tennas depends upon the vertical angle of radi-
rays that can give a substan- ation being considered. If the wire is more
tial power gain in the de sired direction of trans- than 4 wavelengths long, the maximum radia-
mission or reception. However, some are more tion at vertical angles of 15 to 20 (useful
effective than others requiring the same space. for dx) is in line with the wire, being slightly
In general it may be stated that long-wire an- greater a few degrees either side of the wire
tennas of various types, such as the single than directly off the ends. The directivity of
long wire, the V beam, and the rhombic, are the main lobes of radiation is not particularly
less effective for a given space than arrays sharp, and the minor lobes fill in between the
composed of resonant elements, but the long- main lobes to permit working stations in near-
wire arrays h ave the significant advantage ly all directions, though the power radiated
that they may be used over a relatively large
broadside to the radiator will not be great if
frequency range while resonant arrays are usa-
the radiator is more than a few wavelengths
ble only over a quite narrow frequency band.
long. The directive gain of long-wire antennas,
in terms of the wire length in wavelengths is
given in figure 3.
FREQUENCY
IN MC. 1.>- 1t>- 2>. 2t>- 3>. Jt>- 4>. 4-k->-
2.9 33 50 87 84 101 118 135 152.
2.8 34 52. 89 87 104 12.2 140 157
2.1.4 45 88 91 112 1 14 1/2 138 f/2. teo 1/2. 185 1/2. 209 1/2
21.2 45 1/4 88 1/4 91 3/4 114 3/4 138 3,A. 11503/4 185 3/4 209 3/4
2.1.0 45 112 88 112 92. 115 137 181 186 2.10
...
2.0
1.8
480
504
532
725
783
605
972.
1020
1080
12.30
1280
1475
One of the most practical methods of feed- form of a V, it is possible to make two of the
ing a long-wire antenna is to bring one end of maximum lobes of one leg shoot in the same
it into the radio room for direct connection to direction as two of the maximum lobes of the
a tuned antenna circuit which is link-coupled other leg of the V. The resulting antenna is
through a harmonic-attenuating filter to the bidirectional (two opposite directions) for the
transmitter. The antenna can be tuned effec main lobes of radiation. Each side of the V
tively to resonance for operation on any hat can be made any odd or even number of quarter
monic by means of the tuned circuit which is wavelengths, depending on the method of feed-
connected to the end of the antenna. A ground ing the apex of the V. The complete system
is sometimes connected to the center of the must be a multiple of half waves. If each leg
tuned coil. is an even number of quarter waves long, the
If desired, the antenna can be opened and antenna must be voltage-fed at the apex; if an
current-fed at a point of maximum current bt odd number of quarter waves long, current feed
means of low-impedance ribbon line, or by a must be used.
quarter-wave matching section and open line.
By choosing the proper apex angle, figure
4 and figure 5, the lobes of radiation from the
23-3 The V Antenna
two long-wire antennas aid each other to form
a bidirectional beam. Each wire by itself
If two long-wire antennas are built in the would have a radiation pattern similar to that
18 0
14 0
Figure 4
12.0
INCLUDED ANGLE FOR A
., \ "V" BEAM
~100
..,
a:
~. 0
f\ Showing the incluclecJ angle be-
tween the legs of a V beam for
z ',~ various leg lengths. For opt/
mum alignment of the racliotion
--
o/) 0
~
40 r-- lobe at the c:orrec:t vertic:al
angle with leg lengths less than
2.0
- three wavelengths, the optimum
inc:luclecJ angle is shown by the
clashecJ c:urve.
0
0 2 .. to 12
LENGTH IN "l" WAVELENGTHS
HANDBOOK The V Antenna 463
13
I
I&J
>
<
~
IL
.J
<
.
10
a
J:
a: 7
I&J
f;
Cl)
"V" BEAM GAIN
.J
I&J
Ill
E "'
0 3
z
2
Figure 5 z
TYPICAL "V" BEAM ANTENNA ~ I
0
0 2345871 10 11 12
LENGTH OF SIDE "L
Figure 6
for a long wire. The reaction of one upon the DIRECTIVE GAIN OF A "V" BEAM
other removes two of the four main lobes, and This curve shows the approximate directive
increases the other two in such a way as to gain of a V beam with respect to a half-wave
form two lobes of still greater magnitude. antenna locotecl the some distance above
ground, In terms of the sicle length L.
The correct wire lengths and the degree of
o
the angle are listed in the V-Antenna Design
Table for various frequencies in the 10-, 20-
and 40-meter amateur bands. Apex angles for
all side lengths are given in figure 4. The rather than 180, as determined by the ground
gain of a "V" beam in terms of the side length pattern alone.
when optimum apex angle is used is given in If very long wires are used in the V, the
figure 6. angle between the wires is almost unchanged
The legs of a very long V antenna are usual- when the length of the wires in wavelengths
ly so arranged that the included angle is twice is altered. However, an error of a few degrees
the angle of the major lobe from a single wire causes a much larger loss in directivity arid
if used alone. This arrangement concentrates gain in the case of the longer V than in the
the radiation of each wire along the bisector shorter one.
of the angle, and p e r mit s part of the other The vertical an g 1 e at w hi c h the wave is
lobes to cancel each other. best transmitted or received from a horizontal
With legs shorter than 3 wavelengths, the V antenna depends largely upon the included
best directivity and gain are obtained with a angle. The sides of the V antenna should be
somewhat smaller angle than that determined at least a half wavelength above ground; com
by the lobes. Optimum directivity for a one- mercial practice dictates a height of approxi-
wave V is obtained when the an g 1 e is 90 mately a full wavelength above ground.
...'',_,
2.0
23-4 The Rhombic: H:: HEIGHT IN WAVELENGTHS = S~'N a
Antenna ''
4
'-'
1.4
'-'
::I:1.2
The terminated rhombic or diamond is prob- '-'
1.0
ably the most effective directional antenna 0.9
o.
that is practical for amateur communication. 0.,
o.
This antenna is non-resonant, with the result 0.,
that it can be used on three amateur bands, 64 12J::TILTANGU:
1!16 SIN 0:: COS ill.
such as 10, 20, and 40 meters. When the an- 6&- 0= 90'" .0.
!\!111~~~~~~i~:~4_~~4-~T~
increased, and the antenna can be used on
several bands without changes. The terminat-
ing resistance should be capable of dissipat-
ing one-third the power output of the trans-
mitter, and should have very little reactance.
For medium or low power transmitters, the
non-inductive plaque resistors will serve as
a satisfactory termination. Several manufactur- 1
e tz te ze 2.&"'
ers offer special resistors suitable for termi- WAVE ANGLE L::.
Figure 8
TYPICAL RHOMBIC
ANTENNA DESIGN
The antenna system illus-
tratecl above may be usee/
over the frequency range from
7 to 29 Me. without change.
The directivity of the system SPACIN~ BETWEEN SlOES S,= 214 FEET TERMINATING LINE
may be reversed by the sys TOTAL LEN~TH =-rtt2 FEET OF 250' OF N 2.&
NICHROME SPACED 6"
tem c/iscussec/ in the text. AND &00-0HM 16 -WATT
CARBON RESISTOR AT
END. 8 2-WATT 100-0HM
RESISTORS IN SERIES
A considerable amount of directivity is lost bands. This antenna will give about 11 db
when the terminating resistor is left off the gain in the 14.0-Mc. band. The approximate
end and the system is operated as a resonant gain of a rhombic antenna over a dipole, both
antenna. If it is desired to reverse the direc above normal soil, is given in figure 9.
tion of the antenna it is much better practice
to run transmission lines to both ends of the
antenna, and then run the terminating line to
the operating position. Then with the aid of 23-5 Stacked-Dipole
two dpdt switches it will be possible to con
nect either feeder to the antenna changeover Arrays
switch and the other feeder to the terminating
line, thus rever sing the direction of the array The characteristics of a half-wave dipole
and maintaining the same termination for already have been described. When another
either direction of operation. dipole is placed in the vicinity and excited
Figure 7 gives curves for optimum-design either directly or parasitically, the resultant
rhombic antennas by both the maximum-out radiation pattern will depend upon the spacing
put method and the alignment method. The and phase differential, as well as the relative
alignment method is about 1.5 db down from magnitude of the currents. With spacings less
the maximum output method but requires only than 0.65 wavelength, the radiation is mainly
about 0.74 as much leg length. The height and broadside to the two wires (bidirectional) when
tilt angle is the same in either case. Figure there is no phase difference, and through the
8 gives construction data for a recommended wires (end fire) when the wires are 180 out
rhombic antenna for the 7.0 through 29.7 Me. of phase. With phase differences between 0
f7
1--:::!-"
"''"
.J
~"
~ r-
Ci , .. I"""
~ 13 L
Figure 9 I-'
~12
RHOMBIC ANTENNA GAIN '/
Showing the theoretical gain of a rhombic
IL1 f
~ 10
v
antenna, in terms of the side length, over a J: L
half-wave antenna mounted at the same a:
IU 0
height above the same type of soil. > I
.
0 7
Ill
0
:;; I
z 4 IL
~ 3
o 1 2 3 ,. s e 1 a v to tt 12 t3 14 1s te 11 11 tt zo
.Q." =LENGTH OF EACH LEG OF RHOMBIC IN WAVELENGTH-"
466 High Frequency Directive Antennas THE RA0 I 0
I-s ---1 L1 Lz Lz L1
... ...
PLANE OF WIRES
END VIEW
Figure 11
S=i- ~-.....----s=+ THE FRANKLIN OR COLINEAR
1ao OUT OF PHASE \ I IN PHASE
ANTENNA ARRAY
(FLAT-TOP BEAM, ETC.) , _ ... / {LAZY H. STERBA CURTAIN)
An antenna of this type, regardless of the
number of elements, attains all of its clirec-
Figure 10 tlvlty through sharpening of the horizontal
or azimuth radiation pattern; no vertical di-
RADIATION PATTERNS OF A PAIR OF rectivity Is praviclecl, Hence a long antenna
DIPOLES OPERATING WITH IN-PHASE of this type has on extremely sl-.arp azimuth
EXCITATION, AND WITH EXCITATION paHern, but no vertical directivity.
180 OUT OF PHASE
If the clipoles are orientecl horizontally most
of the directivity will be In the vertical
plane; if they are orientecl vertically most
of the directivity will be in the horizontal
plane. In the three foregoing examples, most of the
directivity provided is in a plane at a right
angle to the wires, though when out of phase,
the directivity is in a line through the wires,
and when in phase, the directivity is broadside
and 180 (45, 90, and 135 for instance), to them. Thus, if the wires are oriented verti-
the pattern is unsymmetrical, the radiation be cally, mostly horizontal directivity will be
ing greater in one direction than in the oppo- provided. If the wires are oriented horizontally,
site direction. most of the directivity obtained will be verti
With spacings of more than 0.8 wavelength, cal directivity.
more than two main lobes appear for all phas- . To increase the sharpness of the directivity
ing combinations; hence, such spacings are m all planes that include one of the wires,
seldom used. additional identical elements are added in the
line of the wires, and fed so as to be in phase.
In-Phase With the dipoles driven so as to The familiar H array is one array utilizing
Spacing be in phase, the most effective both types of directivity in the manner pre-
spacing is between 0. 5 and 0. 7 scribed. The two-section Kraus flat-top beam
wavelength. The latter provides greater gain, is another.
but minor lobes are present which do not ap- These two antennas in their various forms
pear at 0.5-wavelength spacing. The radiation are directional in a horizontal plane in addi-
is broadside to the plane of the wires, and the tion to being low-angle radiators, and are per-
gain is slightly greater than can be obtained haps the most practicable of the bidirectional
from two dipoles out of phase. The gain falls stacked-dipole arrays for amateur use. More
off rapidly for spacings less than 0.375 wave- phased elements can be used to provide great-
length, and there is little point in using spac- er directivity in planes including one of the
ing of 0. 25 wavelength or less with in-phase radiating elements. The H then becomes a
dipoles, except where it is desirable to in- Sterbacurtain array.
crease the radiation resistance. (See Multi- For unidirectional work the most practicable
Wire Doublet.) stacked-dipole arrays for amateur-band use
are parasitically-excited systems using rela-
Out of Phase When the dipoles are fed 180 tively close spacing between the reflectors
Spacing out of phase, the directivity is and the directors. Antennas of this type are
through the plane of the wires, described in detail in a later chapter. The
and is greatest with close spacing, though next most practicable unidirectional array is
there is but l i ttl e difference in the pattern an H or a Sterba curtain with a similar system
after the spacing is made less than 0.125 placed approximately one-quarter wave behind.
wavelength. The radiation resistance becomes The use of a reflector system in conjunction
so low for spacings of less than 0.1 wave- with any type of stacked-dipole broadside ar-
length that such spacings are not practicable. ray will increase the gain by 3 db.
HANDBOOK Colinear Arrays 467
_ __j
lo------nk---~ 1------
800
COLI NEAR ANTENNA DESIGN CHART F(MC) - - - - - - - ,
FREQUENCY
IN MC.
L1 L2. L3
nfff.fu
A B
2.&.S 16'8N 17' 8' eu
2.1.2. 2.2.'8" 23'3" 11'8" A- B= 150ft FEED POINT GAl N APPRO X. 3 DB
GAIN APPRO X. 3 DB
Figure 13
TWO COLINEAR HALF-WAVE ANTENNAS Figure 14
IN PHASE PRODUCE A 3 DB GAIN WHEN PRE-CUT LINEAR ARRAY FOR 40-METER
SEPARATED ONE-HALF WAVELENGTH OPERATION
468 High Frequency Directive Antennas THE R AD I 0
L> L3
tsTUB
GAl N APPRO X. 6 DB GAIN APPROX. 8 DB
Figure 16
THE STERBA CURTAIN ARRAY
Approximate directive gains along with alter-
native feed methods are shown.
GAIN APPROX. 6 DB
sent points of maximum current. All arrows as a Sterba curtain or a "Lazy H." Parasitic
should point in the same direction in each por- elements may be used as reflectors or direc-
tion of the radiating sections of an antenna in tors, but parasitic elements have the disadvan-
order to provide a field in phase for broadside tage that their operation is selective with re-
radiation. This condition is satisfied for the spect to relatively small changes in frequency.
arrays illustrated in figure 16. Figures 16A Nevertheless, parasitic reflectors for such ar-
and 16C show simple methods of feeding rays are quite widely used.
a short Sterba curtain, while an alternative
method of feed is shown in the higher gain an- The X-Array In section 23-5 it was shGwn
tenna of figure 16B. how two dipoles may be arranged
In the case of each of the arrays of figure in phase to provide a power gain of (some) 3
16, and also the "Lazy H" of figure 15, the db. If two such pairs of dipoles are stacked
array may be made unidirectional and the gain
increased by 3 db if an exactly similar array
is constructed and p 1 aced approximately ~
wave behind the driven array. A screen or mesh LAZY-H AND STERBA
of wires slightly greater in area than the an- (STACKED DIPOLE) DESIGN TABLE
tenna array may be used instead of an addi-
tional array as a reflector to obtain a unidirec- FREQUENCY
tional system. The spacing between the re- IN MC. L, Lo L.,
7.0 68'2" 70' 35'
flecting wires may vary from 0.05 to 0.1 wave- 7.3 65'10" 67'6" 33'9"
length with the spacing between the reflecting 14.0 34'1" 35' 17'6"
14.2 33'8" 34'7" 17'3"
wires the smallest directly behind the driven 14.4 33'4" 34'2" 17'
elements. The wires in the untuned reflecting 21.0 22'9" 23'3" 11 '8"
21.5 22'3" 22'9" 11 '5"
system should be parallel to the radiating ele-
27.3 17'7" 17'10" 8'11"
ments of the array, and the spacing of the com- 28.0 17' 17'7" 8'9"
29.0 16'6" 17' 8'6"
plete reflector system should be approximately
50.0 9'7" 9'10" 4'11"
0.2 to 0.25 wavelength behind the driven ele- 52.0 9'3" 9'5" 4'8"
ments. 54.0 8'10" 9'1" 4'6"
144.0 39.8" 40.5" 20.3"
On frequencies below perhaps 100 Me. it 146.0 39" 40" 20"
normally will be impracticable to use a wire- 148.0 38.4" 39.5" 19.8"
screen reflector behind an antenna array such
470 High Frequency Directive Antennas THE R AD I 0
DIMENSION L
10M. ISM. 2.0/IOM.
et 13' t7eu
DIMENSIONS
10M. ISM. 20t.4. GAIN APPROX. I DB
L 10'3* 2.2' 32'10" Figure 18
s 20' 30' 40' J THE DOUBLE-BRUCE ARRAY FOR 10,
p 14'2 21'3., 28'4 ..
0 3~ SJ 70 7SA TRANSMISSION LINE
15, AND 20 METERS
If a 600-ohm feecl line Is usecl, the 20-meter
array will a/so perform on 10 meters as a
Figure 17 Sterba curtain, with an approximate gain of
THE X-ARRAY FOR 28 MC., 21 MC., 9 clb.
OR 14 MC.
The entire array (with the exception of the
75-ohm feecl I ine) is constructed of 300-ohm
ribbon line. Be sure phasing lines (P) are dipole, and is a very simple beam to construct.
polecl correctly, as shown. This antenna, like other so-called "broadside"
arrays, radiates maximum power at right angles
to the plane of the array.
The feed impedance of the Double Bruce is
in a vertical p 1 an e and properly phased, a about 750 ohms. The array may be fed with a
simplified form of in-phase curtain is formed, one-quarter wave stub made of 300-ohm ribbon
providing an overall gain of about 6 db. Such line and a feedline made of 150-ohm ribbon
an array is shown in figure 17. In this X-array, line. Alternatively, the array may be fed di
the four dipoles are all in phase, and are fed rectly with a wide-spaced 600-ohm transmis
by four sections of 300-ohm line, each one- sion line (figure 18). The feed 1 in e should
half wavelength long, the free ends of all four be brought away from the Double Bruce for a
lines being connected in parallel. The feed short distance before it drops downward, to
impedance at the junction of these four lines prevent interaction between the feedline and
is about 75 ohms, and a length of 75-ohm the lower part of the center phasing section of
Twin-Lead may be used for the feedline to the array. For best results, the bottom sec-
the array. tions of the array should be one-half wave-
An array of this type is quite small for the length above ground.
28-Mc. band, and is not out of the question Arrays such as the X-array and the Double
for the 21-Mc. band. For best results, the bot- Bruce are essentially high impedance devices,
tom section of the array should be one-half and exhibit relatively broad-band characteris-
wavelength above ground. tics. They are less critical of adjustment than
a parasitic array, and they work well over a
The Double-Bruce The Bruce Beam consists wide frequency range such as is encountered
Array of a long wire folded so on the 28-29.7 Me. band.
that vertical elements
carry in-phase currents while the horizontal The "Bi-Square" Illustrated in figure 19 is a
elements carry out of phase currents. Radia- Broadside Array simple method of feeding a
tion from the horizontal sections is low since small broadside array first
only a small current flows in this part of the described by W6BCX several years ago as a
wire, and it is largely phased-out. Since the practical method of suspending an effective
height of the Bruce Beam is only one-quarter array from a single pole. As two arrays of this
wavelength, the gain per linear foot of array type can be supported at right angles from a
is quite low. Two Bruce Beams may be com- single pole without interaction, it offers a
bined as shown in figure 18 to produce the solution to the problem of suspending two ar-
Double Bruce array. A four section Double rays in a restricted space with a minimum of
Bruce will give a vertically polarized emis- erection work. The free space directivity gain
sion, with a power gain of 5 db over a simple is slightly less than that of a Lazy H, but is
HANDBOOK Broadside Arrays 471
...
' - - 8' 7" _.J
/ ~- EACH$10~ !
r
SL
8'7 ----
EACH //
INTS OF MAXIMUM
CURRENT
EFLECTOR
C=50JJJJF
TUNE FOR MINIMUM 150 OHM BALANCED LINE
' PICKUP OFF REAR STUB=10* TO TUNING UNIT OR
' OF BEAM. ..14 E. TRANSMITTER.
SPACED 3"
GAl N APPRO X. 4 DB
D2 02
1 l
DIMENSIONS 52ll.
10M. l~t.A. 20M, COAXIAL LINE
GAIN APPROX. 7.5 DB
Figure 21 Figure 22
THE "SIX-SHOOTER" BROADSIDE ARRAY "BOBTAIL" BIDIRECTIONAL BROAD
SIDE CURTAIN FOR THE 7-MC. OR THE
4.0-MC. AMATEUR BANDS
wire line should be employed if the antenna is This simple vertically .polarized array pro
used with a high power transmitter. vides low angle radiation and response with
comparatively low pole heights, and is very
To tune the reflector, the back of the an effective far dx work on the 7-Mc. band or
tenna is aimed at a nearby field-strength meter the 4.0-Mc. phone bond. Because of the
and the reflector stub capacitor is adjusted phose relationships, radiation from the hori
for minimum received signal at the operating zontol portion of the antenna is effectively
suppressed. Very little current flows in the
frequency. ground lead to the coupling tonk; so an elob
This antenna provides high gain for its small orate ground system is not required, and the
size, and is recommended for 28-Mc. work. length of the ground lead. is not critical so
The elements may be made of number 14 en long as it uses heavy wife ancl is reason
amel wire, and the array may be built on a light ably short.
bamboo or wood framework.
Normally the antenna tank will be located proper phase relationships in multi-section
in the same room as the transmitter, to facil- flat tops by crossing the wires at the voltage
itate adjustment when changing frequency. In loops, rather than by resorting to phasing
this case it is recommended that the link COU" stubs. This greatly simplifies the array. (See
pled tank be located across the room from the figure 23.) Any number of sections may be
transmitter if much power is used, in order to used, though the one and two-section arrange
minimize rf feedback difficulties which might ments are the most popular. Little extra gain
occur as a result of the asymmetrical high im is obtained by using more than four sections,
pedance feed. If tuning of the antenna tank and trouble from phase shift may appear.
from tbe transmitter position is desired, flex- A center-fed single-section flat-top beam
ible shafting can be run from the antenna tank cut according to the table, can be used quite
condenser to a control knob at the transmitter. successfully on its second harmonic, the pat
The lower end of the driven element is quite tern being similar except that it is a little
"hot" if much power is used, and the lead-in sharper. The single-section array can also be
insulator should be chosen with this in mind. used on its fourth harmonic with some success,
The ground connection need not have very low though there then will be four cloverleaf lobes,
resistance, as the current flowing in the much the same as with a full-wave antenna.
ground connection is comparatively small. A If a flat-top beam is to be used on more than
stake or pipe driven a few feet in the ground one band, tuned feeders are necessary.
will suffice. However, the ground lead should The radiation resistance of a flat-top beam
be of heavy wire and preferably the length is rather low, especially when only one sec-
should 'not exceed about 10 feet at 7 Me. or tion is used. This means that the voltage will
about 20 feet at 4 Me. in order to minimize be high at the voltage loops. For this reason,
reactive effects due to its inductance. If it is especially good insulators should be used for
impossible to obtain this short a ground lead, best results in wet weather.
a piece of screen or metal sheet about four The exact lengths for the radiating elements
feet square may be placed parallel to the earth are not especially critical, because slight de-
in a convenient location and used as an arti viations from the correct lengths can be com-
ficial ground. A fairly high C/L ratio ordinari pensated in tbe stub or tuned feeders. Proper
ly will be required in the antenna tank in order stub adjustment is covered in Chapter Twenty-
to obtain adequate coupling and loading. five. Suitable radiator lengths and approximate
stub dimensions are given in the accompany-
ing design table.
Figure 23 shows top views of eight types
23-7 End-Fire Directivity of flat-top beam antennas. The dimensions for
using these antennas on different bands are
given in the design table. The 7- and 28-Mc.
By spacing two half-wave dipoles, or colin-
bands are divided into two parts, but the di-
ear arrays, at a distance of from 0.1 to 0.25
mensions for either the low- or high-frequency
wavelength and driving the two 180 out of
ends of these bands will be satisfactory for
phase, directivity is obtained through the two
use over the entire band.
wires at right angles to them. Hence, this type
of bidirectional array is called end fire. A bet- In any case, the antennas are tuned to the
ter idea of end-fire directivity can be obtained frequency used, by adjusting the shorting wire
by referring to figure 10. on the stub, or tuning the feeders, if no stub
Remember that end fire refers to the radia- is used. The data in the table may be extended
tion with respect to the two wires in the array to other bands or frequencies by applying the
rather than with respect to the array as a proper factor. Thus, for 50 to 52 Me. operation,
whole. the values for 28 to 29 Me. are divided by 1.8.
The vertical directivity of an end-fire bi All of the antennas have a bidirectional hori-
directional array which is oriented horizontal zontal pattern on their fundamental frequency.
ly can be increased by placing a similar end The maximum signal is broadside to the flat
fire array a half wave below it, and excited in top. The single-section type has this pattern
the same phase. Such an array is a combina on both its fundamental frequency and second
tion broadside and end- fire affair. harmonic. The other types have four main lobes
of radiation on the second and higher harmon-
Kraus Flat Top A very effective bidirectional ics. The nominal gains of the different types
Beam end-fire array is the Kraus or over a half-wave comparison antenna are as
8JK Flat-Top Beam. Essen- follows: single-section, 4 db; two-section, 6
tially, this antenna consists of two close db; four-section, 8 db.
spaced dipoles or colinear arrays. Because of The maximum spacings given make the
the close spacing, it is possible to obtain the beams less critical in their adjustments. Up
474 High Frequency Directive Antennas THE R AD I 0
lT 1-SECTION
=:dtJr,
1-SECTION liNG !>.TuJ
2-SECTION
STU& OF FEEDERS
CONNECT AT F F
3-SECTION
4-SECTION
FIGURE 23
Figure 24
,'
THE TRIPLEX FLAT-TOP BEAM /,lo-4...-''"---- s
ANTENNA FOR 10, IS AND 20
METERS
- -
MAXIMUM
MAX. RADIATION RADIATION
4 .5 DB 4.& DB
I
I DIMENSIONS
I
L
IOM.
,~ ... ISM. 20M
2.1'5" 32.'2."
MATERIAL
~.n:~u.~ub 3
/ s 5'0" 7& II'
/
/ D 1a 10'7 14'4" 3000HM FUBBON
to one-quarter wave spacing may be used on used for the two phasing sections. A recom
the fundamental for the one-section types and mended assembly for Triplex beams for 28 Me.,
also the two-section center-fed, but it is not 21 Me., and 14 Me. is shown in figure 24. The
desirable to use more than 0.15 wavelength gain of a Triplex beam is about 4. 5 db over a
spacing for the other types. dipole.
Although the center-fed type of flat-top gen
erally is to be preferred because of its sym
metry, the end-fed type often is convenient or
desirable. For example, when a flat-top beam
is used vertically, feeding from the lower end 23-8 Combination End-Fire and
is in most cases more convenient. Broadside Arrays
If a multisection flat-top array is end-fed
instead of center-fed, and tuned feeders are
used, stations off the ends of the array can be Any of the end-fire array s previous! y de
worked by tying the feeders together and work scribed may be stacked one above the other or
ing the whole affair, feeders and all, as a long placed end to end (side bv side) to give great-
wire harmonic antenna. A single-pole double er directivity gain while maintaining a bidi-
throw switch can be used for changing the rectional characteristic. However, it must be
feeders and directivity. kept in mind that to realize a worthwhile in-
crease in directivity and gain while maintain-
The Triplex The Triplex beam is a modified ing a bidirectional pattern the individual ar-
Beam version of the WBJK antenna rays must be spaced sufficiendy to reduce the
which uses f o 1 de d dipoles for mutual impedances to a negligible value.
the half wave elements of the array. The use When two flat top beams, for instance, are
of folded dipoles results in higher radiation placed one above the other or end to end, a
resistance of the array, and a high overall sys center spacing on the order of one wavelength
tern performance. Three wire dipoles are used is required in order to achieve a worthwhile
for the elements, and 300-ohm Twin-Lead is increase in gain, or approximately 3 db.
476 High Frequency Directive Antennas
Thus it is seen that, while maximum gain an identical array must be spaced from it in
occurs with two stacked dipoles at a spacing end-fire relationship to obtain optimum per-
of about 0.7 wavelength and the space direc- formance and retain the bidirectional charac-
tivity gain is approximately 5 db over one ele- teristic.
ment under these conditions; the case of two It is important to note that while a bidirec-
flat top or parasitic arrays stacked one above tional end-fire pattern is obtained with two
the other is another story. Maximum gain will driven dipoles when spaced anything under a
occur at a greater spacing, and the gain over half wavelength, and while the proper phase
one array will not appreciably exceed 3 db. relationship is 180 degrees regardless of the
When two broadside curtains are placed one spacing for all spacings not exceeding one
ahead of the other in end-fire relationship, the half wavelength, the situation is different in
aggregate mutual impedance between the two the case of two curtains placed in end-fire re-
curt~ins ~s such that considerable spacing is
lationship to give a bidirectional pattern. For
requued 1n order to realize a gain approaching maximum gain at zero wave angle, the curtains
3 db (the required spacing being a function of should be spaced an odd multiple of one half
the size of the curtains). While it is true that wavelength and driven so as to be 180 degrees
a space directivity gain of approximately 4 db out of phase, or spaced an even multiple of
can be obtained by placing one, half-wave di- one half wavelength and driven in the same
pole an eighth wavelength ahead of another phase. The optimum spacing and phase rela-
and feeding them 180 degrees out of phase, a tionship will depend upon the directivity pat-
gain of less than 1 db is obtained when the tern of the individual curtains used alone, and
same procedure is applied to two large broad- as previously noted the optimum spacing in-
side curtains. To obtain a gain of approximate- creases with the size and directivity of the
ly 3 db and retain a bidirectional pattern, a component arrays.
spacing of many wavelengths is required be- A concrete example of a combination broad-
tween two large curtains placed one ahead of side and end-fire array is two Lazy H arrays
the other. spaced along the direction of maximum radia-
A different situation exists, however, when tion by a distance of four wavelengths and fed
one driven curtain is placed ahead of an iden- in phase. The space directivity gain of such
tical one and the two are phased so as to give an arrangement is slightly less than 9 db. How-
a unidirectional pattern. When a unidirectional ever, approximately the same gain can be ob-
pattern is obtained, the gain over one curtain tained by juxtaposing the two arrays side by
will be approximately 3 db regardless of the side or one over the other in the same plane,
spacing. For instance, two large curtains so that the two combine to produce, in effect,
placed one a quarter wavelength ahead of the one broadside curtain of twice the area. It is
other may have a space directivity gain of only obvious that in most cases it will be more ex-
0.5 db over one curtain when the two are driv- pedient to increase the area of a broadside
en 180 degrees out of phase to give a bidirec- array than to resort to a combination of end-
tional pattern (the type of pattern obtained fire and broadside directivity. One exception,
with a single curtain). However, if they are of course, is where two curtains are fed in
driven in phase quadrature (and with equal cur- phase quadrature to obtain a unidirectional
rents) the gain is approximately 3 db. pattern and space directivity gain of approxi-
The directivity gain of a composite array mately 3 db with a spacing between curtains
also can be explained upon the basis of the as small as one quarter wavelength. Another
directivity patterns of the component arrays exception is where very low angle radiation is
alone, but it entails a rather complicated pic- desired and the maximum pole height is strict-
ture. It is sufficient for the purpose of this ly limited. The two aforementioned Lazy H
discussion to generalize and simplify by say- arrays when placed in end-fire relationship
ing that the greater the directivity of an end- will have a considerably lower radiation angle
fire array, the farther an identical array must than when placed side by side if the array ele-
be spaced from it in broadside relationship to vation is low, and therefore may under some
obtain optimum performance; and the greater conditions exhibit appreciably more practical
the directivity of a broadside array, the farther signal gain.
CHAPTER TWENTY-FOUR
The very-high-frequency or vhf frequency station. Even a much simpler and smaller three-
range is defined as that range falling between or four-element parasitic array having a gain
30 and 300 Me. The ultra-high-frequency or of 7 to 10 db will produce a marked improve-
uhf range is defined as falling between 300 ment in the received signal at the other sta-
and 3000 Me. This chapter will be devoted to tion.
the design and construction of antenna sys- However, as all v-hf and u-h-f workers
tems for operation on the amateur 50-Mc., 144- know, the most important contribution of a
Mc., 235-Mc., and 420-Mc. bands. Although the high-gain antenna array is in reception. If a
basic principles of antenna operation are the remote station cannot be heard it obviously is
same for all frequencies, the shorter physical impossible to make contact. The limiting fac-
length of a wave in this frequency range and tor in v-h-f and u-h-f reception i s in almost
the differing modes of signal propagation make every case the noise generated within the re-
it possible and expedient to use antenna sys- ceiver itself. Atmospheric noise is almost non-
tems different in design from those used on existent and ignition interference can almost
the range from 3 to 30 Me. invariably be reduced to a satisfactory level
through the use of an effective noise limiter.
Even with a grounded-grid or neutralized triode
first stage in the receiver the noise contribu-
tion of the first tuned circuit in the receiver
24-1 Antenna Requirements
will be relatively large. Hence it is desirable
to use an antenna system which will deliver
Any type of antenna system useable on the the greatest signal voltage to the first tuned
lower frequencies may be used in the v-h-f and circuit for a given field strength at the receiv-
u-h-f bands. In fact, simple non-directive half- ing location.
wave or quarter-wave vert i cal antennas are Since the field intensity being produced at
very popular for general transmission and re- the receiving location by a remote transmitting
ception from all directions, especially for station may be assumed to be constant, the re-
short-range work. But for serious v-h-f or u-h-f ceiving antenna which intercepts the greatest
work the use of some sort of directional an- amount of wave front, assuming that the polari-
tenna array is a necessity. In the first place, zation and directivity of the receiving antenna
when the transmitter power is concentrated in- is proper, will be the antenna which gives the
to a narrow beam the apparent transmitter pow- best received signal-to-noise ratio. An antenna
er at the receiving station is increased many which has two square wavelengths effective
times. A "billboard" array or a Sterba curtain area will pick up twice as much signal power
having a gain of 16 db will make a 25-watt as one which has one square wavelength area,
transmitter sound like a kilowatt at the other assuming the same general type of antenna and
477
478 V-H-F and U-H-F Antennas THE RA0 I 0
that both are directed at the station being re of about 50 feet or less. For longer runs, either
ceived. Many instances have been reported the u-h-f or v-h-f TV open-wire lines may be
where a frequency band sounded completely used with good overall efficiency. The v-h-f
dead with a simple dipole receiving antenna line is satisfactory for use on the amateur
but when the receiver was switched to a three- 420-Mc. band.
element or larger array a considerable amount
of activity from 80 to 160 miles distant was Antenna It is recommended that the same
heard. Changeover antenna be used for transmitting
and receiving in the v-h-f and
u-h-f range. An ever-present problem in this
Angle of The useful portion of the signal connection, however, is the antenna change-
Radiation in the v-h-f and u-h-f range for over relay. Reflections at the antenna change-
short or medium distance communi- over relay become of increasing importance
cation is that which is radiated at a very low as the frequency of transmission is increased.
angle with respect to the surface of the earth When coaxial cable is used as the antenna
essentially it is that signal which is radiated transmission line, satisfactory coaxial anten-
parallel to the surface of the earth. A vertical na changeover relays with low reflection can
antenna transmits a portion of its radiation at be used. One type manufactured by Advance
a very low angle and is effective for this rea- Electric & Relay Co., Los Angeles 26, Calif.,
son; its radiation is not necessarily effective will give a satisfactorily low value of re-
simply because it is vertically polarized. A flection.
simple horizontal dipole radiates very little On the 235-Mc. and 420-Mc. amateur bands,
low-angle energy and hence is not a satisfac- the size of the antenna array becomes quite
tory v-h-f or u-h-f radiator. Directive arrays small, and it is practical to mount two identi-
wh1ch concentrate a major portion of the radi- cal antennas side by side. One of these an-
ated signal at a low radiation angle will prove tennas is used for the transmitter, and the
to be effective radiators whether their signal other antenna for the receiver. Separate trans-
is horizontally or vertically polarized. mission lines are used, and the antenna relay
In all cases, the radiating system for v-h-f may be eliminated.
and u-h-f work should be as high and in the
clear as possible. Increasing the height of the Effect of Feed A vertical radiator for
antenna system will produce a very marked System on Radiation general coverage u-h-f
improvement in the number and strength of the Angle use s h o u I d be made
signals heard, regardless of the actual type either J4 or Yz wavelength
of antenna used. long. Longer vertical antennas do not have
their maximum radiation at right angles to the
Transmission Transmission lines to v-h-f and line of the radiator (unless co-phased), and,
Lines u-h-f antenna systems may be therefore, are not practicable for use where
either of the parallel-conductor greatest possible radiation parallel to the
or coaxial conductor type. Coaxial line is rec- earth is desired.
ommended for short runs and closely spaced Unfortunately, a feed system which is not
open-wire line for longer runs. Wave guides perfectly balanced and does some radiating,
may be used under certain conditions for fre- not only robs the antenna itself of that much
quencies greater than perhaps 1500 Me. but power, but distorts the radiation pattern of the
their dimensions become excessively great for antenna. As a result, the pattern of a vertical
frequencies much below this value. Non-reson- radiator may be so altered that the radiation
ant transmission lines will be found to be con- is bent upwards slightly, and the amount of
siderably more efficient on these frequencies power leaving the antenna parallel to the
than those of the resonant type. It is wise to earth is greatly reduced. A vertical half-wave
to use the very minimum length of transmission radiator fed at the bottom by a quarter-wave
line possible since transmission line losses stub is a good exam pIe of this; the slight
at frequencies above about 100 Me. mount very radiation from the matching section decreases
rapidly. the power radiated parallel to the earth by
Open lines s h o u I d preferably be spaced nearly 10 db.
closer than is common for longer wavelengths, The only cure is a feed system which does
as 6 inches is an appreciable fraction of a not disrurb the radiation pattern of the antenna
wavelength at 2 meters. Radiation from the itself. This means that if a 2-wire line is used,
line will be greatly reduced if l-inch or I liz- the current and voltages must be exactly the
inch spacing is used, rather than the more com- same (though 180 out of phase) at any point
mon 6-inch spacing. on the feed line. It means that if a concentric
Ordinary TV-type 300-ohm ribbon may be feed line is used, there should be no current
used on the 2-meter band for feeder lengths flowing on the outside of the outer conductor.
HANDBOOK Antenna Polarization 479
Figure 1
THREE NONDIRECTIONAL, HORIZONTALLY POLARIZED ANTENNAS
T -fALUMINUMTUBINIO
38"
TYP.
~
2"X2"X18'
1T T~r.~
'
SEMI-LOOSE FIT,
ALUMINUM CROSS-
BAR TIGHTENS IT UP. 10'
S=
:j
TOP APEX CONNECTS TO
INNER CONNECTOR
LOWER APEX CONNECTS
TO OUTER CONDUCTOR
20'
Figure 3
THE DOUBLE SKELETON CONE
ANTENNA
A skeleton cone has been substituted for the
sinqle element radiator of figure 2C. This GUYS
0.7 D 500
j
400
~
ll
II . 300
II
"'
<)
::;
II
,;
u
z
200 ~
j
Q :: 18 0
w
II
II
::>
0
w
a:
160
14 0 '~
Jl
II
"- 12 0
tn 11 0
-"" ~
w 100 -"
I! :;.: 9 0
D '3 80 -"'
0 ~
0
l'\,
50
I I'
Figure SA 0.5 1.0 1.5 2 2.5 3 4
DIN FEET
THE "DISCONE" BROAD-BAND
RADIATOR
This antenna system radiates o vertically Figure SB
polarized w~e. ov,~r a very wide frequency DESIGN CHART FOR THE "DISCONE"
range. The cltsc may be mode of solid ANTENNA
met a I s h ~,e t, a,group of radials, or wire
screen; the cone may best be constructed
by forming o sheet of thin aluminum. A sin
gle antenna may be usee/ for operation on the of the skirt direct! y to an effective ground
50, 144, one/ 220 Me. amateur bonds. The plane such as the top of an automobile.
dimension D is determined by the lowest fre
quency to be employee/, one/ is given in the
chart of figure 58.
24-5 Helical Beam
Antennas
VSWR of less than 1. 5 will be obtained through- Most v-h-f and u-h-f antennas are either ver-
out the operating range of the antenna. tically polarized or horizontally polarized
The Discone antenna may be considered (plane polarization). However, circularly po
as a cross between an electromagnetic horn larized antennas have interesting characteris-
and an inverted ground plane unipole antenna. tics which may be useful for certain applica
It looks to the feed line like a properly termi- tions. The installation of such an antenna can
nated high-pass filter. effectively solve the problem of horizontal vs.
vertical polarization.
Construction Details The top disk and the A circularly polarized wave has its energy
conical skirt may be divided equally between a vertically polarized
fabricated either from sheet metal, screen (such component and a horizontally polarized com
as "hardware cloth"), or 12 or more "spine" ponent, the two being 90 degrees out of phase.
radials. If screen is used a supporting frame- The circularly polarized wave may be either
work of rod or tubing will be necessary for "left handed" or "right handed," depending
mechanical strength except at the higher fre upon whether the vertically polarized compo-
quencies . If spines are used, they should be nent leads or lags the horizontal component.
terminated on a s t i f f ring for mechanical A circularly polarized antenna will respond
strength except at the higher frequencies. to any plane polarized wave whether horizon-
The top disk is supported by means of three tally polarized, vertically polarized, or diag-
insulating pillars fastened to the skirt. Either onally polarized. Also, a circular polarized
polystyrene or low-loss ceramic is suitable for wave can be received on a plane polarized an-
the purpose. The apex of the conical skirt is tenna, regardless of the polarization of the
grounded to the supporting mast and to the latter. When using circular! y polarized anten-
outer conductor of the coaxial line. The line nas at both ends of the circuit, however, both
is run down through the supporting mast. An must be left handed or both must be right
alternative arrangement, one suitable for cer- handed. This offers some interesting possi-
tain mobile applications, is to fasten the base bilities with regard to reduction of QRM. At
484 V-H-F and U-H-F Antennas THE R AD I 0
I
..--ROUND OR SQUARE TRANSMIT
GROUND SCREEN
RECEIVE band of frequencies, such as an amateur band.
L-----------t At the design frequency the beam width is
about 50 degrees and the power gain about 12
T
D
db, referred to a non-directional circular! y po-
G larized antenna.
1 The Ground Screen For the frequency range
D ............................ 22 in.
S ......................... 16~ in.
G.......................... 53 in.
Tubing o.d ................. 1 in.
The D and S dimensions are to the center of DRIVEN DIPOLE
the rubing. These dimensions must be held
rather closely, since the range from 144 through
225 Me. represents just about the practical
limit of coverage of this type of antenna sys
tem. SUPPORT IN~
MEMBER
~D
~
75 0 TOP VIEW
~
w
...J
"z
70 0
/
v
<(
'J
650
v
60 0 L
f-
::;
v
::>
::; 550 /
/
f-
a..
0 50 0
.,
SIDE LENGTH, 5
., 10>.
0 =TILT ANGLE
~-----------L------------~
R1, Rz= 390 OHMS EACH
NON-lNDUCnVE
Figure 10 Figure 11
V-H-F RHOMBIC ANTENNA DESIGN V-HF RHOMBIC ANTENNA
CHART CONSTRUCTION
The optimum tilt angle (see figure II} for
"zero-angle" radiation Jepencls upon the
length of the sicles,
necessary to elongate the array a few per cent
(pulling in the sides slightly) if the horizon
elevation exceeds about 3 degrees.
Table I gives dimensions for two dual pur
10 to 16 db gain with a simpler construction pose rhombic arrays. One covers the 6meter
than does a phased dipole array, and bas the amateur band and the "low" television band.
further advantage of being useful over a wide The other covers the 2meter amateur band,
frequency range. the "high" television band, and the 1 Xmeter
Except at the upper end of the vhf range amateur band. The gain is approximately 12
db over a matched half wave dipole and the
a rhombic array having a worthwhile gain is
beam width is about 6 degrees.
too large to be rotated. However, in ~ocations
75 to 150 miles from a large metropolitan area
The Feed Line The recommended feed line
a rhombic array is ideally suited for working
is an openwire line having a
into the city on extended (horizontally polar
surge impedance between 450 and 600 ohms.
ized) ground-wave while at the same time mak
With such a line the VSWR will be less than
ing an ideal antenna for TV reception.
2 to 1. A line with twoincb spacing is suit
The useful frequency range of a vhf rhom
able for frequencies below 100 Me., but one
bic array is about 2 to 1, or about plus 40% a~d
inch spacing (such as used in the Gonset Line
minus 30% from the design frequency. This
for TV installations) is recommended for high
coverage is somewhat less than that of a hig~ er frequencies.
frequency rhombic used for skywave communi
cation. For ground-wave transmission or recep The TerminationIf the array is to be used only
tion the only effective vertical angle is that for reception, a suitable ter
of the horizon, and a frequency range greater mination consists of two 390-ohm carbon re
than 2 to 1 cannot be covered with a rhombic
array without an excessive change in the ver
tical angle of maximum radiation or response.
The dimensions of a vhf rhombic array are 6 METERS 2 METERS, HIGH
determined from the design frequency and fig AND LOW BAND BAND TV, AND
TV 1 V4 METERS
ure 10 which shows the proper tilt angle (see
figure '11) for a given leg length. The gain of
a rhombic array increases with leg length. s 90'
(side) 32'
There is not much point in constructing a vhf
rhombic array with legs shorter than about 4 L
(length) 166' 10" 59' 4"
wavelengths, and the beam width begins to be
come excessively sharp for leg lengths greater
than about 8 wavelengths. A leg length of 6 w 67' 4" 23' 11"
(Width)
wavelengths is a good compromise between
beam width and gain. 5-6 wavelenths at design frequency
The tilt angle given in figure 10 is based Tilt angle 68 =
upon a wave angle of zero degrees. For leg
lengths of 4 wavelengths or longer, it will be TABLE I.
488 V-H-F and U-H-F Antennas THE R AD I 0
Figure 12
The rotary multi-element beam is undoubted- SIMPLE 3-ELEMENT BEAM FOR 2 AND
ly the most popular type of v-h-f antenna in 1\4 METERS
use. In general, the design, assembly and tun-
ing of these antennas follows a pattern similar
to the larger types of rotary beam antennas
used on the lower frequency amateur bands. driven element is next attached to the center
The characteristics of these low frequency of the wood boom, mounted atop a small in-
beam antennas are discussed in the next chap- sulating plate made of bakelite, micarta or
ter of this Handbook, and the information con- some other non-conducting material. It is held
tained in that chapter applies in general to the in place in the same manner as the parasitic
v-h-f beam antennas discussed herewith. elements. The two free ends of the folded di-
pole are hammered flat and drilled for a 6-32
A Simple Three The simplest v-h-f beam for bolt. These bolts pass through both the insu-
Element Beam the beginner is the three-ele- lating block and the boom, and hold the free
Antenna ment Y agi array illustrated in tips of the element in place.
figure 12. Dimensions are A length of 75-ohm Twin-Lead TV-type line
given for Yagis cur for the 2-meter and 1 ~ should be used with this beam antenna. It is
meter bands. The supporting boom for the Yagi connected to each of the free ends of the folded
may be made from a smoothed piece of 1" x 2 dipole. If the .antenna is mounted in the verti-
wood. The wood should be reasonably dry and cal plane, th~ 75-ohm line should be brought
should be painted to prevent warpage from ex- away from the antenna for a distance of four
posure to sun and rain. The director and re- to six feet before it drops down the tower to
flector are cut from lengths of ~ 11 copper tub- lessen interaction between the antenna ele-
ing, obtainable from any appliance store that ments and the feed line. The complete antenna
does service work on refrigerators. They should is light enough to be turned by a TV rotator.
be cut to length as noted in figure 12. The ele- A simple Yagi antenna of this type will pro-
ments should then be given a coat of aluminum vide a gain of 7 db over the entire 2-meter or
paint. Two small holes are drilled at the center 1 ~-meter band, and is highly recommended as
of the reflector and director and these elements an "easy-to-build" beam for the novice or
are bolted to the wood boom by means of two beginner.
1 11 wood screws. These screws should be of
the plated, or rust-proof variety. An 8-Eiement Figures 13 and 14 illus-
The driven element is made of a 78" length "Tippable" Array trate an 8-element rotary
of ~ 11 copper tubing, the ends bent back upon far 144 Me. array for use on the 144-
each other to form a folded dipole. If the tub- Mc. amateur band. This
ing is packed with fine sand and the bending array is "tippable" to obtain either horizontal
points heated over a torch, no trouble will be or vertical polarization. It is necessary that
had in the bending process. If the tubing does the transmitting and receiving station use the
collapse when it is bent, the break may be re- same polarization for the ground-wave signal
paired with a heavy-duty soldering iron. The propagation which is characteristic of this fre-
HANDBOOK VHF Parasitic Arrays 489
r'""
I
AS SHOWN, ANTENNA IS
HORIZONTALLY POLARIZED .
.....___
PULL TO SWJ NG MAIN BOOM 90
FOR VERTICAL POLARITY.
CONTROL CORDS
RG-8/U CABLE
TO RIG.
Figure 13
CONSTRUCTIONAL DRAWING OF AN EIGHT-ELEMENT TIPPABLE 144-MC. ARRAY
quency range. Although polarization has been antenna is the same whether it is oriented for
loosely standardized in various areas of the vertical or horizontal polarization, the hori
country, exceptions are frequent enough so zontal beam width is smaller when the antenna
that it is desirable that the polarization of an is oriented for vertical polarization. Conver
tenna radiation be easily changeable from hori sely, the vertical pattern is the sharper when
zontal to vertical. the antenna system is oriented for horizontal
The antenna illustrated has shown a signal polarization.
gain of about 11 db, representing a power gain The changeover from one polarization to the
of about 13. Although the signal gain of the other is accomplished simply by pulling on the
490 V-H-F and U-H-F Antennas THE R AD I 0
Figure 14
THE EIGHT-ELEMENT 144-MC. ARRAY IN A HORIZONTAL POSITION
appropriate cord. Hence, the operation is based 13. However, the pointers given in the follow
on the offset head sketched in figure 13. AI ing paragraphs will be of assistance to those
though a wood mast has been used, the same wishing to reproduce the array.
system may be used with a pipe mast. The drilling of holes for the small elements
The 40-inch lengths of RG-59/U cable (elec should be done carefully on accurately marked
trically % wavelength) running from the center centers. A small angular error in the drilling
of each folded dipole driven element to the of these holes will result in a considerable
coaxial Tjunction allow enough slack to per misalignment of the elements after the array is
mit free movement of the main boom when assembled. The same consideration is true of
changing polarity. Type RG-8/U cable is run the filing out of the rounded notches in the
from the Tjunction to the operating position. ends of the main boom for the fitting of the
Measured standing-wave ratio was less than two antenna booms.
2:1 over the 144 to 148 Me. band, with the Short lengths of wood dowel are used freely
lengths and spacings given in figure 13. in the construction of the array. The ends of
the small elements are plugged with an inch
Construction of Most of the constructional or so of dowel, and the ends of the antenna
the Array aspects of the antenna array booms are similarly treated with larger discs
are self-evident from figure pressed into place.
HANDBOOK VHF Parasitic Arrays 4 91
WOOD BLOCK
~RADIATOR ==
Figure 16
THE MOUNTING BLOCK FOR EACH SET
OF ELEMENTS
D11
LENGTH SPACING
ELEMENT
FROM
(OIAM, 1/8 ... ) 144MC. 145MC- 146MC. 147 MC, 01 POLE
I BOOM
36.5"
.A~CLEARANCE
!="OR SOL T
HOLE -I Ds= 70"
De= 102 ...
1t :uA /I 07= 134
Figure 19
On the other hand, if a Yagi array of the same provides dimensions for a typical Long Yagi
approximate size and weight as another an- antenna for the 2-meter VHF band. Note that
tenna type is built, it will provide a higher all directors have the same physical length.
order of power gain and directivity than that If the long Yagi is designed so that the di-
of the other antenna. rectors gradually decrease in length as they
The power gain of a Yagi antenna increases progress from the dipole bandwidth will be
directly with the physical length of the array. increased, and both side lobes and forward
The maximum practical length is entirely a gain will be reduced. One advantage gained
mechanical problem of physically supporting from staggered director length is that the
the long series of director elements, although array can be shortened and lengthened by
when the array exceeds a few wavelengths in adding or taking away directors without the
length the element lengths, spacings, and need for retuning the remaining group of para-
Q's become more and more critical. The ef- sitic elements. When all directors are the
fectiveness of the array depends upon a proper same length, they must be all shortened en
combination of the mutual coupling loops masse as the array is lengthened, and vice-
between adjacent directors and between the versa when the array is shortened.
first director and the driven element. A full discussion of Long Yagi antennas,.
including complete design and construction
Practically all work on Yagi antennas with information may be had in the VHF Handbook,
more than three or four elements has been on available through Radio Publications, Inc.,
an experimental, cut-and-try basis. Figure 19 Wilton., Conn.
CHAPTER TWENTY-FIVE
Rotary Beams
The rotatable antenna array has become al- ventional three- or four-element rotary beam
most standard equipment for operation on the may properly be called a unidirectional para-
28-Mc. and 50-Mc. bands and is commonly used sitic end-fire array, and is actually a type of
on the 14-Mc. and 21-Mc. bands and on those yagi array. The flat-top beam is a type of bi-
frequencies above 144 Me. The rotatable array directional end-fire array. The broadside type
offers many advantages for both military and of array is also quite effective in obtaining
amateur use. The directivity of the antenna low-angle radiation, and although widely used
types commonly employed, particularly the in FM and TV broadcasting has seen little use
unidirectional arrays, offers a worthwhile re- by amateur stations in rotatable arrays.
duction in interference from undesired direc-
tions. Also, the increase in the ratio of low-
angle radiation plus the theoretical gain of
such arrays results in a relatively large in- 25-1 Unidirectional
crease in both the transmitted signal and the Parasitic End-Fire Arrays
signal intensity from a station being received. (Yogi Type)
A significant advantage of a rotatable an-
tenna array in the case of the normal station is If a single parasitic element is placed on
that a relatively small amount of space is re- one side of a driven dipole at a distance of
quired for erection of the antenna system. In from 0.1 to 0. 25 wavelength the parasitic ele-
fact, one of the best types of installation uses ment can be tuned to make the array substan-
a single telephone pole with the rotating struc- tial! y unidirectional.
ture holding the antenna mounted atop the pole. This simple array is termed a two element
To obtain results in all azimuth directions parasitic beam.
from fixed arrays comparable to the gain and
directivity of a single rotatable three-element
parasitic beam would require several acres of
surface.
There are two normal configurations of radi- 25-2 The Two Element Beam
ating elements which, when ~o~izontally polar-
ized will contribute to obtammg a low angle The two element parasitic beam provides
of r~diation. These configurations are the end- the greatest amount of gain per unit size of
fire array and the broadside array. The con- any array commonly used by radio amateurs.
4 94
Parasitic Arrays ~95
-
0
;/ -.........::: 1'--..a ~c,JR /
4
I
I 1/ ~
~n.-- t-- v v
/
I
r-----.... -;? /
Cii 3
' ..............
IYA~ ~
e. / 17
z
<( 2 0
[.7
v
"
I
0 -
~v
!.----"_.......
0 0
0,1 0.1.5 0.2. 0.2..5 0.1 0.1.5 0.2 o.z
ELEMENT SPACING (>.I ELEMENT SPACING(>.)
Figure 1
GAIN VS ELEMENT SPACING FOR A TWO Figure 2
ELEMENT CLOSE-SPACED PARASITIC RADIATION RESISTANCE AS A FUNCTION
BEAM ANTENNA WITH PARASITIC ELE OF ELEMENT SPACING FOR A TWO-ELE
MENT OPERATING AS A DIRECTOR OR MENT PARASITIC ARRAY
REFLECTOR
Such an antenna is capable of a signal gain ance for the two element paras1t1c array for
of 5 db over a dipole, with a fronttoback ratio both the reflector and the director case. Since
of 7 db to 15 db, depending upon the adjust the optimum antenna-director spacing for maxi
ment of the parasitic element. The parasitic mum gain results in an antenna radiation re
element may be used either as a director or sistance of about 17 ohms, and the optimum
as a reflector. antenna-reflector spacing for maximum gain
The optimum spacing for a reflector in a results in an antenna radiation resistance of
twoelement array is approximately 0.13 wave about 25 ohms, it may be of advantage in some
length and with optimum adjustment of the instances to choose the antenna with the high
length of the reflector a gain of approximately er radiation resistance, assuming other fac
5 db will be obtained, with a feedpoint resist tors to be equal.
ance of about 25 ohms. Figure 3 shows the fronttoback ratio for
If the parasitic element is to be used as a the two element parasitic array for both the
director the optimum spacing between it and reflector and director cases. To produce these
the driven element is 0.11 wavelength. The curves, the elements were tuned for maximum
gain will theoretically be slightly greater than gain of the array. Better front to back ratios
with the optimum adjustment for a reflector may be obtained at the expense of array gain,
(about 5. 5 db) and the radiation resistance if desired, but the general shape of the curves
will be in the vicinity of 17 ohms. remains the same. It can be readily observed
The general characteristics of a two-element that operation of the parasitic element as a
parasitic array may be seen in figures 1, 2 and reflector produces relatively poor frontto
3. The gain characteristics of a two-element back ratios except when the element spacing
array when the parasitic element is used as a is greater than 0.15 wavelength. However, at
director or as a reflector are shown. It can be this element spacing, the gain of the array be
seen that the director provides a maximum of gins to suffer.
5.3 db gain at a spacing of slightly greater Since a radiation resistance of 17 ohms is
than 0.1 wavelength from the antenna. In the not unduly hard to match, it can be argued that
interests of greatest power gain and size con the best all-around performance may be ob
servation, therefore, the choice of a parasitic rained from a two element parasitic beam em
director would be wiser than the choice of a ploying 0.11 element spacing, with the para
parasitic reflector, although the gain differ sitic element tuned to operate as a director.
ence between the two is small. This antenna will provide a forward gain of
Figure 2 shows the relationship between 5.3 db, with a fronttoback ratio of 10 db, or
the element spacing and the radiation resist slightly greater. Closer spacing than 0.11
4 96 Rotary Beams THE R AD I 0
40
wavelength may be employed for greater front
toback ratios, but the radiation resistance of
the array becomes quite low, the bandwidth
of the array becomes very narrow, and the tun-
ing becomes quite critical. Thus the Q of the
antenna system will be increased as the spac- \
ing between the elements is decreased, and \ .0.
"~ 'P
smaller optimum f r e que n c y coverage will 1'--. ........
result.
~ ~-"_j),. c?~R
*
FMc. the above dimensions is about 2. 5% of the
operating frequency. This means that an array
pre cut to a frequency of 14,15 0 kilocycles
Element spacing (feet) = would have a bandwidth of 350 kilocycles (plus
Me.
or minus 175 kilocycles of the center frequen
Figure 4 cy), and therefore would be effective over the
FIVE ELEMENT 28 MC BEAM whole 20 meter band. In like fashion, a 15
ANTENNA AT W6SAI meter array should be pre-cut to 21,200 kilo
cycles.
Antenna boom is made of twenty foot
length of Sears, Roebuck Co. three-
A beam designed for use on the 10-meter
band would have an effective bandwidth of
inch aluminum irrigation pipe. Spacing
some 700 kilocycles. Since the 10-meter band
between elements is five feet. Ele-
is 1700 kilocycles in width, the array should
ments are made of twelve foot lengths
either be cut to 28,500 kilocycles for opera-
of 7 /8-inch aluminum tubing, with ex-
tion in the low frequency portion of the band,
tension tips made of 3/4-inch tubing.
or to 29,200 kilocycles for operation in the
Gamma matching device, element
high frequency portion of the band. Operation
clamps, and "Oxen Yoke" element-to
of the antenna outside the effective bandwidth
boom clamps are made by Continental
will increase the SWR on the transmission
Electronics & Sound Co., Dayton 27,
line, and noticeably degrade both the gain and
Ohio. Beam dimensions are taken from front-to- back ratio performance. The height
figure S. above ground also influences the F /B ratio.
0.2 wavelength between elements becomes ommended. For narrower bandwidth, such as
possible. Four-element arrays are quite com- would be adequate for the 14.0 to 14.4 Me.
mon on the 28-Mc. and 50-Mc. bands, and five band or the 144 to 148 Me. band, the radiator
elements are sometimes used for increased to parasitic element spacing may be reduced
gain and discrimination. As the number of ele- to 0.12 wavelength, while still maintaining
ments is increased the gain and front-to-hack adequate array bandwidth for the amateur band
ratio increases but the radiation resistance de- in question.
creases and the bandwidth or frequency range
over which the antenna will operate without
reduction in effectiveness is decreased. Length of the Experience has shown that
Parasitic Elements it is practical to cut the
prarslttc elements of a
three-element parasitic array to a predetermined
Material for While the elements may consist length before the installation of such an an-
Elements of wire supported on a wood tenna. A pre-tuned antenna such as this will
framework, self-supporting ele- give good signal gain, adequate front-to-hack
ments of tubing are much to be preferred. The ratio, and good bandwidth factor. By carefully
latter type array is easier to construct, looks tuning the array after it is in position the gain
better, is no more expensive, and avoids the may be increased by a fraction of a db, and
problem of getting sufficiently good insulation the front-to-hack ratio by several db. However
at the ends of the e I em en t s. The voltages the slight improvement in performance is us-
reach such high values towards the ends of ually not worth the effort expended in tuning
the elements that losses will be excessive, time.
unless the insulation is excellent. The closer the lengths of the parasitic ele-
The elements may be fabricated of thin ments are to the resonant length of the driven
walled steel conduit, or hard drawn thin-walled element, the lower will be the feed-point resist-
copper tubing, but dural tubing is much better. ance of the driven element, and the smaller
Or, if you prefer, you may purchase tapered will be the bandwidth of the array. Hence, for
copper-plated steel tubing elements designed wide frequency coverage the director should
especially for the purpose. Kits are available be considerably shorter, and the reflector con-
complete with rotating mechanism and direction siderably longer than the driven element. For
indicator, for those who desire to purchase example, the director should still be less than
the whole system ready to put up. a resonant half wave at the upper frequency
limit of the range wherein the antenna is to be
operated, and the reflector should still be long
Element Spacing The optimum spacing for a enough to act as a reflector at the lower fre-
two-element array is, as has quency limit. Another way of stating the same
been mentioned before, approximately 0.11 thing is to say, in the case of an array to cover
wavelength for a director and 0.13 wavelength a wide frequency range such as the amateur
for a reflector. However, when both a director range from 26.96 to 29.7 Me. or the width of a
and a reflector are combined with the driven low-band TV channel, that the director should
element to make up a three-element array the be cut for the up p e r end of the band and
optimum spacing is established by the band- the reflector for the lower end of the band. In
width which the antenna will be required to the case of the 26.96 to 29.7 Me. range this
cover. Wide spacing (of the order of 0.25 wave- means that the director should be about 8 per
length between elements) will result in greater cent shorter than the dtiven element and the
bandwidth for a specified maximum standing reflector should be about 8 per cent longer.
wave ratio on the antenna transmission line. Such an antenna will show a relatively con-
Smaller spacings may be used when boom stant gain of about 6 db over its range of cov-
length is an important consideration, but for a erage, and the pattern will not reverse at any
specified standing-wave ratio and forward gain point in the range.
the frequency coverage will be smaller. Thus Where the frequency range to be covered is
the Q of the antenna system will be increased somewhat less, such as a high-band TV chan-
as the spacing between the elements is de- nel, the 14.0 to 14.4 Me. amateur band, or the
creased, resulting in smaller frequency cover- lower half of the amateur 28-Mc. phone band,
age, and at the same time the feed-point im- the reflector should be about 5 per cent longer
pedance of the driven e I em en t will be de- than the driven element, and the director about
creased. 5 per cent shorter. Such an antenna will per-
For broad-band coverage, such as the range form well over its rated frequency band, will
from 26.96 to 29.7 Me. or from 50 to 54 Me., not reverse its pattern over this band, and will
0.2 wavelength spacing from the driven ele- show a signal gain of 7 to 8 db. See figure 5
ment to each of the parasitic elements is rec for design figures for 3-element arrays.
4 98 Rotary Beams THE R AD I 0
TYPE DRIVEN ELEI.AENT REFLECTOR tST DIRECTOR 2ND DIRECTOR 3RD DIRECTOR SPACIN' BET- APPROX.CAIN APPROX. RADIATION
LE-NGTH LENGTH LENGTH LENGTH LENGTH WEEN ELEMENTS DB RES I STANCE (ft)
445
3-ELEMENT
473
F(MC)
501
F lMC) .f" (MC)
-- -- .1!>-.1!> 7.5 20
3-ELEMENT -nee) ~
F(MC)
~
F (MC)
- -- .2!>-.25 8.5 35
4-ELEMENT ~
F(MC)
~
F(MC)
~
F(MC)
~
F(MC)
-- .2-.2-.2 ... 20
FigureS
DESIGN CHART FOR PARASITIC ARRAYS (DIMENSIONS GIVEN IN FEET)
More Than A small amount of additional resistance, that especial care must be taken
Three Elements gain may be obtained through in materials used and in the construction of
use of more than two parasitic the elements of the array to insure that ohmic
elements, at the expense of reduced feed-point losses in the conductors will not be an appre-
impedance and lessened bandwidth. One addi- ciable percentage of the radiation resistance.
tional director will add about 1 db, and a sec- It is also obvious that some method of iqtped-
ond additional director (making a total of five ance transformation must be u s e d in many
elements including the driven element) will cases to match the low radiation resistance
add slightly less than one db more. In the of these antenna arrays to the normal range of
v-h-f range, where the additional elements may characteristic impedance u s e d for antenna
be added without much difficulty, and where transmission lines.
required bandwidths are small, the use of more A group of possible methods of impedance
than two parasitic elements is quite practic- matching is shown in figures 7, 8, 9 and 10.
able. All these methods have been used but certain
of them o f fer advantages over some of the
Stocking of Parasitic arrays (yagis) may other methods. Generally speaking it is not
Yagi Arrays be stacked to provide addition- mechanically desirable to break the center of
al gain in the same manner that the driven element of an array for feeding the
dipoles may be stacked. Thus if an array of system. Breaking the driven element rules out
six dipoles would give a gain of 10 db, the the practicability of building an all-metal or
substitution of yagi arrays for each of the di- "plumber's delight" type of array, and im-
poles would add the gain of one yagi array to poses mechanical limitations with any type of
the gain obtained with the dipoles. However, construction. However, when continuous rota-
the yagi arrays must be more widely spaced tion is desired, an arrangement such as shown
than the dipoles to obtain this theoretical im- in figure 9D utilizing a broken driven element
provement. As an example, if six 5-element with a rotatable transformer for coupling from
yagi arrays having a gain of about 10 db were the antenna transmission line to the driven
substituted for the dipoles, with appropriate element has proven to be quite satisfactory.
increase in the spacing between the arrays, In fact the method shown in figure 9D is prob-
the gain of the whole system would approach ably the most practicable method of feeding
the sum of the two gains, or 20 db. A group of the driven element when continuous rotation
arrays of yagi antennas, with recommended of the antenna array is required.
s p acing and approximate gains, are illus- The feed systems shown in figure 7 will,
trated in figure 6. under normal conditions, show the lowest loss-
es of any type of feed system since the cur-
rents flowing in the matching network are the
lowest of all the systems commonly used. The
25-4 Feed Systems for "Folded Element" match shown in figure 7 A
Parasitic (Yogi) Arrays and the "Yoke" match shown in figure 7B are
the most satisfactory electrically of all stand-
The table of figure 5 gives, in addition to ard feed methods. However, both methods re-
other information, the approximate radiation quire the extension of an additional conductor
resistance referred to the center of the driven out to the end of the driven element as a por-
element of multi-element parasitic arrays. It is tion of the matching system. The folded-ele-
obvious, from these lo.., values of radiation ment match is best on the 50-Mc. band and
HANDBOOK Stacked Vagi Arrays 4 99
!--o.2 >--+-o.n----j
GAIN ABOUT 12 DB
WITH 2 SECTIONS
FEEDER LINE
Figure 6
STACKED YAGI ARRAYS
It Is possible to attain a relatively large amount of gain over a limited bandwidth with stacked
yogi arrays, The two-sect/on array at (A) will give a gain of about 12 db, while adding a third
section will bring the gain up to about 15 db. Adding two additional parasitic directors to each
section, as at (C) will bring the goin up ta about 17 db.
higher where the a.dditional section of tubing Me. and 14-Mc. bands since it is only neces-
may be supported below the main radiator ele- sary to suspend a wire below the driven ele-
ment without undue difficulty. The yoke-match ment proper. The wire may be spaced below
is more satisfactory mechanically on the 28- the self-supporting element by means of several
500 Rotary Beams THE R AD I 0
FOR D1=1"
D2=.zs~=16
S= ,. .
s FOR 0= 1"
#12;1~E3 u ~= 11
FOR 0~ 1
s = 2" B..Eu.c__=14
#12.WIRE ~
YOKE MATCH
FOR 0= 1"
S= 1.5~=18
#12 WIRE RRAD.
FORD= 1
S= '.
#I WIRE
R~~D~ =24
FORD= 1 11
small strips of polystyrene which have been to be fed by me an s of a 465-ohm line con-
drilled for both the main element and the small structed of no. 12 wire spaced 2 inches. The
wire and threaded on the main element. approximate radiation resistance of such an
antenna array will be 20 ohms. Hence we need
The Folded-Element The calculation of the a ratio of impedance step up of 23 to obtain
Match Calculations operating conditions of a match between the characteristic impedance
the folded-element of the transmission line and the radiation re-
matching system and the yoke match, as shown sistance of the driven element of the antenna
in figures 7 A and 7B is relatively simple. A array. Inspection of the ratios given in figure
selected group of operating. conditions has 7 shows that the fourth set of dimensions
been shown on the drawing of figure 7. In ap- given under figure 7B will give a 24-to-1 step
plying the system it is only necessary to mul- up, which is sufficiently close. So it is merely
tiply the ratio of feed to radiation resistance necessary to use a l-inch diameter driven ele
(given in the figures to the right of the sug- ment with a no. 8 wire spaced on 1 inch centers
gested operating dimensions in figure 7) by (~ inch below the outside wall of the l-inch
the radiation resistance of the antenna system tubing) below the l-inch element. The no. 8
to obtain the impedance of the cable to be wire is broken and a 2-inch insulator placed
used in feeding the array. Approximate values in the center. The feed line then carries from
of radiation resistance for a number of com- this insulator down to the transmitter. The
monly used parasitic-element arrays are given center insulator should be supported rigidly
in figure 5. from the l-inch tube so that the spacing be-
As an example, suppose a 3-element array tween the piece of tubing and the no. 8 wire
with 0.15D-0.15R spacing between elements is will be accurately maintained.
HANDBOOK Matching Systems 501
~----------------L----------------~
r--1'Vo L--1--'""' L--!
Figure 8
AVERAGE DIMENSIONS
FOR THE DELTA AND
"T" MATCH
D1=3Dz
@ "T* MATCH
In many cases it will be desired to use the The conventional 3-wire match to give an
folded-element or yoke matching system with impedance "multiplication of 9 and the 5-wire
different sizes of conductors or different spac- match to give a ratio of approximately 25 are
ings than those shown in figure 7. Note, then, shown in figures 7C and 7D. The 4-wire match,
that the impedance transformation ratio of not shown, will give an impedance transforma-
these types of matching systems is dependent tion ratio of approximately 16.
both upon the ratio of conductor diameters and
upon their spacing. The following equation
has been given by Roberts (RCA Review, June, The Delta Match The Delta match and the
1947) for the determination of the impedance and T-Match T-match are shown in figure
transformation when using different diameters 8. The delta match has been
in the two sections of a folded element: largely superseded by the newer T-match, how-
ever both these systems can be adjusted to
z 2
give a low value of SWR on 50 to 600-ohm bal-
Transformation ratio = ( 1 +~ ) anced transmission lines. In the case of the
z. systems shown it will be necessary to make
In this equation Z, is the characteristic im- adjustments in the tapping distance along the
pedance of a line made up of the smaller of driven radiator until minimum standing waves
the two conductor diameters spaced the center- on the antenna transmission line are obtained.
to-center distance of the two conductors in the Since it is sometimes impracticable to elim-
antenna, and Z 2 is the characteristic imped- inate completely the standing waves from the
ance of a line made up of two conductors the antenna transmission line when using these
size of the larger of the two. This assumes matching systems, it is common practice to
that the feed line will be connected in series cut the feed line, after standing waves have
with the smaller of the two conductors so that been reduced to a minimum, to a length which
an impedance step up of greater than four will will give satisfactory loading of the transmitter
be obtained. If an impedance step up of less over the desired frequency range of operation.
than four is desired, the feed line is connected The inherent reactance of the T-match is
in series with the larger of the two conductors tuned out by the use of two identical resonat-
and Z 1 in the above equation becomes the im- ing capacitors in series with each leg of the
pedance of a hypothetical line made up of the T-rod. These capacitors should each have a
larger of the two conductors and Z 2 is made maximum capacity of 8 p.pfd. per meter of wave-
up of the smaller. The folded v-h-f unipole is length. Thus for 20 meters, each capacitor
an example where the transmission line is con- should have a maximum capacity of at least
nected in series with the 1 a r g e r of the two 160 p.p.fd. For power up to a kilowatt, 1000
conductors. volt spacing of the capacitors is adequate.
502 Rotary Beams THE R AD I 0
Figure 9
ALTERNATE FEED
METHODS WHERE THE
2.8 MC.- 4 TURNS 2" DIA., 2." LONG DRIVEN i:LEMENT MAY
ANT. TAPPED t TURN EACH SIDE
BE BROKEN IN THE
14 MC.- 8 TURNS 2" DIA., 2" LONG CENTER
ANT. TAPPED 2 TURNS EACH SIDE
@ROTARY LINK
COUPLING
COIL SPACED COILS 10
APPROX. 0.~" DIAMETER
These capacitors should be tuned for minimum the standing-wave ratio on the 52-ohm coaxial
SWR on the transmission line. The adjustment cable is less than 2-to-1. (B) shows an arrange-
of these capacitors should be made at the same ment for feeding an array with a broken driven
time the correct setting of the T-match rods is element from an open-wire line with the aid of
made as the two adjustments tend to be inter- a quarter-wave matching transformer. With 465-
locking. The use of the standing wave meter ohm line from the transmitter to the antenna
(described in Test Equipment chapter) is this system will give a close match to a 12-
recommended for making these adjustments to ohm impedance at the center of the driven ele-
the T-match. ment. (C) shows an arrangement which uses an
untuned transformer with lumped inductance
Feed Systems Using Four methods of exciting for matching the transmission line to the cen-
a Driven Element the driven element of a ter impedance of the driven element.
with Center Feed parasitic array are shown
in figure 9. The system Rotary Link In many cases it is desirable to
shown at (A) has proven to be quite satisfac- Coupling be able to allow the antenna ar-
tory in the case of an antenna-reflector two- ray to rotate continuously without
element array or in the case of a three-element regard to snarling of the feed line. If this is to
array with 0.2 to 0.25 wavelength spacing be- be done some sort of slip rings or rotary joint
tween the elements of the antenna system. The must be made in the feed line. One relatively
feed-point impedance of the center of the driven simple methodof allowing unrestrained rotation
element is close enough to the characteristic of .the antenna is to use the method of rotary
impedance of the 52-ohm coaxial cable so that link coupling shown in figure 9D. The two cou-
HANDBOOK The Gamma Match 503
MATCHING STUB
Figure II
Figure 10 IMPEDANCE MATCHING WITH A CLOSED
THE GAMMA MATCHING SYSTEM STUB ON A TWO WIRE TRANSMISSION
See text for details of resonating capacitor LINE
piing rings are 10 inches in diameter and are the transmission line and the driven element
usually constructed of ~-inch copper tubing of the array, and the gamma capacitor tunes
supported one from the rotating structure and out the inductance of the gamma rod. By ad-
one from the fixed structure by means of stand- justment of the length of the gamma rod, and
off insulators. The capacitor C in figure 9D is the setting of the gamma capacitor, the SWR
adjusted, after the antenna has been tuned, for on the coaxial line may be brought to a very
minimum standing-wave ratio on the antenna low value at the chosen operating frequency.
transmission line. The dimensions shown will The use of an Antennascope, described in the
allow operation with either 14-Mc. or 28-Mc. Test Equipment chapter is recommended for
elements, with appropriate adjustment of the precise adjustment of the gamma match.
capacitor C. The rings must of course be paral-
lel and must lie in a plane normal to the axis The Matching Stub If an open-wire line is
of rotation of the rotating structure. used to fe~d a low imped-
ance radiator, a section of the transmission
line may be employed as a matching stub as
The Gamma Match The use of coaxial cable shown in figure 11. The matching stub can
to feed the driven element transform any complex impedance to the char-
of a yagi array is becoming increasingly popu- acteristic impedance of the transmission line.
lar. One reason for this increased popularity While it is possible to obtain a perfect match
lies in the fact that the TVI-reduction problem and good performance with either an open stub
is simplified when coaxial feed line is used or a shorted one by observing appropriate di-
from the transmitter to the antenna system. mensions, a shorted stub is much more readily
Radiation from the feed line is minimized when adjusted. Therefore, the following discussion
coaxial cable is used, since the outer conduc- will be confined to the pro b 1 em of using a
tor of the line may be grounded at several closed stub to match a low impedance load to
points throughout its length and since the in- a high impedance traqsmission line.
tense field is entirely confined within the out- If the transmission line is so elevated that
er conductor of the coaxial cable. Other ad- adjustment of a "fundamental" shorted stub
vantages of coaxial cable as the antenna feed cannot be accomplished easily from the ground,
line lie in the fact that coaxial cable may be then the stub length may be increased by ex-
run within the structure of a building without actly one or two electrical half wavelengths,
danger, or the cable may be run underground without appreciably affecting its operation.
without disturbing its operation. Also, trans- While the correct position of the shorting
mitting-type low-pass filters for 52 ohm imped- bar and the point of attachment of the stub to
ance are more widely available and are less the line can be determined entirely by experi-
expensive than equivalent filters for two-wire mental methods, the fact that the two adjust-
line. ments are interdependent or interlocking makes
The gamma-match is illustrated in figure 10, such a cut-and-try procedure a tedious one.
and may be looked upon as one-half of a T- Much time can be saved by determining the ap-
match. One resonating capacitor is used, proximate adjustments required by reference to
placed in series with the gamma rod. The ca- a chart such as figure 12 and using them as a
pacitor should have a capacity of 7 llllfd per starter. Usually only a slight "touching up"
meter of wavelength. For 15-meter operation will produce a perfect match and flat line.
the capacitor should have a maximum capacity In order to utilize figure lZ, it is first neces
of 105 llllfd. The length of the gamma rod deter- sary to locate accurately a voltage node or
mines the impedance transformation between current node on the line in the vicinity that
504 Rotary Beams THE R AD I 0
ne 90 DIRECTIONAL
I
1138
"" c.
ao::J
w
7/311 70~
! .... " w
-
1/311 '- aoo
'- .)/J'I"
z
5131 so;:
......... ~ 1-
4
~"i)O... 40~
-"Nc~,.~ '1'-1( w
,.,.,r;;;::;. ,......,, >O.J
I
a:
I 01-
0
~
0 .J
2 3 .. I 7 8 9 10 W
SWR
Figure 12
SHORTED STUB LENGTH AND POSITION
CHART
From the stonding wave ratio and current or
voltage null position it is possible to deter-
mine the theoretically correct},length and
position of a shorted stub. In ctual prac
tice a sTight discrepancy usu lly will be FEED LINE
linear system which will give approximately natural result of the fact that a larger number
the same gain as the system of figure 13A, but of the radiating elements are directly fed with
which requires less boom length and greater energy, and of the fact that the effective radia-
total element length. Figure 13C illustrates tion resistance of each of the driven elements
the familiar lazy-H with driven reflectors (or of the array is much higher than the feed-point
directors, depending upon the point of view) resistance of a parasitic array. As a conse-
in a combination which will show wide band- quence of this fact, arrays of the type shown
width with a considerable amount of forward in figure 14 can be expected to cover a some-
gain and good front-to-hack ratio over the en- what greater frequency band for a specified
tire frequency coverage. value of standing-wave ratio than the parasitic
type of array.
Unidirectional Stacked Three p r act i c a b 1 e In most cases a simple open-wire line may
Broadside Arrays types of unidirectional be coupled to the feed point of the array with-
stacked broadside ar- out any matching system. The standing-wave
rays are shown in figure 14. The first type, ratio with such a system of feed will often be
shown at figure 14A, is the simple "lazy H" less than 2-to-1. However, if a more accurate
type of antenna with parasitic reflectors for match between the antenna transmission line
each element. (B) shows a simpler antenna ar- and the array is desired a conventional quar-
ray with a pair of folded dipoles spaced one- ter-wave stub, or a quarter-wave matching
half wave vertically, operating with reflectors. transformer of appropriate impedance, may be
In figure 14C is shown a more complex array used to obtain a low standing-wave ratio.
with six half waves and six reflectors which
will give a very worthwhile amount of gain.
In all three of the antenna arrays shown the
spacing between the driven elements and the 25-6 Bi-Directional
reflectors has been shown as one-quarter wave- Rotatable Arrays
length. This has been done to eliminate the
requirement for tuning of the reflector, as a
result of the fact that a half-wave element The bi-directional type of array is sometimes
spaced exactly one-quarter wave from a driven used on the 28-Mc. and 50-Mc. bands where
element will make a unidirectional array when signals are likely to be coming from only one
both elements are the same length. Using this general direction at a time. Hence the sacri-
procedure will give a gain of 3 db with the re- fice of dis~rimination against signals arriving
flectors over the gain without the reflectors, from the opposite direction is likely to be of
with only a moderate decrease in the radiation little disadvantage. Figure 15 shows two gen-
resistance of the driven element. Actually, eral types of bi-directional arrays. The flat-
the radiation resistance of a half-wave dipole top beam, which has been described in detail
goes down from 73 ohms to 60 ohms when an earlier, is well adapted to installation atop a
identical half-wave element is placed one- rotating structure. When self-supporting ele-
quarter wave behind it. ments are used in the flat-top beam the prob-
A very slight increase in gain for the entire lem of losses due to insulators at the ends of
array (about 1 db) ma.r be obtained at the ex- the elements is somewhat reduced. With a
pense of lowered radiation resistance, the ne- single-section flat-top beam a gain of approx-
cessity for tuning the reflectors, and decreased imately 4 db can be expected, and with two
bandwidth by placing the reflectors 0.15 wave- sections a gain of approximately 6 db can be
length behind the driven elements and making obtained.
them somewhat longer than the driven elements. Another type of bi-directional array which
The radiation resistance of each element will has seen less use than it deserves is shown
drop approximately to one-half the value ob- in figure 15B. This type of antenna system has
tained with untunedhalf-wave reflectors spaced a relatively broad azimuth or horizontal beam,
one-quarter wave behind the driven elements. being capable of receiving signals with little
Antenna arrays of the type shown in figure diminution in strength over approximately 40,
14 require the use of some sort of lattice work but it has a quite sharp elevation pattern since
for the supporting structure since the arrays substantially all radiation is concentrated at
occupy appreciable distance in space in all the lower angles of radiation if more than a
three planes. total of four elements is used in the antenna
system. Figure 15B gives the approximate gain
Feed Methods The requirements for the feed over a half-wave dipole at the height of the
systems for antenna arrays of center of the array which can be expected. Al-
the type shown in figure 14 are less critical so shown in this figure is a type of "rotating
than those for the close-spaced parasitic ar- mast" structure which is well suited to rota-
rays shown in the previous section. This is a tion of this type of array.
506 Rotary Beams THE R AD I 0
CAIN APPROX. 9 DB
t STUB
BROADSIDE HALF-WAVES
WITH REFLECTORS
GAIN APPROX. 7 DB
Figure 14
BROADSIDE ARRAYS
WITH PARASITIC
REFLECTORS
The apparent gain of the ar
"TWO OVER TWO OVER TWO" rays illustratecl will be great
WITH REFLECTORS er than the values given clue
to concentration of the racli
GAIN APPROX. If.! DB
atecl si,nal at the lower ele
vat/on angles.
If six or more elements are used in the type tuning will apply. However, the factor that a
of array shown in figure 15B no matching sec bi-directional array need be rotated through an
tion will be required between the antenna trans angle of less than 180 should be considered
mission line and the feed point of the antenna. in this connection.
When only four elements are used the antenna
is the familiar "lazy H" and a quarter-wave
stub should be used for feeding from the an
tenna transmission line to the feed point of 25-7 Construction of
the antenna system.
Rotatable Arrays
If desired, and if mechanical considerations
permit, the gain of the arrays shown in figure
15B may be increased by 3 db by placing a A considerable amount of ingenuity may be
halfwave reflector behind each of the ele exercised in the construction of the supporting
ments at a spacing of one-quarter wave. The structure for a rotatable array. Every person
array then becomes essentially the same as bas his own ideas as to the best method of
that shown in figure 14C and the same con construction. Often the most practicable meth
siderations in regard to reflector spacing and od of construction will be dictated by the
HANDBOOK Bi-directional Arrays 507
0
FLAT-TOP BEAM FOR
STUB
ROTATABLE ARRAY
GAIN 4 TO I 08
"TWO OVER TWO OVER TWO
TYPE OF ARRAY
TOTAL NUMBER
Figure 15 OF ELEMENTS
availability of certain types of constructional 24ST has proven over a period of time to be
materials. But in any event be sure that sound quite satisfactory. Copper tubing is too heavy
mechanical engineering principles are used in for a given strength, and steel tubing, unless
the design of the supporting structure. There copper plated, is likely to add an undesirably
are few things quite as discouraging as the large loss resistance to the array. Also, steel
picking up of pieces, repairing of the roof, etc., tubing, even when plated, is not likely to
when a newly constructed rotary comes down withstand salt atmosphere such as encountered
in the first strong wind. If the principles of along the seashore for a satisfactory period
mechanical engineering are understood it is of time. Do not use a soft aluminum alloy for
wise to calculate the loads and torques which the elements unless they will be quite short;
will exist in the various members of the struc- 24ST is a hard alloy and is best although there
ture with the highest wind velocity which may are several other alloys ending in "ST" which
be expected in the locality of the installation. will be found to be satisfactory. Do not use
If this is not possible it will usually be worth an alloy ending in "SO" or "S" in a position
the time and effort to look up a friend who in the array where structural strength is im
understands these principles. portant, since these letters designate a metal
which has not been heat treated for strength
Radiating One thing more or less standard and rigidity. However, these softer alloys, and
Elements about the construction of rotatable aluminum electrical conduit, may be used for
anteiUla arrays is the use of dural short radiating elements such as would be
tubing for the self-supporting elements. Other used for the 50-Mc. band or as interconnecting
materials may be used but an alloy known as conductors in a stacked array.
5 08 Rotary Beams THE R AD I 0
LINE OF /- - - -<--?"ncr-~
~~N~S~~~~~~~ LINE OF
ELEMENT
Figure 16
~ELEMENT "PLUMBER~
DELIGHT" ANTENNA ARRAY
All-metal configura/ion permits rugged,
- - _ 2 X 4 BOLTED TO LADDER BY
light assembly. Joints are made with 2 PIECES OF ANGLE IRON STOCK
U-bolts and metal plates for maximum
rigidity.
Figure 17
(A) OXEN-YOKE CLAMP IS DESIGNED FOR
"Plumber's Delight" It is characteristic of ALL METAL ASSEMBLY
Construction
the conventional type of
multi-element parasitic (B) ALTERNATIVE WOODEN SUPPORTING
array such as discussed previously and our- ARRANGEMENT
lined that the centers of all the elements are at
zero r-f potential with respect to ground. It is A wooden ladder may be used to support a
therefore possible to use a metallic structure 10 or 15 meter array.
without insulators for supporting the various
elements of the array. A typical three element used for the 10 and 15 meter antennas, and the
array of this type is shown in figure 16. In this huskier four inch pipe should be used for a
particular array, U-bolts and metal plates have 20 meter beam.
been employed to fasten the elements to the Automobile muffler clamps can often be
boom. The elements are made of telescoping used to affix the elements to the support
sectwns of aluminum tubing. The tips of the plates. Larger clamps of this type will fasten
inner sections of tubing are split, and a tubing the plates to the boom. In most cases, the
clamp is slipped over the joint, as shown in muffler clamps are untreated, and they should
the drawing. Before assembly of the joint, the be given one or two coats of rust-proof paint
mating pieces of aluminum are given a thin to protect them from inclement weather. All
coat of Penetrox-A compound. (This anti- . bolts, nuts, and washers used in the assembly
oxidizing paste is manufactured by Burndy Co., of the array should be of the plated variety to
Norwalk, Conn. and is distributed by the reduce corrosion and rust.
General Electric Supply Co.) When the tubes An alternative assembly is to employ the
are relesaoped and the clamp is tightened, an oxen Yoke" type of clamps, shown in figure
air-tight seal is produced, reducing corrosion 17. These light-weight aluminum fittings are
to a minimum. obtainable from the Continental Electronics
The boom of the parasitic array may be made and Sound Co., Dayton, 27, Ohio, and are
from two or three sections of steel TV mast, available in a wide range of sizes.
or it may be made of a single section of alumi- If it is desired to use a split driven element
num irrigation pipe. This pipe is made by for a balanced feed system, it is necessary to
Reynolds Aluminum Co., and others, and may insulate the element from the supporting srruc
often be purchased via the Sears, Roebuck Co. ture of the antenna. The element should be
mail-order department. Three inch pipe may be severed at the center, and the two halves
HANDBOOK Tuning the Array 509
driven onto a wooden dowel, as shown in use very low power (5 or 10 watts of power is
figure 178. The element may then be mounted usually sufficient) and make sure that the an
upon an aluminum support plate by means of tenna transmission line is effectively grounded
four ceramic insulators. Metal based insulators, as far as d-e plate voltage is concerned. The
such as the Johnson 135-67 are recommended, use of the method described in the previous
since the all-ceramic types may break at the paragraph of course eliminates these problems.
mounting holes when the array is subjected One satisfactory method for tuning the array
to heavy winds. proper, assuming that it is a system with sev-
eral parasitic elements, is to set the directors
to the dimensions given in figure 5 and then
25-8 Tuning the Array to adjust the reflector for maximum forward
signal. Then the first director should be varied
in length until maximum forward signal is ob-
Although satisfactory results may be ob-
tained by pre-cutting the antenna array to the tained, and so on if additional directors are
dimensions given earlier in this chapter, the used. Then the array may be reversed in direc
occasion might arise when it is desired to tion and the reflector adjusted for best front
make a check on the operation of the antenna to-hack ratio. Subsequent small adjustments
before calling the job complete. may then be made in both the directors and the
The process of tuning an array may fairly reflector for best forward signal with a reason
satisfactorily be divided into two more or less able ratio of fronttoback signal. The adjust
distinct steps: the actual tuning of the array ments in the directors and the reflector will
for best frontto-back ratio or for maximum for be found to be interdependent to a certain de
ward gain, and the project of obtaining the gree, but if small adjustments are made after
best possible impedance match between the the preliminary tuning process a satisfactory
antenna transmission line and the feed point set of adjustments for maximum performance
of the array. will be obtained. It is usually best to make
the end sections of the elements smaller in
Tuning the The actual tuning of the array diameter so that they will slip inside the larger
Array Proper for best front-toback ratio or tubing sections. The smaller sliding sections
maximum forward gain may best may be clamped inside the larger main sec
be accomplished with the aid of a low-power tions.
transmitter feeding a dipole antenna (polarized In making the adjustments described, it is
the same as the array being tuned) at least best to have the rectifying element of the re-
four or five wavelengths away from the anten- mote-indicating field-strength meter directly
na being tuned and located at the same eleva- at the feed point of the array, with a resistor
tion as that of the antenna under test. A cali- at the feed point of the estimated value of
brated field-strength meter of the remote-indi- feed-point impedance for the array.
cating type is then coupled to the feed point
of the antenna array being tuned. The trans-
missions from the portable transmitter should Matching to the The problem of matching the
Antenna Trans impedance of the antenna
be made as short as possible and the call sign
of the station making the test should be trans- mission Line transmission line to the array
mitted at least every ten minutes. is much simplified if the pro-
It is, of course, possible to tune an array
with the receiver connected to it and with a
station a mile or two away making transmis
sions on your request. But this method is more DRIVEN ELEMENT~
cumbersome and is not likely to give complete +-MOVEABLE
satisfaction. It is also possible to carry out SHORTING
BAR
the tuning process with the transmitter con-
nected to the array and with the field-strength
meter connected to the remote dipole antenna.
~RID
In this event the indicating instrument of the
remote-indicating field-strength meter shouid
be visible from the position where the elements DIP "ETER
are being tuned. However, when the array is
being tuned with the transmitter connected to
it there is always the problem of making con Figure 18
tinual adjustments to the transmitter so that a ADJUSTMENT OF GAMMA MATCH BY USE
constant amount of power will be fed to the OF ANTENNASCOPE AND GRID-DIP
array under test. Also, if you use this system, METER
r
IMPORTANT NOTE
BE SURE THAT THE PI PES FIT
WITHOUT BINDING AS THERE
IS SOME VARIATION INDIA- :::0
METERS OF TH SIZES USED.
0
1>1
l~~
MAST UP TO
FULL HEIGHT
'<
lXI
7-8FT. I'D
1>1
TWO 3/8" OR 1/2" MACHINE r, ABOUT 2H OF 1 1/4" PIPE. 3
SCREWS ABOUT 1.12'"' LONG THIS IS THE BEARING THAT
THROUGH BEARING PIECE
AND TAPPED INT01'"' PIPE.
II
,.1_
CARRIES THE LOAD.
"'
7T08FT.
II /'~~~~J~:!~~~~~:~JJ~1".ti:~GE.
~~~::;:=~
OAAWI r
II
~
111PtPE LOWERS TO
II INSTALL ANTENNA OR
II ADJUST
II
II
....
IL J
:::t:
~~- .... ~ m
PITCHED ROOF INSTALLATION FLAT OR SHED ROOF INSTALLATION
0
HANDBOOK Tuning the Array 511
cess of tuning the array is made a substan- it is satisfactory to leave the installation as
tially separate process as just described. After it is. If the ratio is greater than this range it
the tuning operation is complete, the resonant will be best when twin line or coaxial line is
frequency of the driven element of the antenna being used, and advisable with open-wire line,
should be checked, directly at the center of to attempt to decrease the s.w.r.
the driven element if practicable, with a grid- It must be remembered that no adjustments
dip meter. It is important that the resonant fre- made at the transmitter end of the transmission
quency of the antenna be at the center of the line will alter the SWR on the line. All adjust-
frequency band to be covered. If the resonant ments to better the SWR must be made at the
frequency is found to be much different from antenna endof the line and to the device which
the desired frequency, the length of the driven performs the impedance transformation neces-
element of the array should be altered until sary to match the characteristic impedance of
this condition exists. A relatively small change the antenna to that of the transmission line.
in the length of the driven element will have Before any adjustments to the matching sys-
only a second order effect on the tuning of the tem are made, the resonant frequency of the
parasitic elements of the array. Hence, a mod- driven element must be ascertained, as ex-
erate change in the length of the driven ele- plained previously. If all adjustments to cor-
ment may be made without repeating the tuning rect impedance mismatch are made at this fre-
process for the parasitic elements. quency, the problem of reactance termination
When the resonant frequency of the antenna of the transmission line is eliminated, greatly
system is correct, the antenna transmission simplifying the problem. The following steps
line, with impedance-matching device or net- should be taken to adjust the impedance trans-
work between the line and antenna feed point, formation:
is then attached to the array and coupled to a 1. The output impedance of the matching
low-power exciter unit or transmitter. Then, device should be measured. An Antenna-
preferably, a standing-wave meter is connected scope and a grid-dip oscillator are re-
in series with the antenna transmission line quired for this step. The Antennascope
at a point relatively much more close to the is connected to the output terminals of
transmitter than to the antenna. However, for the matching device. If the driven element
best indication there should be 10 to 15 feet is a folded dipole, the Antennascope
of line between the transmitter and the stand- connects directly to the split section of
ing-wave meter. If a standing-wave meter is the dipole. If a gamma match or T-match
not available the standing-wave ratio may be are used, the Antennascope connects to
checked approximately by means of a neon the transmission-line end of the device.
lamp or a short fluorescent tube if twin trans- If a Q-section is used, the Antennascope
mission line is being used, or it may be check- connects to the bottom end of the sec-
ed with a thermomilliammeter and a loop, a tion. The grid-dip oscillator is coupled
neon lamp, or an r-f ammeter and a pair of to the input terminals of the Antenna-
clips spaced a fixed distance for clipping onto scope as shown in figure 18.
one wire of a two-wire open line. 2. The grid-dip oscillator is tuned to the
If the standing-wave ratio is below 1. 5 to 1 resonant frequency of the antenna, which
Figure 19
ALL-PIPE ROTATING MAST STRUCTURE FOR ROOF INSTALLATION
An installation suitable for a building with a pitched roof is shown at (A). At (B) Is shown a
similar installation for a flat or shec/ roof. The arrangement as shown is strong enough to sup-
port a lightweight 3-element 28-Mc. array one/ a I ight 3-element SO-Me. array above the 28-Mc.
array on the enc/ of a 4-foot length of !-l-inch pipe.
The lengths of pipe shown were chosen so that when the system is in the lowered position one
can stone/ on a household lac/c/er one/ put the beam in position atop the rotating pipe. The lengths
may safely be revised upward somewhat if the array is of a particularly lightweight design with
low wind resistance.
Just before the mast is installed it is a goocl iclea to give the rotating pipe a gooc/ smearing of
cup grease or waterproof pump grease. To get the lip of the top of the stationary section of 1 ~
inch pipe to project above the flange plate, it will be necessary to hove a plumbing shop cut a
slightly deeper thread Inside the flange plate, as well as cutting an unusually long thread on
the end of the 1'14inc:h pipe, It is relatively easy to waterproof thi:s assembly through the roof
since the 1 ~-inch pipe is stationary at all times. Be sure to use pipe compound on all the joints
ancl then really tighten these joints with a pair of pipe wrenches.
512 Rotary Beams THE RA0 I 0
I
I
I !~..--~-------,
I
I
&-CONTACT JONES PLUGS & SOCKETS
Figure 21
ating pos1t10n as possible. However, on a par- located on the bottom pipe of the rotating mast,
ticular installation the positions of the current with the thrust bearing for the structure lo-
minimums on the transmission line near the cated above the roof.
transmitter may be checked with the array in If the rotating mast is located a distance
the air, and then the array may be lowered to from the operating position, a system of pul-
ascertain whether or not the positions of these leys and drive rope may be used to turn the an-
points have moved. If they have not, and in tenna, or a slow speed electric motor may be
most cases if the feeder line is strung out back employed.
and forth well above ground as the antenna is The rotating platform system is best if a
lowered they will not change, the positions of tower or telephone pole is to be used for an-
the last few toward the antenna itself may be tenna support. A number of excellent rotating
determined. Then the calculation of the match- platform devices are available on the market
ing quarter-wave section may be made, the sec- for varying prices. The larger and more expen-
tion installed, the standing-wave ratio again sive rotating devices are suitable for the rota-
checked, and the antenna re-installed in its of a rather sizeable array for the 14-Mc. band
final location. while the smaller structures, such as those
designed for rotating a TV antenna are design
ed for less load and should be used only with
a 28-Mc. or 50-Mc. array. Most common prac-
25-9 Antenna Rotation Systems tice is to install the rotating device atop a
platform built at the top of a telephone pole
Structures for the rotation of antenna arrays or on the top of a lattice mast of sizeable cross
may be divided into two general classes: the section so that the mast will be self-support-
rotating mast and the rotating platform. The ing and capable of withstanding the torque im-
rotating mast is especially suitable where the posed upon it by the rotating platform.
transmitting equipment is installed in the gar- A heavy duty TV rotator may be employed
age or some structure away from the main for rotation of 6 and 10-meter arrays. Fifteen
house. Such an installation is shown in figure and twenty meter arrays should use rotators
19. A very satisfactory rotation mechanism is designed for amateur use such as the Cornell-
obtained by the use of a large steering wheel
Dubilier H AM-1 unit shown in figure 20.
514 Rotary Beams
t
FEEDPOINTI
AT HI(;HES;FREQUENCY
RESONANT t AT
INTERMEDIATE FREQUENCY
AT LOWEST FREQUENCY
Mobile Equipment
Design and Installation
Mobile operation is permitted on all amateur mon difficulty with a double conversion super
bands. Tremendous impetus to this phase of heterodyne constructed as an integral receiver
the hobby was given by the suitable design of in one cabinet. However, it is important that
compact mobile equipment. Complete mobile the bc receiver employ an r-f stage in order to
installations may be purchased as packaged provide adequate isolation between the con
units, or the whole mobile station may be home verter and the high frequency oscillator in the
built, according to the whim of the operator. bc receiver. The rf stage also is desirable
The problems involved in achieving a satis- from the standpoint of image rejection if the
factory two-way installation vary somewhat converter does not employ a tuned output cir
-with the band, but many of the problems are cuit (tuned to the frequency of the auto set,
common to all bands. For instance, ignition usually about 1500 kc.). A few of the late
noise is more troublesome on 10 meters than model auto receivers, even in the better makes,
on 75 meters, but on the other hand an effi- do not employ an rf stage.
cient antenna system is much more easily ac- The usual procedure is to obtain converter
complished on 10 meters than on 75 meters. plate voltage from the auto receiver. Experi
Also, obtaining a worthwhile amount of trans ence has shown that if the converter does not
mitter output without excessive battery drain draw more than about 15 or at most 20 rna. tot
is a problem on all bands. al plate current no damage to the auto set or
loss in performance will occur other than a
slight reduction in vibrator life. The converter
drain can be minimized by avoiding a voltage
regulator tube on the converter hf oscillator.
26-1 Mobile Reception On 10 meters and lower frequencies it is pos
sible to design an oscillator with sufficient
When a broadcast receiver is in the car, the stability so that no voltage regulator is re
most practical receiving arrangement involves quired in the converter.
a converter feeding into the auto set. The ad With some cars satisfactory 75-meter opera
vantages of good selectivity with good image cion can be obtained without a noise clipper
rejection obtainable from a double conversion if resistor type spark plugs (such as those
superheterodyne are achieved in most cases made by Autolite) are employed. However, a
without excessive "birdie" troubles, a com noise clipper is helpful if not absolutely neces
515
516 Mobile Equipment THE R AD I 0
shown. Multi-position tone controls tied in needed on weak broadcast signals, the switch
with the second detector circuit often permit can be connected from the hot side of the vol-
excessive "leak through." Hence it is recom- ume control to the junction of the 22,000,
mended that the tone control components be 270,000 and 1 megohm resistors instead of as
completely removed unless they are confined shown. This will provide approximately 6 db
to the grid of the a-f output stage. If removed, more gain when the clipper is switched out.
the highs can be attenuated any desired amount Many late model receivers are provided with
by connecting a mica capacitor from plate to an internal r-f gain control in the cathode of
screen on the output stage. Ordinarily from the r-f and/ or i-f stage. This control should
.005 to .01 p.fd. will provide a good compro- be advanced full on to provide better noise
mise between fidelity and reduction of back- limiter action and make up for the loss in audio
ground hiss on weak signals. gain introduced by the noise clipper.
Usually the switch SW will have to be Installation of the noise clipper often de-
mounted some distance from the noise limiter tunes the secondary of the last i-f transformer.
components. If the leads to the switch are over This should be repeaked before the set is per
approximately 1\1 inches long, a piece of manently replaced in the car unless the trim-
shield braid should be slipped over them and mer is accessible with the set mounted in
grounded. The same applies to the "hot" leads place.
to the volume control if not already shielded. Additional clipper circuits will be found in
Closing the switch disables the limiter. This the receiver chapter of this Handbook.
may be desirable for reducing distortion on
broadcast reception or when checking the in- Selectivity While not of serious concern on
tensity of ignition noise to determine the ef- 10 meters, the lack of selectivity
fectiveness of suppression measures taken on exhibited by a typical auto receiver will result
the car. The switch also permits one to check in QRM difficulty on 20 and 75 meters. A typi-
the effectiveness of the noise clipper. cal auto set has only two i-f transformers of
The 22,000-ohm decoupling resistor at the relatively low-Q design, and the second one
bottom end of the i-f transformer secondary is is loaded by the diode detector. The skirt se-
not critical, and if some other value already le.ctivity often is so poor that a strong local
is incorporated inside the shield can it may be wlll depress the a. v.c. when listening to a
left a 1 one so long as it is not over 47,000 weak station as much as 15 kc. different in
ohms, a common value. Higher values must be frequency.
replaced with a lower value even if it requires One solution is to add an outboard i-f stage
a can opener, because anything over 47,000 employing two good quality double-tuned trans-
ohms will result in excessive loss in gain. formers (not the midget variety) connected
There is some loss in a-f gain inherent in this "back-to-back" through a small coupling ca-
type of limiter anyhow (slightly over 6 db), pacitance. The amplifier tube (such as a 6BA6)
and it is important to minimize any additional should be biased to the point where the gain
loss. of the outboard unit is relatively small (1 or
It is important that the total amount of ca- 2), assuming that the receiver already has ade-
pacitance in the RC decoupling (r-f) filter not quate gain. If additional gain is needed, it may
exceed about 100 p.p.fd. With a value much be provided by the outboard unit. Low-capaci-
greater than this "pulse stretching" will occur tance shielded cable should be used to couple
and the effectiveness of the noise clipper will into and out of the outboard unit, and the unit
be reduced. Excessive capacitance will reduce itself should be thoroughly shielded.
the amplitude and increase the duration of the Such an outboard unit will shatpen the nose
ignition pulses before they reach the clipper. selectivity slightly and the skirt selectivity
The reduction in pulse amplitude accomplishes greatly. Operation then will be comparable to
no good since the pulses are fed to the clipper a home-station communications receiver,
anyhow, but the greater duration of the length though selectivity will not be as good as a
ened pulses increases the audibility and the receiver employing a 50-kc. or 85-kc. "Q5' er."
blanking interval associated with each pulse.
If a shielded wire to an external clipper is em- Obtaining Power While the set is on the
ployed, the r-f by-pass on the "low" side of for the Converter bench for installation of
the RC filter may be eliminated since the ca- the noise clipper, provi-
pacitance of a few feet of shielded wire will sion should be made for obtaining filament and
accomplish the same result as the by-pass plate voltage for the converter, and for the ex-
capacitor. citer and speech amplifier of the transmitter
The switch SW is connected in such a man if such an arrangement is to be used. To per:
ner that there is practically no change in gain mit removal of either the converter or the auto
with the limiter in or out. If the auto set does set from the car without removing the other, a
not have any reserve gain and more gain is connector should be provided. The best method
518 Mobile Equipment THE RA0 I 0
eyovc CONVERTER
the power supply filter (usually two electroly
tics straddling a resistor in an R-C filter), then
follow the output of the filter over into the r-f
portion of the set and pick it up there at a con-
venient point, before it goes through any addi
tional series dropping or isolating resistors,
B+ TO REST
as shown in figure 2.
OF SET.
The voltage at the output of the filter usual-
ly runs from 200 to 250 volts wi rh typical con
REGULAR
verter drain and the motor not running. This
""'-'-R-CFILTER will increase perhaps 10 per cent when the
~O.UF generator is charging. The converter drain will
drop the B voltage slightly at the output of the
B+ 200 TO 250 V. filter, perhaps 15 to 25 volts, bur this reduc
TO XMTR.
rion is nor enough to have a noticeable effect
upon the operation of the receiver. If the B
6 V. VIA CONTROL
r------------,
I I
RELAY IN XMTR. voltage is higher than desirable or necessary
10HY. for proper operation of the converter, a 2-watt
1
s+~POWERI
...1. ~:tF.rfN~ ~PEEcH
1 REtE~e~R_L v
0
carbon resistor of suitable resistance should
, 18
"' -
converter end or the set end of the cable be- Practically all 0.3-ampere r-f and a-f volt-
tween the converter and receiver. This auxil- age amplifier tubes have 0.15-ampere equiva
iary trimmer should have a range of about 3 lents. In many cases it is not even necessary
to 50 p.p.fd., and may be of the inexpensive to change the socket wiring. However, when
compression mica type. substituting i-f tubes it is recommended that
With the trimmer cut out and the converter the i-f trimmer adjustments be checked. Gen-
turned off (by-passed by the "in-out" switch), erally speaking it is not wise to attempt to
peak the regular antenna trimmer on the auto substitute for the converter tube or a-f power
set at about 1400 kc. Then turn on the convert output tube.
er, with the receiver tuned to 1500 kc., switch If the a-f output tube employs conventional
in the auxiliary trimmer, and peak this trimmer cathode bias, substitute a cathode resistor of
for maximum background noise. The auxiliary twice the value originally employed, or add
trimmer then can be left switched in at all an identical resistor in series with the one
times except when receiving very weak broad- already in the set. This will reduce the B
cast band signals. drain of the receiver appreciably without ser
Some auto sets, particularly certain General iously reducing the maximum undistorted out-
Motors custom receivers, employ a high-Q high- put. Because the vibrator power supply is much
impedance input circuit which is very critical less than 100 per cent efficient, a saving of
as to antenna capacitance. Unless the shunt one watt of B drain results in a saving of near-
capacitance of the antenna (including cable) ly 2 watts of battery drain. This also mini
approximates that of the antenna installation mizes the overload on the B supply when the
for which the set was designed, the antenna converter is switched in, assuming that the
trimmer on the auto set cannot be made to hit converter uses B voltage from the auto set.
resonance with the converter cut out. This is If the receiver uses push-pull output and if
particularly true when a long antenna cable is one is willing to accept a slight reduction in
used to reach a whip mounted at the rear of the the maximum volume obtainable without dis-
car. Usually the condition can be corrected by tortion, changing over to a single ended stage
unsoldering the internal connection to the an- is simple if the receiver employs conventional
tenna terminal connector on the auto set and cathode bias. Just pull out one tube, double
inserting in series a 100-p.p.fd. mica capacitor. the value of cathode bias resistance, and add
Alternatively an adjustable trimmer covering a 25-p.fd. by-pass capacitor across the cathode
at least 50 to 150 p.p.fd. may be substituted for resistor if not already by-passed. In some
the 100-p.p.fd. fixed capacitor. Then the adjust cases it may be possible to remove a phase
ment of this trimmer and that of the regular an- inverter tube along with one of the a-f output
tenna trimmer can be juggled back and forth tubes.
until a condition is achieved where the input If the receiver uses a motor driven station
circuit of the auto set is resonant with the con- selector with a control tube (dc amplifier),
verter either in or out of the circuit. This will usually the tube can be removed without up-
provide maximum gain and image rejection setting the operation of the receiver. One then
under all conditions of use. must of course use manual tuning.
While the changeover is somewhat expen
Reducing Battery When the receiving installa- sive, the 0.6 ampere drawn by a 6X4 or 6X5
Drain of the tion is used frequently, and rectifier can be eliminated by substituting six
Receiver particularly when the receiv- US-volt rms 50-rna. selenium rectifiers (such
er is u s e d w i t h t h e car as Federal type 402D3200). Three in series
parked, it is desirable to keep the battery are substituted for each half of the full-wave
drain of the receiver-converter installation at rectifier tube. Be sure to observe the correct
an absolute minimum. A substantial reduction polarity. The selenium rectifiers also make a
in drain can be made in many receivers, with- good substitution for an OZ4 or OZ4GT which
out appreciably affecting their performance. is causing hash difficulties when using the
The saving of course depends upon the de- converter.
sign of the particular receiver and upon how Offsetting the total cost of nearly $4.00 is
much trouble and expense one is willing to go the fact that these rectifiers probably will last
to. Some receivers normally draw (without the for the entire life of the auto set. Before pur
converter connected) as much as 10 amperes. chasing the rectifiers, make sure that there is
In many cases this can be cut to about 5 am- room available for mounting them. While these
peres by incorporating all practicable modi- units are small, most of the newer auto sets
fications. Each of the following modifications employ very compact construction.
is applicable to many auto receivers.
If the receiver uses a speaker with a field Two-Meter Reception For reception on the 144-
coil, replace the speaker with an equivalent Mc. amateur band, and
P\1 type. those higher in frequency, the simple converter
One-Tube Converter 521
HANDBOOK
auto-set combination has not proven very satis- tion. A total transmitter power drain of about
factory. The primary reason for this is the fact 80 watts from the car battery (6 volts at 13
that the relatively sharp i-f channel of the auto amperes, or 12 volts at 7 amperes) is about
set imposes too severe a limitation on the sta- the maximum that can be allowed under these
bility of the high-frequency oscillator in the conditions. For maximum power efficiency it
converter. And if a crystal-controlled beating is recommended that a vibrator type of supply
oscillator is used in the converter, only a por- be used as opposed to a dynamotor supply,
tion of the band may be covered by tuning the since the conversion efficiency of the vibrator
auto set. unit is high compared to that of the dynamotor.
The most satisfactory arrangement has been A second school of thought states that the
found to consist of a separately mounted i.f., mobile transmitter should be of relatively high
audio, and power supply system, with the con- power to overcome the poor efficiency of the
verter mounted near the steering column. The usual mobile whip antenna. In this case, the
i-f system should have a bandwidth of 30 to mobile power should be drawn from a system
100 kc. and may have a center frequency of that is independent from the electrical system
10.7 Me. if standard i-f transformers are to be of the automobile. A belt driven high voltage
used. The control head may include the 144- generator is often coupled to the automobile
Mc. r-f, mixer, and oscillator sections, and engine in this type of installation.
some times the first i-f stage. Alternatively,
A variation of this idea is to employ
the control head may include only the h-f os-
a complete secondary power system in the
cillator, with a broadband r-f unit included
within the main receiver assembly along with car capable of providing 115 volts a.c. Shown
the i.f. and audio system. Commercially manu- in figure 4 is a Leece-N eville three phase
factured kits and complete units using this alternator mounted atop the engine block, and
general lineup are available. driven with a fan belt. The voltage regulator
An alternative arrangement is to build a and selenium rectifier for charging the car
converter, 10. 7-Mc. i-f channel, and second battery from the ac system replace the usual
detector unit, and then to operate this unit in d-e generator. These new items are mounted
conjunction with the auto-set power supply, in the front of the car radiator. The alternator
audio system, and speaker. Such a system provides a balanced delta output circuit where-
makes economical use of space and power in the line voltage is equal to the coil volt-
drain, and can be switched to provide normal age, but the line current is y3 times the coil
broadcast-band auto reception or reception current. The coil voltage is a nominal 6-volts,
through a converter for the h-f amateur bands. RMS and three 6.3 volt 25 ampere filament
transformers may be connected in delta on
A recent development has been the VHF the primary and secondary windings to step
transceiver, typified by the Gonset Communi- the 6-volts up to three-phase 115-volts. If
cator. Such a unit combines a crystal con- desired, a special 115-volt, 3-phase step-up
trolled transmitter and a tunable VHF receiver transformer may be wound which will occupy
together with a common audio system and less space than the three f i 1 amen t trans-
power supply. The complete VHF station may formers. Since the ripple frequency of a three
be packaged in a single cabinet. Various phase d-e power supply will be quite high, a
forms of VHF transceivers are shown in the single 10 mfd filter capacitor will suffice.
construction chapters of this Handbook.
10-i FT
l
Figure 6
5/16-WAVE WHIP RADIATOR FOR 10
METERS
If a whip antenna is made slightly longer
than one-quarter wave it acts as a slightly
better radiator than the usual quarterwave
whip, and it can provide a better match to
the antenna transmission line If tht> react
ance Is tuned out by a series capacitor close
to the base of the antenna. Capacitor C 1 may
be a 100-J.LJ.Lfd. midget variable.
TO
ANT. 26-4 Construction and
Installation of Mobile
Equipment
~~,
g~. } ~
by means of an ordinary push-to-talk switch
on a microphone. These contacts are not de-
signed for heavy work, and the inductive kick
will cause more sparking than the contacts on
the microphone switch are designed to handle.
It is better to actuate a single relay with the
ALTERNATE MAIN POWER RECEIVER ANTENNA ANY
push-to-talk switch and then control all other CONTROL
SWITCH
RELAY MUTING CHANGEOVER OTHER
RELAY RELAY RELAYS
relays, including the heavy duty contactor for
the dynamotor or vibrator pack, with this relay.
The procedure of operating only one relay Figure 9
direcdy by the push-to-talk switch, with all RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT
other relays being controlled by this control Simp/lfieel schematic of the recommeneleel
relay, will eliminate the often-encountered dif- relay control circuit for mobile transmitters.
ficulty where the shutting down of one item of The relatively small push-to-talk relay Is
equipment will close relays in other items as control/eel by the button on the microphone
a result of the coils of relays being placed in or the communications switch. Then one of
series with each other and with heater circuits. the contacts on this relay controls the other
A recommended general control circuit, where relays of the transmitter; one s/ele of the
one side of the main control relay is connected coil of all the aelelitional relays control/eel
to the hot 6-volt circuit, but all other relays shoul el be grouneleel.
have one side connected to ground, is illus-
trated in figure 9. An additional advantage
of such a circuit is that only one control wire
need be run to the coil of each additional re-
lay, the other side of the relay coils being microphones is the standard Western Electric
grounded. type F-1 unit (or Automatic Electric Co. equi-
The heavy-duty 6-volt solenoid-type contac- valent). This microphone has very high output
tor relays such as provided on the PE-103A when operated at 6 volts, and good fidelity
and used for automobile starter relays usually on speech. When used without a speech am-
draw from 1.5 to 2 amperes. While somewhat plifier stage the microphone transformer should
more expensive, heavy-duty 6-volt relays of have a 50-ohm primary (rather than 200 or 500
conventional design, capable of breaking 30 ohms) and a secondary of at 1 east 150,000
amperes at 6 v o 1 t s d. c., are available with ohms and preferably 250,000 ohms.
coils drawing less than 0.5 ampere. The widely available surplus type T-17 mi-
When purchasing relays keep in mind that crophone has higher resistance (200 to 500
the current rating of the contacts is not a fixed ohms) and lower output, and usually wi 11 re-
value, but depends upon (I) the voltage, (2) quire a stage of speech amplification except
whether it is a.c. or d.c., and (3) whether the when used with a very low power modulator
circuit is purely resistive or is inductive. If stage.
in doubt, refer to the manufacturer's recom- Unless an F -1 unit is used in a standard
mendations. Also keep in mind that a dynamo- housing, making contact to the button presents
tor presents almost a dead short until the ar- somewhat of a problem. No serious damage will
mature starts turning, and the starting relay result from soldering to the button if the con-
should be rated at considerably more than the nection is made to one edge and the solder-
normal dynamotor current. ing is done very rapidly with but a small a-
mount of solder, so as to avoid heating the
Microphones The most generally used micro- whole button.
and Circuits phone for mobile work is the A sound-powered type microphone removed
single-button carbon. With a from one of the chest sets available in the
high-output-type microphone and a high-ratio surplus market will deliver almost as much
microphone transformer, it is possible when voltage to the grid of a modulator stage when
"close talking" to drive even a pair of push- used with a high-ratio microphone transformer
pull 6L6's without resorting to a speech am- as will an F -1 unit, and has the advantage of
plifier. However, there is a wide difference in not requiring button current or a "hash filter."
the output of the various type single button This is simply a dynamic microphone designed
microphones, and a wide difference in the a- for high output rather than maximum fidelity.
mount of step up obtained with different rype The standardized connections for a single-
microphone transformers. So at least one button carbon microphone provided with push-
speech stage usually is desirable. to-talk switch are shown in figure 10. Prac-
One of the most satisfactory single button tically all hand-held military-type single-button
526 Mobile Equipment THE R AD I 0
400
100 150 200
OUTPUT CURRENT, MA.
Figure 11
""
250 300
of the measures may already have been taken mica capacitor placed from the field terminal
when the auto receiver was installed. of the regulator to ground with the shortest
First either install a spark plug suppressor possible leads often will produce sufficient
on each plug, or else substitute Autolite re- impcovement. If not, a choke consisting of a-
sistor plugs. The latter are more effective than bout 60 turns of no. 18 d.c.c. or bell wire
suppressors, and on some cars ignition noise wound on a %-inch form can be added. This
is reduced to a satisfactory level simply by should be placed right at the regulator termi-
installing them. However, they may not do an nal, and the 0.00 1-/Lfd. by-pass placed from
adequate job alone after they have been in use the generator side of the choke to ground.
for a while, and it is a good idea to take the
following additional measures. Generator Whine Generator "whine" often can
Check all high tension connections for gaps, be satisfactorily suppressed
particularly the "pinch fit" terminal connec from 550 kc. to 148 Me. simply by by-passing
tors widely used. Replace old high tension the armature terminal to ground with a special
wiring that may have become leaky. "auto radio" by-pass of 0.25 or 0.5 /Lfd. in
Check to see if any of the high tension wir- parallel with a 0.00 1-/Lfd. mica or ceramic ca-
ing is cabled with low tension wiring, or run pacitor. The former usually is placed on the
in the same conduit. If so, reroute the low ten- generator when an auto radio is installed, but
sion wiring to provide as much separation as must be augmented by a mica or ceramic ca-
practicable. pacitor with short leads in order to be effec-
By-pass to ground the 6-volt wire from the tive at the higher frequencies as well as on the
ignition coil to the ignition switch at each broadcast band.
end with a 0.1-/Lfd. molded case paper capaci- When more drastic measures are required,
tor in parallel with a .00 1-/Lfd. mica or cer- special filters can be obtained which are de-
amic, using the shortest possible leads. signed for the purpose. These are recommend-
Check to see that the hood makes a good ed for stubborn cases when a wide frequency
ground con t a c t to the car body at several range is involved. For reception only over a
points. Special grounding contactors are avail- comparatively narrow band of frequencies,
able for attachment to the hood lacings on cars such as the 10-meter amateur band, a highly
that otherwise would present a grounding effective filter can be improvised by connect-
problem. ing between the previously described parallel
If the high-tension coil is mounted on the by-pass capacitors and the generator arma-
dash, it may be necessary to shield the high ture terminal a resonant choke. This may con-
tension wire as far as the bulkhead, unless sist of no. 10 enamelled wire wound on a suit-
it already is shielded with armored conduit. able form and shunted with an adjustable trim-
mer capacitor to permit resonating the com-
Wheel Static Wheel static is either static bination to the center of the frequency band
electricity generated by rotation involved. For the 10-meter band 11 turns close
of the tires and brake drums, or is noise gen- wound on a one-inch form and shunted by a
erated by poor contact bet we en the front 3-30 /L/Lfd. compression-type mica trimmer is
suitable. The trimmer should be adjusted ex-
wheels and the axles (due to the grease in the
perimentally at the center frequency.
bearings). The latter type of noise seldom is
When generator whine shows up after once
caused by the rear wheels, but tire static may
being satisfactorily suppressed, the condition
of course be generated by all four tires.
of the brushes and corm~ utator should be
Wheel static can be eliminated by insertion
cheeked. U n 1 e s s a by-pass capacitor has
of grounding springs under the front hub caps,
opened up, excessive whine usually indicates
and by inserting "tire powder" in all inner
that the brushes or commutator are in need of
tubes. Both items are available at radio parts
attention in order to prevent damage to the
stores and from most auto radio dealers.
generator.
Voltage Regulator Certain voltage regulators Body Static Loose linkages or body or frame
Hash generate an objectionable joints anywhere in the car are
amount of "hash" at the potential static producers when the car is in
higher frequencies, particularly in the v-h-f motion, particularly over a rough road. Locat-
range. A large by-pass will affect the operation ing the source of such noise is difficult, and
of the regulator and possibly damage the the simplest procedure is to give the car a
points. A small by-pass can be used, however, thorough tightening up in the hope that the
without causing trouble. At frequencies above offending poor contacts will be caught by the
the frequency at which the hash becomes ob- procedure. The use of braided bonding straps
jectionable (approximately 20 Me. or so) a between the various sections of the body of
small by-pass is quite effective. A 0.001-/Lfd. the car also may prove helpful.
HANDBOOK Noise Suppression 529
Miscellaneous There are several other poten- In many cases the control rods, speedometer
tial noise sources on a pas- cable, etc., will pick up high-tension noise
senger vehicle, but they do not necessarily under the hood and conduct it up under the
give trouble and therefore require attention dash where it causes trouble. If so, all con-
only in some cases. trol rods and cables should be bonded to the
The heat, oil pressure, and gas gauges can fire wall (bulkhead) where they pass through,
cause a rasping or scraping noise. The gas using a short piece of heavy flexible braid of
gauge is the most likely offender. It will cause the type used for shielding.
trouble only when the car is rocked or is in In some cases it may be necessary to bond
motion. The gauge units and panel indicators the engine to the frame at each rubber engine
should both be by-passed with the 0.1-fLfd. mount in a similar manner. If a rear mounted
paper and 0.00 1-fLfd. mica or ceramic combina- whip is employed the exhaust tail pipe also
tion previously described. should be bonded to the frame if supported by
At high car speeds under certain atmospheric rubber mounts.
conditions corona static may be encountered
unless means are taken to prevent it. The re-
ceiving-type auto whips which employ a plas- Locating Determining the source of cer-
tic ball tip are so provided in order to minimize Noise Sources tain types of noise is made
this type of noise, which is simply a discharge difficult when several things
of the frictional static built up on the car. A are contributing to the noise, because elimi-
whip which ends in a relatively sharp metal nation of one source often will make little or
point makes an ideal discharge point for the no apparent difference in t,he total noise. The_
static charge, and will cause corona trouble following procedure will help to isolate and
at a much lower voltage than if the tip were identify various types of noise.
hooded with insulation. A piece of Vinylite Ignition noise will be present only when the
sleeving slipped over the top portion of the ignition is on, even though the engine is turn-
whip and wrapped tightly with heavy thread ing over.
will prevent this type of static discharge un- Generator noise will be present when the
der practically all conditions. An alternative motor is turning over, regardless of whether
arrangement is to wrap the top portion of the the ignition switch is on. Slipping the drive
whip with S catch brand electrical tape. belt off will kill it.
Generally speaking it is undesirable from Gauge noise usually will be present only
the standpoint of engine performance to use when the ignition switch is on or in the "left"
both spark-plug suppressors and a distributor position provided on some cars.
suppressor. Unless the distributor rotor clear- Wheel static when present will persist when
ance is excessive, noise caused by sparking the car clutch is disengaged and the ignition
of the distributor rotor will not be so bad but switch turned off (or to the left position), with
what it can be handled satisfactorily by a the car coasting.
noise limiter. If not, it is preferable to shield Body noise will be noticeably worse on a
the hot lead between ignition coil and distri- bumpy road than on a smooth road, particu-
butor rather than use a distributor suppressor. larly at low speeds.
CHAPTER TWENTY-SEVEN
Receiver construction has just about become of alignment, low-Q coils are often found in
a lost art. Excellent general coverage receivers the r-f circuits of commercial receivers, mak-
are available on the market in many price ing the set a victim of cross-talk and over-
ranges. However, even the most modest of loading from strong local signals. Rarely does
these receivers is relatively expensive, and most the purchaser of a commercial receiver realize
of the receivers are designed as a compromise that he could achieve the results he desires
-they must suit the majority of users, and in a home-built receiver if he left off the frills
they must be designed with an eye to the price. and trivia which he does not need but which
It is a tribute to the receiver manufacturers he must pay for when he buys a commercial
that they have done as well as they have. Even product.
so, the c-w man must often pay for a high- The ardent experimenter, however, needs
fidelity audio system and S-meter he never no such arguments. He builds his receiver
uses, and the phone man must pay for the c-w merely for the love of the game, and the thrill
man's crystal filter. For one amateur, the re- of using a product of his own creation.
ceiver has too much bandspread; for the next, It is hoped that the receiving equipment to
too little. For economy's sake and for ease be described in this chapter will awaken the
FIGURE 1
COMPONENT NOMENCLATURE
CAPACITORS: RESISTORS
1- VALUES BELOW 999 JJJJFO ARE INDICATED IN UNITS. 1- RESISTANCE VALUES ARE STATED IN OHMS, THOUSANDS
EXAMPLE: 150J.JJJFD OESICNATED AS 150. OF OHMS (K), AND MEGOHMS (M ).
EXAMPLE! 270 OHMS= 270
2- VALUES ABOVE 999 JJJJFO ARE INDICATED IN DECIMALS. 4700 OHMS= 4.7 K
EXAMPLE: .005.UFD DES/(;NATED AS .00~. 33.000 OHMS =
33 K
100,000 OHMS= 100 K OR 0.1 M
3- OTHER CAPACITOR VALUES ARE AS STATED. 33,000,000 OHMS= 33 M
EXAMPLE: 10JJFD 1 O.SJJJJFD, ETC.
2- ALL RESISTORS ARE 1-WATT COMPOSITION TYPE UNLESS
4- iYPE OF CAPACITOR IS INDICATED BENEATH THE VALUE OTHERWISE NOTED. WATTAGE NOTATION IS THF.N INDICATED
DESIGNATION. BELOW RESISTANCE VALUE.
SM =51 LVER MICA 47 K
C =CERAMIC EXAMPLE:
M= MICA
'if."S
P =PAPER
250 .01 .001
EXAMPLE: c;->p~ INDUCTORS:
530
531
Gt"'";!;;
BROWN 1 1 0
RED 2 2 00 MUL TIPLlER
1!\J!?Jfij ORANGE 3 3 ,ooo TOLERANCE
o.ooo
.l. .~.~~OLERANCE YELLOW 4 4
GREEN 5 5 00,000 TEMPERATURE
MULTIPLIER 000,000 COEFFICIENT
BLUE 6 6
1ST& 2ND SIGNIFICANT FIGS. VIOLET 7 7 0,000,000
GRAY 6 6 00,000,000
WIRE-WOUND RESISTORS HAVE 1ST
DIGIT BAND DOUBLE WIDTH.
WHITE
000,000,000
RADIAL LEAD DOT RESISTOR \5-DOfRADIAL LEAD CERAMIC CAPACITOR EXTENDED RANGE TC CERAMIC HICAP
CAPACITY _[fCAPA~TY
~~~.d..---tB\1\ ~mm
TEMP.
COEFF. 1111
ANCE It-TOLERANCE
MULTIPLIER LMuLTIPLIER
'--TC MULTIPLIER
RADIAL LEAD (BAND) RESISTOR BY-PASS COUPLING CERAMIC CAPACIT'OR AXIAL LEAD CERAMIC CAPAC I TOR
~~~!
2ND
FIGURE
TOLERANCE 1ST FIGURE MULTIPLIEJ LTOLERANCE
WHITE (RMA)
BLACK(JAN)
:tH:~n """"'~~
MULTIPLIER
""""'
JAN &
1948RMA
CODE
RATED 500 V.D.C. 2096 TOL.
~MULrlPLIER
CLASS~
TOLERANCE
MULTIPLIER
1ST DIGIT
2.ND DIGIT
RMA 5-DOT CODE (oesOLErE) RMA 6-DOT (oesocErEJ RMA 4-DOT (OBSOLErE)
@ SIG. FIGURE
MULTIPLIER
RONT
~o"~LERANCE
1ST
MULTIPLIER
NO SIG. FIG.
~'}
NO
0
S1G FIGURE
~"'''''''
~RK.VOLr.
~ULT1PL1ER
ULTIPLIER ULTI PLI ER
RANCE 0
EAR WOR OLERANCE WORKING VOLTA<;E 1 ST} S!G. FIGURE
TOLERANCE VOLT. BLANK
BLA~K~!!II:;;.
BODY
-MULTIPLIER
2ND}
IST S\G.VOLTAGE FIG.
2ND} SIGNIFICANT
A 2-DIGIT VOLTAGE RATING INDICATES MORE THAN 1ST Fl<;URE
900 V. ADD 2 ZEROS TO END OF 2 DIGIT NUMBER.
Figure 2
STANDARD COLOR CODE FOR RESISTORS AND CAPACITORS
The standard color code provides the necessary information required to properly identify color coded
re~istors ~nd capacitors.Refer to the color code lor numerical values and the number of zeros (or multi-
plier) assrgned to the colors used. A fourth color band on resistors determines the tolerance rating as
follows: Gold=S%, silver= 10%. Absence of the fourth band indicates a 20% tolerance rating.
Tolerance rating of capacitors is determined by the color code. for example: Red=2% green=So/o etc.
The voltage rating of capacitors is obtained by multiplying the color value by IClO. for exa;.,ple:
Orange=3 X 100, or 300 volts.
532 Receivers and Transceivers THE RADIO
FIGURE 3
COMPONENT COLOR CODING
POWER TRANSFORMERS
PRIMARY LEADS - - - - - - B L A C K
IF TAPPED:
COMMON - - - - - - B L A C K
TAP BLACK/YELLOW
END BLACK/ REO
CENTER-TAP - - - - - R 0 / YELLOW
FILAMENT WINDIN~ N 1 - - - t ; R E E N
CENTER-TAP-----GREEN/YELLOW
AUDIO TRANSFORMERS
PLATE LEAD ( P R I . ) - - - - B L U OR BROWN damaged by incorrect wiring of the high-volt-
B+ LEAD ( PRI.) REO age leads.
GRID LEAD (SEC.) GREEN OR YELLOW The problem of meeting and overcoming
GRID RETURN (SEC.) BLACK such obstacles is just part of the game. A true
radio amateur (as opposed to an amateur
circuits. If possible, the wiring should be broadcaster) should have adequate knowledge
checked by a second party as a safety mea- of the art of communication. He should know
sure. Some tubes can be permanently damaged quite a bit about his equipment (even if pur-
by having the wrong voltages applied to their chased) and, if circumstances permit, he should
electrodes. Electrolytic capacitors can be build a portion of his own equipment. Those
ruined by hooking them up with the wrong amateurs that do such construction work are
voltage polarity across the capacitor terminals. convinced that half of the enjoyment of the
Transformer, choke and coil windings may be hobby may be obtained from the satisfaction
-sus
LS
l5K
o.s
sr sus
Figure 5
SCHEMATIC OF TRANSISTOR BROADCAST RECEIVER
B-9-volt transistor battery. RCA VS-300
c,-365 !l!lld. Lafayette Radio Co. MS-214, or Allied Radio Co. 61H-009
Lr--Transistor "Loopstick" coil. Lafayette Radio Co. MS-166
LS-3" loudspeaker, 12-ohm voice coil. Lafayette Radio Co. SK-39
T 1-500 ohm pri., 12 ohm sec. Transistor transformer. Thordarson TR-18
HANDBOOK Circuitry 533
of building and operating their own receiving or spots placed on the body of the component.
and transmitting equipment. Several color codes have been used in the past,
and are being used in modified form in the
The Transceiver A popular item of equip- present to indicate component values. The
ment on "five meters" most important of these color codes are illus-
during the late "thirties,"' the transceiver is trated in figure 2. Other radio components
making a comeback today complete with mod- such as power transformers, i-f transformers,
ern tubes and circuitry. In brief, the transceiver chokes, etc. have their leads color-coded for
is a packaged radio station combining the ele- easy identification as tabulated in figure 3.
ments of the receiver and transmitter into a
single unit having a common power supply 27-2 A Simple
and audio system. The present trend toward
compact equipment and the continued growth Transistorized Portable
of single sideband techniques combine natural- B-C Receiver
ly with the space-saving economies of the
transceiver. Various transceiver circuits for the Illustrated in figures 4, 5, and 6 is an easy
higher frequency amateur bands are shown in to construct two transistor portable broadcast
this chapter. The experimenter can start from receiver that is an excellent circuit for the
these simple circuits and using modern minia- beginner to build. The receiver covers the
ture tubes and components can design and range of 500 kc. to 1500 kc. and needs no
build his complete station in a cabinet no larg- external antenna when used close to a high
er than a pre-war receiver. power broadcasting station. An external anten-
na may be added for more distant reception.
27-1 Circuitry and The receiver is powered from a single 9-volt
Components miniature transistor battery and delivers good
speaker volume, yet draws a minimum of cur-
It is the practice of the editors of this rent permitting good battery life.
Handbook to place as much usable information
in the schematic illustration as possible. In Circuit Operation of the receiver may
order to simplify the drawing the component Description be understood by referring to
nomenclature of figure 1 is used in all the fol- the schematic diagram of figure
lowing construction chapters. 5. The tuned circuit L-C resonates at the
The electrical value of many small circuit frequency of the broadcasting station. A por-
components such as resistors and capacitors is tion of the r-f energy is applied to the base of
often indicated by a series of colored bands the 2Nll2 p-n-p type transistor. A tapped
Figure 6
INTERIOR VIEW
OF TRANSISTOR
RECEIVER
The speaker and output
transformer are mounted
at the left of the Ma-
sonite chassis. Top, cen-
ter is the "loopstick" r:f
coil, and directly to tlie
right is the 10 millihenry
r-f choke in the collector
lead of the 2N112 trans-
istor. Battery is at lower
right.
534 Receivers and Transceivers THE RADIO
PLACE CARRIER
HERE OR HERE
"-\ v
B c
-&008~---+~~~~~------------------~~~~~~------~~~~------~--------~
1. ..,/ ,, ~ 3 KC I- I- e.~ Kc -.j
1~TO 30 KC WIDE
AT -&0 DB DOWN
Figure 7
BANDWIDTH CURVES OF VARIOUS 1-F SYSTEMS
Bandwidth curves showing: A-Selectivity range ot most medium-priced single-conversion receivers with
crystal filter out ot circuit; 8-ldeo/ selectivity curve tor voke reception; and C-Selectivity curve ot a
455 kc. mechanical filter with a 3.1 kilocycle bandwidth.
HANDBOOK Mechanical Filter 535
Figure 8
455 KC. MECHANICAL
FILTER ADAPTER
Enjoy optimum selectivity and performance
from your present receiver by plugging in
this simple adapter that replaces the first
i-f amplifier tube. The two 68J6 tubes are
at opposite ends ol the chassis with the
mechanical filter between them. Adapter
plug to fit i-f tube socket is shown in
foreground.
536 Receivers and Transceivers THE RADIO
I
L _ _ _S!:f.l.E!d} _ __.._ __
I
_H..lL_Q _ _ ----1
I
+-7
e
-~ -~OUTPUT CABLE
rt---1
I
-- ___ B~
A
+SHIELD BOLT 5
8
~------------------------~_L
2fX 2-f' X 4" MIN/BOX (BUD CU-3003 OR EQUIVALENT)
Figure 12
CHASSIS DRILLING TEMPLATE FOR ADAPTER
A: #32 drill, B: 9/32" drill, C: 5/8" diameter socket punch, D: 3/4" diameter socket punch
538 Receivers and Transceivers THE RADIO
Construction The adapter is constructed Cable Constructing the two i-f tube
of the Adapter on an aluminum box mea- Assembly socket cables takes little time if
suring 2~" x 2~" x 4", a the assembly shown in figure 15
good compromise size that is compact, yet not is followed. First, cut two lengths of RG-58/U
too small for easy wiring. The primary design coaxial cable 1 7 inches long and remove 1 Y2
and construction consideration of this adapter inches of the vinyl cover on one end of each
is to completely isolate the input and output piece. Slide the braided outer shield back over
circuits. Any stray coupling can cause signal the outer cover and trim the insulation and
leakage around the filter unit, thus imparing center conductor so that Y2 inch protrudes be-
its effectiveness. The construction shown al- yond the shield. Next cut the insulation to
lows maximum isolation, yet permits sim- expose Y-4 inch of the center conductor and
plicity of construction. A drilling template for trim one lead of the coupling capacitor C, sol-
the box is given in figure 12, and the place- dering it to the center conductor with a ~ inch
ment of the major components may be seen in overlap. Cut narrow strips of plastic insulating
figures 8, 13, and 14. Note that the input tape and wrap them around this joint up to
and output circuits are isolated within the box the body diameter of the capacitor as shown
by a shield passing across the center of the in figure 15. Finally, slide the braided shield
filter socket. over the capacitor, pull it tight and wrap a
short length of tinned copper wire twice
After drilling and punching all holes, the around the middle of the capacitor. Solder the
cube and mechanical filter sockets, power plug, wire to the shield and trim off the excess
and rubber grommets may be assembled. Place shielding. The tinned wires from each cable
solder lugs under all socket retaining bolts for are then soldered to a pin taken from an octal
ground connections. Before any wiring is done tube base, making a plug-in ground connec-
a 3" x 3" piece of perforated aluminum tion as shown in figure 8. Similar tube base
(Reynold's "Do-it-yourself" aluminum, avail- pins are soldered to the other leads, and the
able at large hardware stores) is formed into excess lead trimmed off. The exposed cable
the shield shown in figures 13 and 14. A %" shield is then wrapped with plastic tape.
flange is bent along all edges of this shield If the receiver has a 7-pin miniature tube
except where it crosses the center of the 9-pin in the first i-f amplifier stage, short lengths of
filter socket. A small notch is cut in the shield # 18 tinned wire may be used for the plug-in
next to the socket to pass the heater and plate pins on the cables, or the capacitors and
power leads to the V, socket. The shield passes ground lead may be soldered to a special 7-pin
across the filter socket between pins 3 and 4, miniature male adapter plug (Vector P-7).
and 8 and 9, then is bolted to a soldering lug
that has been soldered to pin 1 of the filter Adapter For easy parts assembly, the filter
socket. The flange is also bolted to the top Wiring shield may be temporarily re-
of the box directly above coil L,, and two self- moved, and replaced when wiring
tapping sheet metal screws are driven into the is completed. Heater, screen and plate power
side flanges of the shield when the other half wires are installed first, keeping all such leads
of the box is assembled. close to the box wherever possible to minimize
Figure 13
UNDERCHASSIS
VIEW OF THE
ADAPTER
Slug-tuned coil L: is at
left, below the second
stage 68 J6 socket.
Screen bypass capacitor
is placed across socket.
Capacitors Cz and C, may
be seen on each side of
the center shield. Coil L1
is at right of shield. In-
put cable is at far right.
Output c a b I e passes
through rear wall of
chassis at left. Power
leads pass through center
of shield.
HANDBOOK Mechanical Filter 539
Figure 14
OBLIQUE VIEW OF
ADAPTER CHASSIS
Coil Lz is at left near
power plug, with coil Lz
mounted horizontally at
right. Note c, and c,
are placed directly across
pins of mechanical crys ..
tal socket.
27-4 A High
PerEormance
Amateur Band Receiver
This receiver was designed for outstanding
performance on the 80, 40, 20, 15, 10, and 6
meter amateur bands. It incorporates many up-
to-date features such as mechanical filters for
optimum selectivity, double conversion for
freedom from images, and a novel r-f assembly
for mechanical stability and good operating ef-
Figure 16 ficiency on the higher frequencies. The re-
FRONT VIEW OF AMATEUR ceiver uses 12 tubes, plus a selenium rectifier
BAND RECEIVER power supply. The complete r-f assembly is de-
6-band receiver covers 80-6 meters, using signed about a television turret tuner having
TV turret for "front end." Mechanical fil-
ters provide optimum selectivity. positions for 12 separate bands. The rugged
construction and excellence of the self-wiping
contacts of the TV tuner add greatly to the
filter passband. The proper pitch control set- overall stability of the receiver. Complete dial
ting may be determined by tuning the re- calibration and an S-meter provide maximum
ceiver across a carrier while adjusting the pitch tuning simplicity and logging ease.
control so that a beat note on only one side Because of the "snap-in" coil strips of the
of zero beat is heard. After marking this setting tuner it is possible to provide coils to tune any
of the pitch control, again turn it so the test sig- narrow segment of the shortwave range be-
nal on only the other side of zero beat is heard. tween 3.5 megacycles and 75 megacycles. For
Mark this setting, then try tuning in a single example, coils can be wound to cover the 13,
sideband signal. If intelligible speech cannot 19, 21, 31, and 49 meter international short-
be heard, shift the b-f-o pitch control to the wave broadcast bands if desired. Panel control
other setting. Small adjustments of the pitch of the selectivity allows instant selection of the
control and the tuning of the receiver will optimum passband for either voice or c-w re-
produce the correct voice tones. For best re- ception. The receiver is entirely self.contained
ception, the audio control of the receiver should except for an external speaker.
be fully advanced, and only enough r-f gain
used to produce a readable signal. Volume is Circuit The High Performance Ama-
therefore controlled by the r-f gain control. Description teur Band Receiver is a double
For optimum c-w reception, the 0.5 kc. me- conversion superhetrodyne (fig-
chanical filter may be used. No changes need be ure 1 7). A modified TV turret tuner is em-
made to the adapter when filters are changed. ployed to cover six amateur bands. The turret
v SUPPLY r
+_.,I~,. o_v_.------------1+!
1!s v...f\..J,.._P_o_w_ER--., _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
~ ~
VOLTAGE A-VC
REGULATOR BRIDGE
Figure 17
BLOCK DIAGRAM OF DE-LUXE AMATEUR COMMUNICATION RECEIVER
Amateur Band Receiver 541
employs a 6BQ7 A cascade r-f amplifier and not by the transformer response. To conserve
a 6]6 mixer-oscillator. All r-f tuned circuits filament power, 150 milliampere 6BJ6 tubes
are changed as the tuner is switched from are employed in the i-f amplifier.
channel to channel. The intermediate frequen- A 6AL5 dual diode is used as a second
cy output of the tuner is 1695 kc. A 6BA 7 detector and a-v-e rectifier. Automatic volume
pentagrid mixer tube converts the first inter- control voltage is applied to the first two i-f
mediate frequency to the second i-f channel, stages, and a small portion of the a-v-e voltage
which is 455 kc. To obtain a high order of is applied to the 6BQ7 A r-f amplifier and
stability, the 6BA 7 conversion oscillator is crys- 6BA 7 mixer. The a-v-e circuit is rendered in-
tal controlled at 2150 kc. operative for c-w and SSB operation by seg-
Switch S, in the output circuit of the 6BA 7 ment D of switch s,. A simple delayed a-v-e
mixer stage permits the selection of one of the system is used to allow best reception of weak
two mechanical filters. In this particular re- signals. Potentiometer Ra sets the delay voltage
ceiver, a 6 kc. and a 3.1 kc. filter were used applied to the cathode of the 6AL5 a-v-e diode.
for "broad" and "sharp" phone reception. A second 6AL5 serves as a noise limiter. The
Three stages of 4 55 kc. amplification follow threshold value of limiting is set by control
the mechanical filter. The gain of these stages R,, and the noise limiter may be removed from
is adjustable, permitting the overall receiver the circuit by switch Sa. The audio output of
gain to be set at a reasonable value. Too much the detector passes through volume control R,
i-f gain. will make the receiver noisy and sub- and is further amplified by one triode section
ject to overloading effects on strong signals. of a 12A T7 followed by a 6AK6 power am-
Too little i-f gain will make the receiver seem plifier stage. The second section of the 12AT7
insensitive. The i-f gain is controlled by poten- functions as the beat frequency oscillator. The
tiometer R, and also by the value of the ca- frequency of the b-f-o is controlled from the
thode resistors in the second and third i-f panel by variable capacitor Ca.
stages. In order to prevent clipping of the ex- The S-meter circuit consists of a single va-
cellent flat-top response of the 6 kc. mechan- cuum tube voltmeter using a 12AU7 dual tri-
ical filter, small coupling capacitors are placed ode in a bridge circuit. The bridge is balanced
across the "top" of the i-f transformer coils to by potentiometer R,, and the meter sensitivity
widen the "nose response" of the circuits. The is set by control R,. Automatic volume control
"skirt" selectivity of the i-f strip is determined voltage applied to one grid of the 12AU7 up-
by the passband of the mechanical filter and sets the balance of the bridge and causes a
"TV -TUNER"
~---
I R-FCOIL
-,
I
L1
I I
I
I
L--
8+ B+REG.
Figure 18A
CONVERTED TV-TUNER FORMS "FRONT-END" OF AMATEUR BAND RECEIVER
Several forms of replacement TV -tuners may be purchased from large radio stores, Shown above is typical
"cascode tuner" to be used in this receiver. Check your tuner for circuitry before you modify it. lf output
frequency is unimportant, since i-1 components of tuner are removed. Tuner trimmers permit minor
adjustments to be made to alignment of r-f stages.
A-Oscillator-mixer excitation measuring point on tuner
C,A-B-C-15 p,p,fd. per section. All-Star Products Co., Defiance, Ohio. Model C3.
C.-10 p,p,fd. ceramic. Centralab 8278
c,-15 !LIL Bud LC-1641. (Mounted atop chassis after photographs were taken).
L,-L,-See figure 21 for coil data
NOTES: 1-* SEE FILTER I NSf RUCTION SHEET FOR CAPACITOR SPECIFICATIONS.
2-ALL RESISTORS 1-WATT UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
0
::J
_,
0...
.....
0
2K
R3 ::J
en
()
B+HI 14011. (!)
<
(!)
R1 SEEFIG.18A .....
en
B+ HI
140 v.
~lie=;'---- - -'f~
~Rs S2c
3K
115 v.
'V
.... v.
Figure 188
T1 SCHEMATIC OF AMATEUR BAND RECEIVER
The "front-end" circuit is shown in Figure lBA. The tuning capacitors placed across the input and output
circuits of the mechanical filters are determined by the choice of filter. See filter specification sheet.
....
Type F45SC filters were used in this receiver. ::J:
M-0-l d-e milliammeter, l-inch diameter m
s,A-8-DPDT rotary switch. Centralab PA-2001 decks, with Centralab PA-302 index assembly
S:AB-C-D-4 pole, 3 position switch. Centralab PA-l0l3
T-lSOO kc. i-t transformer. J. W. Miller Co. Sl2-Wl. Remove turns from primary and secondary to
permit resonance at 1695 kc.
TI-Tt-455 kc. i-f transformer. J. W. Miller Co. l2-Cl, or equivalent
Ta-455 kc. diode transformer. J. W. Miller Co. l2-C2, or equivalent
T,-455 kc. BFO transformer. J. W. Miller Co. ll2-C5, or equivalent
Ts-lS0-0-150 volts at lOO ma. UTC S-51
T.-10 K pri., 4 ohm sec., Stancor A-3879
T.-6.3 volts, 3 amp., Stancor P-6466 0
HANDBOOK Amateur Band Receiver 543
reading on the 0-1 d-e milliammeter connected three gang tuning capacitor C is determined by
between the plates of the 12AU7 triodes. the shaft height of the main dial bushing. C
The selenium rectifier power supply delivers is therefore mounted above the chassis by
140 volts at the receiver current drain of 65 means of long 6-32 bolts and steel spacers.
milliamperes. The low plate voltage and small Placement of the major components may be
power consumption of the receiver result in a seen in figures 19 and 20. The two mechanical
very low degree of thermal drift. If desired, filters are mounted to the left of the tuner,
the selenium supply may be replaced with a directly behind the 6BA 7 mixer tube and the
more conventional supply using a 5Y3-GT 1695 kc. i-f transformer, T,. The filter selec-
rectifier tube. Plate voltage to the receiver tion switch S, is mounted below chassis so that
should be held below 160 volts. Plate voltage the switch segments fall over the filter ter-
to the 6]6 oscillator section and the 12AU7 minals. This switch is made up from a switch
S-meter tube is regulated by an OB2 gas reg- kit, and is mounted in place by means of two
ulator. brackets cut from soft aluminum. One bracket
Plate voltage is removed from the r-f and holds the front panel bushing of the switch,
audio stages when the receiver is in "standby" and the other is placed just forward of section
condition. All oscillators are left running con- S,B and holds the two fixed shafts of the
tinuously to reduce initial warmup drift. switch. A hole is cut in the center of the
bracket to clear the rotary shaft of the switch.
Receiver The receiver is built upon a plated This bracket also serves as a shield isolating
Layout steel chassis measuring 8" x 15" x the output circuits of the mechanical filter from
2Y2". Panel height is 8". To the input circuits. The particular switch used
achieve maximum rigidity, the panel is braced is highly recommended, and it is suggested that
to the chassis with two steel angle brackets no substitution be made. It is imperative that
visible in figure 19. The tuning dial is cen- the drive shaft of the switch be metal, and that
tered on the panel, and the three gang tuning it is securely grounded. Some switches have
capacitor is behind the dial, on the center-line fibre drive shafts, or metal shafts held in po-
of the chassis. Directly to the left of the tuning sition with a cotter pin. Fibre drive shafts
capacitor is a 3 Y2" x 5" cut-out in the chassis. permit signal leakage along the shaft, deterior-
The TV tuner is placed in this cut-out, held ating filter performance, and the cotter pin-
in place by two 3" angle brackets cut from type switch does not insure the shaft is secure-
aluminum stock. Height of the tuner above ly grounded which is mandatory, when the
the chassis is determined by the shaft of the metal shaft-type switch is used.
tuner which must pass through the bushing The three intermediate frequency stages are
drilled in the lower left corner of the dial spaced along the back of the chassis. At the
escutcheon. Likewise, the placement of the right rear are the 6AK6 audio stage, the volt-
Figure 19
TOP VIEW OF
AMATEUR
COMMUNICATION
RECEIVER
M.echani<:al filters are at
/eft with three stage 11
amplifier along rear of
chassis. The TV tuner Is
mounted In chassis cut-
out to the left ol main
tuning capacitor. Power
supply and audio section
occupy right-hand sec-
tion ol steel chassis. Six
channels ol tuner are
used to cover the ama-
teur bands between SO
and 6-meters. Six spare
channels may be used to
cover shortwave broad
cast bands, or portions
of 100 M.c. region.
544 Receivers and Transceivers THE RADIO
age regulator tube, and the 12AU7 S-meter which is then drilled and punched. All major
tube. In front of the last i-f transformer can components with the exception of the TV
are the two 6AL5 tubes and potentiometers turret are mounted in place. The ground con-
R, and Ra. nections at each tube socket are made first,
At the right end of the chassis is the power then the filament leads are wired in position.
transformer, and between it and the panel is Use # 14 insulated wire for the filament leads,
the b-f-o transformer and the 12AT7 au- as the current drain is quite high. The power
dio/b-f-o tube. Between the power transformer supply should be wired first and tested. It
and the three gang tuning capacitor are the should deliver approximately 140 volt! across
power supply filter capacitor and the auxiliary a 2000 ohm, 10 watt resistor used as a tem-
filament transformer. The i-f gain control po- porary dummy load. When the power supply
tentiometer R, is placed between the filament section is completed, the audio stages, b-f-o,
transformer and the main tuning capacitor. S-meter, second detector, and noise limiter
Placement of the smaller components below stages can be wired. Operation of the audio
the chassis may be seen in figure 20. The system may be checked by injecting a small
TV turret and mechanical filter switch are at audio signal on pin # 2 of the 12AT7 stage
the right of the chassis, with the audio output and checking the volume of the tone in the
transformer mounted to the back wall of the loud speaker.
chassis near the turret. The filter choke for the
power supply is mounted to the left side wall The next step 1s to wire the three i-f am-
of the chassis, with the two selenium rectifiers plifiers and the a-v-e circuit. Five terminal
in front of it. The 10 watt dropping resistor phenolic tie-point strips are mounted in front
for the regulator tube is mounted to the chas- of each i-f tube socket. The a-v-e, cathode bias,
sis beween the filter choke and the rear tube and screen dropping resistors are mounted be-
sockets. tween the socket pins and the terminals of the
strip. The ceramic bypass capacitors are sol-
Receiver The receiver should be built dered directly between socket pins with the
Construction in two parts to simplify con- shortest possible leads. All interconnecting
struction. The power supply, wiring is done between the terminal strips.
audio and 455 kc. i-f sections are built first, After the i-f strip has been wired up to the
and the receiver is placed in operating condi- arm of switch s,, segment B, the amplifier
tion up to the 1695 kc. i-f channel. The TV may be tested. Pin # 1 of the first 6BJ6 i-f
tuner is then modified, using the rest of the tube is temporarily returned to the a-v-e bus
receiver for alignment and adjustment tests. by placing a 100 K resistor across the output
All major components should be marked in pins of the mechanical filter socket. Switch s,
position on the paper wrapper of the chassis is adjusted to place the resistor in the circuit.
Figure 20
UNDER-CttASSIS
VIEW OF AMATEUR
BAND RECEIVER
To the /eft of the chassis
are the selenium recti-
fiers and the filter choke.
At the extreme right is
the mechanical filter se-
lector switch mounted
on two aluminum brack-
ets. The controls along
the panel are (left to
right): BFO, AUDIO
GAIN, MAN---AM---CW,
tuning control, TV tur-
ret switch, R-F GAIN,
and filter selector switch.
Output transformer is
mounted to back of
chassis.
HANDBOOK Amateur Band Receiver 545
A signal generator having a tone modulated coupled through a 0.01 ~-tfd. blocking capaci-
455 kc. signal is attached to the input grid of tor to the "hot" end of the primary winding
the 6BJ6 tube, and an a-c voltmeter is con- of transformer T. This transformer is adjusted
nected across the speaker terminals. To insure for maximum output signal. The receiver is
that the i-f system is aligned at the center of now ready for tuner installation.
the filter passband it is imperative that the
alignment frequency be very close to 455.0 Tuner The tuner used in this re-
kc. The use of a BC-221 or equivalent signal Modification ceiver is a Standard Coil Co.
generator is recommended. As the transform- replacement type unit using
ers are brought into alignment the input signal a 6BQ7 A cascode r-f amplifier and a 6]6 mix-
to the i-f strip should be decreased. A vacuum er stage. Several different variations of this
tube voltmeter may be employed to measure tuner can be purchased at nominal prices
the negative voltage developed on the a-v-e bus. through large wholesale outlet stores. The
A maximum voltage of about -s volts is de- tuner has snap-in coil strips for 12 TV chan-
veloped with a strong input signal to the i-f nels, and may have either a 21 Me. or 42 Me.
strip. Overall gain is controlled by the setting i-f output range. Several simple changes must
of R, when switch S, is placed in the "A-M" be made to the tuner for use in this receiver.
position. The i-f output coil and the cascode neutralizing
After i-f alignment has been completed, the circuit must be removed. The best thing to do
100 K input resistor should be removed from is to remove all the clip-in coils and trace out
the filter socket and the 6BA 7 mixer stage the tuner circuit, and then compare it with the
wired. The capacitors connected between pins circuit shown in figure 18A. Cathode bias must
1 and 2 and ground of the 6BA 7 socket de- be added to the first section of the cascode and
termine the level of excitation to the 2150 kc. several of the resistors in the tuner must be
crystal. If difficulty is encountered in obtain- changed. Rewire the tuner according to the
ing consistent oscillation, the value of one or circuit of figure 18A. Note that regulated volt-
both of these capacitors may be altered until age is applied to the oscillator section of the
reliable oscillation is obtained. Operation of 6]6 and that a-v-e voltage is applied to the
the crystal oscillator may be monitored with a first section of the 6BQ7 A. The main tuning
nearby receiver tuned to the crystal frequency. capacitor C1A-B-C is connected to the appro-
When the oscillator is working properly, a priate points in the tuner by three short leads.
1695 kc. tone modulated signal should be A }~-inch coil is drilled in the rear of the
eM PLATE, R-F; .5T. N18E. WI REDIA. 821J1JFD 83 MC. 20M PLATE, RF: 13T. N 22 E. WIRE CIA. 200.UUFO 14.7~MC.
L2 L2
48.3- GRID, OSC.: !t T. N 18 E. WIRE OIA. 02lWFD. 82 MC. 1!t. 7- GRID,OSC.: 12.T.N22.E. WIRE DIA. 2.001J.UFD. 17 t.AC.
~2.3 115.0~
Me. PLATE, OSC. 1 5T. N 18 E. e-w Me. PLATE. OSC.: 10 T. N 30E. e-w
ANT.: lOT. N2.2E. e-w ANT.: I~T. N30E. e-w
L1 L1
GRID: lOT. N22E. WIRE DIA. 75JJlJFD. 33t.AC. GRID: 39T. N 30 E. e-w 100.U.UFD 7.9 MC.
10M PLATE, R-F: lOT. N22E. WIRE DIA. 62U.UFO. 32 MC. 40M PLATE, RF: 38T. N 30 E. e-w 110U.UF0. 7.8 MC.
L2 L2
26.3-
28.0
Me.
GRID, OSC.: 10 T. N 22 E. WIRE DIA. 68JJ.UFO.
Me.
GRID, OSC.: 25T. N30E.
15M PLATE, R-F: 10T. N2.2. E. WIRE DIA. 12.0JJUFD. 2.2.25 MC.. 80M PLATE, R-F: SEE L1 ABOVE 12..U.UFD 5.7 MC.
L2 L"
19.3- GRID,OSC..: lOT. N 2.2. E, WIRE DIA. 2201J1JFO. 21.0 MC. 5.,- GRID,OSC.: SEE L1 ABOVE 39.1J1JFD 7.2.MC..
19.75 5.7
Me. PLATE,OSC.: lOT. N30E. e-w Me. PLATE.OSC.: 2.0T.N30E.I e-w
NOTE 1 -GRID WINOIN. OF OSCILLATOR COIL L2 IS PLACED NEXT TO OSCILLATOR PLATE WINDIN . R-F PLATE WINDIN.
IS PLACED ABOUT 1/2-INCH AWAV' FROM OSCILLATOR-GRID WINDING.
tuner case to permit the coaxial lead from the porarily held in place with ~ small piece of
antenna receptacle to enter the tuner. The cellophane tape until the coil form is cemented
tuner is now ready to be mounted in the re- in the assembly clamp with Duco cement.
ceiver. The coil leads are then cleaned and soldered
to the corresponding terminals. After the shunt
Tuner Coil The tuner coils should be capacity is added, the natural resonance of the
Modification removed from their snap-in winding should be checked against the value
holders. Notice that the r-f given in figure 21. The coil should be sus-
coils have five terminals and that the mixer- pended in the clear and checked with a grid-
oscillator coils have six terminals. All coil -dip oscillator. Turn spacing may be varied to
forms and windings are removed from the produce the correct resonance point. The mix-
clip-in assemblies and may be discarded. The er-oscillator coil is wound next. The two tuned
new coils for all bands are to be wound on windings are placed at the ends of the form
lengths of ~-inch diameter polystyrene ro~, and the oscillator plate winding is placed be-
cut to fit into the assembly clamps. For this tween them, positioned close to the grid wind-
particular tuner, the r-f coil forms are 1 %" ing as illustrated in figure 22. The coil wind-
long and the oscillator mixer coil forms are ings may be held in position with a temporary
1 13/16" long. The ends of the forms are piece of cellophane tape. This coil is adjusted
tapered slightly with a file so that they fit in the same manner as the r-f coil. When com-
into the slotted ends of the assembly clamp. pleted, the mixer-oscillator coil may be snapped
After each set of coils is completed the fre- into the rener and the receiver turned on. The
quency band notation is marked on the unit oscillator operates on the low frequency side
for future identification. of the signal for 10 meter reception, cover-
Complete coil data is given in figure 21 ing the range of 26.3 Me. to 28.0 Me. as the
and a complete set of coils is shown in figure receiver is tuned from 27,995 kc. to 29.7 Me.
22. Start with the ten meter coils, as they have Listen for the oscillator in a nearby receiver.
few turns and are easy to wind. Make the r-f The frequency range of the oscillator can be
stage coil first. The windings may be tern- set by varying the spacing of the turns of the
6]6 oscillator coil, and also by adjustment of
the oscillator trimmer capacitor c, in the tuner.
When the correct frequency range is covered
the winding may be permanently held in place
with a small application of Duco cement. Check
the frequency range once again after you ap-
ply the cement as the frequency shifts slightly
lower as the cement is applied. Make your
final correction before the cement dries. The
other coil windings are relatively non-critical
and require no adjustments after they are
completed.
Once the oscillator tuning range has been
set the signal generator may be used to cali-
br~te the main dial of the receiver. If care is
used in this process, the dial calibrations ca~
be read to an accuracy of five kilocycles or
less. The oscillator injection voltage may be
checked at terminal A on the tuner with a
v-t-v-m. The injection range should lie between
two to three volts on each band, and may be
controlled by varying the spacing between the
Figure 22
COIL SET FOR AMATEUR
BAND RECEIVER
Tuner <:oils are wound on 114-ineh poly-
styrene rods. R-f <:oils are at left, with
mixer-oscillator coils at right. 80 meter
coils are at top of photo, with 6 meter
coils at bottom.
HANDBOOK "Hand ie-Talkie" 547
oscillator grid winding and the untuned plate the S-meter will respond much more slowly
winding. These adjustments may be made with to changes in signal strength. The value of
the coils in the receiver by removing the bot- this capacitor can be altered to suit the user's
tom and side plates of the tuner. taste.
The conversion oscillator operates on the Finally, various settings of the noise limiter
high frequency side of the signal on the 15, threshold control R, should be tried to find
20, 40, and 80 meter bands, as tabulated in the best clipping level for various types of
figure 21. The 80 coils are made from "loop- pulse-type interference.
stick" -type broadcast coils. Turns are removed
from these coils until the natural resonance Receiver Receiver tuning is extremely
falls at the desired frequency as shown in the Operation smooth, and the dial calibration
table. A small value of capacitance is used remains as good as the original
across these coils since the percentage-tuning calibration. The r-f input circuits are designed
range is quite high. for 50-100 ohm unbalanced transmission line
on all amateur bands, and r-f stage resonance
Receiver After the first set of coils has may be easily attained by means of the an-
Adjustment been completed, the receiver tenna trimming capacitor located within the
may be adjusted for optimum set. For phone reception, switch s, is set to
results. A balance between r-f gain and i-f A-M and the audio level is controlled by the
gain must be achieved. Under normal operat- audio potentiometer R.. For c-w or sideband
ing conditions, the residual noise picked up reception s, is set to C-W and audio control
by the antenna system should mask out the in- R. is fully advanced. Receiver gain is now
ternal noise level of the receiver. If the an- controlled by the R-F gain potentiometer R..
tenna is removed from the receiver and the The B-F-0 pitch control Ca is adjusted to place
internal noise level does not drop appreciably the oscillator on the edge of the filter pass-
it is usually a sign that the i-f gain of the band for "single signal" reception of c-w sig-
receiver is too high and the r-f gain is too nals or single sideband reception of SSB trans-
low. The value of i-f gain may be controlled missions. The S-meter is operative on the
by the setting of R,. Normally, there is no "A-M" position of s,; S-meter sensitivity is
instability or regeneration in the i-f strip. The controlled by potentiometer R,.
stability, however, is dependent to some extent
upon the wiring technique you use; it may 27-5 A "Handie-
be necessary to retard the i-f gain level to Talkie" for 144 Me.
prevent instability. Receiver i-f gain may be
further decreased by increasing the value of The 144 Me. band is the ideal frequency
the cathode resistor of the first 6BJ6 stage. range for short-haul, portable equipment. Little
I-f gain may be increased by decreasing the power is required for local coverage, and the
value of the cathode resistors of the second antenna size is moderate. Then too, this is just
two i-f stages. about the highest frequency at which filament
The a-v-e bias delay potentiometer Ra should type battery tubes will operate.
be set to provide about one volt of bias on Shown in the accompanying illustrations is
pin # 1 of the 6AL5 a-v-e rectifier. This will a battery powered, crystal controlled "handie-
retard a-v-e action on weak signals and im- talkie" designed for operation in the 2 meter
prove the signal-to-noise ratio of threshold region. It is especially well suited for Civil
signals. Defense work or emergency service. This unit
The level of beat oscillator injection can be was designed after the AN/URC-4 air-sea res-
set by varying the setting of coupling capad- cue transmitter, and is completely self-con-
tor C.. Sufficient injection should be used to tained, including batteries.
provide good reception of single sideband sig-
nals. The injection level is not critical for Circuit The circuit of the "handie-
c-w operation. Finally, the b-f-o capacitor C. Description talkie" is shown in figure 24.
should be set at mid-scale and the slug of Six quick heating filament type
transformer T, adjusted until the b-f-o signal tubes are used. Two tubes are used in the
is tuned exactly to 455 kc. transmitter portion of the transceiver, two in
The response of the S-meter is controlled the receiver portion, and the remaining two
by the time constant in the grid of the 12AU7 in the common audio section.
meter tube. If the grid capacitor in this circuit The transmitting portion of the unit em-
is increased in value from .05 ~-tfd. to 1.0 ~-tfd. ploys a 3A5 dual triode and a 3A4 pentode.
548 Receivers and Transceivers THE RADIO
The first triode section of the 3A5 serves as serves as a doubler from 72 Me. to 144 Me.
an overtone crystal oscillator, delivering 24 Tuning of the plate circuit is accomplished
Me. energy from an 8 Me. crystal. The crystal by the slug of coil L,. Inductive coupling is
oscillates in series mode and sufficient regen- used between L, and the quarter-wave whip
eration is introduced in the circuit by return- antenna.
ing the crystal circuit to a tap on the oscillator The receiver employs a 5678 sub-miniature
plate coil. The oscillator may be adjusted by pentode r-f stage to provide a better signal-to-
tuning the slug of coil L,. The 24 Me. plate noise ratio and also to reduce spurious radia-
circuit of the oscillator stage is capacitively tion from the super-regenerative detector. At
coupled to a 3A4 pentode tripler stage whose a distance of fifty feet from the transceiver,
plate circuit is tuned to 72 Me. This stage the detector radiation is inaudible to a sen-
is resonated by means of the slug of coil L. sitive receiver. In the interest of economy, the
The 3A4, in turn, is capacitively coupled to 5678 can be replaced with a 959 "acorn" tube
the second section of the original 3A5 which if miniaturization of the unit is not desired.
The super-regenerative detector uses a special
quench circuit which provides smooth opera-
tion yet allows the usual variable quench con-
trol to be eliminated. Values shown in the
schematic are optimum, and care should be
taken to keep all leads short. Capacitor C is
the receiver tuning control and has a range
of 140 Me. to 150 Me. If it is desired to re-
duce the tuning range, one or two plates can
be removed from C and coil Ls readjusted
accordingly. The 5676 can be replaced by a
95 7 "acorn" tube in the interest of economy.
Audio output from the super-regenerative
detector is passed through a simple R-C filter
to suppress the quench frequencies. The first
audio stage is a 1S5 pentode using contact po-
tential grid bias. Interstage coupling is ac-
complished by a Centralab Coup/ate printed
circuit incorporating the six components re-
quired at this juncture. If this item is not
available, the values of resistance and capaci-
tance shown can be substituted. The output
stage consists of a 3Q4 power pentode driving
a 2 Yz -inch speaker through the output trans-
former T,. For reception only one-half of the
3Q4 filament is used to conserve "A" and "B"
battery drain. During transmit periods the
extra audio is needed and the other half of
the filament is energized.
The "send-receive" switch S1A-B-C-D-E is
a miniature ceramic rotary switch. Section A
switches the antenna from the receiver to the
transmitter. Secion B energizes the filaments
of the receiver r-f tubes on the "receive" po-
sition, and energizes the microphone and the
second section of the 3Q4 filament on the
"transmit" position. Section C turns off all
Figure 23 filaments in the "off" position, and section
BATTERY POWERED "HANDlE- D opens the 67.5 volt battery circuit in the
TALKIE" FOR 2 METERS
"off" position. Section E connects the loud-
Completely self-contained transceiver em-
ploys crystal controlled transmitter for speaker to the audio system in the "receive"
greatest stability. Send-receive switch is at position of switch S,. The extreme counter-
top right with tuning control of receiver
directly below. clockwise position of s, is the "off' position.
HANDBOOK ;'Handie-Talkie" 549
Under normal operating conditions the within a steel box measuring 9" long by 2%"
transceiver is held like a telephone and a short wide by 2 Ys" deep. The width and depth di-
whip antenna is used. The operating range mensions were determined by the size of the
may be extended by removing the whip and battery pack. The "front" of the cabinet is
using a beam, connected to the unit by a one piece with flanged edges. The microphone
length of 52-ohm coaxial transmission line. and speaker are attached to this portion of
Three separate battery voltages are required the box. The transceiver chassis is custom de-
by the "handie-talkie." 1 Y2-volts is required for signed to fit the available components and is
the filament circuit, 4.5 volts is required for held to the front of the box by two 6-32
grid bias of the 3Q4 audio stage, and 67.5 bolts through the rear of the speaker frame.
volts is required for the plate voltage. All The rear and sides of the cabinet serve merely
these voltages may be obtained from miniature as a dust shield as no components are fastened
batteries placed within the case of the trans- to them, except for the coaxial antenna recep-
ceiver. tacle. The portion of the cabinet directly over
the batteries is separately removable to permit
Transceiver No hard and fast assembly pro- easy access to the battery pack. The remaining
Layout cedure is given for this unit, portion of the cabinet is affixed permanently
since each builder will want to to the front piece by means of sheet metal
custom-fit the circuit into his particular case. screws. The crystal projects through a cut-out
The unit shown in the photographs was built in this piece, and there are three %-inch holes
+ 20JJFO.
~"'i"5cl
B+ 67.5 V.
'--------,R
0~
OFF T
~XHT\~RNAL -= S1A
ANTENNA
II
(144MC) Lo-
e c A
~---------~c
~og,
4,7K .Q.Q.l-=
--o.5 c
r 1.s . -4.5 +67.5
:;~.~ 5
+1. } VOLTS
-67.5
Figure 24
SCHEMATIC, "HANDlE-TALKIE" FOR 2 METERS
Coil data is given in Figure 26.
C,-JI JLJLfd. "butterfly". Johnson 3MBII
S,A-B-C-D-E-5 pole, three position rotary switch. Centralab PA-2015
T,-JOO ohms to grid. Triad A-IX
Tz-5 K pri., 6.7 K and 4 ohm sec. Triad M-4Z
f ,-Telephone-type carbon microphone.
550 Receivers and Transceivers THE RADIO
through which the transmitter tuning slugs FIGURE 26-COIL TABLE FOR "HANDlE-TALKIE"
may be adjusted. These holes are dosed with
L1-5 TURNS N 18 E. (SEE TEXT)
snap-in hole plugs after adjustments are com-
pleted. l 2 - 2 TURNS N22. INSULATED WIRE COUPLED
TO GRID END QF COIL l3.
A general view of the transmitter chassis L3-fiTURNS N11 E 3/8-INCH DIAMETER,
may be seen in figures 25, 27, and 28. Notice 1/2.-INCH LONG, AIR WOUND.
that a small shield passes across the r-f stage l 4 - 2.0 TURNS N 2.8 E., 1/2.-INCH DIAMETER,
tube socket, and pin 3 of the socket is ground- 1/2.-INCH LONt;. TAP 9 TURNS FROM GRID END.
RESONATES IN CIRCUIT AT 2.4 MC.
ed to the shield. The shield isolates coil L,
l 5 - 7 TURNS N 18 E., 3/8-INCH DIAMETER,
from tuning capacitor C, which is placed di- 1/2-IN. LONG. RESONATES IN CiRCUIT AT 72 MG.
rectly below it. The two audio stages and
L6- 5TURNS N16 E., 3/8-INCH DIAMETER,
transformer T, mount at the end of the chassis. 1/2-IN. LONG. RESONATES IN CIRCUIT AT 144 MC.
The tubes mount parallel to the front panel
on a small aluminum angle bracket. Directly
below T, is the 5676 detector tube, also placed Transceiver Wiring techniques are extreme-
in a horizontal position. Wiring ly important when working on
The crystal socket, the transmitter coils, the VHF equipment that must be
two r-f tubes, and the "send-receive" switch compacted into a small space. It is recommend-
S, are mounted at the far end of the chassis. ed that a "pencil-type" soldering iron be used,
A small shield plate is placed between coils along with small gage wire whose insulation
L, and L, to reduce interstage feedback. Output will not melt if it is overheated. All socket
transformer T, is located between the 3A4 grounds and filament wiring are completed
plate coil ( L,) and the audio tubes. first. Coils are wound and put into position.
The r-f stage coil L, is wound upon a slug- After the coupling capacitors and other r-f
tuned form made from a concentric trimmer componepts are mounted in place, the tubes
capacitor. The outer electrode of the capacitor are placed in the sockets and the tuned circuits
is removed, exposing the polystyrene form are adjusted to frequency. It may be necessary
upon which the coil may be wound. The inner to alter the number of turns on coils L,, L, L,
slug of the capacitor serves as the tuning slug and L due to slight variances in circuit com-
of the coil. ponents and tube inter-electrode capacities.
Figure 25
VIEW OF
"WALKIE-TALKIE"
CHASSIS SHOWING
MAJOR
COMPONENTS
Oblique view of choJsis
looking towards switch
S1 Output coil '- is in
foreground with 3AS
tube behind it. To right
of 3AS Is 3A4 triplet
stoge. Coils l..4 and l..s ore
behind 3A4. To right of
switch s, is receiver tun-
ing control c,. Shield
separates C, from coil
1.., directly above it. R-f
amplifier tube 5687
mounts on vertical plote
supporting 1..,. Shield be-
low r-f tube isolotes It
from detector compon-
ents below the chossls.
Audio tubes ore at right,
with T,
Figure 27
UNDER-CHASSIS
VIEW OF
WALKIE-TALKIE
SHOWING MAJOR
COMPONENTS
Chassis of transceiver is
specially bent to fit com-
ponents in smallest possi-
ble space. Oscillator coil
L, is at left separated
from triplet coil Ls by
small shield. Output coil
L, is to rear. 5676 detec-
tor tube is at right rear,
flanked by 20 p,fd. filter
capacitor. Audio tubes
are under chassis parti
tion at right. Quench fil-
ter capacitors are to
right of coil Ls.
These adjustments may be done quickly and ed for best reception after the transceiver is
easily with the aid of a grid dip oscillator. assembled and the whip antenna placed in the
After the r-f circuits are adjusted the rest of coaxial receptacle. However, it is possible to
the transceiver may be wired. Short, direct place a short piece of wire in the antenna re-
leads should be used in the r-f circuits and all ceptacle to pick up a test signal while the
wires should be routed in the shortest possible transceiver is dissembled on the bench. The
paths. coupling between L, and La should be adjusted
for best super-regenerative action and sensi-
Transceiver After all wiring has been check- tivity .
Alignment ed, the tubes should be removed After the receiver is operating, the transmit-
from their sockets and the fila- ter should be energized. Tune the slug of coil
ment batteries connected to the unit. The fila- L. for reliable crystal operation. A grid dip
ment voltage at each tube socket should be oscillator held in the proximity of L, will serve
checked in all three operating positions of as a r-f indicator. Remove the plate voltage
switch St. Make sure the second filament sec- from the grid dip oscillator for this test. Al-
tion of the 3Q4 (pin # 7) is energized in the ternatively, oscillator operation may be moni-
"transmit" position of St. The bias batteries tored in a nearby receiver tuned to the 24
and B-plus batteries may now be attached to Me. overtone frequency of the crystal. The
the proper leads. Be sure of the correct battery 3A4 tripler stage may now be tuned for maxi-
polarity before inserting the tubes in the sock- mum output on 72 Me. as indicated on the
ets. Test the "handie-talkie" for proper recep- grid dip oscillator. Finally, the grid dip oscilla-
tion first. The slug of coil L, should be adjust- tor (or wavemeter) is held in close proximity
Figure 28
TRANSCEIVER
CHASSIS BOLTED
TO PANEL OF
WALKIE-TALKIE
The chassis is held in
place by bolts passed
through frame of small
speaker. Modulation
transformer T: is visible
in foreground with Cen-
tralab "Coup/ate" at rear
of audio tube sockeb,
Batteries occupy space
to left above microphone.
Crystal socket is at far
right, which is "top" end
of transceiver.
552 Receivers and Transceivers THE RADIO
to the 144 Me. doubler plate coil, 16. This relatively low power and the amateur having
coil is tuned for maximum output at 2 meters. modest power suffers no handicap if he has a
After this preliminary alignment is completed good antenna.
the chassis of the transceiver may be placed in The growth of mobile operation on the six
the case, along with the battery power pack. meter band has been rapid and the need has
arisen for a compact transceiver that will work
Final Experience with several of these well either in the car or at home. The unit
Alignment units has shown that maximum described in this section has been designed to
output is obtained with a whip meet this need.
antenna slightly longer than quarter wave- This compact transceiver operates in the 50-
length. The transmitter stages should be re- 54 Me. range. It employs a stable, superhetero-
tuned for maximum field strength in a nearby dyne type receiver and a 10 watt transmitter.
wavemeter and different length whip antennas The transmitter may be either crystal con-
should be tried. The quarter wavelength whip trolled, or driven with an external variable
is nineteen inches long, but whip lengths up frequency oscillator. A 5-watt audio system
to twenty-seven inches should be tried. In operates from a high impedance crystal micro-
general, whip lengths of twenty-four inches or phone and provides 100% modulation of the
so seem to produce best results with this little transmitter. In the receiver mode, the audio
transceiver. Input to the final stage of the system delivers sufficient power to drive an
3A5 is approximately )f-watt under optimum external speaker well above the noise level
loading conditions. of the automobile.
Small enough to fit comfortably under the
The operating range between two of these
dash of today's car, the transceiver delivers a
units varies from a thousand feet or so over
well modulated signal at a total plate power
obstructed terrain to better than three miles
over smooth ground. Communication between drain of 100 milliamperes at 250 volts po-
tential. Voltage regulation of the plate and fila-
the "handie-talkie" and a base station equipped
ment voltages of the receiver oscillator en-
with a sensitive receiver and a high gain beam
sures the maximum stability required for mo-
can be maintained over greater range.
bile work.
27-6 Six Meter Transceiver A block diagram of the trans-
Transceiver Circuit ceiver is shown in figure 30.
for Home or Car Eleven tubes are employed, plus
a filament voltage regulator. Change-over
The six meter band has become extremely from receive to transmit is accomplished by a
popular within the past few years. The pin- push-to-talk circuit that operates two d-e re-
nacle of the sunspot cycle, combined with the lays from the microphone control button.
influx of new amateurs has brought life to The receiver employs a broad-band r-f stage
an otherwise neglected amateur band. Most and two i-f stages. The r-f stage uses a 6CB6
of the stations operating on this band employ television-type pentode with pre-tuned grid and
plate circuits. This stage is capacity coupled
to a second 6CB6 mixer operating with grid
injection. The variable frequency oscillator is
a third 6CB6 in a Tri-tet configuration. The
oscillator circuit ( L,-C,-C.) tunes the 17.0-
17. 7 Me. range. The plate circuit of this
Figure 29
DE-LUXE SIX METER TRANSCEIVER
FOR HOME OR CAR
Operating from a separate power package,
this compact transceiver is well suited for
the serious six meter operator. A 10 watt
crystal controlled transmitter and super-
heterodyne receiver are combined with a
dual purpose audio system in this small
cabinet. Receiver controls are at left and
transmitter controls at right. Meter serves
as $-meter and transmitter tuning indica-
tor. External VFO may be used with trans-
ceiver.
HANDBOOK 6-Meter Transceiver 553
stage is gang-tuned to the oscillator and covers Two stages of one megacycle i-f amplifi-
the third harmonic range of 51-53 Me. The cation are used for maximum gain. Five i-f
harmonic voltage is capacitively coupled to the transformers are used to narrow the "skirt"
input grid circuit of the mixer stage. Series response of the i-f strip. A 12AL5 serves as
padding capacitors in the oscillator and tripler the detector, a-v-e rectifier, and automatic
stages permit close tracking over the tuning noise limiter. Filament voltage to the 12AL5
range. is reduced to 10.5 volts to provide better noise
An i-f channel of 1 Me. is employed in this limiting action.
transceiver. When the oscillator is considered Two tubes are used in the audio system of
to be on the high frequency side of the received the transceiver. A 12AX7 dual triode serves
signal, the tuning range is 50-52 Me. When as a two stage resistance coupled speech am-
the oscillator is considered to be on the low plifier. Only one section of the 12AX7 is
frequency side of the received signal, the used for reception purposes. The dual triode
tuning range is 52-54 Me. The broad band r-f is capacity coupled to a 12AQ5 audio output
circuits of the receiver "front end" cover the stage. A tapped output transformer matches the
complete range of 50-54 Me. so that signals 12AQ5 to the r-f amplifier plate circuit of the
on either side of the injection frequency may transmitter section, and a low impedance wind-
be detected. This principle is sometimes re- ing on the transformer drives an external
ferred to as super-imposition tuning, wherein speaker for reception. The screen voltage of
the receiver is tuned to two frequencies simul- the 12AQ5 is reduced for receiving operation
taneously. For example, if the local oscillator to conserve power supply drain.
is tuned to 51 Me., simultaneous reception of The transmitter section of the transceiver uses
signals on 50 Me. and 52 Me. is possible. two pentode tubes. The oscillator is a 6CL6
Since most amateur activity takes place in the in a "hot cathode" circuit employing 25 Me.
lower one megacycle of the six meter band, overtone crystals. Switch s, in the grid circuit
the chance of two signals appearing at one of the oscillator permits selection of an ex-
point of the dial that in reality are two mega- ternal variable frequency oscillator. The plate
cycles apart is remote. circuit of the oscillator ( Cs-L,) is tuned to the
Super-imposition tuning greatly simplifies 50 Me. second harmonic of the crystal. A
the design of a VHF receiver. Double conver- switch ( s,) in the oscillator screen circuit
sion is not required, and the local oscillator permits the operator to turn on the oscillator
need tune only a relatively narrow frequency stage during reception for '"zero-beat" or fre-
range. Saving, in parts and circuit complexity, quency marking purposes. The oscillator is in-
IS obvious. ductively coupled to a 5763 r-f amplifier
R-F AMP. MIXER IF 1-F DET.,A-N-L.
(SOMC) (fMC.) (IMC.)
I '~ I I I
I I I I
L - - - - -- -
I
I
I I
J I I I
'-----b-_,_ I 6
RY1B t._ J Bt 250 V.
Figure 30
BLOCK DIAGRAM OF 10 WATT SIX METER TRANSCEIVER
554 Receivers and Transceivers THE RADIO
R 2.
serves as a signal strength meter.
Under normal driving and charging condi-
tions, the voltage of the standard "12 volt"
battery can vary from 11 volts to 14.5 volts.
TO 12AQ6 SCREEN
12AQ 5 SCREEN
CONTROL E: B+ 2.$0
TO 47 K RESISTOR
This fluctuation can raise havoc with the re-
ceiver oscillator stability. It is annoying, to
say the least, to have the receiver calibration
change with variations of car speed and gen-
r-- B+TO 6CL6. RY1 SECTION 8
B+CONTROL
c=: B+ 2!0
B+ TO RECEIVER
erator voltage. To eliminate this effect, an
A mperite ballast tube ( R,) is placed in series
with the filament circuit of the 6CB6 receiver
oscillator tube. This current sensitive device
compensates for voltage changes in the fila-
SJA SJB
Ms ment circuit, holding the voltage at the fila-
MJ
ment terminals of the oscillator tube within
a few percent of a nominal 6.3 volts.
M1~
(SEE F!,URE 32)
The six volt tubes of the receiver are con-
nected in series parallel for operation across
Figure 31 the 12-volt power supply. A compensating re-
RELAY AND METER CIRCUITS sistor is required across the filament of the
Relays are shown in unenergized position.
5 763 to equalize the current drain with that
of the 6CL6 oscillator.
stage, which is plate modulated by the 12AQ5 Transceiver Layout Figures 29, 33, and 34
audio amplifier. The r-f amplifier is bridge and Assembly provide a general lay-
neutralized by capacitor Co for greatest sta- out of the transceiver.
bility at the operating frequency range. The The unit is built upon an aluminum chassis
plate circuit of the 5 763 is pi-coupled to a measuring 9" x 7" x 1 Y2" in size. This assem-
52- or 72-ohm external load. bly fits within a steel wrap-around type cab-
Transfer from reception to transmission is inet 4Y2" high, and approximately the same
accomplished by means of two d-e relays ac- length and depth. The cabinet is formed of
tuated by a push-to-talk switch in the micro- perforated metal to ensure proper ventilation
phone. The six volt relay coils are connected while at the same time reducing spurious radi-
in series for twelve volt operation. Relay ation to a minimum.
change-over operation is shown in figure 31. Viewed from the top rear (figure 3 3), the
Relay RY -1 actuates antenna changeover, receiver portion of the unit occupies the right
screen control, and speaker control circuits. half of the chassis and the transmitter and
Relay RY-2 actuates audio control, 12AQ5 modulator occupy the left half. The external
screen control, and B-plus control circuits. plugs and receptacles are mounted on the
Both relays are shown in "receive" position in rear apron of the chassis as is the modulation
figures 31 and 3 2. gain control, R,. These components project
Proper tuning of the r-f amplifier is ac- through a cut-out in the rear of the steel en-
complished by a simple crystal diode voltmeter closure. All the ceramic variable capacitors that
( 1N38A) connected in the antenna circuit. serve as circuit adjustment trimmers are flush
X
~
z
0
A.v.c. m
RECEIVER 0
0
6CL6 osc. .ogs L7 I~ 1
"
(51-53MC.) nl~..,._--.--1~ RY1A =
12.AQS
100
250 250
175
12
1.0
RY1
*- SEE Flt:URE .J5
mounted to the chassis and may be tuned ing to the data of figure 3 5 before wiring is
from the top of the unit, with the exception started.
of the receiver oscillator trimmer C which is The majority of components are installed
mounted below chassis to conserve space. between the socket pins of the various tubes
Below the chassis, a small aluminum shield and five large phenolic terminal strips. One of
measuring I )f" long and I~~" high is positioned these strips (previously mentioned) is placed
between the oscillator output coil L, and the between the two transfer relays. A four term-
receiver r-f amplifier plate coil L,. This is the inal and a six terminal tie-point strip are
only interstage shield required in the trans- mounted in line running parallel to the i-f
ceiver. The two transfer relays RY-I and RY-2 tube sockets of the receiver, towards the chas-
are mounted in the under-chassis area be- sis-edge side of the sockets. The i-f stage com-
neath the modulation transformer T,. Between ponents mount between these tie-points and
the relays is placed an 8-terminal phenolic the pins of the 6BJ6 and 12AL5 tube sockets.
mounting strip. To the side of this strip is A fourth terminal strip ( 8 tie-points) is par-
placed the midget S-meter potentiometer R,. allel to and directly beside the edge of the
All sockets and trimming capacitors are mount- chassis adjacent to the rf tube sockets of the
ed in place using 4-40 hardware with solder- receiver. The smaller components of the r-f
ing lugs placed beneath the nuts in various section mount between this strip and the pins
convenient locations. of the 6CB6 sockets.
Transceiver The wiring of the unit is quite The r-f coils of the receiver section (L, L,,
Wiring simple if done in the proper L,, and L.) are mounted directly to the ceramic
sequence. The underchassis area trimming capacitors associated with each coil.
contains many small components but these need The interstage coupling coils ( L, and L) of
not be crowded, provided proper care is taken the transmitrer section are mounted to their
in the layout and installation of parts. Be sure respective trimming capacitors and may be
the i-f transformers have been modified accord- seen in the center of the chassis in figure 34.
Figure 33
REAR VIEW OF
SIX MHER
TRANSCEIVER
CHASSIS
Receiver section of unit
is at right with trimmer
capacitors seen on chas-
sis deck. Center section
af three gang variable
capacitor is unused.
Transmitter output con-
trols are located at up-
per left. Filament volt
age regulator tube is
at rear of chassis, just
above modulation level
control potentiometer.
5763 amplifier tube is
behind modulation trans
former, with shielded
6CL6 tube to right. 1-f
strip runs along center
of chassis. Antenna and
speaker plugs and power
receptacle are along rear
lip of chassis. Receiver
audio control is at upper
right of front panel.
HANDBOOK 6-Meter Transceiver 557
ground connections should be made, followed l1, l2., l 4 - 8 TURNS N18 E., 3/8" DIAM., 1/2" LONG.
by the filament wiring. The speech amplifier l3-7TURNS N16 E., 1/2" OlAM., 1/2" LONG.
(SeW COIL STOCK )
should be wired next, taking care to place
l5, l6-10 TURNS N'"22 E., 5/16" DIAM., 5/16" LONG.
small components directly between socket ADJUST SPACING BETWEEN COILS FOR MAXI-
pins to conserve space. All the small compon- MUM GRID DRIVE. COILS MOUNT END TO END.
ents of the i-f system can be mounted above l7-6TURNS N 16 E., 1/2" DIAM., 5/8" LONG. AIRWOUNO.
the tube sockets, and in the space between the T!,T5- REPLACE 100 lJlJFD PADDING CAPACITORS
WITH 200JJJJFD CAPACITORS TO RESONATE
sockets and the tie-point strips. The power WINDINGS TO 1 MC.
Figure 34
UNDER-CtiASSIS
VIEW OF
TRANSCEIVER
Changeover relays are
located at the left edge
of the chassis. The i-f
amplifier runs down the
center of the chassis,
with the receiver r-f
stages to the right.
Transmitter stages are
located between front re-
lay and i-f strip. Audio
stages are placed along
rear of chassis. Small
components are mounted
between socket pins and
adjacent phenolic termi-
nal strips.
Note: filament circuit is
designed for d.c. opera-
tion. If a.c. filament op-
eration is desired, high
resistance relay coils op-
erated from the high
voltage supply should be
employed,
558 Receivers and Transceivers THE RADIO
The next step is to check the tuning range chassis should be made of coaxial cable, as
of the high frequency oscillator, which should should the lead from relay R Y -1 to the an-
be 17.0-17.7 Me. The range may be checked tenna receptacle J,. In addition, the lead from
with an accurately calibrated receiver or fre- the receiver antenna input circuit to relay RY-1
quency meter. The fixed trimming capacitor should be shielded.
determines the overall frequency span of the The majority of small components of both
oscillator, and padding capacitor C determines the oscillator and amplifier stages may be
the range setting. Padding capacitor C is ad- mounted by their leads between socket pins
justed so that 17.0 Me. occurs when the main and a nearby 5-terminal phenolic tie-point
tuning dial is set to five degrees, allowing a strip. The plate coil L, of the 57 63 amplifier
slight amount of "overlap" at the band edges. stage is mounted above chassis, directly be-
As the main tuning capacitor setting is de- hind amplifier tuning capacitors Cn and C12.
creased the oscillator will tune to 17.7 Me. Small National Co. polystyrene feed through
If it is desired to widen or diminish the tuning bushings are used to support the coil. Neutral-
range, the value of the series capacitor may be izing capacitor Co is soldered to a rotor termi-
changed slightly. Once the proper oscillator nal of plate tuning capacitor Cn. The lead
range has been established, the tripler circuit from Co to the "cold" end of L, passes through
should be adjusted to track with it. The main a }4-inch hole drilled in the chassis. To insure
tuning capacitor should be set to 17.7 Me. and a good ground return, the rotors of Cn and
padding capacitor C, adjusted so that the tuned C" are connected to the chassis with a short,
circuit resonates at 53 Me., as checked with a heavy coppe~ strap.
grid dip oscillator. The main tuning dial is The final step is to complete the wiring to
then reset to place the oscillator on 17.0 Me.; the meter switch and the relays as outlined in
trimming capacitor C, is adjusted so that the figure 31. When this is completed, all the
tripler circuit resonates at 51 Me. Once the transceiver wiring should be completely check-
two circuits have been brought into rough ed and the chassis thoroughly cleaned of loose
alignment they may be placed "on the nose" bits of solder, wire, etc.
by adjusting C, and Co for constant grid cur-
Transmitter It is necessary to close both re-
rent in the mixer stage across the tuning
range. Temporarily unsolder the grounded ter- Adjustment lays to test the transmitter op-
minal of the 0.1-megohm grid resistor of the eration. For the time being,
6CB6 mixer tube (pin 1 ) and place a 0-100 they may be wedged close with a bit of match-
micro-ammeter in series with the resistor to stick if a 12-volt d-e supply is not readily
ground. Adjust C, at the high frequency end available. A 25 Me. crystal should be plugged
of the tuning dial and Co at the low frequency in the panel holder and switch S, set to the
end until the rectified grid current is relatively XTAL position. Switch S, is set to OSC posi-
constant across the band. Under proper oper- tion, and the lead from the screen circuit of
ating conditions, the reading should be about the 57 63 amplifier tube to the contact of re-
15 microamperes. lay RYl-B is temporarily opened, removing
The last step is to align the tuned circuits screen voltage from the r-f amplifier. Filament
of the r-f stage. These are relatively broad band and plate voltage is applied to the transceiver
and need only be peaked over the usual fre- and capacitor C, is tuned for oscillation of the
quency range of operation. For most purposes crystal. The meter of the transceiver is switched
they should be resonated at 50.5 Me. for opti- to the GRID (M,) position and capacitor C,
mum operation at the low frequency end of adjusted for maximum grid current. A reading
the band. Signals above 52 Me. will be slightly of half-scale should be obtained. The coupling
attenuated by this adjustment. If operation at between L, and Lo can be varied slightly to
the high frequency end of the six meter band obtain the proper reading.
is desired, the circuits should be peaked at 53 The dummy antenna (figure 32) is next
Me. with a consequent slight reduction of per- plugged into antenna receptacle ], and loading
formance in the 50 Me. region. capacitor C,, set at full capacity. The plate cir-
cuit of the amplifier stage should be resonated
Completion of the Once the receiver is at 50 Me. with the aid of a grid dip oscillator
Transmitter Section judged to be in good coupled to coil L,. The turns of L, should be
operating condition, at- adjusted so resonance occurs at half-capacity
tention should be turned to the transmitter. setting of tuning capacitor Cn. After this pre-
The lead from the XTAL-VFO switch s, to liminary adjustment has been made, capacitor
the v-f-o input receptacle } on the rear of the ell should be tuned through its range while
HANDBOOK 28-Mc. Transceiver 559
carefully noting the grid current of the ampli- All r-f adjustments should be carried out with
fier. Unless neutralizing capacitor Co has been the purpose of cbtaining maximum reading on
correctly set by a lucky accident, the grid cur- the output meter of the transmitter under a
rent reading will show an abrupt kick as ca- given set of antenna conditions. Under these
pacitor Cn is tuned through resonance. The conditions, maximum transceiver plate current
setting of the neutralizing capacitor should be is 100 milliamperes at a plate potential of
slowly varied so as to minimize the kick of 250 volts.
grid current. After change of setting of Co,
grid tuning capacitor C,, should be retuned for The Meter A final word should be said
maximum grid current. An adjustment of Co Circuit about the metering circuit of the
will soon be found that will reduce the grid transceiver. The particular meter
current variation to an imperceptible kick of used has a d-e resistance of 100 ohms, and a
the meter. When this point is found, the rotor full scale reading of one milliampere. In order
of Co should be fastened in place with a drop to simplify the problem of obtaining meter
of nail polish and the screen lead to R Y -1 shunts, the meter is converted into a 0-1 volt-
should be resoldered. meter by adding a 900 ohm resistor in series
with the meter in the grid current position
Switch S, is now set to the transmit posi-
( Ma) . The meter is placed across a 1000 ohm
tion and power is again applied to the trans-
shunt in this position. Since the resistance of
mitter. The meter switch is placed in the OUT-
the meter circuit and the shunt are equal, one-
PUT (M,) position, and plate tuning capaci-
half the grid current flows through the meter,
tor Cn adjusted for maximum meter reading.
and one-half through the shunt. Thus, when
At the same time, the bulbs of the dummy an-
the meter reads full scale (one milliampere),
tenna should glow. Capacitors Cn and Cu are
two milliamperes of grid current are flowing
touched up for maximum indication of the
in the grid return circuit.
meter.
When the meter is switched to S-METER
In order to test the modulator section of the position ( M,, M,) of switch Sa, the meter is
transmitter when using an a-c filament supply, placed in a bridge circuit, the variable leg of
it is necessary to disconnect the push-to-talk which is the internal resistance of the a-v-e
circuit at pin # 2 of the microphone plug; controlled, i-f amplifier tube. The bridge is
otherwise there will be a loud hum on the balanced by proper setting of R.; meter sensi-
audio signal. When this is done, the micro- tivity is set by the value of the series resistor
phone may be plugged into the jack and the ( 2.2K). Dropping the value of this resistance
gain control ( R:,) advanced. The dummy an- will increase the sensitivity of the meter.
tenna should increase in brilliance under pro- When S., is set to the VOLTS position, the
per modulation. If the coupling to the dummy meter is placed in series with a 500 K resistor
load is too tight downward modulation will ( M,) and is converted into a 0-500 volt meter
result, and the bulb brilliance will drop. The to check the operating potential of the plate
capacity of loading capacitor c, should be in- supply.
creased, dropping the degree of loading.
The transmitter is designed to operate into 27-7 A "Hot"
a coaxial transmission line having an imped- Transceiver
ance value between 50 and 75 ohms. When a
high value of standing wave ratio exists on
for 28 Megacycles
the line the impedance presented to the pi- This little transceiver is vivid proof that
network amplifier may be of such magnitude DX can be easily worked on the 10 meter
as to preclude the possibility of a proper band. During a test period of two weeks, using
match. It is permissible to add a second mica a dipole antenna, over SO foreign phone con-
capacitor in parallel with loading capacitor c, tacts were made in four continents, including
to extend the operating range of the pi-net- three contacts with India. Power input to the
work. If more than 50 1-'1-'fd. has to be added, transmitter section of the unit was under 10
the SWR ratio should either be lowered by watts. Admittedly, such DX is not a daily
proper adjustments to the antenna, or the feature with such low power, but it does
length of the transmission line between the prove that a few watts into a well situated an-
transciver and antenna should be altered in tenna can work wonders on the 28 megacycle
order to present a more reasonable load to band.
the amplifier circuit. Maximum carrier power The 28-10 transceiver (28 megacycles, 10
output when properly tuned is about 4Y2 watts. watts) is designed to operate over the range
Figure 36
TEN METER TRANSCEIVER HAS
SIMPLE CONTROL PANEL
Used with a dipole antenna, this 10 watt
28 Me. transceiver has made three contacts
with India. Main tuning dial of receiver is
at center with send-receive switch below it.
At upper right is combination S-meter and
transmitter tuning indicator. Transmitter
tuning controls are at left with "push-to-
zero" switch near receiver tuning dial.
Unit features self-contained power supply
lor II 5 volt operation.
I
L..-
__ .J_ ___ , __ .....:,_ __ __...J_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _j
I
I
I
r----,
: VSlC StA
II ,---------~~------------------~----+---------------__1
I
I I
I : AUDIO AUDIOI J
L-----::--{6BJ6)-------{6AQ5)--..!...-c-"0~-~
1
3
REGULATOR 6 PHONES
y I I
StE
'15 v.""'
Figure 37
BLOCK DIAGRAM OF TEN METER TRANSCEIVER
HANDBOOK 28-Mc. Transceiver 561
r-f, mixer, and oscillator stages. Series padding is a simple pi-network designed to match loads
in the r-f and mixer circuits is employed for of 50 to 7 5 ohms. The external antenna is
good tracking across the band. switched between the transmitter and the re-
An i-f channel of 1.5 Me. is used in this ceiver by means of switch segment SlA. A
unit. This particular frequency was chosen to separate section of the transfer switch (S1B)
eliminate the troublesome "image" problem,
removes plate voltage from the 6AQ5 r.f.
so prevalent on the 10 meter band when the
amplifier stage and applies an audio load to the
usual 45 5 kc. i-f channel is employed. Selec-
tivity suffers a bit when the higher frequency modulator during reception. This auxiliary
channel is used, but a total of eight tuned loading prevents audio feedback when the
circuits (four transformers) provide an ac- headphones are removed from the jack ;,, and
ceptable passband for voice reception. A 6AL5 permits the use of headphones of any imped-
double diode serves as the detector, a-v-e rec- ance to be used without the danger of spurious
tifier, and automatic noise limiter. The a-n-1 feedback. The overall gain of the audio sys-
is left in the circuit at all times. tem is quite high and it is built in a small
space. As a result, it does not have the reserve
The audio section of the 28-10 uses two
of stability that would normally be expected.
tubes. A 6BJ6 serves as a resistance coupled
The switching system, too, tends to create
pentode voltage amplifier which is coupled to
small feedback loops that must be carefully
a 6AQ5 power amplifier. A tapped output
controlled. The chief cause of audio instability
transformer matches the 6AQ5 to the r-f am-
(or feedback) in this case is due to the close
plifier plate circuit of the transmitter section,
proximity of transformers T, and T, above the
and a low impedance winding on the trans-
chassis. Feedback can be reduced or enhanced
former matches the audio system to external
by reversing the polarity of the secondary
earphones or speaker. The input circuit of the
winding of T,. The additional audio filtering
6BJ6 forms an R-C dividing network isolating
shown in the schematic of figure 3 8 reduced
the microphone input from the audio output
this tendency to a minimum. As a final pre-
circuit of the receiver. No switching is required
caution, a small shield (cut from a segment of
in this circuit.
tin can) was soldered to the top of the core
The transceiver is designed to be used with of T,. The shield projected downwards over
a low impedance carbon microphone. Voltage the windings of the transformer, as seen in
for microphone operation is taken from a tap Figure 39. A more expensive solution would
on the cathode circuit of the 6AQ5 amplifier have been to employ a shielded transformer in
stage. This circuit is broken by switch SlD this portion of the circuit. A similar shield is
during reception. At the same time, switch sec- soldered to the core of the filament transform-
tion S1E connects the earphone circuit to the er to reduce hum pickup by the adjacent audio
low impedance winding on the output trans- transformers.
former T .
Three tubes plus a gas-type voltage regula- The a-c operated power supply employs two
tor and a diode r-f indicator are used in the "replacement type" selenium rectifiers in a
transmitter portion of the transceiver. A 6BJ6 voltage doubling circuit delivering 2 50 volts
serves as a "Tri-tet" oscillator covering the at 100 milliamperes. A small filament trans-
range of 7.0-7.2 5 Me. The plate circuit is slug- former (T,) provides 6.3 volts for the tubes
tuned to the 14 Me. second harmonic. A and pilot lamp. This particular voltage doubler
switch ( S,) in the plate circuit of the oscillator has the negative side of the high voltage in
permits the operator to turn on this stage for common with one side of the primary line.
"zero-beat" or frequency marking purposes. As a result, there is a fifty-fifty chance that
The oscillator is capacitively coupled to a the chassis of the transceiver will be "above
6AQ5 doubler stage whose plate circuit is ground" by the amount of the line voltage,
tuned to the 28 Me. region. Switch segment which in this case is 115 volts. This can be a
S1C removes the plate voltage from this stage lethal situation if permitted to exist. A prac-
during reception and applies it to the r-f sec- tical solution is to remove the "ground" side
tion of the receiver. The plate circuit of the of the transmitter power cable from the usual
6AQ5 doubler stage is capacitively coupled two wire line, and connect it directly to the
to a second 6AQ5 serving as the modulated external ground, as shown in figure 41. This
amplifier. This latter stage is bridge neutralized ensures that the chassis of the transceiver is at
by capacitor C, for stability at the operating ground potential. The "hot" side of the line
frequency. The plate circuit of the amplifier returns to one pin of the line plug. If the plug
6BJ6 100
-.;;-- 4 6BJ6
T3
6BJ6 6AL5
"'...,
'i$f
T4
~
;;o
('1)
:;f c -= ()
('1)
100K 220
o:-5 0.5 <
.1.!5_
0.5 ..,
('1)
B+ VI
AVC 0
1M 250K 250K 47K ::J
o.s ~"'()."5 Q.5 0..
22K 30K
METER CIRCUIT
""0:5
R
SlA ANTENNA
SlF
..,-i
Jl 0
::J
1
t6us
VI
OSCILLATOR ()
('1)
<
..,
('1)
VI
B+ BUS
NOTES: 1- CAPACITORS MAIMED C ARE .01 CERAMIC DISC, tWO V.
GROUND
CLIP -1
2- ALL RESISTORS 1 WATT UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTELJ.
::::t
Figure 38A m
SCHEMATIC, 10 METER TRANSCEIVER
C-.01 p.fd., 600 volt ceramic capacitor. Centralab DD6-103 RFC-2'h mh. Millen miniaturized }300-2500
C,A-B-C-15 p.p.fd. per section. All Star Products Co., Defiance, Ohio, Type C3 S,A-B-C-D-E-F~ pole, two position switch. Centralab PA-2019
C...-15 p.p.fd. Bud MC-565 SR,, SR:-150 ma. selenium rectifier. Federal 1005
C,-30 p.p.fd. Bud LC-1651 T,-T,-1500 kc. i-f transformer. J. W. Miller Co. 12-W1
C,-400 p.p.fd. Allied Radio Co., Chicago, 1/1. #61H-009 Ts-100 ohms pri. to grid. Triad A-5X
C,-7 p.p.fd. Erie 532B T.-5 K pri., 6.7 K and 4 ohm sec. Triad M-4Z
CH,-3 henry at 100 mo. Stancor C-2304 Tr--6.3 volt, 3 amp. Stancor P-6466
Chassis and cabinet--California Chassis Co. #LTC-470 0
HANDBOOK 28-Mc. Transceiver 563
Figure 39
REAR VIEW OF
TRANSCEIVER
CHASSIS
Tuning capacitor of vari-
able frequency oscillator
is in foreground of photo,
panel driven by an ex-
tension shaft. To the left
of the capacitor is the
adjustable slug core of
the oscillator coli. Along
rear edge of the chassis
are the selenium rectifi-
ers, the filament trans-
former and the high volt-
age filter capacitor.
Transmitter tubes are at
right of chassis, with am-
plifier tube next to
panel. At far right Is
voltage reflulator tube.
Audio section is at up-
per left with 9006 diode
rectifier in front of the
input audio transformer.
1-f amplifier is at center
chassis, parallel to front
panel.
564 Receivers and Transceivers THE RADIO
section of the unit occupies the center section The transmitter oscillator coil L is placed at
of the chassis with the power supply directly the left rear corner of the chassis. The adjust-
behind it. To the right is the transmitter sec- able slug of this coil is visible in figure 39
tion with the variable frequency oscillator at between the selenium rectifiers and tuning ca-
the rear. Panel control of the oscillator is ac- pacitor C,.
complished by an extension shaft and a flexi- To facilitate wiring, four phenolic tie-point
ble coupling. At the left of the chassis is the terminal strips (six lug type) are placed be-
audio system. neath the chassis. One is located parallel to
Placement of the main tuning dial is dic- the edge, just to the left of the 6AQ5 buffer
tated by the height of the three-gang tuning tube socket. A second is placed parallel to the
capacitor shaft above the chassis deck. In this first, to the right of the same socket. The latter
case, it is necessary to cut a small notch in the strip is used for connections to the r-f circuitry
soft aluminum chassis to permit the dial drive of the receiver section. The third strip is placed
as~embly to drop low enough to permit the dial parallel to the rear of the chassis just in front
shaft to align with the capacitor tuning shaft. of the i-f strip and is used for i-f connections.
No interstage shields are required below The last strip is located between the 6AL5 tube
the chassis. Filter choke CHI mounts at the socket and the main filter capacitor. The noise
rear of the chassis, directly below filament limiter and a-v-e components are mounted to
transformer T,. The 100 J.LJ.Lfd. filter capacitor this strip.
mounts to the left wall of the chassis below To secure maximum stability it is necessary
and to the left of v-f-o tuning capacitor c,. to firmly mount the oscillator tuning capacity
The three slug-tuned coils of the receiver may to the chassis. An aluminum block measuring
be seen in the photograph. Coil L, is located 1 Ys" x 1" was therefore cut from a section of
behind change-over switch s,. Coil L, is to- Y2-inch aluminum stock and used as a support
wards the middle of the chassis, and adjacent block for capacitor c,. The capacitor is bolted
to the 10 J.Lfd. audio decoupling capacitor. Coil to the chassis by long 6-32 machine screws
L, is to the left of L, and between the r-f tube which pass through the block and are firmly
and mixer tube sockets. bolted beneath the chassis.
Figure 40
UNDER-CHASSIS
VIEW OF
TEN METER
TRANSCEIVER
The transmitter com-
ponents are along the
left side of the chassis.
Receiver components are
at the center, with rf
stage nearest the panel.
F/Iter choke is mounted
below chassis at rear.
Audio stage components
are grouped in upper
right corner of chassis.
See text for placement
of the smaller compon-
ents.
HANDBOOK 28-Mc. Transceiver 565
3-WIRE HOUSEHOLD
WIRING CIRCUIT
tuning capacitor, and the tube sockets are made
with # 16 tinned solid wire. In particular, care
1~
"HOT" LEAD OF TRANSCEIVER
POWER SUPPLY should be taken to prevent movement of the
leads and components in the oscillator section
--- ---- -....r::--"GROUND'' LEAD OF TRANS-
CEIVER POWER SUPPl-Y as any minute vibration of this part of the
-= circuit would lead to receiver instability.
Sufficient coupling exists between the wir-
115 0 115
ing of the oscillator and mixer circuits to pro-
Figure 41 vide the proper level of injection, and no
"GROUNDED NEUTRAL" coupling capacitor is required. The final wir-
WIRING SYSTEM ing step is to wind the antenna coil on form
Most dwellings have a three-wire grounded L. One end is attached to a nearby socket
neutral system. 115 volts o-c con be ob-
tained from either side of the system to ground lug and the other end goes to the
ground. Separate ground lead o'! trans-
ceiver is always connected before /me plug
"receive" contact of transfer switch S1A.
11
is energ'zed. This eliminates usual CJCdc" When the receiver is completed, a 28.5 Me.
shock hazard.
may be injected into the antenna circuit and
the main tuning dial set near maximum ca-
Transceiver The sequence of wiring follows pacity. The slug of receiver oscillator coil L,
Wiring much the same pattern as that is now adjusted until the signal is received near
of the six meter transceiver a dial setting of thirty degrees. After this,
described in section 27-6. Small components coil L, and coil L, are peaked for maximum
are installed between tube socket pins, or be- signal strength. Dial calibration should wait
tween socket pins and adjacent terminal strip until the transmitter section is completed.
lugs. Socket ground connections are made first Completion of the The oscillator coil should
and then the filament wiring is completed. The Transmitter Section be wound and mounted
power supply wiring can be done first. in position. The lead
When the supply is completed it should be from coil L to tuning capacitor C, is made of
tested. A 2500 ohm, 25-watt resistor should # 14 solid copper and passes through a ~-inch
be attached between the output of the supply hole in the chassis. All oscillator components
and ground. A full 250 volts should be devel- are firmly mounted to reduce vibration to a
oped across this resistor with 115 volts a-c minimum. Coils L, and L are wound and
applied to the power supply. snapped into position as the buffer stage is
Next, the i-f and second detector section of being wired. The p-a plate coil ( L,) is mount-
the receiver should be wired. Short, direct ed above chassis between the 6AQ5 amplifier
leads and the use of the adjacent terminal tube and the front panel. The plate (or "hot")
strips will reduce crowding in this area. The end of the coil is supported on a l/2-inch cer-
audio stages should now be wired, along with amic insulator and the coil lead passes through
switch segments S1B, S1D, and S1E. When a ;4-inch hole in the chassis to the stator of
this is completed, the i-f section and audio of tuning capacitor c,, mounted directly below
the transceiver may be tested. A test speaker the coil. The opposite end of coil L, is attached
should be connected to jack Ja, and a 1.5 Me. to a polystyrene feed-through insulator. Neu-
tone modulated signal from a test oscillator is tralizing capacitor c, is affixed at one end to
loosely coupled to the plate pin ( #6) of the a terminal of coil form Lo. The other end at-
6U8 socket. The top and bottom slugs of the taches to the plate r-f choke, as shown in the
i-f transformers are now adjusted for maxi- under-chassis photograph. The output lead
mum output signal. As the stages approach from transfer switch S1A to the antenna re-
aiignment, be sure to decouple the signal gen- ceptacle on the rear of the chassis is made from
erator to prevent overloading. a short length of coaxial cable. When the
After this portion of the transceiver has wiring is completed all connections should
been tested, the r-f circuits of the receiver be checked and the chassis thoroughly cleaned
should be wired. Coils L,, L,, and L are wound of solder bits, pieces of wire, flux, etc.
and the coil forms clipped in place. The front
section of tuning capacitor C1A is employed Transmitter The 6BJ6 oscillator tube should
for the grid circuit of the r-f stage, the middle Adjustment be placed in the socket, along
section is for the interstage r-f circuit, and the with the OA2 voltage regulator.
rear section is for the oscillator section of the Transmitter frequency control capacitor C, is
6U8 tube. Connections between the coils, the >et near full setting and the slug of oscillator
566 Receivers and Transceivers
coil L. is adjusted so as to place the oscillator Transceiver The transmitter may now be
frequency on 7.1 Me. The fourth harmonic of Operation attached to a suitable antenna
the oscillator will then be on 28.4 Me. At or dummy load (see section
minimum tuning capacitor setting the upper 27-6) for an operative check-out. Receiver
frequency limit of the transmitter will be calibration should be rechecked, and the dial
may be calibrated. The transfer switch should
slightly above 29.7 Me. The 6AQ5 tubes are be set to the transmitting position and the
now placed in their sockets, and a 0.5 d-e mil- transceiver loaded into the antenna system. The
liammeter is temporarily connected across meter now indicates the r-f voltage rectified by
meter shunt R, in the grid circuit of the 6AQ5 the 9006 diode attached to the output of the
final amplifier stage. The screen lead (pin 6) pi-network system. Tuning ( Ca) and loading
of the 6AQ5 amplifier tube is temporarily (C.) should be adjusted to provide a maxi-
opened. Transfer switch s, is placed in the mum meter reading, with Ca always being set
"transmit" position and the v-f-o tuning ca- last for the final "touch up" adjustment. Maxi-
mum capacity setting of C. provides minimum
pacitor C, is set to 29 Me. The transmitter is
loading and vice-versa.
energized and the slugs of oscillator coil L, It may be necessary when working into low
and buffer coil L, are adjusted for maximum impedance loads, or transmission lines having
grid drive to the amplifier (about two milli- a high value of SWR to parallel loading ca-
amperes). Amplifier loading capacitor c, is pacitor C. with an auxiliary 100 J.LJ.Lfd. mica
set at full capacity, and tuning capacitor Ca is capacitor to obtain optimum loading. This will
tuned through its range while carefully noting have to be determined by experiment.
the grid current reading. The reading will show A mobile carbon microphone may now be
an abrupt kick as Ca is tuned through reson- plugged into jack],. An indication of the mod-
ance. Next, the setting of neutralizing capaci- ulation level can be obtained by noting the
tor c, should be slowly varied by means of a increase in brilliance of the lamps of the dum-
fibre-blade screwdriver so as to minimize the my antenna. Overloading will tend to cause
kick of grid current. After each movement of downward modulation. The degree of modula-
Co, the slug of coil L, should be reset for max- tion may be varied by moving the microphone
imum grid current. A setting of Cs can readily away from the lips. Using a telephone-type
be found that will provide a minimum value F-1 unit, optimum modulation occurs when
of grid current change as capacitor Ca is tuned speaking in a normal tone about three inches
through resonance. The last step is to resolder from the microphone. The transceiver output
the screen lead to pin 6 of the 6AQ5 amplifier is about six watts fully modulated with a power
tube socket. amplifier input of ten watts.
CHAPTER TWENTY-EIGHT
The exciter is the "heart" of the amateur his hobby, these and other units shown in later
transmitter. Various forms of amplifiers and chapters should offer interesting ideas which
power supplies may be used in conjunction might well fit in with the design of his basic
with basic exciters to form transmitters which transmitting equipment.
will suit almost any need. Of great interest As in the previous chapter, the component
today are simple SSB exciters for fixed and nomenclature and color codes outlined in fig-
mobile operation. These may be used "as-is" ures 1, 2, and 3 of chapter 27 are used in this
or with a small linear amplifier for mobile chapter unless otherwise noted.
work, or may be combined with a high power
linear amplifier for fixed station operation. 28-1 SSB Exciter for
Also occupying a position of importance is Fixed or Mobile Use
the "package" VHF station capable of opera-
tion on one or more of the VHF amateur The simplest and most economical method
bands. of generating a single sideband signal is to
Several different types of equipment de- employ a phasing-type transmitter of the form
signed to meet a wide range of needs are des- outlined in chapter 17 of this Handbook. If
cribed in this chapter. There are two different the r-f phasing system operates on the carrier
sidband exciters for fixed/mobile service and frequency of the transmitter the complex fre-
a de-luxe VHF station capable of outstanding quency conversion circuits may be omitted and
performance on two VHF amateur bands. Also the complete exciter becomes inexpensive to
shown is a high stability variable frequency build and simple to place in operation.
oscillator unit designed for operation in the A SSB exciter suitable for fixed or mobile
high frequency DX bands. To the amateur operation is shown in figures 1 and 4. The
who is interested in the construction phase of exciter delivers a 3 watt peak power signal,
567
568 Low Power Transmitters THE RADIO
sufficient to drive a high power tetrode linear 12AU7 4-1 N81 6CL6
amplifier to a kilowatt level. Operation is con-
fined to the 80 meter band, although operation
on the higher frequency bands is possible with
a change of coils, phasing network, and crystal.
The r-f phasing circuits are balanced at some
frequency within the amateur phone band and
will. retain a good degree of balance over a
frequency range of plus or minus fifty kilo-
cycles of the adjustment frequency.
Figure 2
Circuit The circuit of the single side- BLOCK DIAGRAM OF PHASING-TYPE
Description band exciter is shown in figures SIDEBAND EXCITER
2 and 3. A 12AU7 is employed Only five tubes are required in this simple
phasing-type sideband exciter. Audio system
as a crystal oscillator stage and buffer-amplifier. has su,icient gain to operate from crystal
The first section of the double triode is used microphone.
Figure 1
THE GLOVE COMPARTMENT
SIDEBAND EXCITER
This miniature phasing-type SSB exciter may
be mounted in the glove compartment of a
car with room to sparef Using only four tubes
the exciter delivers a 3 watt peak sideband
signal capable of driving a kilowatt tetrode
amplifier to full output. The l2AU7 and
6CL6 r-f tubes are at the right end of the
chassis, along with the crystal. Major tuning
controls are on the right end of the chassis.
Entire unit is bolted to the roof of the glove
comportment.
HANDBOOK S.S.B. Exciter 569
lower which provides the necessary low im- by throwing carrier insertion switch S, to the
pedance required to match the r-f phasing net- right n.nd biasing the diode modulators by
work. means of carrier insertion control R,.
Sideband switching is accomplished by re- Power requirements for the transmitter are
versal of polarity of the audio channels by 300 volts at a current drain of 100 milliam-
switch S,. The diode modulator may be un- peres, and 6.3 volts d-e at 1.85 amperes. When
balanced to pass a carrier for tune-up purposes the filaments are connected for 12.6 volt op-
12AU7
AUDIO
PHASING
AMPLIFI~R
1K
o.
FILAMENT CONNECTIONS
6VOLT
12.AU7
esc. NOTE
6CL6 *=MATCHED COMPONENTS ( 7 96 OR
AMP LESS), EXACT VALU CRITICAL
12.AU7 ONLY IN THAT IT SHOULD MATCH
AUDIO THE MATING UNIT CLOSELY.
6C4
AUDIO
12AU7
AUDIO
TOP1
Figure 3
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM OF FIXED/MOBILE SSB EXCITER
C1, C:, c,, C1i-See figure 7
Cs-10 JJ.JJ.fd variable ceramic, Centralab 8278.
R1, R:, R,, R4-See figure 7
Rs-500K linear taper patentiometer
R,, Rw--100 ohm potentiometer
R,-25K linear taper potentiometer
Rs, R,--1 K patentiometer
PS-I-Phase shift network package. See figure 7
L,, L,, L,-See figure 8
Tt-lnterstage audio transformer (1:3). Stancor A-53C used backwards.
RFC-Miniature 2.5 mh. choke. Millen 1300-2500
X-80 meter crystal (3800 - 4000 kc.)
PC-3 turns # 18 e. wire around 50 ohm, 0.5 watt composition resistor.
D,-D,-1N81 diodes; see text.
570 Low Power Transmitters THE RADIO
I
Figure 4
TOP VIEW OF SSB EXCITER
The top plate is removable for easy access to
internal wiring and adjustments. Microphone Figure 5
jack and coaxial antenna receptacle are visi- UNDER-CHASSIS VIEW OF SSB
ble at left of chassis. Four control potentio- EXCITER
meters are along bottom of box (see text).
Placement of the main components may be
seen in this inside view of the chassis. R-1
circuitry is at the left with home-made audio
eration current the current drain is 1.25 am- phasing network at center, right. R-f modu-
peres. lator potentiometers and germanium diodes
in lower left area of the chassis with audio
TransmiHer The transmitter is constructed section at right. The 6CL6 linear amplifier
plate coil is in the foreground of the center
Construction upon an aluminum box-chas- of the chassis.
and Wiring sis measuring 10" x 2\12" x
2 Y2" in size. Placement of in figure 7A. The mounting base may be thin
the major components may be seen in figure 5. phenolic or any insulating material. The base
The 80 meter crystal and 12AU7 oscilla- holds four precision resistors and four fixed
tor/buffer tube are positioned at the left end mica capacitors padded with four adjustable
of the chassis, and the 6CL6 linear amplifier mica trimmer capacitors. If desired, a series
is centered on the chassis. The balanced modu- of fixed capacitors may be measured on a
lator is mounted on a phenolic terminal board capacity bridge and hand picked units chosen
on the opposite side of the box. Oscillator tun- to replace the variable capacitors after final
ing controls are placed on the left side of the adjustments have been completed. This was
box-chassis, along with the sideband selector done with the network shown in the photo-
switch s,, the carrier insertion switch S,, and graphs.
the audio gain control R,. Along the "bottom" The two 100 K series resistors used in the
of the chassis are placed (left to right) the network are Continental Nobeloy 1% tolerance
modulator balance potentiometers Rs, Ro, and precision resistors. The 133.3 K resistors, how-
R10 and the audio balance control R . The car- ever, were made by taking two 150 K pre-
rier insertion potentiometer R, is mounted in- cision Continental Nobeloy resistors and paral-
side the chassis. The three audio stages are leling each of them with a one-half watt 1.2
mounted on the right-hand section of the megohm (plus or minus 10% tolerance) resis-
chassis. tor. Careful selection of the 1.2 M units per-
The components of the audio phasing net- mits close adjustment to the desired target
work PS-I are mounted on a small phenolic value of 133.3 K. A convenient way to mount
terminal board that may be observed in the the 1.2 M resistors is to slip them inside the
lower right corner of the chassis. This network hollow body of the precision resistors. The
should be wired and tested before it is placed dashed connections should be omitted initially,
in the transmitter. since the alignment procedure described below
presumes that these connections will be made
The Audio The complete network at the proper time only.
Phasing Network may be purchased as a
finished item (Millen Adjustment of the If a manufactured net-
75012) or it may easily be home built if Audio Network work is employed no ad-
an audio oscillator and oscilloscope are avail- justments are required.
able for testing purposes. However, the home-made network must be
The circuit of the audio network is shown aligned before it is placed in the transmitter
HANDBOOK S.S. B. Exciter 571
PHASE
SHIFT
NETWORK
PS-1
AUDIO OSCILLATOR
12AT7
. . - - - - - - T O VERTICAL DEFLECTION PLATE
>OO
>OO
1960 c.p.s .. , namely 3920 c.p.s. Thus, if a 3.8- 4.0 Me. Apply plate power and adjust
stable source of 3920 c.p.s. frequency (such the slug of coil L for maximum signal
as a thoroughly warmed audio oscillator) strength of the oscillator in a nearby receiver.
is used as a reference, the frequency of the The oscillator should start promptly each time
test oscillator can be set very closely to one- plate voltage is applied to the unit. Frequency
half, one-third, etc. of the reference frequency of oscillation may be varied over a small range
if both oscillators feed an oscilloscope and the by changing the setting of the crystal tuning
resulting Lissajous figures observed, as dis- capacitor.
cussed in chapter 9 of this Handbook. The next step is to neutralize the 6CL6
Use of a calibrating frequency in this man- linear amplifier. It is necessary to bypass the
ner assures that the frequency ratios used are diode modulator to do this. Temporarily dis-
correct, even though the exact frequencies used connect one lead of the bifilar link winding
are unknown. The frequency ratios (just as on L, and also disconnect the lead between po-
the resistance ratio previously mentioned) are tentiometer R10 and amplifier grid coil L,. Now,
far more important that the actual values of connect the free winding of the bifilar link of
frequency (or resistance) used. L, to the ungrounded end of the link of L,.
Transmitter The r-f and audio sections of This will apply the oscillator signal directly
Wiring the unit should be wired before to the linear amplifier. Temporarily load the
the phase network is placed 6CL6 stage with one or two flashlight bulbs
within the chassis. Socket ground connections ( 6.3 volt, 150 ma. - brown bead) connected
and filament wiring are done first. The oscilla- in parallel at the output jack ]t. The slugs of
tor section should be wired and tested first. coils L, and L, should be adjusted for maxi-
The bifilar secondary winding of coil L, may mum amplifier output. The 12AU7 oscillator
be made of two lengths of insulated hookup tube should now be removed from the socket,
wire wound over the coil as shown in figure 8. and unless the setting of neutralizing capaci-
The germanium diodes in the modulator tor C happens by chance to be correct, the
section deserve special care in handling. Do not flash lamp load will continue to give some in-
bend the leads close to the diode unit itself. dication of output, showing that the 6CL6
The diodes are mounted by means of their leads amplifier stage is oscillating. Neutralizing ca-
between the terminals of potentiometers Rs and pacitor Co should be adjusted with the aid of
Ro and adjacent tie-point terminals. Protect a fibre screwdriver until the bulb goes out.
the diodes from excessive heat while soldering Readjust L, and L, for maximum bulb indica-
by holding the lead with pliers between the tion as the setting of capacitor C is varied.
body of the diode and the point where the sol- A setting of C will be found at which oscilla-
dering takes place. Further, use only as much tion will not occur, regardless of the setting
heat as is necessary to make a good joint. of the slugs of coils L, and Ls.
The 50 ohm composition resistors used in When C is properly adjusted, the 12AU7
the modulator bridge circuit should be a tube should be replaced in its socket and coils
matched pair, measured on an ohmmeter or L, and Ls returned for maximum output. The
Wheatstone bridge. In the same fashion the temporary link connection between L, and L,
bridge capacitors should be matched as closely should be removed and the diode modulator
as possible to the target value of 800 1-'1-'fd. reconnected into the circuit.
Both coils L, and L, of the linear amplifier Next, remove the r-f tubes and insert the
are mounted beneath the chassis on either side three audio tubes in their respective sockets.
of the 6CL6 tube socket. To reduce coupling Apply a low level audio signal of 1225 c.p.s.
between the coils, a shield is placed over coil to the microphone jack ], of the unit and con-
L,. The shield may be made from part of an nect the horizontal deflection terminal of the
old i-f transformer can measuring approxi- oscilloscope to a cathode (pin 3) of the
mately 1" x 1" x 2" in size. 12AU7 audio phasing amplifier, and the ver-
When the transmitter wiring is completed, tical deflection terminal to the other cathode
the audio phase network PS-1 may be placed (pin 8) after making certain that the 'scope
in the transmitter chassis and wired in place. is phase-compensated at the test frequency of
Transmitter After the wiring has been com- 1225 c.p.s. Adjust audio balance control R,
Adjustment pleted and checked the trans- to produce a circle on the screen. Make this
mitter is ready for adjustment. test at as low an audio level as possible.
Insert the 12AU7 oscillator/buffer tube in the Now, plug in the r-f tubes and connect the
socket, and plug in a crystal in the range of dummy load to the antenna receptacle, ]1.
574 Low Power Transmitters THE RADIO
Connect the vertical plates of the oscilloscope transmitter are desirable for serious sideband
(no scope amplifier used) to the terminals work, and are doubly suited for mobile opera-
of the dummy load so that the SO meter signal tion, since full attention may be given to road
of the transmitter may be seen on the screen of problems. A simple voice control (VOX) cir-
the 'scope. Deliberately unbalance one of the cuit suitable for use with this transmitter is
diode modulators by setting potentiometer R, shown in figure 6. Connection to the speech
off-center. Adjust amplifier output coil for amplifier is made at point A of figure 3. The
maximum pattern deflection at any convenient voice signal is amplified by a triode stage and
sweep speed. As the p::ttern grows when L, is rectified by the 6AL5 diode. The resulting
resonated it may be necessary to reduce modu- signal is applied to the second half of the
lator unbalance to keep from overloading the triode tube which operates a sensitive relay
output stage or the 'scope. Remove all audio connected in the plate circuit. The relay con-
input to the transmitter by adjusting audio tacts operate the changeover circuits of the
gain control Rs to zero, then by successive ad- transmitter. The time delay required to make
justments of the modulator balance controls the transmitter "hang on" between syllables
ad just for zero output as seen on the oscillo- of speech is determined by the R-C network
scope. It will be noted that as the correct point in the grid of the relay control tube. Increas-
is approached the adjustments will become pre- ing the size of the capacitor will increase the
gressively sharper. Potentiometers R, and R, delay time and vice-versa.
should be juggled until the indicated carrier
is a minimum. Slight capacity unbalances with- 28-2 A Mobile
in the modulator bridge may prevent a perfect Transistorized
minimum from being obtained. It may be nec- SSB Exciter
essary to place a small I 0 !L!Lfd variable cer-
Power consumption of radio equipment is
amic capacitor from either end of potentiome-
of paramount importance in mobile systems.
ter RIO back to one side of the diode rectifier
Without the addition of auxiliary expensive
bank for best attenuation. Good carrier at-
tenuation may finally be achieved by juggling
the settings of Rs, R,, and RIO, together with
the added padding capacitor.
Next, apply a 1225 c.p.s. audio signal and
advance gain control Rs. An r-f envelope
should be seen on the screen of the oscilloscope.
The percentage of modulation (or ripple)
noted on the pattern is an indication of the
degree of mis-adjustment of the balancing
controls of the unit. The balance potentiome-
ters should now be touched up to produce
minimum modulation on the observed carrier.
Audio balance control R, should also be check-
ed for minimum ripple pattern.
It is a good idea to vary the audio level
input to the transmitter to determine the point
of overload. This can be seen on he 'scope
as the point at which the modulation ripple
on the pattern increases sharply as Rs is ad-
vanced. Always make sure that your audio
level is set well below this overload point when
adjustments are being made. It should be pos- Figure 9
sible to produce a pattern having very little TEN THOUSAND MILES OF QSO'S
ripple on the observed carrier wave. This com- HAVE BEEN MADE WITH THIS
pletes the adjustments of the transmitter. Car- TRANSISTORIZED FORTY METER
rier insertion for test purposes may be obtained SSB EXCITER
by reversing switch s, and adjusting carrier The reliability of transistorized sideband equip-
ment has been proven with this miniature
insertion control R,. phasing-type exciter. Overall size is only
7Y4" X 4" X 2V2". Antenna, power, and mi-
VOX Circuits Voice control of the "send- crophone connectors are on end ol chassis
and balancing potentiometers and buffet base
receive" circuits of the inductor (Lz) are mounted on side of chassis.
HANDBOOK Transistorized Exciter 575
charging components, the usual automotive service, it appears that the vacuum tube will
electrical system is capable of a relatively small still be necessary as a buffer when high fre-
additional power drain over and above the quencies are involved. Power requirements for
standard equipment provided with the car. the exciter are 300 volts at 50 milliamperes,
Single sideband affords an excellent oppor- and 12.6 volts at 0.43 amperes.
tunity for the mobile enthusiast to obtain A new subminiature printed circuit ampli-
more ''talk power" for a given degree of pri- fier (Centralab TA-ll) is used for the speech
mary power consumption. In addition, if the amplifier. Completely sealed in epoxy resin
sideband equipment can be transistorized the for protection against mechanical abrasion and
power drain will be reduced by a further im- humidity, this four stage transistor amplifier
portant amount. provides a gain of over 70 decibels. The com-
Described in this section is a 40 meter ex- plete unit is only 1 J/,i inches long and less
perimental transistorized sideband exciter de- than one inch high.
livering sufficient output to excite a tetrode It is strongly recommended that spare tran-
linear amplifier to one kilowatt peak input sistors be on hand for substitution in the var-
power. The exciter operates directly from the ious circuits. This will give the builder confi-
12 volt ignition system of the car, using five dence and assurance that each stage is function-
inexpensive transistors, a printed circuit tran- ing as it should. Many times limitations on per-
sistor amplifier, and a single vacuum tube. formance are imposed by certain transistors
Until a power transistor is developed for r-f without the operator being aware of the con-
CH1
SEC.
~ ;-c'";-~~~f4e- -~
XT~LI 2 TRANSISTOR
MIC I AMPLIFIER
clition. The concept of transistor action is new cease to function properly. It is therefore nec-
and novel to many amateurs; it is not easy to essary to incorporate a simple low-pass filter
run to the corner radio store and test a transis- that will substantially eliminate all audio fre-
tor to make sure it is operating properly. quencies above 3000 cycles. Such a filter is in-
corporated in the circuit between the micro-
Exciter The complete schematic of the phone input jack ], and the transistorized
Circuitry transistorized exciter is shown in audio amplifier. The filter consists of the pri-
figure 10. It is derived from the mary winding of a small audio transformer
vacuum tube exciter circuit of figure 3, section (CH,) and two 250 ppJd capacitors.
1, and employs phasing technique on the fre-
quency of operation. The output signal from the encapsulated
A 2N112 transistor is used as a grounded transistorized amplifier is transformer coupled
emitter crystal oscillator employing crystals in to a 2N2 50 (or a 2N2 55 ) power transistor
the 7.2- 7.3 Me. range. The r-f output is which serves as a driver for the phase shift
coupled through a tuned circuit and a bifilar network. The 2N250 transistor requires a
winding to the crystal diode balanced modu- "heat sink" for the collector to allow maximum
lator. The output in turn drives a 2N114 r-f collector dissipation rating to be achieved. The
amplifier stage, operating in grounded emitter transistor may therefore be mounted on ano-
configuration. A base bias potentiometer R, is dized aluminum discs or mica wafers (sup-
included in this stage which permits parameter plied by the manufacturer of the transistor) ,
adjustment for maximum output. The collec- thus insulating the case of the transistor (the
collector terminal) from the chassis of the ex-
tor of the transistor is tapped at a point on the
grid inductor of the linear amplifier stage pro- citer. The phase shift network driven by this
viding maximum drive without exceeding the transistor is identical to that described in sec-
tion 28-1 and illustrated in figure 7.
transistor ratings.
A 12BY7 A is used as the linear amplifier Two 2N170 NPN type transistors are base
stage. Neutralization is employed for greatest driven by the phase shift network, and serve
circuit stability, and VHF parasitic oscillations as emitter followers, providing a low imped-
are eliminated by the use of a parasitic sup- ance driving source for the balanced modulator.
pressor in the plate circuit. Sideband selection is accomplished by switch
The subminiature transistorized audio am- s, whose purpose is to reverse the phase of
plifier used in this exciter has a rising fre- the audio signals applied to the balanced mod-
quency characteristic that is well suited for ulator. Carrier injection is accomplished by
SSB work. However, the rising response car- potentiometer Rs and switch S, which apply
ries well into the upper audio range wherein conducting bias to the modulator diodes.
the phase shift networks of the PS-1 unit A voltage dropping network is employed
Figure 11
UNDER-CHASSIS
VIEW OF
TRANSISTORIZED
SSB EXCITER
The audio and r-f net-
works are mounted on a
phenolic sheet attached
to the bottom of the
chassis. The 12BY7 A lin-
ear amplifier and shield
are mounted on a small
aluminum bracket at the
left of the assembly.
Grid coil L, is beside the
tube, and plate coil L,
is behind the tube. Coil
L, is to the right of L,
with sideband switch S:
behind it. The two r-f
balancing controls R, and
Rt are at the extreme
right of the ch<>ssis panel.
HANDBOOK Transistorized Exciter 577
to reduce the 12.6 volt primary supply to 9 age should be first applied to the transistor
volts for the 2N1 70 stage, and to 4 volts and oscillator. R-f output may be measured at the
2 Y2 volts for the preamplifier stage. The ex- terminals of the bifilar coil with the aid of a
citer is designed for use with a primary supply vacuum tube voltmeter. The slug of coil L,
having the positive terminal of the battery is adjusted for maximum reading. Under diode
grounded. load, about 4 volts r.m.s. may be measured
Exciter The exciter is built within from either side of the winding to ground.
Construction an aluminum case measur- The bifilar winding is relatively critical. Too
ing 71,4" x 4" x 2V2" in many turns will load the oscillator to a point
size. Miniaturization of the audio phase shift of instability, and too few turns deliver in-
network was accomplished by measuring a sufficient drive to the modulator. Two turns,
quantity of resistors and capacitors on a bridge. loosely coupled to the primary winding, seem
Final selection was made from those having to be about correct. When the bridge is un-
the closest tolerances. These hand picked com- balanced, approximately 0.2 volt r.m.s. may be
ponents are mounted on a phenolic terminal measured from either arm of output potentio-
strip. This same sheet is used to support the meter Ra to ground. This voltage is stepped
small r-f chokes as well as the balanced modu- up by means of a pi-network circuit so that
lator components. maximum excitation voltage is applied to the
It is a good idea when building equipment base of the 2N114 r-f transistor.
to fit in a limited space to construct everything Preliminary adjustments, in general, follow
in the form of sub-assemblies. This will permit those described for the vacuum tube exciter
the components to be mounted in the open, described in section 28-1. Potentiometers R,,
facilitating wiring. In this particular unit, the R,, and R, are adjusted for minimum carrier
audio components and the r-f modulator are output in the collector circuit of the 2N114.
mounted on a phenolic board on one side of It may be necessary to add a 10 p,p,fd variable
the box and the r-f components are attached ceramic capacitor from one side of the modu-
to the opposite wall of the box. The oscillator lator bridge to ground to achieve maximum
coil L, is placed within an old i-f transformer carrier suppression. The final adjustment is to
can as is the linear amplifier grid coil La. The apply an audio signal and touch up the audio
12BY7 A tube is mounted on a small bracket phasing potentiometer R, for maximum re-
at one end of the box, and has a tube shield jection of the unwanted sideband.
placed over it. The plate coil L. of the amplifier
When these preliminary adjustments have
stage is directly behind the tube (figure 11).
been made, the 12BY7 A tube may be inserted
Various voltage dropping resistors are
in the socket, and the shield slipped over the
mounted on a small terminal board at the cen-
tube. Grid inductor La is resonated for maxi-
ter of the chassis, and the audio transistors
mum grid excitation with the aid of grid dip
are placed in the area between the lower ter-
oscillator, and the plate inductor L can be
minal board and the rear wall of the case.
tuned in the same manner. A dummy load
The r-f circuits are wired after the com-
consisting of two 6.3 volt, 150 rna. flashlamp
ponent boards are mounted in place. Wiring
bulbs (brown bead) connected in parallel is
is straightforward and simple. The two r-f
attached to output jack J. Plate voltage and
transistors are mounted by their leads to three
excitation are now applied to the linear ampli-
terminal phenolic tie-point strips. Be sure to
fier stage and La and L. adjusted for maximum
protect both the transistors and the modulator
output. When audio excitation is removed
diodes from excess soldering heat, as described
from the exciter the r-f amplifier will prob-
in section 28-1. The reader is referred to this
section concerning the adjustment and test ably break into oscillation and the antenna
bulbs will continue to glow. Neutralizing ca-
procedure for the home-made phase shift net-
work. pacitor C should now be adjusted with a
fibre screwdriver until oscillation stops. After
Testing The The transistorized SSB exciter the exciter is operating properly, full battery
Exciter may be bench tested by running voltage may be applied to the transistor stages
the transistors from a group with a consequent increase in grid drive and
of 1 Y2 volt batteries. It is wise to conduct power output of the linear amplifier. Approx-
preliminary tests at an operating potential of imately 2 volts r.m.s. grid drive may be meas-
about 9 volts. The voltage may be boosted to ured with the vacuum tube voltmeter at the
the operating value after tuning and align- grid pin of the 12BY7 A linear amplifier stage
ment adjustments have been completed. Volt- under conditions of maximum excitation.
578 Low Power Transmitters THE RADIO
TV-type rotary induction tuner, padded to the crystals are used, one at a frequency of 2007
correct operating range. The use of this rype kc. and the other at a frequency of 2011 kc.,
of tuned circuit provides exceptional stability providing a "flat top" to the passband of about
combined with small size and has proven to 4 kilocycles. The crystals used in this filter are
be a very satisfactory choice. A 6BJ6 remote specially cut for filter work, and the substitu-
cutoff pentode is used as the first i-f amplifier tion of ordinary "transmitter type" crystals will
stage ( V,) and a 6BE6 is used as the second degrade the performance of the filter. The units
mixer ( Vo). The tunable oscillator stage op- specified in figure 15, however, are not ex-
erates 2009 kilocycles lower than the variable pensive. The i-f transformers are standard 1500
intermediate frequency and employs a single kc. units with the mica tuning capacitors
section of a 6]6 tube (V,). A small inductance changed as shown in figure 15 to permit oper-
( L11) is placed in series with the rotary coil ation at 2 Me. The lattice filter may be re-
of the oscillator section to ensure proper track- moved from the circuit by means of the "sharp-
ing over the 4 Me. tuning range. broad" switch, S,. All four crystals are shorted
The greater portion of the receiver gain and out in the "broad" position, and one crystal in
selectivity is achieved in the second inter- each filter section is disconnected from the as-
mediate frquency amplifier which operates at sociated i-f transformer. In addition, another
a center frequency of 2009 kc. A double lat- section of the switch ( S,C) drops the gain
tice crystal filter is employed to ensure maxi- of the amplifier tube (Vs) to compensate for
mum selectivity at this frequency. The filter the rise in stage gain that occurs when the
is made in two sections and has a single 6BJ6 crystals are removed from the circuit. Two
amplifier tube ( Vs) between the sections to additional stages of i-f amplification ( V,, v,.)
compensate for the insertion loss of the filter. follow the crystal filter, providing an abund-
The first section of the filter is placed im- ance of gain for proper operation of the a-v-e
mediately after the 6BE6 converter tube to and audio squelch circuits.
achieve maximum i-f amplifier protection from The detector and associated audio compon-
strong signals adjacent to the desired one. Two ents of the receiver are shown in figure 17. A
V V2
144MC, eBZ7 6J6
~:
.,. J31
I PHONES!
I I
I I
I
I
I I
-------1---J
S3B,C I
ZERO
r--a --?- -----o - - - - - - -o \,.:..'~ - - - - -- - - \;,9 - --,
I ' ' 6AQ5 1
L---------..0...- ---<~---,
RY2e I I
I CRYSTAL
MICROPHONE
I
I
I TUNE-OPERATE
I Ss 6~~~ l
L---- -- --./o---- - - - ' - - _ _j
Figure 13
BLOCK DIAGRAM OF 2-6 METER TRANSCEIVER
Twenty tubes plus selenium rectifier power supply provide de-luxe operation for the advanced VHF
enthusiast. Power su.~ply may be operated from either automobile electrical system or 1 15 volts, a.c.
580 Low Power Transmitters THE RADIO
6AL5 (V11) is employed as detector, a-v-e, stages (V, and V") deliver sufficient audio
and a-n-1 tube. The noise limiter is of the low power to fully drive a loudspeaker and to over-
distortion type and is left in the circuit at all come the motor and wind noises of a car in
times. One section of the 6AL5 serves as the motion. An auxiliary jack (}a) provides ear-
a-v-e rectifier, and the resulting voltage is ap- phone reception if desired. The receiver is in-
activated during transmission periods by relay
plied to four i-f tubes for smooth a-v-e action
contacts RY2B which remove the high voltage
on strong signals. The last i-f stage (Vo) is from the plates and screens of the receiver
left off the a-v-e line, and the S-meter is con- tubes.
nected between the plate supply return of this
tube and an adjacent controlled tube. A change The Transmitter Section. Shown in figure 17
in the plate current of the controlled tube is the transmitter section of the transceiver.
(V,) upsets the balance of the bridge circuit, Six tubes are used, three for the audio portion
and a meter reading is produced that is pro- of the unit and three for the r-f portion.
portional to the a-v-e voltage. This voltage is Crystals in the 24- 25 Me. region are employ-
also applied to one section of a double triode ed for both 6- and 2-meter operation. Any one
audio tube ( v12) which functions as a squekh of eleven crystals may be selected by switch
tube. This circuit renders the audio section of s,. The oscillator is a 6CL6 (V,.) in a "hot-
the receiver inoperative until the receiver a-v-e cathode" doubler circuit, delivering energy in
circuit is activated, thus eliminating a large the 48 - 50 Me. region. A split-stator tuning
portion of the background noise commonly as- capacitor is employed in the plate circuit to
sociated with VHF reception. The squelch cir- provide a balanced output configuration. The
cuit may be disabled by switch s,. Two audio oscillator stage may be turned on during re-
V1 vz
6BZ7A 6J6
Lz
VJ
6BZ7A
r--f1--+--+---<=-;> S 7A
I (SEE FIG. 18 FOR
SECTIONS 8& C )
I
50MC. I
I
I
I
I
I
NOTES'
1, SEE FIG. 18 FOR FILAMENT WIRING.
1-F our
2.. C =.001 DISC CERAMIC
3. ALL RESISTORS 1/2 WATT
SEE FIGURE 15
Figure 14
SCHEMATIC, R-F PORTION OF RECEIVER SECTION
C-.001 p,fd, disc ceramic capacitor. Centralab DD-102
c,, C.-20 p,p,fd. Johnson 20M II
J,, J,-BNC-type coaxial receptacle
L,-L,_5ee figure 21 for coil information
S7 A, D-Part of S7 (Centralab W<>fer PA-9) See figure 18.
RY,A, RY,A-See figure 19
X 1- l l 4 Me. overtone crystal. Precision Crystal Lab., Santa Monica, Calif.
X,-84 Me. crystal (see X,)
V10 %
6BJ6
>
z
.,0
0
0
;ill;
SEE F/~. 14
R3 ~---1---'1>'1'-----<P-~
NOTES'
L11 ~ $ $00
9
1- SEE Fl~. 18 FOR FIL. WIRIN~ 10
K
2.- C=.a..t DISC CERAMIC S- METER
3- ALL RESISTORS 1/2 WATT
c. .,. ZERO
12. 39
UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED C G
4-51 IN "XTAL IN"' POSITION LJOC-:
!t- RY1 IN "RECEIVE* POSITION
)>
a_
<
0
Figure 15 ::J
SCHEMATIC, 1-F PORTION OF RECEIVER SECTION ()
Cl>
C,, c,-30 Jl!lfd. ceramic trimmer. Centralab 827-C a_
Cs-12 Jl!lfd. ceramic trimmer. Centralab NPO
LJQ-L11-See figure 2 I for coil information
M,-0-1 d.c. milliammeter. De-jur # JJ2
__,
RY,B, RY,C-See figure 19 .....
S,A-S,E-2 wafers, 6 pole, 2 position each wafer. (Two Centralab PA-9 wafers with PA-301 index assembly) 0
T,-T,-Modified 1500 kc. slug-tuned interstage i-f transformer. (J.W. Miller 12-W1). Remove internal ::J
resonating capacitors. Replace plate capacitor with 50 JlJlfd. mica, and grid capacitor with two VI
()
100 JlJlfd. mica capacitors connected in series. Ground common tap of capacitors. Transformer now Cl>
tunes to 2009 kc.
T,-1500 kc. slug-tuned i-f output transformer. (J. W. Miller 12-W2). Modify as above.
X,-X,-Lattice crystal set. 2007 kc. and 2011 kc. Precision Crystal Labs., Santa Monica, Calif.
<
Cl>
Xs-Xo-Same as X,-X,. .....
RFC-39 Jlh. J. W. Miller 4628
""co....
582 Low Power Transmitters THE RADIO
ception by depressing the "zero" switch S", to the tripler, and the plate circuit ( Cu-L,) is
which applies plate voltage to the oscillator inductively coupled to the output circuit. A
by way of the receiver circuits. separate antenna receptable (]1) is used for
The balanced output circuit of the oscillator I44 Me. operation. Plate voltage is applied to
stage is inductively coupled to a push-pull this tube by switch section s,p,
miniature beam amplifier stage employing a The use of inductive coupling between the
6360 ( V"). The grid circuit of this stage is three stages of the transmitter reduces spurious
broadly resonant to the 50 Me. region by vir- emissions to a minimum. Channel 2 television
tue of the interelectrode capacitances of the interference, so common to six meter trans-
tube. For six meter operation, the 6360 func- mitters is absent when this transmitter is used,
tions as a class-C amplifier with the plate cir- thanks to the combination of interstage induc-
cuit (Ls-C) tuned to 50 Me. Bias and screen tive coupling and the employment of 25 Me.
voltages are set for optimum operating values crystals. Power input to the modulated stage
by segments of switch S,. In addition, the plate on both bands is close to IS watts, permitting
return of the stage is routed through the sec- a carrier power of over I 0 watts. ,
ondary of modulation transformer T,. The r-f Transmitter adjustment is greatly simplified
output circuit is inductively coupled to the 50 by the use of r-f volt-meters connected to the
Me. antenna coaxial receptacle through relay output circuits of each amplifier stage. Small
contacts R Y2A. , germanium diodes (D1 and D,) are used to
When switch s, is moved to the I44 Me. rectify a minute portion of the output voltage
position, the aforementioned 6360 stage is con- which is read on the multi-meter M1 of the
verted into a high efficiency tripler stage, pro- transmitter. All tuning adjustments of the
viding output in the I40 - I 50 Me. region. transmitter are conducted so as to enhance the
Switch segment S,D raises the operating bias reading of the r-f voltmeter under a given set
on the stage, segment S,E drops the screen of antenna conditions.
voltage, and segments SaA-B select the proper The transmitter is plate modulated by two
plate tank coil, L". 6AQ5 tubes ( V,, V,.) operating class AB1.
A separate amplifier stage employing an- Plate voltage may be removed from these tubes
other 6360 dual beam power tube (Vn) is and from the modulated amplifier by the "tune-
used for 2-meter operation. The tube functions operate" switch S,. A single I2AX7 serves as
as a class-C amplifier and is driven by the a two stage resistance coupled audio amplifier,
push-pull tripler stage (V;o). The grid circuit having sufficient gain for the use of a crystal
of the I44 Me. amplifier is inductively coupled or dynamic microphone.
Figure 16
REAR VIEW OF
VHF TRANSCEIVER
At the left rear of the chassis is
the dual purpose power supply
with the vibrator and filter ca-
pacitors mounted in front of the
power transformer. At the front
of the chassis are the two 6360
tubes and the tuning capacitors of
the transmitter. Note that the
stages are isolated by shields
placed between the tuning capaci-
tors and tubes.
The modulator and power supply
filter choke occupy the c<:nter por- /
tion of the chassis, with the re-'
ceiver i-f section to the right. In
front of the i-f strip are the trans-
mitter crystals and the lattice
crystals. At the right of the chas-
sis are located the 11
TV -type"
variable inductor tuner and the
three tunable i-f stage tubes. At
the rear of the chassis, directly
behind the tuner are the two VHF
conversion oscillators. The micro
phone receptacle and audio gain
control are on the rear lip of the
chassis, directly below the cascade
stages. Cabinet and chassis cus-
tom made by California Chassis
Co., Lynwood, Calif.
V13
6AQ5 T4 NOTES
1- SEE FIG. 18 FOR FILAMENT WIRING
2-C;;.007.l/F DISC CERAMIC
3- ALL RESISTORS 0.5 W. UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. :X
4-53 IN 144 MC. POSITION
>
z
V2.o
c
6AQ5 ta
0
0
"
~+-------~S~+~B~u~s ________________________________________________ +---~~RYzs
10 K 0
METER CIRCUIT ~ ,-- 55
TUNE-
58A-B OPERATE
M1 ~ " L ,p-.,-------jl
M2---o ~ o--' -
M 3 ---<> o------.rw- M 4 c
1K
M1=0-10 MA.
M2-= 0-10 MA.
M3,M4:::0-t00MA.
)>
0....
<
0
:::J
n
ro
0....
...,.. 001
__,
~1KV
.,
0
:::J
Ill
1~K 56 n
1 "ZERO" B+ XMTR ro
N.O. N.C. <
Figure 17 .,ro
SCHEMATIC, TRANSMITTER AND AUDIO SECTION OF TRANSCEIVER
C,, C,, C,--15/15 JJ-JJ-fd. Hammarlund HFD-15X S,A-S,F-Same asS,, figure 15. Space decks so coils L,. and L,. fit between the decks.
C,, Cw-30 JJ-JJ-fd. Johnson 25JI2 S,-SPDT "push-button" switch VI
D1, D,-Germanium diode INBI S,--2 pole, 3 position non-shorting switch. Mallory 3223-G (X)
Lu-LJS-See figure 21 for coil information
RFC-,-7.0 JJ-h. Ohmite Z-50
RY,, RY:-See figure 19
M:-0-1 d.c. milliammeter. De-jur # JJ2
w
RFC:-1.8 JJ-h. Ohmite Z-144 Tz-25 watt modulation transformer, IOK pri., 5 K sec. Stancor A-3845
RFC,-0.15 JJ-h. J. W. Miller 4644 T,-tnterstage transformer, 1:3. Stancor A-53C
X,--24-26 Me. overtone crystal. Precision Crystal Co., Sonto Monica, Calif.
584 Low Power Transmitters THE RADIO
The Power Supply Section. The complete of the power transformer. This transformer has
transceiver requires a plate supply of 250 volts two auxiliary windings. One winding may be
at 150 milliamperes, and either 6.3 volts at used for 115 volt, 50-60 cycle operation, and
7.8 amperes or 12.6 volts at 3.9 amperes. These the other one is intended for vibrator opera-
voltages may be obtained from the power sup- arion from either a 6- or 12-volt d.c. primary
ply whose schematic is given in figure 18. The source. The choice of a.c. or d.c. operation may
high voltage portion of the supply employs a be made by inserting the correct terminal plug
voltage doubler selenium-type rectifier system in receptacle SO,, mounted on the rear of the
operating from a 117 volt half-wave winding transceiver chassis.
8-12 V. OC
PL1
(SEE FIL, SCHEMATIC)
T1
(SEE rEXT)
P-8 158
MODIFIED
B+
HV
V2 V1
GND
~--~~------~,~~------~------~
r:
3 510 5 7
'HOT"
~
r-1 r(J r:J~ 8
VIB1
R3-$-METER ADJ.
Relay and Switching Circuits. The control $3-BANOSWITCH, XMTR
54-FILAMENT
circuits of the de-luxe transceiver are shown in
$So- TUNE -OPERATE
figure 19. Two relays control change-over op-
$6- "ZERO~" TUNE
eration. The relay coils are of the d.c. type,
57- BAND SWITCH, RECEIVER
and are connected in series with the push-to- $8- METER SELECTOR, XMTR
talk button of the microphone and the filament 59-SQUELCH
voltage supply. Closing the microphone switch $10- POWER (BACK OF CHASSIS)
grounds one end of the relay coil circuit and
actuates both relays. Relay RY, controls the Figure 19
144 Me. antenna changeover, and switches the RELAY CONTROL WIRING AND
S-meter to the r-f output meter circuit of the LIST OF TRANSCEIVER CONTROLS
RY,, RY:--3 pole, DT. Advance MF3C/6VD.
transmitter section. Relay R y, conrols the 50 Hook coils in parallel for 6 volt operation.
Me. antenna changeover, and switches the B-
plus from the receiver to the transmitter. tion of the chassis, with the power supply to
Meter M, serves as a multi-meter for the the rear left, and the transmitter at the upper
transmitter portion (figure 17). The basic left of the photograph. The variable TV-type
meter has a 0-10 d.c. millammeter movement tuner is panel driven by the main tuning dial
and is used as-is for measuring the grid current through a simple speed reduction gear (Crowe).
of V" and V". Meter switching is accomplished To the side of the tuner are tubes V,, V,, and
by means of Ss. The third position of the switch V 7 To the rear of the tuner are the two separ-
connects the meter across the shunt in the plate ate "front end" sections of the receiver. The two
circuit of the modulated amplifier stage. The cascade stages are in the corner, with the 6]6
resistance of the shunt is chosen so that full mixer/oscillator tubes to the left. The various
scale meter deflection is 100 milliamperes. coil slugs and tuning capacitors are mounted
to the chassis deck and are adjustable from the
Transceiver Layout The transceiver is housed top of the unit. Near the center of the chassis
and Assembly in a special cabinet mea- and running from the front to the back is the
suring 14" long, 10" 2009 kc. i-f strip. The four crystals of the i-f
deep, and 5 Y2" high. The cabinet is formed filter are seen near the front of the chassis di-
from "cane metal" stock and has a removable rectly behind i-f transformer T,. To the left
front panel. The back, which is also made of of the i-f strip arranged in a line are the volt-
solid material is welded to the wrap-around age regulator tube v,., the first lOJ.Lfd. filter
cane-metal cover. The chassis of the unit is capacitor for the speech amplifier, the speech
made of sheet steel which is copper plated amplifier tube V", the second 10J.Lfd. filter
after all major holes have been drilled. Chas- capacitor, and the receiver audio amplifier/
sis height is 2 inches. Placement of the major squelch tube V12. To the left of these com-
components may be seen in figure 16. The ponents are the two 6AQ5 modulator tubes
receiver section occupies the right-hand por- and transformers T, and Ta. In the far left
586 Low Power Transmitters THE RADIO
corner of the chassis are placed the power trans- stages at the rear of the chassis and is actuated
former T,, the vibrator VIB,, and the two from the panel by an extension shaft.
power supply filter capacitors. Note that the The r-f section of the transmitter is visible
case of one of the capacitors is "hot" to ground in the upper right area of the chassis, running
and the unit is mounted on a fibre base ring. parallel to the front panel. A small brass
The transmitter components occupy the up- shield is passed across the center of each of the
per left chassis area of the transceiver. The 6360 tube sockets. The shield passes between
6CL6 oscillator stage is at the center of the pins 1 and 9, and 3 and 4. Transmitter band-
chassis with tuning capacitor C6 to the left. A change switch Sa is located in the center com-
small aluminum shield isolates the oscillator partment and the adjoining shields prevent
components from the 6360 buffer/amplifier coupling between the coils of this circuit and
tube. A second shield plate is placed between either the 144 Me. amplifier coil or the 50
the second stage tuning capacitor C and the Me. oscillator coil.
6360 144 Me. amplifier. Transceiver The transceiver is a complex
Space is provided on the chassis to mount Wiring piece of equipment and should
five miniature crystal holders for the trans-
be wired with care. Space is at
mitter oscillator circuit. A small aluminum a premium and wiring errors are difficult to
clamp holds five additional crystal sockets to
find when working in a small area. It is there-
the rear of crystal selector switch s,, as seen
fore suggested that the unit be wired in sec-
in the under-chassis photograph of figure 20. tions. The receiver should be wired first, and
The power supply area beneath the chassis placed in operation with an auxiliary power
is separated from the remainder of the cir- supply. The transmitter may be wired next
cuitry by a 2 inch high copper shield that en- and tested for operation with the receiver.
closes the selenium rectifiers and other small Finally, the power transformer should be con-
supply components. Leads passing out of this verted and the power supply can be wired and
compartment go through chassis mounting type tested within the transceiver. The final check
miniature feedthrough capacitors mounted in is to make sure that all sections operate proper-
holes in the shield ( Centralab FT-1000). ly as a complete system.
The "broad-sharp" switch S, may be seen in
the upper left area of the chassis. Each segment Wiring the Receiver Section. The receiver
of the switch is placed over a group of i-f section should be wired first. It is imperative
crystal sockets so that the leads from the crys- that all r-f wiring and ground leads be short
tals to the switch contacts are extremely short. and direct. As many components as possible
To the left of this switch is the S-meter "zero" are mounted between the pins of the tube
potentiometer R,. The receiver bandswitch s, sockets and the socket ground lugs. Miniature
is located adjacent to the cascode amplifier disc ceramic capacitors are used for bypass pur-
Figure 20
UNDER-CHASSIS VIEW OF
TRANSCEIVER
General layout of the components below the
chassis may be seen in this view. At the lower
right are the power supply components, sep-
arated fram the rest of the circuitry by a
copper shield. RY1, RY,, and the audio driver
transformer are just above this shield. Across
the front of the chassis is the transmitter
section with the inter-stage shields mounted
across the tube sockets. At the center is the
crystal switch with five crystals mounted to
the wafer of the switch. Directly behind this
switch is the i-f section of the receiver and
the audio output transformer. In the lower
left corner are the cascade r-f stages and the
bandswitch for the receiver which is mounted
on a small bracket and panel driven with
an extension shaft. In front of this switch
are the components of the tuned first con-
version stage. The trimmers used with the TV
"inductuner" are mounted on the tuner ter-
minals.
Sections of !;4-inch coaxial cables connect the
various antenna circuits to the change-over
relays and the coaxial antenna receptacles
on the rear of the chassis,
HANDBOOK Advanced Transceiver 587
T1
FIGURE 21
B+
COl L TABLE FOR 2 AND 6 METER TRANSCEIVER
lA
RECEIVER SECTION, FIGURES 14 AND 15
nearby receiver tuned to 84 Me. A signal in cillator coil 112 and will light brightly when the
the 50 - 54 Me. range is now injected in the oscillator stage is functioning. Capacitor C. is
antenna receptacle (],) of the receiver section, adjusted for steady operation of the oscillator.
and the adjustable slugs of coils 1, and 1s Bandswitch Sa is now set to 50 Me. and switch
tuned for greatest signal response. The last s, is set to the "tune" position removing plate
step is to adjust the slug of antenna coil L. and screen voltage from the amplifier tube.
Switch s, should be set to the 144- 148 The 6360 is inserted in the buffer socket and
Me. range and tubes V, and v, are placed in meter switch S, is set to read the grid current
their sockets. Oscillator operation is checked of this stage. A reading of about 3.5 milliam-
at 114 Me., and coils 1,, L, and 1, are adjusted peres can be obtained by proper adjustment of
for maximum signal response in the 2 meter capacitor C.. The plate circuit of the 50 Me.
band. When the receiver is operating properly stage should be set to approximate resonant
on both bands, the transmitter section of the frequency with a grid-dip osilclator and a
transceiver may be wired and tested. dummy load or antenna is attached to the 50
Me. antenna receptacle ],. Switch s, is now set
Wiring the Transmitter Section. The r-f sec- to the operate position and the push-to-talk
tion of the transmitter is wired first. Coupling relay circuit actuated. Amplifier tuning capaci-
coil L, between the oscillator and buffer is tor c, is adjusted for maximum meter reading
made of two sections of coil stock that are when the meter is switched to the r-f volt-
telescoping, and the plate coil is placed within meter position. Plate current of the 6306 tube
the grid coil. Coils 1" and 1 " are mounted under this condition is approximately 70 milli-
between the wafer sections of Switch Sa. The amperes. The actual value of plate current may
50 Me. antenna coil is placed between the two be checked by setting meter switch S, to the
windings of 1,,, and the 144 Me. grid coil of "amplifier" position ( 0 - 100 milliamperes).
the 2 meter amplifier is placed between the The next step is to check the modulator. In-
dual windings of coil L,,. The various resistors sert tubes v,., v,, and v20 in their respective
associated with the bandswitch are mounted sockets. Advance gain control R, while speak-
between the terminals of the switch. The 2 ing into the microphone in a normal tone.
meter plate coil L, is fastened to the terminals When checked in a nearby receiver the modu-
of tuning capacitor Co, which project through lation should be clear and crisp.
Y2-inch clearance holes cut in the chassis. The After the transmitter section is operating
2 meter antenna coil is supported on two min- properly on 50 Me., attention should be given
iature ceramic insulator posts mounted adja- to the 2 meter section. A 144 Me. antenna is
cent to Ls. When the r-f wiring is completed, attached to receptacle ],, and the 6360 ampli-
the various coils may be adjusted to operating fier tube (V11) is inserted in its socket. Switch
frequency range by varying the spacing between s, is placed in the "tune" position, and the
the turns. coupling between the grid coil of this stage and
The audio section of the transmitter should buffer plate coil L, adjusted for 3.5 milliam-
be wired next. This is a straightforward oper- peres of grid current to V,. Switch Sa auto-
ation and comparatively simple. Small shielded matically activates tube vl1 when the switch
leads are run from the second section of the is placed in the 144 Me. position. Finally,
12AX7 speech amplifier to the audio gain switch S, is placed in the "operate" position
control R, mounted on the rear apron of the and the tuning ( Ca) and loading (Co) controls
chassis near the microphone jack. A shielded are adjusted for maximum indication on the
lead runs from the microphone jack to the r-f voltmeter. Plate current to the 2 meter
first section of the 12AX7. The coils of relays stage is held at 70 milliamperes as measured
R y, and R y, are connected in series with the on the amplifier position of meter switch S,.
control pin of ],, and are returned to the fila- The bandchange operation will now merely
ment circuit of the transmitter. consist of selecting the proper transmitting
crystal, setting Sa to the proper position, and
Testing the Transmitter Section. The trans- adjusting the transmitter controls for maximum
mitter is now temporarily connected to the reading of the r-f voltmeter. The complete
auxiliary power supply and the 6C16 oscillator bandchanging operation takes about fifteen
tube and an appropriate crystal are inserted in seconds.
their respective sockets. A test lamp should
be made from a 6.3 volt, 150 rna. (brown The Power When the transceiver is in work-
bead) pilot lamp attached to a small loop of Supply ing order, attention should be
wire. This test lamp is coupled loosely to os- turned to the power supply sec-
HANDBOOK Miniature S.S.B. Transmitter 589
tion (figure 18) . At the time of construction, placed at the 12.6 volt spot on the winding,
no power transformer was available that would or twenty turns from point B. Thus, the fila-
provide the desired voltages and at the same ments work as a "six volt string" for 61 115
time be capable of operation from both a 115 volt operation and as a "twelve volt string"
volt a.c. and a d.c. vibrator primary source. It for 121115 volt operation. The two different
is necessary, therefore, to find a power trans arrangements of plug PL-2 necessary to ac-
former that has suitable high voltage windings complish this are shown in figure 18.
and to remove the filament windings, replacing
Testing the Power Supply. After transformer
them with a special multi-purpose winding
T, has been modified, the power supply should
that will fill the bill. The Stancor P-8158 was
be wired in accord with figure 18. Before it is
used in this transceiver, and does the job nicely.
used with the transceiver, it should be tested
This transformer has a 115 volt primary wind-
with both a.c. and d.c. input circuits. The high
ing, a 11 7 volt secondary winding designed
voltage system should develop approximately
for voltage doubler service, and three 6.3 volt
250 volts across a 1600 ohm 50 watt resistor,
filament windings. The three filament windings
and a full 6.3 volts should be measured across
are on the outside of the transformer and may
a 1 ohm, 10 watt filament load resistor. The
be easily removed.
12 volt configuration should develop the same
Power Transformer Modification. The four high voltage under a similar load, and should
transformer bolts should be removed, exposing deliver 12.6 volts across a 2 ohm, 10 watt re-
the copper shorting band of the transformer, sistor. If it is found that the voltages developed
which is taken off. Take off the layers of cam- during operation from the d-e source are lower
bric tape to expose the uppermost filament than the corresponding voltages derived from
winding. Now, remove the unused filament a-c operation, it is an indication that the modi-
windings, being careful not to damage the fied primary winding has too many turns. The
other windings of the transformer. A new transformer should be removed from the in-
winding made of enameled wire should now stallation and one turn removed from each half
be placed over the remaining windings. This of the primary winding. This will boost the
winding will be for either six or twelve volt d.c. plate voltage about 10%. After the voltage
operation, and will have a voltage tap for fila- has been set, the power supply wiring and
ment operation when the supply is run from switching circuits of the transceiver may be
alternating current. During battery operation completed.
the filaments of the transceiver will be run
directly from the d.c. primary source. 28-4 A Miniaturized
Decide whether you want a six or twelve SSB Transmitter
volt primary winding. The six volt winding for 14 Me.
will be made of # 14 wire, whereas the twelve
volt winding will be made of # 16 wire. Each This 40 watt p.e.p. sideband transmitter was
winding will have a tap at the proper point to designed to provide the greatest amount of
provide voltage for the tube filaments. This "talk power" for a given size and weight. It
new winding is shown on transformer T,, was built by W6AVA expressly for the pur-
figure 18. pose of permitting amateurs in far-off coun-
The new winding will be put on in two tries to have the opportunity to experiment
halves, since two separate windings are re- with SSB transmission. The completely self-
quired for proper operation of the "full-wave" contained transmitter has been shipped around
vibrator. The six volt winding consists of two the world by air freight, and has been operated
separate windings of 14 turns of #14 wire. in such locations as Canton Island, Fiji, Brunei,
The windings are wound on in series, with the Singapore, and other exotic spots.
two adjacent leads brought out as a center tap The transmitter and power supply is con-
(see terminal B, T,, figure 18). The 6.3 volt tained within an aluminum case measuring
filament tap (terminal D, T,) is placed ten 9" x 6" x 5" and weighs less than seven
turns from the junction of the two windings pounds. When encased in a strong cardboard
(point B). The windings should be carefully box it is completely transportable by air ex-
taped in place and the transformer reassembled. press. Primary power source can be either 115-
If twelve volt operation is desired, two separate or 230-volts, 50- 60 cycles. Air tested by many
windings of 28 turns of # 16 wire are wound hours of operation under conditions of extreme
in series on the transformer. The filament tap heat and humidity, this small sideband trans-
for a-c operation of the filaments (D) is mitter has proven to be an effective design
590 Low Power Transmitters THE RADIO
that may provide inspiration for a more elab- the "carrier null" potentiometer R,. For maxi-
orate assembly. Tuning adjustments are simple mum carrier elimination capacitor C is ad-
and fool proof, and the transmitter remains in justed to neutralize the capacity feed-through
alignment without time consuming balancing which may occur between V,A and V,B.
of r-f and audio phase networks. With proper adjustment of C and R, a car-
Transmitter A block diagram of the circuit rier reduction of greater than 40 decibels be-
Circuitry is shown in figure 24. Fourteen low maximum SSB signal may be obtained
tubes are used including two with stability.
voltage regulators. The filter method of side- The mixing carrier is generated at approx-
band generation is employed using a 500 kc. imately 498 kc., the frequency of the "20
Collins mechanical filter having a passband of db attenuation point" of the mechanical filter.
3.1 kc. The sideband signal is heterodyned to The carrier is coupled into the Crosby modu-
the 14 Me. operating frequency by two mixer lator through cathode follower V,B. A single
stages. A voltage doubler type silicon rectifier sideband suppressed carrier signal appears at
power supply provides high voltage for trans- the output terminals of the mechanical filter
mitter operation. and is amplified by a single 5 702 pentode
The complete transmitter schematic is given stage ( V,), which drives a cathode coupled
in figures 26 and 29. Sub-miniature tubes are 6BG 7 mixer ( y,) . A crystal oscillator ( V10)
used wherever possible to conserve space. The operating on 4002 kc. provides mixing voltage
audio and sideband generation section of the to deliver a 4.5 Me. sideband signal in the
transmitter is illustrated in figure 26. The heart output circuit of the mixer tube. Two double
of this section is the Crosby triple triode mod- tuned transformers (T, and T,) provide ade-
ulator stage (V,A, V:,A, V,B). The first quate supression of the mixer voltage. Further
triode serves as a cathode follower audio stage signal amplification is obtained at 4.5 Me. by
and is driven by a sub-miniature 5 702 resis- virtue of a 6BG 7 cascode r-f amplifier stage,
tance coupled audio amplifier v,. The second
y,_
triode is also a cathode follower ( V:,A) and At this point the signal is mixed in a second
is excited by the mixing oscillator stage V,A, cathode coupled mixer stage (Vs) and hetero-
B. The cathode follower output voltage is de- dyned to the 14 Me. amateur band. The mix-
veloped across a common cathode resistor and ing oscillator operates in the 9.7- 9-8 Me. re-
is injected into the cathode of a grounded grid gion and uses a 57 44 triode ( Vn) in a Pierce
mixer tube V,B. A double sideband A-M circuit. The 14 Me. SSB signal is developed
signal is developed in the plate circuit of the across a tuned circuit in the plate of the mixer
mixer tube. The phase of the signal at the tube. The signal level at this point is quite
plate of mixer V,B is opposite to that of a low, and a second cascade r-f amplifier ( y,)
signal injected on the control grid of the tube. is employed to boost the signal to a level high
Cancellation of the carrier is therefore possible enough to drive a class AB, tetrode linear am-
by injectin~ the r-f carrier on this grid via plifier. The RCA 6524 dual beam amplifier
rube requires only 33 volts peak drive signal
to develop 50 watts p.e.p., so it was chosen for
the final r-f amplifier stage. With the two sec-
tions of the tube connected in parallel and 4 7 5
volts applied to the plates approximately 40
watts p.e.p. can be obtained from the tube.
For maximum stability and freedom from para-
sitic oscillations, suppressors are placed in the
grid and plate leads of the tube and the stage
is neutralized.
A simple pi-section output circuit is em-
Figure 23
SINGLE SIDEBAND IN A SMALL PACKAGE!
A complete filter-type 14 Me. single sideband trans-
mitter capable of 40 watts p.e.p. and less than one-half
.1 ~:::~~ cubic loot in size is described in this section. Com ..
~ plete/y self contained, this seven pound sideband pack-
age is well suited for portable or mobile operation. Pri-
mary power source is 115/230 volts, 50-60 cycles. Sili-
con rectifiers are used in high voltage supply and a
6524 is employed as high /eve/linear amplifier.
HANDBOOK Miniature S.S.B. Transmitter 591
11~/ 230V,
50-60""
3 AND
SHIELD ~~~tENL~
C10
10\
--:: 'I
'O.t
'- v 0 V11
0
0
-~
,v.
0-, 0
V1
V4AND 1
0~'-,
SHIELD -..: a
R
3 T1
V6ANO _ ,
SHIELD ~ ~
V10
I )AND
\:_:;--SHIELD
Figure 24
BLOCK DIAGRAM AND PARTS LAYOUT OF 14 MC. SIDEBAND TRANSMITTER
Fourteen tubes (including two voltage regulators) are used in this compact transmitter. A "Crosby"
modulator and 500 kc. Collins Mechanical Filter are employed for sideband generation. First frequency
conversion is to 4 Me., and second frequency conversion is to J4 Me.
Layout of major components on both sides and front of special chassis is shown in the illustration.
Figure 25
OBLIQUE VIEW OF
AMPLIFIER AND
EXCITER CHASSIS
The power amplifier
chassis is at the left. The
plate coil, plate tuning
capacitor and loading
switch are in the lore-
ground. Side # r of the
exciter is shown. The in-
ter-chassis area is cov-
ered with perforated
metal. The tip jacks lor
the receiver disabling
circuit are on the right
edge of the chassis. Cor-
ners of the mounting
base are rounded to per-
mit close lit with round-
ed corners of drawn
aluminum case.
592 Low Power Transmitters
played with the linear amplifier stage. In order T arzian silicon rectifiers. The forward voltage
to conserve space, the usual variable capacitor drop of these rectifiers is of the order of only
is omitted from the output side of the network 1.5 volts and the back resistance is extremely
and a rotary switch and selection of fixed ca- high. Because of the very small size, a great
pacitors is employed in its place. Proper choice number of rectifiers may be placed in a small
of capacitors permits the transmitter to be area (figure 3 3 ) . Care must be taken with
matched to 52- or 72-ohm transmission lines these rectifiers not to overload them with an
having s.w.r. values as great as 2.5/1. accidental short circuit. Peak currents are cri-
The problem of obtaining the necessary d-e tical because the small mass of the rectifier
power from a supply that would fit within element will heat instantaneously and could
the small cabinet space was solved by employ- conceivably reach failure temperature within
ing a bridge rectifier using the new Sarkes- a time lapse of a few microseconds. The use of
V1 v~
5702 5702
.001
A
TO
CHASSIS
#2.,
Ve
+12.5 FROM
~c SUPPLY
B (CONTROL)
TO FIG. 2.9
!:!.Qili
1- CAPAC!rDRS MARKED* ARE 240 1J1JF FOR TYPE
5008-31 MODEL FILTER.
2- ALL RESISTORS 1/2-WATT UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
3-C=.Ot.UF DISC CERAMIC CAPACITOR.
4- SUBMINIATURE TUBE SOCio<ET TERMINALS
~
REO
~
~ RED
ll.JJ.l~K1
H
K2
H
~T ~OT
3
C.1 2 7 G2.
1 6
Gt K G3 H H G2 P K G H H P P1 P2
,,~v.
OA2 CONNECTIONS TO
CHASSIS 1 & 2
OA2
115 v.
l>---+----4>-------- +475 v.
r----------~~---~-----~~----0.3V.
(AT EACH TUBE SOCirET)
Figure 26
SCHEMATIC, LOW FREQUENCY SECTION AND POWER SUPPLY OF SSB TRANSMITTER
DL 1-Time delay relay, 45 seconds. Amperite 6N045-T. Normally open.
T 1-455 kc. miniature i-1 transformer. J. W. Miller 12-C9. Remove turns from windings to resonate at
500 kc.
T4-150 volt, 125 ma., 500 volt, 125 ma., 6.3 volt, 4 amp. Two 115 volt, 50-60 cycle primary windings.
Walgren 3266. Walgren Electric Mfg. Co., Pasadena, Calif.
CH,, CHz- 2 henry at 130 ma. Stancor C-2303
SR 1-Four silicon rectifiers. Max. inverse volts = 280. Sarkes-Tarzian M-500 or 1N1084
SR.-Eight silicon rectifiers, two in series lor each leg. Max. inverse volts
or 1N1084
=
280. Sarkes- Tarzian M-500
MF-Col/ings Mechanical Filter, 3.1 kc. bandwidth, 500 kc. center frequency. Type 5008-31
X 1-Approximately 498 kc. frequency chosen to place carrier oscillator at "20 db. down" point on filter
curve (see filter data sheet).
RFC-2.5 mh. miniature r-1 choke. Millen J300-2500.
s,-see figure 29
Figure 27
INTERIOR OF LOW FREQUENCY
PORTION OF FILTER TYPE SSB
TRANSMITTER
500 kc. filter and low frequency components
are on the bottom deck of the chassis. Small
components are mounted between socket pins
and miniature tie-point terminals. Interior
shield isolates low frequency section from
conversion oscillators and 4 Me. amplifier
stages. The "twenty meter 11 conversion crys ..
tal X, projects through the front panel of
the transmitter (left). Note that transformers
are mounted below chassis level to bring
overall height even with that of miniature
tubes. 6BK7 A amplifier tube is also sub-
mounted.
Power leads that pass through Inter-stage
shielding are routed through feed-thru type
ceramic insulators (Centralab type FT-1000).
an auxiliary supply for tuning operations, the actual placement of major components is
therefore, is highly recommended. shown in figures 25 and 27. The mechanical
filter occupies the upper right portion of the
Transmitter Layout The transmitter is built deck. Input and output circuits of the filter
and Assembly in three sections which are isolated by a shield partition that passes
are held together by a across the midsection of the filter. This shield
common front panel. The exciter (figure 27), also braces side # 1 to the interior full-
the linear amplifier (figure 31), and the power length shield seen in figure 27. Power leads
supply (figure 33) make up these three sec- from this portion of the exciter pass through
tions. When the three sections are placed in .001 fLfLfd. Centralab type FT ceramic feed-
posltlon they appear as in figure 32. A rear through capacitors. These capacitors are em-
view of the complete transmitter (minus the ployed wherever power leads pass through an
case) is shown in figure 28. The sections are interstage shield. Note that coupling trans-
bolted together and the complete assembly is former T, is submounted to bring its height
fastened to the front panel. Because space is at in line with that of the sub-miniature tubes.
a premium in such a configuration, each chas- All components are mounted on this side of
sis is individually designed and shaped to fit the chassis and it is wired before it is attached
the unusual layout. A sketch of the exciter to the base.
chassis is shown in figure 24. It is formed Side # 2 of the exciter chassis is attached
from two sides and a base. The base mounts to the base, and is further braced to side # 1
in a vertical position in the completed as- by an end plate and an interstage shield. The
sembly (see figure 28). Side # 1 of the ex- 6BK7 A socket, and transformers T, and Ta
citer chassis contains the low frequency portion are submounted to bring their height down to
of the exciter and can be seen in figure 26, and that of the sub-miniature tubes. The compon-
Figure 28
REAR VIEW OF ASSEMBLED SSB
TRANSMITTER
The three sub-assemblies of the transmitter
are fastened together and bolted to the front
panel. At the left is the power supply section.
The a.c. power receptacle is at the bottom
of the assembly with the two filter chokes
at the left. Above the chokes is the bank of
silicon rectifiers with the two voltage regula-
tor tubes and dropping resistor at the top of
the supply.
The linear amplifier comprises the center sec-
tion of the assembly. Antenna and receiver
coaxial receptacles are mounted on a small
bracket bolted between the outer sections.
Plate coil is visible at the top of the chassis
with adjustable loading switch to the right.
The right section of the assembly is the ex-
citer, shown in detail in figure 27,
594 Low Power Transmitters THE RA D I 0
SIDE *I< 2 OF CHASSIS *I< I
vo V7 V8 Vg
6B'G7 68G7 6111 6BK7A
8KONTROL).-------------------------~------------------------------------------_J
F/t;.26
CHASSIS* 2
PC
ANTENNA
TOL2~
SSB StD J4
220 Js
50
.~~s v.::=::
~
0-+
0-10
H
2.- C = .OI.J.JF CERAMIC CAPAC/ TOR
3- S FIGURE 26 FOR SOCkET CONNECTIONS OF
SUBMINIATURE TUBES.
+300V. +475 v.
Figure 29
T:, T.--4.5 Me. interstage transformer. J. W. Miller 6204
L,--20 turns #22 e., Y4" diam .. 8" long on ceramic form with iron slug. J. W. Miller 4504
L:, L.-15 turns # 18, %" diam, %" long on polystyrene form. Link
L,--12 turns#l6, ll/4" diam., IY2" long
=
2 turns hookup wire.
c,--50 1111.fd. ceramic trimmer. Centralab 822-AN
Cz--50 1111fd. Johnson SOKIO
C,-9 1111.fd. Johnson 9M11
c,-so 1111fd. Johnson SOLIS
Cs--75 1111.fd. fixed capacitor. Switch Sz adds seven 33 1111.fd. capacitors in succession. (EI-Menco type
CM-19 or Centralab TCZ-33).
s,A-E--5 pole, 3 position. Centralab PA-2015
S:--Centralab P-121 Index Assembly with PIS progressive shorting deck.
X:--4002 kc. Precision Crystal Lab., Santa Monica, Calif.
X.-Frequency = 20 meter frequency minus 4500 kc.
PC-Parasitic choke. 52 ohm, I watt resistor wound with 6 turns # 16 wire.
RFC--2Y2 mh. miniature r-f choke. Millen J300-2500
M-0-10 d.c. milliammeter.
B,-37.5 volts. Burgess XX22 plus two type Z flashlight cells
SH,-150 ma. shunt. 100 ohms
RFCr-Ohmite Z-14 r-f choke
ents are mounted and wired before the side is portion of the transmitter assembly, and can
attached to the base. The base contains no wir- be seen in figures 23, 25, and 30. The tube
ing, except for two leads to the receiver dis socket and major parts are mounted on a flat
abling jacks ], and ]s. plate, with the grid circuit components en-
Amplifier chassis #2 occupies the center closed in a "step" shaped box. This shield is
HANDBOOK Miniature S.S.B. Transmitter 595
Figure 30
LINEAR AMPLIFIER
AND EXCITER
SECTIONS OF SSB
TRANSMITTER
Left: Linear amplifier Is
constructed upon an
aluminum sheet with
grid circuit enclosed by
small L-shaped shield
box. Low impedance link
leads from exciter pass
through grommet in box.
The coaxial output ca-
ble passes through chas-
sis hole to changeover
switch. Space to the right
of grid enclosure is oc-
cupied by meter and time
delay relay.
Right: Front view of as-
sembled exciter chassis
shows main panel con ..
trois. Chassis mounts in
vertical position in final
assembly. "Twenty me
tet11
conversion crystal
socket is at top, left, of
front of assembly.
clearly visible in figure 32. The clearance space occupies the far end of the chassis. Pi-network
provided by the "step" is occupied by the switch S, is placed next to the tuning capaci-
"SSB- standby-CW" switch s, which is mount- tor, and the various padding capacitors are
ed to the panel in close proximity to the grid mounted directly on the back of the switch
circuit components of the amplifier stage. The section.
important leads to the control switch pass out Power supply chassis #3 is attached to the
of the grid compartment through ceramic feed front panel, and the weight of the supply is
through capacitors mounted on the wall of the supported by a sheet metal screw run through
"step" shield. The coaxial r-f output lead and the rear of the case into the supply chassis
the grid bias lead also pass through this shield after final assembly. The power supply com-
and may be seen in figure 32. ponents are mounted upon a phenolic board
Figure 31 provides a close-up of the in- which in turn is fastened to the aluminum
terior section of the amplifier chassis. Grid chassis frame. The silicon rectifiers are held in
coil L, is affixed to a polystyrene insulator and position by fuse clips mounted on the boards
is mounted to the side of the chassis-box. Neu- and are placed so that they obtain the maxi-
tralizing capacitor C, is placed on a small poly- mum possible ventilation. The primary power
styrene plate adjacent to the 6524 amplifier plug is placed on the rear of the supply chas-
tube. Plate r-f choke is next to C, and the sis and projects through a hole cut in the case
5KV plate blocking capacitor is supported be- of the transmitter. The time delay relay DL-1
tween the top end of the choke and the stator is mounted on the side of the amplifier chassis
of tuning capacitor C. The _j)late inductor L and may be seen in figure 31. The small bias
battery for the amplifier stage fits below this
space.
Transmitter It is important that no low
Wiring frequency energy pass around
the mechanical filter as spurious
Figure 31
INTERIOR VIEW OF LINEAR
AMPLIFIER GRID COMPARTMENT
Time delay relay is mounted on side of grid
box, occupying space between the panel meter
and plate tank assembly. The grid coil and
tuning capacitor can be seen below the tube
socket. Neutralizing capacitor is made from
Johnson 30MB with every third plate removed,
but capacitor listed in ports list of figure 29
is satisfactory.
Figure 32
COMPLETE R-F ASSEMBLY OF 20
METER SSB TRANSMITTER
The two r-f units are bolted together in this
view. The power supply chassis mounts on the
right-hand edge of this assembly. Bias bat-
teries lit in the lower area ol the center unit,
while plate meter fits into upper space in
front of time delay relay. Compare this view
with figure 23, This photo is taken from the
right front, looking upward at the assembly.
nallevel at 4.5 Me. If a broadband oscilloscope, and tubes V, and Vn are placed in their sockets.
such as the Heathkit 0-11 is at hand, the signal Capacitor C (figure 29) is tuned for maxi-
may be observed visually and the audio level mum SSB signal in the 14 Me. band. The in-
may be set for minimum carrier modulation. terstage coupling transformers are peaked for
When monitored in the receiver the 4.5 Me. maximum sideband signal and the receiver
signal should be a pure carrier with little or may be used for monitoring purposes. Voice
no tone modulation. When audio gain con- modulation of the transmitter should be sharp
trol R, is retarded, the signal should gradually and clean. The carrier may be inserted for
weaken and disappear. After satisfactory oper- test purposes by advancing potentiometer R,.
ation is obtained at this frequency, crystal x, The next step is to check the operation of
, r - - - - 4 . 5 MC. ~
2.2.0.1 MC.
---z--22.4.6 MC.
Rx Tx
--=--
2.2.0.1 MC.
MODULATOR
V\3
SPEECH
Y14
CARBON
MICROPHONE
RECT. I
&le
+300V. AT 2.10 MA.
r---- -----,
I
5Y3 5Y3
I
l RECi.
AUDIO OSC.
Vte I
L.. _ _ _ J, ___ 1
_j
Vt7
V1s
1t5V. '\..
Figure 35
BLOCK DIAGRAM OF 220 MC. TRANSMITTER-RECEIVER
Seventeen tubes are employed in the VHF station. The receiver has two grounded grid r-f stages for
maximum sensitivity. Local oscillator injection is ptovided from the transmitter. Three 4.5 Me i-f stages
provide excellent gain and adequate selectivity. Transmitter is crystal controlled from 25 Me. crystal
and is plate modulated. Power supply provides 300 volts at 210 milliamperes. Transmitter draws 80
milliamperes, receiver draws 75 milliamperes, and modulator draws apptoximately 45 milliamperes under
I OOo/o modulation. Speech system is designated to be used with high gain mobile-type carbon microphone.
598 Low Power Transmitters THE RADIO
28-S A Duplex
Transmitter-Receiver
for 220 Me.
Duplex operation is permitted in the 220
Me. amateur band and opens interesting pos-
sibilities for unusual and novel forms of equip-
ment. This class of operation consists of two
one-way communication links separated in fre-
quency from each other sufficiently to permit
interference-free operation. The width of the
220 Me. band permits placing one link at the
low frequency end of the band and the other
link near the high frequency end of the band
without the danger of excessive interference
between the links.
Shown in figure 3 5 is the block diagram of
a transmitter-receiver unit designed to serve
as one end of a typical duplex communication
link. Transmission takes place on 224.6 Me.,
and reception takes place on 220.1 Me. The
frequency separation between the two links is
4.5 Me. At the opposite end of the link, trans-
mission takes place on 220.1 Me., and recep-
tion takes place on 224.6 Me.
The complete duplex station is built within
a single cabinet and employs a common power
Figure 36
supply. Separate antennas are used for trans-
REMOVAL OF FRONT PANEL SHOWS mission and reception, and communication is
PLACEMENT OF R-F CHASSIS maintained in the same manner as in the case
The receiver and transmitter sections are boJt ..
ed together to form o single unit which sits of a "land-line," that is, simultaneous recep-
neor the top edges of the power transformer tion and transmission are possible.
and modulator chassis. Power supply chassis
is bolted to cabinet 11 on edge11 along left
hand side, and modulator chassis is attached
Transmitter-Receiver The schematic of the
in the same fashion along the right hand side Circuitry transmitter - receiver
of the cabinet. Ventilation holes are drilled
along upper edge of rear portion of cabinet. is given in figure 3 7
and figure 38. The receiver section employs
eight tubes in a superheterodyne circuit having
the linear amplifier stage. Bias voltage should two grounded grid r-f amplifier stages (figure
be applied to the 6524 and meter switch Sa 3 5 ) . The intermediate frequency of the re-
set to the grid position. With full carrier in- ceiver is 4.5 Me. and three stages of i-f ampli-
sertion, one or two milliamperes of grid cur- fication are used. Since the frequency separa-
rent will flow. The stage is neutralized by tion of the two links is 4.5 Me. it is feasible to
adjusting capacitor c, for minimum grid cur- employ the signal from the transmitter portion
rent fluctuation as the plate circuit is tuned of the unit as the injection frequency for the
through resonance. A dummy load is then at- first mixer of the receiver. Thus with the use
tached to the antenna receptacle ( Ja) and the of two properly chosen transmitter crystals
amplifier stage tuned in the usual manner. (one at each end of the duplex link) the two
Make sttre that plate voltage is never removed transmitter-receivers are locked on frequency
when excitation is applied to the tube as the and tuning of the receivers is unnecessary. The
screen current will increase to such a value transmission frequency at each end of the cir-
as to endanger the tube. Always remove the cuit controls the frequency of reception of the
screen lead when you remove the plate voltage. receiver portion of the transmitter-receiver.
When the carrier is nulled out, the resting Two 6AJ4 tubes are used in the receiver as
plate current of the linear amplifier will be grounded grid r-f amplifier st:lges. The gain
about 20 m:~., rioing t0 about 100 rna. under per stage is quite low but is sufficient to over-
voice peaks. No grid current should be indi- come the noise level of the mixer tube (V:,).
cated under these conditions. R-f energy from the transmitter section pro-
Vs
6AB4 (ZSMC.) (22SMC.)
:c
,...
z
RFC2. 0
m
0
0
;t:::
f-+--------'~--~(>----~H
1 K ,001
TW -c
PIN!, PL1
L3- 2. T., 1/2."' DlA. 1 1/4"' LONG. L9- 3 T. # 16, 3/8" LONG, TAP 1 1/2. T.
L4- 2T. 1 3/8" DIA., OVER L3. L!0-3T.41:16, 3/8" LONG, TAP 2.114 T.
N
N
0
I
~
()
B+RECEIVER lOOK
CJ
Figure 37
"c' T c
"0
PIN 5 1 (AUDIO)
SCHEMATIC, R-F SECTION OF TRANSMITTER-RECEIVER PL1 PIN 6,
C1)
TRANSMITTER SECTION RECEIVER SECTION PL1 X
Ct, c,, c,, C,-10-10 p,p,fd. Johnson IIMBII Cs, Cs, Cto, C11-4 p,p,fd. Erie 3139-E
C4 , C,-4 p,p,fd. Erie 3139-E RFC,-Ohmite Z-235 r-f choke
C,-10 p,p,fd. Johnson 9M II
RFCt--Ohmite Z-28 r-f choke T,-T.-4.5 Me. interstage i-f transformer. J. W. Miller 1466
RFCz--Ohmite Z-235 r-f choke PL,-6 contact receptacle. Cinch-Jones P-306-AB
Xt-24,944 kc. crystal. Precision Crystal Lab., Santa Monica, Calif.
600 Low Power Transmitters
V14 V13
12AU7 T6 12AX7 T7
CARBON
MIC.
MODULATOR SECTION
._---~+300V. TO PINS
2. & s, PLt
.01
c
KEY
POWER SUPPLY SECTION
e~----~+--P-1L_o_,~~.3V. TO P1N3, PL 1
AUDIO TONE OSCILLATOR
FROM RECEIVER T5
(PINeS, PLt)
Figure 39
REAR VIEW, R.F DECKS OF
TRANSMITTER-RECEIVER
Receiver deck is at the left and
transmitter deck is at the right.
The two chassis are bolted to-
gether to form one unit. Across
the back lip (left to right) are;
Receiver antenna receptacle,
pwoer plug PL,, meter terminals,
transmitter antenna receptacle,
and transmitter loading ca-
pacitor.
Rows of (,!," holes are drilled in
the transmitter chassis to im-
prove ventilation of the rectfier
area under the chassis.
Figure 40
UNDER-CHASSIS VIEW, R-F DECKS
OF TRANSMITTER-RECEIVER
Small components of both sections are mount-
ed between tube socket pins and phenolic
terminal strips mounted at center of chassis.
Small copper shields are placed across center
of 6AJ4 r-f tube sockets of the receiver.
Shield plate made of perforated aluminum
sheet is placed over bottom of transmitter
chassis to reduce injection voltage to receiver
mixer stage. Neutralization capacitors of
transmitter amplifier stage are mounted di-
rectly across socket on either side of the
grid coil.
chassis that are mounted against the side walls tured coil stock and are mounted to the stator
of the cabinet as seen in figure 41. The corners rods of the tuning capacitors. Coils L, and L,
of these chassis are rounded to permit mount- may be wound from enameled wire. The var-
ing them snugly against the walls of the cab- ious power leads, decoupling resistors and ca-
inet. The various tubes are mounted in a verti- pacitors are placed clear of the r-f circuitry
cal position on the upper side of the chassis and the components are mounted upon pheno-
while the transformers mount on the vertical lic tie point strips placed adjacent to the tube
surface. To the rear of the cabinet is a small sockets. The power leads and meter leads
blower motor to provide adequate ventilation that leave the chassis pass through ceramic
for protracted operation of the equipment. The feed through capacitors (Centralab FT-1000)
various manual controls fasten directly to the mounted on the walls of the chassis.
main panel of the cabinet and flexible leads
are run from them to their respective circuits Preliminary Transmitter Adjustments. Trans-
in the equipment. The r-f deck sits atop the mitter operation may be checked using the
power transformer and the modulation trans- power supply shown in figure 38, or any aux-
former and is held in position by sheet metal iliary supply capable of providing about 200
screws that pass through the rear wall of the volts at 80 milliamperes. If the permanent sup-
cabinet into the chassis. ply is used for tune-up purposes, a 5000 ohm,
10-watt dropping resistor should be placed in
The Transmitter Chassis. The placement of series with the B-plus lead to the exciter to
major parts on the transmitter chassis may be protect the tubes in case of misadjustments.
seen in figures 39 and 40. The crystal oscilla- Tuned circuit L-C may be set to 25 Me. with
tor stage is at the front of the chassis with the the aid of a grid dip oscillator and the 6AB4
crystal mounted in a horizontal position, pro- oscillator tube and crystal x, plugged in their
jecting through the front panel of the cabinet. sockets. Proper operation of this and succeeding
The multiplier stages fall in a line, with the stages may be checked with a 2 volt, 60 milli-
final amplifier stage at the rear of the chassis. ampere (pink bead) flash light bulb attached
The coaxial antenna receptacle J, and antenna to a small loop of wire which is held in prox-
tuning capacitor C are mounted to the rear. imity to the coil of the stage being adjusted.
wall of the chassis. When oscillation is obtained, the 12AT7 trip-
Common v.h.f. wiring techniques are em- ler tube is plugged in its socket and circuit
ployed in the assembly. Short, direct leads in L,-C, set to 75 Me. with the grid dipper. Plate
the r-f section are mandatory. The sockets of voltage is again applied and the circuits touch-
the two tripler tubes (V, and V10) and the ed up for maximum bulb brilliance when the
amplifier tube (Vn) are positioned at an pickup loop is held near L,. The second tripler
angle of 45 degrees so that a line drawn tube vlO is plugged in the socket and circuit
through pins 1 and 6 is parallel with the front La-Ca adjusted for maximum output at 225
edge of the chassis. The midget butterfly ca- Me. using the indicator lamp. Spacing of the
pacitors are mounted in line with the tube turns of La may require adjustment to permit
sockets. permitting very short leads to be run resonance. Plate current drawn by these three
from the plate pins of the tubes to the stators tubes should be about 70 milliamperes when
of the capacitors. the dropping resistor is shorted out.
The nine-pin tube sockets are the type that The next step is to neutralize the amplifier
mount from beneath the chassis and have a stage. This may be done by observing the grid
metal ring encasing the phenolic portion of the current of Vn while capacitors C. and c, are
socket. The various pins of each socket that adjusted. The leads of a high resistance volt-
must be grounded are bent down and soldered meter are temporarily clipped across the 2.7K
directly to this ring. The grid resistors of V" grid resistor of the amplifier stage, and the
and Vw are installed directly between the grid exciter circuits are repeaked for maximum grid
pins and the grounded cathode pins of the tube voltage reading. Over twenty volts should be
socket. The coupling capacitors between the obtained. Plate voltage to the amplifier stage is
stages are placed between the grid pins and removed for this test. Neutralizing capacitors
the stator rods of the butterfly tuning capaci- C. and C are now set to minimum capacity
tors. Filament pins 4 and 5 of the nine-pin and coil L is varied in position with respect
sockets are grounded to the socket ring and a to L, to obtain maximum grid voltage. The
common filament lead runs between the num- amplifier plate tuning capacitor Cc is tuned
ber 9 pins. through resonance while grid voltage is ob-
Inductors L and L, are made of manufac- served. If a change in voltage occurs during
HANDBOOK 220-Mc. Duplex 603
VERTICAL ARRAY HORIZONTAL ARRAY
the tuning process the settings of capacitors FOR TRANSMISSION FOR RECEPTION
C and C are advanced in unison until no
change of grid voltage is noticeable. As the D
WOODEN
capacity settings are increased (keeping the SUPPORT
A
two settings approximately equal) the "kick"
of grid voltage will gradually decrease, until R
/ /
there is either no movement of the meter as
Co is varied, or else merely a gradual rise of
a volt or so as C is swung through its range.
A 6.3 volt, 150 milliampere (brown bead)
lamp is now connected to antenna receptacle
]1 and plate voltage is applied to the amplifier
stage and exciter. Capacitors Co and c, are
FEED SYSTEM FOR EACH ANTENNA
1.----- 2~. 5 00
-----1
tuned for maximum bulb brilliance. The plate
current of the amplifier stage will be close to JE:::~'h~I
-t" OIA. ALUMINUM: #SWIRE
30 milliamperes under conditions of maximum ELEMENT LENGTHS )
AND SPACING 14-300 .n TV Ll NE
output. REFLECTOR(R) 2!>. 5"
I (RANDOM
LENGTH)
Once initial adjustments have been made, ANTENNA (A) 23 . .5"
1
element beam antennas are used for each link. R-FVOLTS, GRID (PIN9) 6U6-10.3
A folded dipole and balun system are employed R-FVOLTS 1 CATHODE (PIN B) 6U8- 9.5
to provide a good match to the coaxial trans-
R- F VOLTS, J1. ACROSS 47 OHM RESISTOR- 6. 2
mission line. After the links have been set up,
transmitter and receiver tuning adjustments
should be peaked to maximize the signals. It Figure 44
will be found advantageous to experiment with VOLTAGE CHART FOR V.F.O.
HANDBOOK High-Stability V.F.O. 605
(160>) ( BO>)
L1 teue -teue 6AQ5 L2
RFC1
NOlES'
l-ALL MICA CAPACITORS EL-MENCO
SILVER MICA OR EQUIVALENT.
2-ALL CERAMIC CAPACITORS DISC-TYPE
CENTRALAB ODOR EQUIVALENT.
eue
6AQ.5
4- WIRE CABLE
TO SUPPLY
~----------------t--------------1---i~ P1
1 2 3 4
( 8~300) (CONTROL) (6.3V.) (GND.)
Figure 45
C,-.002 JLfd. Centralab high accuracy capacitor 950-202.
Cz-300 JLJLfd. Bud MC-1860
C,-25 JLJLfd. Bud LC-1642
31
:~:::: f:o2:/. :;~ 3~;; :~d~ approx. I" long. (See text) Wind on National ceramic form XR-72. Tap
L1-Vt
0
Lz-4,5 Me. lnterstage "TV" transformer. J. W. Miller 1466. Remove secondary winding and replace
with B turns #22 d.c.c. wound next to primary winding.
RFC,-2.5 mh. National R-100
RFCz-VHF choke, 500 ma. National R-60
isolated both electrically and physically from subject to temperature variations, changes in
the rest of the transmitting equipment. This the relative humidity of the surrounding air,
goal cannot be achieved in practice since a and absorption of heat from nearby objects. By
vacuum tube or transistor must be coupled to employing temperature and humidity resistive
these circuit elements to maintain oscillation. materials and removing as many heat generat-
The coupling of such items deteriorates the ing components from the vicinity of the fre-
electrical isolation of the frequency determin- quency determining circuits, a good degree of
ing circuit. By the use of proper coupling cir- stability in the v.f.o. may be obtained.
cuits the effects of the tube or transistor can Finally, steps must be taken to ensure that
be minimized. the oscillator of the v.f.o. unit is completely
The frequency determining circuit is also. free of parasitics, and that the output waveform
Figure 46
REAR VIEW OF V.F.O. CHASSIS,
SHOWING PLACEMENT OF PARTS
Oscillator inductor L, is at the left of chassis,
separated from the heat producing electron
tubes. To right of L, is the precision padding
capacitor C, mounted to the chassis. The main
tuning capacitor is firmly affixed to a heavy
dural mounting plate bolted to the gear box
of the dial drive. The rear of the tuning ca-
pacitor is attached to the chassis by a mount-
ing stud. To the right are the three tubes and
the output transfermer. Directly under the
tuning capacitor is the polystyrene chassis
plate holding the feed' through bushings for
the oscillator leads to the under-chassis area.
Control switch s, is at upper right.
606 Low Power Transmitters THE RADIO
Mechanical Design The mechanical design output coil L,, the 6AQ5 socket and the OA2
of the V.F.O. of the variable frequen- socket. Switch S, is mounted to the front panel
cy oscillator is equally directly in front of the 6AQ5. The front panel
important as the electrical design if maximum is held to the chassis by means of four 6/32
stability and reliability are to be achieved. bolts placed in the extreme corners of the
Provision must be made for dissipation of the front lip of the chassis. The panel is spaced
heat generated by the vacuum tubes, and the slightly away from the chassis by an extra set
v.f.o. components should be mounted on a of nuts slipped over the bolts before the panel
sheet of conducting material which will act as is affixed to the chassis.
a heat "sink" and will tend to resist rapid All control leads to the v .f .o. unit pass
changes in the temperature of the components through a four wire cable which enters the un-
bolted thereto. der chassis area via a rubber grommet on the
The v.f.o. is built upon a cadmium plated back lip of the chassis. Each lead is bypassed
steel chassis measuring 7 Yz" x 9" x 1 Y2 ". The with a .005 /Lfd. ceramic capacitor and is fil-
gear box of the National HRO-type dial is tered with a low resistance r-f choke. The co-
bolted to the chassis and the main tuning ca- axial output receptacle for the v .f.o. is also
pacitor c, is affixed by its front bearing to a mounted on the rear lip of the chassis, directly
3" x 3" x 0.125" dural plate held to theca- behind the 6US oscillator tube.
pacitor gear box by three long machine screws Wiring the V.F.O. The under-chassis area of
and three 1 Ys" metal spacers. The tuning ca- the v.f.o. should be wired
pacitor is driven through a high quality flexi- first. Common ground connections are made
ble coupling. This coupling should be free of to the three sockets by means of soldering lugs
back-lash, and should not permit end pressure and lock washers placed beneath one socket re-
on the shaft of the capacitor. A ] ohnson 104- taining nut. The filament leads are wired next.
250 coupling is recommended. Make sure that The bypass capacitors for pins 1, 3, and 4 of
the shaft of the gear box and that of the ca- the 6US socket are placed between the socket
pacitor are perfectly in line as misalignment pins and the grounded center stud of the socket
tends to force a degree of back-lash in the with the shortest possible leads. All compon-
system. ents of the 6US stage should be mounted solid-
The rear mounting foot of the capacitor is ly in place between adjacent tube pins or to
fastened to the steel chassis by means of a long nearby phenolic tie-point terminals. The grid
6/32 bolt and a l-inch metal spacer. This as- resistor and capacitor of the oscillator section
sembly provides a very rugged arrangement are mounted between pin # 2 of the 6U8
with a minimum of flexing between the ca- socket and the inter-chassis feedthrough insu-
pacitor and the chassis. lator in the polystyrene block.
Oscillator coil L and the precision ceramic The plate coil of the 6AQ5 doubler stage is
capacitor C are mounted to the chassis to the made from a 4.5 Me. sound TV i-f transformer.
side of the tuning capacitor as seen in the rear The secondary winding and tuning capacitor
view photograph. The slug of coil L is re- are removed and a link winding of 8 turns is
moved and discarded before the coil is wound. wound on the form, closely spaced to the pri-
Moveable oscillator slugs are not conducive mary winding. The transformer is then re-
to any great degree of oscillator stability and placed in the shield can and mounted atop the
this potential source of instability should be chassis. The r-f choke in the plate circuit of
taken from the circuit before it can do any the doubler stage is mounted between two ter-
damage. minals of a phenolic tie-point strip bolted to
The leads from the oscillator circuit to the one of the transformer lugs.
6US pentode tube pass through a 1 VI" hole The power supply r-f filter circuits are
cut in the steel chassis. A Ys "-thick square of placed on two four terminal tie-point strips
polystyrene is mounted under this hole and two mounted in the far corner of the chassis. The
miniature feedthrough bushings are mounted bypass capacitors are mounted between the in-
in the insulating plate. The residual capacity dividual terminal lugs and the adjacent ground
to grounds of these important leads is thereby connections of the strip and the r-f chokes are
held to an absolute minimum value. mounted between the strips.
The vacuum tubes and auxiliary circuits After the under-chassis wiring is completed
are placed on the opposite side of the tuning the wiring atop the chassis may be done. The
capacitor from the sensitive tuned circuit L-C. leads of the tuned circuit are made of # 12
In front of the oscillator tube is the SO meter tinned wire. The coil is wound with #20
608 Low Power Transmitters THE RADIO
increasing the capacitance of C will provide negative coefficient capacitance to the tuning
full coverage of the 80 meter band. In either circuit. This is a cut-and-try process and is not
case, it will be necessary to juggle the turns on recommended unless the builder has plenty of
L to obtain the correct tuning range. time and previous experience with the task.
It is not really required unless the oscillator is
Operating Check When completed the v.f.o. operated under extremes of room temperature.
of the V.F.O. should be placed in the
operating position and run The last step is to place the v.f.o. in the
for a period of several hours. During this time, metal cabinet. The unit should not be operated
the frequency of the v.f.o. should be compared out of the cabinet as the enclosure affords
against a known standard such as a 100 kc. some degree of shielding from the r-f field of
crystal, or Standard Frequency Station WWV. the transmitter. The rear of the chassis is
Under normal conditions the v.f.o. will have fastened to the bottom of the cabinet by two
a small positive initial warm-up drift of less sheet metal screws passed from the under side
than 100 cycles on 80 meters. It should settle of the bottom of the cabinet up into the rear
down after a period of time and remain rela- lip of the chassis. To prevent frequency changes
tively stable if the temperature of the room is during operation the lid of the cabinet should
constant. be fastened shut by means of two sheet metal
Temperature stabilization may be accom- screws run through the front corners of the
plished by the addition of a small value of lid into the cabinet.
CHAPTER TWENTY-NINE
The trend in design of transmitters for oper- excitation and audio driving power for high-
ation on the high frequency bands is toward level amplifiers running up to the 1000-watt
the use of a single high-level stage. The most power limit. The amplifiers shown in this
common and most flexible arrangement in- chapter may be easily driven by such exciters.
cludes a compact bandswitching exciter unit,
with 15 to 100 watts output on all the high- 29-1 Power Amplifier
frequency bands, followed by a single power Design
amplifier stage. In many cases the exciter unit
is placed upon the operating table, with a co- Choice of Either tetrode or triode tubes may
axial cable feeding the drive to the power am- Tubes be used in high-frequency power
plifier, although some operators prefer to have amplifiers. The choice is usually
the exciter unit included in the main trans- dependent upon the amount of driving power
mitter housing. that is available for the power amplifier. Ii
This trend is a natural outgrowth of the in- a transmitter-exciter of 100-watt power capa-
creasing importance of v-f-o operation on the bility is at hand (such as the Heath TX-1)
amateur bands. It is not practical to make a it would be wise to employ a power ampli-
quick change in the operating frequency of a fier whose grid dPiving requirements fall in
transmitter when a whole succession of stages nhe same range as the output power of the
must be returned to resonance following the exciter. Triode tubes running !-kilowatt in-
frequency change. Another significant factor in put (plate modulated) generally require some
implementing the trend has been the wide ac- 58 to 80 watts of grid driving power. Such
ceptance of commercially produced 75 and a requirement is easily met by the output
150-watt transmitters. These units provide r-f level of the 100-wat,t transmitter which should
610
Design 611
TO ANTENNA TO ANTENNA
CIRCUIT CIRCUIT
+ +
UNBALANCED COAXIAL BALANCED TWIN- LINE
FEED SYSTEM FEED SYSTEM
BIAS 110 v. +
Figure 1
Figure 2
LINK COUPLED OUTPUT CIRCUITS
FOR PUSH-PULL AMPLIFIERS CONVENTIONAL PUSH-PULL
AMPLIFIER CIRCUIT
The mechanical layout should be symmetrical
and the output coupling provision must be
be employed as the exciter. Tetrode tubes evenly balanced with respect to the plate coil
(such as the 4-250A) require only 10 to c,-Approx. 1.5 JLJLfd. per meter of wave-
length per section
15 watts of actual drive from the exciter for C,-Refer to plate tank capacitor design in
proper operation of the amplifier stage at 1- Chapter II
kilowatt input. This means that the output c,-May be 500 JLJLfd., 10,000-volt type cer-
amic capacitor
from the 100-watt transmitter has to be cut NC-Max. usable capacitance should be great-
down ~o the 15 watt driving level. This is a er, and min. capacitance less than rated
nuisance, as it requires the addition of swamp- grid-plate capacity of tubes in amplifier.
50o/o greater air gap than c,.
ing resistors to the output circuit of the trans- R,-100 ohms, 20 watts. This resistor serves
mitter-exciter. The triode tubes, therefore, as low Q r-f choke.
would lend themselves to a much more con- RFC ,-All-band r-f choke suitable for plate
current of tubes
venient driving arrangement than would the M,-M,-Suitable meters for d-e grid and plate
tetrode tubes, simply because their grid drive currents
requirements fall within the power output All low voltage .001 JLfd. and .01 JLfd. by-pass
capacitors are ceramic disc units (Centra-
range of the exciter unit. lab DD or equiv.)
On the other hand, if the transmitter-exciter L,-50-watt plug-in coil, center link
output level is of the order of 15 - 40 watts L,-Piug-in coil, center link, of suitable power
rating.
(the ] ohnson Ranger, for example) sufficient
drive for triode tubes running 1-kilowatt input
would be lacking. Tetrode tubes requiring low Common technique is to employ plug-in
grid driving power would have to be employed pla-te coils with the push-pull amplifier stage.
in a high-level stage, or smaller triode tubes re- This necessitates some kind of opening for coil
quiring modest grid drive and running 250 changing purposes in the "electrically tight'"
watts or so would have to be used. enclosure surrounding the amplifier stage. Care
must be used in the design and construction
Power Amplifier Either push-pull or single of the door for this opening or leakage of har-
Design-Choice ended circuits may be em- monics through the opening will result, with
of Circuits ployed in the power ampli- the attendant TVI problems.
fier. Using modern tubes Single ended amplifiers may also employ
and properly designed circuits, either type is link-coupled output devices, although the trend
capable of high efJiciency operation and low is to use pi-network circuits in conjunction
harmonic output. Push-pull circuits, whether with single ended tetrode stages. A tapped or
using triode or tetrode tubes usually employ otherwise variable nank coil may be used which
link coupling between the amplifier stage and is adjustable from the front panel, eliminating
the feed line running to the antenna or the an- the necessity of plug-in coils and openings
tenna tuner. into the shielded enclosure of the amplifier.
It is possible to use the link circuit in either Pi-network circuits are becoming increasingly
an unbalanced or balanced configuration, as popular as coaxial feed systems are coming
shown in figure 1, using unbalanced coaxial into use to couple the output circuits of trans-
line, or balanced twin-line. mitters directly to the antenna.
612 H.F. Power Amplifiers THE RADIO
Figure 4 Figure 5
UNIQUE CHASSIS LAYOUT PERMITS LEFT-HAND VIEW OF KILOWATT
SHORT LEADS IN KILOWATT AMPLIFIER OF FIGURE 4
AMPLIFIER Above shielded meter box is the protective
Large size components required for high level 11
micro-switch" which opens the primary power
amplifier often complicate amplifier layout. circuit when the panel door is not closed. Tube
In this design, the plate tank capacitor sits sockets are recessed in the chassis so that
astride small chassis running lengthwise on top of tube socket shells are about 1;2-inch
main chassis. Inductor is mounted to phenolic above chassis level. On right side of amplifier
plate atop capacitor. Variable link is panel (facing it from the rear) the tube socket is
driven through right-angle gear drive. Plate nearest the panel, with the neutralizing ca-
circuit is grounded by safety arm when panel pacitor behind it. On the opposite side, the
door is opened. Note that plate capacitor is capacitor is nearest the panel with the tube
mounted on four TV -type capacitors which directly behind it. This layout transposition
serve to bypass unit, and also act as supports. produces very short neutralizing leads, since
A small parasitic choke is visible next to the connections may be made through the stator
grid terminal of the 810 tube. of plate tuning capacitor.
Figure 7
Figure 6
CONVENTIONAL PUSH-PULL
UNDER CHASSIS VIEW OF TETRODE AMPLIFIER CIRCUIT
1-KILOWATT TRIODE AMPLIFIER Push-pull amplifier uses many ol the same
The grid circuit tuning capacitor and plate components required by triode tubes (see
circuit r-f choke are contained in the below figure 2). Screen supply is also required.
chassis enclosure formed by a small chassis B-Biower lor filament seals ol tubes.
mounted at right angles to the front panel.
The bandswitch coil assembly lor the grid C~,-Low internal inductance capacitor, .001
circuit is mounted on two brackets above this JIId., SKY. Centralab type 8585- 1000.
cutout. A metal screen attached to the bottom
ol the amplifier completes the TVI-prool NC-See text and figure 8.
enclosure.
PC-Parasitic choke. 50 ohm, 2-watt compo-
sition resistor wound with 3 turns # 12 e.
wire.
that almost full output can be obtained with Note: Strap multiple screen terminals together
practically zero grid excitation. Any minute at socket with %" copper ribbon. Attach
amount of energy fed back from the plate cir- PC to center ol strap.
cuit to the grid circuit can cause instability or
oscillation. Unless suitable precautions are in- heavily loaded plate circuit, one might be able
corporated in the electrical and mechanical de- to use an un-neutralized push-pull tetrode am-
sign of the amplifier, this energy feedback will plifier stage and suffer no ill effects from the
inevitably occur. residual grid-plate feedback of the tubes. In
fact, a minute amount of external feedback in
Fortunately these precautions are simple. the power leads to the amplifier may just (by
The grid and filament circuits must be isolated chance) cancel out the inherent feedback of
from the plate circuit. This is done by placing the amplifier circuit. Such a condition, how-
these circuits in an "electrically tight"" box. ever, results in an amplifier that is not "re-
All leads departing from this box are by-pass- produceable." There is no guarantee that a du-
ed and filtered so that no r.. energy can pass plicate amplifier will perform in the same, sta-
along the leads into the box. This restricts the ble manner. This is the one, great reason that
energy leakage path between the plate and grid many amateurs having built a tetrode amplifier
circuits to the residual plate-to-grid capacity that "looks just like the one in the book" find
of the tetrode tubes. This capacity is of the out to their sorrow that it does not "work like
order of 0.25 flfLfd. per tube, and under normal the one in the book."
conditions is sufficient to produce a highly re-
generative condition in the amplifier. Whether This borderline situation can easily be over-
or not the amplifier will actually break into os- come by the simple process of neutralizing the
cillation is dependent upon circuit losses and high-gain tetrode tubes. Once this is done, and
residual lead inductance of the stage. Suffice the amplifier is tested for parasitic oscilla-
to say that unless the tubes are actually neu- tions (and the oscillations eliminated if they
tralized a condition exists that will lead to occur) the tetrode amplifier will perform in an
circuit instability and oscillation under cer- ex;cellent manner on all bands. In a word, it
tain operating conditions. With luck, and a will be "reproduceable."
616 H.F. Power Amplifiers THE RADIO
Figure 9
UNDER CHASSIS VIEW OF
Figure 8 4-250A AMPLIFIER
The bias supply for the amplifier is mounted
REAR VIEW OF PUSH PULL at the front of the chassis between the two
4-250A AMPLIFIER control shafts. A blower motor is mounted
The neutralizing rods are mounted on ceramic beneath each tube socket. A screened plate
feedthrough insulators adjacent to each tube is placed on the bottom of the chassis to cQm-
socket. Low voltage power leads leave the plete the under-chassis shielding.
grid circuit compartment via Hypass capaci-
tors located on the lower left corner of the
chassis. A screen plate covers the rear of the
amplifier during operation. This plate was power gain and high screen voltage. As the
removed for the photograph.
operating frequency of the tube is increased,
the induotance of the internal screen support
As a summation, three requirements must lead of the tube becomes an important part of
be met for proper operation of tetrode tubes- the screen ground return circuit. At some criti-
whether in a push-pull or parallel mode: cal frequency (about 45 Me. for the 4-250A
1. Complete isolation must be achieved be- tube) the screen lead inductance causes a
tween the grid and plate circuits. series resonant condition and the tube is said
2. The tubes must be neutralized. to be "self-neutralized" at this frequency.
3. The circuit must be parasitic-free. Above this frequency the screen of the tetrode
tube cannot be held at ground potential by the
Amplifier The push-pull tetrode ampli- usual screen by-pass capacitors. With normal
Construction fier should be built around circuitry, the tetrode tube will have a tendency
two "r-f tight" boxes for the to self-oscillate somewhere in the 120 Me. to
grid and plate circuits. A typical layout that has 160 Me. region. Low capacity tetrodes that can
proven very satisfactory is shown in figures 8 operate efficiently at such a high frequency are
and 9. The amplifier is designed around a Bar- capable of generating robust parasitic oscilla-
ker & Williamson "butterfly" tuning capacitor. tions in this region while the operator is vain-
The 4-250A tetrode tubes are mounted at the ly trying to get them operating at some lower
rear of the chassis on each side of the capaci- frequency. The solution is to introduce enough
tor. The base shells of the tubes are grounded loss in the circuit at the frequency of the
by spring clips, and short adjustable rods pro- parasitic so as to render oscillation impos-
ject up beside each tube to act as neutralizing sible. This procedure has been followed in this
capacitors. The leads to these rods are cross- amplifier.
connected beneath the chassis and the rods During a long series of experiments de-
provide a small value of capacitance to the signed to stabilize large tetrode tubes, it was
plates of the tubes. This neutralization is nec- found that suppression circuits were most ef-
essary when the tube is operated with high fective when inserted in the screen lead of the
HANDBOOK Pi-Network Amplifiers 617
tetrode. The screen, it seemed, would have r-f seen in figure 10. Two fixed vacuum capaci-
potentials measuring into the thousands of volts tors are mounted vertically upon the chassis
upon it during a period of parasitic oscillation. and the upper terminals are attached to the
By-passing the screen to ground with copper plates of the amplifier tubes by means of low
strap connections and multiple by-pass capaci- impedance straps. Resonance is established by
tors did little to decrease the amplitude of the rotation of a shorted copper loop located with-
oscillation. Excellent parasitic suppression was in the amplifier tank coil. This loop is made
brought about by strapping the screen leads of a %" long section of copper water pipe,
of the 4250A socket together (figure 7) and two inches in diameter. Approximate resonance
inserting a parasitic choke between the screen is established by varying the spacing between
terminal of the socket and the screen by-pass the turns of the copper tubing tank coil. In-
capacitor. ductive coupling is used between the tank coil
After this was done, a very minor tendency and the antenna circuit in the usual manner.
towards self-oscillation was noted at extreme- Sufficient range to enable the operator to cover
ly high plate voltages. A small parasitic choke a complete high frequency band may be had
in each grid lead of the 4-250A tubes elimi- with this intere~ting tuning method.
nated this completely.
The neutralizing rods are mounted upon two 29-4 Tetrode Pi-
feedthrough insulators and cross-connected to Network Amplifiers
the 4-250A control grids beneath the chassis.
These rods are threaded so that they may be The most popular amplifier today for both
run up and down the insulator bolt for neu- commercial and amateur use is the pi-network
tralizing adjustment. configuration shown in figure 11. This circuit
Because of the compact size of many tetrodes is especially suited to tetrode tubes, although
it is necessary to cool the filament seals of the triode tubes may be used under certain circum-
tube with a blast of air. A smaU blower can be stances.
mounted beneath the chassis to project cooling A common form of pi-network amplifier is
air directly at the socket of the tube as shown shown in figure 11A. The pi circuit forms the
in figure 9. matching system between the plate of the am-
plifier tube and the low impedance, unbalanced
Inductive Tuning of The plate tank circuit antenna circuit. The coil and input capacitor
Push-Pull Amplifiers of the push-pull ampli-
fier must have a low
impedance to ground M harmonic frequencies
to provide adequate harmonic suppression. The
usual split-stator tank capacitor, however, has
an uncommonly high impedance in the VHF
region wherein the interference-causing har-
monics lie. A push-pull vacuum-type capacitor
may be used as these units have very low in-
ternal inductance, but the cost of such a capac-
itor is quite high.
A novel solution to this problem is to em-
ploy a split stator capacitor made up of two
inexpensive fixed vacuum capacitors. Ampli-
fier adjustment can then beSit be accomplished
by inductive tuning of the plate tank coil as
Figure 10
INDUCTIVE TUNING MAY BE
EMPLOYED IN HIGH POWER
AMPLIFIER
Two fixed vacuum capacitors form split-stator
capacitance, providing very low inductance
ground path for plate circuit harmonics. Tun-
ing is accomplished by means of shorted,
single-turn link placed in center of tank
coil. Shorted link is made from %inch section
cut from copper water pipe. Larger link out-
side of tank coil is antenna pick-up coil.
618 H.F. Power Amplifiers THE RA D I 0
Bl AS +
~v.rv
115
V1 C2.
~
L2.
h! 'l":M,
EXCITATION
! T 9
RFC1
," 52.
C4p =RFC1
@
.QQl
c-
BIAS +
~
1 tSV.'\..
'"""'' r:
V1 C2. L2.
LOW Z
OUTPUr
.o'
c
R1
-=- .a 1
c
.oat
c
- BIAS +
rw1
t15v.rv
Figure 11
TYPICAL PI-NETWORK CONFIGURATIONS
A-Split grid circuit provides out-of-phase voltage for grid neutralization of tetrode tube. Rotary coil
is employed in plate circuit, with small, fixed auxiliary coil for 28 Me. Multiple tuning grid tank T 1
covers 3.5- 30 Me. without switching.
8-Tapped grid and plate inductors are used with "bridge type" neutralizing circuit for tetrode ampli-
fier stage. Vacuum tuning capacitor is used in input section of pi-network.
C-Untuned input circuit (resistance loaded) and plate inductor ganged with tuning capacitor comprise
simple amplifier configuration.
PC 1, PC:-57 ohm, 2 watt composition resistor, wound with 3 turns # 18 c. wire.
HANDBOOK Pi-Network Amplifiers 619
82
Figure 14
SCHEMATIC, MOBILE LINEAR AMPLIFIER
c,-120 JLJLid., SKY variable vacuum capacitor. Jennings GSLA-120
L,-(20 meters): J5 turns #I Be., o/a" diam., I" long. Adjust to resonance with J,
shorted and tubes in sockets.
L,-(20 meters); 6 turns, '14-inch silver plated copper tubing, 2'/2 " i.d., 2" long.
Adjust antenna tap lor proper loading.
RFC,-2.5 mh. National R-100
RFC,-225 turns #28 manganin, o/a" dia., 2" long, in series with National R-100
choke. Or, heavy-duty Ray par RL- 102 choke may be substituted lor these two
items.
RY,-SPDT relay, d.c. coil to match battery voltage. Jennings RB-I vacuum relay
employed
B,, 8:, 8,-/ndicator pilot lamps. 81 should have 500 ma. rating; Bz, 60 ma. rating;
and 8, may be automobile headlight lamp heavy enough to carry antenna
eurrent.
in screen capacitor which provides an extreme- Amplifier Class ABl operation plus the
ly low impedance screen ground return circuit, Construction complete absence of parasitics
reducing the problem of parasitics to a mini- results in a very minimum
mum. amount of harmonic generation. The use of a
A simple "series" tuned input circuit is low inductance variable vacuum capacitor pro-
employed in the grid circuit. The internal in- vides an effective return path to ground for
put capacitance of the tubes is effectively in high frequency harmonics appearing in the
parallel with the grid coil resonating it to the
operating frequency. Since no grid current is
drawn during class ABl operation a small bat-
tery may be used to provide the correct value
of operating bias. Flashlight bulbs are placed
in the screen and negative high voltage leads
instead of meters to conserve space.
Figure 15
SMALL SIZE OF LINEAR AMPLIFIER
IS DUE TO USE OF MINIATURE
300 WATT, WATER COOLED
TETRODE TUBES
Parallel operation of the 4W-300B tubes is
employed. Plate tank inductor is at right,
with miniature variable vacuum capacitor be-
hind it. Plate choke is in the foreground,
made up of a 2.5 mh. choke in series with a
home-made unit. Commercial choke may be
used, as indicated in parts list of figure J4.
Special low inductance Eimac sockets are em-
ployed with the tubes. Vacuum-type antenna
relay is at top, center.
622 H.F. Power Amplifiers THE RADIO
plate circuit of the amplifier. As a result, a very strap. A wire interconnecting lead will Jnvan-
minimum of shielding and lead filtering :s bly lead to VHF parasitic oscillation of the
required with this amplifier even when 28 Me. stage.
operation is desired. Placing the amplifier
Amplifier The amplifier must be completely
within the turtle-back of the automobile and
Operation tested before it is installed in the
the insertion of a low pass TV-filter in the
coaxial antenna line reduces TVI-producing automobile. Grid, plate, and screen
meters should be inserted in the power leads
harmonics to such a low value that no inter-
ference is caused to a nearby television receiver to the amplifier and preliminary tune-up into
tuned to a channel 2 signal of moderate a dummy load is done at reduct>d screen and
plate potentials. A small driving signal is ap-
strength.
plied to the amplifier and grid coil L reson-
The amplifier is built upon a shallow metal ated. The screen and plate currents will in-
deck just large enough to hold the various crease sharply in value when the grid circuit
components (figure 15). The two 4W-300B is tuned to the operating frequency. The degre:!
tube sockets are placed in the left area of the of plate loading is determinoo by the position
chassis with the variable vacuum capacitor of the antenna tap on the plate tank coil.
mounted at the right corner of the front paneL Screen current is a very sensitive indicat::>r
The silver plated copper tubing tank coil is of the degree of amplifier antenna loading. At
bolted between the rear terminal of the capaci- plate potentials of 2000 or so the total screen
tor and one of the capacitor mounting bolts. current at one kilowatt peak input is about 10
Make sure that a good connection exists be- milliamperes, varying slightly with individual
tween the capacitor, the panel, and the chassis tubes. As the plate potential is raised above
as this ground return is part of the plate tank this value the screen current gradually drops
circuit. until at 3000 volts plate potential the screen
Centered on the front panel are the three current is near zero. In general, overcoupling
pilot lamp indicator sockets, the antenna of the amplifier will be indicated by low
changeover relay and the coaxial antenna re- screen current and undercoupling will result
ceptacles. At the rear of the chassis is the plate in high values of screen current. At 3000 volts
r-f choke. Two r-f chokes in series were used plate potential, an overcoupled condition is
in the original model, but have since been re- indicated by negative screen current, 'lnd un-
placed with one of the new Raypar miniature dercoupling will produce positive screen cur-
chokes (see parts list, figure 14) . rent. Only a slight deviation from zero current
The grid circuit components are mounted during voice operation indicates proper opera-
in the under-chassis area of the amplifier (fig- rion. Maximum peak input under these condi-
ure 16). A shield plate is placed over the tions is about 1500 watts ( 3000 volts at 500
bottom of the amplifier to completely isolate rna.).
the components from the field of the plate
tank circuit. Grid coil L is mounted to the The Power Supply This amplifier is designed
panel and slug-tuned to resonance. The grid to work from a three-
terminals of the tube sockets are connected phase alternator system of 1500 watts capacity.
with a short length of w-inch wide copper A three-phase rectifier supply is employed to
Figure 16
UNDER-CHASSIS VIEW OF MOBILE
SSB LINEAR AMPLIFIER SHOWS
SIMPLICITY OF CIRCUIT
Input circuit is at the left, with grid terminals
of socket connected with short copper strap.
Screen series resistors are at center, with grid
choke and power plug at right. Under-chassis
area is enclosed with aluminum bottom plate
held in place with self-tapping sheet metal
screws.
HANDBOOK Mobile SSB Amplifier 623
T1 (SEC. :11. 1)
50
;ow
t----.w--..--~-{.; + 32.5 V. (SCREEN)
AT tOO MA
10.UF + 100 K
450 sw-
T (SEC. #Z)
Figure 18
SCHEMATIC, THREE-PHASE MOBILE POWER SUPPLY
DI-D;-500 mo. silicon rectifier. Sorkes-Torzion M-500
D,-Diz-2.5 KV, 130 mo. rectifier stock. Sorkes-Torzion 280-SM silicon rectifier. See text for
substitute
T ~-Special three-phase power transformer to deliver 2500 volts d.c. at 400 mo., and 325
volts d.c. at I 00 mo. Design data and core may be obtained from Arnold Engineering Co.,
Marengo, Ill. Core number: ATA-1573 with 12-mil Hypersil laminations for 120 c11cle
operation.
Primary winding: (12 volts)-Each leg, 15 turns #Be. wire
( 6 volts)-Each leg, 7 turns # Se. wire
Low Voltage secondary, Each leg, 265 turns #30e. wire
High Voltage secondary: Each leg, 2400 turns #28e. wire
7.5 KV insulation employed. High voltage winding placed next to core, low voltage
secondary next, and primary winding outside, with 2KV insulation. Vacuum impregnate
windings. When finished, polarize windings by placing 6 volt, 50 c.p. lamps in series
with each primary lead. Bulbs should only glow red when primary windings are correctly
polarized. Correct polarization of secondor11 windiNis will deliver desired ouU>ut voltaaes.
Figure 19
WATER COOLED LINEAR
AMPLIFIER PACKAGED FOR
FIXED STATION USE
Eithet 4W-3008 (watet cooled) tubes ot 4X-
250B (ait cooled) tubes may be employed in
this compact lineat amplifiet. Input and out-
put capacitots of pi-netwotk ate vacuum
units, and powet supply (thtee phase) is con-
tained within the cabinet (tight). Wide band
plate t.f. choke is at left of cabinet, tunning
ftom ftont to back. Amplifiet opetates at
plate potential of 3000 volts, with p.e.p. of
1500 watts.
29-6 A Multi-band
Mobile Linear Amplifier
Figure 20
MULTI-BAND LINEAR AMPLIFIER The kilowatt linear amplifier described in
FOR MOBILE SERVICE FEATURES this section is designed for remote control mo-
THREE SEPARATE TANK CIRCUITS bile operation on any three amateur bands.
SWITCHED BY CONTROL RELAYS The unit shown in the photographs operates
Three vacuum tonk capacitors are located at
top left cotnet of panel. To the tight is thet- on the 80, 40, and 20 meter bands, but opera-
mocouple r.l. ammeter in output circuit. Zero- tion on 15 or 10 meters is possible by altering
centet scteen metet and 0-500 d.c. ma. plate
metet ate at lower tight. the constants of the plate tank circuit.
625
INPUT 01
j, c
LDFC1 J3
RECEIVER
~~ ~IH
300 ~
BW c
Figure 21
SCHEMATIC, MULTI-BAND MOBILE LINEAR AMPLIFIER
c,, c,, Cs-Jennings variable vacuum capacitor, type GSLA. Use 250 JlJlld. unit lor 80 meters and 120
J.LJ.lld. units for other bands. Adjust coils to resonate circuit with capacitors set near maximum value.
L,-16 turns, 7;4-inch silver plated copper tubing, 2Y2" i.d., 3Y2" long. Antenna tap approximately 2
turns from ground end.
Lz-8 turns, same as L1o Antenna tap approximately 2 turns from ground end.
L,-5y2 turns, same as L, Antenna tap approximately % turn from ground end.
RFC,-2.5 mh. National R-100
RFCz-Wide band choke, 500 ma. rating. Raypar RL-102
RY,, ,, s-DPDT relay, d.c. coil to match battery voltage. Jennings type RB vacuum relay
RY,-SPST relay, d.c. coil to match battery voltage, Jennings type RB-I vacuum relay (Jennings Radio
Co., San Jose, Calif.)
M,-0- 500 ma. d.c. meter
M,-500- 0- 500 d.c. micro-ammeter, zero center movement, shunted to 50- 0- 50 ma.
Ms-0- 5 ampere, r.l. ammeter
Amplifier The amplifier employs two ex- coils. The proper tuned circuit is switched to
Circuit ternal anode tetrodes such as the the linear amplifier by means of miniature
4W-300B, 4X-250B, or 4CX- vacuum-sealed d.p.d.t. relays. Three relays are
300A. The water cooled tubes are recommend- required, one for each tank circuit. The tank
ed for mobile operation, while the air cooled circuits are relatively low impedance devices
tubes may be used for fixed operation. The as they are tuned with capacitors having a large
schematic of the amplifier is shown in figure value of maximum capacitance, permitting
21 and is a version of the untuned input cir- good efficiency in matching the tubes to the
cuit of figure 11 C. very low load impedance presented by t~e
Three separate parallel tuned plate circuits mobile antenna system.
are employed in the linear amplifier. Each Although the tubes operate with "zero"
circuit is made up of a silver plated copper driving power the resistive input system de-
tubing coil paralleled with a miniature vari- mands that approximately 9 watts of excita-
able vacuum tuning capacitor. These new Jen- tion be employed to develop 50 volts (peak)
nings capacitors are extremely small in size across the 300 ohm circuit impedance. The
and are tuned by means of a slotted sh:1fr in- mobile SSB exciters ot Chapter 28 used in
stead of the more cumbersome and expensive conjunction with a 2E26 linear buffer stage
counter dial arrangement. The low impedance will supply an abundance of excitation for
mobile antenna system is tapped directly tO this kilowatt amplifier. Alternatively, a high
experimentally determined points on the tJ.nk impedance grid ci~cuit such as shown in figure
626 H.F. Power Amplifiers THE RADIO
llB may be used, dropping the grid driving Amplifier The amplifier should be bench-
power level to a watt or so. Operation tested before it is placed within
Selection of the proper tank circuit is ac- the automobile. Operating con-
complished by means of a rotary switch ( S,) ditions are similar to those described in Section
located at the driver's position in the automo- 29-5. A center-reading milliammeter is used
bile. One of the three miniature plate circuit in the screen circuit to observe screen current
reLays at a r:me may be operated by this switch. during loading adjustments. Linear operat1ion
The antenna change-over relay is actuated by may be checked with the aid of envelope de-
the push-to-talk circuit in the microphone. tectors, as discussed in an earlier chapter. Nor-
mal operation takes place at 2500 volts at 400
Amplifier The amplifier is built upon milliamperes, peak current. Screen current is
Construction a shallow metal deck (figure less than 5 milliamperes under these condi-
22). The two Eimac low in- tions. Grid current is zero.
ductance sockets for the tetrode tubes are
placed in the rear corner of the chassis with 29-7 An Inexpensive
the 80 meter tank coil to their left. One end Cathode Driven
of the coil is bolted to the chas,sis and the Kilowatt Amplifier
other end is attached to the rear terminal of
the variable vacuum capacitor which is mount- An objectionable feature of triode tubes is
ed to the metal panel. The 40 and 20 meter that they must be neutralized in conventional
tank coils are mounted directly to their respec- grid driven circuits. Terrade tubes may often
tive tuning capacitors. dispense with the neutralizing circuit, but they
The front area of the chas,sis is taken up require a screen power supply whose cost and
with the plate circuit switching relays RY,-,-a. complexity dissipate the saving afforded by
These relays are bolted to the chass,is and the elimination of the neutralizing circuit. The
connections are made to the various terminals use of a cathode driven amplifier employing
by means of flexible 1,4-inch silver plated cop- zero bias tubes overcomes these two disadvan-
per strap. The three meters are mounted in the tages. The grids act as an excellent screen be-
remaining panel space. Under-chassis wiring tween the plate and cathode so neutralization
is extremely simple, as seen in figure 23. The is not usually required. The very small plate
socket grid terminals are connected together to cathode capacitance permits a minimum of
with a short length of copper strap. A shield intercoupling on frequencies below 30 Me.
is not required over the bottom of the chas.sis when inexpensive tetrode or pentode tubes are
since the grid circuit is untuned. used. No screen or bias supplies are required.
Figure 22
REAR VIEW OF
MULTI-BAND
MOBILE LINEAR
AMPLIFIER
The three amplifier tank
<:oils are t:onne<:ted be-
tween the variable va-
cuum capacitors and
t:hassis ground. Plate
voltage is shunt-fed to
the linear amplifier tubes
(4W-300B's or 4X-
250B's). Antenna relay
is at left. Extremely low
harmonic content of class
AB I amplifier operation
requires no TV/ st:reen-
ing or other endosure to
prevent radiation of un-
desired harmonies.
HANDBOOK Multi-Band Amplifier 627
INPUT
Jt
ALC
OUT
NOTES:
T~ I. ALL RESISTORS 1 WATT UNLESS
OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
EFFICIENCY (o/o) 60 70
RELAY \tSV.
CONTROL '\.1
Figure 30
SCHEMATIC, LOW DISTORTION LINEAR AMPLIFIER
c,-300 ;1Jlld., JOKY variable vacuum capacitor. Jennings UCS-300
C:-1500 !l!lld., variable capacitor. Cardwell 8013
C,-JOO 1111ld. variable ceramic
CJ,-C,-0.1 11ld., 600 volt bulkhead-type capacitor. Sprague "Hypass"
L,-5,-Barker & Williamson #850 pi-network inductor. Inductances: 80 meters, 13.5
11h.; 40 meters, 6.5 11h.; 20 meters, 1.75 11h.; 15 meters, I 11h.; 10 meters,
0.8 /lh.
Lz-Dual winding filament choke. B&W FC-15, 15 amperes capacity
T,-5 volts at 10.5 amperes. Stancor P-6135
T:-335- 0-335 volts, 75 ma. Chicago PSC-70
CH,-8 henry, 85 ma. Stancor C-1709
D,-D,-500 ma. silicon rectifier. Sarkes-Tarzian M-500
D.:-Diode, type IN67 or equivalent
M,-0- 800 ma. d.c. meter. Marion type MM3
M,-0- 50 ma. d.c. meter. Marion type MM3
M,-0- 50 ma. d.c. meter. Marion type MM3
RFC,-Heavy duty wide band r.l. choke, 800 mo. Raypar RL-100
RFC2-20 turns #20e, airwound, !;'2 " diam, J" long
RFC,-2.5 mh. National R-100
Figure 31
KtLOWATT CATHODE-DRIVEN
AMPLIFIER
Careful arrangement of components permits
symmetrical panel layout. Grid, screen, and
plate current meters are spaced across top
of panel, with amplifier loading control (C,)
at left, and plate bandswitch (SI) at right.
Counter dial at center drives variable vacuum
capacitor C1. Tune-operate switch Sz is at
lower right, balanced on left by pilot light.
Amplifier is completely screened to reduce
spurious energy radiation. Screened area on
top of shield allows circulation of air around
tube.
Figure 32
TOP VIEW OF
KILOWATT
AMPLIFIER USING
4-400A TETRODE
Plate circuit inductor is
placed parallel to panel
and driven by right-angle
drive unit. Loading ca
pacitor is at right, with
variable vacuum capaci-
tor mounted vertically at
rear of chassis. 4-400A
tube and air socket are
at rear right corner of
chassis, with bias trans-
former in lelt corner.
Plate blocking capaci-
tors are placed between
aluminum plates and
mounted atop vacuum
capacitor. Plate r-f choke
is hidden between tube
and variable vacuum ca-
pacitor. At base of ca-
pacitor are the 8-plus
VHF filter chokes and
bypass capacitors.
under-chassis area. Shield
plate covers entire en-
closure.
Figure 33
UNDER-CIIASSIS
SSB Linear Amplifier 633
VIEW OF
CATHODE-DRIVEN
AMPLIFIER
Bias and screen supply,
and input circuits are
placed in the under
chassis area. Filament
transformer and filament
choke are at left, with
tube socket next to the
choke. Screen terminals
of socket are grounded
with wide aluminum
strap passing across ter ..
minals to socket shell
and chassis. Grid termin-
al is bypassed to center
of strap. Input capaci-
tors mount between fil-
ament terminals and co
axial input receptacle on
rear of chassis.
At right are power sup-
ply compartment (see
figure 34) and voltage
regulator tubes. Vacuum
capacitor gear drive and
output circuit voltmeter
are at center of chassis.
Blower motor is next to
filament transformer.
Under-chassis area is
pressurized so that air
escapes through tube
socket vent. After bot-
tom plate is in place,
seam around plate is
sealed with cellophane
tape to provide air-tight
enclosure.
shield is 9 Ys" high. This shield is made of one ly in front of the tube is the panel driven 1500
piece of aluminum, bent into a U-shape, hav- fLfLfd. loading capacitor C, mounted on two
ing Y2 -inch flanges on all sides. The open heavy aluminum brackets, bringing its shaft
side of the "U" is bolted to the front panel as in line with that of the variable inductor, L.
shown in the photographs. Elastic stop-nuts Plate inductor L, is affixed to the chassis
are affixed to the shield every 1 1;2" along the parallel to the front panel, and is driven
flange, or it may be drilled and tapped for through a miniature right angle drive, as seen
6-32 machine screws. A shield of this type in figure 32, making the control knobs of L,
can be homemade, or it may be fabricated in and C occupy symmetrical positions on the
any large sheet metal shop for a small sum. panel.
The three indicating meters are mounted The variable vacuum capacitor is centered
on the top front of the panel and are shielded between the sides of the chassis and is panel
from the intense r.f. field of the amplifier by driven by a counter dial and a right angle
a half-box section of shielding bent to fit drive unit. To preserve the panel appearance,
around the rear of the meter cases. The meter the counter dial is mounted with its shaft
shield measures 2 1;2" deep, 4JA," high, and is about 2 Ys" above the lower edge of the panel.
long enough to make a close fit with the outer The center-line of the right angle drive unit,
shield at each end. Meter leads pass from the however, falls about 1 Ys" above the panel
under-chassis area through the upper deck via edge. Two 114" brass gears are used to couple
a short secnion of \12-inch pipe, threaded at the shafts, as seen in figure 34. The gears are
each end and bolted between the chas\\LS deck held in position by an angle plate cut from a
and the meter shield. soft aluminum sheet.
The major components are mounted with
an eye towards panel symmetry and short leads. The Tube Socket An Eimac air cooled socket
The vacuum tube socket and variable vacuum is used for the amplifier
capacitor C are placed to the rear of the chas- tube. The small 115 volt a.c. blower motor is
sis. The capacitor is mounted in a vertical po- mounted near the socket, and the entire under-
sition, gear driven from the under-chassis area chassis area is sealed air-tight with a bottom
(figure 3 3). Plate choke RFC-1 is placed be- plate. A ');,\" wide aluminum strap passes
tween the air socket and the capacitor. Direct- across the center of the socket, extending down
634 H.F. Power Amplifiers THE RADIO
Figure 34
CLOSE-UP OF POWER SUPPLY
COMPARTMENT AND GEAR
DRIVE SYSTEM
Off-center shafts of capacitor and counter
dial are ganged by two gears held in position
by triangular plate bolted to chassis. Enclo-
sure below holds power supply components.
Silicon rectifiers are mounted in fuse clips
attached to enclosure wall. All power leads
leaving enclosure pass through small, bulk-
head-type ceramic capacitors. Primary leads
pass through 11
Hypass~' capacitors on rear
wall of chassis. Potentiometers R, and Rz are
in corner ol chassis.
no the chassis on both sides. This strap is bolt- inurn conduit, and each meter is bypassed as
ed to the two screen terminals of the socket, shown in the schematic. Small insulated tip
and to the two diagonal assembly screws of the jacks (Jr.- ]w) are mounted on the rear of the
socket frame. The ends of the strip are fas- chassis to facilitate voLtage measurements. In
tened to the chassis, forming a low impedance addition, two insulated, closed-circuit jacks
return path for the screen circuit. The .001 (],, ], ) allow the voltage regulator currents to
fLfd., 5 KV ceramic grid bypass capacitor is be read.
mounted directly between the ground strap and Choke coils RFC-2 are wound on a %-inch
the grid terminal of the tube socket. wooden dowel rod which is removed, leaving
The r.f. input jack J, is mounted to the rear the coils self-supporting. Plate circuit wiring
wall of the chassis directly behind the tube above the deck is done with silver plated cop-
socket and two .001 fLfd. ceramic capacitors per strap.
are connected between the center terminal of When the amplifier wiring is completed the
J, and each filament terminal of the tube sock- power supply should be checked. The regula-
et. Short leads connect the filament terminals tor tubes are inserted in the correct sockets and
to the filament choke coil L, mounted on the the current flowing through the regulator cir-
side wall of the chassis, directly above the tube cuit is measured. The 1500 ohm series resistor
socket. The power supply components are en- in the power supply is adjusted to provide 40
cased within an auxiliary shield measuring milliamperes of screen regulator current. If the
5" x 7 Y:z" (figure 34). All leads leaving this correct current value is obtained with less han
enclosure pass through .001 }Lfd. ceramic feed- 500 ohms of series resistance, the 1 1-'fd. input
through capacitors mounted on the wall of the filter capacitor should be increased in value to
enclosure. The four silicon rectifiers are mount- 8 }Lfd. to boost the supply voltage. The regu-
ed in a multiple fuse clip holder placed on the lator current divides between the VR-75 and
side wall, and the three regulator tubes are the bias adjust potentiometer R,, and 25 mil-
mounted on the adjacent wall. liamperes of regulator current is measured at
Amplifier Wiring The power circuits of the ], when the supply is adjusted for 40 rna.
and Tuning amplifier may be wired at jack J. After final adjustment has been
with unshielded wire since completed, the variable series resistor in the
the r.f. field beneath the chassis is extremely supply may be replaced with a fixed one if
low. All d.c. leads are cabled and laced as may desired. Finally, bias control potentiometer R,
be seen in the under-chassis photograph. Leads is set for -60 volts as measured between Jo
to the meter deck pass through the area above (minus) and ]a (plus).
the chassis in a short section of Y:z-inch alum- Switch s, should be placed in the "tune"
HANDBOOK Kilowatt Amplifier 635
Figure 35
GENERAL PURPOSE AMPLIFIER
OPERATES IN CLASS A, B, OR C
MODE
This kilowatt amplifier employs a pair of
4-250A's in a pi-network circuit. Mode of op-
eration may be set by selection of proper
screen and bias voltages. Grid, plate, and
screen current meters are mounted on plastic
plate behind panel cut-out, and tubes are
visible through shielded panel opening. Across
bottom of panel (left to right) are band-
switch, grid tuning, plate tuning, loading, and
primary power control circuits. Plate tuning
knob is attached to small counter dial.
4-250A 4-250A
4-400A 4-400A
500
100 20 KV
2W
T1=
w
Figure 36
SCHEMATIC, GENERAL PURPOSE KILOWATT AMPLIFIER
C1-100 Jl.Ji.fd. Hammar- PC-47 ohm, 2 watt S1-Two pole, 6 position T1-5 volt, 20 ampere.
lund HF-100 composition resistor switch. Two Centra/ab Stancor P-6492
c,-200 Jl.!lfd., JOKY var- wound with 6 turns PA-17 decks, with PA-
iable vacuum capaci- #!Be. 30 1 index assembly M1-0-50 ma. d.c.
tor. Jennings UCS-200 Triplett
c,-1500 Jl.ji.fd., variable RFCJ-2.5 mh. choke. 52-Two pole, 6 position
capacitor. Cardwell National R-100 high voltage switch. M,-0- 150 ma. d.c.
B013 Communication Prod- Triplett
RFC,-Heavy duty, wide-
C4-Neutralizing capaci- band r.f. choke. Bar- ucts Co. type BB two M,-0-750 ma. d.c.
tor, disc. Millen 15011 ker & Williamson type gang switch Triplett
C,-300 Jl.Jl.fd., mica, BOO
1250 volt S,-Four pole, three po- Gears-2 required. Bos-
L1-L10-See coil table, RFC.,-VHF choke. Ohm- sition switch. Centra- ton Gear #G-465 and
figure 39 ite Z-144 lab #G-466
The peak voltages encountered across the 500 !J.!J.fd. to I500 !J.f-Lfd., depending upon the
input capacitor of the pi-network are the same ratio of transformation. Design information
as would be encountered across the plate tun- covering pi-network circuits is given in an earl-
ing capacitor of a single-ended tank used in ier chapter of this Handbook.
the same circuit configuration. The peak volt- Illustrated in figures 35- 4I is an up-to-
age to be expected across the output capacitor date version of an all-band pi-network ampli-
of the network will be less than the voltage fier, suited for sideband or class-C operation.
across the input capacitor by the square The unit is designed for TVI-free operation
root of the ratio of impedance transformation over this range.
of the network. Thus if the network is trans-
forming from 5000 ohms to 50 ohms, the ra- Circuit The schematic of the general
~io of impedance transformation is 100 and Description purpose amplifier is shown in
the square root of the ratio is 10, so that the figure 36. The symmetrical
voltage across the output capacitor is I/ I 0 panel arrangement of the amplifier is shown
that across the input capacitor. in the front view (figure 3 5) and the rear
A considerably greater value of maximum view (figure 3 7). A 200 fLI-'fd. variable va
capacitance is required of the output capacitor cuum capacitor is employed in the input side
than of the input capacitor of a pi-network of the pi-network, and a I500 ,.,.,.,.fd. variable
when transformation to a low impedance load air capacitor is used in the low impedance out-
is desired. For 3.5 Me. operation, maximum put side. The coils of the network are switched
values of output capacitance may run from in and out of the circuit by a two pole, five
Figure 37
REAR VIEW OF GENERAL PURPOSE
AMPLIFIER WITH SHIELD
REMOVED
The pi-network circuit is built from an inex-
pensive high voltage rotary switch, and live
inductors. The switch is panel driven by a
gear and shalt system shown in figure 38.
Variable vacuum capacitor is mounted ver
tically between the tubes, directly in back of
the plate r.f. choke. Neutralizing capacitor is
at right, connected to plates of tubes with a
wide, silver plated copper strop. Meters ore
enclosed by aluminum shield partition running
the width of the enclosure, with conduit cor-
rymg meter loads to under-chassis area at
left, front of chassis. Metal shells of tube
bases ore grounded by spring contacts.
Figure 38
PLACEMENT OF
PARTS IN UNDER-
CHASSIS AREA
Grid tuned circuit is en-
closed in separate enclo-
sure at left. Bandswitch
projects out the rear of
case1 and is gear driven
by same shalt that act-
uates the plate band-
switch. Switches are driv-
en through right-angle
gear drives and gears.
Output capacitor of pi-
network is shielded from
rest of under-chassis
components.
The screen terminals of
each tube socket are
strapped together with
%" copper ribbon, and
low inductance screen
bypass capacitor is
grounded t o socket
mounting bolt. Screen
parasitic choke mounts
between strap and ca-
pacitor terminal. All
power leads beneath the
chassis ore run in shield-
ed braid, grounded to
chassis at convenient
points. B-plus lead is
made of section of RG-
8/U coaxial c<Jble, with
outer sheath and braid
removed.
638 H.F. Power Amplifiers THE RADIO
! -200
the degree of unbalance of the neu.tralizing
circuit. Start with a minimum of applied r.f.
~~T~0~~s= =-;-~_-=,,a--~ =-eo- -J ~,zOT~,zo excitation to avoid damaging the meter or the
___::_R~_::URRE~~A~~-- o_ 0 __ -i __ ;_ 20 -~--20 diode. Resonate the plate and grid circuits for
P~w-~~~T~ur~w~"C::l'- ~o~_l_ 100 j _no 1 -~oo maximum meter reading, then vary the setting
of neutralizing capacitor C until the reading
T, 5R4-GY of the meter is a minimum. Each change in c,
should be accompanied by re-resonating the
grid and plate tank circuits. When a point of
minimum indication is found, the capacitor
should be locked by means of the auxiliary set
screw.
Complete neutralization is a function of the
efficiency of the screen bypass system, and
substitution of other capacitors for those n01ted
in the parts list is not recommended. Mica,
disc-type, or other form of bypass capacitor
should not be substituted for the units speci-
fied, as the latter units have the lowest value of
internal inductance of the many types tested
in this circuit.
Bias and The amplifier requires -60 to
Screen Supply -110 volts of grid bias, and
plus 300 to 600 volts of
screen potential for optimum characteristics
when working as a class AB1 linear ampli-
Figure 41 fier. Screen voltage for class C operation
OPERATING DATA AND SCHEMATIC, (phone) is 400 volts. The voltage may be
SCREEN AND BIAS SUPPLY raised to 500 volts for c.w. operation, if de-
T:-870-410-0-410-870 volts ot ISO ma. and
60 ma. 5 volts, 2 a., 6.3 v. 3.5 a. sired, although the higher screen voltage does
Stancor P-8307 little to enhance operation. Approximately -120
r,-235-0-235 volts at 40 ma. Stancor PC-
8401 volts cut-off bias is required for either phone
CH:-7 henry at ISO mo. Stancor C-1710 or c-w operation. A suitable bias and screen
CH,-7 henry at 50 mo. Stancor C-1707
RY:-Overlood relay, adjustable 100-250 ma. power supply for all modes of operation is
Note: J, is insulated from chassis. shown in figure 41, together with an operating
chart for all operating voltages. The supply
at each end and bolted to the ch~is and the furnishes slightly higher than normal screen
meter shield. Plate circuit wiring above the voltage which is dropped to the correct value
chassis is done with 1/;>-inch silver plated cop- by an adjustable series resistor, R, This series
per strap as seen in the introductory photo- resistor is adjusted for 30 milliamperes of cur-
graph at the beginning of this chapter. rent as measured in meter jack ]> when the
supply is disconnected from the amplifier.
Amplifier After the amplifier is wired Series bias resistor R, is adjusted for the same
Neutralization and checked, it should be current in jack } under the same conditions.
neutralized. This operation The value of protective bias may now be set
can be accomplished with no power leads at- by adjusting potentiometer R,.
tached to the unit. The tubes are placed in Additional bias is required for class C oper-
their sockets, and about 10 watts of 30 Me. ation which is developed across series resistor
r.f. energy is fed into the plate circuit of the R,. Switch S, is open for cla>s C operation and
amplifier, via the coaxial output plug }. The closed for sideband operation.
plate and grid circuits are resonated to the It is imperative that the screens of the tet-
Figure 42
4CX-1 OOOA ALL BAND AMPLIFIER
PROVIDES TWO KILOWATT P.E.P.
FOR SIDEBAND, OR ONE KILOWATT
FOR PHONE C.W. OPERATION
Grid, plate, and output meters are across top
of panel. Counter dial at center drives var-
iable vacuum tuning capacitor, with loading
control directly beneath it. Meter switch is
at left, with bandswitch at right. Entire am-
plifier is screened to reduce unwanted radia-
tion.
47K
500
20 KV
10 K
01
c
s
A B
C-.-:J ~ D
E -I'JII----<! _ _ o--- F
1K - -
Figure 43
SCHEMATIC, 4CX-1000A LINEAR AMPLIFIER
C 1-500 1111fd., 10KV variable vacuum capacitor. Jennings UCSL 4-500
C,-1500 1111fd. Cardwell 8013
L,-5,-High-C, all-band turret. Barker & Williamson 852
RFC,-2.5 mh. National R-100
RFC,-Heavy duty plate choke. Raypar RL-100
T,-6 volts, 12.5 amperes, with primary taps. Stancor P-6463
T,.-125 volts, 15 mo. Stancor PS-8415
R1-100 ohm, 20 watt non-inductive resistor. May be made ol a number of 2 or 4 watt composition
resistors connected in series parallel. Two Sprague type NIT, 10 watt 11 Cool-ohm 11 200 ohm resistors
in parallel used.
M~, M,-0- 1 d.c. milliammeter Mc-0- 1 d.c. ammeter Eimac SK-800 air socket
All-band Amp I ifier 641
Figure 44
END VIEW OF AMPLIFIER
4CX-1 OOOA sub-chassis is shown, with plate
circuit choke mounted at rear. External blow-
er provides forced air to cool tube seals via
entrance hole in reat of chassis. Bias adjust-
ment potentiometer is in foreground, between
tube and meter switch.
rent. Stabilization may be accomplished in sev- Amplifier Layout of the amplifier may
eral ways. A combination of voltage regu!at'O'r Construction be seen in figures 42, 44, 45,
tubes may be connected across the screen sup- 46, and 47. A 121;4" x 19"'
ply, or a heavy bleeder resistor may be placed rack pane! is employed to form the front of an
across the supply that will draw approximately enclosure 14" deep. The enclosure is built of
70 milliamperes at the operating potentia] of \12-inch aluminum angle stock and the top,
the screen. Screen voltage is not particularly sides and back are covered with perforated
critical, especially at plate potentials of 2500 aluminum sheet. The bottom of the enclosure
volts and higher. However, the screen voltage is formed from a solid sheet of aluminum.
should be adjusted for best linearity of the Only a very small chassis is required to mount
stage when the tube is operated at 2000 volts the 4CX-1000A tube socket, filament trans-
plate potential. A 3 50 volt, 150 rna. supply former, and grid circuit components. A chassis
utilizing choke input and bled to 70 milliam- measuring 6" x 3" x 14" with one end cut
peres, in conjunction with a 100 watt primary off is employed (figure 47). This chassis is
"Variac" or variable voltage transformer is a mounted at one end of the enclosure and sup-
satisfactory source of screen voltage. Three VR- ports a small aluminum angle bracket holding
105 regulator tubes passing 40 rna. may be the two pi-network capacitors. The band-
employed for a fixed-voltage screen supply. switching plate tank inductor is mounted di-
Figure 45
TOP VIEW OF
4CX-1000A
AMPLIFIER
Tetrode tube fits in Ei-
moc air socket on small
chassis at one end ol
enclosure. Pi-network
capacitors are mounted
on aluminum brocket at-
tached to chassis, and
ore panel driven through
flexible shaft couplers.
Heavy duty, high-C band-
switching inductor is at
opposite side ol assem ..
bly, with output circuit
diode voltmeter mounted
above it on rear of en-
closure.
Extremely low harmonic
content of amplifier re-
moves need of meter
shields. Amplifier may be
run without enclosure
with no sign ol TVI on
any band in normal TV
signal area.
Figure 46
REAR VIEW OF CHASSIS ASSEMBLY
Air inlet, power receptacle and coaxial input
jack are located on reot of amplifier chassis.
Pi-network capacitor assembly is at left, with
Raypar wideband plate r-t choke in tore-
ground. Plate blocking capacitor is made of
tour 500 111dd. TV -type capacitors mounted
in Sandwich" between stator plate of vacuum
11
Figure 47
UNDER-CHASSIS VIEW OF
4CX-l OOOA AMPLIFIER
Bias supply is placed at one end of chassis.
Filament transformer is mounted next to air
socket and short, heavy strap leads are used
to eliminate voltage drop. Special air socket
has built-in screen bypass capacitor to ensure
low inductance ground path.
644 H.F. Power Amplifiers THE RADIO
Figure 49
HIGH POWER PUSH-PULL AMPLIFIER
USES 4-1 OOOA TUBES
This amplifier design is typical of push-pull
stages regardless of power level. Tubes ate
visible through screened openings in panel.
Controls ate (top to bottom): Output link
tuning, variable link coupling, plate circuit
tuning, and grid circuit tuning. Amplifier is
housed in special 2l" rack. Filament meters
fot each tube are on auxiliary panel holding
bias and screen supply.
HANDBOOK P-P Tetrode Amplifier 645
C2 4-IOOOA/4-400A
RFc 2}12HOKl:
X X Y Y fl
ffl tlj ":" ""'tc:;:,
Rr. Tl xTj
B1 82 ~RFC1
, ~ Co~
115V,'\_, -BIAS
C7 ~
115
CB
v. '\.,
'~ C9
+SCREEN
B+
Figure 50
SCHEMATIC, PUSH-PULL HIGH POWER AMPLIFIER
C,-700- 700 !l!lfd. "butter-fly" capacitor. Barker & Williamson type JCX
Cz, C3-Neutraliring capacitors. 1" x 3" aluminum plate mounted near tube
envelope (figure 53)
C,A-B-60- 60 Jl!lfd. split-stator variable vacuum capacitor. Eimac VVC-60-20. See
text for substitute
c,-soo ll!lfd. Johnson 500E20
C,-C.,--0.7 !lfd., 600 volt feedthrough capacitor. Centralab "HY-pass"
RFC,-VHF-type choke. National R-60, or Ohmite Z-50
RFC,-Heavy duty plate choke. Surplus choke from AN/ART-13 transmitter, or
Barker & Williamson type BOO
PC-Parasitic suppressor. 3 turns # 74 wire, V:z-inch diam. in parallel with 47 ohm,
5 watt carbon 11 Globat 11 resistor
Figure 51
REAR VIEW OF AMPLIFIER
Plate tank circuit is placed between tetrode
tubes which are mounted in air sockets. Split-
stator variable vacuum capacitor is panel
mounted and rotors are grounded to chassis
by heavy copper strap. Tank coil is mounted
on 10" ceramic insulators. Individual fila-
ment transformers for the 4-lOOOA tubes are
at rear of chassis. Each tube requires 7.5 volts
at 2 I amperes.
Swinging link is panel driven through Millen
right-angle drive unit, and flexible, braided
leads connect link to antenna resonating ca-
pacitor and coaxial receptacle mounted in
top screen of amplifier.
Dual blowet motot is mounted to teat of
chassis. All power leads (including filament
leads to meters) are brought out through
bulkhead-type capacitors.
Figure 53
CLOSE-UP OF PLATE CHOKE AND
NEUTRALIZING CAPACITOR
Neutralizing capacitor is made of tab soldered
to threaded rod mounted in insulating button
affixed to chassis.
Figure 52
UNDER-CHASSIS AREA OF
PUSH-PULL AMPLIFIER
Blower motors are connected to air sockets
by short lengths of radiator hose. Filament
leads are run in braid, grounded at each end.
Shield plate is used over bottom of chassis to
provide "electrically tight" enclosure. Screen
terminals of each socket are strapped to
gether, and choke PC attaches to center of
strap.
CHAPTER THIRTY
Speech and
Amplitude Modulation Equipment
Amplitude modulation of the output of a Two trends may be noted in the design of
transmitter for radiotelephony may be accom- systems for obtaining high-level AM of the
plished either at the plate circuit of the final final stage of amateur transmitters. The first
amplifier, commonly called high-level AM or is toward the use of tetrodes in the output
simply plate modulation of the final stage, or stage of the high-power audio amplifier which
it may be accomplished at a lower level. Low- is used as the modulator for a transmitter. The
level modulation is accompanied by a plate- second trend is toward the use of a high-level
circuit efficiency in the final stage of 30 to 45 splatter suppressor in the high-voltage circuit
per cent, while the efficiency obtainable with between the secondary of the modulation trans-
high-level AM is about twice as great, running former and the plate circuit of the modulated
from 60 to 80 per cent. Intermediate values of ;rage.
efficiency may be obtained by a combination
of low-level and high-level modulation; cath- 30-1 Modulation
ode modulation of the final stage is a common
Tetrode In regard to the use of tetrodes,
way of obtaining combined low-level and high-
Modulators the advantages of these tubes
level modulation.
have long been noted for use in
High-level AM is characterized by a require- modulators having from 10 to 100 watts out-
ment for an amount of audio power approxi- put. The 6V6, 6L6, and 807 tubes have served
mately equal to one-half the d-e input to the well in providing audio power outputs in this
plate circuit of the final stage. Low-level mod- range. Recently the higher power tetrodes such
ulation, as for example grid-bias modulation of as the 4-65A, 813, 4-125A, and 4-250A have
the final stage, requires only a few watts of come into more general use as high-level au-
audio power for a medium power transmitter dio amplifiers. The beam tetrodes offer the
and 10 to 15 watts for modulation of a stage advantages of low driving power (even down
with one kilowatt input. Cathode modulation to zero driving power for many applications)
of a stage normally is accomplished with an as compared to the moderate driving power re-
audio power capability of about 20 per cent quirements of the usual triode tubes having
of the d-e input to the final stage. A detailed equivalent power-output capabilities.
discussion of the relative advantages of the On the other hand, beam tetrode tubes re-
different methods for accomplishing amplitude quire both a screen-voltage power supply and
modulation of the output of a transmitter 1s a grid-bias source. So it still is expedient in
given in an earlier chapter. many cases to use zero-bias triodes or even
647
648 Speech and A. M. Equipment THE RADIO
low-mu triodes such as the 304TL in many assymetrical speech which has been discussed
modulators for the medium-power and high- and illustrated in an earlier chapter.
power range. A list of suggested modulator The simplest method of attaining a high
combinations for a range of power output capa- average level of modulation without negative
bilities is given in conjunction with several peak clipping may be had merely by insuring
of the modulators to be described. that tbese high-amplitude peaks always are
poled in a positive direction at the secondary
Increasing the It has long been known of the modulation transformer. This adjust-
Effective Modu- that the effective modu- ment may be achieved in the following man-
lation Percentage lation percentage of a ner: Couple a cathode-ray oscilloscope to the
transmitter carrying un- output of the transmitter in such a manner that
altered speech waves was necessarily limited the carrier and its modulation envelope may
to a rather low value by the frequent high- be viewed on the scope. Speak into the micro-
amplitude peaks which occur in a speech phone and note whether the sharp peaks of
waveform. Many methods for increasing the modulation are poled upward or whether these
effective modulation percentage in terms of peaks tend to cut the baseline with the "bright
the peak modulation percentage have been spot" in the center of the trace which denotes
suggested in various publications and subse- negative-peak clipping. If it is not obvious
quently tried in the field by the amateur whether or not the existing polarity is correct,
fraternity. Two of the first methods suggested reverse the polarity of the modulating signal
were Automatic Modulation Control and Vol- and again look at the envelope. Since a push-
ume Compression. Both these methods were pull modulator almost invariably is used, the
given extensive trials by operating amateurs; easiest way of reversing signal polarity is to
the systems do give a degree of improvement reverse either the leads which go to the grids
as evidenced by the fact that such arrangements or the leads to the plates of the modulator
still are used in many amateur stations. But tubes.
these systems fall far short of the optimum be- When the correct adjustment of signal po-
cause there is no essential modification of the larity is obtained through the above procedure,
speech waveform. Some method of actually it is necessarily correct only for the specific
modifying the speech waveform to improve the microphone which was used while making the
ratio of peak amplitude to average amplitude tests. The substitution of another microphone
must be used before significant improvement may make it necessary that the polarity be re-
is obtained. versed, since the new microphone may be con-
It has been proven that the most serious ef- nected internally in the opposite polarity to
fect on the radiated signal accompanying over- that of the original one.
modulation is the strong spurious-sideband ra-
diation which accompanies negative-peak clip- Law-Level The low-level speech clip-
ping. Modulation in excess of 100 per cent in Speech Clipping per is, in the ideal case, a
the positive direction is accompanied by no very neat method for ob-
undesirable effects as far as the radiated sig- taining an improved ratio of average-to-peak
nal is concerned, at least so long as the linear amplitude. Such systems, used in conjunction
modulation capability of the final amplifier is with a voice-frequency filter, can give a very
not exceeded. So the problem becomes mainly worthwhile improvement in the effective mod-
one of constructing a modulator-final amplifier ulation percentage. But in the normal amateur
combination such that negative-peak clipping transmitter their operation is often less than
(modulation in excess of 100 per cent in a ideal. The excessive phase shift between the
negative direction) cannot normally take place low-level clipper and the plate circuit of the
regardless of any reasonable s pee c h input final amplifier in the normal transmitter re-
level. sults in a severe alteration in the square-wave
output of the clipper-filter which results from
Assymetrical The speech waveform of the a high degree of clipping. The square-wave
Speech normal male voice is charac- output of the clipper ends up essentially as a
terized, as was stated before, double saw-tooth wave by the time this wave
by high-amplitude peaks of short duration. But reaches the plate of the modulated amplifier.
it is also a significant characteristic of this The net result of the rather complex action of
wave that these high-amplitude peaks are poled the clipper, filter, and the phase shift in the
in one direction with respect to the average am- succeeding stages is that the low-level speech
plitude of the wave. This is the "lopsided" or clipper system does provide an improvement
HA.NDBOOK Design 649
MODULATOR High-Level One practicable method
Splatter Suppressor for the substantial elim-
ination of negative-peak
E clipping in a high-level AM transmitter is the
so-called high-level splatter suppressor. As
figure 1 shows it is only necessary to add a
high-vacuum rectifier tube socket, a filament
transformer and a simple low-pass filter to an
existing modulator-final amplifier combination
+B +B to provide high-level suppression.
MOD. R.f.
fiNAL
115 V.
The tube, V,, serves to act as a switch to
Figure 1
cut off the circuit from the high-voltage power
supply to the plate circuit of the final ampli-
HIGH-LEVEL SPLATTER SUPPRESSOR
f er as soon as the peak a-c voltage across
The high-vacuum diode acts as a series lim-
iter to suppress negative-peak clipping in the secondary of the modulation transformer
t.~e modulated r-f amplifier as a result of has be~ome equal and opposite to the d-e volt-
large amplitude negative-peak modulating age be:ng applied to the plate of the final am-
signals. In addition, the low-pass filter fol- plifier sta~e. A single-section low-pass filter
lowing the diode suppresses the transients
which result from the peak-clipping action of serves to filter out the high-frequency compo-
the diode. Further, the filter attenuates all nents resu!t:ng from the cli~oping action.
harmonics generated within the modulator Tube V, may be a receiver rectifier with a
system whose frequency lies above the cut-
off frequency of the filter. The use of an 5-volt filament for any but the highest power
appropriate value of capacitor, determined transmitters. The 5Y3-GT is good for 125 rna.
experimentally as d is c us s e d in Chapter p!ate current to the final stage, the 5R4-GY
Fifteen, across the primary of the modulation and the 5U4-G are satisfactory for up to 250
transformer (C.1J introduces further attenua ..
tion to high-frequency modulator harmonics. rna. For high-power high-voltage transmitters
Chokes suitable for use at L are manufactured the best t"Jbe is the high-vacuum transmitting
by Chicago Transformer Corp.. The correct tube type 836. This tube is equivalent in
values of capacitance for C1, C:, C,, and C "
are specified on the installation sheet for the shape, filament requirements, and average-cur-
splatter suppressor chokes for a wide variety rent capabilities to the 866A. However, it is
of operating conditions. a vacuum rectifier and utilizes a large-size
heater-type dual cathode requiring a warm-up
in the effective modulation percentage, but it time of at least 40 s e c o n d s before current
does not insure against overmodulation. An s h o u 1d be passed. The tube is rated at an
extensive discussion of these factors, along average current of 2SO rna. For greater current
with representative waveforms, is given in drain by the final amplifier, two or more 836
Chapter Fifteen. Circuits for some recommend- tubes may be placed in parallel.
ed clipper-filter systems will also be found The filament transformer for the cathode of
in the same chapter. the splatter-suppressor tube must be insulated
Figure 2
TOP VIEW OF THE
6L6 MODULATOR
Figure 3
UNDERCHASSIS
OF THE
6L6 MODULATOR
A 4-connector plug is
used lor filaments and
p I a t e voltage to the
speech amplifier, while a
6-wire terminal strip is
used lor the high-voltage
connections and the trans-
mitfer"control switch.
for somewhat more than twice the operating the design of such amplifiers, and for tabular
d-e voltage on the plate modulated stage, to material on recommended operating conditions
allow for a f a c t o r of safety on modulation for voltage and power amplifiers.
peaks. A filament transformer of the type nor-
mally used with high-voltage rectifier tubes 10 to 120 Watt It is difficult to surpass
will be suitable for such an application. Modulator with the capabilities of the
Beam Power Tubes reliable beam power
30-2 Design of Speech tube when an audio
Amplifiers and Modulators power output of 10 to 120 watts is required
of a modulator. A pair of 616 tubes operating
A number of representative designs for in such a modulator will deliver good plate
speech amplifiers and modulators is given in circuit efficiency, require only a very small
this chapter. Still other designs are included amount of driving power, and they impose no
in the descriptions of other items of equipment serious grid-bias problems.
in other chapters. However, those persons who
wish to design a speech amplifier or modulator Circuit Included on the chassis of the
to meet their particular needs are referred to Description modulator shown in figures 2
Chapter Six, Vacuum Tube Amplifiers, for a and 3 are the speech amplifier,
detailed discussion of the factors involved in the driver and modulation transformers for the
Pri CW
Figure 4
SCHEMATIC OF BEAM POWER TUBE MODULATOR
M-0- 250 d.c. milliammeter T z-- 11Poly-pedance 11 Modulation transformer
60-waff level = Stancor A-3893, or UTC S-20
T1-Driver transformer. Stancor A-4701, or UTC S-10. 725-waff level = Stancor A-3894
General Purpose Modulator 651
tubes so that the output stage may be operated 6L6 AB2 380 270 -23 3,800 85-205 47
either as a class AB, or class AB, amplifier.
-34 I 10,000 35-140 I 58
807 AB1 600 300
Stage tubes may be used in the out- -35 7,300 30-240 120
807 AB2 750 300
put stage of the modulator. As
a matter of fact, either 6V6-GT or 6F6-G
tubes could be used in the output stage if creased plate current with signal but with no
somewhat less power output is required. The grid current. Other operating conditions speci-
807 tube is the transmitting-tube counterpart fy class AB, operation, in which the plate cur-
of the 6L6 and carries the same ratings and rent increases with signal and grid current
recommended operating conditions as the 6L6 flows on signal peaks. Either type of operation
within the ratings of the 6L6. But the 807 is satisfactory for communication work.
does have somewhat greater maximum ratings
when the tube is to be used for ICAS (Inter- 30-3 General Purpose
mittent Commercial and Amateur Service) op-
eration. The 6L6 and 807 retail to the amateur Triode Class B Modulator
for essentially the same price, although the 807 High level class B modulators with power
is available only from transmitting tube dis- output in the 125 to 500 watt level usually
tributors. The 6L6-G tube retails for a some- make use of triodes such as the 809, 811,
what lower price; hence it is expedient to pur- 8005, 805, or 810 tubes with operating plate
chase 6L6-G tubes if 360 to 400 volts is the voltages between 750 and 2000. Figures 6,
maximum to be used on the output stage, or 7, and 8 illustrate a general purpose modula-
807 tubes if up to 750 volts will be applied. tor unit designed for operation in this power
Tabulated in figure 5 are a group of recom- range. Figure 8 gives a group of suggested
mended operating conditions for different tube operating conditions for various tubes. The
types in the output stage of the modulator. In size of the modulation transformer will of
certain sets of operating conditions the tubes course be dependent upon the amount of audio
will be operated class AB,, that is with in- power developed by the modulator. In the case
Figure 6
REAR VIEW OF THE
GENERAL-PURPOSE MODULATOR
'
652 Speech and A. M. Equipment
l[~o~e
684-G V2.
,--_- ---,
B+ 1000-1250 V.
+ + I I
10 JJF + 4.7 K 10 ..UF
-,_-
5 K
450
J
5Y3-GT
-.r50
+ CHI
L_+_ - ~~~'!~%~(./::: i~~%iEo,
TERMINALS.
*=MATCHED PAIR
25 K RESISTORS, 1%
""10
Figure 7
SCHEMATIC OF GENERAL PURPOSE MODULATOR
M-0- 500 ma. T 4-Suitable for tubes used.
T,-Driver transformer. Stancor A-4761 For 811-A's = 6.3 volt, 8 amp. Stancor P-6308
T2 - 11 Poly-pedance 11 Modulation transformer. For 810's = 10 volt, 10 amp. Stancor P-6461
300 watt rating, Stancor A-3898. CH,-14 henry, 100 ma. UTC S-19. Stancor C-1001
500 watt rating, Stancor A-3899. R,-1 K, 10 watts, adjustable. Set for plate current
T 3 -360- 0-360 volts, ISO mo. Stancor PC-8410 of 80 ma. (no signal) to 684-G tubes
(approximately 875 ohms).
v,,v,-see figure 8.
of tl:-:e 500 watt modulator (figures 9 and 10) Circuit Description The modulator unit
the size and weight of the components require of General Purpose shown in figure 6 is
ths.t the speech amplifier be mounted on a Modulator complete except for the
scp1rate chassis. For power levels of 300 watts high voltage supply re-
or less it is possible to mount the complete quired by the modulator tubes. A speech am-
speech system on one chassis. plifier suitable for operation with a crystal
microphone is included on the chassis along
~-S:G:T:-0~~~~~ ~GS CONDITIONS--l with its own power supply. A 6S]7 is used
I FOR GENERAL PURPOSE MODULATOR as a high gain preamplifier stage resistance
~sEsTP"C:.r~
l V1, v-~ IvOLTAGE I
GRID
BIAS
PLATE PLATE ro SINE WAVE I
CURRENT PLATE LOAD pOWEROUTPUT
coupled to a 6N7 phase inverter. The audio
f-- ---+--- __ (VOLTS) (MA.l (OHMS) (WATTS) level is controlled by a potentiometer in the
I 809'_j' 700 ! 0 70-250 6,200 -~ input grid circuit of the 6N7 stage. Push-pull
6B4-G low fL triodes serve as the class B driver
~811:A ~~5~i o 30-350 5,IOO I75 I stage. The 6B4's are coupled to the grids of
~-~ __:co-+ o 145350 7,400 2.45 -~ the modulator tubes through a conventional
multi-purpose driver transformer. Cathode bias
'811-A I 1250 I 0 50-350 9,200 310 is employed on the driver stage which is capa-
~A I I_'OO ~4.5 323I5 I2,400 I 340 I
ble of providing 12 watts of audio power for
the grid circuit of the modulator.
I 8~250 I 0 148400 6,700 300 ! The modulator illustrated in figures 9 and
805 1 , 500 --j:---I-6-+---84
___4_0_0+-8-.2-0-0-+--3-70----j 10 is designed for use with class B 810 triode
tubes operating at a plate potential of 2500
~~o~~---5_o-+-6o__4_2_o+_I'-_P_o_o_+-_4_5_o_---l volts. Maximum audio power available is 500
watts, sufficient to 100% modulate a transmit-
~ 2500 -75 50-420 I7,500 500 ter running one kw. input. The modulator may
be driven by the simple speech amplifier of fig-
~5 I 1500 -67 40-330 9,800 ~
ure 12, or by the clipper-amplifier of figure 15.
Figure 9
REAR VIEW OF 810
SOO-WATT CLASS B
MODULATOR
Bias control is directly be-
low the 810 tubes with bias
supply to right.
The modulator chassis includes a small low generated in the audio system which would
impedance bias supply capable of delivering normally show up as side-band "splatter" on
approximately -7 5 volts under the changing
the phone signal. Frequencies above 3 500
load conditions imposed by the varying grid
circuit impedance of the class B modulator. cycles are attenuated 15 decibels or more by
A low pass audio filter network is placed the simple pi-network filter shown in figure
after the modulator stage to reduce harmonics 10.
DRIVER
~OR MER 810
TO R-F AMP
5Y3GT
Figure 10
SCHEMATIC OF SOO WATT TRIODE MODULATOR WITH BIAS SUPPLY
T1-Driver transformer, 15 watts. Stancor A-4761
T,-Modulation transformer, 500 watt. Chicago Transformer Co. CMS-3
TJ-5 volts, 3 amp. Stan cor P-6467
T;-Tapped bias transformer, 15-100 volts. UTC S-51
r,-10 volt, 10 amp. Stancor P-6461
CH ,-500 ma. "splatter choke" Chicago Transformer Co. SR-500
CHz-7 henry, 150 ma. Stancor C-1710
M-0- 500 d.c. milliammeter
S,A-8-High voltage switch (see text)
654 Speech and A. M. Equipment THE RADIO
- ...,,,,--
TRANSFORMER
(')t,ltk'::>
-~~~~~5-
c.:-111
<"xllt.>
-_.til'--
Figure 12
10-WATT SPEECH AMPLIFIER-DRIVER
between the high voltage terminals of the mod- tion at a plate potential of 2500 volts. With
ulator, directly across the dummy load. Do not speech waveforms and moderate clipping the
touch the meter when the high voltage supply modulator meter will swing to about 300 rna.
is in operation! An audio oscillator should be under 100% modulation.
connected to the audio input circuit of the ex-
citer-transmitter and the audio excitation to 30-4 A 10-Watt
the high level modulator should be increased Amplifier - Driver
until the a-c voltmeter across the dummy load
resistor indicates an R-M-S reading that is A simple speech amplifier-driver for a medi-
equal to 0.7 (70%) of the plate voltage applied um powered class B modulator is shown in fig-
to the modulator. If the modulator plate volt- ure 12. The amplifier is designed to work with
age is 2500 volts, the a-c meter should indi- a crystal microphone. The first stage utilizes
cate 1750 volts developed acros5 the 6000 a 6SJ7. The gain control is between the 6SJ7
ohm dummy load resistor. This is equivalent plate circuit and the grid of the 6]5 second
to an audio output of 500 watts. With sine stage amplifier. The output tubes are a pair
wave modulation at 1000 c.p.s. and no speech of 6B4-G low-mu tubes operating with a self-
clipping ahead of the modulator, this voltage bias resistor in their common filament return
should be developed at a cathode meter cur- circuit. Operating in this manner the 6B4's
rent of about 3 50 rna. when the plate-to-plate have an undistorted output of approximately
modulator impedance of the modulator is 18,- 10 watts. This is sufficient power to drive
000 ohms. Under these conditions, the oscillo- most class-B modulators whose output is 500
scope may be used to observe the audio wave- watts or less. The driver transformer for cou-
form of the modulator when coupled to point pling the plates of the 6B4-G tubes to the
"A" through the 10,000 volt coupling capac- grids of the Class B stage is not shown, as
itor. it had been found more convenient to locate
When the frequency of the audio oscillator this transformer at the grids of the modulator
is advanced above 3500 cycles the output level tubes rather than in the speech amplifier. The
of the modulator as measured on the a-c volt- correct transformer step-down ratio for driving
meter should drop sharply indicating that the most class B tubes has been set down in tabular
low pass audio network is functioning properly. form by the various transformer manufacturers.
With speech waveforms and no clipping the When the driver transformer is purchased one
modulator meter will swing to approximately should be obtained which has the proper turns
150 - 200 milliamperes under 100% modula- ratio for the class B tubes to be used.
656 Speech and A. M. Equipment THE RADIO
6SJ7 6J5
+ ~K,lW
4~8~
Figure 13
PUSH-PULL 304TL CLASS AB 1 , MODULATOR
A three wire shielded cable should be used amateur transmitters. In fact, with the use of
to connect the 6B4-G tubes to the driver trans- these 304TL's the cost of heating power for
former located at the grids of the class B filaments becomes a much more significant
tubes. This cable may be any reasonable figure than the cost of the tubes.
length up to 2 5 or 30 feet. Any of the modula- The 304TL is ideally suited for use as a
tor configurations shown in figure 8 may be modulator for a high-power amateur transmit-
driven with this simple speech amplifier. ter. In fact, due to the relatively low amplifi-
cation factor of the tube (about 12 ) the
30-5 500-Watt 304TL may even be used as a class A triode
304TL Modulator Heising modulator. Such an arrangement is
practicable for modulating a medium-power
Ordinarily, few amateurs would be inclined transmitter when a 1500 to 2000 volt plate
to design the high-level stages of their trans- supply is available.
mitters around type 304TL tubes. Although the The class AB, operating characteristics of
304TL unquestionably is an excellent tube, the 304TL tube are shown in figure 14. An in-
with its extremely high transconductance and teresting fact to be observed is that under
power sensitivity, its price and capabilities these conditions no grid driving power is re-
are in excess of those required even for a kilo- quired by the 304TL tubes. It is necessary
watt amateur transmitter. But with enormous only to supply the correct amount of grid driv-
supplies of these tubes available at a relative- ing voltage. The amounts shown may easily
ly low price on the surplus market it becomes be obtained from a single 6]5 tube, and the
economical to consider their use in high-power usual push-pull triode driver stage for the high
powered modulator may be eliminated. A suit-
TABLE I able modulator-driver unit which will deliver
304TL OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS, CLASS ABI 500 watts of audio from two 304TL tubes op-
(NO DRIVING POWER REQUIRED)
erating class AB, is shown in figure 13.
D.C. PLATE VOLTS 1500 2000 2.&00 3000
The filaments of the 304TL tubes may be
!;RID BIAS * -118 -170 -2.30 -290 connected either in series or parallel for either
ZERO-SIGNAL
PLATE CURRENT 270 200 180 130
5 volt, 50 ampere operation, or 10 volt, 25 am-
(MA.) pere operation. To conserve filament power
MAX. SIGNAL
PLATE CURRENT 572 548 483 444
during standby periods, the filaments of the
('-'A.)** 304TL tubes may be either turned off, or may
PLATE-TO-PLATE
LOAD (OHMS)
2.540 5300 8500 12000 be dropped to one-half voltage by means of a
PEAK A.F. dropping resistor in the primary circuit of the
GRID VOLTS 118 170 230 290
(PER TUBE) filament transformer. This resistor may be
MAX. POWER
258 490 flO 730
shorted out during periods of transmission by
OUTPUT (WATTS)
a small relay actuated by the transmitting con-
*ADJUST TO GIVE STATED ZERO-SIGNAL PLATE CURRENT trol system.
** VALUES GIVEN FOR SINE-WAVE MODULATION. FOR VOICE
WAVE FORMS, MAXIMUM CURRENT WILL BE APPROXIMATELY
The gain of the speech amplifier is suffi-
TWO-THIRDS SINE-WAVE VALUES. cient so that an inexpensive crystal micro-
Figure 14 phone may be used with the modulator. The
HANDBOOK 15-Watt Clipper-Amplifier 657
12AX7 6AL5 12AU7 6B4-G Tz
FILS.
T1- 450-0-450 VOLTS AT 105 MA.
CHICAGO TRANSFORMER PSR-105
T3 -125 V. AT 15 MA.
STANCOR PS-8415
g
CHICAGO TRANS. LPF-2
Ll- 12 HI 150MA.
CHICAGO TRANS. RC-12150 2.A. Tl T31j
SR-50MA. REPLACEMENT TYPE'. [f3AG ~ 2 .
SELENIUM RECTIFIER ~>-..---~-------------_J
11ov.rv
----~------------------------~
GND.
Figure 15
SCHEMATIC, 15 WATT CLIPPER-AMPLIFIER
"phone-c.w." switch is connected so as to by R,, in the grid circuit of the second section
short the modulation transformer and to open of the 12AX7. A low pass filter having a 3500
the filament circuit of the 304TL tubes during cycle cut-off follows the 6AL5 clipper stage,
c-w operation. with an output of 5 volts peak audio signal
under maximum clipping conditions. A double-
30-6 A 15-Watt triode 12AU7 cathode follower phase-inverter
follows the clipper stage and delivers a 125
Clipper - Amplifier volt r.m.s. signal to the push-pull grids of the
The near-ultimate in "talk power" can be 6B4-G audio driver tubes. The 6B4-G tubes
obtained with low level clipping and filtering operate at a plate potential of 3 3 0 volts and
combined with high level filtering. Such a have a -68 volt bias voltage developed by a
modulation system will have real "punch," small selenium rectifier supply applied to their
yet will sound well rounded and normal. The grid circuit. An audio output of 15 watts is de-
speech amplifier described in this section veloped across the secondary terminals of the
makes use of low level clipping and filtering class B driver transformer with less than 5 per
and is specifically designed to drive a pair of cent distortion under conditions of no clipping.
push-pull 810 modulators such as shown in A 5U4-G and a choke input filter network pro-
Section Three. vide unusually good voltage regulation of the
high voltage plate supply.
Circuit The schematic of the speech
Description amplifier-clipper is shown in Amplifier The clipper-amplifier may be
figure 15. A total of six tubes, Construction built upon the same chassis as
including a rectifier are employed and the unit the power supply, provided
delivers 15 watts of heavily clipped audio. the low level stages of the amplifier are spaced
A 12AX7 tube is used as a two stage mi- away from the power transformers and filter
crophone pre-amplifier and delivers approxi- chokes of the supply. All capacitors and resis-
mately 20 volts ( r.m.s.) audio signal to the tors of the audio section should be mounted as
6ALS series clipper tube. The clipping level close to the respective sockets as is practical. For
is adjustable between 0 db and 15 db by clip- minimum hum pickup, the filament leads to the
ping control, R,. Amplifier gain is controlled low level stages should be run in shielded braid.
658 Speech and A M. Equipment THE RADIO
Those resistors in the 12AU7 phase inverter tested and is connected with the modulator,
plate circuit and the grid circuit of the 6B4-G R, should be set so that it is impossible to over-
tubes should be matched to achieve best phase modulate the transmitter regardless of the set-
inverter balance. The exact value of the paired ting of R1. The gain control ( R1) may then be
resistors is not important, but care should be adjusted to provide the desired level of clip-
taken that the values are equal. Random re- ping consistent with the setting of R,.
sistors may be matched on an ohmmeter to find
two units that are alike in value. When these 30-7 A 200-Watt
matched resistors are soldered in the circuit, 811-A De-luxe Modulator
care should be taken that the heat of the sol-
dering iron does not cause the resistors to One of the most popular medium power r-f
shift value. The resistors should be held firm- amplifier stages consists of a single tetrode
ly by the lead to be soldered with a long nose tube, such as the 4-125A, 813, or 7094 oper-
pliers, which will act as a heat-sink between ating at a plate potential of 1200- 1700 volts
the soldered joint and the body of the resistor. and a plate current of 150-275 milliamperes.
If this precaution is taken the two phase m- Such an amplifier requires a minimum of r-f
verter outputs will be in close balance. driving power, allows an input of 300 to 400
watts, and yet employs power supply com-
Adjustment of When the wiring of the ponents that are relatively modest in cost. The
the Speech speech amplifier has been 5-db signal increase between a 300 watt trans-
Amplifier completed and checked, the mitter and a 1000 watt transmitter is very
unit is ready to be tested. expensive when one considers the additional
Before the tubes are plugged in the amplifier, cost of modulator and power supply equipment.
the bias supply should be energized and the Additional economy may be achieved if
voltage across the 600 ohm bleeder resistor the modulator and final amplifier are operated
should be measured. It should be -68 volts. from the same power supply. The new series of
If it is not, slight changes in the value of the Chicago-Standard plate transformers provide
series resistor, R,, should be made until the voltage ranges in the 1000 to 1500 volt re-
correct voltage appears across the bleeder re- gion and are well suited for the combination
sistor. The tubes may now be inserted in the of this modulator and the aforementioned r-f
amplifier and the positive and cathode voltages tubes. Within this voltage range, the 811-A
checked in accordance with the measurements triode is an excellent choice for the modulator
given in figure 15. After the unit has been tubes. Zero bias operation may be had up to
Figure 16
REAR VIEW OF
811-A MODULATOR
Modulator tubes and voltage
regulator are at right with
high level filter at center of
chassis. Plug-in speech am-
plifier is to left of clipper.
Gain and clipping controls
are atop the small chassis.
6L6/5881 is used as cathode
follower driver stage lor
modulator.
HANDBOOK 811-A Modulator 659
57K
lOOK R2 CLIPPER
~ r--NV----11 - - -
1W
+ + 1.BK
= ~ v. li2-
L _______ _ IHC+--''-+.----ct--cc-~--:-~-cc--1co ~L g_ __ - --- - -- - _j
NOTES 502 $04 CONNECTIONS
I-ALL RESISTORS l/2 WATT UNLESS
OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
1-}6.3 V. ""V OUT
2-
2-SW!TCH S1 (PHONE-CW) SHOWN
S04 IN PHONE POSITION. 6L6GB/5B81 3- GROUND, B-
12
3-RYl SHOWN ENERGIZED.
4-}
s-
1!5 V "\...IN
6- 8+350 v; TO EXCITER
7
-} CW-PHON SWITCH
a-
9- GROUND, 8-
10-}
11
_ RY1 CONTROL
'+---,--i<J)+HV OUT T0
AMPLIFIER
Figure 17
SCHEMATIC, 200 WATT 811-A MODULATOR
T,-1 :3 lnterstage Transformer. Stancor A-53
T:-"Poly-pedance" class B driver transformer. 2:1 ratio. Stancor A-4761
T,_200 watt modulation transformer. 9 K primary. SK secondary. Stancor A-3829
T ,-400 - 0 - 400 volts, 250 ma., 6.3 volts, 5 amperes. Stan cor PC-8413
T,-6.3 volts, 10 amperes. Stancor P-6308
CH,-4 henry, 250 ma. Stancor C-1412
1.,-l.ow pass filter, 3000 cycle cut off. Chicago LPF-2.
1.:-"Sp/atter" filter, 300 ma. Stancor C-2317
RY,--SPDT relay, high voltage insulation, 115 volt coil. Leach # 1723 with 374 coils, or equivalent
1250 volts, and only -4.5 volts is required stages of R-C amplification driving a 6AL5
for 1500 volt operation. Bias voltage may be speech clipper tube. A 3 500 cycle low pass
obtained from flashlight batteries or other low filter follows the clipper, removing all high
impedance source. order products of clipping action. A parallel-
Modulator The 200 wa~t de-luxe modulator connected 12AU7 follows the filter and is
Circuit is illustrated in figures 16 and transformer-coupled to a 5881 (616-GB) ca-
18 and the schematic is given thode follower driver stage. The impedance of
in figure 17. The low level audio stages are the cathode circuit of the driver stage is ex-
similar to those of the speech amplifier shown tremely low; it provides an excellent driving
in Section Six. A 12AX7 is employed as two source for the class B modulator grid circuit.
660 Speech and A. M. Equipment THE RADIO
Two 811-A tubes are employed in the class to the voltage drop across the 2D21 regulator
B stage. When operated at 1000 volts, no bias tube in the cathode circuit of the class B stage.
supply is needed. At voltages of 1200 or abov~, The plate to plate load impedance of the
approximately 9 volts of bias is required. Th1s 811-A tubes when operating at 1500 volts is
is supplied by a voltage divider composed of approximately 12,000 ohms. A multi-match
a 20K, 10 watt resistor and a 2D21 thyratron type modulation transformer may be employed
tube. When the miniature 2D21 is connected if desired, but in this case a Stancor A-3829
as a triode, it acts as a voltage regulator tube unit was used. This transformer is designed to
with a constant voltage drop of almost 9 volts match the plate-to-plate load impedance of
from plate to cathode. The tube will regulate 9,000 ohms to a secondary load of 5000 ohms.
over 300 milliamperes of current while main- With the 12,000 ohm load of the 811-A tubes,
taining a reasonably constant voltage drop a secondary load of 7,500 ohms must be used
across its terminals. The center tap of the to maintain the same primary to secondary im-
811-A filament transformer {Ts) is thus held pedance ratio. This secondary load can be ob-
at a positive potential with respect to ground. tained with a single 7094 tube operating at
Since the center tap of the 811-A driver trans- 1500 volts and 200 milliamperes of plate cur-
former ( T,) is grounded, the modulator tubes rent ( 300 watts input). Other tubes and load
are biased at a constant negative voltage equal impedances can also be used, providing the
r-f input to the modulated stage does not ex-
ceed 400 watts. For example, a 4-125A tube
operating at 2000 volts and 16 5 rna. ( 3 3 0
watts) may be modulated by this audio unit.
The secondary winding of the modulation
transformer can pass a maximum of 300 mil-
liamperes with safety.
The audio output from the 811-A stage is
passed through a high level low-pass "splatter
suppressor" which attenuates all audio fre-
quencies above 3500 cycles. The use of both
low level and high level audio filters does
much to reduce the broad sidebands and co-
channel interference that seems to be so com-
mon on the amateur phone bands.
A high voltage relay RY, is employed to
short the secondary of the modulation trans-
former and remove plate potential from the
modulator tubes for c-w operation. The relay
is actuated by the "phone-c.w." switch on the
front panel of the modulator. Other segments
of this switch turn off the modulator fila-
ments and provide extra contacts to control
auxiliary equipment.
A 350 volt supply is incorporated in the
modulator unit to power the speech amplifier
and driver stage and to provide power for
the r-f exciter stages of the transmitter. The
various power and control leads are brought
out to a multi-connector plug mounted on the
rear of the modulator deck.
Figure 18
UNDER-CHASSIS VIEW OF
811-A MODULATOR
High voltage relay is between 81!-A tube
sockets and low voltage components are at
' opposite end of chassis.
HANDBOOK 811-A Modulator 661
Modulator The modulator is constructed filter choke which is mounted above the chas-
Construction upon a steel chassis measur- sis on Y2-inch ceramic insulators. High voltage
ing 8" X 1 r X 2". A lOY;( connections to the modulator are made through
aluminum panel is bolted to the chassis with Millen 37001 safety terminals.
two mounting brackets to form a rugged as- When the wiring has been completed and
sembly. Placement of the major parts may be checked, the 12AX7, 6AL5, 12AU7, 5881,
seen in figures 16 and 18. The modulation and 5 V 4-GB tubes should be inserted in their
transformer T, and the 811-A tubes occupy sockets and the speech amplifier is plugged
the right end of the chassis, balanced in weight into the modulator receptacles. The vertical
by the power transformer T, and modulator amplifier of an oscilloscope should be connect-
filament transformer T, at the opposite end of ed to one grid terminal of the 811-A stage.
the chassis. The center space is taken by the Plate voltage of the 5881 should be approxi-
plug-in speech amplifier, the high level splat- mately 3 70 volts. A low level 1000 cycle tone
ter filter assembly and the 5881 driver stage. (approximately 0.0 5 volts, r.m.s.) is applied
The speech amplifier is constructed as a sep- to the amplifier input. The output level of the
arate unit on a small aluminum utility box speech amplifier is controlled by the setting
measuring 5" x 3" x 2". The bottom of the of the clipping control R, and the audio gain
box holds two male plugs which match two is controlled by potentiometer R, in the grid
receptacles mounted on the amplifier chassis. circuit of the 12AX7. The clipping control
The speech amplifier, therefore, may be wired should be set so that not more than 60 volts
and tested as a separate unit. Clipping and r.m.s. is developed from one 811-A grid to
audio level controls are mounted atop the ground. The modulator tubes may now be
amplifier box as long usage of clipper circuits plugged in their sockets. A 7K, 200 watt re-
has proven that these controls need not be re- sistor should be placed between the "H.V.
adjusted once they are properly set. Out" and "H.V. In" terminals, serving as a
The phone-c.w. switch, relay RY-, and var- dummy load, and 1500 volts applied to the
ious small components are mounted beneath latter terminal. With no audio signal the
the chassis (figure 18) . The input receptacle resting plate current of the modulator stage
for the speech amplifier box is located adja- should be approximately 15 milliamperes,
cent to the microphone receptacle on the front kicking up to about 160 milliamperes under
panel of the modulator making the intercon- full output conditions. Final adjustment of the
necting lead less than two inches long. Also clipping control may be made when the mod-
placed beneath the chassis are the filter choke ulator is placed in use with the r-f section of
for the low voltage supply and the various by- the transmitter. Potentiometer R, is then ad-
pass and filter capacitors. justed to limit the peak modulation level under
sme wave modulation to approximately 90%.
Wiring and Testing The speech amplifier
the Modulator should be wired first.
The small resistors and
capacitors are mounted either between the tube
ru
T1
DRi~ER
socket pins, or between terminals of small
TD
phenolic tie-point strips. Transformer T, is MODULATOR
STAGE LOAD
fastened within the amplifier box and is wired 11
in the circuit after all other wiring is com- ---~""""'""-
pleted. Plugs PL, and PL, are mounted on the
V2
bottom portion of the box; the plug pins are
wired to the proper points of the speech am-
plifier with short lengths of wire that allow Figure 19
the bottom plate to be removed for inspection ZERO BIAS TETRODE MODULATOR
and testing without the necessity of unsolder- ELIMINATES SCREEN AND BIAS
ing any connections to the plugs. SUPPLIES
The modulator chassis should be wired next.
All leads to T,, R Y -1, and the low pass filter Low driving power and simplicity are key
features of this novel modulator. Tubes rang-
should be carefully insulated from the chassis. ing in size from 6AQS's to 813's may be
employed in this circuit.
High voltage ''5000 volt test" cable should be
employed for these connections. The capaci- T ,-Class B driver transformer
T,-Modulation transformer
tors that make up the high level audio filter VI, v,-6AQ5, 6L6, 807, 803, 813, etc.
are mounted directly to the terminals of the R,, R,-Not used with 803 and 813
662 Speech and A. M. Equipment
803'5 supply is required. The drive requirements
are low and the tubes operate with excellent
plate circuit efficiency. The series grid resis-
8-WATT
SPEECH
I Zs=6 2SK
TO
MODULATOR
tors for the small tubes are required to balance
AMP.
(FIG.72) LOAD the current drawn by the two grids, but are not
needed in the case of the 80 3 and 813 tubes.
Of great interest to the amateur is the cir-
OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS
-7
v. cuit of figure 20, wherein 803 tubes are used
as high level modulators. These tubes will de-
liver 500 watts of audio in this configuration,
yet they require no screen or bias supply, and
MAX. PLATE CUR.-340 MA. ~ T3 can be driven by an 8 watt amplifier stage.
POWER OUTPUT= 510 WATTS (0?501 The use of 80 3 tubes (in contrast to 813 's)
SUPPRESSOR VOLT -:::.280-340 V. ~ ~ requires a higher level of driving power which
115 v. '\... is offset by the fact that these tubes can often
Figure 20 be purchased "surplus" for less than four dol-
lars. A pair of 6B4 tubes operating with ca-
INEXPENSIVE 500 WATT
MODULATOR USING 803 TUBES thode bias (figure 12) will suffice as a driv-
TJ- Poly-pedanceu Class B driver transform-
11 ing stage for the 803's. The power supply of
er 2: I ratio. Stancor A-476 I the speech amplifier provides high voltage for
T,-500 watt output transformer. IBK primary, the suppressors of the modulator stage.
6.25K secondary. Chicago CMS-3
T,-JO volts, 10 amperes. Stancot C-6461 Shown in figure 21 is a high level modu-
M-0-500 ma. lator using 813 tubes. A full 500 watts of
audi,o may be obtained at 2500 volts plate po-
tential. Grid driving power is 5.5 watts. A
30-8 Zero Bias single 807 operating as a cathode follower
Tetrode Modulators at 400 volts will provide sufficient drive for
the modulator stage. Plate to plate load im
Class B zero bias operation of tetrode tubes pedance for the 813's is not critical. The Chi-
is made possible by the application of the cago CMS-3 500 watt modulation transformer
driving signal to the two grids of the tubes as having a primary impedance of 18,000 ohms
shown in figure 19. Tubes such as the 6AQ5, has been used with success, although the opti-
6L6, 807, 803, and 813 work well in this mum plate load impedance of the modulator
circuit and neither a screen supply nor a bias is closer to 20,000 ohms.
TO
MODULATOR
LOAD
NOTES X X + 2500 V.
~
DRIVER STAGE, OPEFI.ATI NG VOLTS,
MEASURED TO GROUND. 1-EXACT VALUE OF 807 CATHODE RESISTOR
DEPENDS UPON RESISTANCE OF PRIMARY
i1
WINDING OF T2. ADJUST RESISTOR FOR
C4THOD BIAS OF 26.5 VOLTS1 PLATE CUR-
RENT OF 53-55 MA.
2-RMS OPERATING VOLTAGES AT MAXIMUM T4
OUTPUT SHOWN ON SCHEMATIC.
11.5V. 1'\..
Figure 21
500 WATT MODULATOR USING 813 TUBES
T,-1:3 interstage transformer. Stancor A-53
T,-"Poly-pedance" Class B driver transformer. 2:1 ratio. Stancor A-4761
T,-500 watt output transformer. IBK primary, 6.25K secondary. Chicago CMS-3
T,,-JO volts, 10 amperes, Stancor C-6461
M-0-500 ma.
350 watts of audio are obtainable from this circuit at plate potential of 2000 volts.
CHAPTER THIRTY-ONE
663
Figure 1
COMPACT
300 WATT
TRANSMITTER FOR
SIX AND TWO
METERS IS IDEAL
FOR VHF
ENTHUSIAST
The transmitter is built
in twa sections. Upper
deck contains VFO, r.f.
stages and push-pull 826
amplifier. VFO tuning
dial is at right, with
bandswitch and meter
selector switch below it.
At center ore the multi-
plier tuning controls,
with buffer and final
amplifier tuning controls
at the left.
Lower deck holds modu-
lator and power supply.
Transmitter co n t r o I
switches ore along lower
edge of the panel.
The second problem concerns the vacuum The triode tube, on the other hand, has no
tube. A combination of factors is at work in frequency of self-neutralization. The maximum
the common tube which tend to limit the ef- frequency at which neutralization is effective
ficiency of the tube as the frequency of opera- is dependent upon the inductance of the tube
tion is raised. Inter-electrode capacitance, lead leads, the electron transit time, and the inter-
inductance, transit time, and input circuit load- electrode capacitance. Rather than a point in
ing are some of the factors that cripple va- the spectrum at which the neutralization prob-
cuum tube performance in the VHF region. lems abruptly change, the neutralization point
The drop in tube operation efficiency shows of the triode tube merely grows more obscure
up in the form of plate dissipation. Reducing as the operating frequency is raised, until
the size of the vacuum tube to combat the above a certain frequency neutralization is no
various operational problems reduces its power longer possible. Fortunately, small, compact,
handling capability, since only small element inexpensive triode tubes exist that are capable
areas are then present for heat dissipation. of efficient operation well into the VHF re-
gion, and two tubes of this general type are
Tetrode vs. The combination of inter-elec- employed in this transmitter. Special circuits
Triode trade capacitance and lead in- are also used to ensure that the tubes remain in
ductance in the simple tetrode neutralization over the operating range.
tube produce a phenomenon called self-neu-
tralization. At some one particular frequency Transmitter A block diagram of the r-f
in or near the VHF region the tetrode tube is Circuitry circuitry is shown in figure 2.
inherently self-neutralized due to the circuit The transmitter is divided into
elements within the tube structure and the ex- two sections. The exciter section ( V1- V,) de-
ternal inductance of the screen-to-ground path. livers about ten watts of power over the fre-
Below this frequency normal neutralizing pro- quency ranges of 50- 54 Me. and 144- 148
cedures apply; but above this frequency special Me. A 5 763 is employed either as a crystal
neutralizing circuits are required. These circuits controlled oscillator or as a variable frequency
are usually frequency sensitive. The self-neu- oscillator, operating in the 8 - 9 Me. region.
tralizing frequency of the less expensive screen Two separate oscillator tuned circuits are em-
grid tubes usually falls between 20 - 50 Me., ployed as the tuning rates for the two bands
requiring that the tubes be re-neutralized when are different. The ''2 meter" VFO covers the
the frequency of operation is changed from range of 8.0 - 8.222 Me., and the "6 meter"
50 Me. to 144 Me., and often when the oper- VFO tunes 8.333- 9.0 Me. The tuning capaci-
ating frequency is moved about within one tors of the two circuits are ganged for tuning
of these bands. The newer external anode ease. Tubes V, and V, multiply the overall
tetrodes are free of this problem as their self- VFO range to the 48 - 54 Me. spectrum. At
neutralization frequency falls well above the this point a simple switching system permits
144 Me. amateur band. v, to drive either the intermediate amplifier
HANDBOOK 50/144 Me. Transmitter 665
V4
6360 (144-148MC.)
V1
5763 (8-0MC.)
V2.
5763 (10-18MC.)
V3
6360 (48-54MC;~~
~-lI
/ I
{j cso-s4Mc.J rr, .. ,_,,8.,c.>
'-1 I
---,
(8--9MC.) ve ( 144-148MC.) V5
I
SOMC. 826 (50-54 MC. ) 9903/5894
I
)
/
0 _......::..../..:::.----- - - - _J
V6
826
L10
(SOMC.)
826
V1
I
1-------- -2- 144 M C. _____, f+---- i 144 MC. ----+!
Figure 2
BLOCK DIAGRAM OF VHF TRANSMITTER
A-General transmitter circuit, showing operating frequencies of the various stages. Y4 is a plug-in
frequency multiplier.
B-Quarter-wave tank circuit is employed in amplifier plate configuration at 144 Me. Shorting bar
is removed for 50 Me., and C,-L, resonates at this frequency.
C-Linear half-wave tank section is employed as interstage coupler at 144 Me. Inductor L1o resonates
circuit to 50 Me.
tube y, directly for 50 - 54 Me. operation, or The power amplifier stage employs two type
via a tripler stage (V,) for 144- 148 Me. 826 tubes in push-pull. These compact triode
operation. A 9903/5894 (Vs) is employed tubes are well suited to VHF work as their
as the driver stage or the push-pull triode lead inductance is small and their inter-elec-
final amplifier. This driver tube operates as a trode capacitance is reasonably low. The tubes
straight amplifier on both bands. have adequate plate dissipation and a high re-
A unique coupling circuit, shown in figure serve of filament emission. The amplifier has
2C, is employed between the 9903/5894 and been run at one kilowatt input ( 2000 volts
the push-pull 826 stage. The plates of the at 500 milliamperes) for c.w. operation for
buffer and grids of the final stage are coupled extended periods of time without apparent
ro the ends of a loaded, half-wave 144 Me. damage to the tubes, but this practice is not
transmission line. The 50 Me. coil is placed recommended for maximum tube life.
at the electrical center of the 144 Me. line. A modified form of two band plate .circuit
Tuning capacitor c, is tapped on the line at a is employed in the amplifier stage, as shown
point which permits each circuit to be resonat- in figure 2B. A quarter-wave 144 Me. trans-
ed. Thus the combination L,A-B, L10, C, is mission line is employed, tuned to frequency
capable of tuning the 2 meter and 6 meter by "butter-fly" capacitor Cs. The "cold" end
ranges simultaneously, eliminating the need of the line is shorted by a heavy strap which
for plug-in coils or coil switching. Neutraliza- is removed for 50 Me. operation. At the latter
tion of the 9903/5894 is not required if ade- frequency, resonance is established by capaci-
quate inter-stage shielding is used. tor Cs and coil L,, which is mounted at the
TO La,
(BELOW)
-I
...,
0
:::::l
(48-54 MC.) Vl
3
()
0
144 MC.
TRIPLER I
:::::l
BOX-------,.. Vl
...,
c"""'
I
(SOMC.)
I n
B+ 270 V.
I """'
6'
~ ~ L-.f- :::::l
(8.0-8.222MC.) ( 8 . .3.33- 9. 0 MC.)
144 MC.
csi SHORTIN<G.
BAR
NOTES:
L11B
1- C:;; .00 l.J.JF, tJOO VOLT DISC
CERAMIC.
2 -ALL CAPACITORS IN OSC!LLA TOR
TUNED CIRCUirS AR SILVER M/CA.
....
3-ALL RESISTORS 1-WArT UNLESS
orHERWISE SPECIFIED.
::::1:
m
BIAS#2 (-3SV.) B+60QV, BIAS#1 (-60V.) V7
(SEE FIG. 8) (SEE FIG. 8)
Figure 3
SCHEMATIC, R-F SECTI'ON OF VHF TRANSMITTER
CzA-B-25- 25 p.p.fd. Bud LC-1661 Cs--35 p.p.fd., .024" spacing. Bud LC-1872 SzA-B-2 deck, 3 pole, 6 position rotary ceramic switch.
C:, Cs-15- 15 p.p.fd. Bud LC-1660 Czo-50 p.p.fd., .024" spacing. Bud LC-1873 PLz-Octal plug, Ampheno/
C,, c,-8- 8 p.p.fd. Bud LC-1659 Cn, C,.-J- 7 p.p.ld. See figure 13 PL:-Noval plug (9 pin) See text
0
C.-10- 10 p.p.fd. "butterfly," Johnson JJMBJJ RFC,-2.5 mh. National R-100 PL:--Octal plug, Amphenol
C 7 -35- 35 p.p.fd. Bud LC- 1667 RFC:--Ohmite Z-50 Lz-Lz.--5ee figure 12, coil table
Cs--25- 25 p.p.fd. "butterfly," B&W JCX-25E, RFC:--Ohmite Z-144 x,.x,-8.0 - 9.0 Me. crystals, type FT -243
te stator removed in each section
HANDBOOK 50/144 Me. Transmitter 667
Figure 4
REAR VIEW OF VHF TRANSMITTER
Final amplifier compartment is at right with
antenna receptacles and loading capacitors on
rear of enclosure. Ventilation holes are drilled
above 826 tubes to aid air circulation. Entire
top should be replaced with perforated ma-
terial if extended periods of operation are
encountered. Buffer compartment is to left
of large enclosure, with 9903/5894 tube
mounted in inverted position. Grid coil ( Ls,
see figure 7) plugs in holder at top of com-
partment. Grid tuning capacitor is panel driv-
en by phenolic shalt extension. The 144 Me.
multtplier box is in position behind buffer
compartment
Variable frequency oscillator is at left of
chassis, with plug-in crystals mounted on the
side. Oscillator tube V 1 can be seen in front
of enclosure. Low voltage power supply com-
ponents are in left corner of chassis.
Figure 5
CLOSE-UP OF INTERIOR OF
VHF FINAL AMPLIFIER
Two 826 triode tubes are used in unique push-
pull circuit for 50 Me. and 144 Me. operation.
Linear tank circuit is employed for 144 Me.
with removeable shorting bar in foreground.
"Butterfly 11 tuning capacitor is mounted on
ceramic insulators above linear tank and con-
nected to it by means of copper straps on rear
stator terminals. 50 Me. inductor is placed at
"cold" end of 2-meter tank.
Air is drown into enclosure through ventila-
tion holes drilled below 826 sockets. Note that
the sockets are split to reduce possibility of
flash-over.
At left of enclosure are 6360 (V-3) and
sockets SO- 1 and S0-2 for 144 Me. plug-in
frequency multiplier. The 50 Me. adapter
PL-3 is in Dloce. Oscillator tuning slugs are
seen on right side of oscillator compartment
at left. 50 Me. coil is in place atop buffer
compartment.
Figure 6
UNDER-CHASSIS
VIEW OF 300
WATT VHF
TRANSMITTER
Small 115-vo/t blower
motors for 826 tubes are
in upper /eft corner of
chassis. Buffer plate line
L,A-8 occupies left-hand
portion of chassis. All
leads are kept clear of
this area. Under-chassis
power leads are run in
shielded braid to reduce
r-f pick-up. An 11
L"-
shaped shield partition
isolates frequency doub-
ler stages from buffer
plate line. Capacitors c,
and Cs are ganged, as
are capacitors c,
and C,.
Power supply components
occupy lower right-hand
corner of chassis.
The top of the 9903/-
5894 buffer tube pro-
jects through hole at
center of chassis.
Me., and a simple link neutralization circuit Power Supply The low voltage supplies are
(L,,'. L,,) is employed to complete neutrali- and Modulator located on the rear of the r-f
zation at 50 Me. This double neutralization deck, and are diagrammed in
ciKuit results in absolute stability of opera- figure 8. A voltage doubler selenium supply
tion on both bands. Since the 50 Me. plate provides 600 volts for the 9903/5894 stage
coil L,, is decoupled from the 144 Me. tank and 270 volts for the exciter. A second sele-
circuit by the shorting bar, very little spurious nium rectifier supply provides negative bias
coupling exists between the two neutralizing for the buffer and final amplifier stages. Iso-
circuits and adjustments are simple and may lating diodes Do and D, reduce interaction be-
be made once and then fol'gotten. tween the two bias voltages.
The high voltage plate supply and modula-
The Band- A frequency shift between
tor are located on a separate deck. The supply
changing System 50 Me. and 144 Me. may provides 1500 volts at 500 rna. for the modu-
lator and final amplifier stage. The modulator
be made in a matter of
consists of a pair of 811-A tubes, operating
minutes. Switch s, selects the correct crystal or
VFO range. The plate coil La is broadly re-
sonant over the 8 - 9 Me. range and requires
no adjustment after initial setting. The 5 763
and 6360 plate circuits may be resonated no
the correct frequency for either band without
the necessity of coil changing. For 144 Me.
operation, however, it is necessary to remove
the 50 Me. plug, PL-3 (figure 7) and insert
in its place the 144 Me. tripler box (figure 3).
In addition, grid coil L, of the 9903/5894
stage must be changed. The amplifier plate
circuit shorting strap is removed for 144 Me.
Finally, the buffer and amplifier plate tank Figure 7
circuits must be resonated to frequency. CLOSE UP OF PLUG-IN
COMPONENTS
Separate antenna coupling systems are em- 144 Me. plug-in tripler box containing 6360
(V-4) is at center. Tube is mounted at angle
ployed for each band. Two coupling loops are on small plate with ventilation holes drilled
in box above top of tube. 9-pin plug PL, is
used, the 144 Me. loop (La) is coupled to made from portion of a Vector socket. 50 Me.
the quarter-wave tank circuit, and the 50 Me. plug PL, is at upper left, with 144 Me. coil
Ls directly below it. 50 Me. coil Ls is at right.
loop ( L1s) is coupled to plate coil L12. See figure 12 for coil data.
Figure 8
SCHEMATIC, LOW VOLTAGE SUPPLIES AND METER SWITCHING CIRCUIT
r,-600/300 v., c.t., 360 ma. Use 300 volt taps for voltage doubler service. Triad P-3.
T:-125 volts, 50 ma. Stancor PA-8421
T,-7.5 volts, 8 a. Stancor P-6138
T,-6.3 volts, 6 a. Stancor P-3036
0,-,-,-,_Se/enium rectifier, 100 ma., RMS input voltage: 175. Maximum peak inverse voltage: 495.
Sarkes-Tarzian Model 108
o,-,-,-Se/enium rectifier, 75 ma., RMS input voltage: 130. Sarkes-Tarzian Model 75
8, 8:-Smal/ 115-vo/t blower motor.
Sz-2 pole, 6 position rotary switch.
S0,-8 prong octal socket (see figures 3 and 10)
class B. Any one of the speech amplifiers consists of a 13" x 1 7" x 3" aluminum chassis
shown in chapter 30 is suitable for use with firmly fastened to a 121,4" x 19" relay rack
the modulator. The complete schematic of this panel. The oscillator compartment (figure 9)
deck is shown in figure 10. measures 2" x 4" x 6". The grid circuit com-
High voltage primary circuits are energized partment for the 9903/5894 is 3" x 4" x 5"
by relay RY, after the plate circuit control in size, and the plug-,in 144 Me. tripler box
switch S, is closed. External relay control ter- measures 2" x 3" x 3Yz". The push-pull 826
minals are provided for auxiliary circuits. final amplifier is enclosed in an aluminum
Metering A 0-100 d.c. mHliammeter (M,, box measuring 6" x 7" x 12". This compart-
Circuits f.igure 10) is employed to monitor ment is mounted clear of the chassis on Yz-
the low voltage circuitry. A six inch metal posts. Care must be taken to see
position switch ( S,, figure 8) places the meter that each oorner of the box makes a good elec-
across 150 ohm shunns in the plate and grid trical ground with the chassis. The plug-in
circuits as shown in the table of figure 8. tripler box fits into two tube sockets (SO-l
Meter M, reads plate current of the modulator and S0-2) placed in line with the extension
and final r-f amplifier. This meter is placed shaft that drives buffer grid capacitor Ce. The
in a high potential circuit, and should have a special sockets with 50 Me. plug PL-3 inserted
bakelite case and an insulated zero-set control. in SO-l can be seen in figure 5.
The 9903/5894 buffer socket is mounted to
Transmitter The overall layout of the r-f the "top" of the grid circuit compartment with
Construction section can be seen in figures the plate leads projecting out of matching holes
4, 5, and 6. The foundation cut in the "bottom" of the box and the chassis.
670 Transmitter Construction THE RADIO
Figure 9
INTERIOR,
HIGH STABILITY
VFO FOR VHF
TRANSMITTER
Two gang oscillator tun-
ing capacitor C1A-B is
panel mounted ot top ol
enclosure. Variable trim-
ming capacitors are at
the right, with slug-tuned
coils directly below.
Bandswitch S1A-B is
placed at bottom ol lront
panel, with crystal sock-
ets at lelt. The two leads
to oscillator tube socket
pass through large rubber
grommet mounted on
chassis deck.
Alter alignment is com-
pleted, a drop ol nail
polish is placed on end
ol coil slug to eliminate
mechanical vibration ol
slug. Note that rear ol
case is bolted in place
with eight sheet metal
~~re~~:~~s~~~idos~n;~;~~
tube socket is in lore-
ground, partially hidden
by selenium rectifier.
B+TO
866 FINAL TO
SPEECH
AMPLIFIER
10
10W
504
TO R.F. DECK, 503
01
c
Figure 10
SCHEMATIC, POWER SUPPLY AND MODULATOR DECK
r,-1775/1500 each side c.t., 625 ma., ICAS. 115/230 volt primary. Stancor P-8029
Tz-2.5 v., 10 a., IOKV insulation. Stancor P-3060
T,-6,3 v., 10 a. Stancor P-6308
1 4-300 watt "polypedance" modulation transformer. Stancor A-3898. Primary impedance J2K,
secondary impedance 6K
Ts- 11 Polypedance 11 driver transformer. Stancor A-4762
RY,-DPDT relay, 10 ampere contacts, J 15 v. a.c. coil
M,-0 - 500 ma.
M,-o- 100 ma.
S4A-B-2 pole, 3 position high voltage switch. (Found in "war surplus" BC-306A antenna tuning unit),
or equivalent
CH,-500 ma. swinging choke, 2-76 h. Stancor C-1405
B,-,-,-1 15 volt pilot lamps
so,-8 prong octal socket
movable shorting bar are mounted at the "B- Placement of the major components beneath
plus" end of the assembly. The rotor of the the chassis may be seen in figure 6. The linear
"butter-fly" capacitor is left floating and is tank circuit L,A-B runs in zig-zag fashion
panel driven through a high voltage shaft from the plate terminals of the buffer tube V,
coupling. The neutralizing capacitors (Cu, C12) to two ceramic standoff insulators mounted on
are mounted on a triangular piece of poly- the bottom plate of the power amplifier en-
styrene or other good insulating material and closure. Spacing berween the lines is held con-
placed between the tube sockets. Construction stant, and they are supported at the buffer
of these capacitors is shown in figure 13. end on two 1" ceramic insulators. The buffer
The 144 Me. antenna link "coil" is a U- tuning capacitor C, is mounted to the chassis
shaped pickup loop mounted beneath the linear berween the lines and panel driven with a
tank circuit, while the 50 Me. pickup coil is phenolic shaft. The rotor of this capacitor is
inserted between the turns of plate coil L12. not grounded. The stators of C, are connected
The single turn neutralizing coil 114 is placed to the lines with short lengths of flexible strap.
near one end of L,, as shown in the photo- Any grid current unbalance in the final am-
graph. plifier stage can be corrected by varying the
672 Transmitter Construction THE RA D I 0
6-32 BOLT
FIGURE 12
COIL CHART FOR 50-144 MC. TRANSMITTER y '
l 1- ( 144 MC. COIL) 36 T.# 24 E., 1/2" OIA. MILLEN 69046 FORM.
l9A-B- II" #-8 COPPER WIRE, OR .125" DIA. ROO, PLUS 3"' OF
1/2-"'WIOE FLEXIBLE COPPER STRAP (GRID LEAD) PLUS A- 3/8"' X 2" CERAMIC INSULATOR, TAPPED AT EACH
3/4" FLEXIBLE COPPER STRAP (PLATE LEAD). ADJUST END FOR 6-32 MACHINE SCREWS.
SPACING FOR RESONANCE. (SEE FIG. 6 FOR LA 'I' OUT)
B,C-1 118"' DIA. BRASS DISC WITH 3/8" CLEARANCE HOLE
FOR CERAMIC INSULATOR. LOWER DISC SUPPORTED ON
l10-5T.,3/4"DIA.,#14E. WIRE. ADJUST SPACING OF TURNS
FOR RESONANCE AT 50 MC. WITH C7 AT FULL CAPACITY. 3/8" CERAMIC INSULATORS. USE FLAT HEAD SCREWS.
L11A-B-10" OF 1/8" X 1 118" ALUMINUM STRAP, SPACED 3 3/8" 0- 3/8" CERAMIC INSULATORS.
CENTER TO CENTER. SHORTING BAR MADE OF SAME MAT-
E- 1 1/8'1 DISC MADE OF TWO LAYERS OF .015" THICK
ERIAL, ATTACHED 6 718" FROM PLATE END TO CENTER TEFLI)N HELD ATOP C BY CELLOPHANE TAPE.
OF BAR. PLATE PIN RECEPTACLES REMOVED FROM SOCKET
AND ATTACHED TO ENDS OF Ll NES (SEE FIGURE 5) F- TWO 6/32 NUTS PLACED UNDER STRAP. STRAP AND
NUTS SOLDERED TO BRASS PLATE, HOLE IN PLATE
l 12- (SO MC. COIL) 6 T., 1 1/4 DIA. # 6 COPPER WIRE, OR .125 11 pASSES 6/32 SOL T.
TUBING. SPACE TURNS TO RESONATE TO 50 MC. WITH
C8 NEAR FULL CAPACITY.
Figure 13
l13-19"' 0F*12.E. WIRE BENT TO "U" SHAPE TO FORM 5 X 2"
LOOP WITH 3 1/2." LEADS. PLACE UNDER l11A-B.
CONSTRUCTION OF
NEUTRALIZING CAPACITOR
l14-l TURN, 2" DIA., 10 KV. HOOKUP WIRE
FOR 826 STAGE
LIS-1 TURN, 1/2"' DIA. 1tl6 E., WITH INSULATED SLEEVING. Two capacitors are required (C11 and Ca).
PLACE AT CENTER OF l10. Capacitors have top brace plate made of
l16- 2 TURNS, 1 1/4" 01 A., 10 KV HOOKUP WIRE. polystyrene sheet or other good VHF insulat-
ing material. Plate is supported on two cer-
amic insulators which form center support for
capacitors. Plates of neutralizing capacitors
are made of brass discs. The grid disc is sup-
position of the taps on the lines until balanced ported on short ceramic insulators, and the
current is obtained. The tuning range of the plate disc is supported from the polystyrene
plate by 6-32 machine screw. Plate encircles
capacitor on 144 Me. is reduced by moving ceramic insulator with a close fit. Plate lead
the taps closer to the electrical center of rhe and two 6-32 nuts are soldered to top plate.
Mounting screw passes through this assembly,
line. and also through hole drilled in fop plate.
After capacitors have been adjusted, top plate
An "L" -shaped shield plate passes around is eemented to center ceram1c insulator with
the edge of tripler capacitor C.-Cs to shield the clear nail polish to retain adjustment.
low power stages from the buffer plate lines.
The under-chassis shielding is completed when 17" x 3", as shown in figure 11. The modu-
a bottom plate is bolted to the chassis. lator and rectifier tubes are placed near the
The power supply section occupies the rear front panel, with the modulation transform-
portion of the chassis. High voltage rectifiers er and power transformer to the rear of
D,.,.,., are mounted above the deck (figure the chassis. The swinging choke is placed be-
4) and the diodes of the bias supply are tween the tubes at the front-center of the
mounted below the chassis. chassis. Smaller components are mounted be-
Figure 9 shows the interior of the VFO neath the chassis. High voltages are applied to
compartment. The two oscillator coils are the transmitter by primary relay RY,, con-
mounted on the side of the box, across from trolled by switch S, and an optional external
the four crystal sockets. The trimmer capacitors relay control circuit.
are mounted above their respective coils. The
Transmitter The tuned circuits of the trans-
grid and cathode leads to oscillator tube V,
Adjustment mitter can be set to their pro-
pass through a lar,ge rubber grommet mounted
per operaJting range with the
in the bottom of the enclosure.
aid of a grid-dip oscillator. All r-f tubes must
The Power and The power s u p p 1 y is be in their sockets. Coil L, is set to 8.5 Me.,
Modulator Deck mounted upon a steel and circuit C-L, is adjusted to 17 Me. with
chassis measuring 13" x c, set at half-capacity. The 7 p.p.fd. trimmer
HANDBOOK De Luxe All-Band Transmitter 673
Figure 14
DE-LUXE STATION
FOR THE DX MAN
Employes VFO-controlled,
bandswitching, Phone-CW
transmitter running up to
500 watts.
This compact, all-band
transmitter employs a
7094 tetrode in a pi-net-
work amplifier, modulat-
ed by 811-A's. Clickless 1
break-in keying is usea
for c.w., and speech
clipping and limiting are
employed for AM phone.
Modulator and power
supply are in the rack
at left, and entire r-f
section is in ri~ththand
rack. High stab11ity VFO
ensures drift-free fre-
quency control. Transmit-
ter is designed for max-
imum harmonic suppres-
sion and is virtually TVI-
proof
674 Transmitter Construction THE RADIO
Vi V3 V4 Vs ANT.
t
(3.5-30MC.)
t
(3.5-30 ;aI
e
L--------~---
e
-- _ _ _J
V7 l V6
12AU7 6AL5
V12
811-A
Vs V9 V10 V11
12AX7 6AL5 12AU7
MIC.
L.V.
115/230V."v
Figure 15
BLOCK DIAGRAM OF ALL-BAND 500 WATT TRANSMITTER
R-f section employs bandswitching exciter for coverage of 10, 15, 20, 40, and 80 meter bands. Variable
frequency oscillator operates in 1.7 Me. region to achieve maximum isolation, Tuning and antenna
loading are aided by 6ALS vacuum tube voltmeter monitoring output of amplifier stage.
Low level speech clipping and filtering, combined with high level audio filter imports "punch" to phone
signal, yet holds sidebands to a minimum. Single high voltage supply powers modulator and final amplifier.
dipping and dickless, break-in keying are m- The RCA 7094 beam power tube is em-
corporated in the transmitter. ployed in the final amplifier stage. This com-
A high stability variable frequency oscilla- pact tube has high perveance and high power
tor is employed for frequency control, the dial gain. It can be operated at full input to 60
of which is directly calibrated for each band. Me., and has a maximum plate dissipation of
Band changing is a simple operation and may
125 watts. In addition, it has triple base-pin
be accomplished in a few seconds.
connections for the screen grid to permit good
Transmitter Circuitry A block diagram of the r-f grounding and large plate radiating fins
and Layout transmitter is given in for effective cooling. The compact size makes
figure 15. Nineteen it especially effective in the high frequency
tubes are used in the equipment: seven in the portions of the communication spectrum. Driv-
r-f section, six in the audio section, and s1x m ing requirements are modest and permit the
the power supply. use of a simplified bandswitching exciter.
Figure 16
VFO-EXCITER DECK CONTAINS
ALL IMPORTANT OPERATING
CONTROLS
Law level r-f stages are built upon 8"xl7"x2"
aluminum chassis. Keyer timing potentiometer
R, is at left, with excitation potentiometer
R,, contra/ switch s,, and bandswitch s, in
line, left ta right. VFO dial is centered on the
panel.
Output connector P1 is mounted on polystyrene
r,late atop shielded enclosure at right. Shield-
ng is made from Reynold's 11Do-it-yourself11
perforated aluminum sheet.
V2. V4
I - - - - - - - - -v,- - - -I 6AC7 2E26
RF OUTPUT
TOP-A
:X
>-
z
0
m
:fc I
+300V.
2K
iOW 0
I
+
L- - - - --1--.".-~!'.-----'1',,-1_0_1_-- J
50K
4W
7K
tOW 0
4 - - t - - - t - - ' PL 1 MIN.--- MA.X.
GAl D DRIVE ;ill;
6.3V. 15K
V7
12AU7 STANDBY
(B)
TUN (C}~(A) TRANSMIT
0
Cl)
NOTES'
1-C =.01JJF.1
600 V. CERAMIC CAPACITOR.
2-ALL RESISTORS 1-WATT UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. r
s:::::
~c X
Cl)
)>
TO VFO TO 6AC7,
AND 6Ac;7, 2E26 I
T2AU7 ~ A B OJ
KEY
0
JACK :::::1
IIH o._
~ c
-I
.....
SOs 0
2 3 4 5 6 7 10 , 12 13 14 15 :::::1
"-v---' -105V. KEY TOP-A TeStA T0115VJV TO P~A TO PRJ. B+370V. METER Vl
6.3V.
Figure 17
SCREEN
CHOKE
(PHON-CW) COMMON SCREEN RELAY,RY4
CONTROL CKT.
(SEE FIG. 23 J
3
SCHEMATIC, EXCITER DECK OF ALL-BAND TRANSMITTER
c,-300 ppfd. Bud CE-2008 dual beating capacitor L:~-21 turns #22 e., l/2" diam., V2" long on National XR-SO form
C.-300 ppfd. silver mica capacitor. Vary tot desired frequency coverage. S,A-8-C-D-Two pale, 6 position decks (Centtalab PA-3) with Centtalab PA-301
c,-2000 ppfd. High accuracy capacitor, tolerance 1%, temperature coeUicient index assembly.
zero, plus or minus 10 p.p.m. Centralab 950-202 SzA-B-C-3 pole, 3 position rotary switch
C 4, Cs, c.-25 ppfd. midget variable padding capacitor, ceramic RYJ-DPDT relay, 7,000 ohm d.c. coil
L,-19 turns #20 e. wire, tapped S turns from ground end. Wound on ceramic RY:~-DPDT relay, liS-volt a.c. coil
:h~'::' ~~~v~:aN~ti~;at~::lr;~;m~he winding by interwinding # 28 e. wire, PC-52 ohm, 1-watt carbon resistor, wound with 3 turns #20 e. wire
RFC,-2.5 mh. choke National R-100
L:-30 turns #28 dsc., V2" diam., V2" long on National XR-SO form RFC:-VHF choke. Ohmite Z-144
Figure 18
INTERIOR OF VFO
SHOWING
PLACEMENT OF
MAJOR.
COMPONENTS
The VFO is built upon
two !Is-inch dural plates,
one forming the base
and the other forming
the front of the oscillator
enclosure. Inductor L,
and padding capacitors
are mounted to front
wall, and the variable
tuning capacitor is bolt-
ed to base. Oscillator
tube (V -1) projects from
far wall of enclosure to
remove as much heat
from tuned circuit as
possible. Entire VFO is
mounted upon miniature
shock mounts and dial Is
attached to VFO unit,
rather than to rack
panel. 6AG7 and 2E26
tubes are at /eft, with
2E26 plate choke and
5KV coupling capacitor
in foreground.
The variable frequency oscillator and exci- Three tubes are employed in the multiplier
ter stages are built upon one chassis deck, as and d1:1iver stages of the transmitter. The first
shown in figures 16, 18, 19, and 20. The 6AC7 doubler stage ( V,) operates into a
complete schematic of this unit is given in broadly resonant slug-tuned coil L,. When
figure 1 7. The variable oscillator covers the tuning the exciter unit, this coil is peaked at
range of 1.75 Me.- 1.85 Me., permitting full 3.6 Me. The stage will then deliver substan-
coverage of all amateur bands except the ex- tially constant ou~put over the mnge from 3.2
treme top of the 28 Me. band, and the top to 4.0 Me. The 2E26 stage (V.) operates as
portion of the 80 meter band. Readjustment an amplifier on the 3.5 Me. band and as a
of the oscillator padding capacitor provides doubler on the 7 Me. band, driven directly
complete coverage of these segments, if de- from the 6AC7 buffer-doubler.
sired. The VFO consists of a 6U8 pentode-
triode ( V1) operating as a "hot cathode" oscil-
lator and triode cathode follower. Extremely
high-C is employed in the tuned circuit of the
VFO to obtain a good order of stability. A
2000 /L/Lfd. precision ceramic capacitor Ca,
forms the large portion of the tuning capaci-
tance, and the coil L, is wound upon a ceramic
form having a very low temperature coeffi-
cient. The cathode follower stage provides
excellent circui't isolation for the oscillator,
combined with a minimum of plate circuit
loading. Figure 18 shows the layout of the ma-
jor osciHator components. The circuit is built
upon an Ys" thick aluminum plate, bolted to
a small panel of the same material. The sides,
back, and top of the oscillator enclosure are
made of aluminum sheet. The complete unit Figure 19
is mounted upon miniature rubber shock REAR VIEW OF EXCITER DECK
mounts. The VFO dial is firmly affixed to the Multiplier tubes are in the foreground. Ad-
justment holes lor the multiplier trimmer ca-
enclosure and actually does not make physical pacitors are on side of chassis. !12 -inch angle
contact with the panel at all. The frequency stock is run around chassis and panel to form
foundation to which the perforated enclosure
determining unit is thereby protected from jolts is attached. Keyer tube V, is placed in rear
corner. Potentiometer R, and auxiliary key
and jars which might cause a "warble" in the jack are on chassis wall below keyer tube.
transmitter frequency. The r-f output from the Short lead extends from 2E26 blocking ca-
pacitor up to connecting plug P, mounted on
cathode follower is 5 volts, r.m.s. enclosure.
De Luxe All-Band Transmitter 677
~~~
B+ TO VFO
V F0 >------...."+-
4
6AC7
~
lT-- +
L
1.50 V. REc;.
47K 100
l-c
+300V.
SWITCH 52
528 A= TRANSMIT RY5
B =STANDBY
C=TUNE
}TO METER
-105 v.
NOTES'
RELAY CONTACTS RY3A
NORMALLY OPEN.
RELAY CONTACTS RY3B
NORMALLY CLOSED.
Figure 21
KEYER AND CONTROL CIRCUITS
Clickless, break-in keying is provided by this simple control circuit. See text tor full details of operation
678 Transmitter Construction THE RADIO
Figure 22
500 WATT POWER
AMPLIFIER HAS
SYMMETRICAL
PANEL LAYOUT
The 7094 amplifier stage
Is enclosed in a separate
deck. Plate milliammeter
is at lett, with 01 d.c.
milliammeter at right
which may be inserted in
various power leads in
exciter or amplifier.
Large center knobs are
(lett) pi-network switch
and (tight) main ampli-
fier tuning control.
Controls across the bot-
tom are (lett to right):
Pi-network loading ca-
pacitor, auxiliary pi-net-
work capacitor switch,
grid circuit tuning ca
pacitor, and meter
switch. Pi-network switch
5 4 is ganged with grid
turret switch s, elimin-
ating one panel control.
but will return to a stand-by position after the the high voltage primary circuit relay cir-
keying action has been completed. The "turn- cuit. This circuit may be rendered inoper-
off" time may be varied to suit the operator's ative on "standby" position by switch S,B,
taste. For phone operation, the time delay cir- enabling VFO to be used for frequency
cuit is eliminated, and the push-to-talk circuit check or "spotting" purposes.
actuates the keyer and control relays directly. 3-Key is released .
The whole sequence may be over-ridden and Right-hand section of V, cuts off immed-
manual operation restored by means of a "man- iately. Left-hand section draws 1 rna. and
ual-automatic" switch on the power supply cuts off 6AC7 buffer tube. The 1N92 is
chassis. Finally, a "transmit- tune- standby" back-biased by rise in 12AU7 plate volt-
switch S,A removes screen voltage from the age, keeping charge on 40 fLfd. capacitor.
final amplifier stage for tune-up purposes. Relay R y, remains closed until capacitor
Referring to figure 21, the sequence of op- is discharged through shunting resistances.
eration is as follows: Relay then opens, turning off high voltage
supplies of transmitter. "Release" delay is
1-Key up, switch S,B on "transmit." controlled by potentiometer R,_
The right-hand section of the keyer tube 4-Phone Operation
V, is cut off by the negative bias on the Switch s, on modulator deck is closed for
cathode. Potentiometer R, is adjusted for phone operation, placing the coil of relay
1 rna. current through 15K resistor to R y, in the circuit. When the key is closed,
ground ( -15 volts to chass,is at point A). or the press-to-talk circuit activated, R YsA
6AC7 ( y,) is cut off. shorts out the time delay circuit of RY,,
2-Key is depressed. and at the same time R YsB removes a
Right- hand section of V, conducts heavily short across the screen modulation choke
and cathode voltage rises quickly, cutting in the final amplifier.
off left section of V, and removing block- Exciter plate voltage is obtained from the
ing bias of 6AC7 ( v,). Plate current of modulator power supply (See Chapter 30,
right-hand section of v, operates RY, and figure 17), and bias and amplifier voltage are
charges 40 fLfd. capacitor through 1N92 derived from the main power supply, located
diode. The relay closes, placing B-plus on a separate chassis. The plate relay RY, may
voltage on oscillator stage and operating be actuated by switch s, or by the keyer circuit.
HANDBOOK De Luxe All-Band Transmitter 679
V5 001
7094 SKY L5 J2.
J1
~?G~x..~1 i7ER (o}--...,---_,.--t---<hfl.,..,'t-;~
53
RFC2.
NOTES
1-C =.001,
600V. CERAMIC
CAPACITOR.
2-ALL RESISTORS T-WATT
UNLESS OTHERWISE B+1SOOV. A B
SPECIFI0.
Figure 23
SCHEMATIC, 500 WATT POWER AMPLIFIER
C,-150 JLJLid.
C.--220 JLJLid., 1250 volt fixed mica capacitor
C.--Disc-type neutralizing capacitor. National NC-800 or equivalent.
CI0---150 JLJLid., 3000 volt. Johnson 150E30
Cu-900 JLJLid. Two gang broadcast capacitor (see text).
c,.--Three .001, SKY ceramic capacitors. Centralab type 850. Place one capacitor on each screen terminal.
L,-composed of two coils mounted on back ol s, and connected in series.
80 meter coil: 28 turns, 1" diam., 1%" long. 40 meter tap at 18th turn from "cold" end.
20 meter coil: 7 turns, 1" diam., 1V~" long. 15 meter tap at 4 turns, 10 meter tap at 3 turns from
"cold" end. Adjust taps with grid-dip oscillator.
Ls-S,-Borker & Williamson #3850, 500 watt turret lor 10-80 meters.
~FC~~~~ ::,o~~,c~o~~~i~~~i~~~j'W:rWtch, progressively shorting. Centralab PA-2042.
RFC:~-Heavy duty choke lor 3-30 Me. range, 500 ma. Raypar RL-102
RFC4-VHF Choke, Ohmite Z-144, or equivalent
PC-50 ohm composition resistor wound with 3 turns # 20 e.
T,-6.3 volts ot 4 a. Stancor P-4019
CHr---7 h. at 50 ma. Stancor C-1707
RYs--SPST sensitive reloy, with 1 milliampere d.c. coil
M,-o - 500 d.c. milliammeter with insulated zero-set and bakelite case.
8-Small 115-volt a.c. blower motor.
The Amplifier The schematic of the ampli- to each of the screen socket terminals. A VHF
Stage fier is shown in figure 23, and parasitic choke (PC) is included in the lead
various layout photographs are to the control grid of the tube. As a result of
given in figures 22, 24, 25, and 26. Par- these precautions, the amplifier is completely
ticular attention is given to TVI-reduction stable over the whole operating range.
measures in the construction of rhe unit. A A sensitive relay R y, is incorporated in the
single 7094 beam power tube is used in a pi- screen circuit to protect the tube under condi-
network circuit. The grid circuit ( L.-C,) is tions of low plate potential. The relay will
common to the plate circuit of the 2E26 and open the screen circuit when the plate poten-
is capable of complete frequency coverage by tial is removed from the amplifier stage. By
viDtue of the tapped coil assembly shown in far the most frequent type of damage to a
the under-chassis view. Bridge neutralization tetrode tube is caused when full screen volt-
is employed to achieve maximum stability. age is applied in the absence of plate voltage.
Variable capacitor Co and the grid bypass ca- The screen relay protects the tube from this
pacitor c8 form two legs of the bridge. type of damage. Self-modulation of the screen
To take advantage of the triple base-pin is accomplished by an iron core choke CH, in
connections to the screen of the 7094 three the screen circuit. This choke is shorted out
separate low inductance bypass capacitoDs (C,,) by relay RY,B (figure 21) for c.w. operation.
are used in the screen ciocuit, one attached A pi-network configuration is used in the
680 Transmitter Construction THE RADIO
866-A CHt
3S K
sow
~
sow
866-A +-------(] B-
270 SOe
1 N92 2 w 082 -105 v.
20 K
..,-w 2
GNO
} 6.3 II.
4
} 11511./"V
Figure 28
SCHEMATIC, TRANSMITTER POWER SUPPLY
c,, C.-Bulkhead type, 0.1 Jlfd. 600 volt capacitor. Sprague "Hypass," or equivalent
CH,-10 henry at 300 ma. Chicago R-103
RFC-"Hash" suppression choke. Millen 77866
RY 4-DPDT relay, 20 amp. contacts, 115 v. a-c coil
SO,....-Eight pin receptacle, Cinch-Jones
T,-1710/1430 each side c.t., 300 ma., CCS. Chicago P-1512
1 2-2.5 v., 10 a., 10 KV insulation. Stancor P-3060
Ts-125 v., 50 ma., 6.3 v., 2a. Stancor PA-8421
pacitor C is adjusted for correct grid current tors of the right-hand section of keyer tube
across the 21 Me. band. As a last step, the V,. The plate load resistor is made up of a
bandswitch is set to 20 meters, the VFO tuned 15K and a 10K resistor. The 10K resistor may
to 14.2 Me. and capacitor Co adjusted for uni- be removed and a 10K relay coil may be in-
form grid drive across the 20 meter band. serted in its place if an extra relay is desired
The consistency of grid drive across the for operation of auxiliary circuits. Spring ten-
various amateur bands is controlled by the sion of relay RY, may be varied for optimum
shunt resistors placed across coils L, and L,. relay operation after the circuit has been ad-
The lower the value of these resistors, the more justed.
uniform is the grid drive across the various Exciter keying should be relatively soft as
bands. At the same time, the grid current of the addition of the amplifier stage will sharp-
the 2E26 stage drops as these resistors are en it to some extent. The 0.1 JLfd. waveform-
lowered in value. The values given in the sche- ing capacitor in the bias return lead of the
matic give good results on all bands, since 2E26 may be increased in value to soften the
the grid current of the 2E26 may vary over exciter keying to compensate for the sharpen-
a 2: 1 ratio across an amateur band with little ing action of the class-C amplifier following
change in output from the stage. the keyed stage. In actual practice, the keying
Keying of the exciter is smooth and click- of the exciter should be adjusted so that dots
less. Buffer keying is controlled by the ad- run together when sent on a bug at a rate of
justment of potentiometer R,. The buffer about 25 w.p.m.
should turn on before the 2E26 stage ,and re- The keyer may be disabled if it is desired
main on after the 2E26 has been cut-off. Time to make adjustments to the r.f. section of the
delay before the transmitter is turned off after exciter. Keyer tube V, is removed from the
keying is controlled by potentiometer R,. Cur- socket and pins 1 and 7 are grounded. Relay
rent flowing through relay coil RY, may be RY, is then held closed by placing a piece of
varied by changing the two plate load resis- cardboard under the back contacts.
HANDBOOK De Luxe All-Band Transmitter 683
PL7 PL4
R.F. AMPLIFIER MODULATOR
12345678 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
I' Yl I~ ~ ? ?? 'I
l't.!~
>--t-'
li ~
,---;::
'-
I f-o
1
~~k~ f- __, 4
__, 3
.,.
r 2
P~E R
1
SUPPL y
PL 8
I
I1 b I I1 A A ,I
2. 3 4 s e 8 9 10 11 1213 14 15
EXCITER EXCITER
Ple Pls
NOTE: ;a~o~~Af-t~ir~:~~~:':i;:::r:RE
GROUND LEAD.
@ SFIG.17{
AND 21. S2B
~Y2
RY3
s F/G.17 SEE
cHAP.30 FIG.
Figure 29 \ 'l y
UNDER-CHASSIS LAYOUT OF
PHONE-CW SWITCH S 1 PL41 b rl [=0PL7
SECTION A- CONTROLS RY3
PARTS IN POWER SUPPLY (PA. SCREEN RElAY& rtMEDEl.AY)
The 866-A sockets are sub-mounted on !lr SECiiON B- CONTROLS RY1
inch ceramic insulators. Eight electrolytic ca- (MOD. B+ SHORTING RELAY)
pacitors are mounted on phenolic plate and
banded with insulated strap to form high SECTION C- CONTROLS
MODULATOR FIL. CIRCUIT
voltage filter capacitor. Bias transformer is
next to rectifier tube sockets. All high voltage SECTION 0 ~CONTROLS 8+
connections are made with S KV television- TO SPEECH AMPLI Fl E R
type wire.
In view of the high cost of iron-core com- job, and that none of the components shall be
ponents such as go to make up the bulk of a overloaded with the type of operation contem-
power supply, it is well to consider carefully plated.
the design of a new or rebuilt transmitter in The meeting of all the requirements of the
terms of the minimum power supply require- previous paragraph is not always a straight-
ments which will permit the desired perform- forward and simple problem. In many cases
ance to be obtained from the transmitter. Care- compromises will be involved, particularly
ful evaluation of the power supply require- when the power supply is for an amateur sta-
ments of alternative transmitter arrangements tion and a number of components already on
will permit the selection of that tran~mitter hand must be fitted into the plan. As much
arrangement which requires the minimum of thought and planning should be devoted to the
power supply components, and which makes power-supply complement of an amateur sta-
most efficient use of such power supplies as tion as usually is allocated to the r-f and a-f
are required. components of the station.
The arrival at the desig;n for the power sup-
32-1 Power Supply ply for use in a particular application may best
Requirements be accomplished through the use of a series
of steps, with reference to the data in this
A power supply for a transmitter or for a chapter by determining the values of compo-
unit of station equipment should be designed nents to be used. The first step is to estab-
in such a manner that it is capable of deliver- lish rhe operating requirements of the power
ing the required current at a specified voltage, supply. In general these are:
that it has a degree of regulation consistent 1. Output voltage required under full load.
with the requirements of the application, that 2. Minimum, normal, and peak output cur-
its ripple level at full current is sufficiently rent.
low for the load which will be fed, that its in- 3. Voltage regulation required over the cur-
ternal impedance is sufficiently low for the rent range.
684
Requirements 685
Figure 1
POWER SUPPLY
CONTROL PANEL
A well designed supply con-
trol panel has separate primary
switches and indicator lamps
for the filament and plate cir-
cuits, overload circuit breaker,
plate voltage control switch
and primary circuit fuses.
4. Ripple voltage limit. mum drain as that of the bleeder. The mini-
5. Rectifier circuit to be used. mum current drain from a power supply is of
The output voltage required of the power importance since it, in conjunction with the
supply is more or less established by the oper- nominal voltage of the supply, determines the
ating conditions of the tubes which it will sup-
minimum value of inductance which the input
ply. The current rating of the supply, however,
is not necessarily tied down by a particular choke must have to keep the voltage from soar-
tube combination. It is always best to design ing when the external load is removed.
a power supply in such a manner that it will The normal current rating of a power supply
have the greatest degree of flexibility; this usually is a round-number value chosen on the
procedure will in many cases allow an exist- basis of the transformers and chokes on hand
ing power supply to be used without change or available from the catalog of a reliable man-
as a portion of a new transmitter or other item ufacturer. The current rating of a supply to
of station equipment. So the current rating of feed a steady load such as a receiver, a speech
a new power supply should be established by amplifier, or a continuously-operating r-f stage
taking into consideration not only the require- should be at least equal to the steady drain of
ments of the tubes which it immediately will the load. However, other considerations come
feed, but also with full consideration of the into play in choosing the current rating for a
best matching of power supply components in keyed amplifier, an amplifier of SSB signals,
the most economical current range which still or a clas,s B modulator. In the case of a sup-
will meet the requirements. It is often long- ply which will feed an intermittent load such
run economy, however, to allow for any likely as these, the current racings of the transform-
additional equipment to be added in the near ers and chokes may be less than the maximum
future. current which will be taken; but the current
ratings of the rectifier tubes to be used should
Current-Rating The mtmmum current drain be at least equal to the maximum current which
Considerations which will be taken from a will be taken. That is to say that 300-ma.
power supply will be, in most transformers and chokes may be used in the
cases, merely the bleeder current. There are supply for a modulator whose resting current
many cases where a particular power supply is 100 ma. but whose maximum current at
will always be used with a moderate or heavy peak signal will rise to 500 ma. However, the
load upon it, but when the supply is a portion rectifier tubes should be capable of handling
of a transmitter it is best to consider the mini- the full 500 rna.
686 Power Supplies THE RADIO
The iron-core components of a power supply value of bleeder at the output of the power
which feeds an- intermittent load may be cho- supply. The calculations are simple: the in-
sen on the basis of the current as averaged ductance of the power-supply input choke at
over a period of several minutes, since it is minimum current drain from the supply should
heating effect of the current which is of great- be equal in henries to the load resistance on
est importance in establishing the ratings of the supply (at minimum load current) divided
such components. Since iron-core components by 1000. This value of inductance is called
have a relatively large amount of thermal in- the critical inductance and it is the minimum
ertia, the effect of an intermittent heavy cur- value of inductance which will keep the out-
rent is offset to an extent by a key-up period put voltage from soaring in a choke-input
or a period of low modulation in the case of a power supply with minimum load upon the
modulator. However, the current rating of a output. The minimum load current may be
rectifier tube is established by the magnitude that due to the bleeder resistor alone, or it
of the emission available from the filament of may be due to the bleeder plus the minimum
the tube; the maximum emission must not be drain of the modulator or amplifier to which
exceeded even for a short period or the recti- the supply is connected.
fier tube will be damaged. The above consider- The low-voltage low-current supply, such as
ations are predicated, however, on the assump- would be used for a v.f.o. or the high-frequen-
tion that none of the iron-core components will cy oscillator in a receiver, usually is regu-
become saturated due to the high intermittent lated with the aid of glow-discharge gaseous-
current drain. If good-quality components of regulator tubes. These regulators are usually
generous weight are chosen, saturation will called "VR tubes." Their use in various types
not be encountered. of power supplies is discussed in Section 32-7.
The electronically-regulated power supply,
Voltage The general subject of voltage such as is used in the 10 to 100 watts power
Regulation regulation can really be divided output range, also is discussed later on in this
into two sub-problems, which dif- chapter and examples are given.
fer greatly in degree. The first, and more
common, problem is the case of the normal Ripple The ripple-voltage limitation
power supply for a transmitter modulator, Considerations imposed upon a power supply
where the current drain from the supply may is determined by the load
vary over a ratio of four or five to one. In which will be fed by the supply. The tolerable
this case we desire to keep the voltage change ripple voltage from a supply may vary from
under this varying load to a matter of 10 or perhaps 5 per cent for a class B or class C
15 per cent of the operating voltage under full amplifier which is to be used for a c-w stage
load. This is a quite different problem from or amplifier of an FM signal down to a few
the design of a power supply to deliver some hundredths of one per cent for the plate-volt-
voltage in the vicinity of 250 volts to an os- age supply to a low-level voltage amplifier in
cillator which requires two or three milliam- a speech amplifier. The usual value of ripple
peres of plate current; but in this latter case voltage which may be tolerated in the supply
the voltage delivered to the oscillator must be for the majority of stages of a phone transmit-
constant within a few volts with small varia- ter is between 0.1 and 2.0 per cent.
tions in oscillator current and with large varia- In general it may be stated that, with 60-
tions in the a-c line voltage which feeds the cycle line voltage and a single-phase rectifier
oscillator power supply. An additional voltage circuit, a power supply for the usual stages in
regulation problem, intermediate in degree be- the amateur transmitter will be of the choke-
tween the other two, is the case where a load input type with a single pi-section filter fol-
must be fed with 10 to 100 watts of power at lowing the input choke. A c-w amplifier or
a voltage below 500 volts, and still the voltage other stage which will tolerate up to 5 per cent
variation with changes in load and changes ripple may be fed from a power supply whose
in a-c line voltage must be held to a few filter consists merely of an adequate-size in-
volts at the output terminals. put choke and a single filter capacitor.
These three problems are solved in the nor- A power supply with input choke and a
mal type of installation in quite different man- single capacitor also will serve in most cases
ners. The high-power case where output volt- to feed a class B modulator, provided the out-
age must be held to within 10 to 15 per cent is put capacitor in the supply is sufficiently large.
normally solved by using the proper value of The output capacitor in this case must be
inductance for the input choke and proper capable of storing enough energy to supply the
HANDBOOK Requirements 687
peak-current requirement of the class B tubes TO FULL- WAVE
RECTIF'IER
RIPPLE IN TERMS OF C AT FULL LOAD
8 HY 12 HY
excessive, a filter system made up of resistors
TO F"ULL-WAVE
RECTIFIER
and capacitors only may be used to advantage.
In the normal case, where the reactance of the
shunting capacitor is very much smaller than
the resistance of the load fed by the filter sys-
tem, the ripple reduction per section is equal
Figure 5 to 11 (21rRC). In terms of the 120-cycle ripple
SAMPLE FILTER FOR from a full-wave rectifier the ripple-reduction
CALCULATION OF RIPPLE factor becomes: 1.33/RC where R is expressed
in thousands of ohms and C in microfarads.
of filter components may be calculated with For 60-cycle ripple the expression is: 2.66/RC
the aid of rather simple formulas. In the two with R and C in the same quantities as above.
formulas to follow it is assumed that the line
frequency is 60 cycles and that a full wave or
Filter System Many persons have noticed,
a full-wave bridge rectifier is being used. For
Resonance particularly when using an in-
the case of a single-section choke-input filter
put choke followed by a 2-pJd.
as illustrated in figure 2, or for the ripple at
first filter capacitor, that at some value of
the output of the first section of a two-section
load current the power supply will begin to
choke input filter the equation is as folJows,
hum excessively and the rectifier tubes will
118
tend to flicker or one tube will seem to take
Per cent ripple=--
all the load while the other tube dims out. If
LC-1
the power supply is shut off and then again
where LC is the product of the input choke
started, it may be the other tube which takes
inductance in henrys (at the operating current
the load; or first one tube and then the other
to be used) and the capacitance which follows
will take the load as the current drain is
this choke expressed in microfarads.
varied. This condition, as well as other less
In the case of a two-section filter, the per
obvious phenomena such as a tendency for the
cent ripple at the output of the first section is
first filter capacitor to break down regardless
determined by the above formula. Then this
of its voltage rating or for rectifier tubes to
percentage is multiplied by the filter reduction
have short life, results from resonance in the
factor of the following section of filter. This
filter system following the high-voltage rec-
reduction factor is determined through the use
tifier.
of the following formula:
LC-1 The condition of resonance is seldom en-
Filter reduction factor = - - - countered in low-voltage power supplies since
1.76 the capacitors used are usually high enough
Where LC again is the product of the in- so that resonance does not occur. But in high-
ductance and capacitance of the filter section. voltage power supplies, where both choke in-
The reduction factor will turn out to be a deci- ductance and filter capacitance are more ex-
mal value, which is then multiplied by the per- pensive, the condition of resonance happens
centage ripple obtained from the use of the frequently. The product of inductance and ca-
preceding formula. pacitance which resonates at 120 cycles is
As an example, take the case of the filter 1. 77. Thus a 1-JLfd. capacitor and a 1. 77 henry
diagrammed in figure 5. The LC product of the choke will resonate at 120 cycles. In almost
first section is 16. So the ripple to be expected any normal case the LC product of any section
at the output of the first section will be: 118/ in the filter system will be somewhat greater
(16-1) or 118/15, which gives 7.87 per cent. than 1.77, so that resonance at 120 cycles will
Then the second section, with an LC product seldom take place. But the LC product for
of 48, will give a reduction factor of: 1.76/ resonance at 60 cycles is about 7 .1. This is a
(48-1) or 1.76/47 or 0.037. Then the ripple value frequently encountered in the input sec-
percentage at the output of the total filter will tion of a high-voltage power supply. It occurs
be: 7.87 times 0.03 7 or slightly greater than with a 2-JLfd. capacitor and a choke which has
0.29 per cent ripple. 3.55 henrys of inductance at some current
va~ue. With a 2-JLfd. filter capacitor following
Resistance In many applications where the this choke, resonance will occur at the current
Capacitance current drain is relatively small, value which causes the inductance of the choke
Filters so that the voltage drop across to be 3.55 henrys. When this resonance does
the series resistors would not be occur, one rectifier tube (assuming mercury-
HANDBOOK Rectification Circuits 689
32-2 Rectification
Circuits Eo.c.= o.9 EA.c.
[ A.C =I D.C.
There are a large number of rectifier circuits
that may be used in the power supplies for sta-
tion equipment. But the simpler circuits are Figure 6
more satisfactory for the power levels up to MOST COMMON RECTIFIER CIRCUITS
the maximum permitted the radio amateur. Fig- (A) shows a half-wave reetifier circuit, (B) is
the standard full-wave rectifier circuit used
ure 6 shows the three most common circuits with a dual rectilier or two rectifier tubes,
used in power supplies for amateur equipment. and (C) is the bridge rectifier circuit.
f\1\Pv TRANSFORMER
SECONDARY
VOLTAGE
ing current of zero frequency; this passes
through the low-pass filter. The 120-cycle pul-
sations are similar to alternating current in
] v v ~IFIJJ VOLTAGE
PLATE N 2 Bridge The bridge rectifier (figure 6C)
Rectification is a type of full-wave circuit
in which four rectifier elements
tVV\/VVV'\COMBINEDRECTIFI0 or tubes are operated from a single high-volt-
VOLTAGE
PLATES N1 &. 2. age winding on the power transformer.
0~--~--~--~--~L---~--~
While twice as much output voltage can be
+~SMOOTHED\IOLTAGE
MTER FIRST SECTION
obtained from a bridge rectifier as from a cen-
OF FILTER ter-tapped circuit, the permissible output cur-
0
rent is only one-half as great for a given power
+~------------------------- D.C. VOLTAGE
transformer. In the bridge circuit, four recti-
AVAl LABLE FOR
RADIO USE fiers and three filament heating transformer
windings are needed, as against two rcx:tifiers
Figure 7 and one filament winding in the center-tapped
FULL-WAVE RECTIFICATION full-wave circuit. In a bridge rectifier circuit,
Showing transformer secondary voltage, the the inverse peak voltage impressed on any one
rectified output of each tube, the combined rectifier tube is halved, which means that tubes
output of the rectifier, the smoothed voltage
after one section of filter, and the substan- of lower peak inverse voltage rating may be
tially pure d.c. output of the rectifier-filter used for a given voltage output.
after additional sections of filter.
too.e~
00
o.e~
z
TWO TRANSFORMER POWER SUPPLY @ CENTER TAPPED METHOD FOR UNTAPPED TRANSFORMERS
TWO VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY SPECIAL FILTER CIRCUIT FOR BRIDGE RECTIFIER
Figure 8
SPECIAL SINGLE-PHASE RECTIFICATION CIRCUITS
A description of the application and operation of each of these special circuits is given in the
nccompanying text.
is very small so that the peak-current rating former designed for a full-wave rectifier, in
of the rectifier tube seldom will be exceeded. order to obtain doubled output voltage, make
The circuit of figure 6B is most commonly sure that the insulation rating of the trans-
used in medium-voltage power supplies since former to be used is adequate. In the bridge
this circuit is the most economical of filament rectifier circuit the center of the high-voltage
transformers, rectifier tubes and sockets, and winding is at a d-e potential of one-half the
space. But the circuit of figure 6C, commonly total voltage output from the rectifier. In a
called the bridge rectifier, gives better trans- normal full-wave rectifier the center of the
former utilization so that the circuit is most high-voltage winding is grounded. So in the
commonly used in higher powered supplies. bridge rectifier the entire high-voltage second-
The circuit has the advantage that the entire ary of the transformer is subjected to twice
secondary of the transformer is in use at all the peak-voltage stress that would exist if the
times, instead of each side being used alter- same transformer were used in a full-wave rec-
nately as in the case of the full-wave rectifier. tifier. High-quality full-wave transformers will
As a point of interest, the current flow through withstand bridge operation quite satisfactorily
the secondary of the plate transformer is a sub- so long as the total output voltage from the
stantially pure a-c wave as a result of better supply is less than perhaps 4500 volts. But
transformer utilization, instead of the pulsat- inexpensive transformers, whose insulation
ing d-e wave through each half of the power is just sufficient for full-wave operation, will
transformer secondary in the case of the full- break down when bridge rectification of the
wave rectifier. entire secondary is attempted.
The circuit of figure 6C will give the great-
est value of output power for a given trans- Special Single- Figure 8 shows six cir-
former weight and cost in a single-phase power Phose Rectification cuits which may prove
supply as illustrated. But in attempting to Circuits valuable when it is de-
bridge-rectify the whole secondary of a trans- sired to obtain more than
692 Power Supplies THE RADIO
PRIMARY
Eo= 1.11 Es
=
Is =0.517 I D.C.
RIPPLE FREQUENCY= 3F
RIPPLE PERCENT= 18.3
Figure 9
COMMON
Eo= 1.35 Es POLYPHASE-
Is =0.408 I o.c. RECTIFICATION
RIPPLE FREQUENCY IF = CIRCUITS
RIPPLE PERCENT= 4.2
These circuits are used
~~:: ~~~~::: ) =::~: ~~ when polyphase power is
available for the plate
supply of a high-power
transmitter. The circuit
at (B) is also called a
@ 6-PHASE STAR three-phase full-wave
rectification system. The
circuits are described in
the accompanying text.
Eo= 2.34 Es
Is =o.a1e I o.c.
Rl PPLE FREQUENCY = IF
RIPPLE PERCENT= 4.2
6-PHASE BRIDGE
one output voltage from one plate transformer winding is required for the circuit however.
or where some special combination of voltages With the circuit arrangement shown the volt-
is required. Figure SA shows a more or less age from the tap will be greater than one-half
common method for obtaining full voltage and the voltage at the top. If the circuit is changed
half voltage from a bridge reCtification circuit. so that the plates of the two rectifier tubes
With this type of circuit separate input chokes are connected to the outside of the winding
and filter systems are used on both output instead of to the taps, and the cathodes of the
voltages. If a transformer designed for use other pair are connected to the taps instead
with a full-wave rectifier is used in this cir- of to the outside, the total voltage ouput of
cuit, the current drain from the full-voltage the rectifier will be the same, but the voltage
tap is doubled and added to the drain from the at the tap position will be less than half the
half-voltage tap to determine whether the rat- top voltage.
ing of the transformer is being exceeded. Thus An interesting variable-voltage circuit is
if the transformer is rated at 1250 volts at 500 shown in figure SC. The arrangement may be
rna. it will be permissible to pull 250 rna. at used to increase or decrease the output volt-
2500 volts with no drain from the 1250-volt age of a conventional power supply, as repre-
tap, or the drain from the 1250-volt tap may sented by transformer T1, by adding another
be 200 rna. if the drain from the 2500-volt filament transformer to isolate the filament
tap is 150 rna., and so forth. circuits of the two rectifier tubes and adding
Figure SB shows a system which may be another plate transformer between the filaments
convenient for obtaining two voltages which of the two tubes. The voltage contribution of
are not in a ratio of 2 to 1 from a bridge-type the added transformer T, may be subtracted
rectifier; a transformer with taps along the from or added to the voltage produced by T1
HANDBOOK Standard Circuits 693
simply by reversing the double-pole double- more common polyphase rectification circuits
throw switch S. A serious disadvantage of this with their significant characteristics are
circuit is the fact that the entire secondary shown in figure 9. The increase in ripple fre-
winding of transformer T, must be insulated quency and decrease in percentage of ripple
for the total output voltage of the power sup- is apparent from the figures given in figure 9.
ply. The circuit of figure 9C gives the best trans-
An arrangement for operating a full-wave former utilization as does the bridge circuit
rectifier from a plate transformer not equipped in the single-phase connection. The circuit
with a center tap is shown in figure 8D. The has the further advantage that there ,is no aver-
two chokes L, must have high inductance rat- age d-e flow in the transformer, so that three
ings at the operating current of the plate sup- single-phase transformers may be used. A tap
ply to hold down the a-c current load on the at half-voltage may be taken at the junction
secondary of the transformer since the total of the star transformers, but there will be d-e
peak voltage output of the plate transformer flow in the transformer secondaries with the
is impressed across the chokes alternately. power supply center tap in use. The circuit of
However, the chokes need only have half the figure 9A has the disadvantage that there is an
current rating of the filter choke L, for a cer- average d-e flow in each of the windings.
tain current drain from the power supply since Rectifiers Rectifying elements in high-volt-
only half the current passes through each age plate supplies are almost in-
choke. Also, the two chokes L, act as input variably electron tubes of either the high-vacu-
chokes so that an additional swinging choke um or mercury-vapor type, although selenium
is not required for such a power supply. or silicon rectifier stacks containing a large
A conventional two-voltage power supply number of elements are often used. Low-volt-
with grounded transformer center tap is shown age high-current supplies may use argon gas
in figure 8E. The output voltages from this rectifiers ( Tungar tubes), selenium rectifiers,
circuit are separate and not additive as in or other types of dry-disc rectification ele-
the circuit of figure 8B. Figure SF is of ad- ments. The xenon rectifier tubes offer some
vantage when it is desired to operate Class B advantage over mercury-vapor rectifiers for
modulators from the half-voltage output of a high-voltage applications where extreme tem-
bridge power supply and the final amplifier perature ranges are likely to be encountered.
from the full voltage output. Both L, and L, However, such rectifiers (3B25 for example)
should be swinging chokes but the total drain are considerably more expensive than their
from the power supply passes through L while mercury-vapor counterparts.
only the drain of the final amplifier passes
through L,. Capacitors C and c, need be rated Peak Inverse Plate In an a-c circuit, the maxi-
only half the maximum output voltage of the Voltage and Peak mum peak voltage or cur-
power supply, plus the usual safety factor. Plate Current rent is V 2 or 1.41 times
This arrangement is also of advantage in hold- that indicated by the a-c
ing down the "key-up" voltage of a c-w trans- meters in the circuit. The meters read the root-
mitter since both L and L, are in series, and mean-square ( r.m.s.) values, which are the
their inductances are additive, insofar as the peak values divided by 1.41 for a sine wave.
"critical inductance" of a choke-input filter If a potential of 1,000 r.m.s. volts is ob-
is concerned. If 4 fLfd. capacitors are used at tained from a high-voltage secondary winding
both C and C, adequate filter will be obtained of a transformer, there will be 1 ,410-volts peak
on both plate supplies for hum-free radiophone potential from the rectifier plate to ground. In
operation. a single-phase supply the rectifier tube has
this voltage impressed on it, either positively
Polyphase It is usual practice in commer- when the current flows or "inverse" when the
Rectification cial equipment installations current is blocked on the other half-cycle. The
Circuits when the power drain from a inverse peak voltage which the tube will stand
plate supply is to be greater safely is used as a rating for rectifier tubes.
than about one kilowatt ~o use a polyphase rec- At higher voltages the tube is liable to arc
tification system. Such power supplies offer back, thereby destroying or damaging it. The
better transformer utilization, less ripple out- relations between peak inverse voltage, total
put and better power factor in the load placed transformer voltage and filter output voltage
upon the a-c line. However, such systems re- depend upon the characteristics of the filter
quire a source of three-phase (or two-phase and rectifier circuits (whether full- or half-
with Scott connection) energy. Several of the wave, bridge, single-phase or polyphase, etc.).
694 Power Supplies THE RADIO
1[j~
R=LINEVOLTS-HEATERVOLTS Mercury-Vapor The inexpensive mercury-va-
HEATER AMPERES
Rectifier Tubes por type of rectifier tube is
almost universally used in
~+ 0 the high-voltage plate supplies of amateur and
._______.._]=L_.~
__...._:__. -LINE RECTIFIER
commercial transmitters. Most amateurs are
quite familiar with the use of these tubes but
it should be pointed out that when new or
long-unused mercury-vapor tubes are first
SELENIUM
LINE RECTIFIER placed in service, the filaments should be op-
erated at normal temperature for approxi-
mately twenty minutes before plate voltage
is applied, in order to remove all traces of
=0-,--ic__+~--~-c_,....._~::OLTAG~DOUBLER
mercury from the cathode and to clear any
- + FULL-WAVE mercury deposits from the top of the envelope.
I C2 -
After this preliminary warm-up with a new
tube, plate voltage may be applied within 20
'--------' to 30 seconds after the time the filaments
are turned on, each time the power supply
is used. If plate voltage should be applied
before the filament is brought to full tem-
perature, active material may be knocked from
the oxide-coated filament and the life of the
tube will be greatly shortened.
Small r-f chokes must sometimes be con-
nected in series with the plate leads of mer-
cury-vapor rectifier tubes in order to prevent
SELENIUM the generation of radio-frequency hash. These
RECTIFIER
- + VOLTAGE r-f chokes must be wound with sufficiently
QUADRUPLER heavy wire to carry the load current and must
Cl have enough inductance to attenuate the r-f
parasitic noise current to prevent it from flow-
ing in the filter supply leads and then being
Figure 10
radiated into nearby receivers. Manufactured
TRANSFORMER LESS POWER-SUPPLY mercury-vapor rectifier hash chokes are avail-
CIRCUITS able in various current ratings from the ]ames
Circuits such as shown above are also fre- Millen Company in Malden, Mass., and from
quently called line-rectifier circuits. Seleni- the ]. W. Miller Company in Los Angeles.
um rectifiers, vacuum diodes, or gas diodes
may be used as the rectifying elements in
When mercury-vapor rectifier tubes are op-
these circuits. erated in parallel in a power supply, small
resistors or small iron-core choke coils should
be connected in series with the plate lead of
Rectifier tubes are also rated in terms of each tube. These resistors or inductors tend
peak plate current. The actual direct load cur- to create an equal division of plate current be-
rent which can be drawn from a given rectifier tween parallel tubes and prevent one tube from
tube or tubes depends upon the type of filter carrying the major portion of the current.
circuit. A full-wave rectifier with capacitor in- When high vacuum rectifiers are operated in
put passes a peak current several times the parallel, these chokes or resistors are not re-
direct load current. quired.
In a filter with choke input, the peak cur- Transformerless Figure 10 shows a group of
rent is not much greater than the load current Power Supplies five different types of trans-
if the inductance of the choke is fairly high formerless power supplies
(assuming full-wave rectification). which are operated directly from the a-c line.
A full-wave rectifier with two rectifier ele- Circuits of the general type are normally found
ments requires a transformer which delivers in a.c.-d.c. receivers but may be used in low-
twice as much a-c voltage as would be the powered exciters and in test instruments. When
case with a hlf-wave rectifier or bridge rec- circuits such as shown in (A) and (B) are
tifier. operated directly from the a-c line, the rec-
HANDBOOK Standard Circuits 695
)-
Y/
VI
u 50
fier operates instantly, and that it requires no z
w 40
heater power in order to obtain emission. The u 30
amount of heat developed by the selenium rec- 0::
LL 20
tifier is very much less than that produced by w ,0
an equivalent vacuum-tube type of rectifier. 0
0 50 100 150 200 2.50 300
In the circuits of figure 10 (A) , (B) and RELATIVE LOAD CURRENT,
(C), capacitors C and C, should be rated PERCENT OF FULL LOAD.
-- ----
4
0(/) 2 "-.I
Zf-
- ...J
wo
~> -2
0
e--' I
I
<( -4
I
-.;;..;..._
v --6 Figure 13
0 50 100 1.50 200 2.50 300
LOAD CURRENT, PERCENT OF FULL LOAD.
THE SILICON CELL
The common silicon reetilier is a pressure
contact device capable ol operation in am-
Figure 12 bient temperatures as high as I 50C. Heavy
VOLTAGE REGULATION OF end le11ules that lit standard fuse clips are
large enough to provide 11
heat sink11 action.
SELENIUM CELL The positive le11ule is grooved to provide
This graph applies to sinf11e phase lull wave polarity identification and prevent inco1tect
bridge, and center-tap cltcuits which utilize mounting.
both halves ol the input wave. In single phase
hall wave circuits the regulation will be poorer.
tremely low (less than one volt) applications.
selenium rectifier consists of a nickel-plated The threshold voltage will vary with tem-
aluminum base plate coated with selenium perature and will increase with a decrease in
over which a low temperature alloy is sprayed. temperature.
The base plate serves as the negative electrode Under operating conditions, and to a lesser
and the alloy as the positive, with current extent when idle, the selenium rectifier will
flowing readily from the base plate to the age. During the aging period the forward
alloy but encountering high resistance in the resistance will gradually increase, stabilizing
opposite direction (figure 11A) . This action at a new, higher value after about one year.
results in effective rectification of an alternat- This aging will result in approximately a 7%
ing input voltage and current with the efficien- decrease in output voltage.
cy of conversion dependent to some extent
upon the ratio of the resistance in the con- Voltage The selenium rectifier has ex-
ducting direction to that of the blocking di- Regulation tremely low internal impedance
rection. In normal power applications a ratio which exhibits non-linear charac-
of 100 to 1 is satisfactory; however, special teristics with respect to applied voltage. This
applications such as magnetic amplifiers often results in good voltage regulation even at large
require ratios in the order of 1000 to 1. overload currents. Figure 12 shows that as the
The basic selenium rectifier cell is actually load is varied from zero to 300% of normal,
a diode capable of half wave rectification. the output voltage will change about 10%.
Since many applications require full wave rec- It should be noted that because of non-linear
tification for maximum efficiency and mini- characteristics, the voltage drop increases rapid-
mum ripple, a plurality of cells in series, paral- ly below 50% of normal load.
lel, or series-parallel combinations are stacked Silicon Of all recent developments in the
in an assembly. Rectifiers field of semi-conductors, silicon
Selenium rectifiers are operated over a wide rectifiers offer the most promising
range of voltages and currents. Typical appli- range of applications; from extreme cold to
cations range from a few volts at milliamperes high temperature, and from a few watts of
of current to thousands of amperes at rela- output power to very high voltage and cur-
tively high voltages. rents. Inherent characteristics of silicon allow
The efficiency of high quality selenium rec- junction temperatures in the order of 200C
tifiers is high, usually in the order of 90% before the material exhibits intrinsic proper-
in three phase bridge circuits and 70% in ties. This extends the operating range of sili-
single phase bridge circuits. Of particular in- con devices beyond that of any other efficient
terest is the very slight decrease in efficiency semi-conductor and the excellent thermal range
even at high current overloads (figure 11B). coupled with very small size per watt of out-
put power make silicon rectifiers applicable
Threshold Voltage A minimum voltage is re-
where other rectifiers were previously con-
and Aging quired to permit a selen- sidered impractical.
ium rectifier to conduct
in the forward direction. This voltage, com- Silicon The current density of a sili-
monly known as the threshold voltage, pre- Current Density con rectifier is very high, and
cludes the use of selenium rectifiers at ex- on present designs ranges
HANDBOOK Mobile Power Supply 697
w
<ll
a::
u
ci
w 10 0 0 75r----+----~~~-r--
> I
v -V'
w w
150
a:: ~,_:
u~ v-: a:: z 50 r----+-----H-r---J~--
vrc
1
ci~
Wf-
>z 0~
0
)__,v lLW
oa::
1-a::
~ G2s t-----t--trr--r--t------1
~w1.
<(0::
ylzsc ;-65C uo
1
_jO:: O::<i
W::O wo
O::Uo. 1 L a.. ..J 0':'--""':'"::-"'~':"-:-----:--:---:::2.0
25 50 75 100 125 150
0
,.4-<M,.-{W>--IfL-...--*L-----o +20~ v.
1$0MA.
+32~V.
450MA.
Figure 16
SEMI-CONDUCTOR POWER SUPPLIES
A-Voltage quadruplet circuit. II point "A" is taken as ground instead of point "8," supply will deliver
530 volts at 150 mo. from 115 volt a-c line. Supply is "hot" to line.
B-Voltage triplet delivering 325 volts at 450 mo. Supply is "hot" to line.
C-900 watt supply lor sideband service may be made from two voltage quadruplers working in series
from inexpensive "distribution-type" transformer. Supply features good dynamic voltage regulation.
PARTS LIST:
o,_sarkes Tarzian Model 150 selenium cell or Model M-500 silicon cell.
Dz-Sarkes Tarzian Model 500 selenium cell or Model M-500 silicon cell.
T1-Power distribution transformer, used backwards. 230/460 primary, 115/230 secondary, 0.75 KVA.
Chicago PCB-24750.
ments, delivering 100 watts at various voltages a square-wave a.c. voltage in the secondary.
to run both the mobile transmitter and re- This a.c. secondary voltage is then rectified by a
ceiver. The input power required by the- sup- second set of contacts on the vibrator arma-
ply is almost directly proportional to the out- ture. The limitations of this circuit are low
put power drain, and only a small amount of power handling capacity and the need to use
power is wasted to actuate the vibrator reeds. a different number of turns on the transformer
The large demand for efficient and power- primary when the battery voltage is changed
ful mobile radio equipment has led to the from six to twelve volts.
development of new heavy-duty, vibrator-type In the split-reed vibrator (figure 18B), two
power supply components; these are used to sets of double-throw contacts are electrically
advantage in this unique design. isolated from each other. Each set has much
greater current carrying capacity than the
The Split-Reed The new split-reed dual-inter- synchronous vibrator. However, a power trans-
Vibrator rupter vibrator overcomes the former having two center-tapped primary
power capacity limitations of windings is required. One set of contacts
the older type vibrators. In addition, this vi- switches the d.c. power alternately between
brator permits the design of power supplies halves of one primary winding, and the other
requiring no component changes for operation set simultaneously switches the other winding.
from either the 6- or 12-volt d.c. power sys- Therefore, the primaries can be connected in
tems with which most automobiles are parallel for 6-volt operation, or in series for
equipped. 12-volt operation. No wiring changes are
Until recently, the majority of vibrator sup- needed in the supply if the battery is properly
plies have been designed around the synchon- connected to the power input terminals.
ous type vibrator. A simplified diagram of
such a vibrator is shown in figure 18A. One The Selenium A selenium rectifier system
set of vibrator contacts switches the battery Rectifier Systemis employed in this supply.
current alternately through two opposed pri- Since the vibrator contacts
mary windings of a transformer, thus inducing open and close abruptly, the periodically in-
Figure 17
100 WATT MOBILE
POWER SUPPLY
This high efficiency mo-
bile supply features 6 or
J2 volt input, and will
completely power both
the mobile transmitter
and receiver. 450, 300,
and 240 volts are avail-
able. At right is control
box for complete mobile
system. Overall size of
supply is only 6"x6"x6".
terrupted voltage impressed on the transform- Note that each rectifier has two sections. The
er primary has practically a square waveform. part numbers correspond to the markings
The secondary voltage also has nearly a square shown in the complete schematic of figure
waveform as a result and thus the peak volt- 20. In the 2 50 volt circuit, the full trans-
age on the rectifiers is only slightly higher former secondary voltage is applied to a full
than the average voltage of the waveform. wave rectifier consisting of half of rectifiers
This means that the rectifiers in a vibrator- SR, and SR,. These two rectifiers form a com-
type power supply can be operated on a square mon portion of all three rectifier circuits. The
wave voltage close to their maximum peak junction of the rwo rectifiers is grounded and
inverse voltage rating, instead of considerably the positive 250 volt output is taken from
below this rating, as when a sine wave a.c. the center-tap transformer lead. This is the
vooltage is applied to them. opposite of the usual full wave rectifier cir-
cuit.
Power Supply This power supply has three The 300 volt d.c. output is obtained from
Circuit high voltage sections as shown a bridge rectifier circuit (figure 19B) con-
in figure 19. The 250 vo1t sisting of one-half of SR, and SR, in the
receiver supply is shown in figure 19A, the ground legs, plus SRa in the two bridge legs
300 volt low voltage transmitter supply in from which the positive voltage is obtained.
figure 19B, and the 450 volt high voltage Another bridge rectifier circuit is employed
transmitter supply JS shown in figure 19C. for the 450 volt d.c. output, again with the
t-----LIJIJ'~
I ,-
t t 6 VOLT CONNECTIONS
I I I I
Lllllllllll + 12 VOLT CONNECTIONS
Figure 18
SUPPLY FEATURES THE NEW SPLIT-REED VIBRATOR CAPABLE OF HANDLING
100 WATTS OF POWER AT EITHER 6 OR 12 VOLTS
A-simplified diagram of typical synchronous vibrator and rectifier circuit.
B-Simplified diagram of typical split-reed vibrator and 6- 12 volt d-e. changeover system.
700 Power Supplies THE RADIO
T! T! T!
~oSR1A
+
SR1A
+ 11 + I
~ + SR2A +
SR2A
@
Figure 19
SIMPLIFIED CIRCUITS OF RECTIFIER SYSTEMS USED IN HIGH EFFICIENCY
MOBILE SUPPLY
A-Full wave, 250 volt rectifier.
B-300 volt bridge circuit tapped across portion of the high voltage winding.
C-450 volt bridge rectifier circuit.
two grounded legs of the circuit passing A separate low voltage input cable is used
through SR, and SR,. The other two sections for each voltage as shown in figure 20. Leads
of these rectifiers form the legs of the bridge from p, to the main power relay RYa should
from which the positive d.c. voltage is taken. be made as short as possible to reduce the
Since there is little ripple voltage in the voltage drop. This is particularly important
d.c. output from the rectifiers, a single 40 with a six volt power source, where a cable
fLfd. filter capacitor on the 300 volt section resistance of only 0.04 ohm will cause a one
of the supply is adequate. Two 100 f'fd. ca- volt primary drop when the power supply
pacitors are placed in series across the 450 is opera.ting at full load.
volt section and a capacitor input filter is The six volt input plug connects the alter-
employed for the low voltage section. nate pairs of vibrator contacts and the halves
The Control A "push-to-talk" power switch- of the transformer primary windings in paral-
Circuit ing circuit is included in the lel. These units are connected in series for
power supply so that the 250 twelve volt operation as shown in figure 18B.
volt output may be applied to a mobile re- Six volts for the relay coils is supplied from
ceiver or converter. This is accomplished with the power cable through pin 6 on ],. With the
one pair of contacts on a d.p.d.t. relay, RY,, twelve volt plug, a voltage dropping resistor,
which also turns on the 300 volt output to a R,, is connected in series with the relay coils.
transmitter exciter when its relay coil is en- If the power supply is to be operated exclu-
ergized. A second d.p.d.t. relay, RY,, turns sively from the higher primary voltage, re-
on the 450 volt output to a transmitter final lays having twelve volt coils should be used,
amplifier and modulator when its coil is ener- thus eliminating R,.
gized. It also provides a power-reducing fea- There usually is sparking at the vibrator
ture when the coil is not energized by apply- contacts so var>ious capacitors and resistors
ing 300 volts to the 450 volt output terminai are incorporated in the primary circuit to sup-
and 250 volts to the 300 volt output terminal. press any radio noise generated by vibrator
Since all rectifiers have high voltage on Rction. These components are placed dose
them continuously when the supply is operat- to the pins of the vibrator socket.
ing, the idling current flow through the un-
used rectifiers when receiving is reduced to Component The heart of this power supply
almost zero by disconnecting them from the Parts is the vibrator transformer de-
filter capacitors and bleeder resistors by the signed specially for two-way mo-
action of the relays. bile radio equipment. It is readily available
A special 20 volt secondary winding on the from many of the 3000 General Electric Co.
transformer provides transmitter negative bias mobile radio service stations, or it may be
through rectifier SR, and a 50 f'fd. filter ca- ordered from the address given in the parts
pacitor. list of figure 20.
-, Circuit Details- In this power supply, Power Supply All components except the
Low Voltage Sectionchanging from 6- to 12- Construction power transformer are enclosed
volt operation is accom- inside a 6"x6"x6" aluminum
plished with a 12-pin Cinch-Jones type 300 utility box for maximum protection against
power plug and socket, P, and J,, respectively. dirt and dust. A sub-chassis made from 1116-
HANDBOOK Mobile Power Supply 701
TSt
_;_-<>--...--...--+o +450/300 v.
6 TRANSMIT.
56K
2W
GROUND
+ 300V
K 5 TRANSMIT.
56
2W
2. 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12.
..._------+-0 3
+ 2.50 v'
TRANSMIT.
TO S3,P2
2 ?. 4 56 7 6 9 101112 (SEEFIG.238)
y jj ~ I ,, "''" "'''
GND TO AUTO
Rv3..,..-LFz ro 12. voLrs
12.v.ro Pz
1- RELAYS SHOWN !NUNENERGIZED POSITION.
TO 53, Pz 2.-ALL RESISTORS 1 WATT UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
(S FIG. 238)
*-MOUNT AT iRANSFORMER TERMINAL.
Figure 20
SCHEMATIC, 6-12 VOLT MOBILE SUPPLY
Ez-Vibrator, dual interrupter, split-reed; 6 volt -~oils, 716.c.p.s. reed frequency, 7 pin base. Mallory type
1701, Oak V-6853, Radiart 5722, or G.E. A-7141584-P3.
F z-30 ampere cartridge fuse.
F:-15 ampere cartridge fuse.
Jz-12 pin male chassis plug. Cinch-Jones P-312-AB
P z-12 pin female cable socket. Cinch-Jones S-312-CCT
Lz-7.5 henry, 100 ma. Stancor C-1421
L,--7 Jlh., I amp. Ohmite 2-50 r-f choke
RYz, RY,-D.P.D.T. relay, 6 volt coil. Advance MG/2c/6VD, Potter & Brumfield MR-11D-6V, Guardian
200-6D Coil and 200-2 assembly, or Ohmite DOSX-158T, or equiv.
SR1, SRz--Two section selenium rectifier, 150 ma., 380 volts peak inverse per section, connected for
doubler service. G.E. A-7144141-P2, or two Federal 1005-A rectifiers in series for each leg (8 in all).
SRs-Two section selenium rectifier, 150 mo., 380 volts peak inverse per section, connected for center-tap
service. G.E. A-7144141-Pl, or two Federal 1005-A rectifiers with red terminals connected together.
SR,-150 ma., 64 volt peak inverse selenium rectifier. G. E. A-7140806-PI or federal !015.
Tz-Vibrator-type power transformer. Dual center-tapped 6 volt primaries. Secondaries: 420 volts c.t.
with 150 volt taps, 300 ma., and 20 volt, !50 ma. bias voltage winding. G.E. B-7486449-Pl.
TS,-8 terminal barrier strip. Cinch-Jones 8-141-Y.
Note: General Electric parts may be ordered from: D. S. Clark, G.E. Co., Product Service Renewal Parts
Section of Communication Products, 509 Kent St., Utica, N.Y. Current prices plus shipping charges
are: Tz, $14.70; Ez, $5.75; SR,, SR:, SR,, $7.75 each; SR 4, $1.40.
inch thick aluminum is cut as shown in fig- ly fastened in place with small aluminum
ures 21 and 22. A cut-out in one corner is angle brackets, two inches from the bottom of
necessary to clear the lower portion of the the box.
power transformer. All chassis drilling and One eleotrolytic capacitor, C, is mounted
the cutouts for the power transformer, power on an insulated plate furnished with the ca-
input plug, and output terminal strip should pacitor. When twisting the locking lugs, make
be completed before the chassis is permanent- sure that they do not come near the metal
Figure 21
UNDER-CHASSIS
VIEW OF
POWER SUPPLY
The vibrator socket is
hidden by the resistors
and disc ceramic capaci-
tors of the hash filter.
R-F choke L: and the
25 p.fd. capacitors are
above these parts on the
wall of the cose. Resis-
tor R, is mounted to the
wall, with SR,, SR:, and
SR, in line below it.
chassis. The can of this capacitor is more than The transformer primary leads are wired
200 volts "above ground" and should be in- to the input plug and vibrator socket with
sulated with a fibre sleeve. shortest possible leads before other parts are
The large seven pin socket into which the wired. Placement of the under-chassis parts
vibrator plugs should have two soldering lugs may be seen in figure 21. Layout of the parts
placed under each mounting bolt for the by- is not critical.
pass capacitors which are later wired to the
socket pins. If the power supply is to be Testing the After the wmng has been
mounted with the chassis in a vertical plane, Supply checked, the power supply should
pins 1 and 4 of the vibrator socket should be be checked at half input voltage,
in a vertical plane. The smaller components but with full voltage applied to the vibrator
below the chassis should not be installed until coil. This is done by temporarily removing
parts above the chassis have been assembled the jumper between pins 7 and 8 on the
and wired. twelve volt power plug, P1. Pin 8 is then
Figure 22
TOP VIEW OF
POWER SUPPLY
INTERIOR
Relays RY, and RY: are
at center above choke L,.
Power transformer T1 is
mounted on end of cab-
inet. Across top of
~7:,~;~r(le~~Jo ffi~Z:) ~~~
pacitors
Transistorized Power Supply 703
2. WIRE CABLE
#6 FOR 6V.
FROM #10FOR12V.
BATTERY
4 WIRE HEATER
& RELAY CABLE
LOW VOLTAGE INPUT PLUG J2 J3 FROM H.V. SUPPLY
Figure 24
CABLE HARNESS, MAIN POWER
RELAY, RY 3 , AND REAR OF
POWER CONTROL BOX
Hif1h voltage for the receiver, plus the control
sw1tch circuits for RY, and RY:, are brought
into the control box from the power supply
through J,.
High voltage leads for the transmitter are
run directly from the supply,, but the trans-
mitter heater power and 'transmit-receive"
control circuit is run to the transmitter
through control box circuit h (figure 23A).
1fPIIE- DIIE-
- + +
@
Figure 25
TRANSISTORS CAN REPLACE VIBRATOR IN MOBILE POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM
A-Typical vibrator circuit.
8-Vibrator can be represented by two single-pole single throw switches, or transistors.
C-Push-pu/1 square wave ''oscil/ator 11 is driven by special feedback windings on power transformer.
D-Addition of bias in base-emitter circuit results in oscillator capable of starting under full load.
plication of a minute exciting signal. \\"hen former provides 180 degree phase shift volt-
the transistor is nonconductive it may be con- age necessary to maintain oscillation. In this
sidered to be an open circuit. When it is in application the transistors are operated as on-
a conductive state, the internal resistance is off switches; i.e., they are either completing
very low. Two transistors properly connected, the circuit or opening it. The oscillator output
therefore, can replace the single pole, double voltage is a square wave having a frequency
throw mechanical switch representing the vi- that is dependent upon the driving voltage,
brator. The transistor switching action is many the primary inductance of the power trans-
times faster than that of the mechanical vi- former, and upon the peak collector current
brator and the transistor can switch an ap- drawn by the conducting transistor. Changes
preciable amount of power. Efficiencies in the in transformer turns, core area, core material,
neighborhood of 95% can be obtained with 28 and feedback turns ratio have an effect on the
volt primary-type transistor power supplies, frequency of oscillation. Frequencies in com-
permitting great savings in primary power mon use are in the range of 120 c.p.s. to
over conventional vibrators and dynamotors. 3,500 c.p.s.
The power consumed by the transistors 1s
Transistor The transistor operation resembles relatively independent of load. Loading the
Operation a magnetically coupled multi-vi- oscillator causes an increase in input current
brator, or an audio frequency that is sufficient to supply the required power
push-pull square wave oscillator (figure 2 5C). to the load and the additional losses in the
A special feedback winding on the power trans- transformer windings. Thus, the overall effi-
w
ciency actually increases with load and is great-
l9 est at the heaviest load the oscillator will sup-
~ .SVOLTS ,rRISETIME=70..US
ply. A result of this is that an increase in load
6 40 -,--- _,_
2
~200-200o:.,~,
_ ____
~ 3s~-- r--1'-----' 11s I produces very little extra heating of the tran-
0 30--- I sistors. This feature means that it is impossi-
f-
~ 25-- ble to burn out the transistors in the event of
j 20- a shorted load since the switching action mere-
8 15- ly stops.
~ 10
w 5 -~
Transistor The power capability of the
~ o~--'- Power Rating transistor is limited by the
cn amount of heat created by the
IO.SVOLT
TIME---
current flow through the internal resistance
of the transistor. When the transistor is con-
Figure 26 ducting the internal resistance is extremely
BASE-COLLECTOR WAVEFORM OF low and little heat is generated by current
SWITCHING CIRCUIT,
FOR 12 VOLT CIRCUIT flow. Conversely, when the transistor is in a
Square waveshape produces almost ideal cut-off condition the internal resistance is very
switching action. Small Spike" on leading11
high and the current flow is extremely small.
edge of pulses may be reduced by proper
transformer design. Thus, in both the '"on" and "off" conditions
HANDBOOK Transistorized Power Supplies 705
2N278
r - - - - - - - - - - - . . - - - - - . - o + 2 5 0 V . AT 50 MA :;;:12WATTS
25 K
5W
2N278 OR 2N301A
Figure 27
PRACTICAL TRANSISTOR POWER SUPPLIES
T ,--Chicago DCT -2 transistor transformer
T,-Chicago DCT -I transistor transformer
D1-Ds-Sarkes-Tarzian M-500 silicon rectifier or equivalent.
Figure 29
SCHEMATIC, TRANSISTOR
POWER SUPPLY FOR
12 VOLT AUTOMOTIVE
SYSTEM
T ,-Transistor power transformer.
12 volt primary, to provide 275
volts at 125 ma. Chicago Stand- 27!S v.
25K AT12.5MA,
ard DCT-1. TIY
D,-D,--Sarkes-Tarzian silicon recti-
fier, type M-500, or equivalent.
- 12 V. BATTERY +
HANDBOOK Components 707
2N278
Figure 31
SCHEMATIC,
470
2.5 K
..,-w- 85 WATT
~ TRANSISTOR
POWER SUPPLY
FOR 12 VOLT
AUTOMOTIVE
SYSTEM
T1-Transistor power
transformer. 12 volt
SOK primary to provide 275
10W volts at 125 ma.
~&ir~r standard
D,-D,-Sarkes- Tarzian
silicon rectifier, type
M-500
- 12 V. BATTERY+
paper. Some types of paper capacitors are pacitors are used in filter circuits of high-
wax-impregnated, but the better ones, especial- V'Oltage supplies, the capacitors should be con-
ly the high-voltage types, are oil-impregnated nected in series. The positive terminal of one
and oil-filled. Some capacitors are rated both capacitor must connect to the negative ter-
for flash test and normal operating voltages; minal of the other, in the same manner as
the latter is the important rating and is the dry batteries are connected in series.
maximum voltage which the capacitor should It is not necessary to connect shunt resis-
be required to withstand in service. tors across each electrulytic capacitor section
The capacitor across the rectifier ciw 1it in as it is with paper capacitors connected in
a capacitor-input filter should have a tva ~king series, because electrolytic capacitors have
voltage rating equal at least to 1.41 times the fairly low internal d-e resistance as compared
r-m-s voltage output of the rectifier. The re- to paper capacitors. Also, if there is any varia-
maining capacitors may be rated more nearly tion in resistance, it is that electrolytic unit
in accordance with the d-e voltage. in the poorest condition which will have the
The electrolytic capacitor consists of two highest leakage current, and therefore the volt-
aluminum electrodes in contact with a conduct- age across this capacitor will be lower than
ing paste or liquid which acts as an electro- that across one of the series connected units
lyte. A very thin film of oxide is formed on the in better condition and having higher internal
surface of one electvode, called the anode. resistance. Thus we see that equalizing re-
This film of oxide acts as the dielectric. The sistors are not only unnecessary across series-
electrolytic capacitor must be correctly con- connected electrolytic capacitors but are ac-
nected in the circuit so that the anode always tually undesirable. This assumes, of course,
is at a positive potential with respect to the similar capacitors by the same manufacturer
electrolyte, the latter actually serving as the and of the same capacitance and voltage rat-
other electrode (plate) of the capacitor. A re- ing. It is not advisable to connect in series
versal of the polarity for any length of time electrolytic capacitors of different make or
will ruin the capacitor. ratings.
The dry type of electrolytic capacitor uses There is very little economy in using elec-
an electrolyte in the form of paste. The die- trolytic capacitors in series in circuits where
lectric in electrolytic capacitors is not perfect; more than two of these capacitors would be
these capacitors have a much higher direct required to prevent voltage breakdown.
current leakage than the paper type. Electrolytic capacitors can be greatly re-
The high capacitance of electrolytic ca- duced in size by the use of etched aluminum
pacitors results from the thinness of the film foil for the anode. This greatly increases the
which is formed on the plates. The maximum surface area, and the dielectric film covering
voltage that can be safely impressed across it, but raises the power factor slightly. For
the average electrolytic filter capacitor is be- this reason, ultra-midget electrolytic capacitors
tween 450 and 600 volts; the working voltage ordinarily should not be used at full rated d-e
is usually rated at 450. When electrolytic ca- voltage when a high a-c component is present,
HANDBOOK Special Supplies 709
such as would be the case for the input ca- Filter Choke Filter inductors consist of a
pacitor in a capacitor-input filter. Coils coil of wire wound on a lami-
nated iron core. The size of
Bleeder A heavy duty resistor should be wire is determined by the amount of direct
Resistors connected across the output of a current which is to flow through the choke
filter in order to draw some load coil. This direct current magnetizes the core
current at all time. This resistor avoids soar- and reduces the inductance of the choke coil;
ing of the voltage at no load when swinging therefore, filter choke coils of the smoothing
choke input is used, and also provides a means tvpe are built with an air gap of a sma[,l frac-
for discharging the filter capacitors when no tion of an inch in the iron core, for the pur-
external vacuum-tube circuit load is connected pose of preventing saturation when maximum
to the filter. This bleeder resistor should nor- d.c. flows through the coil winding. The "air
mally draw approximately 10 per cent of the gap" is usually in the form of a piece of fiber
full load current. inserted between the ends of the laminations.
The power dissipated in the bleeder resistor The air gap reduces the initial inductance of
can be calculated by dividing the square of the choke coil, but keeps it at a higher value
the d-e voltage by the resistance. This power under maximum load conditions. The coil must
is dissipated in the form of heat, and, if the have a great many more turns for the same
resistor is not in a well-ventilated position, initial inductance when an air gap is used.
the wattage rating should be higher than the The d-e resistance of any filter choke should
actual wattage being dissipated. High-voltage, be as low as practicable for a specified value
high-capacitance filter capacitors can hold a of inductance. Smaller filter chokes, such as
dangerous charge if not bled off, and wire- those used in radio receivers, usually have
wound resistors occasionally open up without an inductance of from 6 to 15 henrys, and a
warning. Hence it is wise to place carbon re- d-e resistance of from 200 to 400 ohms. A
sistors in series across the regular wire-wound high d-e resistance will reduce the output volt-
bleeder. age, due ro the voltage drop across each choke
When purchasing a bleeder resistor, be sure coil. Large filter choke coils for radio trans-
that the resistor will stand not only the re- mitters and Class B amplifiers usually have
quired wattage, but also the voltage. Some re- less than 100 ohms d-e resistance.
sistors have a voltage limitation which makes
it impossible to force sufficient current through 32-9 Special Power
them to result in rated wattage dissipation. Supplies
This type of resistor usually is provided with
slider taps, and is designed for voltage divider A complete transmitter usually includes one
service. An untapped, non-adjustable resistor or more power supplies such as grid-bias
is preferable as a high voltage bleeder, and is packs, voltage-regulated supplies, or trans-
less expensive. Several small resistors may be formerless supplies having some special char-
connected in series, if desired, to obtain the acteristic.
required wattage and voltage rating.
Regulated Where it is desired in a circuit
Transformers Power transformers and fila- Supplies- to stabilize the voltage supply
ment transformers normally V-R Tubes to a load requiring not more than
will give no trouble over a period of many perhaps 20 to 25 rna., the glow-
years if purchased from a reputable manufac- discharge type of voltage-regulator tube can
turer, and if given a reasonable amount of be used to great advantage. Examples of such
care. Transformers must be kept dry; even a circuits are the local oscillator circuit in a
small amount of moisture in a high-voltage receiver, the tuned oscillator in a v-f-o-, the
unit will cause quick failure. A transformer oscillator in a frequency meter, or the bridge
which is operated continuously, within its circuit in a vacuum-tube voltmeter. A num-
ratings, seldom will give trouble from mois- ber of tubes are available for this applica-
ture, since an economically designed trans- tion including the OA3/VR75, OB3/VR90,
former operates at a moderate temperature OC3/VR105, OD3/VR150, and the OA2
rise above the temperature of the surrounding and OB2 miniature types. These tubes stabil-
air. But an unsealed transformer which is ize the voltage across their terminals to 7 5,
inactive for an appreciable period of time in 90, 105, or 150 volts. The minature types
a highly humid location can absorb enough OA2 stabilize to 150 volts and OB2 to 108
moisture to cause early failure. volts. The types OA2, OB2 and OB3/VR90
710 Power Supplies THE RADIO
have a maximum current rating of 30 rna. If a high resistance is connected across the
and the other three types have a maximum VR tube, it will not impair its ability to main-
current rating of 40 rna. The minimum cur- tain a fixed voltage drop. However, if the load
rent required by all six types to sustain a is made too low, a variable 5000 to 30,000
constant discharge is 5 ma. ohm shunt resistance (the VR-150) will not
A V R tube (common term applied to all exert sufficient effect upon the resulting re-
glow-discharge voltage regulator tubes) may sistance to provide constant voltage except
be used to stabilize the voltage across a vari- over a very limited change in supply voltage
aNe load or the voltage across a constant load or load resistance. The tube will supply maxi-
fed from a varying voltage. Two or more VR mum regulation, or regulate the largest load,
tubes may be connected in series to provide when the source of supply voltage has high
exactly 180, 210, 255 volts or other combi- internal cr high series resistance, because a
nations of the voltage ratings of the tubes. variation in the effective internal resistance
It is not recommended, however, that VR of the VR tube will then have more control-
tubes be connected in parallel since both the ling effect upon the load shunted across it.
snriking and the regulMed voltage of the In order to provide greatest range of regu-
paralleled tubes normally will be sufficiently lation, a VR tube (or two in series) should be
different so that only one of the tubes will used with a series resistor (to effect a poorly
light. The remarks following apply generally regulated voltage source) of such a value that
to all the VR types although some examples it will permit the VR tube to draw from 8 to
apply specifically to the OD3/VR150 type. 20 rna. under normal or average conditions
A device requiring say, only 50 volts can of supply voltage and load impedance. For
be stabilized against supply voltage variations maximum control range, the series resistance
by means of a VR-105 simply by putting a should be not less than approximately 20,000
suitable resistor in series with the regulated ohms, which will necessitate a source of volt-
voltage and the load, dropping the voltage age considerably in excess of 150 volts. How-
from 105 to 50 volts. However, it should be ever, where the supply voltage is limited, good
borne in mind that under these conditions connrol over a limited range can be obtained
the device will not be regulated for vcvrying with as little as 3000 ohms series resistance.
load; in other words, if the load resistance If it takes less than 3000 ohms series resist-
varies, the voltage across the load will vary, ance to make the VR tube draw 15 to 20
even though the regulated voltage remains at rna. when the VR tube is connected to the
105 volts. load, then the supply voltage is not high
To maintain constant voltage across a vary- enough for proper operation.
ing load resistance there must be no series Should the current through a VR -15 0, VR-
resistance between the regulator tube and the 10 5, or VR- 7 5 be allowed to exceed 40 rna.,
load. This means that the device must be the life of the tube will be shortened. If the
operated exactly at one of the voltages ob- current falls below 5 rna., operation will be-
tainable by seriesing two or more simi!ar or come unstable. Therefore, the tube must op-
different VR tubes. erate within this range, and within the two
A VR-150 may be considered as a stubborn extremes will maintain the voltage within 1.5
variable resistor having a range of from 30,000 per cent. It takes a voltage excess of at least
to 5000 ohms and so intent upon maintaining 10 to 15 per cent to "start" a VR type regu-
a fixed voltage of 150 volts across its ter- lator; and to insure positive starting each time
minals that when connected across a voltage the voltage supply should preferably exceed
source having very poor regulation it will in- the regulated output voltage raning about 20
stantly vary tts own resistance within the lim- per cent or more. This usually is automatically
its of 5000 and 30,000 ohms in an attempt taken care of by the fact that if sufficient
to maintain the same 150 volt drop across its series resistance for good regulation is em-
terminals when the supply voltage is varied. ployed, the voltage impressed across the VR
The theory upon which a VR tube operates is tube before the VR tube ionizes and starts
covered in an earlier chapter. passing current is quite a bit higher than the
It is paradoxical that in order to do a good starting voltage of the tube.
job of regulating, the regulator tube must be When a VR tube is to be used to regulate
fed from a voltage source having poor regula- the voltage applied to a circuit drawing less
tion (high series resistance) . The reason for than 15 ma. normal or average current, the
~his presently will become apparent. simplest method of adjusting the series resist-
HANDBOOK Special Supplies 711
T1 V1
115V.
50-60'\..
8,3V.
APPROXIMATE
COMPONENTS OUTPUT VOLTAGE
MAX. 6.3V.
NO FULL CURRENT FILAMEN
T1 y, CHI CH2 c. C2 R1 LOAD LOAD
10 H. IOH, 10JJF,4~
V. 20JJF,450V.
350-0-350 STANCOR STANCOR CORNELL- CORNELL-
STANCOR PC~B409 SYJca C-1001 C-1001 35K,10W 310 240 80MA. 3A.
DUBILIER OUBILIER
MERIT P-3152 MERIT MERIT BR-1045 BR-2045
C-2993 C-2993
3-13 H 7 H. IOJJF,450V, 201JF1 45QV,
375-0-375 STANCOR STANCOR
STANCOR PC-8411 5Y3c;T C-!718 C-1421 CORNELL- CORNELL-
DUBILIER DUB/L/ER 35K,10W 330 230 140MA. 4.5A.
MERIT P-2954 ME/UT MERIT BR-1045
C-3187 C-3180 BR-2045
2-12 H. 4 H. IOJJF 450 V. 10JJF,450 V.
400-0-400 STANCOR STANCOR CORNELL- CORNELL-
5U4-G C-1402 C-1412 DUBILIER DUB ILlER 35K,IOW 300 270 250MA. 5A.
STANCOR PG-8413 MERIT
MERIT BR-1045 BR-1045
c-31a9 C-3 182
10.UF1 6QOV. IO.UF,600 V,
525-0-525 5-25 H. 20 H.
5U4-t;B MALLORY MALLORY 35K,10W 460 37> 240MA. 4A.
UTC S-40 UTC S-32 urc s-31 TC-92 TC-92
Figure 34
DESIGN CHART FOR CHOKE-INPUT POWER SUPPLIES
tion with an output voltage of about 390 should be connected to the 816's. Some varia-
with a 225-ma. drain. Satisfactory regulation tion in the output range of the power supply
can be obtained, however, at up to 450 volts may be obtained by varying the values of the
if the maximum current drain is limited to resistors and the potentiometer across the out-
150 rna. when using a 5R4-GY rectifier. If put. However, be sure that the total plate
the power transformer is used with the taps dissipation rating of 26 watts on the 6AS7-G
giving 520 volts each side of center, and if series regulator is not exceeded at maximum
the maximum drain is limited to 225 rna., current output from the supply. The total dis-
a type 83 rectifier may be used as the power sipation in the 6AS7-G is equal to the cur-
supply rectifier. The 615-volt taps on the rent through it (output current plus the cur-
power transformer deliver a voltage in excess rent passing through the two bleeder strings)
of the maximum ratings of the 83 tube. With multiplied by the drop through the tube (volt-
the 83 in the power supply, excellent regu- age across the filter capacitor minus the out-
lation may be obtained with up to about 420 put voltage of the supply).
volts output if the output current is limited
to 225 rna. But with the 816's as rectifiers 32-10 Power Supply
the full capabilities of all the components Design
in the power supply may be utilized.
If the power supply is to be used with an Power supplies may either be of the choke
output voltage of 400 to 450 volts, the full input type illustrated in figure 34, or the ca-
615 volts each side of center should be ap- pacitor input type, illustrated in figure 35. Ca-
plied to the 816's. However, the maximum pacitor input filter systems are characterized
plate dissipation rating of the 6AS7 -G will by a d-e supply output voltage that runs from
be exceeded, due to the voltage drop across 0.9 to about 1.3 times the r.m.s. voltage of
the tube, if the full current rating of 250 rna. one-half of the high voltage secondary wind-
is used with an output voltage below 400 ing of the transformer. The approximate regu-
volts. If the power supply is to be used with lation of a capacitor input filter system is
full output current at voltages below 400 volts shown in figure 36. Capacitor input filter
the 520-volt taps on the plate transformer systems are not recommended for use with
HANDBOOK Special Supplies 713
T1 V1
11!> v,
so-eo"'
APPROXIMATE
COMPONENTS OUTPUT VOLTAGE MAX. 6.3V.
NO FULL CURRENT FILAMENT
Tl VI CHI Cl C2 R1 LOAD LOAD
10 H. 2.0.UF,4SOV. 20.UF, 4SO v.
2.60-0-2.60 STANCOR CORNELL- CORNELL-
STANCOR PC~8404 5Y3-GT C-1001 35K,10W 340 240 80MA. 3A.
DUSIL!ER DUB ILlER
MERIT P-3148 MERIT BR-2045 BR-2.045
C-2993
7 H.
375-0-375 STANCOR 10.UF,600 V. 10JJF,800 v.
STANCOR PC-8411 SY3-CT C-1.12.1 MALLORY MALLORY' 35K,t0W 480 3>0 12..5MA. 4.SA.
MERIT P-2.954 MERIT TC-92 TC-92
C-3180
4H.
435-0-43.5 STANCOR 8.UF,800V. 81JF1 &00 V.
5U4-G C-1412 SPRAGUE SPRAGUE 35K,Z5W 800 400 22.5 MA. 8 A.
MERIT' P-31515 MERIT CR-86 CR-88
C-3182
4 H.
600-0-800 STANCOR 4.UF, 1 KY. 8.UF, 1 KV.
5R4-GY C-1412 SPRAfiUE SPRAfiUE 50K,25W 800 800 ZOOMA. 8A.
STANCOR PC-8414 MERIT CR-41 CR-81
c-Jtsz
4lJF, t.!IKV. llJF. 1.bKV.
900-0-900
UTC S-45
~R4-GY
2.0 H.
UTC S-31
SPRAGUE
CR-415
SPRA,UE
CR-815
7!1K 2!1W 1200 910 1!10 t.4A. -
Figure 35
DESIGN CHART FOR CAPACITOR-INPUT POWER SUPPLIES
mercury vapor rectifier tubes, as the peak rec- circuit of figure 6 are illustrated in figures 39
tifier current may run as high as five or six and 40. In many instances a transmitter or
times the d-e load current of the power sup- modulator requires two different supply volt-
ply. It is possible, however, to employ type ages, differing by a ratio of about 2:1. A
872-A mercury vapor rectifier tubes in ca- simple bridge supply such as shown in figure
pacitor input circuits wherein the load cur- 39 will provide both of these voltages from
rent is less than 600 milliamperes or so, and a simple broadcast "replacement-type" power
where a low resistance bleeder is used to hold transformer. The first supply of figure 39 is
the minimum current drain of the supply to ample to power a transmitter of the 6CL6-807
a value greater than 50 milliamperes or so. type to an input of 60 watts. The second sup-
Under these conditions the peak plate current ply will run a transmitter running up to 120
of the 872-A mercury vapor tubes will not watts, such as one employing a pair of 6146
be exceeded if the input filter capacitor is
4 /Lfd. or less. MAX -
Tz
APPROXIMATE
COMPONENTS OUTPUT VOL TAG MAX.
CURRENT
NO FULL
T Tz V1-V2 CH1 CH2 c. C2 R1 LOAD LOAD (I CAS)
11.50-0-11~0 2.5V.,10A. 6 H. IOH. 4JJF, 1.5KV. 8JJF, 1.5 KV.
888-A
CHICAGO TRANS. CHI. TRAN. CHI.TRAN. CHI. TRAN. SANGAMO SANGAMO 40K,75W 1150 1000 350t.4A.
P-!07 F-210 868-A R-G3 R-103 llts-4 7115-8
1710-0-1710 2.5V., lOA. 6 H. IOH. 4lJF, 2 KY. 8.UF, 2 KY.
886-A
CHICAGO TRANS. CHI. TRAN.
see-A CHI. TRAN. CHI.TRAN. SANGAMO SANGAMO MK,75W 1700 uoo 4Z5MA.
P-1512 F-210H R-tJ5 R-105 7120-4 7120-B
2900-0-2900 5 V., lOA. 6 H. 6 H. 4.UF, JKV, 4JJF, 3KV.
CHICAGO TRANS. CHI. TRAN.
872-A CHI. TRAN. CHI. TRAN. SANGAMO SANGAMO 70K 2750 700 MA.
872-A 2500
P-2126 F-510H R-tJl R-tJT 7130-<1 '1130-4 200W
4J.JF, 4KV.
3500-0-3500 5 V., fOA.
11rc 872-A
10 H.
11rc
10 H.
11rc CORNELL- ~~NiL~~ 100 K 3400 3000 1000 t.<IA.
UTC CG-309 872-A DUBILIER DUBILIER 200W
LS-82 C6-1S Cfi-tS T40040-A T40040-A
4600-0-4600
~v., 20A. IOH. 10 H. 4lJF, 5K\/. 4J.JF, SKV
UTC CG-310 ~75-A 100 K
CHICAGO TRANS.
11rc .57.5-A 11rc 11rc AERO VOX AERO VOX 300W 4400 4000 600 MA.
LS-83 C(i-1$ C(i-1$ JP-09 JP-09
P-4353
Figure 37
DESIGN CHART FOR CHOKE-INPUT HIGH VOLTAGE SUPPLIES
tetrodes in the power amplifier stage. It is Bridge supplies may also be used to ad-
to be noted that separate filament transform- vantage to obtain relatively high plate volt-
ers are used for rectifier tubes V, and v,, and ages for high powered transmitting equip-
that one leg of each filament is connected to ment. Type 866-A and 872-A rectifier tubes
the cathode of the respective mbe, which is can only serve in a supply delivering under
at a high potential with respect to ground. 3500 volts in a full-wave circuit. Above this
The choke CH, in the negative lead of the voltage, the peak inverse voltage rating of the
supply serves as a common filter choke for rectifier tube will be exceeded, and danger
both output voltages. Each portion of the sup- of flash-back within the rectifier tube will be
ply may be considered as having a choke in- present. However, with bridge circuits, the
put filter system. Filaments of v, should be same tubes may deliver up to as much as 7000
energized before the primary voltage is ap- volts d.c. without exceeding the peak inverse
plied to T,. voltage rating.
The bridge circuit also permits the use of
the so-called "pole transformer" in high volt-
age power supplies. Two KVA transformers of
this type having a 110/220 volt secondary
winding and a split 2200 volt primary wind-
ing may often be picked up in salvage yards
for a dollar or two. If reversed, and either
110 or 220 volts applied to the "primary"
winding approximately 2200 volts r.m.s. will
be developed across the new "secondary" wind-
ing. If used in a bridge circuit as shown in
Figure 38
UNDER-CHASSIS
POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY
All components are firmly mounted to the
steel chassis and all wiring is cabled. High
voltage leads are run in automobile ignition
cables. Heavy-duty terminal strips are mounted
along the rear edge ol the chassis. The con-
trol panel ol this supply is shown in ligure 1
ol this chapter.
HANDBOOK Special Supplies 715
6.3 v.
T2.,T3=6.3V., 1 A.
STANCOR P-6134
400-0-400
STANCDRPC-8412
6AX5-GT 5U4-GB
16JJF.
450 v.
15JJF,
4SOV.
10 H.
225MA.
8 H.
75MA.
20K lOW. ,
100 K
v 625 2.60 115 MA 50 MA.
115V.
S0-60'\..o
Figure 39
DUAL VOLTAGE BRIDGE POWER SUPPLIES
figure 40, a d-e supply voltage of about 1900 age before a full wave-type transformer ts
volts at a current of 500 milliamperes may be utilized in bridge rectifier service.
drawn from such a transformer. Do not at-
tempt to use a smaller transformer than the 32-11 300 Volt,
2-KV A rating, as the voltage regulation of SO Ma. Power Supply
the unit will be too poor for practical pur-
poses. There are many applications in the labora-
tory and amateur station for a simple low
For higher voltages, a pole transformer with drain power supply. The most common appli-
a 4400 volt primary and a 110/220 volt sec-
ondary may be reversed to provide a d-e plate
supply of about 3800 volts.
Commercial plate transformers intended for
full wave rectifier service may also be used
in bridge service provided that the insulation
at the center-tap point of the high voltage
winding is sufficient to withstand one-half of
the r.m.s. voltage of the secondary winding.
Many high voltage transformers are specifical-
ly designed for operation with the center-tap
of the secondary winding at ground potential;
consequently the insulation of the winding at
this point is not designed to withstand high
voltage. It is best to check with the manufac-
turer of the transformer and find out if the
insulation will withstand the increased volt-
"'-----;:::::;=.;:::::::::::=::;-----1:~6.3 v.
REGULATION
LOAD(MA) VOLTS
0 600
Figure 43 100 550
100 WATT "ECONOMY MODEL" 11sv. rv 200 sao
POWER SUPPLY
Employing a TV-type voltage doubler trans- Figure 44
former and inexpensive selenium rectifiers,
this supply delivers 500 volts at 200 milli- SCHEMATIC, ECONOMY SUPPLY
amperes with good regulation. T1-l 17 volt secondary rated at 280 ma for
The selenium rectifiers are mounted on a doubler service. Three 6.3 volt fi/a;,ent
long 6-32 bolt fastened to two upright posts windings. Stancor P-8336.
mounted at each front corner of the chassis. CH,-8.5 henry at 200 ma. Stancor C-1721.
SR,-SR,-;-500 ma. selenium rectifier. Sarkes-
Tarzan or equivalent.
supply is good, the voltage dropping from
600 volts at no load to 500 volts at maximum The schematic of a typical supply is shown
current drain. i~ figure 46. Primary power source may be
The supply is built upon a steel chassis e1~her 115 or 230 volts, the latter providing
measuring 9" x 6" x 2". The filter capacitors slightly better power supply regulation. The
are mounted in the under-chassis area on two transormer primaries are connected in
phenolic tie-point strips. All transformer leads series for 230 volt operation, or in parallel
are left their full length so that the trans- for .115 volt operation. In addition the pri-
former will be in usable shape in the event manes may be connected in series for half-
it is eventually used in a different piece of voltage operation on 115 volts as shown. The
equipment. supply provides 750 volts at 400 ma. under
this operating condition.
For optimum dynamic voltage regulation
32-13 1500 Volt, under varying loads such as imposed by side-
425 Milliampere band or class B modulator equipment the
output filter capacitor of the supply should
Power Supply
One of the most popular and also one of
the most convenient power ranges for ama-
teur equipment is that which can be supplied
from a 1500 volt power unit with a current
capability of about 400 ma. The r-f amplifier
of an A-M phone transmitter ( 1500 volts
at 250 ma.) capable of 375 watts input and
its companion modulator ( 1500 volts at 20-
200 ma.) can both be run from a supply of
this rating. The use of this supply for SSB
work will permit a p.e.p. of about 600 watts
( 1500 volts at 400 ma.) with the new low
voltage, high current RCA 7094 tetrodes.
This voltage will be found to be very eco-
nomical when the cost of power supply com-
ponents is computed. A jump in supply volt-
age to 2000 will almost double the cost of
the various components. Unless full kilowatt Figure 45
operation is intended, 1500 volts is a very UNDER-CHASSIS VIEW
convenient and relatively economical compro- OF ECONOMY SUPPLY
mise voltage. Two 20 yfd., 450 volt capacitors are connected
1n parallel for each 80 !lfd. unit.
718 Power Supplies THE RADIO
RYI 866
35"
;ow
Figure 46
SCHEMATIC, 1500 VOLT, 425 MILLIAMPERE SUPPLY
1,_1110- 0- 1710 volts, 425 ma. 115/230 volt primary. Chicago P-1512
T.-2.5 volt, 10 ampere, 10 KV insulation. Stancor P-3060
CHJ-6 henry at 300 ma., CCS. Chicago R-63
RFC-"Hash" suppression choke. Millen 77866
be as large as is practical. Occasionally 60 figure 47. Separate rectifier and filter systems
1-'fd., 2000 volt capacitors can be picked up may be used with the transformer to provide
on the "surplus" market for a few dollars, two different output voltages provided the
although their new price would give most ~otal wattage drain from the supply does not
amateurs pause for thought. An inexpensive exceed the wattage rating of the transformer.
and reliable substitute may be made up of a The drain may be divided between the two
group of replacement-type tubular electrolytic supply systems in any manner desired. The
capacitors connected in series-parallel as shown intermittent rating of Tz (figure 4 7) is 750
in the schematic. Eight 30 1-'fd., 450 volt watts and the continuous duty rating is 600
capacitors connected in series parallel will watts. Under CCS rating, the supply can pro-
provide an effective value of 15 p;fd., at a vide (for example) 2000 volts at 160 rna.
working voltage of 1800. This is the mini- for the operation of an 813 r-f amplifier at
mum value suitable for sideband operation. 320 watts input, and 1750 volts at 20-150
Sixteen capacitors will provide 30 f'fd., at rna. for the operation of 811-A class B modu-
1800 volts. lators. Under intermittent duty rating, the
A power supply of this type should be 813 amplifier can run at 400 watts input
built upon a heavy steel chassis, and all wir- (phone) and 500 watts ( c-w) without over-
ing must be done with 10,000 volt TV-type loading the supply.
plastic insulated wire. R-F chokes should be A remote switch is used to energize the
placed in the plate leads of the mercury vapor plate circuit relay of the supply. An auxiliary
rectifiers as shown, to reduce the tendency antenna relay is also operated by the "trans-
these tubes have of breaking into oscillation mit" switch.
over a portion of the operating cycle. Oscil-
lation ot this type will produce a 120 cycle 32-15 A Kilowatt
"buzz" on the sidebands of the signal. The Power Supply
parasitic is eliminated by the use of the
chokes. Shown in figure 48 is the schematic of a
power supply capable of delivering 2500 volts
32-14 A Dual Voltage at a continuous current drain of 500 milli-
Transmitter Supply amperes, or 700 milliamperes with an inter-
mittent load. The supply is designed to power
The majority of high voltage transformers a kilowatt amplifier operating at 2500 volts
have tapped secondary windings, similar to and 400 rna., in conjunction with a 500 watt
the transformer shown in the schematic of modulator operating at 2500 volts at a vary-
HANDBOOK Special Supplies 719
CH1
(MOD,)
'-1---1--0+ 17 50 v.
AT 150 MA.
R1
(R.F.)
"--1.----..---o +AT2000 v.
160MA.
R~
TRANSMIT
SWITCH
ANTENNA
RELAY
Figure 47
DUAL VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY
r,, T,--2.5 volts at 5 amperes. Stancor P-6733
T,-2400-2700 volts each side center tap at 375 ma. ICAS. Stancor P-8032
CH,-3 to 17 henry, 300 ma. Stancor C-1403
CHz----8 henry, 300 ma., Stancor C-1 4 73
R" R,-70K., 700 watt
RFC,, RFC,-"Hash" suppression choke. J. W. Miller 7865 twin chokes (2 req.)
RY,-SPST relay, 715 volt coil.
720
Tools 721-A
Figure 1
SOFT ALUMINUM
SHEET MAY BE CUT
WITH HEAVY
KITCHEN SHEARS
grinding head, etc. If power equipment is pur- tube sockets mount in a %-inch hole, while
chased, obviously some of the hand tools and 9-pill sockets mount in a %-inch hole. Green-
accessories listed will be superfluous. A drill lee socket punches can be obtained in these
press greatly facilitates construction work, sizes, or a smaller hole may be reamed to the
arid it is unfortunate that a good one costs as proper size. Needless to say, the punch is
much as a small transmitter. much the more satisfactory solution. Mounting
Not listed in the table are several special- screws for miniature sockets are usually of
purpose radio tools which are somewhat of a the 4-40 size.
luxury, but are nevertheless quite handy, such
as various around-the-corner screwdrivers and Metal Chassis Though quite a few more tools
wrenches, special soldering iron tips, etc. and considerably more time
These can be found in the larger radio parts will be required for metal chassis construction,
stores and are usually listed in their mail or- much neater and more satisfactory equipment
der catalogs. can be built by mounting the parts on sheet
If it is contemplated to use the newer and metal chassis instead of breadboards. This type
very popular miniature series of tubes ( 6AK5, of construction is necessary when shielding of
6C4, 6BA6, etc.) in the construction of equip- the appartus is required. A front panel and a
ment certain additional tools will be required back shield minimize the danger of shock and
to mount the smaller components. Miniature complete the shielding of the enclosure.
Figure 2
CONVENTIONAL
WOOD EXPANSION
BIT IS EFFECTIVE IN
DRILLING SOCKET
HOLES IN REYNOLDS
DO-IT-YOURSELF
ALUMINUM
HANDBOOK Material 723-A
Figure 3
SOFT ALUMINUM
TUBING MAY BE
BENT AROUND
WOODEN FORM
BLOCKS. TO PREVENT
THE TUBE FROM
COLLAPSING ON
SHARP BENDS, IT IS
PACKED WITH
WET SAND.
Figure 4
A WOODWORKING
PLANE MAY BE USED
TO SMOOTH OR
TRIM THE EDGES OF
REYNOLDS
DO-IT-YOURSELF
ALUMINUM STOCK.
724-A Workshop Practice THE RADIO
Figure 6
TVI ENCLOSURE MADE FROM
SINGLE SHEET OF
PERFORATED ALUMINUM
Reynolds Metal Co. "Do-it-yourself" aluminum
sheet may be cut and folded to form TVI-
proof enclosure. One-hal# inch lip on edges is
bolted to center section with 6-32 machine
screws.
33-3 TV I-Proof
Figure S Enclosures
INEXPENSIVE OPERATING DESK MADE
FROM ALUMINUM ANGLE STOCK, PLY- Armed with a right-angle square, a tin-snips
WOOD AND A FLUSH-TYPE DOOR and a straight edge, the home constructor will
find the assembly of aluminum enclosures an
projecting through corresponding holes in the easy task. This section will show simple con-
panel. struction methods, and short cuts in producing
enclosures.
Working with The necessity of employing The simplest type of aluminum enclosure
Aluminum "electrically tight enclosures" is that formed from a single sheet of per-
for the containment of TVI- forated material as shown in figure 6. The
producing harmonics has led to the general top, sides, and back of the enclosure are of
use of aluminum for chassis, panel, and en- one piece, complete with folds that permit
closure construction. If the proper type of the formed enclosure to be bolted together
aluminum material is used, it may be cut and along the edges. The top area of the enclosure
worked with the usual woodworking tools should match the area of the chassis to en-
found in the home shop. Hard, brittle alumi- sure a close fit. The front edge of the en-
num alloys such as 24ST and 61ST should be closure is attached to aluminum angle strips
avoided, and the softer materials such as 2S that are bolted to the front panel of the
or Y:zH should be employed. unit; the sides and back can either be bolted
A new market product is Reynold's Do-it- to matching angle Strips affixed to the chassis,
yourself aluminum, which is being distributed or may s'imply be attached to the edge of the
on a nationwide basis through hardware stores, chassis with s.elf-tapping sheet metal screws.
lumber yards and building material outlets. Enclosures of this type are used on the all-
This material is an alloy which is temper se- band transmitter described in chapter 31.
lected for easy working with ordinary tools. A more sophisticated enclosure is shown
Aluminum sheet, bar and angle stock may be in figure 7. In this assembly aluminum angle
obtained, as well as perforated sheets for ven- stock is cut to length to form a framework
tilated enclosures. upon which the individual sides, back, and
Figures 1 through 4 illustrate how this soft top of the enclosure are bolted. For greatest
material may be cut and worked with ordinary strength, small aluminum gusset plates should
shop tools, and fig. 5 shows a simple operating be affixed in each corner of the enclosure.
desk that may be made from aluminum angle The complete assembly may be held together
stock, plywood and a flush-type six foot door. by no. 6 sheet metal screws.
HANDBOOK Openings 725-A
33-4 Enclosure
Openings
Openings into shielded enclosures may be
made simply by covering them by a piece of
shielding held in pla:ce by sheet metal screws.
Openings through vertical panels, however,
usually require a bit more attention to pre-
vent leakage of harmonic energy through the
crack of the door which is supposed to seal
the opening. A simple way to provide a panel
opening is to employ the Bud ventilated door
rack panel model PS-814 or 815. The grille
opening in this panel has holes small enough
in area to prevent sel'ious harmonic leakage.
The actual door opening, however, does not Figure 7
seal tightly enough to be called TVI-proof. TVI-PROOF ENCLOSURE" BUILT OF
In areas of high TV signal strength where PERFORATED ALUMINUM SHEET
AND ANGLE STOCK
a minimum of operation on 28 Me. is con-
templated, the door is satisfactory as is. To
accompHsh more complete harmonic suppres-
sion, the edges of the opening should be lined 33-5 Summation
with preformed contact finger stock manufac- of the Problem
tured by Eitel-McCullough, Inc., of San Bruno,
Calif. Eimac finger stock is an excellent means The creation of r-f energy is accompanied
of providing good .contact continuity when by harmonic generation and leakage of funda-
using components with adjustable or moving mental and harmonic energy from the generator
contact surfaces, or in acting as electrical source. For practical purposes, radio frequen-
"weatherstrip" around access doors in enclo- cy power may be considered as a form of both
sures. Harmonic leakage through such a sealed electrical and r-f energy. As electrical energy,
opening is reduced to a negligible level. The it will travel along any convenient conductor.
mating surface to the finger stock should be As r-f energy, it will radiate directly from the
free of paint, and should provide a good elec- source or from any conductor connected to the
tl'ical connection to the stock. source. In view of this "dual personality" of
A second method of re-establishing elec- r-f emanations, there is no panacea for all
tvical continuity ac!'oss an access port is ro orms of r-f energy leakage. The cure involves
employ Metex shielding around the mating both filtering and shielding: one to block the
edges of the opening. Metex is a flexible knit- paths of conducted energy, the other to pre-
ted wire mesh which may be obtained in vent the leakage of radiated energy. The proper
various sizes and shapes. This r-f gasket ma- combination of filtering and shielding can re-
terial is produced by Metal Textile Corp., duce the radiation of harmonic energy from a
Roselle, N.J. Metex is both flexible and resili- signal source some 80 decibels. In most cases,
ent and conforms to irregularities in mating this is sufficient to eliminate interference caused
surfaces with a minimum of closing pressure. by the generation of undesirable harmonics.
726-A Workshop Practice THE RADIO
Chassis
Layout
Practice
The chassis first should be covered
with a layer of wrapping paper,
which is drawn tightly down on
a11 sides and fastened with scotch tape. This
allows any number of measurement lines and
hole centers to be spotted in the correct po-
B
g
0
o,
troQQ_Qdj
8
~
DRILL HOLES SLIGHTLY
INSIDE DASHED OUTLINE
OF DESIRED HOLE.
BREAK OUT
I
IY.>."""'"-'~""_j
PIECE INSIDE
DRILL HOLES.
D0
FILE
SMOOTH
removing these. Perhaps the best is to take a pieces of apparatus to chassis or breadboards.
chisel (be sure it is one for use on metal) and The first, using nuts and machine screws, is
set it so that its bottom face is parallel to the slow, and the commercial manufacturing prac-
piece. Then gently tap it with a hammer. This tice of using self-tapping screws is gaining
usually will make a clean job with a little favor. For the mounting of small parts such
practice. If one has access to a counterbore, as resistors and capacitors, "tie points" are
this will also do a nice job. A countersink will very useful to gain rigidity. They also con-
work, although it bevels the edges. A drill of tribute materially to the appearance of finished
several sizes larger is a much used arrange- apparatus.
ment. The third method is by filing off the Rubber grommets of the proper size, placed
burr, which does a good job but scratches the in all chassis holes through which wires are
adjacent metal surfaces badly. to be passed, will give a neater appearing job
and also will reduce the possibility of short
Mounting There are two methods in gen- circuits.
Components eral use for the fastening of
transformers, chokes, and similar Soldering Making a strong, low-resistance
solder joint does not mean just
dropping a blob of solder on the two parts to
NUMBERED DRILL SIZES be joined and then hoping that they'll stick.
Correct for There are several definite rules that must be
Dl- Tapping
observed.
DRILL a meter Clears Steel or
NUMBER (in.) Screw Brasst All parts to be soldered must be absolutely
1 .. .228 clean. To clean a wire, lug, or whatever it may
2 ..... --- .221 12-24
3 -- ................ .213 14-24 be, take your pocket knife and scrape it thor-
4 .209 12-20 oughly, until fresh metal is laid bare. It is not
5 - ................. .205
6 -- ----- ---------- .204 enough to make a few streaks; scrape until the
7 .... -- ......... .201 part to be soldered is bright.
8 ............. .199
9 -- --- .196 Make a good mechanical joint before apply-
10* __ .193 10-32
11
--
.191 10-24
ing any solder. Solder is intended primarily
12* --------------------- .189 to make a good electrical connection; mechani-
13 -- .185 cal rigidity should be obtained by bending tht'
14 ... ---------------- .182
15 .... --------------- .180 wire into a small hook at the end and nipping
16 -- -- -------- .177 12-24
17 ---- .173
it firmly around the other part, so that it will
18* __ - .169 8-32 hold well even before the solder is applied.
19 -- .166 12-20
20 .161 Keep your iron properly tinned. It is im-
21--- ............. .159 10-32 possible to get the work hot enough to take
22 -- ................ .157
23 --- ............ .154 the solder properly if the iron is dirty. To tin
24 .152 your iron, file it, while hot, on one side until
25* - -- ............ .149 10-24
26 ...................... .147 a full surface of clean metal is exposed. Im-
27 -- ................
28 --- .................
.144 mediately apply rosin core solder until a thin
.140 6-32
29*. --- ................ .136 8-32 layer flows completely over the exposed sur-
30 ----------- .128 face. Repeat for the other faces. Then take a
31 .. ----------- .120
32 .. --- . ........... .116 clean rag and wipe off all excess solder and
33* __ .113 4-36 4-40
34
--
.111
rosin. The iron should also be wiped frequently
--
35 --------------- .110 6-32 while the actual construction is going on; it
36 --------- .106 helps prevent pitting the tip.
37 ----- .104
38 -------------------- .102 Apply the solder to the work, not to the
39* ------------------ .100 3-48
40 -------------- .098 iron. The iron should be held against the parts
41 --------- .096 ~o be joined until they are thoroughly heated.
42 .093 4-36 4-40
43 ---------------- .089 2-56
The solder should then be applied against the
44 ..... ------- .086 parts, and the iron should be held in place
45*-- .082 3-48
until the solder flows smoothly and envelopes
tUse next size larger drill for tapping
bakelite and similar composition materials the work. If it acts like water on a greasy
(plastics, etc.). plate, and forms a ball, the work is not suf-
*Sizes most commonly used in radio con- ficiently clean.
struction.
The ompleted joint must be held perfectly
still until the solder has had time to solidify.
Figure 9 If the work is moved before the solder has be-
728-A Workshop Practice
- COIL
Figure 10 Figure 11
come completely solid, a "cold" joint will re- There are also several brands of dull gloss
sult. This can be identified immediately, be- black enamels on the market which adhere
cause the solder will have a dull "white" ap- well to metals and make a nice appearance.
pearance rather than one of shiny "silver." Airdrying wrinkle finishes are sometimes suc-
Such joints tend to be of high resistance and cessful, but a bake job is usually far better.
will very likely have a bad effect upon a cir- Wrinkle finishes, properly applied, are very
cuit. The cure is simple, merely reheat the dumble and are pleasing to the eye. If you
joint and do the job correctly. live in a large community, there is probably
Wipe away all surplus flux when the joint an enameling concern which can wrinkle your
has cooled if you are using a paste type flux. work for you at a reasonable cost. A very at-
Be sure it is non-corrosive, and use it with tractive finish, for panels especially, is to
plain (not rosin core) solder. spray a wrinkle finish with aluminum paint.
In any painting operation (or plating, either,
Finishes If the apparatus is constructed on for that matter) , the work should be very
a painted chassis (commonly avail- thoroughly cleaned of all greases and oils.
able in black wrinkle and gray wrinkle), there To protect brass from tarnish, thoroughly
is no need for application of a protective coat- cleanse and remove the last trace of grease by
ing when the equipment is finished, assuming the use of potash and water. The brass must
that you are careful not to scratch or mar the be carefully rinsed with water and dried; but
finish while drilling holes and mounting parts. in doing it, care must be taken not to handle
However, many amateurs prefer to use un- any portion with the bare hands or anything
painted (zinc or cadmium plated) chassis, be- else that is greasy. Then lacquer.
cause it is much simpler to make a chassis
ground connection with this type of chassis. Winding Coils Coils are of two general types,
A thin coat of clear "linoleum" lacquer may those using a form and "air-
be applied to the whole chassis after the wir- wound" types. Neither type offers any particu-
ing is completed to retard rusting. In localities lar constructional difficulties. Figure 10 il-
near the sea coast it is a good idea to lacquer lustrates the procedure used in form winding
the various chassis cutouts even on a painted a coil. If the winding is to be spaced, the
chassis, as rust will get a good start at these spacing can be done either by eye or a string
points unless the metal is protected where rhe or another piece of wire may be wound simul-
drill or saw has exposed it. If too thick a coat taneously with the coil wire and removed after
is applied, the lacquer will tend to peel. It the winding is in place. The usual procedure
may be thinned with lacquer thinner to permit is to clamp one end of the wire in a vise, at-
application of a light coat. A thin coat will taching the other end to the coil form and with
adhere to any clean metal surface that is not the coil form in hand, walk slowly towards the
too shiny. vise winding the wire but at the same time
An attractive dull gloss finish, almost vel- keeping a strong tension on the wire as the
vety can be put on aluminum by sand-blasting form is rotated. After the coil is wound, if
it with a very weak blast and fine particles there is any possibility of the turns slipping,
and then lacquering it. Soaking the aluminum the completed coil is either entirely coated
in a solution of lye produces somewhat the with a coil or Duco cement or cemented 1n
same effect as a fine grain sand blast. those spots where slippage might occur.
Figure 12
GOOD SHOP
LAYOUT AIDS
CAREFUL
WORKMANSHIP
Built in a corner of a
garage, this shop has all
features necessary for
electronic work. Test in-
struments are arranged
on shelves above bench.
Numerous outlets reduce
11
haywire" produced by
tangled line cords. Not
shown in/icture are drill
press an sander at end
of left bench
V-h-f and u-h-f coils are commonly wound framework made of 2"x4" lumber. The top
of heavy enameled wire on a form and then of the workbench is covered with hard-sur-
removed from the form as in figure 11. If face Masonite. The edge of the surface is pro-
the coil is long or has a tendency to buckle, tected with aluminum "counter edging" strip,
strips of polystyrene or a similar material may obtainable at large hardware stores. Two wood-
be cemented longitudinally inside the coil. Due en shelves 12" wide are placed above the
allowance must be made for the coil springing bench to hold the various items of test equip-
out when removed from the form, when select- ment. The shelves are bolted to the wall studs
ing the diameter of the form. with large angle brackets and have wooden
On air wound coils of this type, spacing be- end pieces. Along the edge of the lower shelf
tween turns is accomplished after removal a metal "outlet strip" is placed that has an
from the form, by running a pencii, the shank 115-volt outlet every six inches along its
of a screwdriver or other round object spirally length. A similar strip is run along the back
between the turns from one end of the coil to of the lower shelf. The front strip is used
the other, again making due allowance for for equipment that is being bench-tested, and
spring. the rear strip powers the various items of test
Air-wound coils, approaching the appearance equipment placed on the shelves.
of commercially manufactured ones, can be At the left of the bench is a storage bin
constructed by using a round wooden form for small components. A file cabinet can be
which has been sawed diagonally from end seen at the right of the photograph. This nec-
to end. Strips of insulating material are tem- essary item holds schematics, transformer data
porarily attached to this mandrel, the wire sheets, and other papers that normally are
then being wound over these strips with the lost in the usual clutter and confusion.
desired separation between turns and cemented The area below the workbench has two
to the strips. When dry, the split mandrel may storage shelves which are concealed by sliding
be removed by unwedging it. doors made of Y.,-inch Masonite. Heavier tooJs,
and large components are stored in this area.
33-7 Shop Layout On the floor and not shown in the photo-
The size of your workshop is relatively un- graph is a very necessary item of shop equip-
important since the shop layout will deter- ment: a large trash receptacle.
mine its efficiency and the ease with which A compact and efficient shop built in one-
you may complete your work. half of a wardrobe closet is shown in figure
Shown in figure 12 is a workshop built 13. The workbench length is four feet. The
into a lO'xlO' area in the corner of a garage. wp is made of 4"x6" lumber sheathed with
The workbench is 32" wide, made up of four hard surface Masonite and trimmed with
strips of 2"x8" lumber supported on a solid "counter edging" strip. The supporting struc-
729-A
730-A Workshop Practice
Figure 13
COMPLETE WORKSHOP IN A CLOSET!
Careful layout permits complete electronic
workshop to be placed in one-half of a ward-
robe closet. Work bench is built atop an un-
painted three-shelf bookcase.
ture is made from an unpainted three-shelf a single shelf contains a 115-volt '"outlet strip."
bookcase. A 2"x2" leg is placed under the The instruments at the top of the photo are
from corners of the bench to provide maxi- placed on the wardrobe shelf.
mum stability. When not in use, the doors of the ward-
Atop the bench, a small wooden framework robe are closed, concealing the workshop com-
supports needed items of test equipment and pletely from view.
CHAPTER THIRTY-FOUR
Electronic
Test Equipment
All amateur stations are required by law to variably requires the use of some type of field-
have certain items of test equipment avuihLble strength meter, and a standing-wave meter of
within the station. A c-w station is required some type is very helpful. Lastly, if much v-h-f
to have a frequency meter or other means in work is to be done, a simple grid-dip meter
addition to the transmitter frequency control will be found to be one of the most used items
of test equipment in the station.
for insuring that the transmitted signal is on
a frequency within one of the frequency bands 34-1 Voltage,
assigned for such use. A radiophone station is Current and Power
required in addition to have a means of deter-
mining that the transmitter is not being modu- The measurement of voltage and current in
lated in excess of its modulation capability, radio circuits is very important in proper main-
and in any event not more than 100 per cent. tenance of equipment. Vacuum tubes of the
Further, any station operating with a power types used in communications work must be
input greater than 900 watts is required to operated within rather narrow limits in regard
have a means of determining the exact input to filament or heater voltage, and they must
to the final stage of the transmitter, so as to be operated within certain maximum limits in
insure that the power input to the plate circuit regard to the voltage a~d current on other
of the output stage does not exceed 1000 electrodes.
watts. Both direct current and voltage are most
The additional test and measurement equip- commonly measured with the aid of an instru-
ment required by a station will be determined ment consisting of a coil that is free to rotate
by the type of operation contemplated. It is in a constant magnetic field (d'Arsonval type
desirable that all stations have an accurately instrument). If the instrument is to be used for
calibrated volt-ohmmeter for routine transmit- the measurement of current it is called an am-
ter and receiver checking and as an assistance meter or milliammeter. The current flowing
in getting new pieces of equipment into opera- through the circuit is caused to flow through
tion. An oscilloscope and an audio oscillator the moving coil of this type of instrument. If
make a very desirable adjunct to a phone sta- the current to be measured is greater than 10
tion using AM or FM transmission, and are a milliamperes or so it is the usual practice to
necessity if single-sideband operation is con- cause the majority of the current to flow
templated. A calibrated signal generator is al- through a by-pass resistor called a shunt, only
most a necessity if much receiver work is con- a specified portion of the current flowing
templated, although a frequency meter of LM through the moving coil of the instrument.
or BC-221 type, particularly if it includes in- The calculation of shunts for extending the
ternal modulation, will serve in place of the range of d-e milliammeters and ammeters is
signal generator. Extensive antenna work 1n- discussed in Chapter Two.
721-B
722-B Test Equipment THE RADIO
@
+fO +100 +250 +1000
Figure 2
VOLT-OHMMETER CIRCUIT
tOK 90K 150 K 750K With the switch In position 1, the 0-1 milliam-
meter would be connected directly to the
@ terminals. In position 2 the meter would read
from 0-100,000 ohms, approximately, with a
resistance value of 4500 ohms at half scale.
+ (Note: The half-scale resistance value of an
ohmmeter using this circuit is equal to the
resistance in series with the battery inside
the instrument.) The other four taps are volt-
age ranges with 10, 50, 250, and 500 volts
fOK full scale.
2X2/879
2.~ v.
A.C.
VOLTAGE R1
FROM
SOURCE
:~~
WITH
D.C. C1 +
RETURN CONVENTIONAL
PATH C HIGH-SENSITIVITY
VOLTMETER
fUV.
Figure 5 Figure 6
SCHEMATIC OF A HIGH-VOLTAGE PEAK PEAK-VOLTAGE MEASUREMENT
VOLTMETER CIRCUIT
A peak voltmeter such as diagrammed Through use of the arrangement shown above
above is convenient lor the measure- it is possible to make accurate measurements
ment of peak voltages at fairly high of peak a-c voltages, such as across the sec-
power levels from a source of moder- ondary of a modulation transformer, with a
ately low impedance. conventional d-e multi-voltmeter. Capacitor
c,-.001-JJ.fd. high-voltage mica C and transformer T should, of course, be in-
C2-1.0JJ.fd. high-voltage paper sulated for the highest peak voltage likely to
R 1-500,000 ohms (two 0.25-megohm liz-watt be encountered. A capacitance of 0.25-JJ.fd.
in series) at C has been found to be adequate. The
R2-l.O megohm (four 0.25-megohm liz-watt higher the sensitivity of the indicating d-e
in series) voltmeter, the smaller will be the error be-
T-2.5 v., 1.75 a. filament transformer tween the indication on the meter and the ac-
M-0-1 d-e milliammeter tual peak voltage being measured.
5 lll-w-5-p-d-t toggle switch
5-5-p-s-t toggle switch
(Note: c, is a by-pass around c,, the induc- of the trace on the c-r tube screen. The peak
tive reactance of which may be appreciable positive excursion of the wave will be slightly
at high frequencies.)
flattened by the action of the v.t.v.m. Usually
this flattening will be so small as to be negli-
ranges: 500 and 1500 volts peak full scale. gible.
Capacitors C and c, should be able to with- An alternative arrangement, shown in figure
stand a voltage in excess of the highest peak 6, is quite convenient for the measurement of
voltage to be measured. Likewise, R, and R, high a-c voltages such as are encountered in
should be able to withstand the same amount the adjustment and testing of high-power
of voltage. The easiest and least expensive audio amplifiers and modulators. The arrange-
way of obtaining such resistors is to use sev- ment consists simply of a 2X2 rectifier tube
eral low-voltage resistors in series, as shown and a filter capacitor of perhaps 0.25-pJd. ca-
in figure 5. Other voltage ranges can be ob- pacitance, but with a voltage rating high
tained by changing the value of these re- enough that it is not likely to be punctured
sistors, but for voltages less than several hun- as a result of any tests made. Cathode-ray
dred volts a more linear calibration can be ob- oscilloscope capacitors, and those for electro-
tained by using a receiving-type diode. A cali- static-deflection TV tubes often have ratings
bration curve should be run to eliminate the as high as 0.25 J.Lfd. at 7500 to 10,000 volts.
appreciable error due to the high internal re- The indicating instrument is a conventional
sistance of the diode, preventing the capacitor multi-scale d-e voltmeter of the high-sensitivity
from charging to the full peak value of the type, preferably with a sensitivity of 20,000 or
voltage being measured. 50,000 ohms per volt. The higher the sen-
A direct reading diode peak voltmeter of sitivity of the d-e voltmeter used with the
the type shown in figure 5 will load the source rectifier, the smaller will be the amount of
of voltage by approximately one-half the value flattening of the a-c wave as a result of the
of the load resistance in the circuit (R,, or R, rectifier action.
plus R,, in this case). Also, the peak voltage
reading on the meter will be slightly less than Measurement Audio frequency or radio fre-
the actual peak voltage being measured. The of Power quency power in a resistive
amount of lowering of the reading is deter- circuit is most commonly and
mined by the ratio of the reactance of the most easily determined by the indirect method,
storage capacitance to the load resistance. If i.e., through the use of one of the following
a cathode-ray oscilloscope is placed across the formulas:
terminals of the v.t.v.m. when a voltage is be- P=EI P=E'/R P=I'R
ing measured, the actual amount of the lower- These three formulas mean that if any two of
ing in voltage may be determined by inspection the three factors determining power are known
726-B Test Equipment THE RADIO
Ro F
value between 2500 and 10,000 ohms for
both will be satisfactory. The two resistors
Rc and Rn should be 1000-ohm wire-wound
potentiometers. Cs should be a straight-line
capacitance capacitor with an accurate vernier Figure 10
dial; 500 to 1000 fLfLfd. will be satisfactory. TWO A-C BRIDGE CIRCUITS
Cc can be a two or three gang broadcast ca- The operation of these bridges is essentially
pacitor from 700 to 1000 fLfLfd. maximum ca- the same as those of figure 9 except that
a.c. is fed into the bridge instead of d.c. and
pacitance. a pair of phones is used as the indicator in
stead of the galvanometer. The bridge shown
The procedure for making a measurement at (A) can be used for the measurement of
is as follows: The unknown capacitor Cx is resistance, but it is usually used for the
measurement of the impedance and reactance
placed in parallel with the standard capacitor of coils and capacitors at frequencies from
Cs. The Wagner ground Rn is varied back and 200 to 1000 cycles. The bridge shown at (B)
is used for the measurement of small values
forth a small amount from the center of its of capacitance by the substitution method.
range until no signal is heard in the phones Full description of the operation of both
bridges is given in the accompanying text.
with the switch S in the center position. Then
the switch S is placed in either of the two out-
side positions, Co is adjusted to a capaci- in terms of resistance and capacitance, and
tance somewhat greater than the assumed value so forth. Terman's Radio Engineers' Handbook
of the unknown Cx, and the bridge is brought gives an excellent discussion of common types
into balance by variation of the standard ca- of a-c bridge circuits.
pacitor C,. It may be necessary to cut some
resistance in at Rc and to switch to the other 34-4 Frequency
outside position of S before an exact balance
can be obtained. The setting of Cs is then Measurements
noted, Cx is removed from the circuit (but the All frequency measurement within the
leads which went to it are not changed in any United States is based on the transmissions of
way which would alter their mutual capaci- Station WWV of the National Bureau of
tance), and Cs is readjusted until balance is Standards. This station operates continuously
again obtained. The difference in the two set- on frequencies of 2.5, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30,
tings of Cs is equal to the capacitance of the and 3 5 Me. The carriers of those frequencies
unknown capacitor Cx. below 30 Me. are modulated alternately by
There are many other types of a-c bridge a 440-cycle tone or a 600-cycle tone for pe-
circuits in common use for measuring induct- riods of four minutes each. This tone is in-
ance with a capacitance standard, frequency terrupted at the beginning of the 59th minute
730-B Test Equipment THE RADIO
Figure 11
SCHEMATIC OF A 100-KC. FREQUENCY SPOTTER
of each hour and each five minutes thereafter the wrong harmonic of the oscillator to ob-
for a period of precisely one minute. Green- tain the beat, but with a self-excited oscillator
wich Civil Time is given in code during these it will be wise to insure that the reference
one-minute intervals, followed by a voice an- oscillator is operating exactly on 50, 100, or
nouncement giving Eastern Standard Time. 200 kc. (whichever frequency has been
The accuracy of all radio and audio frequen- chosen) by making sure that zero beat is ob-
cies is better than one part in 50,000,000. tained simultaneously on all the frequencies
A 5000 microsecond pulse ( 5 cycles of a 1000- of WWV that can be heard, and by noting
cyde wave) may be heard as a tick tor every whether or not the harmonics of the oscillator
second except the 59th second of each minute. in the amateur bands fall on the approximate
These standard-frequency transmissions of calibration marks of the receiver.
station WWV may be used for accurately de- A simple frequency spotter is diagrammed
termining the limits of the various amateur in figure 11.
bands with the aid of the station communica-
tions receiver and a 50-kc., 100-kc., or 200- 34-5 Antenna and
kc. band-edge spotter. The low frequency oscil- Transmission
lator may be self-excited if desired, but low Line Measurements
frequency standard crystals have become so
The degree of adjustment of any amateur
relatively inexpensive that a reference crystal
antenna can be judged by the study of the
may be purchased for very little more than
standing-wave ratio on the transmissioll line
the cost of the components for a self-excitecl
feeding the antenna. Various types Oir ; nstru-
oscillator. The crystal has the additional advan-
ments have been designed to measure the
tage that it may be once set so that its har-
s.r.w. present on the transmission line, or to
monics are at zero beat with WWV and then
measure the actual radiation resistance of the
left with only an occasional check to see that
antenna in question. The most important of
the frequency has not drifted more than a
these instruments are the slotted line, the
few cycles. The self-excited oscillator, on the
bridge-type s-w-r meter, and the antennascope.
other hand, must be monitored very frequent-
ly to insure that it is on frequency. The Slotted Line It is obviously impractical
to measure the voltage-
Using a To use a frequency spotter it is standing-wave ratio in a length of coaxial line
Frequency only necessary to couple the out- since the voltages and currents inside the line
Spotter put of the oscillator unit to the are completely shielded by the outer conductor
antenna terminal of the receiver of the cable. Hence it is necessary to insert
through a very small capacitance such as might some type of instrument into a section of the
be made by twisting two pieces of insulated line in order to be able to asce!1tain the con-
hookup wire together. Station WWV is then ditions which are taking place inside the
tuned in on one of its harmonics, 15 Me. shielded line. Where measurements of a high
will usually be best in the daytime and 5 or degree of accuracy are required, the slotted
10 Me. at night, and the trimmer adjustment line is the instrument most frequently used.
on the oscillator is varied until zero beat is Such an instrument, diagrammed in figure 12,
obtained between the harmonic of the oscil- is an item of test equipment which could be
lator and WWV. With a crystal reference constructed in a home workshop which in-
oscillator no difficulty will be had with using cluded a lathe and other metal working tools.
HANDBOOK Antenna Measurements 731
- OUTPUT
TO
ANTENNA
FEED LINE
Figure 12
DIAGRAMMATIC REPRESENT AT ION
OF A SLOTTED LINE
The conductor ratios in the slotted line, in-
cluding the tapered end sections should be
such that the characteristic impedance of the Figure 13
equipment is the same as that of the trans-
mission line with which the equipment is to RESISTOR-BRIDGE
be used. The indicating instrument may be STANDING-WAVE INDICATOR
operated by the d-e output of the rectifier This type of test equipment is suitable
coupled to the probe, or it may be operated for use with coaxial feed lines.
by the '!c components of the rectified signal
f the sgnal generator or transmitter is am- C,-0.001-p,fd. midget ceramic capacitor
plitude modulated by a constant percentage. c, C,-.001 disc ceramic
R,, Rr-22-ohm 2-watt carbon resistors
R,-Resistor equal in resistance to the charac-
teristic impedance of the coaxial transmis-
Commercially built slotted lines are very ex- sion line to be used (I watt)
R,,-5000-ohm wire-wound potentiometer
pensive since they are constructed with a high Rs-!0,000-ohm !-watt resistor
degree of accuracy for precise laboratory work. RFC-R-f choke suitable for operation at the
measurement frequency
The slotted line consists essentially of a
section of air-dielectric line having the same
characteristic impedance as the transmission axial transmissiOn lines. A simplified version
line into which it is inserted. Tapered fittings is available from M. C. ]ones Electronics Co.,
for the transmission line connectors at each Bristol, Conn. ("Micro-Match").
end of the slotted line usually are required due One type of bridge standing-wave indicator
to differences in the diameters of the slotted is diagrammed in figure 13. This type of in-
line and the line into which it is inserted. A strument compares the electrical impedance of
narrow slot from Ys-inch to 0,-inch in width the transmission line with that of the resistor
is cut into the outer conductor of the line. A R, which is induded within the unit. Experi-
probe then is inserted into the slot so that it ence with such units has shown that the re-
is coupled to the field inside the line. Some sistor R, should be a good grade of non-induc-
sort of accurately machined track or lead screw tive carbon type. The Ohmite "Little Devil"
must be provided to insure that the probe type !'esistor in the 2-watt rating has given
maintains a constant spacing from the inner good performance. The resistance at R, should
conductor as it is moved from one end of the be equal to the characteristic impedance of
~lotted line to the other. The probe usually the antenna transmission line. In other words,
Includes some type of rectifying element this resistor should have a value of 52 ohms
whose output is fed to an indicating instru- for lines having this characteristic impedance
ment alongside the slotted line. such as RG-8/U and RG-58/U. For use with
The unfortunate part of the slooted-line sys- lines having a nominal characteristic im-
tem of measurement is that the line must be pedance of 70 ohms, a selected "68 ohm" re-
somewhat over one-half wavelength long at sistor having an actual resis,tance of 70 ohms
the test frequency, and for boot results should may be used.
be a full wavelength long. This requirement is Balance within the equipment is checked by
easily met at frequencies of 420 Me. and above mounting a resistor, equal in value to the
where a full wavelength is 28 inches or less. nominal characteristic impedance of the line
But for the lower frequencies such an instru- to be used, on a coaxial plug of the type used
ment is mechanically impracticable. on the end of the antenna feed line. Then
this plug is inserted into the input receptacle
Bridge- Type The bridge type of standing- of the instrument and a power of 2 to 4 watts
Standing-Wave wave indicator is used quite applied to the output receptacle on the desired
Indicators generally for making meas- ~requency of operation. Note that the signal
urements on commercial co- IS passed through the bridge in the direction
732 Test Equipment THE RADIO
0 REFLECTOMETER
5 I OUTER SHELL
23
20
8
, l
2 I
o' 09 I
f-
<( 8
a: 7 / ,---------,
w 6
/ I R2 10 K I
>
<( ,, 7
I I
3 4. I
~ 4
, / .01
c
0
z
3.
3
v
<(
t;; 2. , /
2
/ A=~ - IL
FORWARD
POWER
ZR + Zo _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __j
1. 5 I/ -
S-W-R= : ~ :~: , -
INDICATOR
/
1.2
,/ COMPONENT PARTS
opposite to normal for this test. The resistor figure 13 must be inserted into the line for a
R, is adjusted for full-scale deflection on the measurement, and then removed from the line
0-100 microammeter. Then the plugs are re- when the equipment is to be operated. Also,
versed so that the test s,ignal passes through the power input to the line feeding the input
the instrument in the direction indicated by terminal of the standing-wave indicator must
the armw on figure 13, and the power level not exceed 4 watts. The power level which the
is maintained the same as before. If the t~ unit can accept is determined by the dissipa-
resistor is matched to Rs, and stray capacitances tion limitation of res,istors R, plus R,.
have been held to low values, the indication It is also important, for satisfactory opera-
on the milliammeter will be very small. The tion of the test unit, that resistors R, and R,
te.>t plug with its resistor is removed and the be exactly equal in value. The actual resist-
plug for the antenna transmission line is in- ance of these two is not critically important,
serted. The meter indication now will read and deviations up ro 10 per cent from the
the reflection coefficient which exists on the value given in figure 13 will be satisfactory.
antenna transmission line at the point where But the two resistors must have the same value,
the indicacor has been inserted. From this whether they are both 21 ohms or 24 ohms,
reading of reflection coefficient the actual or some value in between.
standing-wave ratio on the transmission line
may be determined by reference to the chart 34-6 A Simple
of figure 14. Coaxial Reflectometer
Measurements of this type are quite helpful
in determining whether or not the antenna is The re/lectometer is a short section of co-
presenting a good impedance match to the axial transmission line containing two r-f volt-
transmission line being used to feed it. How- meters. One voltmeter reads the incident com-
ever, a test instrument of the type shown in ponent of voltage in the line, and the other
HANDBOOK Reflectometer 733
Figure 16
INTERIOR VIEW OF COAXIAL REFLECTOMETER
The Reflectometer is a short section of transmission line containing two r-1 voltmeters. Center conductor
of line is a section of brass rod soldered to center pins of input and output receptacles. At either end
of unit are the crystal diodes, bypass capacitors and terminals. Diode load resistors are at center of
instrument, grounded to brass alignment rod.
reads the reflected component. The magnitude ponent. Careful attention to physical symmetry
of standing wave ratio on the transmission of the assembly insures accurate and complete
line is the ratio of the incident component separation of the voltage components by the
to the reflected component, as shown in fig- two voltmeters. The outputs of the two volt-
ure 14. In actual use, calibration of the re- meters may be selected and read on an ex-
flectometer is not required since the relative ternal meter connected to the terminal posts
reading of reflected power indicates the de- of the reflectometer.
gree of match or mis-match and all antenna Each r-f voltmeter is composed of a load
and transmission line adjustments should be resistor and a pickup loop. The pickup loop
conducted so as to make this reading as low is positioned parallel tv a section of transmis-
as possible, regardless of its absolute value. sion line permitting both inductive and ca-
The actual meter readings obtained from pacative coupling to exist between the center
the device are a function of the operating fre- conductor of the line and the loop. The di-
quency, the sensitivity of the instrument being mensions of the center conductor and the
a function of transmitter power, increasing outer shield of the reflectometer are chosen
rapidly as the frequency of operation is in- so that the instrument impedance closely
creased. However, the reflectometer is inval- matches that of the transmission line.
uable in that it may be left permanently in
the transmission line, regardless of the power Reflectometer A view of the interior of the
output level of the transmitter. It will indi- Construction reflectometer is shown in fig-
cate the degree of reflected power in the an- ure 16. The coaxial input and
tenna system, and at the same time provide output connectors of the instrument are
a visual indication of the power output of mounted on machined brass discs that are
the transmitter. held in place by brass alignment rods, tapped
at each end. The center conductor is machined
Reflectometer The circuit and assembly in- from a short section of brass rod, tapered and
Circuit formation for the reflectometer drilled at each end to fit over the center pin
are given in figure 15. Two of each coaxial receptacle. The end discs, the
diode voltmeters are coupled back-to-back to rods, and the center conductor should be sil-
a short length of transmission line. The com- ver plated before assembly. When the center
bined inductive and capacative pickup between conductor is placed in position, it is soldered
eaoch voltmeter and the line is such that the at each end to the center pin of the coaxial
incident component of the line voltage is bal- receptacles.
anced out in one case and the inductive com- One of the alignment rods is drilled and
ponent is balanced out in the other case. Each tapped for a 6-32 bolt at the mid-point, and
voltmeter, therefore, reads only one wave-com- the end discs are drilled to hold 1;2-inch
734 Test Equipment THE RADIO
ceramic insulators and binding posts, as &hown If a reflected reading of zero is not obtain-
in the photograph. The load resistors, crystal able, the harmonic content of the r-f source
diodes, and bypass capaci~ors are finally might be causing a slight residual meter read-
mounted in the assembly as the last step. ing. Coupling the reflectometer to the r-f
The two load resistors should be measured source through a tuned circuit ("antenna
on an ohmmeter to ensure that the resistance tuner") will remove the offending harmonic
values are equal. The exaat value of resistance and permit an accurate null indication. Be
is unimportant as long as the two resistors sure to hold the r-f input power to a low
are equal. The diodes should also be checked value to prevent overheating the dummy load
on an ohmmeter to make sure that the front resistors.
resistances and back resistances are balanced
between the units. Care should be taken dur- Using the The bridge may be used up to
ing soldering to ensure the diodes and resis- Reflectometer 150 Me. It is placed in the
nors are not overheated. Observe that the re- transmission line at a conveni-
sistor leads are of equal length and that each ent point, preferably be/ore any tuner, balun,
half of the assembly is a mirror-image of the or TVI filter. The indicator should be set to
other half. The body of the resistor is spaced read forward power, with a maximum of re-
about Ys-inch away from the center conduc- sistance in the circuit. Power is applied and
tor. the indicator resistor is adjusted for a full
scale reading. The switch is then thrown to
Testing the The instrument can be ad- read reflected power (indicated as A, figure
Reflectometer justed on the 28 Me. band. 14). Assume that the forward power meter
An r-f source of a few watts reading is 1.0 and the reflected power read-
and nonreactive load are required. The con- ing is 0.5. Substituting these values in the
struction of the reflectometer is such that it SWR formula of figure 14 shows the SWR
will work well with either 52- or 72-ohm ~o be 3. If forward power is always set to
coaxial transmission lines. A suitable dummy 1.0 on the meter, the reflected power (A)
load for the 52-ohm line can be made of four can be read directly from the curve of figure
220 ohm, 2 watt composition resistors (Ohm- 14 with little error.
ite "Little Devil") connected in parallel. Clip If the meter is adjusted so as to provide a
the leads of the resistors short and mount half-,scale reading of the forward power, the
them on a coaxial plug. This assembly pro- reflectometer may be used as a transmitter
vides an eight watt, 55 ohm load, suitable power output meter. Tuning adjustments may
for use at 30 Me. If an accurate ohmmeter then be undertaken to provide greatest meter
is at hand, the resistors may be hand picked reading.
to obtain four 208 ohm units, thus making
the dummy load resistors exactly 52 ohms. 34-7 Measurements
For all practical purposes, the 55 ohm load on Balanced
is satisfactory. A 75 ohm, eight watt load Transmission Lines
resistor may be made of four 300 ohm, 2
watt compos.ition resistors connected in paral- Measurements made on balanced transmis-
lel. sion lines may be conducted in the same man-
R-f power is coupled to the reflectometer ner as those made on coaxial Jines. In the
and the dummy load is placed in the "output" case of the coaxial Jines, care must be mken
receptacle. The indicator meter is switched to to prevent flow of r-f current on the outer
the ''reflected power" position. The meter read- surface of the line as this unwanted compo-
ing should be almost zero. It may be brought nent will introduce errors in measurements
ro zero by removing the case of the instru- made on the line. In like fashion, the cur-
ment and adjusting the position of the load rents in a balanced transmission line must
resistor. The actual length of wire in the resis- be 180 degrees out of phase and balanced
tor lead and its positioning determine the meter with respect to ground in order to obtain a
null. Replace the case before power is applied realistic relationship between incident and re-
to the reflectometer. The reflectometer is now flected power. This situation is not always
reversed and power is applied to the "output" easy to obtain in practice because of the prox-
receptacle, with a dummy load attached to imity effects of metallic object's or the earth
the "input" receptacle. The second voltmeter to the transmission line. All transmission line
(forward power) is adjusted for a null read- measurements, therefore, should be conducted
ing of the meter in the same manner. with the realization of the physical limitations
HANDBOOK S.W.R. Indicator 735
Figure 18
OPERATION OF THE "TWIN LAMP"
INDICATOR
Figure 17 Showing current flow resulting from inductive
and capacitive fields in a 11twin lamp" attached
SKETCH OF THE "TWIN-LAMP" to a line with a low standing-wave ratio.
TYPE OF S-W-R INDICATOR
The short section of line with lamps at each standing-wave ratio is high the twin-lamp
end usually is taped to the main transmission
line with plastic electrical tape. merely indicates that they are high without
giving any idea of the actual magnitude.
of the equipment and the measuring technique Operation of The twin lamp operates by
that is being used. the Twin-Lamp virtue of the fact that the ca-
Measurements on One of the most satisfactory pacitive and inductive cou-
Molded Parallel- and least expensive devices pling of the wire making up one side of the
Wire Lines for obtaining a rough idea twin-lamp is much greater to the transmission-
of the standing-wave ratio line lead immediately adjacent to it than to
on a transmission line of the molded parallel- the transmission-line lead on the other side.
wire type is the twin-lamp. This ingenious in- The same is of course true of the wire on the
strument may be constructed of new compon- other side of the twin-lamp and the transmis-
ents for a total cost of about 2 5 cents; this sion-line lead adjacent to it. A further condi-
fact alone places the twin-lamp in a class by tion which must be met for the twin-lamp to
itself as far as test instruments are concerned. operate is that the section of line making up
Figure 17 shows a sketch of a twin-lamp in- the twin-lamp must be short with respect to a
dicator. The indicating portion of the system quarter wavelength. Then the current due to
consists merely of a length of 300-ohm Twin- capacitive coupling passes through both lamps
Lead about 10 inches long with a dial lamp at in the same direction, while the current due to
each end. In the unit illustrated the dial lamps inductive coupling between the leads of the
are standard 6.3-volt 150-ma. bayonet-base twin-lamp and the leads of the antenna trans-
lamps. The lamps are soldered to the two leads mission line passes through the two lamps in
at each end of the short section of Twin-Lead. opposite directions. Hence, in a line without
To make a measurement the short section reflections, the two currents will cancel in
of line with the lamps at each end is merely one lamp while the other lamp is lighted due
taped to the section of Twin-Lead (or other to the sum of the currents (figure 18).
similar transmission line) running from the The basic fact which makes the twin-lamp a
transmitter or from the antenna changeover re- directional coupler is a result of the condition
lay to the antenna system. When there are no whereby the capacitive coupling is a scalar
standing waves on the antenna transmission action not dependent upon the direction of the
line the lamp toward the transmitter will light waves passing down the line, yet the inductive
while the one toward the antenna will not coupling is a vector action which is dependent
light. With 300-ohm Twin-Lead running from upon the direction of wave propagation down
the antenna changeover relay to the antenna, the line. Thus the capacitive current is the
and with about 200 watts input on the 28-Mc. same and is in the same phase for energy
band, the dial lamp toward the transmitter will travelling in either direction down the line.
light nearly to full brilliancy. With a standing- But the inductive current travels in one direc-
wave ratio of about 1.5 to 1 on the transmis- tion for energy travelling in one direction and
sion line to the antenna the lamp toward the in the other direction for energy going the
antenna will just begin to light. With a high other direction. Hence the two currents add at
standing-wave ratio on the antenna feed line one end of the line for a wave passing toward
both lamps will light nearly to full brilliancy. the antenna, while the currents add at the
Hence the instrument gives an indication of other end of the twin-lamp for the waves re-
relatively low standing waves, but when the flected from the antenna. When the waves are
736 Test Equipment
Figure 19
SWR BRIDGE FOR BALANCED
TRANSMISSION LINE
A double bridge can be used lor two wire
transmission lines. Bridge is inserted in line
and may be driven with grid-dip oscillator or
other low power r-1 source.
~
T.
bridge capable of being used on two wire R1
RFC 250
balanced transmission lines. Such a bridge is
shown in figures 19 and 21. The schematic of SWR .001 R1
such an instrument (figure 20) may be com- ......-- 250
250
pared to two of the simple bridges shown in R1
figure 13. When the dual bridge circuit is Figure 20
balanced the meter reading is zero. This state SCHEMATIC OF BRIDGE FOR
is reached when the line currents are equal BALANCED LINES
and exactly 180 degrees out of phase and the M-0-200 d-e microammeter
R1-Note: Six 250 ohm resistors are composi-
SWR is unity. tion, non-inductive units. IRC type BT, or
11
As the condition of the line departs from Ohmite Little Devil" l-watt resistors may
be used. (see text)
the optimum, the meter of the bridge will $ 1 -DPDT rotary switch. Centralab type 1464
figure 21
INTERIOR VIEW OF
BALANCED BRIDGE
SHOWING PARTS
PLACEMENT
Diode rectifiers are placed
at right angles to the
short section of trans-
mission line. Both sides
of bridge are balanced
to ground by virtue of
symmetrical construction
of unit.
broken by two 250 olun composition resistors for the meter scale. The ratio of the external
and switch S,. The line segments are made of resistor to the design value of the bridge will
short pieces of # 10 copper wire, running be- provide the SWR value for any given meter
tween the various components. Spacing be- reading. For example, a 1000 ohm resistor
tween the wires is held close to three inches has a ratio of 1000/500, and will give an indi-
to approximate a 500-600 olun line.
The small components of the bridge are cated SWR reading of 2. A 1500 ohm resistor
placed symmetrically about the 250 ohm series will give an indicated reading of 3, a 2000
line resistors and the calibrating potentiometer, olun resistor will provide a reading of 4, and
as can be seen in figure 21. Exact parts place- so on. Before each measurement is recorded,
ment is not critical, except that the crystal the calibrate control should be set to a full
diodes should be placed at right angles to scale reading with S, open.
the wires of the transmission line to reduce This simple system of calibration will lead
capacative pickup. The two r-f chokes should to slight errors in calibration if the regulation
then be placed at right angles to the diodes. of the r-f source is poor. That is, a change in
The six 250 ohm resistors are checked on an the external calibrating resistance will produce
ohmmeter and should be hand-picked to ob- a varying load on the r-f generator which could
tain units that are reasonably close in value. easily cause a change in the power applied to
If it is desired to use the bridge with a 600 the bridge. A separate diode r-f voltmeter
ohm line, the value of these resistors should placed across the pickup loop will enable the
be increased to 300 oluns each. Excess,ive heat input voltage to be held to a constant value
should not be used in soldering either the re- and will provide somewhat more accurlllte
sistors or the diodes to ensure that their char- bridge calibration.
acteristics will not be altered by application of
high temperatures over an extended period. Using the The bridge is placed in the trans-
Bridge mission line and driven from a
Testing the When the instrument is low powered source having a min-
Balanced Bridge completed, a grid-dip meter imum of harmonic content. Several measure-
may be coupled to the in- ments should be made at various frequencies
put terminals via a two turn link. Be careful within the range of antenna operation. The
not to pin the bridge meter. Place switch S, in selector switch is set to the "Cal." position and
the "Calibrate" (open) position. Set the grid the "Calibrate" potentiometer is adjusted for
dip meter in the 10-Mc. to 20-Mc. range and full scale meter reading. The switch is then
adjust the link and calibration control R, for set to the "SWR" posinion and a reading is
full scale meter reading. A 500 ohm carbon taken. This reading and others taken at various
resistor placed across the output terminals of frequencies may be plotted on a graph to pro-
the unit should produce a zero meter reading vide a "SWR curve" for the particular antenna
when S, is set to the "SWR" position. Various and transmission line. Antenna adjustments
values of resistance may now be placed across and line balancing operations may now be
the meter terminals to obtain calibration points conducted to provide a smooth SWR curve,
737
738 Test Equipment THE RADIO
1000
R1
1000
IIN34
GUT IN
50
R2
L - - - _ __j
Figure 23
SCHEMATIC, ANTENNASCOPE
R,-1000 ohm composition potentiometer ohm-
ite type AB or Allen Bradley type J,
linear taper
R:-50 ohm, 1-watt composition resistor, IRC
type BT, or ohmite "Little Devil" (see
text)
M-0-200 d-e microammeter
SHIELDED !NCLOSUR!
Radio Mathematics
and Calculations
Radiomen often have occasion to cal- four tens, plus three units, which could be
culate sizes and values of required parts. This written as follows:
requires some knowledge of mathematics. The
following pages contain a review of those parts 8 thousands I 10 x 10 x 10)
of mathematics necessary to understand and I hundreds I 10 x 10)
apply the information contained in this book. 4 tens
It is assumed that the reader has had some 3 units
mathematical training; this chapter is not in- 8143
tended to teach those who have never learned
anything of the subject. The number in the units pos1t10n is some-
Fortunately only a knowledge of fundamen- times referred to as a first order number, that
tals is necessary, although this knowledge must in the tens position is of the second order, that
include several branches of the subject. Fortu- in the hundreds position the third order, etc.
nately, too, the majority of practical applica- The idea of letting the position of the sym-
tions in radio work reduce to the solution of bol denote its value is an outcome of the aba-
equations or formulas or the interpretation of cus. The abacus had only a limited num-
graphs. ber of wires with beads, but it soon became
apparent that the quantity of symbols might
Arithmetic be continued indefinitely towards the left,
Notation of In writing numbers in the Ara- each further space multiplying the digit's
Numbers bic system we employ ten dif value by ten. Thus any quantity, however
ferent symbols, digits, or fig- large, may readily be indicated.
ures: 1, 2, 3, 4, 'i, 6, 7, 8, 9, and 0, and place It has become customary for ease of reading
them in a definite sequence. If there is more to divide large numbers into groups of three
than one figure in the number the position of digits, separating them by commas.
each figure or digit is as important in deter-
mining its value as is the digit itself. When we 6,000,000 rather than 6000000
deal with whole numbers the righthandmost
digit represents units, the next to the left rep- Our system of notation then is characterized
resents tens, the next hundreds, the next thou- by two things: the use of positions to indicate
sands, from which we derive the rule that ev- the value of each symbol, and the use of ten
ery time a digit is placed one space further to symbols, from which we derive the name dec-
the left its value is multiplied by ten. imal system.
Retaining the same use of positions, we
might have used a different number of sym-
8 1 4 3
thousands hundreds tens uni.ts
bols, and displacing a symbol one place to the
left might multiply its value by any other fac-
tor such as 2, 6 or 12. Such other systems have
It will be seen that any number is actually a been in use in history, but will not be discussed
sum. In the example given above it is the sum here. There are also systems in which displac-
of eight thousands, plus one hundred, plus ing a symbol to the left multiplies its value by
742
Decimal Fractions 743
0 0.5 4
Figure I.
AN ILLUSTRATION OF LINEAR FRACTIONS.
varying factors in accordance with complicat- being the clearer. Every time a digit is placed
ed rules. The English system of measurements one space further to the right it represents a
is such an inconsistent and inferior system. ten times smaller part. This is illustrated in
Figure 1, where each large division represents
Decimal Fractions Since we can extend a a unit; each unit may be divided into ten parts
number indefinitely to although in the drawing we have only so di-
the left to make it bigger, it is a logical step to vided the first part. The length ab is equal to
extend it towards the right to make it smaller. seven of these tenth parts and is written as 0.7.
Numbers smaller than unity are fractions and The next smaller divisions, which should be
if a displacement one position to the right di- written in the second column to the right of
vides its value by ten, then the number is re- the decimal point, are each one-tenth of the
ferred to as a decimal fraction. Thus a digit small division, or one one-hundredth each.
to the right of the units column indicates the They are so small that we can only show them
number of tenths, the second digit to the right by imagining a magnifying glass to look at
. represents the number of hundredths, the third, them, as in Figure 1. Six of these divisions is
the number of thousandths, etc. Some distin- to be written as 0.06 (six hundredths). We
guishing mark must be used to divide unit from need a microscope to see the next smaller divi-
tenths so that one may properly evaluate each sion, that is those in the third place, which will
symbol. This mark is the decimal point. be a tenth of one one-hundredth, or a thou-
A decimal fraction like four-tenths may be sandth; four such divisions would be written
written .4 or 0.4 as desired, the latter probably as 0.004 (four thousandths).
Ar------------,-------------,------------,-------------r-----------~8
0 0 0 0 0
ci ci ci ci ci
0 ~~~~~~----------~----------L_
H
________ _ L_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _~c
Figure 2.
IN THIS ILLUSTRATION FRACTIONAL PORTIONS ARE REPRESENTED IN THE
FORM OF RECTANGLES RATHER THAN LINEARLY.
ABCD = I.O;GFED = 0.1; KJEH = 0.01; each small sedlan within KJEH equal 0.001
744 Radio Mathematics and Calculations THE RADIO
It should not be thought that such numbers The result of the operation is called the
are merely of academic interest for very small product.
quantities are common in radio work. From the examples to follow it will be obvi-
Possibly the conception of fractions may be ous that there are as many partial products
clearer to some students by representing it in as there are digits in the multiplier. In the fol-
the form of rectangles rather than linearly lowing examples note that the righthandmost
(see Figure 2). digit of each partial product is placed one
space farther to the left than the previous one.
Addition When two or more numbers are
to be added we sometimes write 834 834
them horizontally with the plus sign between X 26 X 206
them. + is the sign or operator indicating ad-
dition. Thus if 7 and 12 are to be added to 5004 5004
gether we may write 7+12=19. 1668 000
1668
But if la1ger or more numbers are to be added 21684
together they are almost invariably written one 171804
under another in such a position that the deci
mal points fall in a vertical line. If a number In the second example above it will be seen
has no decimal point, it is still considered as that the inclusion of the second partial prod-
being just to the right of the units figure; such uct was unnecessary; whenever the multiplier
a number is a whole number or integer. Ex- contains a cipher (zero) the next partial prod-
amples: uct should be moved an additional space to
the left.
654 0.654 654
32 3.2 32 Numbers containing decimal fractions may
53041 53.041 5304.1 first be multiplied exactly as if the decimal
point did not occur in the numbers at all; the
53727 56.895 5990.1 position of the decimal point in the product is
determined after all operations have been com-
The result obtained by adding numbers is pleted. It must be so positioned in the product
called the mm. that the number of digits to its right is equal
to the number of decimal place$ in the multi-
Subtraction Subtraction is the reverse of plicand plus the number of decimal places in
addition. Its operator is - (the the multiplier.
min11.r sign). The number to be subtracted is This rule should be well understood since
called the minttend, the number from which it many radio calculations contain quantities
is subtracted is the subtrahend, and the result which involve very small decimal fractions. In
is called the remainder. the examples which follow the explanatory
notations "2 places," etc., are not actually
subtrahend written down since it is comparatively easy to
-minuend
determine the decimal point's proper iocation
remainder mentally.
Examples: 5.43 2 places
xo.n 2 places
65.4 65.4
-32 -32.21 1086
3 801
33.4 33.19
3.9096 2+2=4 places
Multiplication When numbers are to be mul-
tiplied together we use the X, 0.04 2 places
which is known as the multiplication or the xo.oo3 3 places
times sign. The number to be multiplied is 0.00012 2+3=5 places
known as the multiplicand and that by which
it is to be multiplied is the multiplier, which Division Division is the reverse of multi-
may be written in words as follows: plication. Its operator is the +,
which is called the division sign. It is also com-
multiplicand mon to indicate division by the use of the frac-
X multiplier tion bar (/) or by writing one number over
partial product the other. The number which is to be divided
partial product is called the dividend and is written before
the division sign or fraction bar or over the
product horizontal line indicating a fraction. The num-
HANDBOOK Division 745
ber by which the dividend is to be divided is Another example: Divide 0.000325 by 0.017.
called the divisor and follows the division Here we must move the decimal point three
sign or fraction bar or comes under the hori- places to the right in both dividend and di-
zontal line of the fraction. The answer or visor.
result is called the quotient. 0.019
17) 0.325
quotient 17
divisor ) dividend
or 155
153
dividend 7 divisor= quotient
or 2
dividend
--- = quotient In a case where the dividend has fewer deci-
divisor mals than the divisor the same rules still may
Le applied by adding ciphers. For example to
Examples: divide 0.49 by 0.006 we must move the
126 49 decimal point three places to the right. The
834) 105084 49) 2436 0.49 now becomes 490 and we write:
834 196
81
2168 476 6 ')4'9'0
1668 441 48
5004 35 remainder 10
5004 6
4
Note that one number often fails to divide
into another evenly. Hence there is often a
quantity left over called the remainder. When the division shows a remainder it is
The rules for placing the decimal point sometimes necessary to continue the work so
are the reverse of those fot multiplication. as to obtain more figures. In that case ciphers
The number of decimal places in the quotient may be annexed to the dividend, brought down
is equal to the difference between the number to the remainder, and the division continued
of decimal places in the dividend and that in as long as may be necessary; be sure to place
the divisor. It is often simpler and clearer a decimal point in the dividend before the
to remove the decimal point entirely from the ciphers are annexed if the dividend does not
divisor by multiplying both dividend and di already contain a decimal point. For ex-
visor by the necessary factor; that is we move ample:
the decimal point in the divisor as many places 80.33
to the right as is necessary to make it a whole 6) 482.00
number and then we move the decimal point 48
in the dividend exactly the same number of
places to the right regardless of whether this 20
makes the dividend a whole number or not. 18
When this has been done the decimal point 20
in the quotient will automatically come di- 18
rectly above that in the dividend as shown in
the following example. 2
Example: Divide 10.5084 by 8.34. Move the
decimal point of both dividend and divisor This operation is not very often required
two places to the right. in radio work since the accuracy of the mea-
surements from which our problems start
1.26 seldom justifies the use of more than three
834 ) I 050.84 significant figures. This point will be cov-
834 ered further later in this chapter.
2168 Fractions Quantities of less than one
1668 (unity) are called fractions. They
5004 may be expressed by decimal notation as we
5004 have seen, or they may be expressed as vulgar
fractions. Examples of vulgar fractions:
746 Radio Mathematics and Calculations THE RADIO
numerator
denominator
3
4
6
7 -
1
5
the numerator is added. That is in the above
example we multiply 2 by 7 and then add 3
to obtain 17 for the numerator. The denomi-
The upper pos1t10n of a vulgar fraction is nator is the same as is the denominator of
called the numerator and the lower position the original fraction. In the following ex-
the denominator. When the numerator is the ample we have added two mixed numbers.
smaller of the two, the fraction is called a
2..!..+ 4 - 7 +..!!- 7x4 +~]
4 - [17x4
proper fraction; the examples of vulgar frac- 3 __!__..!!_
tions given above are proper vulgar fractions.
7 4x7
When the numerator is the larger, the ex- 68 105 173 5
pression is an improper fraction, which can =n+n=n = 621
be reduced to an integer or whole number
with a proper fraction, the whole being called Multiplying All vulgar fractions are multi-
a mixed number. In the following examples Fractions plied by multiplying the nu-
improper fractions have been reduced to merators together and the de-
their corresponding mixed numbers. nominators together, as shown in the follow-
ing example:
7 3 5 2
4= 1 4 T= 13 3 2 [3x2] 6 3
4 X-s-= 4X5 =20=10
Adding or Subtracting Except when the
Fractions fractions are very As above, the step indicated in brackets is
simple it will usual- usually not written down since it may easily
ly be found much easier to add and subtract be performed mentally. As with addition and
fractions in the form of decimals. This rule subtraction any mixed numbers should be
likewise applies for practically all other oper- first reduced to improper fractions as shown
ations with fractions. However, it is occa- in the following example:
sionally necessary to perform various opera- 3 1 3 13 39 13
tions with vulgar fractions and the rules nX 4 -3-=nXT=69=n
should be understood.
When adding or subtracting such fractions Division of Fractions may be most easily
the denominators must be made equal. This Fractions divided by inverting the di-
may be done by multiplying both numerator visor and then multiplying.
and denominator of the first fraction by the Example:
denominator of the other fraction, after 2 3 2 4 8
which we multiply the numerator and de- 5-:-4=-s-X3=15
nominator of the second fraction by the de-
nominator of the first fraction. This sounds In the above example it will be seen that to
more complicated than it usually proves in divide by % is exactly the same thing as to
practice, as the following examples will show. multiply by 4/3. Actual division of fractions
is a rather rare operation and if necessary is
I 1 [lx3 lx2] 3 2 5 usually postponed until the final answer is se-
2 + 3 = 2x3 + 3x2 = 6 + 6 = 6 cured when it is often desired to reduce the
3 2 [3
4 - s = 4xs -sx4
X 5 2 X 4 J=Tcf-20=20
IS 8 7
resulting vulgar fraction to a decimal frac-
tion by division. It is more common and
usually results in least overall work to re-
Except in problems involving large numbers duce vulgar fractions to decimals at the be-
ginning of a problem. Examples:
the step shown in brackets above is usually
done in the head and is not written down. 3 5
Although in the examples shown above we a= 0.375 32 = 0.15625
have used proper fractions, it is obvious that 0.15625
the same procedure applies with improper
32 ) 5.00000
fractions. In the case of problems involving 32
mixed numbers it is necessary first to convert
them into improper fractions. Example: lio
1 60
_!_ 2x7 + 3 17 200
21 1 =7 192
so
64
The numerator of the improper fraction is
equal to the whole number multiplied by the i6o
denominator of the original fraction, to which 160
HANDBOOK Division of Fractions 747
It will be obvious that many vulgar fractions In general terms, when a number is to be
cannot be reduced to exact decimal equiva- multipled by itself we speak of raising to a
lents. This fact need not worry us, however, power or involution; the number of times
since the degree of equivalence can always be which the number is to be multiplied by it-
as much as the data warrants. For instance, self is called the order of the power. The
if we know that one-third of an ampere is standard notation requires that the order of
flowing in a given circuit, this can be written the power be indicated by a small number
as 0. 333 amperes. This is not the exact written after the number and above the line,
equivalent of 1/3 but is close enough since it called the exponent. Examples:
shows the value to the nearest thousandth of
an ampere and it is probable that the meter 2' = 2 X 2, or 2 squared, or the second
from which we secured our original data was power of 2
not accurate to the nearest thousandth of an
ampere.
2' = 2power
X 2 X 2, or 2 cubed, or the third
of 2
Thus in converting vulgar fractions to a
2' = 2 X 2 X 2 X 2, or the fourth pow-
decimal we unhesitatingly stop when we have er of 2
reached the number of significant figures war-
ranted by our original data, which is very Sometimes it is necessary to perform the
seldom more than three places (see section reverse of this operation, that is, it may be
Significant Figures later in this chapter). necessary, for instance, to find that number
When the denominator of a vulgar fraction which multiplied by itself will give a product
contains only the factors 2 or 5, division can of nine. The answer is of course 3. This
be brought to a finish and there will be no process is known as extracting the root or
remainder, as shown in the examples above. evolution. The particular example which is
When the denominator has other factors cited would be written:
such as 3, 7, 11, etc., the division will seldom
come out even no matter how long it is con-
tinued but, as previously stated, this is of
no consequence in practical work since it may The sign for extracting the root is V,
be carried to whatever degree of accuracy is which is known as the radical sign; the order
necessary. The digits in the quotient will of the root is indicated by a small number
usually repeat either singly or i..n groups, al- above the radical as in r, which would mean
though there may first occur one or more the fourth root; this number is called the
digits which do not repeat. Such fractions index. When the radical bears no index, the
are known as repeating fractions. They are square or second root is intended.
sometimes indicated by an oblique line (frac- Restricting our attention for the moment
tion bar) through the digit which repeats, or to square root, we know that 2 is the square
through the first and last digits of a repeating root of 4, and 3 is the square root of 9. If
group. Example: we want the square root of a number between
3 and 9, such as the square root of 5, it is
3
1
= 0.3333 .... =0-P
I
obvious that it must lie between 2 and 3. In
rithm tables, slide rule, or table of roots are found and annex the cipher (2 x 75 or 150
not handy. plus the cipher, which will give 1500). 1500
will go into 5391 3 times. Replace the last
Extracting the First divide the number the cipher with a three and multiply 1503 by 3 to
Square Root root of which is to be ex- give 4509. Place 3 above the third group.
tracted into groups of two Subtract to .find the remainder of 882. The
digits starting at the decimal point and going quotient 75.3 which has been found so far is
in both directions. If the lefthandmost group not the exact square root which was 'Clesired;
proves to have only one digit instead of two, in most cases it will be sufficiently accurate.
no harm will be done. The righthandmost However, if greater accuracy is desired groups
group may be made to have two digits by of two ciphers can be brought down and the
annexing a zero if necessary. For example, process carried on as long as necessary.
let it be requited to .find the square root of
5678.91. This is to be divided off as follows: 7 s.
3
v56' 78.91
y56' 78.91 49
E =I X R Similarly, we have:
where E = e.m.f. in volts a+ (-b)= a - b
I = current in amperes
R = resistance in ohms When a minus sign is in front of an expres-
sion in brackets, this minus sign has the effect
Letters therefore represent numbers, and for of reversing the signs of every term within the
any letter we can read "any number." When brackets:
the same letter occurs again in the same ex-
pression we would mentally read "the same - (a - b) =- a + b
number," and for another letter "another num- - (2a + 3b - 5cl = - 2a - 3b + 5c
ber of any value."
These letters are connected by the usual op- Multiplication. When both the multiplican_d
erational symbols of arithmetic, +, -, X, +, and the multiplier are negative, the product IS
and so forth. In algebra, the sign for division positive. When only one (either one) is nega-
is seldom used, a division being usually written tive the product is negative. The four possible
as a fraction. The multiplication sign, X, is cases are illustrated below:
usually omitted or one may write a period
only. Examples: +X+=+ +X-=-
-X+=- X-=+
2 X a X b = 2ab
Divi.rion. Since division is but the reverse of
2.3.4.5a = 2 X 3 X 4 X 5 X a
multiplication, similar rules apply for the sign
In practical applications of algebra, an ex- of the quotient. When both the dividend a_nd
pression usually states some physical law and the divisor have the same sign (both negative
each letter represents a variable quantity which or both positive) the quotient is positive. If
is therefore called a variable. A fixed number they have unlike signs (one positive and one
in front of such a quantity (by which it is to negative) the quotient is negative.
be multiplied) is known as the coefficient.
Sometimes the coefficient may be unknown, yet + +
to be determined; it is then also written as a -=+ -=
letter; k is most commonly usee\ for this pur- +
pose.
-= -=+
The Negative In ordinary arithmetic we +
Sign seldom work with negative Powers. Even powers of negative numbers
numbers, although we may are positive and odd powers are negative. Pow-
be "short" in a subtraction. In algebra, how- ers of positive numbers are always positive.
ever, a number may be either negative or pos- Examples:
itive. Such a thing may seem academic but a
negative quantity can have a real existence. -2=-2X-2=+4
We need only refer to a debt being considered 2'=-2X-2X-2=+4X
a negative possession. In electrical work, how-
ever, a result of a problem might be a negative - 2=- 8
number of amperes or volts, indicating that the Roots. Since the square of a negative num-
direction of the current is opposite to the di- ber is positive and the square of a positive
rection chosen as positive. We shall have il- number is also positive, it follows that a posi-
lustrations of this shortly. tive number has two square roots. The square
Having established the existence of negative root of 4 can be either + 2 or -2 for ( + 2)
quantities, we must now learn how to work
with these negative quantities in addition, sub-
x (+2) =
+4 and (-2) X (-2) = +4.
traction, multiplication and so forth. Addition and Polynomials are quantities
In addition, a negative number !dded to a Subtraction like 3ab' + 4ab' - 7a'b'
positive number is the same as subtracting a which have several terms of
positive number from it. different names. When adding polynomials,
only terms of the same name can be taken to-
7 7 gether.
-3 . 3
- - (add) IS the same as (subtract) 7a' + 8 ab' + 3 a'b + 3
4 4
or we might write it a3 - 5 ab' - b'
7+C-3l=7-3=4 Sa' + 3 ab' + 3 a'b - b' + 3
HANDBOOK Division 751
14ab' + 21b 3
5 x' - 3 x' + 2 xy + 7 xy + 3 xy' = 14ab' + 21b'
2 x' + 9 xy + 3 xy'
Another example: Divide x' - y' by x - y
Multiplication Multiplication of single terms
is indicated simply by writing x - y ) x' + 0 + 0 - y3 ( x' + xy + Y
them together. x'- x'y
a X b is written as ab + x'y
x'y -xy'
a X b' is written as ab' + xy'- y'
xy'- y'
Bracketed quantities are multiplied by a
single term by multiplying each term:
Factoring Very often it is necessary to sim-
a (b + c + d) = ab + ac + ad plify expressions by finding a fac-
tor. This is done by collecting two or more
When two bracketed quantities are multi- terms having the same factor and bringing the
plied, each term of the first bracketed quantity factor outside the brackets:
is to be multiplied by each term of the second
bracketed quantity, thereby making every pos- 6ab + 3ac = 3a(2b +c)
sible combination.
In a four term expression one can take to-
(a + b) (c + dl = ac + ad + be + bd
gether two terms at a time; the intention is to
try getting the terms within the brackets the
same after the factor has been removed:
In this work particular care must be taken
to get the signs correct. Examples:
30ac - ISbc + lOad- 6bd =
(a + b) (a - b) = a' + ab - ab - b' = 6c (5a - 3b) + 2d (5o - 3b) =
a' - b' (5o - 3bl (6c + 2dl
Working with When two powers of the Roots may be written as fractional powers.
Powen same number are to be mul- Thus Va may be written as a II because
and Roots tiplied, the exponents are
added. vax va=a
a' X a' = aa X aaa = aaaaa = a or
and, a\.11 X a'h = a\.11+1-11 = a' = a
a2 X aa = a(2+3> =a~:~
Any root may be written in this form
b' X b = b'
Also, the quotient of two roots is equal to the _1_ _ _ .;; - 1 _r-
root of the quotient. Va-VaXVa-ava
3a h'
Note, however, that in addition or subtrac- Va + Vi) In t IS case we must multiply
tion the square root of the sum or difference is
not the same as the sum or difference of the numerator and denominator by Va - VI),' the
square roots. same terms but with the second having the
opposite sign, so that their product will not
Thus, V9- V 4 3 - 2 = I = contain a root.
but /9='4 VS 2.2361 = = 3a
Likewise Va + v'b is not the same as v"Ci+b va+Jb
HANDBOOK Powers, Roots, Imaginaries 753
Imaginary Since the square of a negative be accounted for separately, has found a sym-
Numbers number is positive and the bolic application in vector notation. These are
square of a positive number is covered later in this chapter.
also positive, the square root of a negative
number can be neither positive nor negative. Equations of the Algebraic expressions usu-
Such a number is said to be imaginary; the First Degree ally come in the form of
most common such number ( v--=-i) is often equations, that is, one set
represented by the letter i in mathematical of terms equals another set of terms. The sim-
work or j in electrical work. plest example of this is Ohm's Law:
Imaginary numbers do not exactly corre- One of the three quantities may be unknown
spond to anything in our experience and it is but if the other two are known, the third can
best not to try to visualize them. Despite this be found readily by substituting the known
fact, their interest is much more than academ- values in the equation. This is very easy if it
ic, for they are extremely useful in many cal- is E in the above example that is to be found;
culations involving alternating currents. but suppose we wish to find I while E and R
The square root of any other negative num- are given. We must then rearrange the equa-
ber may be reduced to a product of two roots, tion so that I comes to stand alone to the left
one positive and one negative. For instance: of the equality sign. This is known as solving
the equation for I.
Solution of the equation in this case is done
simply by transposing. If two things are equal
or, in general then they must still be equal if both are multi-
plied or divided by the same number. Dividing
-.r::a =iVa both sides of the equation by R:
E _ IR E
Since i =Y-1, the powers of i have the R - R = I or I= I t
following values:
If it were required to solve the equation for
i
2
= -1 R, we should divide both sides of the equation
by I.
i3 = -1 Xi= -i E E
- 1 = R orR= 1
i'= +1
A little more complicated example is the
i'=+1Xi=i equation for the reactance of a condenser:
Imaginary numbers are different from either 1
positive or negative numbers; so in addition or X= 2nfC
subtraction they must always be accounted for
separately. Numbers which consist of both real To solve this equation for C, we may multi-
and imaginary parts are called complex num- ply both sides of the equation by C and divide
bers. Examples of complex numbers: both sides by X
X X~X-- -2nfC
-1- - x ~ or
3 + 4i = 3 + 4 v'=1 X'
1
a+ bi =a+ bv=T C=~
Since an imaginary number can never be This equation is one of those which requires
equal to a real number, it follows that in an a good knowledge of the placing of the deci-
equality like mal point when solving. Therefore we give a
a +
bi = c di + few examples: What is the reactance of a 2'i
a must equal c and bi must equal di l'l'fd. capacitor at 1000 kc.? In filling in the
given values in the equation we must remem-
Complex numbers are handled in algebra ber that the units usea are farads, cycles, and
just like any other expression, considering i ohms. Hence, we must write 25 l'l'fd. as 25
as a known quantity. Whenever powers of i millionths of a millionth of a farad or 25 x
occur, they can be replaced by the equivalents 10 12 farad; similarly, 1000 kc. must be con-
given above. This idea of having In one equa- verted to 1,000,000 cycles. Substituting these
tion two separate sets of quantities which must values in the original equation, we have
754 Radio Mathematics and Calculations THE RADIO
X = "2-=x:--.3.-.1"4'x=-1',o"o"'o"'t,o"o"'o-:x:<2>o5~x;;-;-1n:o-=tn1
It is, however, simpler in this case to use
the elimination method. Multiply both sides of
the first equation by two and add it to the
X = 6.21xfo x 25 x 1o-u = 6.2810x 25 second equation:
= 6360 ohms
6x + lOy= 14
A bias resistor of 1000 ohms should be by- 4x- lOy= 3
passed, so that at the lowest frequency the re- ------add
actance of the condenser is 1/1 Oth of that of lOx 17 X= 1.7
the resistor. Assume the lowest frequency to be
50 cycles, then the required capacity should Substituting this value of x in the first equa-
have a reactance of 100 ohms, at 50 cycles: tion, we have
+ I,+ 1;,: A
c= 32 pfd.
f = 1
0 _01884 cycles = 53 cycles An application of two simultaneous linear
equations will now be given. In Figure 3 a
These equations are known as first degree simple network is shown consisting of three re-
equations with one unknown. First degree, be- sistances; let it be required to find the currents
cause the unknown occurs only as a first power. I, and I, in the two branches.
Such an equation always has one possible so- The general way in which all such prob-
lution or root if all the other values are known. lems can be solved is to assign directions to
If there are two unknowns, a single equa- the currents through the various resistances.
tion will not suffice, for there are then an infi- When these are chosen wrong it will do no
nite number of possible solutions. In the case harm for the re~ult of the equations will then
of two unknowns we need two independent be negative, showing up the error. In this sim-
simultaneous equations. An example of this is: ple illustration there is, of course, no such dif-
ficulty.
3x + 5y = 7 4x- lOy= 3 Next we write the equations for the meshes,
in accordance with Kirchhoff's second law. All
Required, to find x and y. voltage drops in the direction of the curved
This type of work is done either by the Jub- arrow are considered positive, the reverse ones
Jtitution method or by the elimination method. negative. Since there are two unknowns we
In the substitution method we might write for write two equations.
the first equation:
(I,+ + I.=
3x = 7 - 5y .". x = 7 - 5y
3
1000 1,) 2000 6
-2000 11 + 3000 I,= 0
(The symbol .. means. therefore or hence).
This value of x can then be substituted for x Expand the first equation
in the second equation making it a single equa-
tion with but one unknown, y. 3000 I. + 1000 ' =6
HANDBOOK Quadratic Equations 755
(b)
6000 1, + 9000 I, - 10 =0
Now we have but two equations with two
unknowns.
Multiplying equation (a) by 6 and adding
to equation (b) we have
Figure 4.
A MORE COMPLICATED PROB- -27000" - 10 = 0
LEM REQUIRING THE SOLUTION
OF CURRENTS IN A NETWORK. 13 = - 10/27000 = -0.00037 amp.
This problem Is similar to that in figure 3 but
requires the use of three simultaneous linear Note that now the solution is negative
equations. which means that we have drawn the arrow
for 1:. in Figure 4 in the wrong direction. The
current is 0.37 rna. in the other direction.
Multiply this equation by 3
Second Degree or A somewhat similar
9000 I,+ 3000 I,= 18 Quadratic Equations problem in radio would
be, if power in watts
Subtracting the second equation from the first and resistance in ohms of a circuit are given,
to find the voltage and the current. Example:
11000 I,= 18 When lighted to normal brilliancy, a 100 watt
I,= 18/11000 = 0.00164 amp. lamp has a resistance of 49 ohms; for what
line voltage was the lamp designed and what
Filling in this value in the second equation current would it take~
Here we have to use the simultaneous equa-
3000 I,= 3.28 I,= 0.00109 amp. tions:
P = El and E = IR
A similar problem but requiring three equa-
tions is shown in Figure 4. This consists of an Filling in the known values:
unbalanced bridge and the problem is to find
the current in the bridge-branch, I,. We again P = El = 100 and E = IR =I X 49
assign directions to the different currents,
guessing at the one marked L. The voltages Substitute the second equation into the first
around closed loops ABC ( eq. ( 1)} and BDC equation
( eq. ( 2) ] equal zero and are assumed to be
positive in a counterclockwise direction; that P = El = <I) X I X 49 = 49 I' = 100
from D to A equals 10 volts (eq. (3)}.
10
(1) . . I -- V l1oO
~ - - y = 1.43 amp.
-1000 I,+ 2000 I, - 1000 Ia = 0
Substituting the found value of 1.43 amp. for
(2) I in the first equation, we obtain the value of
-1000 ( 1,-1,) + 1000 Ia+ 3000 ( 1.+ 1,) =0 the line voltage, 70 volts.
Note that this is a second degree equation
(3) for we finally had the second power of I. Also,
1000 I,+ 1000 (1,- 1,) - 10 = 0 since the current in this problem could only be
positive, the negative square root of 100/49
Expand equations (2) and (3) or -10/7 was not used. Strictly speaking,
however, there are two more values that sat-
(2) isfy both equations, thee are -1.43 and -70.
-1000 I, + 3000 I, + 5000 I, = 0 In general, a second degree equation in one
unknown has two roots, a third degree equa-
(3) tion three roots, etc.
2000 I, - 1000 Ia - 10 = 0
The Quadratic Quadratic or second degree
Subtract equation (2) from equation (1) Equation equations with but one un-
known can be reduced to the
(a) general form
- 1000 I, - 6000 Ia = 0 ax' + bx + c =0
756 Radio Mathematics and Calculations THE RADIO
where x is the unknown and a, b, and c are Also: (XL - Xol" = %' - R2
constants.
This type of equation can sometimes be
solved by the method of factoring a three-
and (XL - Xo> = " z - 2
R
term expression as follows: But here we do not know the sign of the so-
lution unless there are other facts which indi-
cate it. To find either XL or Xc alone it would
2x2 + 7x + 6 = 0 have to be known whether the one or the other
2r + 4x + 3x + 6 = 0 is the larger.
factoring:
2x (x + 2) + 3 (x + 2) = 0 Logarithms
Definition A logarithm is the power (or ex-
(2x + 3) (x + 2) = 0 and Use ponent) to which we must raise
one number to obtain another.
There are two possibilities when a product Although the large numbers used in logarith-
is zero. Either the one or the other factor mic work may make them seem difficult or
equals zero. Therefore there are two solutions. complicated, in reality the principal use of
logarithms is to simplify calculations which
2x, +3= 0 x.+2=0 would otherwise be extremely laborious.
We have seen so far that every operation
2x, = -3 X.= -2 in arithmetic can be reversed. If we have the
addition:
x, = -1Yz
Since factoring is not always easy, the fol-
lowing general solution can usually be em- we can reverse this operation in two ways. It
ployed; in this equation a, b, and c are the co- may be that b is the unknown, and then we
efficients referred to above. reverse the equation so that it becomes
X -- -bvb-4ac
2a
c-a=b
It is also possible that we wish to know a, and
Applying this method of solution to the pre- that b and c are given. The equation then be-
vious example: comes
c-b=a
X _-7v49-8X6_-7VJ
- 4 - 4
-71
--4-
We call both of these reversed operations sub-
-7 + 1
x' = --4- - = - P/z traction, and we make no distinction between
the two possible reverses.
Multiplication can also be reversed in two
X. -- -7-1 -
4 --
2
manners. In the multiplication
A practical example involving quadratics is
the law of impedance in a.c. circuits. However, ab = c
this is a simple kind of quadratic equation
which can be solved readily without the use we may wish to know a, when b and c are
of the special formula given above. given, or we may wish to know b when a and
c are given. In both cases we speak of division,
% =V R + IXL - 2
Xol 2
and we make again no distinction between the
two.
This equation can always be solved for R, In the case of powers we can also reverse
by squaring both sides of the equation. It the operation in two manners, but now they
should now be understood that squaring both are not equivalent. Suppose we have the equa-
sides of an equation as well as multiplying tion
both sides with a term containing the unknown
may add a new root. Since we know here that
Z and R are positive, when we square the ex- If a is the unknown, and b and c are given,
pression there is no ambiguity. we may reverse the operation by writing
is known as taking the logarithm, and b is the log 100 = log 10' = 2
logarithm of c to the base a. We write this
operation as follows: log 1,000
= log 10 = 3 3
N 0 1 2 3 4
~-~-~o-~l~~ 2-'---3-'-
4 5 6 7 8
7466
9
7474
;:o
0
10 0000 0043 0086 0128 0170 0212 0253 0294 0334 0374 55 7404 7412 7419 7427 7435 7443 7451 7459
11 0414 0453 0492 0531 0569 0607 0645 0682 0719 0755 56 7482 7490 7497 7505 7513 7520 7528 7536 7543 7551 0....
12 0792 0828 0864 0899 0934 0969 1004 1038 1072 1106 57 7559 7566 7574 7582 7589 7597 7604 7612 7619 7527 0
13 1139 1173 1206 1239 1271 1303 1335 1367 1399 1430 58 7634 7642 7649 7657 7664 7672 7679 7686 7694 7701
14 1461 1492 1523 1553 1584 1614 1644 1673 1703 1732 59 7709 7716 7723 7731 7738 7745 7752 7760 7767 7774
15 1761 1790 1818 1847 1875 1903 1931 1959 1987 2014 60 7782 7789 7796 7803 7810 7818 7825 7832 7839 7846 ~
16 2041 2068 2095 2122 2148 2175 2201 2227 2253 2279 61 7853 7860 7868 7875 7882 7889 7896 7903 7910 7917 0
.......
17 2304 2330 2355 2380 2405 2430 2455 2480 2504 2529 62 7924 7931 7938 7945 7952 7959 7966 7973 7980 7987 ::::J
18 2553 2577 2601 2625 2648 2672 2695 2718 2742 2765 63 7993 8000 8007 8014 8021 8028 8035 8041 8048 8055 (1)
19 2788 2810 2833 2856 2878 2900 2923 2945 2967 2989 64 8062 8069 8075 8082 8089 8096 8102 8109 8116 8122
20 3010 3032 3054 3075 3096 3118 3139 3160 3181 3201 65 8129 8136 8142 8149 8156 8162 8169 8176 8182 8189
3
0
21 3222 3243 3263 3284 3304 3324 3345 3365 3385 3404 66 8195 8202 8209 8215 8222 8228 8235 8241 8248 8254 .......
22 3424 3444 3464 3483 3502 3522 3541 3560 3579 3598 67 8261 8267 8274 8280 8287 8293 8299 8306 8312 8319 ()
23 3617 3636 3655 3674 3692 3711 3729 3747 3766 3784 68 8325 8331 8338 8344 8351 8357 8363 8370 8376 83&1 {f)
24 3802 3820 3838 3856 3874 3892 3909 3927 3945 3962 69 8388 8395 8401 8407 8414 8420 8426 8432 8439 8445
25 3979 3997 4014 4031 4048 4065 4082 4099 4116 4133 70 8451 8457 8463 8470 8476 8482 8488 8494 8500 8506 0
26 4150 4166 4183 4200 4216 4232 4249 4265 4281 4298 71 8513 8519 8525 8531 8537 8543 8549 8555 8561 8567 :J
27 4314 4330 4346 4362 4378 4393 4409 4425 4440 4456 72 8573 8579 8585 8591 8597 8603 8609 8615 8621 8627 0....
28 4472 4487 4502 4518 4533 4548 4564 4579 4594 4609 73 8633 8639 8645 8651 8657 8663 8669 8675 8681 8686
29 4624 4639 4654 4669 4683 4698 4713 4728 4742 4757 74 8692 8698 8704 8710 8716 8722 8727 8733 8739 8745 ()
30 4771 4786 4800 4814 4829 4843 4857 4871 4886 4900 75 8751 8756 8762 8768 8774 8779 8785 8791 8797 8802 0
31 4914 4928 4942 4955 4969 4983 4997 5011 5024 5038 76 8808 8814 8820 8825 8831 8837 8842 8848 8854 8859 ()
32
33
5051
5185
5065
5198
5079
5211
5092
5224
5105
5237
5119
5250
5132
5263
5145
5276
5159
5289
5172
5302
77
78
8865
8921
8871
8927
8876
8932
8882
8938
8887
8943
8893
8949
8899
8954
8904
8960
8910
8965
8915
8971
c
34 5315 5328 5340 5353 5366 5378 5391 5403 5416 5428 79 8976 8982 8987 8993 8998 9004 9009 9015 9020 9025 0
.......
35 5441 5453 5465 5478 5490 5502 5514 5527 5539 5551 80 9031 9036 9042 9047 9053 9058 9063 9069 9074 9079
36 5563 5575 5587 5599 5611 5623 5635 5647 5658 5670 81 9085 9090 9096 9101 9106 9112 9117 9122 9128 9133 0
37 5682 5694 5705 5717 5729 5740 5752 5763 5775 5786 82 9138 9143 9149 9154 9159 9165 9170 9175 9180 9186 :J
{f)
38 5798 5809 5821 5832 5843 5855 5866 5877 5888 5899 83 9191 9196 9201 9206 9212 9217 9222 9227 9232 9238
39 5911 5922 5933 5944 5955 5966 5977 5988 5999 6010 84 9243 9248 9253 9258 9263 9269 9274 9279 9284 9289
40 6021 6031 6042 6053 6064 6075 6085 6096 6107 6117 85 9294 9299 9304 9309 9315 9320 9325 9330 9335 9340
41 6128 6138 6149 6160 6170 6180 6191 6201 6212 6222 86 9345 9350 9355 9360 9365 9370 9375 9380 9385 9390
42 6232 6243 6253 6263 6274 6284 6294 6304 6314 6325 87 9395 9400 9405 9410 9415 9420 9425 9430 9435 9440 -f
43 6335 6345 6355 6365 6375 6385 6395 6405 6415 6425 88 9445 9450 9455 9460 9465 9469 9474 9479 9484 9489
44 6435 6444 6454 6464 6474 6484 6493 6503 6513 6522 89 9494 9499 9504 9509 9513 9518 9523 9528 9533 9538 :I:
45 6532 6542 6551 6561 6571 6580 6590 6599 6609 6618 90 9542 9547 9552 9557 9562 9566 9571 9576 9581 9586
46
47
48
6628
6721
6812
6637
6730
6821
6646
6739
6830
6656
6749
6839
6665
6758
6848
6675
6767
6857
6684
6776
6866
6693
6785
6875
6702
6794
6884
6712
6803
6893
91
92
93
9590
9638
9685
9595
9643
9689
9600
9647
9694
9605
9652
9699
9609
9657
9703
9614
9661
9708
9619
9666
9713
9624
9671
9717
9628
9675
9722
9633
9680
9727
"'
49 6902 6911 6920 6928 6937 6946 6955 6964 6972 6981 94 9731 9736 9741 9745 9750 9754 9759 9763 9768 9773
50 6990 6998 7007 7016 7024 7033 7042 7050 7059 7067 95 9777 9782 9786 9791 9795 9800 9805 9809 9814 9818
51 7076 7084 7093 7101 7110 7118 7126 7135 7143 7152 96 9823 9827 9832 9836 9841 9845 9850 9854 9859 9863
52 7160 7168 7177 7185 7193 7202 7210 7218 7226 7235 97 9868 9872 9877 9881 9886 9890 9894 9899 9903 9908
53 7243 7251 7259 7267 7275 7284 7292 7300 7308 7316 98 9912 9917 9921 9926 9930 9934 9939 9943 9948 995~
54 7324 7332 7340 7348 7356 7364 7372 7380 7388 7396 99 9956 9961 9965 9969 9974 9978 9983 9987 9991 9996
0
HANDBOOK Logarithm Tables 759
was shown before that when multiplying to logarithm tables, it has become the rule that
powers, the exponents are added; therefore, the mantissa should always be positive. Such
notations above as -1.918555 really mean
a X b= l01oga X 10 1ogb= 10 (1oga+ >ogb> (+0.918555 -1) and -2.981555 means
( + 0.918555 - 2). There are also some other
Similarly, the logarithm of a quotient is the notations in use such as
difference between the logarithm of the divi-
dend and the logarithm of the divisor. 1.918555 and 2.918555
60 60
50 50
40 40
30 30
20 20
.
10 I0
0 0
co
-10 -1 oci
co Ot:f [-.;;rOQ
0 z
z-20 -2 o-
nm ...,, ..J
w
..J-30 -3 o>
w
>
w
. w
..J
..J -40
.
-50 -50
.
...<::.
-60 0
"'
70 -s -70
""'/;.
-eo
- - -a0
-90 ~0
6 7 8 9 I 2 3 4 5 6
POWER
Figure 9.
CONVERSION CHART: POWER TO DECIBELS
Power /eve/s between 6 m1crom1crowaffs and 6000 watts may be refetted to cottespondlng decibel
levels between -90 and 60 db, and vice verra, by means of the above chart. fifteen ranges are
provided. Each curve begins at the same point where the preceding one ends, enabling unlntettupted
coverage of the wide db and power ranges with condensed chart. For example: the lowermost curve
ends at 80 db or 60 mlcromlcrowaffs and the next range starts at the same level. Zero db l"el Is
talcen as 6 mllllwatts (.006 watt).
764 Radio Mathematics and Calculations THE RADIO
sine A= ~ . A =-
cosme b
c c
Figure 11. a b
tangent A= b cotangent A =a
THE RADIAN.
A radian is an angle whose arc is exactly equal c
to the length of either side. Note that the secant A= b cosecant A = ~
angle Is constant regardless of the length of a
the side and the arc so long as they are equal.
A radian equals 57.2958". Let us take a special angle as an example.
For instance, let the angle A be 60 degrees as
In trigonometry we consider an angle gen- in Figure 13B. Then the relations between the
erated by two lines, one stationary and the sides are as in the figure and the six functions
other rotating as if it were hinged at 0, Figure become:
12. Angles can be greater than 180 degrees and
even greater than 360 degrees as illustrated in sin. 60 = a
this figure. c
Two angles are complements of each other b 2
when their sum is 90, or a right angle. A is cos 60 =c- = T = 1;2.
the complement of B and B is the complement
of A when
A=(90-B) tan 60 = a = 2 V3 = V3
b 2
and when 2 1
cot 60 = 2 V3 = V3 = % V3
B=(90o-A)
1
Two angles are supplements of each other sec 60 = ~ % =2
when their sum is equal to a straight angle, or b
180. A is the supplement of B and B is the c 1
supplement of A when esc 60 a = 2 V3 = 2!J V3
A=(180-B) Another example: Let the angle be 45, then
and the relations between the lengths of a, b, and
c are as shown in Figure 13C, and the six
B=(180 -A) functions are:
?-A~ A~
~~~-----------x
0
Figure 12.
AN ANGLE IS GENERATED BY TWO LINES, ONE STATIONARY AND THE OTHER
ROTATING.
The line OX is stationary; the line with the small arrow at the far end rotates in a counterclockwise
direction. At the position Illustrated in the lelthandmost section of the drawing It makes an angle,
A, which is less than 90 o and is therefore In the first quadrant. In the position shown in the second
portion of the drawing the angle A ltas increased to such a value that It now lies In the third
quadrant; note that an angle can be greater than 180". In the third illustration the angle A is In
the fourth quadrant. In the fourth position the rotating vector has made more than one complete
revolution and is hence in the fifth quadrant; since the fifth quadrant is an exact repetition of the
first quadrant, its values will be the same as in the lefthandmost portion of the illustration.
HANDBOOK Trigonometric Relations 767
a-'hVl c=a
a= I
90"
A A A
b-0
Figure 13.
THE TRIGONOMETRIC FUNCTIONS.
In the right triangle shown in (A) the side opposite the ongle A is a, while the adjoining sides are
b and c; the trigonometric functions of the angle A are completely defined by the ratios of the
sides a, b and c. In (8) are shown the lengths of the sides a and b when angle A is 60' and side c
is I. In (C) angle A is 45'; a and b equal I, while c equals yf2. In (D) note that c equals a far a
right angle while b equals 0.
POSITIVE FUNCTIONS
Figure 15.
In this figure the sides a, b, and c are used
to define the trigonometric functions of angle
8 as well as angle A.
a = pos.
. A = -c- -b And in the fourth quadrant (270 to 360):
sm cos A = - = neg.
c
a -b . -a b
tan A = _ b = neg. cot A = -----;;- = neg. smA =-=neg. cos A = -c- = pos.
c
-a b
c
sec A = _ b = neg. cosec A = ac = pos. tan A =b =neg. cot A = --a = neg.
c c
For an angle in the third quadrant (180 to sec A= b = pos. cosec A = - = neg.
-a
270 ), the functions are
-b Summarizing, the sign of the functions in
-a each quadrant can be seen at a glance from
sin A = -c- = neg. cos A =-c- = neg.
Figure 17, where in each quadrant are written
-a -b the names of functions which are positive;
tan A = _ b = pos. cot A=-= pos.
-a those not mentioned are negative.
FOURTH
THIRD QUADRANT
QUADRANT
Figure 16.
TRIGONOMETRIC FUNCTIONS IN THE SECOND, THIRD, AND FOURTH QUADRANTS.
The trigonometric functions in these quadrants are similar to first quadrant values, bwt the
signs of the fwnctions vary crs listed In the text crnd in Flgwre 17.
HANDBOOK Trigonometric Curves 769
(AI
..."
r--
0' 90'
~-
180' 270'
1-
360'
t-
12: r--
450 540" 630' 72 0'
.,".V'
Figure 18. -r-
.,..., ~ r- 1:1'
SINE AND COSINE CURVES.
In (A) we have a sine curve
.
~
~
_,.
,: ""'
t- r-
-JLr--
,_
- -
1- !-- t - ,_ l"s r- !Z t:-::
drawn in Cartesian coordinates.
~
o-'-~:,. 7T .'!1r 2Tr 57>" _,n- 'C!! .,,.
This is the usual representation
of an alternating current wave
without substantial harmonics. In
(8) we have a cosine wove;
note that it is exactly similar
to a sine wove displaced by
90 or tt/2 radians.
(B)
Graphs af Trigona- The sine tl'ave. When 3. Cos x = -cos (180 -x) or
metric Functions we have the relation -cos ('<i -x)
y=sin x, where xis an 4. Cos x =cos (360-x) or cos (2'1T-x)
angle measured in radians or degrees, we can The graph of the tangent is illustrated in
draw a curve of y versus x for all values of Figure 19. This is a discontinuous curve and
the independent variable, and thus get a good illustrates well how the tangent increases from
conception how the sine varies with the mag- zero to infinity when the angle increases from
nitude of the angle. This has been done in zero to 90 degrees. Then when the angle is
Figure l8A. We can learn from this curve the further increased, the tangent starts from
following facts. minus infinity going to zero in the second quad-
1. The sine varies between + 1 and -1 rant, and to infinity again in the third quadrant.
2. It is a periodic curve, repeating itself after 1. The tangent can have any value between
every multiple of 2'1T or 360 + oo and - oo
3. Sin x =sin (180-x) or sin ('TT -x) 2. The curve repeats and the period is 'TT'
4. Sin x = -sin (180 + x), or radians or 180, not 2'7i radians
-sin ('TT + x) 3. Tan x =tan (180 +x) or tan (w+x)
The cosine ll'ave. Making a curve for the
4. Tan x =
-tan (180 -x) or
-tan (w -x)
function y = cos x, we obtain a curve similar The graph of the cotangent is the inverse of
to that for y = sin x except that it is displaced that of the tangent, see Figure 20. It leads us
by 90 or "'/2 radians with respect to the to the following conclusions:
Y-axis. This curve (Figure 18B) is also peri- 1. The cotangent can have any value be-
odic but it does not start with zero. We read tween + oo and - oo
from the curve: 2. It is a periodic curve, the period being
1. The value of the cosine never goes be- "' radians or 180
yond +1 or -1 3. Cot x =cot (180 +x) or cot ('<i +x)
2. The curve repeats, after every multiple 4. Cot x = -cot (180 -x) or
of 2'7i radians or 360 -cot ('" -x)
o
90'
tao
270'
3i.o
450'
54o
630'
no o 180'
270'
360'
4SO'
540'
6lO'
720'
Figure 22.
Vectors may be added as shown in these
sketches. In each case the long vector repre-
sents the vector sum of the smaller vectors.
For many engineering applications sufficient
accuracy can be obtained by this method
which avoids long and laborious calculations.
Figure 21.
ANOTHER REPRESENTATION OF velocity of 50 miles per hour, we speak of a
TRIGONOMETRIC FUNCTIONS. vector quantity.
If the radius of a circle is considered as the Vectors, representing forces, speeds, dis-
unit of measurement, then the lengths of the
various lines shown in this diagram are numer- placements, etc., are represented by arrows.
ically equal to the functions marked adjacent They can be added graphically by well known
to them. methods illustrated in Figure 22. We can make
the parallelogram of forces or we can simply
The graphs of the secant and cosecant are draw a triangle. The addition of many vectors
of lesser importance and will not be shown can be accomplished graphically as in the same
here. They are the inverse, respectively, of the figure.
cosine and the sine, and therefore they vary In order that we may define vectors algebra-
from + 1 to infinity and from -1 to -infinity. ically and add, subtract, multiply, or divide
Perhaps another useful way of visualizing them, we must have a logical notation system
the values of the functions is by considering that lends itself to these operations. For this
Figure 21. If the radius of the circle is the unit purpose vectors can be defined by coordinate
of measurement then the lengths of the lines systems. Both the Cartesian and the polar co-
are equal to the functions marked on them. ordinates are in use.
Trigonometric Tables There are two kinds of Vectors Defined Since we have seen how the
trigonometric tab 1e s. by Cartesian sum of two vectors is ob-
The first type gives the functions of the angles, Coordinates tained, it follows from Fig-
the second the logarithms of the functions. ure 23, that the vector Z
The first kind is also known as the table of equals the sum of the two vectors ; and j. In
natural trigonometric functions. fact, any vector can be resolved into vectors
These tables give the functions of all angles along the X- and Y-axis. For convenience in
between 0 and 45. This is all that is necessary working with these quantities we need to dis-
for the function of an angle between 45 and
90 can always be written as the co-function
of an angle below 4 5. Example: If we had to
find the sine of 48, we might write
+
=
sin 48 cos (90 -48) cos 42 =
Tables of the logarithms of trigonometric i
functions give the common logarithms (log10) B
of these functions. Since many of these logar-
ithms have negative characteristics, one should
add -10 to all logarithms in the table which
have a characteristic of 6 or higher. For in- +
stance, the log sin 24 = 9.60931 -10. Log
tan 1 o = 8.24192 -10 but log cot 1 =
1.75808. When the characteristic shown is less
than 6, it is supposed to be positive and one
should not add -10.
Figure 23.
Vectors
RESOLUTION OF VECTORS.
A scalar quantity has magnitude only; a Any vector such as .i may be resolved Info
11ector quantity has both magnitude and direc- two vectors, x and y, along the X- and Y-
tion. When we speak of a speed of 50 miles axes. If vectors are to be added, their respec-
per hour, we are using a scalar quantity, but tive x and y components may be added to
lind the x and y components of the resultant
when we say the wind is Northeast and has a vector.
HANDBOOK Vectors 771
.
I
I
~1 - - -
R = Xl + jy,
o Y, i; = x, + j y,
"'-----~=::.....;:.___ _ _ -i.:------7.- - - - -
x.-----i:'--X~ can be added, if we add the X-components
Figure 24.
and the -components separately.
ADDITION OR SUBTRACTION OF
VECTORS. R. + i: = x, + x. + i (y, + y,>
Vectors may be added or subtracted by
adding or subtracting their x or y com- For the same reason we can carry out sub-
ponents separately. traction by subtracting the horizontal compo-
nents and subtracting the vertical components
IZI= R+"7
z= x, =
+ jy, (x, + jy,) (x,- jy,)
z
Z=a+jb
b TAN A=*
JZI= Va'+b'
Figure 26.
Vectors can be transformed from Cartesian
into polar notation as shown in this figure.
X
which flows due to the alternating voltage is
Figure 25. not necessarily in step with it. The rotating
IN THIS FIGURE A VECTOR HAS current vector may be ahead or behind the
BEEN REPRESENTED IN POLAR voltage vector, having a phase difference with
INSTEAD OF CARTESIAN CO- it. For convenience we draw these vectors as
ORDINATES.
In polar coordinates a vector Is defined by
if they were standing still, so that we can indi-
a magnitude and an angle, called the vec- cate the difference in phase or the phase angle.
torial angle, instead ol by two magnitudes In Figure 28 the current lags behind the volt-
as In Cartesian coordinates. age by the angle 8, or we might say that the
voltage leads the current by the angle 8.
the vector Z has a magnitude 50 and a vector Vector diagram.r show the phase relations
ial angle of 60 degrees. This will then be between two or more vectors (voltages and
written currents) in a circuit. They rna y be added and
z = 50L60 subtracted as described; one may add a voltage
vector to another voltage vector or a current
A vector a + jb can be transformed into vector to a current vector but not a current
polar notation very simply (see Figure 26) vector to a voltage vector (for the same reason
that one cannot add a force to a speed). Figure
Z= a + jb = Ya + 2
b2 Ltan-' ~ 28 illustrates the relations in the simple series
circuit of a coil and resistor. We know that the
In this connection tan means the angle of current passing through coil and resistor must
which the tangent is. Sometimes the notation be the same and in the same phase, so we draw
arc tan b I a is used. Both have the same mean- this current I along the X-axis. We know also
ing. that the voltage drop IR across the resistor is
A polar notation of a vector can be trans- in phase with the current, so the vector IR rep-
formed into a Cartesian coordinate notation in resenting the voltage drop is also along the
the following manner (Figure 27) X-axis.
Z = pLA = p cas A + jp sin A The voltage across the coil is 90 degrees
ahead of the current through it; IX must
.1\. sinusoidally alternating voltage or cur- therefore be drawn along the Y-axis. E the
rent is symbolically represented by a rotating applied voltage must be equal to the vectorial
vector, having a magnitude equal to the peak sum of the two voltage drops, IR and /X, and
voltage or current and rotating with an angular we have so constructed it in the drawing. Now
velocity of 277"f radians per second or as many expressing the same in algebraic notation, we
revolutions per second as there are cycles per have
second. E= IR + jiX
The instantaneous voltage, e, is always equal
to the sine of the vectorial angle of this rotat- IZ = IR + jiX
ing vector, multiplied by its magnitude.
Dividing by I
e = E sin 27Tft Z=R+iX
The alternating voltage therefore varies with Due to the fact that a reactance rotates the
time as the sine varies with the angle. If we voltage vector ahead or behind the current
plot time horizontally and instantaneous volt- vector by 90 degrees, we must mark it with a
age vertically we will get a curve like those j in vector notation. Inductive reactance will
in Figure 18. have a plus sign because it shifts the voltage
In alternating current circuits, the current vector forwards; a capacitive reactance is neg-
HANDBOOK Graphical Representation 773
-------------- ~I
I
: pSIN A
]: I'
..
.~ -IR .. ... .,
I 1------~
y
2000
8
7 1800
I FI~ST I
1--- 1-- otE..f~~~T- 1--- b 1-1- t- QUADRANT- - - 1600
5 ,_ '-- 1400
4 1200
p
3 1000
2 800
Q
I
X
c 600
0 100 200 300 400 500
8-7 -b-5-4-3 -2 I
I
01 2 3 4 5 b 7 8
A-.
-2 Figure 31.
R
-3 s REPRESENTATION OF A SIMPLE
-4 FUNCTION IN CARTESIAN CO-
-5
ORDINATES.
300,000
1- - THIRD
QUA~RA\"
- FOURTH
-b - 1-- f-QUADRANT 1-- 1-- In this chart of the #unction fk, = Am.,.,.,
-7 distances along the X axis represent wave-
length in meters, while those along the Y
-8 axis represent frequency in kilocycles. A curve
y
such as this helps to lind values between
Figure 30. those calculated with su,icient accuracy for
CARTESIAN COORDINATES. most purposes.
The location ol any point can be delined by
its distance #rom the X and Y axes.
f is said to be a function of A. For every value
of f there is a definite value of A. A variable is
P 2, 3 or we might say x 2 and y =
3. The = said to be a function of another variable when
measurement x is called the abscissa of the for every possible value of the latter, or inde-
point and the distance y is called its ordinate. pendent variable, there is a definite value of
It is arbitrarily agreed that distances measured the first or dependent variable. For instance,
from 0 to the right along the X-axis shall be if y = 5x', y is a function of x and x is called
reckoned positive and to the left negative. Dis- the independent variable. When a = 3b' + 5b'
tances measured along the Y-axis are positive - 25b + 6 then a is a function of b.
when measured upwards from 0 and negative A function can be illustrated in our coordi-
when measured downwards from 0. This is nate system as follows. Let us take the equa-
illustrated in Figure 30. The two axes divide tion for frequency versus wavelength as an
the plane area into four parts called quadrants. example. Given different values to the inde-
These four quadrants are numbered as shown pendent variable find the corresponding values
in the figure. of the dependent variable. Then plot the points
It follows from the foregoing statements, represented by the different sets of two values.
that points lying within the first quadrant have
both x and y positive, as is the case with the f.,. /..lnt!ter.o;;
point P. A point in the second quadrant has a 600 500
negative abscissa, x, and a positive ordinate, y. 800 375
This is illustrated by the point Q, which has 1000 300
the coordinates x =-4 and y + 1. Points = 1200 250
in the third quadrant have both x and y nega- 1400 214
tive. x =- 5 and y =
-2 illustrates such a 1600 187
point, R. The point S, in the fourth quadrant 1800 167
has a negative ordinate, y and a positive ab- 2000 150
scissa or x.
In practical applications we might draw Plotting these points in Figure 31 and draw-
only as much of this plane as needed to illus- ing a smooth curve through them gives us the
trate our equation and therefore, the scales curve or graph of the equation. This curve
along the X-axis and Y-axis might not start will help us find values of f for other values
with zero and may show only that part of the of A (those in between the points calculated)
scale which interests us. and so a curve of an often-used equation may
serve better than a table which always has
Representation of In the equation: gaps.
Functions When using the coordinate system described
300,000 so far and when measuring linearly along both
f=--A- axes, there are some definite rules regarding
HANDBOOK Representation of Functions 775
Figure 32.
Only two points are needed to define func-
tions which result in a straight line as shown
in this diagram representing Ohm's Law. Figure 33.
A TYPICAL GRID- VOLTAGE
PLATE-CURRENT CHARACTER-
ISTIC CURVE.
the kind of curve we get for any type of The equation represented by such a curve Is
equation. In fact, an expert can draw the curve so complicated that we do not use it. Data
for such a curve Is obtained experimentally,
with but a very few plotted points since the and intermediate values can be found with
equation has told him what kind of curve to sufficient accuracy from the curve.
expect.
First, when the equation can be reduced to
the form y = mx + b, where x and y are the If the resistance were 4 ohms, we should get
variables, it is known as a linear or first degree
function and the curve becomes a straight line.
=
the equation E 41 and this also represents
a line which we can plot in the same figure.
(Mathematicians still speak of a "curve" when As we see, this line also passes through the
it has become a straight line.) origin but has a different slope. In this illus-
When the equation is of the second degree, tration the slope defines the resistance and we
that is, when it contains terms like ,?- or y' could make a protractor which would convert
or xy, the graph belongs to a group of curves, the angle into ohms. This fact may seem incon-
called conic sections. These include the circle, sequential now, but use of this is made in the
the ellipse, the parabola and the hyperbola. In drawing of loadlines on tube curves.
the example given above, our equation is of Figure 33 shows a typical, grid-voltage,
the form plate-current static characteristic of a triode.
xy = c, c being equal to 300,000 The equation represented by this curve is
rather complicated so that we prefer to deal
which is a second degree equation and in this with the curve. Note that this curve extends
case, the graph is a hyperbola. through the first and second quadrant.
This type of curve does not lend itself read Families of curves. It has been explained
ily for the purpose of calculation except near that curves in a plane can be made to illustrate
the middle, because at the ends a very large the relation between two variables when one
change in \ represents a small change in f and of them varies independently. However, what
vice versa. Before discussing what can be done are we going to do when there are three vari-
about this let us look at some other types of ables and two of them vary independently. It
curves. is possible to use three dimensions and three
Suppose we have a resistance of 2 ohms axes but this is not conveniently done. Instead
and we plot the function represented by Ohm's of this we may use a family of curves. We
Law: E = 21. Measuring E along the X-axis have already illustrated this partly with Ohm's
Law. If we wish to make a chart which will
and amperes along the Y-axis, we plot the
necessary points. Since this is a first degree show the current through any resistance with
equation, of the form y = mx + b (for E = any voltage applied across it, we must take the:
=
y, m = 2 and I= x and b 0) it will be a equation E = IR, having three variables.
straight line so we need only two points to We can now draw one line representing a
plot it. resistance of 1 ohm, another line representing
E 2 ohms, another representing 3 ohms, etc., or
as many as we wish and the size of our paper
(line passes through origin) 0 0 will allow. The whole set of lines is then
5 10 applicable to any case of Ohm's Law falling
within the range of the chart. If any two of
The line is shown in Figure 32. It is seen to the three quantities are given, the third can be
be a straight line passing through the origin. found.
776 Radio Mathematics and Calculations THE RADIO
~ ~t-~~~~-+-+-+-r~~,_,_+-t-t-~~
- 1~1~\~1/+r~~~/~v~~+-~~~~
\. / / I
Ir
line therefore shows the voltage drop across
the tube as well as the voltage drop across the
load for every value of grid bias. Therefore, if 100 0 0 0 0
we know how much the grid bias varies, we ~
can calculate the amount of variation in the ........ WAVELENGTH IN METERS
plate voltage and plate current, the amplifi- Figure 37.
cation, the power output, and the distortion.
A LOGARITHMIC CURVE
.Many functions become greatly simplified and
Logarithmic Scales Sometimes it is conven- some become straight lines when plotted to
ient to measure along logarithmic scales such as shown in this
the axes the logarithms of our variable quan- diagram. Here the frequency versus wavelength
tities. Instead of actually calculating the logar- curve of Figure 3 I has been replotted to con-
form with logarithmic axes. Note that it is
ithm, special paper is available with logarith- only necessary to calculate two points in
mic scales, that is, the distances measured order to determine the 11 t:urve" since this type
along the axes are proportional to the logar- of function results in a straight line.
ithms of the numbers marked on them rather
than to the numbers themselves.
trast to the graph made with linear coordi-
There is semi-logarithmic paper, having nates.
logarithmic scales along one axis only, the This last fact is a great advantage of logar-
other scale being linear. We also have full ithmic scales in general. It should be clear that
logarithmic paper where both axes carry log- if we have a linear scale with 100 small divi
arithmic scales. Many curves are greatly sim-
sions numbered from 1 to 100, and if we are
plified and some become straight lines when
able to read to one tenth of a division, the
plotted on this paper.
possible error we can make near 100, way up
As an example let us take the wavelength- the scale, is only 1/10th of a percent. But near
frequency relation, charted before on straight the beginning of the scale, near 1, one tenth of
cross-section paper. a division amounts to 10 percent of 1 and we
f = 300,000 are making a 10 percent error.
In any logarithmic scale, our possible error
A
in measurement or reading might be, say 1/32
Taking logarithms: of an inch which represents a fixed amount of
log f = log 300,000 - log A the log depending on the scale used. The net
result of adding to the logarithm a fixed quan-
If we plot log f along the Y-axis and log A tity, as 0.01, is that the anti-logarithm is mul-
along the X-axis, the curve becomes a straight tiplied by 1.025, or the error is 21(2%. No mat-
line. Figure 37 illustrates this graph on full ter at what part of the scale the 0.01 is added,
logarithmic paper. The graph may be read the error is always 2V2 %.
with the same accuracy at any point in con- An example of the advantage due to the use
778 Radio Mathematics and Calculations
10,000 r----r
r.o.
0.9 \
w
"'0z
... >-
tO
0.8 ......
:::>
\ FE
"' ...
::> -1----- -
/
>-
0 ~ 0.7 ::>
>- >-
w z
zu >-< O.b
0
tz< 1000 1\f---\
~ :2 >-
f-.--
0 0
"'u 0
"'z
w 0.5
"'0
u.. u..
"' u
\ I
ouz
w 0.4 "'0
u..
f--- \ 1/
"'
z z< w
u
2 0 0.3 z
"'"'
w w
z<
"'u.. "'>-< g
0
0
;:::
<
0.2
"'
>-
<
100 ----
=:
--~--
~\~ f--~
f---- ~~
f----- f-.--
_:_-=
~
0.1 f--~ e.-
"' >-
::>
1---
,_______ 1------ f-
0
.... - f-.--
~
15 10 0 10 IS f--- '----- 1 -
0
>-
,_1----- '-----
KC. OFF RESONANCE
Figure 38. u 1/ L-
z I
A RECEIVER RESONANCE CURVE. z<
This curve represents the output ol a re- 0
ceiver versus frequency when plotted to linear "'w 10
coordinates. "'
u.
u.
9
8
~
1----- - - - - - f----
--
-- --
---
0
>-
l
5 -
- - - - f-----
-- --
- _,
- - e-.--
-- ---
~-
::>
....
of semi-logarithmic paper is shown in Figures 4 - - C--.- -
~
38 and 39. A resonance curve, when plotted on u. 3
linear coordinate paper will look like the curve 0
2 ---- - -
in Figure 38. Here we have plotted the output 0
\7
~-
;::
of a receiver against frequency while the ap <
a<
plied voltage is kept constant. It is the kind of I
curve a "wobbulator" will show. The curve -20 -10 0 +10 +20
does not give enough information in this form
KC. OFF RESONANCE
for one might think that a signal 10 kc. off
resonance would not cause any current at all Figure 39.
and is tuned out. However, we frequently have A RECEIVER SELECTIVITY CURVE.
off resonance signals which are 1000 times as This curve represents the selectivity of a re-
strong as the desired signal and one cannot ceiver plotted to logarithmic coordinates lor
the output, but linear coordinates lor fre-
read on the graph of Figure 38 how much any quency. The reason that this curve appears
signal is attenuated if it is reduced more than inverted lrom that ol Figure 38 is explained
about 20 times. in the text.
In comparison look at the curve of Figure
39. Here the response (the current) is plotted
in logarithmic proportion, which allows us to be used because now our unit is logarithmic.
plot clearly how far off resonance a signal has An example of full logarithmic paper being
to be to be reduced 100, 1,000, or even 10,000 used for families of curves is shown in the re-
times. actance charts of Figures 40 and 41.
. Note that this curve is now "upside down";
it is therefore called a selectivity curve. The Nomograms or An alignment chart con-
reason that it appears upside down is that the Alignment Charts sists of three or more sets
method of measurement is different. In a se- of scales which have been
lectivity curve we plot the increase in signal so laid out that to solve the formula for which
voltage necessary to cause a standard output the chart was made, we have but to lay a
off resonance. It is also possible to plot this in- straight edge along the two given values on
crease along the Y-axis in decibels; the curve any two of the scales, to lind the third and
then looks the same although linear paper can unknown value on the third scale. In its sim-
Figure 40.
REACTANCE-FREQUENCY CHART FOR AUDIO FREQUENCIES
~~ ~~ ~~ "~~~~ ~ ~ ~~~" ~~ i
~~v:71p<,~"-j')K~00~~v.et~~":Ts~~~~~~~~'\~~~~~~~v~~.)~M~
f<~ V'\ X ll\~ V\V'x ~ rY)<
~Q ~Q ~Q
~Q
~v
001 HY ~' ~
... OOJJHY .,,'~V 1OJJHY 1.OJJHY 0~01..UHY ...o0 01JJHY g
;;o
0
lOOMC
1 ~ "i >.:
D..
10011/1C.
0
K~ ~
')IS '\.X' X: ~ '\.X
v.; v
'"N '\.,X.
>-.v<
'"N
v.; ~~" ~~
.'--X. '?\l
Gt::Z. .....~ ~
'-A rxl' :'\.' '
'\.,X.
l'l' ~"\: bX.V\ ~
~"' K~ 1/' ~"\: bX."'-X
X'0(
~"'
>s.
w~ ~ ~')( ~~ k ~ X~ K P< ~~ ~ p< ..X ~ :X X~ ....:::r
0
r-..
~~ " 3
~~ ~ ~ ~~
r-..~
~K ~~ ~ ~ ~~ ~
~~
~~
['I' ~
~~~ ~~~ ~~ ~ ~~
01 HY .. IX
l'- IX ~~~ ....
0
10 MC 10 MC. ()
V>
~
~
~" '-A'V<
)'( ~ v::x
V-1 ~" kX~
)'(~
v: 'L
~ ""~ "'~
"'"--X K
V:::Z ~ ~
~ X~
"" ~
Gt::::Z ~ ~
:X ~~ ~~
v:v ~"' -X'V<
~~ ~Q
:::l
D..
w " [" o
~k ~ ~><
0.1 HY
1 MC
~I>< 1\
~><
~~ ~~~ "~
::--.~ ~~
['r'-. P<
I?< P< ~~
I'
ti><
~~ ~ ~ ~ B~ ~~
1 MC.
()
c
....
0
0
~ !"-.X ~ ~ I"-. X t'Xl< ~ 1"-.X ~~'\ I'\. X !{', 1'- X 'X> ~ '\.X' :::l
~ ~ ~'\ kX"-.X IY ~ ~ X'V<. w ~" l>0..X v:v ~ IX"\X V:tz ~ bX.'\2<., Kr,; I/
~"'
.,)('\..)( V>
~ ">( ~ t/~ )'( ~ v:~ ~~ II< )):~ NQ< P< ~~ V:~ )'( ~
r--) ./ t)W ~ r-.. ) / ~
">./~ r---1> / ~ f'-12 / ~ ~~'r--
> ./ ~
-1
~~~ kK ~ ~ ~~
r-..
~~ ~~ ~~ ~~ B
1 HY r-..k [\[><
~~P< I' I><
100 KC
R~ ~I> I><~ ~~ C'-~ l\1><
100 KC.
:I:
1000000A 100000.n.. 10000..0. 1ooon 1oon 10 .a. 1.0.
"'
Figure 41.
REACTANCE-FREQUENCY CHART FOR R.F.
This chart is used in conjunction with the nomograph on page 569 for radio frequency tank coil computations.
0
HANDBOOK Polar Coordinates 781
p
/
/
/
/
RADIUS /
VECTOR/
/
/
/
c
/
b ///\"' X
O ORIGIN AXIS
Figure 43.
0
THE LOCATION OF A POINT BY
Figure 42. POLAR COORDINATES.
In the polar eoordinote system any point is
THE SIMPLEST FORM OF NOMOGRAM. determined by its distonee from the origin
and the angle formed by a line drawn from
it to the origin and the 0-X axis.
plest form, it is somewhat like the lines in Fig-
ure 42. If the lines a, b, and c are parallel and
equidistant, we know from ordinary geometry, by the angle A the vectorial angle. We give
that b = % (a + c). Therefore, if we draw a these data in the following form
scale of the same units on all three lines, start-
ing with zero at the bottom, we know that by p = 3 /j0
laying a straight-edge across the chart at any
place, it will connect values of a, b, and c, Polar coordinates are used in radio chiefly
which satisfy the above equation. When any for the plotting of directional properties of mi-
two quantities are known, the third can be crophones and antennas. A typical example of
found. such a directional characteristic is shown in
If, in the same configuration we used loga- Figure 44. The radiation of the antenna rep-
rithmic scales instead of lirrear scales, the rela- resented here is proportional to the distance of
tion of the quantities would become the characteristic from the origin for every
possible direction.
log b = lj2 (log a + log c) orb = vac
By using different kinds of scales, different
units, and different spacings between the scales,
charts can be made to solve many kinds of
equations.
If there are more than three variables it is
generally necessary to make a double chart,
that is, to make the result from the first chart
serve as the given quantity of the second one.
Such an example is the chart for the design of
coils illustrated in Figure 45. This nomogram
is used to convert the inductance in microhen-
ries to physical dimensions of the coil and vice
versa. A pin and a straight edge are required.
The method is shown under "R. F. Tank Cir
cuit Calculations" later in this chapter.
200
3
2000 a
150
tOO
90
80 2
200
70
80 100
80
50 .a
40 1.5
40 30
20---- --- ------
3o--- --- .a
tO" ----
8 --
--- --- .5
---
8
20
.4 '
2
15
.3 ,75
10
5 .2
0
3
784 Radio Mathematics and Calculations
ductance, the D/L ratio, and the diameter are given than the accuracy of the measurement
known, simply work backwards from the ex- permits. Thus, if the measurement is good to
ample given. In all cases, remember that the two places, we wo1.1ld write, for instance, 6.9
straightedge reads either turns and D /L ratio, which would mean that the true value is
or it reads inductance and diameter. It can somewhere between 6.85 and 6.95. If the meas-
read no other combination. urement is known to three significant figures,
The actual wire size has negligible effect we might write 6.90 which means that the true
upon the calculations for commonly used wire value is somewhere between 6.895 and 6.905.
sizes (no. 10 to no. 30). The number of turns In dealing with approximate quantities, the
of insula ted wire that can be wound per inch added cipher at the right of the decimal point
(solid) will be found in a copper wire table. has a meaning.
There is unfortunately no standardized sys-
tem of writing approximate figures with many
Significant Figures ciphers to the left of the decimal point. 69000
does not necessarily mean that the quantity is
In most radio calculations, numbers repre- known to 5 significant figures. Some indicate
sent quantities which were obtained by meas- the accuracy by writing 69 x 10 3 or 690 x 10'
urement. Since no measurement gives absolute etc., but this system is not universally em-
accuracy, such quantities are only approximate ployed. The reader can use his own system, but
and their value is given only to a few signifi- whatever notation is used, the number of sig-
cant figures. In calculations, these limitations nificant figures should be kept in mind.
must be kept in mind and one should not fin- Working with approximate figures, one may
ish for instance with a result expressed in more obtain an idea of the influence of the doubtful
significant figures than the given quantities at figures by marking all of them, and products
the beginning. This would imply a greater ac- or sums derived from them. In the following
curacy than actually was obtained and is there- example, the doubtful figures have been under-
fore misleading, if not ridiculous. lined.
An example may make this clear. Many am- 603
meters and voltmeters do not give results to 34.6
closer than 1/4 ampere or % volt. Thus if we O.l20
have 2% amperes flowing in a d.c. circuit at
6% volts, we can obtain a theoretical answer 637.720 answer: 638
by multiplying 2.25 by 6.75 to get 15.1875
watts. But it is misleading to express the an- Multiplication:
swer down to a ten-thousandth of a watt when
the original measurements were only good to 654 654
% ampere or volt. The answer should be ex- 0.342 0.342
pressed as 15 watts, not even 15.0 watts. If 1308 196\2
we assume J. possible error of lj8 volt or am-
pere (that is, that our original data are only 2616 26\16
correct to the nearest % volt or ampere) the 1962- 1\308
true power lies between 14.078 (product of 223.668 answer: 224 ~
21/8 and 6%) and 16.328 (product of 2% and
6;;'8 ). Therefore, any third significant figure It is recommended that the system at the
would be misleading as implying an accuracy right be used and that the figures to the right
which we do not have. of the vertical line be omitted or guessed so as
Conversely, there is also no point to calcu- to save labor. Here the partial products are
lating the value of a part down to 5 or 6 sig- written in the reverse order, the most impor-
nificant figures when the actual part to be used tant ones first.
cannot be measured to better than 1 part in In division, labor can be saved whn after
one hundred. For instance, if we are going to each digit of the quotient is obtained, one fig-
use 1% resistors in some circuit, such as an ure of the divisor be dropped. Example:
ohmmeter, there is no need to calculate the
value of such a resistor to 5 places, such as 1.28
1262.5 ohm. Obviously, 1% of this quantity 527) 673
is over 12 ohms and the value should simply 527
be written as 1260 ohms. 53 f"i46
There is a definite technique in handling 106
these approximate figures. When giving values sno
obtained by measurement, no more figures are ~
~
r-1TI---,t
2C L2C
L.---- T-----J
HIGH-PAS! SCTION
LOW-PASS "SECTION
VALUES
L c LOAD RESISTANCE
.J 1000 10000
HOO 9000
.4
t200
eooo
..
.$
'300
1400 7000
....
.7 tSOO
1000
i100
6000
. i.$
.,
u
"'uz
2000 5000 "'
..
u
z
20 2.0 2000 .4000 ~
... ..u
o(
o(
u
::> o(
0 3000 u
30 3.0 ~
.....z
0:
3000 ~
.....
40
00
4.0
o.o
..
u .4000
z
u
...:t
60
70
6.0
7.0
....."'
.J
"iii
a.o 0000 2000 :I:
00
90 9.0
:t
... ...
100 ~o.o i i
.,::>
11.1 fOOO
3
1500
i$0
200
tS.O
20.0
~ 7000
.
0:
0
0000
9000
300 30.0
L c
Courtey, Pacific Radio Publihing Co.
To lind C, connect cut-off frequency on left-hand scale (using lelt-side scale for low-pass and right
side scale for high pass) with the load on the right-hand side of the right-hand scale. Then read .the
ya/ue of C from the point where the straightedge cuts the right side of the center scale. Readings are
in microfarads for frequencies in cycles per second.
For eoclo tenfold Increase In floe value of load reslstan<o multiply L by 10 and divide C by 10.
For eo<lo tenfold decrease In frequency multiply L by 10 nd multiply C by 10.
785
INDEX
A
Acceptor, del. of .................................................. 92 Amplifier - Push-pull ............................ 121, 612
A.C.-D.C. power supply ...................... 561, 588, 694 " Push-pull tetrode ...................................... 644
''Acorn'' tube ...................................................... 232 R-F- RC.. ...................................... 121, 109
A-C V- T voltmeter ............................................. .724 Response ................................................ !! 2
Adapter, F-M ...................................................... 325 R-F - 4CX-1 OOOA .......................... 21 3, 640
Adapter, mechanical filter .................................. 535 Summing .................................................. 201
Admittance, del. of .............................................. 52 Termon-Woodyard .................................. 298
''A''-frame antenna mast.. ................................. .448 Tetrode .................................................... 614
Air capacitor...................................................... 359 Transistor ................................................ ] 04
Air dielectric. ....................................................... 32 Ultra-linear .............................................. 142
Air-gap, capacitor.............................................. 264 Vertical .................................................... 138
Alignment- B.f.o- Filter................................ 236 V.h.f. cascade .......................................... 578
" Receiver- 1-F- R-F .............. 148, 235, 236 Video ...................................... 112, 113,128
All-driven antenna ..............................................504 Voltage .................................................... ]] 0
Alpha, del. of ...................................................... 93 Williamson .............................................. 140
Alternating current - Amplitude - Average ..... .45 Amplitude - A.C.. .............................................. .45
" Del. of - Effective value .................... 41, 45 " Distortion - Modulation ........ ! 09, 282, 647
Generation ............................................... .42 Analog computers - problems.. ................ 195, 200
Impedance- "J" operator ....................... .47 Angle of radiation - V.h.f.. ............ A 11, 460, 478
Ohm's law- Phase angle ................... .45, 46 Anode, del. of - dissipation ........................ 67, 72
Pulsating - R.M.S .................................... .45 Antenna - Adjustment ...................................... 509
Transformer .............................................. 61 '' All-driven ................................................ 504
Transient .................... , ............................... 59 Bandwidth ................................... .405, 413
Voltage divider .......................................... 52 Beam -design chart - 2-element 498, 495
Alternator ........................................................... .42 Bidirectional - Bi-square .............. 505, 470
Amateur band receiver ........................................ 540 Bobtail ................................................... .472
Amateur frequency bands - licenses .................. ! 2 Broadside ............................................... .468
Amateur radio service, The .................................... ll Bruce ..................................................... .470
Ammeter ........................................................... .721 Center-fed ............................................. .438
Ampere, del. of.. ............................................ 22, 23 Colinear ................................................. .466
Ampere-turns ................................................ 36, 62 Combinations of ................................... .475
Amperite filament regulator ................................ 552 Construction .................................... 448, 506
Amplification factor ....................................... .73, 74 Corner reflector ..................................... .485
Amplifier- Audio- Cascode .................. 227, 214 Couplers - mobile ............. .454, 520, 524
Cathode - Cathode driven ............ 127, 626 Coupling systems ................................... .451
Cathode follower ...................................... 134 Cubical quad ......................................... .471
Class A - A2.. .......................... 99, 108, 118 Curtain ................................................. .468
Class AB- AB1 .............................. 108, 137 Delta match ............................................ 501
Class B.................... 99, 108, 123, 129, 251 Dipole array - broad-band ....... .465, 435
Class C.................................... l 08, 124, 251 Directivity ..................................... .404, 410
Coupling - inductive .............. 113, 11 8, 1 23 Discone ......................................... .441, 481
D.C ......................................................... 117 Doublet ................................................. .427
Doherty .................................................. 298 Dummy .................................................... 726
Driver ...................................................... 126 Efficiency ............................................... .409
Equivalent circuit.. .................................... ! 09 Element spacing ..................................... .468
Feedback ................................................ ] 29 End-effect ............................................... .406
Grid circuit.. .............................................. 121 End-fed - end-fire ............... .426, 437, 473
Grounded cathode-Grounded screen 132,629 Feed systems ................................. .428, 498
Grounded grid ........ 132, 135, 214, 258, 626 Franklin array ....................................... .466
Hi-li - High mu (JL) ...................... 138, 112 Fuchs ..................................................... .426
Horizontal- I-F .............................. 139, 210 Gain, beam ........................................... .495
Kilowatt, general purpose ........................ 635 Gamma match ........................................ 503
linear .................................... 138, 286, 620 Ground loss ........................................... .409
laflin-White ............................................ 118 Ground plane .......................................... 431
Multi-band linear...................................... 624 Hertz ..................................................... .426
Neutralization ........................ 252, 616, 639 High frequency type ............................... .459
Noise factor .............................................. ! 2 2 Impedance ............................................. .408
Operational ............................................ 199 Intercept, v.h.f ...................................... .477
Pentode .................................................. 120 lazy-H .................................................... 468
Pi-network .............................................. 617 length - length-to-diameter ratio 405, 406
Plate efficiency .......................................... 1 29 long wire ............................................. .461
Power .............................................. 11 8, 61 0 Maconi ............................................ 408, 432
Printed circuit ............................................575 Matching systems ................................. .442
786
Antenna - Measurements ................................ 730 Bandwidth, modulation ...................................... 283
Multee ...... ---------------------------------------------.440 Base electrode ----------------------------------------------------92
Multi-band ................................... .436, 514 Bass suppression, audio .................................... 306
Mutual coupling ................................... .475 Battery bias ------------------------------------------------------269
Parasitic beam ....................................... .494 Beam - Design chart - Dimensions ..... .498, 496
Patterns ......................................... .404, 460 Element spacing -------------------------------------.497
Phasing ................................................. .466 Front-back ratio -------------------------------------.496
Polarization ........................................... .404 H-F - 5-element - 2-element ... .496, 494
Polarization, v.h.f .................................. .479 Power tube ............................................. .78
Power gain ........................................... .405 Radiation resistance ............................... .495
Q -----------------------------------------------------------.409 Three element HF- 220 Me. ....... .496, 603
Reactance - Resonance ............... .408, 404 Beat note ........................................................ 208
Rhombic ................................................. .464 Beat oscillator .................. -------------------------------224
Rotary - Rotary match ................. .494, 502 B-H curve ------------------------------------------------------------36
Rotator .................................................... 51 2 Bias - Battery --------------------------------------------------269
Single wire feed ................................... .441 Cathode --------------------------------------------------268
Six-shooter ............................................. .472 Def. of - cut-off -----------------------------------.73
Sleeve ................................................... .480 Grid .............................................. 108, 267
Space conserving ................................... .434 Grid leak ........................................ 112, 268
Stacked ......................................... .468, 498 R-F amplifier ----------------------------------------61 2
Sterba ................................................... .469 Safety ----------------------------------------------------268
Stub adjustment- stub match ....... .445, 503 Shift modulator ----------------------------------------307
T-match .................................................. 501 Supply, modulator ----------------------------------653
3-element beam-3-element match 603, 488 Transistor .................................................. 96
Triplex .................................................... 475 Bidirectional antenna ........................................ 505
Tuner ..................................................... .456 Bifilar coil --------------------------------------------------------572
Turnstile ................................................. .480 Billboard antenna -------------------------------------------.477
Two-band Marconi .................................. 438 Binary notation ----------------------------------------195, 196
Y-type ................................................... .462 Bishop noise limiter ----------------------------------------228
Vertical ................................................. .430 Bi-square antenna -------------------------------------------.470
Y.h.f.-8-element-ground plane ... .488, 481 Bistable multivibrator ----------------------------------------102
Y.h.f. - helical - horn ............... .483, 486 Bit --------------------------------------------------------------------196
Y.h.f. nondirectional ............................... .482 Blanketing interference --------------------------------------380
Y.h.f. rhombic ....................................... .486 Bleeder resistor - safety .................. 27, 709, 395
Y.h.f. -screen array- Yogi ....... .491, 488 Blocked grid keying ------------------------------------------398
W8JK ................................................... .473 Blocking diodes -----------------------------------------------.401
X-arroy ................................................... .469 Blocking oscillator .................... 102, 155, 1 89, 190
Yoke match -------------------------------------------.498 Bob-tail antenna -----------------------------------------------.472
"Zepplin" ..................................... .427, 467 Bombardment, cathode ...................................... 70
Antennascope ................................................... .738 Boost, Bass/Treble --------------------------------------------139
Anti-resonance .... ------------------------------------------------54 Break voltage ----------------------------------------------------203
Aquadag ------------------------------------------------------------85 Bridge measurements ........................................ 728
Area, capacitor plate ------------------------------------------33 Bridge rectifier --------------------------------------------------689
Arrays, antenna ....................................... .465, 412 Bridge, slide-wire ............................................. .728
"Assumed'' voltage --------------------------------------------52 Bridge, SWR ---------------------------------------------.458, 736
Atom, def. of - atomic number ........................ 21 Bridge-T oscillator --------------------------------------------192
Attenuation, Bass/Treble .................................. 139 Bridge-type vacuum tube voltmeter .................... 131
Audio - Amplifier .......................................... 227 Bridge, Wheatstone ------------------------------------------728
" Distortion ................................................ 135 Broad band dipole -------------------------------------------.435
Equalizer ------------------------------------------------139 Broadcast interference ........................................ 379
Feedback loop ........................................ 141 Broadside antennas - arrays ................. .468, 41 2
Filter, SSB .............................................. 333 Bruce antenna -------------------------------------------------.470
Frequency, def. of ................................... .42 Butterfly circuit ................................................ 232
Hum --------------------------------------------------------142
limiters .................................. 153, 185, 228 c
Phase Inverter --------------------------------------- 115 Calorimeter -------------------------------------------------------.726
Phasing network - SSB ................ 570, 338 Capacitance - Calculation - definition .... 32, 30
Wiring technique .................................... 142 " lnterelectrode ---------------------------------.76, 1 06
Autodyne detector .............................................. 208 Neutralization ----------------------------------------107
Automatic load control, SSB .............................. 345 Tank- Stray --------------------------------261, 218
Automatic modulation control ............................ 648 Capacitive coupling --------------------------------------------270
Automatic volume control ----------------------------------225 Capacitive reactance ......................................... .46
Autotransformer ------------------------------------------63, 390 Capacitor - A.C. circuit .................................... 34
Avalanche voltage ............................................ 697 " Air- Characteristics ...................... 359, 358
Breakdown .............................................. 264
B Charge ------------------------------------------------------31
Balanced modulator - SSB ............ 331, 338, 343 Color code .............................................. 531
Balanced SWR bridge -------------------------------------.736 Electrolytic ........................................ 34, 708
Balanced transmission line measurements ....... .734 Equalizing ------------------------------------------------34
Bands, amateur --------------------------------------------------1 2
Bandspread tuning --------------------------------------------217
~:~:~ :_-_-_:::__-_-_::_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_::_-_-_::::__-_-_:__-_:.:_~~-~: ..~~~
Bandwidth, antenna -------------------------------.405, 413 Leakage ----------------------------------------------------34
Bandwidth, 1-F, graph ........................................ 534 Low inductance ........................................ 619
787
Capacitor - Parallel .......................................... 33 Collins feed system ........................................... .447
Q -------------------------------------------------------54 Collins filter ------------------------------------------------------222
Series ........................................................ ::03 Color code, standard ................................ 531, 532
Temperature coefficient ............................ 32 Colpitts oscillator .............................................. 241
Time constant ............................................ 39 Complementary symmetry .................................. 97
Vacuum - variable vacuum .......... 360, 620 Complex quantity ............................................... .49
Voltage rating .......................................... 34 Component nomenclature graph ...................... 530
Carrier - Distortion ........................................ 31 3 Compound, def. of .............................................. 21
Shift ........................................................ 284 Compression, volume ........................................ 648
S.S.B ............................. 327, 331, 332, 334 Compressor, A.L.C. ............................................ 345
Cascade amplifier- V.H.F ........... 111, 214, 578 Computers, electronic ........................................ 194
Cathode- Bias ........................................ ! 08, 268 Conductance, del. of ............................................ 52
" Coupling - coupled inverter .......... 115, 116 Conduction .................................................. 67, 90
Current- Definition ......................... .79, 67 Conductivity - Conductor .................................. 23
Driven amplifier .............................. 258, 626 Constant amplitude recording ............................ 137
Follower .................................................. 274 Constant current curve ............................. .74, 1 27
Follower amplifier ............................ ! 27, 134 Constant-K filter ................................................ 64
Follower driver ................................ 659, 662 Constant velocity recording ................................ 136
Follower modulator .................................. 290 Constants, vacuum tube ...................................... ! 07
Keying .................................................... 397 Construction, transmitter - VFO ............ 663, 676
Modulation .............................................. 297 Control circuit, mobile ...................................... 525
Cathode ray oscilloscope - tube ............ 138, 84 Control circuit, transmitter ................................ 391
Cavity, resonant ................................................ 23 2 Conversion conductance ...................................... 80
Cell, Weston ...................................................... 24 Conversion, frequency, SSB ................................ 340
Center-fed antenna ........................................... .438 Converter stage ................................................ 211
Ceramic dielectric ................................................ 32 Converter, transistor ........................................ ! 00
Charge .................................................. 22, 23, 30 Core loss ............................................................55
Chassis layout ................................................. .726 Corner reflector antenna ................................. .485
Choke, filter .................................................... 709 Corona static .................................................... 529
Choke, R-F ................................................ 272, 361 Coulomb ........................................................ 22, 30
Circuit constants, measurement of ................... .727 Counter e.m.l ....................................................... 37
Circuits - Coupled .......................................... ! 23 Counting circuits ........................................ 156, 190
" D.C.- Equivalent .............................. 21, 51 Coupler, directional .......................................... 735
Input loading ........................................ 122 Coupling - Capactive ...................................... 270
Limiting .................................................. 151 Cathode .................................................. 115
Magnetic .................................................. 35 Choke ...................................................... 11 4
Parallel ...................................................... 25 Critical .............................................. 57, 218
Pa~asitic .................................................. 365 Direct ...................................................... 115
Q -------------------------------------------54 Effect of .................................................. 56
Resonant- Series- Tank .... 53, 24, 55, 57 Impedance - Inductive ................ 113, 271
Circulating current .............................................. 56 lnterstage - r-f ............................ 270, 619
Clamping circuit ................................ 153, 154, 187 Link ................................................ 272, 611
Clapp oscillator ................................................ 241 Magnetic .................................................. 38
Class A amplifier, del. of ................................ ! 08 Parasi~ic ................................................ 364
Class A2 amplifier ............................................ 118 R-F feedback .......................................... 275
Class AB amplifier, def. of ................................ ! 08 Systems, antenna ................................... .451
Class ABl amplifiers .............................. 137, 140 Transformer ............................................ 113
Class B amplifiers ............ 108, 123, 125, 1 29, 139 Unity ...................................................... 271
Class B modulator .................................... ! 26, 294 Critical coupling ................................................ 218
Class B, R-F amplifier ...................................... 251 Critical inductance ............................................ 686
Class C amplifiers ................ ! 08, 124, 125, 251 Crosby modulator .............................................. 590
Class C bias ...................................................... 267 Cross modulation ............................................ 381
Clipper-Amplifier design .................................. 657 Crossover point .................................................. ! 36
Clipper filter, speech ........................................ 304 Crystal - Current ............................................ 246
Clipping circuits ...................................... 151, 1 85 " Filter - Lattice filter .......... 220, 336, 579
Clipping, negative peak .................................... 648 Harmonic ................................................ 246
Clipping, phase shift ........................................ 301 Oscillator - Quartz ...................... 244, 245
Clipping, speech .............................. 124, 300, 648 Pickup .................................................... 137
Closed loop feedback ........................................ 192 Cubical quad antenna ..................................... .471
Coaxial delay line ............................................ 204 Current - Alternating ..................................... .41
Coaxial rellectometer ....................................... .73 2 Amplification (alpha) .............................. 93
Coaxial transmission line ................................. .423 Cathode .................................................... 79
Coaxial tuned circuit ........................................ 232 Circulating -Closed path .................. 56, 28
Code .............................................................. 14-20 Del. of .................................................... 22
Code, practice set .............................................. 19 Effective - Effective (a.c.) ............ 723, 45
Coefficient of coupling ...................................... 38 Electrode ................................................ ! 06
Coefficient, temperature .................................... 32 Induced- ln~tantaneous ................... .42, 44
Coercive force .................................................... 37 Inverse .................................................... 693
Coil, bifilar ........................................................ 572 Measurement ................................. .721, 723
Coil, core loss .................................................... 55 Negative screen ...................................... 641
Coil, Q -------------------------------------------------------54, 360 Peak amplifier ........................................ 125
Colinear antenna ............................................. .466 Rating, power supply .............................. 685
Collector electrode .............................................. 92 Saturation - Skin effect ................. .72, 54
788
Curtain antenna ............................................. .468 Double sideband, DSB .............................. 333, 353
Cutoff (alpha) .................................................... 93 Doubler, frequency . . ...................................... 258
Cutoff bias ......................................................... .73 Doubler, push-push .......................................... 260
Cutoff, extended .............................................. 287 Doublet, antenna - multi-wire ............... .427, 429
Cutoff frequency .................................................. 64 Drift transistor .................................................. 93
Cycle ................................................................. .41 Driver, amplifier ................................................ ! 26
Driver, cathode follower .......................... 659, 662
D Duct propagation ........................................... .4 15
d'Arsonval meter ............................................. .721 Dummy antenna - dummy loads ................... .726
D.C. amplifier .................................................. 11 7 Duplex transmission .......................................... 597
D.C. clamping circuit .......................................... 187 Dynamic resistance .............................................. 95
D.C. power supplies .......................................... 684 Dynamotor, PE-l 03 ............................... 526
D.C. restorer - circuit .............................. ! 88, 154 Dynatran oscillator ................ 242
Defector - autodyne - crystal ...................... 208
Deflection plate ................................................ 139 E
Degeneration, transistor ...................................... 96 Eddy current ...................................................... 38
Degree, electrical ............................................... .43 Efficiency, antenna ......................................... .409
Delay line .......................................................... 204 Electric filters .................................................... 63
Delta match - antenna -system .... 501, 430, 442 Electrical energy ................................................ 29
Demodulator ...................................................... 207 Electrical potential .............................................. 22
Detection, slope ................................................ 21 0 Electromagnetic deflection .................................. 86
Detection, synchronous, DSB .............................. 353 Electrolytic capacitor ................................ 34, 708
Detector - Diode ............................................ 224 Electrolytic conductor .................................... 2 2, 67
Envelope ................................................ 1 51 Electromagnetism .................................................. 35
Fremodyne .............................................. 21 0 Electromotive force (e.m.f.) ........................ 22, 37
Gride leak - Impedance - Plate ........ 224 Electron coupled oscillator ................................ 241
Product .......................................... 237, 352 Electron, def. o f - drift- orbit .................. 67, 21
Ratio ........................................................ 323 Electronic computers ......................................... 194
Super-regenerative .................................. 209 Electronic conduction ......................................... 67
Deviation, FM - Measurement ................ 314, 320 Electronic differentiation - integration ............ 198
Dielectric, ceramic- Constant (K) ........ 30, 31, 32 Electronic multiplication ................................... 198
Differential keying ........................................... .400 Electrostatics ..................................................... 30
Differentiation, electronic .................................. 198 Electrostatic deflection - energy ............... 83, 30
Differentiator ( RC) ............................................ 59 Element, def. of - metal!ic, non-metallic .... 21, 90
Digital circuits - computers .............................. 195 Element, reactive, non-reactive --------------21
Digital package ................................................ 204 Emmission equation ........................................... .70
Diode - A.v.c ................................................. 225 Emission, photoelectric ...................................... 67
Blocking ................................................. .40 1 Emission, secondary .................... .. . .71, 77
Crystal .................................................... 234 Emission, spurious ........................................... 383
Del. of ................................................... .71 Emission, thermionic ............................................ 67
Detector -- 2 24 Emitter electrode .................................................. 92
Gate ........................................................ 204 Enclosures ................................................ 724, 725
limiter .................................................... 1 85 End effect, antenna ........................................... .406
Mixer ...................................................... 212 End-fed antenna ....................................... .426, 437
Modulator .............................................. 332 End-fire antennas - arrays ................... .473, 412
Semi-conductor .......................................... 90 Energy- Electrical- Electrostatic .............. 29, 30
Storage time ............................................ ! 03 Potential .................................................... 30
Voltmeter ............................................... .724 Storage, capacitor .................................... 31
Dipoles ................................... .403, 435, 465, 498 Transistor .................................................. 93
Direct current circuits .......................................... 21 ENIAC ................................................................ 195
Directional coupler ........................................... .735 Envelope, carrier .............................................. 2 8 2
Directive antennas, H-F ................................... .459 Envelope detector .............................................. 1 51
Directivity, antenna ................................. .404, 41 0 Equalizer, audio ................................................ 139
Discharge of capacitor ........................................ 30 Equal-tempered scale ........................................ 135
Discane antenna ..................................... .441, 481 Equivalent circuit ................................................ 51
Discontinuities, transmission line ..................... .425 Equivalent circuit, transistor .................................. 95
Discriminator, F-M .............................................. 322 Equivalent noise resistance ................................ ! 23
Dissipation, anode ............................................. .72 Error cancellation, feedback .............................. 159
Distortion - Amplitude - Frequency .............. 1 09 Error signal .............................................. 159, 193
" Audio ...................................................... 135 Excitation, grid ................................................ 252
Carrier .................................................... 31 3 Exciters, SSB .............................................. 346, 349
Harmonic ................................................ 119 Extended-Zepp antenna ................................... 467
lntermodulation ...................................... 136
Modulation .............................................. 307 F
Nonlinear - Phase ...................... ! 09, 135 Foetor of merit ................................................... 54
Products, SSB .......................................... 344 Fading ............................................................. .4 18
Transient ................................................ 135 Farad, del. of ...................................................... 31
Transistor .................................................. 98 Feedback amplifier ............................................ ! 29
Divider, frequency ............................................ 190 Feedback, audio ................................................ 141
Divider, voltage .................................................. 26 Feedback circuits ................................................ 192
Doherty amplifier .............................................. 298 Feedback, control .............................................. 158
Dome audio phasing network ............................ 338 Feedback, error cancellation .............................. 159
Double conversion circuit .................................... 215 Feedback, Miller .............................................. 199
789
Feedback, R-F ............................................ 274, 615 Fuchs antenna ................................................. .426
Feedback, transistor .......................................... 1 01 Full-wave limiter ................................................ 230
Feed systems, antenna ............................. .428, 498 Full-wave rectifier .............................................. 689
Feed-through power .......................................... 627 function generator- non-linear- ramp 202, 203
Field, magnetic .................................................. 35
Filament, del. of ................................................67 G
Filament reactivation ............................................ 68 G, conductance, del. of ...................................... 52
filament regulator .............................................. 552 Gain, antenna - beam ........................... .461, 495
filter - Capacitor ................................. .707, 690 Gain, power - resistance - voltage ................ 94
Carrier, SSB ............................................ 334 Gamma match, antenna - system .......... 503, 444
Choke ..................................................... .709 Gas tube - generator .............................. 87, 140
Circuits, mobile ...................................... 518 Gate, diode - limiter ............................ 204, 1 85
Crystal .................................................... 220 Gauss, del. of ...................................................... 36
Crystal lattice - SSB .................... 579, 336 Generator noise ...................................... 528, 740
Generator, SSB ...................................... 333 Generator, sawtooth .......................................... 140
High pass ...................................... 64, 372 Generator, time base ........................................ 1 39
Inductor input .......................................... 687 Gilbert, del. of .................................................... 36
Insertion loss ............................................ 64 Grid bias .................................................. 1 08, 267
Low pass .......................................... 64, 376 Grid, del. of ..................................................... .72
M-derived ................................................ 64 Grid excitation .................................................. 252
Mechanical ...................................... 222, 336 Grid leak bias .................................. 109, 112, 268
Noise ...................................................... 227 Grid leak detector ............................................ 224
Passband, SSB ........................................ 336 Grid limiter, limiting ................................ 153, 187
Q-multiplier ............................................ 236 Grid modulation ...................................... 252, 288
Resistance-capacitance-Resonance 687, 688 Grid neutralization .......................................... 253
Ripple factor .......................................... 68 8 Grid-screen mu factor ....................................... .78
Sections - Series - shunt .................... 64 Ground bus .............................................. 142, 147
TVI, receiver - TVI-type ................ 372, 64 Ground currents ................................................ 362
Wave ...................................................... 63 Ground lass, antenna ..................................... .409
filter-type exciter, SSB ...................................... 349 Ground plane antenna - VHF ............. .431, 481
Fixed bias .......................................................... 108 Ground resistance ........................................... .41 0
Flat-top beam antenna ..................................... .473 Ground, R-F ...................................................... 362
Fletcher-Munson curve ........................................ 140 Ground termination ......................................... .433
Floating Paraphase inverter .............................. 116 Ground, transmitter .......................................... 394
Flux, del. of - density .............................. 35, 36 Ground wave ................................................... .4 14
Flywheel effect .......................................... 57, 259 Grounded-cathode amplifier .............................. 132
Folded dipole ........................................... .429, 498 Grounded-grid amplifier .... 132, 135,140,214, 258
Forcing function ................................................ 200 Grounded-grid, Class B amplifier .................... 139
Fosler-Seely discriminator +322 Grounded-grid r-f amplifier .............................. 626
franklin antenna ............................................. .466 Grounded neutral wiring .................................. 565
Franklin oscillator .............................................. 243 Grounded-screen r-f amplifier ............................ 629
Free electrons ...................................................... ~ 1 Guy wires, antenna ......................................... .449
Free-running multivibrator .................................. 189
Fremodyne detector ............................................ 21 0 H
Frequency ................................................... .41, 58 Hairpin coupling ................................................ 232
" Conversion, SSB ...................................... 340 Half-wavE' rectifier ............................................ 689
Cutoff ........................................................ 64 Handie-Talkie, 144 Me ..................................... 547
Distortion ................................................ 109 Harmonic - B.f.a ............................................. 225
Divider .................................................... 190 Crystal .................................................... 246
Interruption ............................................ 209 Del. of ...................................................... 58
Maximum useable ................................. .417 Distortion ................................................ 119
Measurements ....................................... .729 Music ...................................................... 135
Multiplier ................................................ 258 Oscillator ................................................ 247
Pulse repetition ...................................... 190 Radiation ................................ 262, 373, 725
Range, hi-fidelity .................................... 1 36 Harmoniker TVI filter ........................................ 379
Ratio, Lissajous ........................................ 144 Hartley oscillator .............................................. 240
Resonant .................................................. 53 Hash rectifier ............................................ 679, 694
Shift keying .......................................... 326 Heat cycle, resistor .......................................... 357
Sound .................................................... 134 Heat sink .................................................. 99, 147
Spectrum ................................................... .41 Heat sink, transistor ................................ 576, 707
Spotter ................................................... .730 Heater cathode .................................................. 70
Standard ............................................... ] 29 Heising modulation ............................................ 294
Sweep ...................................................... 140 Helical antenna ............................................... .4R3
Frequency Modulation ...................................... 31 2 Henry, del. of .................................................. 37
" Adapter .................................................. 325 Hertz antenna ................................................. .426
Devotion - ratio - index .................. 314 Heterodyne ........................................................ 208
Discriminator .......................................... 322 H-F antennas ................................................... .459
Limiter .................................................... 324 High fidelity .............................................. 134-138
Linearity .................................................. 31 8 Interference ............................................ 386
Narrow band .......................................... 315 High-pass TVI filter .......................................... 372
Pre-emphasis ............................................ 325 Holes in semi-conductor ...................................... 91
Reception ................................................ 3 21 Horizontal directivity ....................................... .4 1 0
Front-back ratio, beom ..................................... .496 Horn antenna, VHF ......................................... .4&6
790
Hot cathode oscillator .............................. 580, 676 lnterstuge coupling ............................ 270, 619, 665
Hot cathode phase inverter .............................. 116 Intrinsic semi-conductor ........................................ 91
Hum, audio ...................................................... 142 Inverse current- Voltage .................................. 693
Hysteresis loop - loss .................................. 36, 38 Inverter, phase - voltage divider .... 115, 116, 117
ion, del, o f - positive .................................. 22, 87
Ionosphere, absorption ...................................... 13
1-f alignment '-148, 235 Ionospheric layers - propagation ......... .417, 416
" Amplifier ................................................ 21 0 IR drop .............................................................. 24
Band-width graph .................................. 534 Iron vane meter ............................................... .723
Filter, lattice ............................................ 579 Isotropic radiator ............................................ .41 0
Noise limiter .......................................... 227
Pass-band ................................................ 219 J
Rejection notch ....................................... 222 Jitter ........................................................ 154, 188
Shape factor .......................................... 219 Johnson Q-feed system ................................... .446
Tuned circuit .......................................... 2 i 8 ''J'' operator ..................................................... .47
Ignition noise ..... .' .............................................. 528 Joule, del. of ................................................ 30, 37
Images-image intereference-ratio 211, 213, 385 Junction, transistor .............................................. 93
Impedance ................................................... .46, 47
'' Antenna ................................................. .408 K
Complex .................................................... 51 K, dielectric constant .......................................... 32
Coupling .......................................... 56, 113 Key clicks .......................................................... 396
match, audio .......................................... 127 Keying - blocked grid .................................. 398
reflected ............................................ 56, 63 Cathode circuit ...................................... 397
Resonant .................................................... 54 Differential ............................................. .400
Screen circuit .......................................... 289 Frequency shift ...................................... 326
Surge ..................................................... .424 screen grid .............................................. 399
Tank circuit .............................................. 262 Sequence ................................................ 677
Transformation .......................................... 63 Transmitter .............................................. 395
transistor .................................................. 97 Kilocycle ........................................................... .42
Transmission line ................................... .421 Kinescope tube .................................................. 84
Triangle ................................................... .48 Kirchhoff's Laws .................................................. 28
Incident voltage ................................................ 732 Klystron - reflex .......................................... 81, 82
Indicator, Antennascope ................................... .738
Indicator, selsyn ................................................ 514 L
Indicator - standing wave - twin-lamp 731, 735 Lamb noise limiter ............................................ 227
Induced current ................................................... .42 Layout, chassis ................................................. .726
Inductance .......................................................... 37 Lazy-H antenna ................................................ 468
Capacitor ................................................ 359 L/C ratio ............................................................ !;6
Cathode lead .......................................... ! 22 Lead inductance .................................................. 81
Critical .................................................... 686 Leakage, capacitor ............................................ 34
Lead - Magnetic - Mutual ............ 81, 37 Leakage reactance ............................................ 63
Parallel - series ...................................... 38 Left-hand rule .................................................... 35
Resistor .................................................... 357 Length, antenna ............................................... .405
Screen lead ............................................ 257 L-section filter .................................................... 64
Induction, del. of ............................................... .42 Licenses, amateur .............................................. 12
Inductive reactance ............................................ .46 Limiter, audio .................................................. 228
Inductive coupling ............................................ 271 Limiter, diode .................................................... 151
Inductive tuning ................................................ 617 Limiter, F-M ...................................................... 324
Inductor input filter .......................................... 687 Limiter, full-wave .............................................. 230
Inductor, iron core .............................................. J8 Limiter, grid ...................................................... 153
Inductor, time constant ..................................... .40 Limiter, noise .................................................... 227
Infinite impedance detector .............................. 224 Limiter, series diode .......................................... 185
Initial condition voltage ................................. 203 Limiter, TNS ...................................................... 230
Injection voltage .............................................. 213 Limiting circuit .................................... 151, 152, 185
Input loading .................................................. 122 Limiting, grid .................................................... ! 87
Input resistance ................................ ! 07, 216, 276 Line, delay ...................................................... 204
Insertion loss, filter .......................................... 64 Line filter ........................................................ 227
Instability, R-F amplifier .................................. 615 Line regulation .................................................. 388
Instability, static .............................................. 117 Line, Slotted ...................................................... 730
Insulation, VHF ................................................. .479 Linear amplifier ................................................ 286
Insulator, del. of .......................................... 22, 23 " 4CX- 1 OOOA ............................................ 64 1
Integration, electronic ...................................... 198 Class B .................................................... 129
Integrator ( RC) .................................................. 59 SSB .................................................. 620, 624
lnterelectrode capacitance ................................. .76 Tuning .................................................... 287
Interference - Broadcast ................................ 379 Linear matching transformer ............................. .446
Harmonic ................................................ 373 Linearity tracer ................................................ 151
Hi-li - image- TV .............. 386, 385, 371 Link circuit ........................................................ 611
Interlock, power .............................................. 395 Link coupling- antenna .......................... 272, 452
lntermodulation distortion .................................. 136 Lissajous figures .............................................. 144
lntermodulation test .......................................... 145 Litz, wire ............................................................ 54
Internal resistance .......................................... 25 L-network design .............................................. 265
International Morse Code .................................... 15 Load line ........................................................... .74
Interruption frequency ...................................... 209 Load line, transistor .......................................... 99
791
Load resistance amplifier .................................. 119 Mobile - Amplifier, SSB ----------------------------------620
Loaded-Q ............................................................ 57 Antenna coupling ----------------------------520, 524
Laflin-White amplifier ...................................... 118 Control circuit ------------------------------------------525
Long-wire antenna -------------------------------------------.461 Dynamotor ----------------------------------------------526
Loop feedback --------------------------------------------------158 Equipment construction -design .... 524, 515
Loran, band ---------------------------------------------1 2 Filament regulator ---------------------------------552
Loudness control, audio --------------------------------------140 Filter circuits ------------------------------------------518
Loudspeaker - del. of - response ........ 139, 140 Noise limiter ------------------------------------------516
Low-frequency porosities ----------------------------------366 Noise sources ------------------------------------------529
Low-pass TVI filter -----------------------------------------376 Power supply --------------------------521, 697, 519
Supply, three-phase --------------------------------620
M Mode of resonance -------------------------------------------232
Magic eye tube --------------------------------------------88, 226 Modulation ----------------------------------------239
Magnetic - Air gap ------------------------------------------38 Amplitude --------------------------------------282, 647
Circuit - field - flux --------------------------35 Automatic control ------------------------------------648
eddy current --------------------------------38 Bandwidth ----------------------------------------------283
hysteresis loss -----------------------------38 Cathode -----------------------------------------------297
induction --------------------------------------------------37 Class B ----------------------------------------------------294
left hand rule ------------------------------------------35 Constant efficiency --------------------------------286
Permeability - reluctance - saturation .. 36 Distortion --------------------------------------307
Magnetism - residual ----------------------------------35, 37 Frequency ------------------------------------------------31 2
Magnetomotive force ( M. M. F.) ----------------------36 Grid ------------------------------------------------252, 288
Magnetron ----------------------------------------------------------83 Heising ---------------------------------------294
Magnitude, scalar ---------------------------------------------.48 Index, F-M ----------------------------------------------314
Majority carrier --------------------------------------------------93 Pattern, oscilloscope --------------------------------146
Marconi antenna ---------------------.408, 432, 434, 438 Percentage -------------------------------284
Most, A-frame -------------------------------------------------.448 Phase ----------------------------------------------315, 319
Matching stub, antenna ---------------------------.445, 503 Plate --------------------------------------251, 293, 295
Matching systems antenna -------------------------------.442 Screen ------------------------------------------------------2 8 8
Matching transformer -------------------------------------.429 Suppressor ----------------------------------------------292
Mathematics, radio ------------------------------------------742 Transformer --------------------------------------295
Maximum usable frequency ------------------------13, 417 Variable efficiency ----------------------------------285
Maxwell, del. of ----------------------------------------------36 Velocity ----------------------------------------------------81
M-derived filter --------------------------------------------------64 Modulator - Adjustment --------------------------------654
Measurements - Antenna -----------------------------.730 " Balanced - S.S.B. ----------------331, 338, 343
Bridge ----------------------------------------------728 Bias-shift --------------------------------------------307
Circuit constants -----------------------------------.727 Cathode follower ------------------------------------290
Current - voltage -----------------------.721, 723 Class B ----------------------------------------------------1 25
Frequency ----------------------------------------------729 Construction --------------------------650
Parallel wire line -----------------------------------.735 Crosby ------------------590
Power ---------------------------------------------.721, 725 Diode --------------------------------------332
Transmission line ---------------------------.730, 734 Matching - impedance match ...... 125, 127
Mechanical filter ----------------------------------------------222 Reactance tube ----------------------------------------315
Mechanical filter adapter - S.S.B . .......... 535, 590 SSB ---------------------------------------340
Megacycle -----------------------------------------------------------.42 Tetrode -----------------------------------------647
Megohm --------------------------------------------------------------24 Zero bias ------------------------------------------------662
Memory circuit -----------------------------------------------204 Molecule --------------------------------------------------------------21
Mercury vapor rectifier ------------------------------------694 Monitor oscilloscope .......................................... 147
Meteor bursts ---------------------------------------------------.420 Morse Code -------------------------------------------------------15
Meter, d'Arsonval ----------------------------------------------721 Mu factor (JL) ---------------------------------------------------.78
Meter, iron vane ---------------------------------------------.723 Multee antenna -----------------------------------------------.440
Meter, multi-range ------------------------------------------722 Multi-band antenna ----------------------- .......... .436, 514
Meter, rectifier -------------------------------------------------.724 Multiplication, electronic ----------------------------------198
Meter, thermocouple -------------------------------.724, 726 Multiplier, frequency ----------------------------------------258
Mho, del. of -----------------------------------------------------.74 Multiplier resistor ---------------------------------------------.72 2
Mica dielectric ----------------------------------------------------32 Multi-range meters --------------------------------------------722
Microfarad -----------------------------------------30 Multivibrator- circuits .................... 102, 154, 188
Microhenry -------------------------------------------37 Multivibrotor, free running ................................ 155
Micro-ohm ---------------------------------------------23 Multi-wire doublet ................................. .429, 442
Middle C ------------------------------------------------------------134 Music, del. of ----------------------------------------------------134
Miller effect --------------------------------------107, 112, 220 Music systems - scale ----------------------- ....... 138, 135
Miller feedback - oscillator ................ 199, 247 Mutual conductance -------------------------------------------.73
Milliammeter ----------------------------------.721 Mutual coupling ------------------------------------------------21 8
Millihenry, del. of ----------------------------------------------37 Mutual coupling, antennas -------------------------------.475
Mixer - circuits ----------------------------------------------212 Mutual inductance .............................................. 37
Diode -------------------------------------------------80 Mycalex, dielectric ----------------------------------------------32
Noise ------------------------------------------------------212
Products, SSB - spurious .............. 341, 343 N
SSB -----------------------------------------------340 Narrow-band F-M ----------------------------------------------315
Stage ------------------------------------------------------211 NBS bridge-T oscillator --------------------------------------1 92
Transistor ------------------------------------------------100 Negative feedback loop ------------------------------------140
Triode ----------------------------------------------------213 Negative peak clipping ------------------------------------648
Tube -------------------------------------------------------79 Negative screen current ----------------------------------641
792
Networks, L ond Pi --------------------------------------------265 Oscillator - Relaxation ------------------------------------102
Network, phasing ----------------------------------------------570 t.p.t.g. ----------------------------------------------------241
Neutralization - Amplifier ------------------------------252 Transistor ------------------------------------------------101
" Capacitance --------------------------------------------107 Trans istron ..................... -------- ............. ---- 24 3
Capacitor, VHF ----------------------------------------672 V.F.O. ------------------------------------------------------244
Grid --------------------------------------------------------253 Wien-bridge ----------------------------------157, 191
Praced u re ................................................ 279 Oscilloscope ------------------------------------------------------138
R- F .. ------ ............. ---------------------- ..... ----- ..... 2 7 6 Circuit ------------------------------------------------------14 2
R-F amplifier ----------------------------------616, 639 Linearity tracer ----------------------------------------151
Shun I ...................................................... 254 Lissajous figures --------------------------------------144
Tes I .............................. ---------- ................ 2 78 Modulation pattern-phase patterns 146, 145
Transistor ------------------------------------------------100 Monitor ------------------------------------------147, 149
Neu Ira Iizi ng procedure . __ ----------- ...................... 255 Sideband measurements --------------------------150
Nl (ampere turns) ----------------------------------------------62 Trapezoidal pattern-wave pattern 146, 148
Noise - Factor ------------------------------------------------1 22 Output, peak power ------------------------------------------124
Check, mobile ----------------------------------------52 8 Overloading, TV receiver ----------------------------------371
Generator, silicon crystal -------------------------.7 40 Overtone crysta Is ------ .......................... ___ ........... 249
limiters - mobile ------------------------227, 516 Overtone, music ------------------------------------------------135
Mixer ------------------------------------------------------21 2 Oxide filament --------------------------------------------67, 69
Regulator - sources ------------------------------528
Suppression ----------------------------------2 27, 5 27
p
Thermal agitation ------------------------------------188 Paper dielectric --------------------------------------------------32
Voltage --------------------------------------------------1 21 Parallel circuit - resistance --------------------------------25
Wow and flutter ------------------------------------135 Diode limiter ------------------------------------------1 86
Nomenclature, component --------------------------------530 Feed --------------------------------------------------------273
Nonconductor ...................................................... 2 2 Resona nee ............ ----------- ............. _____ ....... 54
Nondirectional VHF antenna ------------------------------"82 Wire line measurements -------------------------.735
Non-linear distortion ------------------------------------------135 Parasitic antenna, design chart ------------------------"98
Non-linear function ------------------------------------------202 " Antenna, VHF -----------------------------------------.488
Non-resonant transmission line --------------------------"21 Beam design -----------------------------------------.494
Nonsin usoidal wave --------------------------------------------58 Check for .. ----------- ................ __ .... ______ ....... 3 6 8
N- P-N Ira nsistor .. ----------- ............... ----------- ........... 9 2 Coupling ........................... ------- ................ 3 64
Element, antenna ------------------------------------"97
0 Oscillation ------------------------------279, 365, 616
Octave, del. of --------------------------------------------------135 Resonance ----------------------------------------------364
Oersted, del. of --------------------------------------------------36 Pass band, 1-F --------------------------------------------------219
Ohm - Ohm's law ------------------------------------23, 24 Pass band, mechanical filter ------------------------------223
Ohmmeter, low range ---------------------------------------.723 Pass band, SSB filters ----------------------------------------336
Ohm's Law ( a.c.) ----------------------------------------------"5 Patterns, antenna ------------------------------------"04, 460
Ohm's law (complex quantities) ------------------------"9 PE-l 03 dynamotor --------------------------------------------5 26
Ohm's Law for magnetic circuit ----------------------------36 Peak amplifier current ----------------------------------------1 25
Ohm's Law (resonant circuit) ---------------------------54 Peak current ( a.c.) ----------------------------------------------"5
0 h ms- per-volt ............ ---------------------------------- ..... .72 2 Peak envelope power, SSB --------------------------------327
Omega, del. of ----------------------------------------------------"4 Peak limiter ------------------------------------------------------1 85
One-shot multivibrator --------------------------------------1 89 Peak noise limiter ----------------------------------------------227
On-off circuits --------------------------------------------------195 Peak power output --------------------------------------------1 24
Open wire line --------------------------------------------------"21 Peaked wave -----------------------------------------------------59
Operating desk, construction of -----------------------.724 Pentode amplifier ----------------------------------------------1 20
Operational amplifier ----------------------------------------199 Pentode tube -----------------------------------------------------.77
Orbital electron --------------------------------------------------21 Period, sound ----------------------------------------------------1 34
Oscillation, parasitic ----------------------279, 365, 616 Permeability --------------------------------------------------------36
Oscillator - Beat --------------------------------------------224 Phantom signal --------------------------------------------------3 8 2
Blocking ----------------------102, 155, 156, 189 Phase - angle ( a.c.) ----------------------------------------"6
Bridge-T --------------------------------------------------192 " Angle - difference ----------------------146, 145
Circuits ........ --------------- ............................. 250 Distortion ----------------------------------------1 09, 135
Clapp - Colpitts ------------------------------------241 Inverter ----------------------------------------------------115
Code practice --------------------------------------------19 Modulation ------------------------------------315, 319
Crystal ----------------------------------------------------244 Shift, clipping ------------------------------------------301
Dynatron ------------------------------------------------242 Shift, feedback ----------------------------------------193
e. c. o. ----------------------------------------------------241 Shift, oscillator ------------------------------157, 191
Franklin __ ---------- ........... ----------------- .......... 2 43 Phasing, antenna ----------------------------------------------"66
Free running ------------------------------------------141 Phasing generator, SSB --------------------------------------337
Harmonic ------------------------------------------------247 Phasing networks, audio ------------------------------------338
Hartley .......... ---------- ........................ ___ ..... 240 Phasing network, SSB ----------------------------------------570
High stability ------------------------------------------604 Phonograph reproduction ----------------------------------136
Hot cathode ----------------------------------580, 676 Photoelectric emission ------------------------------------------67
Keying ----------------------------------------------------249 Pickups --------------------------------------------------------------1 37
Miller ------------------------------------------------------247 Pickup, spurious ------------------------------------------------384
NBS bridge-T ------------------------------------------192 Pierce oscillator ------------------------------------------------247
Overtone ------------------------------------------------249 Pi-network amplifier ------------------------------------------617
Phase shift ------------------------------------157, 191 Pi-network chart - design --------------------267, 265
Pierce ------------------------------------------------------247 Pi-network coupling -----------------------------------------"53
RC ------------------------------------------------------------157 Pilot carrier, SSB ------------------------------------------------327
793
Pitch, sound ...................................................... 134 Radiation, del. of ............................................. .403
Plate current flow ............................................ 259 Radiation, harmonic ................................ 373, 725
Plate detector .................................................... 224 Radiation pattern, distortion ............................. .478
Plate efficiency amplifier .................................. 129 Radiation resistance ............................... .404, 495
Plate modulation ...................................... 251, 293 Radiator, isotropic ............................................. .41 0
Plote resistonce ........................................... .73, 74 Radiator crass-section, VHF ................................ 479
P-N-P transistor .................................................. 91 Radio frequency, del. of ................................... .42
Point contact transistor ........................................ 92 Radio mathematics ........................................... .742
Polar notation ................................................... .48 Radio propagation ........................................... .413
Polarization, antenna -VHF ................... .404, 479 Radio teletype .................................................. 326
Polyphase rectifier ............................................ 693 Ramp function .................................................... 203
Potential difference .............................................. 2 2 Ratio detector .................................................... 323
Potential, electrode ............................................ 106 Ratio, image ...................................................... 21 3
Potential energy .................................................. 30 RC amplifier ...................................................... 109
Power amplifier design ...................................... 61 0 RC audio network .............................................. 1 39
Power amplifier triode ...................................... 11 8 RC differentiatar - integrator ............................ 59
Power, gain ........................................................ 94 RC oscillator - circuits .......................... 157, 191
Power gain antenna ......................................... .405 RC time constant ................................................ 60
Power gain SSB .................................................. 328 RC transient ........................................................ 38
Power measurement ................................. .721, 725 Reactance, antenna ........................................... .408
Power interlock ................................................ 395 Reactance, capacitive - inductive - net ....... .46
Power-line filter ................................................ 227 Reactance, leakage .............................................. 63
Power loss, VHF ................................................ 663 Reactance, resonance ......................................... .47
Power, resistive .................................................. 29 Reactance tube modulator .................................. 315
Power supplies .................................................. 684 Read-out ............................................................ 20 1
'' A.C.-D.C. .................................................. 694 Receiver, alignment .................................. 148, 235
Mobile .................................................... 697 Receiver, amateur band ...................................... 540
Oscilloscope ............................................ 141 Receiver, superheterodyne .................................. 21 0
Regulated ................................................ 711 Receiver, transistor .................................... 103, 533
Screen ...................................................... 269 Receivers, UHF .................................................. 231
Selenium .................................................. 561 Reception, frequency modulation ........................ 321
Three-phase .................................. 521, 620 Reception, mobile ............................................ 515
Transistorized ......................................... .703 Reception, SSB .................................................. 351
V.F.O ....................................................... 604 Recording, constant amplitude, velocity .... 136, 137
Voltage multiplier .................................. 695 Recording, crossover point ................................ 1 36
Power system, primary ...................................... 387 Recording, high fidelity ...................................... 1 36
Power transformer ............................................. .709 Recording, pre-emphasis - RIAA curve ............ 137
Power transistor .................................................. 99 Rectification, stray .............................................. 383
Powerstat auto-transformer ................................ 390 Rectified A.C. ..................................................... .45
Preamplifier, hi-li .............................................. 138 Rectifier - bridge - full wave - half wave .... 689
Pre-emphasis, recording .................................... 137 " Hash .............................................. 679, 694
Preselector ........................................................ 214 Mercury vapor - pa:yphase ........ 693, 694
Primary transformer ............................................ 61 Selenium .................................................. 695
Printed circuit amplifier ...................................... 575 Si Iicon ............................................ 59 2, 696
Probe, R.F. (v.t.v.m.) ........................................ 133 Type meter ............................................. .724
Product detector ........................................ 352, 237 Vacuum .................................................... 693
Propagation ............................................. .413-420 v.t.v.m ..................................................... 133
Pulsating alternating current ............................. .45 Reflected impedance .................................... 57, 63
Pulse-repetition frequency ...................... 103, 190 Reflected voltage ............................................... .732
Push-pull amplifier .................................. 61 2, 1 21 Reflectometer, coaxial ....................................... .732
Push-pull tetrode amplifier ................................ 644 Regeneration ...................................................... 208
Push-pull transformer ........................................ 113 Regulated power supply ................................... .711
Push-pull tripler - doubler .............................. 260 Regulation, power line ...................................... 388
Push-to-talk circuit ..............................................526 Regulation, voltage ............................................ 686
Regulator, filament ............................................ 552
Q Regulator noise .................................................. 528
Q amplifier tank ................................................ 128 Regulator tube (VR) ...................................... ..709
Q antenna ....................................................... .409 Regulator, voltage .............................................. 687
Q coils .............................................................. 360 Rejection notch, 1-F ............................................ 222
Q del. of ............................................................ 54 Rei, del. of .......................................................... 36
Q loaded - unloaded ...................................... 57 Relaxation oscillator .................................. 102, 1 8 8
Q multiplier ...................................................... 236 Reluctance, del. of ............................................ 36
Q tank circuit .................................................... 261 Remote cut-off tube ........................................... .78
Q transformer ................................................... .429 Residual magnetism ............................................ 37
Q tuned circuit .................................................. 216 Resistance: .......................................................... 23
Quad antenna ................................................. .471 capacitance filter ...................................... 687
Quadrant, sine ................................................... .43 Dynamic .................................................... 95
Quantity, complex ............................................... .49 gain .......................................................... 94
Quench oscillator ............................................. 209 Ground ................................................. .41 0
Input .............................................. 107, 216
R Internal - parallel - series .................. 25
Radian, del. of ................................................... .43 load ........................................................ 119
Radiation, angle of ......................... .411, 460, 478 plate ................................................. .73, 74
794
Resistance - Radiation -----------------------------------.404 Screen modulation --------------------------------------------288
Resistive power ----------------------------------------------------29 Screen supply ----------------------------------------------------269
Resistivity, table of ----------------------------------------------23 Secondary emission _____________________________________ ]], 77
Resistor, bleeder --------------------------------------27, 709 Secondary transformer ----------------------------------------61
Resistor, characteristics of ----------------------------------356 Selective fading, SSB ----------------------------------------331
Resistor color code --------------------------------------------531 Selectivity, arithmetical --------------------------------------211
Res is tor, eq ua Iizi ng _------------------------------------- ______ 34 Selectivity chart --------------------------------------------------342
Resistor, inductance of ----------------------------------------357 Selectivity control, 1-F ----------------------------------------221
Res is to mu Jti pI ier _______ ----- _-------------------- _____ -----.72 2 Selectivity, mobile reception ------------------------------517
Resistor, typical ----------------------------------------------------24 Selectivity, resonant circuit ----------------------------------54
Resonance: __ --------------------------------------------------- ___ .A 7 Selectivity, tuned circuits ----------------------------------341
Antenna -----------------------------------------------.404 Selenium power supply ----------------------------561, 669
Current -----------------------------------------------------56 Selenium rectifier ----------------------------------------------695
Curve - parallel - Series ________________ 53, 54 Self-inductance ----------------------------------------------------37
Fi Ifer ----------------------- ___ ------------------------------68 8 Self-neutralization amplifier ------------------------------616
Impedance- Q ---------------------------------------54 Self-neutralization, VHF ------------------------------------664
Mode ------------------------------------------------------232 Selsyn indicator --------------------------------------------------514
Oscilloscope pattern --------------------------------149 Semi-conductor ----------------------------------------------90, 21
Parasitic --------------------------------------------------364 Semi-conductor rectifier ------------------------------------695
Speaker --------------------------------------------------140 Sequence keying ------------------------------------------------677
Resonant cavity --------------------------------------------------232 Series-cathode modulator ----------------------------------297
Resonant circuit -------------------------------------------53, 54 Series circuit ------------------------------------------------------24
Resonant transmission line -------------------------------.424 Series-derived filter --------------------------------------------64
Response, audio --------------------------------------11 2, 136 Series-diode limiter ----------------------------------151, 1 85
Return trace ------------------------------------------------------140 Series feed --------------------------------------------------------273
R-F a Iig n men t _____ ------ _---------------------------------------- 2 3 6 Series-feed amplifier ------------------------------------------61 2
R-F amplifier: --------------------------------------------213, 251 Series-parallel circuit ----------------------------------------25
" 4CX- 1 OOOA ----------------------------------------------640 Series resistance - resonance ____________________ 25, 53
Cathode driven ----------------------------------------626 Shape factor, 1-F ----------------------------------------------219
Construction --------------------------------------------616 Shielding, R-F ----------------------------------------------------362
General purpose --------------------------------------635 Shot effect ------------------------------------------------------1 23
Grounded grid - grounded screen 626, 629 Shunt derived filter --------------------------------------------64
Inductive tuning --------------------------------------61 7 Shunt loading, a.v.c. ------------------------------------------226
Instability- neutralization ____ 615, 616, 639 Shunt neutralization ------------------------------------------254
Oscillation ----------------------------------------------61 6 Sidebands, deL of --------------------------------------------28 2
Pi-network ----------------------------------------------617 Signal, error --------------------------------------------159, 193
Push -pull ------------------------------------------------61 2 Signal, phantom ----------------------------------------------382
Self-neutralization ------------------------------------616 Signal-to-distortion ratio - SSB __________ 151, 344
Tetrode ----------------------------------------------------614 Signal-to-noise ratio ----------------------------------------122
R-F chokes ------------------------------------------------272, 361 Silicon crystal noise generator _________________________ ] 40
R-F feedback ------------------------------------------------------274 Silicon rectifier ----------------------------------------592, 696
R-F ground --------------------------------------------------------362 Sine wave -------------------------------------------------.42, 43
R-F interstage coupling --------------------------------------619 Single-ended amplifier --------------------------------------611
R-F shielding ------------------------------------------------------362 Single sideband (SSB): __________________ 285, 329, 327
Rhombic antenna -------------------------------------.464, 486 " Amplifier, 4CX-1 OOOA ----------------------------640
Rh um batron cavity --------------------------------------------23 2 Envelopes _____________ -------- _---------- ________________ 3 3 0
RIAA equalizer curve ----------------------------------------1 37 Envelope detector ------------------------------------151
Ribbon TV line -------------------------------------------------.478 Equipment --------- ___ ---------- ______________________ ____ 5 67
Ring diode modulator ----------------------------------------333 Filter --------------------------------------------------------3 27
Ripple factor, filter --------------------------------------------688 Filter system --------------------------------------------590
Ripple voltage --------------------------------------------------686 Grounded grid amplifier ------------------------626
RL circuit -------------------------------------------------------------.40 Grounded screen amplifier ----------------------629
RL transient --------------------------------------------------------38 Jr. exciter ------------------------------------------------346
RLC circuits ---------------------------------------------------------.48 Linear amplifier --------------------------------------620
Root mean square (a.c.) -----------------------------------.45 Linear amplifier, kilowatt ------------------------635
Rotary beam antenna ---------------------------------------.494 Linear operation --------------------------------------138
Rotator, antenna ----------------------------------------------51 2 Measurements ------------------------------------------150
Ruggedized tube --------------------------------------------------88 Reception ------------------------------------------------351
s Transmission --------------------------------------------3 27
Transmitter adjustment --------------------------573
Safety bleeder ----------------------------------------------------395 Single signal reception --------------------------------------222
Safety precautions --------------------------------------------393 Single swing oscillator --------------------------------------1 89
Saturation current ------------------------------------------------72 Single-wire antenna tuner -------------------------------.456
Saturation, magnetic ------------------------------------------36 Single-wire feed, antenna ---------------------------------.441
Sawtooth wave ------------------------------------------59, 140 Single-wire feeder -------------------------------------------.430
Scalar notation ---------------------------------------------------.48 Six-shooter antenna -----------------------------------------.472
Scale, musical ----------------------------------------------------135 Skeleton VHF antenna ---------------------------------------.481
Scatter signals -------------------------------------------------.419 Skin effect ---------------------------------------------------------54
Screen, CRT --------------------------------------------------------87 Skip distance ---------------------------------------------------.41 8
Screen current, negative ----------------------------------641 Sky wave ---------------------------------------------------------.414
Screen grid keying --------------------------------------------399 Sleeve antenna -------------------------------------------------.480
Screen grid tube -------------------------------------------------.77 Slide-wire bridge ---------------------------------------------.728
Screen lead inductance --------------------------------------257 Slope detection --------------------------------------------------210
795
Slotted line ........................................................ 730 Tetrode neutralization ...................................... 256
S-meter circuits .................................................. 226 Tetrode r-f amplifier ........................................ 614
Soldering techniques ....................................... .727 Tetrode, screen safety circuit ............................ 679
Sound in air ...................................................... 134 Tetrode, self neutralization ................................ 664
Space charge ............................................. .71, 78 Tetrode tube ....................................................... .77
Space wave ....................................................... .41-4 Thermal agitation noise .................................... 188
Speaker response ............................................ 140 Thermionic emission .......................................... 67
Specker tweeter ................................................ I 39 Thermocouple meter ................................. .724, 726
Specific resistance .............................................. 23 Three-phase power supply ...................... 521, 620
Speech amplifier construction ............................ 655 Threshold voltage .............................................. 696
Speech clipper filter .......................................... 304 Thyratron tube .................................................... 87
Speech clipping ...................... 124, 291, 300, 648 Time-base generator .......................................... 139
Speech filter, high level .................................... 305 Time constant .............................................. 38, 60
Speech waveforms .................... 285, 294, 301, 648 Time sequence keying ....................................... .400
Splatter suppressor .................................. 302, 647 T-match antenna ................................................ 501
Sporadic- E propagation ................................... .41 8 T-match system ................................................. .444
Spotter, frequency ............................................. .730 TNS limiter ........................................................ 230
Spurious emission - spurious pickup ........ 383, 384 Tools, radio ..................................................... .721
Spurious products, mixer .................................. 343 T.P.T.G. oscillator .............................................. 241
Square wave - square wave test ........ 58, 61, 62 Trace - cathode ray ................................ 86, 140
Stacked antenna - stacked dipole ....... .498, 468 Tracking capacitor ............................................ 216
Standard frequency .......................................... 729 Transceiver, 28 me ........................................... 559
Standard pitch .................................................. 135 Transceiver, 50 me ........................................... 552
Standing wave ....................................... .403, 423 Transceiver, VHF .............................................. 578
Standing-wave indicator ................................. .731 Transconductance ......................................... .74, 79
Static, corona .................................................... 529 Transducer - pickup .............................. 138, 137
Static, wheel ...................................................... 528 Transformation, impedance .................... , ............. 63
Steering diode .................................................... 103 Transformation ratio .......................................... 62
Step-by-step counter ................................ 156, 190 Transformer - ampere-turns ........................ 61, 62
Sterba antenna ................................................. .469 " Antenna match ........................................ 502
Storage time, diode ............................................ 103 Auto .......................................................... 63
Stray capacitance .............................................. 21 8 Coupling .................................................. 113
Stub match, antenna ........................................ 503 1-F -----------------------------------------------------211
Summation voltage ............................................ 197 Linear matching ..................................... .446
Summing amplifier ............................................ 201 Matching- impedance match ......... .429, 63
Sunspot cycle ................................................... .419 Modulator .............................................. 295
Superheterodyne receiver .................................. 21 0 Power ...................................................... 709
Super-imposition tuning .................................... 553 Vibrator .................................................. 588
Super-regenerative detector .............................. 209 Transformerless power supply ............................ 694
Supply, a.c.-d.c ................................................. 588 Transient circuit (a.c.) ........................................ 59
Suppression, audio ............................................ 306 Transient distortion ------------------------------------------1 35
Suppression circuits, porosities ............................ 366 Transient, RC, RL - transient wave ............ 38, 58
Suppressor .......................................................... 77 Transistor ...................................................... 90, 92
Suppressor modulation ...................................... 292 '' Bias .......................................................... 96
Suppressor, splatter .......................................... 302 Code oscillator .......................................... 19
Surface wave ................................................... .414 Complementary circuit ................................ 97
Surge impedance ............................................... .424 Drift .......................................................... 93
Susceptance, del. of ............................................52 Equivalent circuit ........................................ 95
Sweep frequency ------------------------------------------------140 Heat sink ........................................ 576, 707
Switching, transistor action ............................. .704 Impedance ................................................ 97
SWR bridge ............................................. .458, 736 Junction .................................................... 91
Symmetry, amplifier .......................................... 612 Mixer ...................................................... 100
Synchronization, generator ................................ 173 Multivibrator ............................................ I 02
Synchronizing voltage ........................................ 172 Oscillator ------------------------------------------------1 0 I
Synchronous detection, DSB .............................. 353 Point-contact ............................................ 95
Power ........................................................ 99
T Receiver .................................................. 533
Tank capacitance ............................................. 261 SSB equipment ........................................ 574
Tank circuit- efficiency ........................ 55, 57, 58 Switching action ..................................... .704
Tank circuit impedance - loading ........ 262, 264 Transistorized mobile supply ............................. .703
Tank circuit Q .................................................... 128 Transit time ........................................................ 81
Technician class amateur license .......................... 12 Transitron oscillator ............................................ 243
Teletype, radio .................................................. 326 Transmission, duplex .......................................... 597
Television interference ...................................... 371 Transmission line chart ..................................... .422
Temperature coefficient ...................................... 32 Circuits .................................................... 231
Ten-A, SSB exciter ............................................ 347 Coaxial ................................................. .423
Ten-meter transceiver ........................................ 559 Discontinuities ......................................... .425
Termon-Woodyard amplifier .............................. 298 Impedance ............................................. .421
Termination, transmission line ........................... .425 Measurements ............................... .730, 734
Termination, VHF rhombic ................................. .487 Resonant - non-resonant ............. .424, 421
Test equipment ................................................. .721 Termination ........................................... .425
Tetrode amplifier, push-pull .............................. 644 VHF ......................................................... .478
Tetrode modulator ............................................ 647 Transmitter - Construction ............................. 663
796
Transmitter - Control circuits .......................... 391 Vacuum - Shot effect ...................................... 123
Design .................................................... 356 Space charge ............................................ 89
Ground .................................................... 394 Tetrode .................................................... 77
Keying .................................................... 395 Thyratron .................................................. 87
Oscilloscope, monitor of .......................... 147 Travelling wave ........................................ 84
Receiver, VHF .......................................... 597 Triode ...................................................... 72
Trapezoidal pattern, oscilloscope ........................ 146 Upper frequency ...................................... 232
Trap-type antenna ............................................514 Variable mu (~) .................................... 1 24
Travelling wave tube .......................................... 84 VHF .......................................................... 80
Travis discriminator ............................................ 322 Voltage regulator .................................... 87
Triode amplifier ................................................ 11 0 Voltmeter ........................................ 130, 724
Triode mixer ...................................................... 213 V-Antenna ....................................................... .462
Triode power amplifier ...................................... 118 Variable-mu (~) tube ...................................... 1 24
Triode tube ....................................................... .72 Variable reluctance pickup .............................. 137
Tripier, push-pull ................................................ 260 Variac autotransformer ...................................... 390
Triplex antenna ............................................... .475 Vector, sine-wave ............................................... .43
Tropospheric propagation ................................. .4 t5 Vehicular noise suppression ................................ 527
T-section filter .................................................... 64 Velocity modulation ............................................ 81
Tube, vacuum .................................................... 67 Vertical antenna ............................................... .430
Tube, VHF design ............................................ 232 Vertical directivity ............................................. .411
Tube, water cooled (4W-300B) ........................ 620 VFO, construction .............................................. 676
Tubular transmission line ................................... .422 VFO, high-stability ............................................ 604
Tuned circuit, coaxial ................ ........................ 232 VHF Amplifier .................................................... 214
Tuned circuit, 1-F ................................................ 218 Antennas ............................................... .477
Tuned circuit, r.f amplifier ................................ 1 21 Antenna polarization ............................. .479
Tuned circuit Q .................................................. 216 Antenna relay ....................................... .478
Tuned circuits, selectivity .................................. 34 1 Bands, characteristics ................................ 14
Tuner, antenna ................................................. .456 Corner reflector antenna ......................... .485
Tuning, bandspead .......................................... 217 Coupling, interstage ................................ 665
Tuning indicators ................................................ 226 Definition of ........................................... .477
Tuning, inductive ................................................ 617 Discone antenna-ground-plane antenna 481
Tuning, super-imposition ..................................553 Handie-talkie .......................................... 547
Turnstile antenna ........................................... .480 Helical antenna - Horn antenna ... .483, 486
TVJ filters .................................................. 373, 378 Multi-element antenna ........................... .488
TVI-proof enclosures - openings .......... 724, 725 Neutralization capacitor .......................... 672
TVJ suppression ................................................ 375 Nondirectional antenna ......................... .48 2
TVJ-type filter .................................................... 64 Porosities ................................................ 366
Tweeter speaker ................................................ 1 39 Power Joss ................................................ 663
Twin lamp ......................................................... .735 Radiation angle - radiation pattern ... .478
Two-band Marconi antenna ............................. .438 Rhombic antenna ..................................... .486
Screen antenna ....................................... .491
u Self-neutralization .................................. 664
Ultra-linear amplifier ............................. 142, 146 Sleeve antenna ....................................... .480
Unidirectional antenna ...................................... 504 Transceiver .................................... 552, 578
Uni-potential cathode ....................................... .70 Transmission line ................................... .478
Unity coupling .................................................. 271 Transmitter-receiver .................................. 597
Unloaded Q ........................................................57 Turnstile antenna ................................. .480
Wavelength table ................................... .479
v Vibrator power supply ...................................... 58 8
Vacuum capacitor .............................................. 360 Vibrator, split-reed ............................................ 698
Vacuum tube: ...................................................... 67 Video amplifier ........................................ 112, 128
Amplification ..................................... .73, 74 Volt, def. of ........................................................ 22
Beam power ............................................. .7 8 Voltage - Amplifier ........................................ 11 0
Cathode ray .............................................. 84 Avalanche ................................................ 697
Classes- classification .................... 107, 87 Break ...................................................... 203
Conductance .............................................. 73 Breakdown ................................................ 3 2
Constant-current curve ............................ 1 27 Decay ........................................................ 40
Diode ........................................................?! Divider ................................................ 26, 52
Equivalent noise resistance ...................... 123 Divider, phase inverter ............................ 11 7
Foreign .................................................... 89 Drop, summation ........................................ 28
Gas .......................................................... 87 Gradient .................................................. 39
Input loading .......................................... 122 Incident .................................................. 732
Klystron .................................................... 81 Injection .................................................. 213
Load line .................................................. 74 Initial condition ...................................... 203
Magic eye ................................................ 88 Instantaneous ........................................... .44
Magnetron ................................................ 83 Inverse .................................................... 693
Mixer ........................................................ 79 Measurement ................................. .721, 723
Operation .................................................. 75 Multiplier power supply ............................ 695
Parameters .............................................. 106 Noise ...................................................... 121
Pentode .................................................... 77 Output .................................................... 685
Plate resistance ................................. .73, 74 '' Reflected ................................................ 732
Polarity reversal ....................................... .76 Regulation ...................................... 686, 687
Remote cutoff ........................................... .78 Regulator tube .................................. 87, 709
797
Voltage - Resonant .......................................... 54 Wave-shaping circuits ...................................... 1 85
'' Ripple ...................................................... 686 Weston cell ........................................................ 24
Summation .............................................. 197 Wheatstone bridge ............................................ 728
Synchronizing .......................................... 141 Wheel static ...................................................... 528
Threshold ................................................ 696 Wien-bridge oscillator ............................ 157, 1 91
Voltmeter .......................................................... 722 Williamson amplifier ........................................ 141
Voltmeter, A-C V-T ........................................... .724 Wire, litz ............................................................ 54
Voltmeter, diode ............................................. .724 Wiring hints ...................................................... 531
Voltmeter, vacuum tube .............................. 130, 724 Wiring technique, audio .................................... 142
Volt-ohmmeters ................................................. .722 Workshop practice - layout ................. .720, 729
Volume compression .......................................... 648 W8JK antenna ................................................. .473
WWV transmissions ............................................ 729
w
Wagner ground ............................................... .729 X
Water cooled tube (4W-300B) ........................ 620
X-array antenna ............................................. .469
Watt, del, of ...................................................... 29
Wave - Carrier ................................................ 207
Ground ................................................... .4 14
y
Harmonic- nonsinusoidal ........................ 58 Yogi, adjustment ............................................... 509
Pattern, oscilloscope ................................ 148 Y, (admittance, del. of) .................................... 52
Peaked - sawtooth ................................ 59 Yogi antenna - feed systems ............... .494, 498
Sky - space ......................................... .4 14 Yogi antenna, VHF ........................................... .488
Square - transient .................................. 58 Yogi, construction .............................................. 506
Surface ................................................... .4 14 Yoke match ..................................................... .498
Waveform ..................................................59, 143
Waveform, speech ............................ 285, 301, 648 z
Zeppelin antenna ........................................... .427
Wavelength, del. of ......................................... .405
Wavelength table, VHF ..................................... .479 Zero-bias modulator ......................................... 662
$5.00
hardbound
StlrtiS IIIII
SI'IP~ts1.1111 1111IISIII II!I'IL
11llllSIII llltlL
IN TWO VOLUMES
This set of conversion data has become standard for most
commonly used items of surplus electronic equipment. All
conversions shown are practical and yield a useful item of
equipment; all have been proven by testing an several units.
VOLUME I VOLUME II
BC-221 Frequency Meter ARC-5 and BC-454 Receivers
BC-342 Receiver for 28 Me.
ARC-5 and BC-457 Tx for
BC-348 Receiver
22-Mc. Mobile
BC-312 Receiver
ART-13 and A TC Xmiller
BC-412 Oscilloscope as a
Surplus Beam Rotating
test scope or as a tele-
Mechanisms
vision receiver.
Selenium~Rect. Power Units
BC-645 420 . Me. Transmit
ter I Receiver Hi-Fi Tuner from BC-946B
Receiver
BC-453A Series Receivers
ARC-5 v.h.f Transmitters
BC-457A Series Tran>mitters
G0-9 and TBW Xmitters
SCR-522 144-Mc. Transmit
9-W Amplifier from AM-26
ter /Receiver
TA-12B & TA-12C Xmitters
TBY Transceiver with Xtal
Control AVT-112A Aircraft Xmitter
PE-103A Dynamotor BC-375 & BC-191 Xmitters
BC-1068A V-hf Receiver Model LM Freq. Meter
Electronics Surplus Index Primary Power Requirements
Chart
Cross Index of VT-Number
tubes ARB Recr. Diagram Only